SP21

SUMltiARIES OF INDIAN STANDARDS FOR BUILDING MATERIALS
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
SUMMARIES OF INDIAN STANDARDS FOR BUILDING MATERIALS
INDIAN
MANAK
STANDARDS
9 BAHADUR
INSTITUTION
SHAH ZAFAR MARC
BHAVAN,,
NEW DELHI 110002
SP : 21 (S&T)-1983
FIRST PUBLISHED MARCH 1985 @ INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION
UDC 691: 006*3/4
PRICE Rs%XAKI
53 A-
PRINTED IN 1NDlA AT MANIPAL POWER PRESS, MANIPAL AND PUBLISHED BY INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION, NEW DELHI
110002
SPECIAL COMMITTEE FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY PROJECTS (SCIP) Chairman DRH. C. VISVESVARAYA
Cement Research Institute of India, New Delhi Members Shri A. K. Banerjee Shri J. D. Chaturvedi Director Shri Gurnam Singh Shri U. R. Kurlekar Dr M. Ramaiah Shri G. S. Rao Shri.A. Chakraborty (Alternate) Shri T. S. Ratnam Shri V. Rao Aiyagari Shri Cl. Raman (Member Secretary) Representing Metallurgical and Engineering Consultants India Limited, Ranchi Planning Commission, Ministry of Planning, New Delhi Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee Ministry of Food & Civil Supplies (Finance Division), New Delhi Ministry of Food and Civil Supplies, New Delhi Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR), Madras Central Public Works Department, CDO, New Delhi Ministry of Finance, Bureau of Public Enterprises, New Delhi Department of Science and Technology, New Delhi Indian Standards Institution, New Delhi
FOREWORD
Users of various civil engineering codes have been feeling the need for explanatory handbooks and other compilations based on Indian Standards. The need has been further emphasized in view of the publication of the National Building Code of India in 1970 and its implementation. The Expert Group set up in 1972 by the Department of Science and Technology, Government of India carried out in-depth studies in various areas of civil engineering and construction practices. During the preparation of the Fifth Five Year Plan in 1975, the Group was assigned the task of producing a Science and Technology plan for research, development and extension work in the sector of housing and construction technology. One of the items of this plan was the production of design handbooks, explanatory handbooks and design aids based on the National Building Code and various Indian Standards and other activities in the promotion of the National Building Code. The Expert Group gave high priority to this item and on the recommendation of the Department of Science and Technology, the Planning Commission approved the following two projects which were assigned to the Indian Standards Institution: a) Development programme on Code implementation for building and civil engineering construction; and b) Typification for industrial buildings. A Special Committee for Implementation of Science and Technology Projects (SCIP) consisting of experts connected with different aspects. was set up in 1974 to advise the IS1 Directorate General in identification and for guiding the development of the work. Under the first programme, the Committee has so far identified subjects for several explanatory handbooks/compilations covering appropriate Indian Standards/Codes/Specifications which include the following: Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS : 456-1978 (SP : 16-1980)* Explanatory Handbook on Masonry Code (SP : 20-1981)* Explanatory Handbook on Codes of Earthquake Engineering (IS : 18931975 and IS : 4326-1976) (SP : 22-1982)* Explanatory Handbook on Indian Standard Codes of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete (IS : 456-1978) (SP : 24-1983)* Handbook on Concrete Mixes (SP : 23-1982)* Handbook on Causes and Prevention of Cracks in Buildings (SP : 25-1984)* Summaries of Indian Standards for Building Materials (SP : 21-1983)* Concrete Reinforcement and Detailing? Water Supply and Drainage with Special Emphasis on Plumbing? Functional Requirements of Industrial Buildings (Lighting and Ventilation)t Timber Engineering-t Functional Requirements of Industrial Buildings Foundation of Buildings Steel Code (IS : 800) Building Construction Practices Bulk Storage Structures in Steel Formwork Fire Safety Construction Safety Practices Tall Buildings Inspection of Different Items of Building Work Loading Code Prefabrication
*Printed. tUnder print.
vii
One of the compilations suggested is the Summaries of Indian Standards for Building Materials referred in the National Building Code of India 1970. The list of specifications referred to in Part V of the code was carefully examined and after scrutiny by a Panel it was decided to summarise all of them except standards relating to Paints and other specifications not of direct concern to buildings. Also any specifications revised and new specifications prepared till December 1982 have been taken into account in this summary. The objective of the summary is to help the practising engineer/architect/contractor or other professionals to have guidance regarding availability of Indian Standards on various materials/products and to give a brief summary of the contents to indicate such aspects as quality requirements, dimensions, range of properties, limitations on use, etc. This, it is hoped, would assist the professional engineer/architect, etc to choose the material for the purpose of their design and estimation. For actual purchase of the material/product, latest version of the Indian Standard has to be consulted and this summary shall not be used for such purposes. The general format of the summaries is, scope; range of sizes; important requirements regarding physical, mechanical and other properties; reference to. appropriate methods of testing and other related material specifications. The summary shall be considered informative and shall not form part of contract or agreement. The summary is arranged as per groups of materials/products listed in Part V Building Materials of the National Building Code of India 1983. The summary is based dn the draft prepared by Shri 0. Muthachen, Retired Engineer-in-Chief, Central Public Works Department (Government of India). Some of the products covered by the summaries bear the IS1 Certification Mark, the details of which can be obtained from the IS1 Headquarters and its regional/branch offices.
Vlll
...
CONTENTS
Page SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 CEMENT AND CONCRETE POZZOLANAS BUILDING LIMES STONES CL,AY PRODUCTS FOR BUILDINGS GYPSUM BUILDING MATERIALS TIMBER BITUMEN AND TAR PRODUCTS FLOOR COVERINGS AND OTHER FINISHES WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING MATERIALS SANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER FITTINGS BUILDERS HARDWARE WOOD PRODUCTS DOORS AND WINDOWS CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT STEEL. LIGHT METALS AND THEIR 4LLOYS STRUCTURAL SHAPES WELDING ELECTRODES AND WIRES THREADED FASTENERS AND RIVETS WIRE ROPES AND WIRE PRODUCTS GLASS FILLERS, STOPPERS AND PUTTIES THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS PLASTICS CONDUCTORS AND CABLES WIRING ACCESSORIES GENERAL 1-39 41-44 45-54 55-62 63-77 79-86 87-98 997105 107-124 125-133 135-238 239-267 269-288 289-309 31 l-323 325-345 347-352 353-380 381-389 391-426 427-430 431-435 437-442 443-452 453-459 46 l-468 469-491 493-496
ix
SECTION
CEMENT AND CONCRETE
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
AGGREGATES IS : 383-1970
IS : 650-1966
Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete (second
revision)
3 5
Standard sand for testingof cement (first revision)
CEMENT IS : 269-1976 IS : 455-1976 IS : 1489-1976 IS : 3466-1967 IS: 6452-1972 IS : 6909-1973 IS: 8041-1978 IS : 8042-1978 IS : 8043-1978 IS : 8112-1976 BLOCKS, PRECAST Ordinary and low heat Portland cement (third revision) Portland slag cement (third revision) Portland-pozzolana cement (second revision) Masonry cement yirst revision) High alumina cement for structural use Supersulphated cement Rapid hardening Portland cement (first revision) White Portland cement (first revision) Hydrophobic Portland cement @rst revision) High strength ordinary Portland cement CONCRETE Concrete masonry units: Part I Hollow and solid concrete blocks
(second revision)
6 7 8 9 10 10 11 12 12 13
IS : 2185 (Part I)-1979 IS: IS IS: IS: IS: IS: IS: IS: IS 3590-1966 : 4996-1968 5482-1969 5751-1969 5758-1970 5820-1970 6072-1971 6073-1971 : 6523-1972 CEMENT
14 15 16 17 18 18 20 21 22 23
Load bearing lightweight concrete blocks Reinforced concrete fence posts Autoclaved cellular concrete blocks Precast concrete coping blocks Precast concrete kerbs Precast concrete cable covers. Autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete wall slabs Autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete floor and roof slabs Precast reinforced concrete door and window frames PRODUCTS Unreinforced corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets (second revision) Asbestos cement pressure pipes (second revision) Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings: Part I Pipes and pipe fittings (first revision) Part II Gutters and gutter fittings (first revision) Part 111Roofing fittings (first revision) Asbestos cement flat sheets Asbestos cement building boards Non-pressure asbestos cement pipes and fittings for sewerage and drainage
ASBESTOS IS:459-1970 IS : 1592-1980 IS: 1626
24 25
(Part I) - 1980 (Part II) - 1980 (Part III) - 198 1 IS: 2096-1966 IS : 2098-1964 IS: 6908-1975
26 28 29 30 30 31
CONCRETEPIPES IS IS IS IS IS IS : : : : : : 458-1971 784-1978 1916-1963 4350-1967 7319-1974 7322-1974 Concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement) (second revision) Prestressed concrete pipes (including fittings) (first revision) Steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes Concrete porous pipes for under drainage Perforated concrete pipes Specials for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes 2 32 34 35 36 37 38
SP : 21-1983 SUMMARY OF
IS : 383-1970 COARSE AND FINE AGGREGATES SOURCES FOR CONCRETE (Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for aggregates, crushed or uncrushed, derived from natural sources for use in the production of structural concrete including mass concrete works. 2. Requirements
FROM NATURAL
percent for concrete for wearing surfaces (such as runways and roads) and 45 percent for other concrete. 2.4 Aggregate impact value (alternative to 2.3) shall not exceed 30 percent by weight for concrete for wearing surface and 45 percent by weight for other concrete. 2.5 Aggregate abrasion value shall not exceed 30 percent for concrete for wearing surfaces and 50 percent for other concrete. 2.6 Soundness (,fbr Concrete Liable to be E.~posed ta Frost Action) - Coarse and fine aggregates shall pass the prescribed 3. test.
2.1 Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring stones, gravel and sand, and shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clear and free from veins, adherent coating and injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces and deleterious substances. 2.2 Deleterious Muterials - Aggregates shall not contain in excess of the limits given in Table 1 of the) standurd, harmful materials, such as pyrites, laminated material, alkali, seashells, and organic impurities and.those which may attack the reinforcement. Aggregates shall not be chemically reactive with alkalis of cement, 2.3 Aggregate IS Sieve Designation 80 mm 63 mm 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm 10 mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm
IS Sieve Designation ( 80 mm 63 mm 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm 10 mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm
Size and Grading

and Graded CoLlrse
3.1 Single-Sized Aggregates - shall
crushing
value shall not exceed 30

Percentage
be supplied given in the following tdble:

Aggregate
in nominal
sizes
Passing for Single-Sized h 20 mm
of Nominal Size
63 mm
40 mm
16 mm 100 85-100 O-30 o-5 -
12.5 mm IO0 85-100 o-45 O-IO -
10 mm I% 85-100 O-20 o-5
100 85-100 o- 30 o-5 o-5 -
100 85-100 O-20 o-5 -
S:?OO -O-20 o-5 -
Percemage 40 mm
Passing for Graded Aggregate Hk
of Nominal Size 16 mm 12.5 mm \
100 95-100 30-70
20 mm 100 95-100
IO-35 o-5 -
25 -55 O-10 -
100 90-100 30-70 O-IO -
100 90-100 40-85 O-10 -
SP : 21-1983 3.2 Coarse Aggregates ,for Mass Concrete be in sizes specified in the following table:
Class and Size IS Sieve Designation -
shall
3.4 All-in-Aggregates - When available, shall be according to the following table: IS Sieve Designation
r
grading
Percentage Passing 90-100 O-10 90- 100
Percentage Passing ,for All-inAggregate of Nominal Size 40 mm -?zL-
Very large, 160 -80 mm Large, 80-40 mm Medium, 40-20 mm Small, 20-4.75 mm
160 mm 80 mm 80 mm 40 mm 40 mm 20 mm 20 mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm
80 mm 40 mm 20 mm 4.75 mm 600 micron 150 micron
100 95-100 45-75 25-45 8-30 O-6
100 95-100 30-50 IO-35 O-6
O-10 90-100 O-10 90- 100 O-IO o-2
3.3 Fine Aggregates - Grading in Zones I to IV shall be within the following limits: IS Sieve Designation
Percentage rp-p, Grading Zone I Grading Zone II Passing for Grading Grading Zone Ill Zone IV
IO mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm 1.18 mm 600 micron

300 micron
100 90-100 60-95 30-70 15-34 5-20 O-IO -
100 90-100 75-100 55-90 35-59 8-30 O-IO
1oq 90-100 85-100 75-100 60-79 12-40 O-10
100 95-100 95-100 90-100 80-100 15-50 O-15
150 micron
Note 1 - For concrete: Part 1 Part II Part 111 Part IV Part V Part VI Part VII Part VIII Note 2 -
methods
of tests, refer to IS
-. -.-__: 2386 (Part I)-1963 to IS : 2386 (Part VIII)-1963 Methods of test for aggregates
for
Particle size and shape Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities Specific gravity, density, voids, absorption and bulking Mechanical properties Soundness Measuring mortar making properties of fine aggregate Alkali aggregate reactivity Petrographic examination and physical characteristics of aggregates for concrete are given in Appendix C of the standard.
Description
For detailed information, refer to IS : 383-1970 sources for concrete (second revision).
Specification
for coarse and fine aggregates
from
naturaC
IS : 650-1966 STANDARD SAND FOR TESTING OF CEMENT (First Revision)

With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements used in testing of cement. 2. Requirements light grey or whitish for Indian Standard sand No. 1) Retained on 90-micron IS Sieve . Particle size greater than 1 mm Particle size smaller than 1 mm and greater than 500 microns Particle size below microns 500 100 percent 33.33 percent 33.33 percent
2.1 Sand shall be of quartz, variety. 2.2
Sand shall be free from silt.
2.3 Sand grains shall be angular, the shape of grains approximating to spherical form, and elongated and flattened g&ins being present only in negligible quantities. 2.4 Grading Passing through IS Sieve 2-mm 100 percent
33.33 percent
2.5 Shall be free from organic impurities. Loss of weight on extraction with hot hydrochloric acid (specific gravity 1.16) shall not exceed 0.25 percent. 3. Delivery - Shall be delivered metal containers. in 50 kg sealed
Note - The standard sand shall be obtained from Ennore, Tamil Nadu; particle size greater than 1 mm of the standard sand may also be obtained from Mudaliarkuppam, Tamil Nadu. Supplies may be procured from Concrete and Soil Research Laboratory, Chepauk, Madras who shall furnish a certificate that the sand conforms to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 650-1966 Specification for standard sandfor revision).
testing of cement (first
IS : 269-1976 ORDINARY
AND LOW HEAT PORTLAND
CEMENT
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Manufacture, cal requirements of: and chemical and physi3.2 Soundr~ss - Expansion (unaerated) shall be not more than 10 mm by Le Chatelier method; if it fails, expansion of aerdted sample shall be not more than 5 mm. Expansion by autoclave test shall be not more than 0.8 tiercent. 3.3 Setrir1!: TiUW a) Ordinary cement - Initial, not less than 30 minutes. and final, not more than 10 hours. b) Low heat cement - Initial, not less than 60 minutes, and final. not more than 10 hours.
a) ordinary Portland cement for general use, b) low heat Portland cement (where low heat of hydration is required as in mass concrete for dams). 2. 2.1 Chemical Requirements
Or,$tlu,;~ Portlud
Cement -SW
Table I .
TABLE
SL
CHEMICAL
REQUIREMENTS
FOR ORDINARY
PORTLAND
CEMENT
REQWREMENI
CHARACTERISTIC
No.
i)
ii) iii) iv) v)
Ratio of percentage of lime to percentages of sihca, alumina and iron oxide Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide Insoluble residue, percent by mass Magnesia, percent by mass Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO,), percent by mass Total loss on ignition
Not greater than
I .02 and not less than 0.66
vi)
Not less than 0.66 Not more than 2 percent Not more than 6 percent Not more than 2.75 and 3.0 when tticalcium aluminate percent by mass is 7 or less and greater than 7 respectively Not more than 5 percent
2.2 Low heat Portland cement shall comply with the requirements specified at Sl No. (ii) to.(vi) of Table 1 and the following: The percentage of lime, after deduction of that necessary to combine with the sulphuric anhydride percent, shall be: Not more than 2.4 (SiO*) + 1.2 (Al,O,J) +0.65 (Fe,O,), and Not less than 1.9 (Al,O,) + 0.65 (Fe,O,). 3. Physical Requirements (SiO,) + 1.2
3.4 Cornprrssivr Strength - Of mortar cubes (1 cement : 3 standard sand) shall not be less than:
Curing Time
(hours) a)72 +I bj 168 f 2 c) 672 + 4
Or&ilwr\
(kgficm;) 160 220 -
LOWHeat
(kgf/cm) 100 160 350
3.5 Heat @Hydrurion - for low heat cement, shall not be more than 65 Cal/g for 7 days, and 75 Cal/g for 28 days.
3.1
Fineness
a) Specific surface for ordinary cement, not less than 2 250 cm2/g; and b) Specific surface for low heat cement, not less than 3 200 cm2!g.
4.
Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tolerance + 2.5 percent per bag and ?I 0.5 percent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
Note-For chemical
methods of tests, refer to IS analysis of hydraulic cement.
: 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and IS : 4032-1968 Method of
For detailed infgrmation,

(third revision).
_-refer to IS : 269-1976 Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 455-1976 PORTLAND SLAG CEMENT (Third Revision)

1. Scope - Manufacture and chemical and physical requirements for Portland slag cement. 2. Termindogy -Par-tltrtul Slag Cettwttt - An intimately inter ground mixture of Portland cement clinker and granulated slag with addition of gypsum and permissible additives or a blend of Portland cement and finely ground granulated slag. 3. Chemical Requirements Pawnt, hkix 8.0 3.0 1.5 4.0 2.5 2 2.50 cm% 4.2 Soundness - Expansion (unaerated) by Le Chatelier method shall be not more than 10 mm; if it fails, expansion of aerated sample shall be not more than 5 mm. Expansion by autoclave test shall be not more than 0.8 percent. 4.3 Setting Titrtr - Initial, not less than 30 min, and final ) not more than 600 mm. 4.4 Catnpressive Strength - Of mortar cube (1 cement : 3 standard sand). shall not be less than: a) 15.69MN/m~(160kgf/cm2)at 72 t I hours; and b) 2 1.57 MN/m (220 kgf/cm?)at 168 + 2 hours. 5.
+
Magnesium oxide (MgO) Sulphur trioxide (SOS) Sulphide sulphur (S) Loss on ignition insoluble residue 4. 4.1 Physical Requirements Fitzetw.~s Specific surface,
Delivery -
Packed in bags of 50 kg net. TOlemIlCe
2.5 percent per bag and -t 0.5 percent per wagon load
of 20 to 25 tonnes.
not less than

cement, and IS
Nole-For chemical --
methods of tests, refel to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic

analysis of hydraulic cement.
: 4032-1968 Method of
For detailed inforkhion,
refer to IS : 4.55-1976 Specification for Portland slag cement (third revision).
IS : 1489- 1976 PORTLAND-POZZOLANA (Second Revision)

1. Scope - Manufacture and physical and chemical requirements of Portland-pozzolana cement. 2. Raw Material 4.
CEMENT
Physical Requirements
-
4.1 Firzowss 3 000 cm/g.
Specific surface shall not be less than
2.1 Pozzolana for blendmg with Portland cement, shall conform to the following: a) Firwrress - Speclfc surface not less than 3 200 cmig, and b) Lirnc> ~crcti~~ity - Compressive strength of mortar cubes shall be not less than 50 kgf/cm?.
Note For method5 of tests, refer to IS
4.2 S~~urzcl~~=~ - Expansion (unaerdted) shall be not more than 10 mm by Le Chatelier method; if it faiis, expansion of aerated sample shall be not more than 5 mm. Expansion by autoclave test shall be not more than 0.8 percent. 4.3 Setting Tim - Initial, not less than 30 minutes and final, not more than 10 hours. 4.4 Cornpwssi\~r Strength - Of mortar cube (1 cement : 3 standard sand), shall not be less than: a) 220 kgf/cm2 at 168 IL 2 hours; and b) 310 kgf/cmZ at 672 f 4 hours. 4.5
Drying Shrinkqr -
: 1727-1967*.
2.2 Pozzolana, to be interground with cement clinker, shall satisfy lime reactivity requirements of 2.1(b). 2.3 Par-tlmd Cemrrlt Clirlkc~rlPostlarId Shall conform to IS : 269-1976t.
Cement -
Not more than 0.15 percent.
3. Chemical Requirements - Shall comply with pozzolanicity test of IS : 4032-1968$ as also Table 1.
5. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tolerance +2.5 percent per bag and +0.5 percent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
TABLE
SL No O
CHEMICAL
REQUIREMENTS
OF PORTLAND-POZZOLANA
CEMENT
CHARACTERISI IC
REQUIREMENT
Ii). iii)
LOSS on ignition, percent, MUX Magnesia CMgO), percent by mass, Max Insoluble ma&a\, percent, MUX
X+
5.0 6.0 2.0 (loo100
.I)
iv)
Sulphuwz anhydride
(SO,), percent by mass
Where x is the declared percentage of pozzolana in the given Portland-pozzolana cement Not more than 2.75 and 3.0 when tricalcium aluminate, percent by mass is 7 or less and greater than 7 respectively
*Methods of test for pozzolanic materials Cfirsr revision). iSpecification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement (third revision). $Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
For detailed information,

revision).
refer to IS : 1489-1976
Specification for Portland-pozzolana
cement (second
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3466-1967 MASONRY CEMENT (First Revision )

1. Scope -Requirements for masonry cement [a product obtained by intergrinding a mixture of Portland cement clinker with inert materials (non-pozzolanic), such as limestone, conglomerates and dolomite; and gypsum and an air entrai&g plasticizer] used in mortars for masonry for general purposes. Not for use in structural concrete, for flooring and foundation work or for reinforced and prestressed concrete works. 2. Physical Reqluirements -See Table 1. 3. Non-staining to Limestone (if Desired by Purchaser) - Shall contain not more than 0.03 percent of water soluble alkali. 4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tolerante k2.5 percent per bag and +_O.S percent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
TABLE SL No i)
PHYSICAL
REQUIREMENTS REQUIREMENT
CHARACTERISTIC
Fineness: Residue on 45-micron Setting time (by Vicat apparatus) a) Initial,

Mitt
IS Sieve, MUX, percent (by wet sieving)
15
ii)
90 min
b) Final, Mux iii) Soundness: a) Le Chatelier expansion, Max

b) Autoclave
24 hours
10 mm 1 percent
expansion, Max
iv)
Compressive strength: average compressive strength of not less than 3 mortat cubes of 50 mm size, composed of 1 part masonry cement and 3 parts standard sand by volume, Min
7 days
28 days Air content: air content of mortar composed of 1 part masonry cement and 3 parts standard sand by volume (determined gravimettically), Min vi) Water retention: flow after suction of mortar composed standard sand by volume, Min of 1 part of masonry cement and 3 parts
25 kgflcml 50 kgf/cm* 12 percent
70 percent of original how
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS
: 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic
cement.
refer to IS : 3466-1967 Specification for masonry cement (first revision).
IS : 6452-1972 HIGH ALUMINA CEMENT FOR STRUCTURAL USE

(With Amendment No. 1)
1. Scope - Manufacture of high alumina cement (HAC) and specific requirements for its use as a SttWtUrdl building material in the colder regions of our country (continuously 18C and below). Its use as a refractory cement is not covered.
Note -- HAC mainly a refractory cement, but in some cold
regions it may find use as a structural materiai due to high early strength development. Fo!iowing restrictions shal! be followed for its use in concrete: a) Shall not be uied in locat:ons where ambient temperature exceeds 18C b) Accelerators lihe calcrum chloride shall not be used. c) Steam curing or elevated temperature of curing shall be avoided. d) Shall not be mixed with other types of cement.
2.2
Fineness -
Specific surface not less than 2 250
cm?/g.
2.3 2.4
Snundness -
Expansion
not more than 5 mm.
Setting Time - Initial not less than 30 minutes and final not more than 10 hours.
2.5
Cornpressi\*eStrength qjCetnent Mortar Cubes 1.3 (1 celnent : 3 StcrntkrrdSand) by Weight:

a) At 24 hours + 30 minutes, not less than 300 kg /cm2 b) At 72 +_ 1 hours, not less than 350 kg/cm2
2. 2.1
Requirements
Not less than
Total alumina content (A1,0,) 32 percent. -_-Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. ~___ For
Delivery - Packed in new bags, 50 kg per bag net. Tolerance IL2.5 percent per bag and + 0.5 percent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
3.
: 4031-1968
Methods
of physical tests for hydraulic
cement, and IS
: 4032-1968
Method
of
detailed information,
______-_ refer to IS : 6452-1972 Specification for high alumina cement for structural use.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6909-1973 SUPERSULPHATED
1. Scope - Requirements for composition, manufacture and testing of supersulphated cement (abbreviation SSC).
Note - SSC compares favourably with ordinary Portland cement in strength and other physical properties, but its heat of hydration will be lower (about 60 Cal/g at 7 days and 70 Cal/g at 28 days). Chemically resistant to aggressive conditions encountered in constructlon industry, and to attack of sulphates. Useful for marine v+orks, mass concrete jobs to resist attack by aggressive waters, reinforced concrete pipes in ground waters, concrete construction in sulphate bearing soils, chemical works exposed to high concentration of sulphates or weak solutions of mineral acids, underslde of bridges over railways and concrete sewers carrying industrial eftluents. Recommended for use in tropical conditions where prevailing temperature is below 40C.
CEMENT
2.
Chemical Requirements
Insoluble residue Magnesium oxide Sulphuric anhydride Sulphide sulphur 4 percent, 10 percent, 6 percent, 1.5 percent,
MU MUX Min MU
3. Physical Requirements 3.1 Finenrss - Specific surface

4 000 cm*/g. 3.2 3.3 10
not
less
than
Soundness Setting Time -
Expansion
not more than 5 mm.
Initial, not less than 30 minutes,
SP : 21-1983
and tinal not more than 10 hours. 3.4

I:3 (I Compressive SSC Strength of Cement Mortar Cubes
: 3 Stundard
Sund)
17~ Weight:
d) Cement shall show at 168 hours and 672 hours a progressive increase in strength from the strength at 71 hours.
a) 72 + 1 hours, not less than 150 kgf/cm2 b) 168 I!I 2hnurs. c) 672 t 4 hours, --______ ----__
Methods of physical tests for hydraulic
not less than 220 kgficm

not less
than 300 kgficm
4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tolerance +2.5 percent per bag and +0.5 percent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes. _-cement, and IS : 4032-1968 __-_ Mefhod oi
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4031-1968 chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. ___-
For detailed information, -
_____ _____~_.____ _--__--___...-. refer to IS : 6909-1973 Specification for supersulphated cement.
_.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8041-1978 RAPID HARDENING PORTLAND (First Revision)

1. Scope - Manufacture and chemical and physical requirements of rapid hardening Portland cement.
Note - The term rapid-hardening should not be confused with quick-setting. Cement marketed as superfine Portland cement is also covered by f/lc slctr~tktrtl.
CEMENT
3.3
1:3 (I
Compressive Cement
Strengflt
oj Cerwnt Sand) h)
MortarWeight:
Cubes
: 3 Srattdard
a) 24 hours + 30 minutes b) 72 + I hours
Not less than IS.69 N/mm Not less than 26.97 N/mm2
2. Chemical Requirements - shall be as laid down in IS : 269- 1976* for ordinary Portland cement. 3. Physical Requirements surface shall be not less
Such as Soundness and Set-
c) Cement shall show a progressive increase in strength from the strength at 24 hours. 4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tolerance k2.5 percent per bag and A10.5 percent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
3.1 Fineness -Specified than 3 250 cm/g. 3.2

The Requirements, ring Time
shall be laid down in IS : 269-1976* for ordinary Portland cement.
*Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement (rhi~tl

rfvisim ).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS chemtcal analysis of hydraulic cement.
: 4031-1968
Methods
of physical tests for hydraulic
cement, and IS : 4032-1968
Method
of

revision).
refer to IS : 8041-1978 Specification for rapid hardening Portland cement (first
IS : 8042-1978 WHITE PORTLAND CEMENT (First Revision)

1. Scope - Manufacture and chemical and physical requirements of white Portland cement.
Note - White Portland cement is generally used for architectural and decorative purposes and is generally meant for nonstructural use. It is made from raw materials containing very little iron oxide and magnesium oxide.
3.
2. Chemical Requirements - Shall be as laid down for ordinary Portland cement in IS : 269-1976*, except that iron oxide (Fe,O:c) shall not be more than 1 percent. and that the requirement of total 10% on ignition is not applicable. ____.--~*Specificationfor r-Wisio,I ) ____ -_--__ordinary and low heat
3.1 Shall be as laid down for ordinary Portland cement in IS : 269-1976*, except that compressive and transverse strength shall not be less than 90 percent of those specified for ordinary Portland cement. The cement shall show a progressive increase in strength from the strength at 72 hours. 3.2 D~~Iw of Whiteness - The reflectance of neat cement ring prepared and tested shall not be less than 70 percent. 4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tolerante rt2.5 percent per bag and 10.5 percent per wagon, load of 20 to 25 tonnes. -- ___ __--.________
and IS :,4032-1968 Method of
Portland cement Vhirtl
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydrauliccement, chemical analysis of hydraulic cement and Appendix A of rhe standard.
_______
refer to IS : 8042-1978 Specification for white Portland cement (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8043-1978 HYDROPHOBIC PORTLAND CEMENT (First Revision )

1. Scope - Manufacture and physical and chemical requirements of hydrophobic Portland cement.
Note - Hydrophobic cement deteriorates very little during prolonged storage under unfavourable conditions. This cement is obtained by intergrinding ordinary Portland cement clinker with certain hydrophobic agents which will impart to the cement a water repelling property, due to formation of a water repellent film around each particle of cement. The film is broken during mixing of concrete by wet attrition such as in a concrete mixer.
3.3 Compwssivc Strength ofCement Mortar Cuhcs 1.3 (1 Cement : 3 Standard Sand) by Muss: a) 72+1 hours Not less than 15.69 N/mm* b) 168+2 hours Not less than 21.57 N/mm2 c) 672+4 hours Not less than 30.40 N/mm* The cement shall show a progressive strength from the strength at 72 hours. 3.4 increase
in
2. Chemical Requirements - Shall be as laid downinls : 269-1976* for ordinary Portland cement. 3. Physical Requirements
Hydrq~hohicit)
a) Cement shall not show loss on ignition more than 30 percent of the value for the ordinary Portland cement. b) Cement shall float on the water for a period of not less than 24 hours.
3.1
Fineness - Specific surface shall not be less than 3 500 cmlig. 3.2 The Requirements, Such as Soundness and Serting Time - shall be as laid down in IS : 269-1976* for ordinary Portland cement.
*Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement (thirtl
revisim ).
4. Deliverv - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tolerante + 2.5 percent per bag and + 0.5 percent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
cement, and 1S
Note-For methods of tests, refer to LS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic chemical analysis of hydraulic cement and Appendix A of rhe standard.
: 4032-1968
Method
of

revision).
refer to IS : 8043-1978 Specification for hydrophobic
Portland cement (first
12
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8 112- 1976 HIGH STRENGTH ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT
1. Scope - Manufacture, and chemical and physical requirements of high strength ordinary Portland cement.
Note - High strength ordinary Portland cement meets the need of certain specialised works, such as prestressed concrete, and certain items of precast concrete, where cement having compressive strength much higher than the minimum specified in IS : 269-1976*. High strength ordinary Portland cement is used by Indian Railways for the manufacture of prestreased concrete sleepers and relevant requlrementa which are also covered in this standard.
3.
Physical
Requirements
-Specific
3.1 Fimwss 3 500 cm2/g. 3.2
surface
not
less
than
So~1r1r1c.s.s
3.2.1 Expansion (unaerated) shall be not more than 10 mm by Le Chatelier method; if it fails, expansion of aerated sample shall be not more than 5 mm. 3.2.2 Unaerated cement having magnesia content not more than 3 percent shall be tested by autoclave test and shall not have expansion more than 0.8 percent. 3.3 Scttirtg Time - Initial not less than 30 minutes, and final not more than 10 hours. 3.4
2.
Chemical
1
Requirements
- See Table 1. ___._____
TABLE
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH STRENGTH PORTLAND CEMENT

CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT
SL No.
i) Ratio of percentage to percentages of alumina ahd inn calculated by the CaO - 0.7
of lime silica, oxide, when formula SO1 FeZOX
Not greater than 1.02 and not less than 0.66
Corntwc~ssi~~i~ Strrrigtli ofCctnwt Mortar Cuiws I .3 (I Cement : 3 Standard Sand) by Mass:

a) 72+ 1 hours Not less than 230 kgf/cm2 b) 168+2 hours Not less than 330 kgf/cm* c) 672+4 hours Not less than 430 kgf/cml increase in
228 SiOl+ 1.2 A1,0,+0.65
ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide iii) Insoluble mass iv) Magnesia, residue, percent by
Not less than 0.66 Not more than 2 Not more than 6 Not more than 2.75 and 3.0 when tricalcium aluminate (percent by mass) 1s 7 or less, and greater than 7 respectively Not more than 4 percent
d) Cement shall show progressive strength at 72 hours.
percent by mass
v) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SOJ), percent by mass
4. Delivery - Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tolerance f 2.5 percent per bag and Ifr 0.5 percent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
vi) Total loss on ignition
*Specification
revision ).
for ordinary
and low heat Portland cement (third
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
For detailed information, cement.
refer to IS : 8112-1976 Specification for high strength ordinary Portland
13
IS : 2185 (PART I)-1979 CONCRETE

PART I
MASONRY
UNITS
HOLLOW AND SOLID CONCRETE BLOCKS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope --- Requirements for the following concrete masonry building units which are used in construction of loadbearing and partition walls: aj Hollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing concrete blocks, b) Hollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing concrete blocks, and c) Solid load-hearing concrete
blocks.
notlessthan
priate.
the value given in Table 1, as appro-
TABLE
MINIMUM FACE SHELL AND WEB THICKNESSES
All dimensions in millimetres.
Note -- Concrete masomy units are used for both load-hearing and non-load bearing walls, for partitions and panel walls. as backing for other type% of facing material, for piers, pllasters and columna. for retainmg walls, garden walls, chimneys and tie places, as fillers m concrete joist floor construction and as shuttering for beam,. columns and lintels. 2. Terminology
NOMINAL BLOCK WIDTH
FACE SHELL THICKNESS.
THICKNESS OF
TOTAL WEB THICKNESS IEK COURSE IN ANY
Mh
WEB, Milt
200 mm ~NGTH ot: WALLING, Min (1) 100 or less Over 100 to 1.50 Over 150 to 200
Over
(2) 25 25 30 35
(3) 25 25 25 30
(4) 25 30 30 38
2.1 Hollow (Open or C/n.wd Cavity) Block - A block having one or more large holes or cavities which either pass through the block (open cavity) or do not effectively pass through the block (closed cavity) and having the solid material between 50 and 75 percent of the total volume of the block calculated from the overall dimensions. 2.2 Solid Block - A block which has solid material not less than 75 percent of the total volume of the block calculated from the overall dimensions. 3. 3.1 Dimensions Xomrnal Dimer~sions : Length Height Width 400, 500 or 600 mm 200 or 100 mm 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, or 300 mm
200
4.
Classification (Open und Closed Ctr\vity) Concrete
4.1 Hollow Blocks:
a) Grade A b) Grade B c) Grade C 4.2 Solid Table 2). 5. Physical I Blocks -Grade D (see &Sec~ Table 2)
Concrete
Requirements
Note 1 - Actual dimensions shall be 10 mm short of not&al dimensions or 6 mm short in special cases where finer jointing is specified. Note 2 - Rlock shall also be manufactured in half lengths of 200, 250 or 3rx) mm. 3.2 Tolerances -. Not more than IL 5 mm in length and It 3 mm in height and width of unit. 3.3 Face shells and webs shall increase in thickness from the bottom to the top of unit; the thickness shall be 14
5.1 General - All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects. 5.2 Block Density and Compressive Shall be as given in Table 2. Strength -
5.3 Water Absorption - Average value of three units shall be not more than IO percent by mass. 5.4 Drying Shrinkage - Average units shall not exceed 0.1 percent. value of three
5.5 Moisture Movement - Average value of three units shall not exceed 0.09 percent.
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 2
TYPE
BLOCK DENSITY kg/m3
AND COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH
MINIMUM STRENGTH OF INDIVIDUAL UNITS AT 2XDAYS
GRADE
DENSITY OF BLOCK
MINIMUM AVERAGE COMPRESSIVESTRENGTHOF UNITS AT 28 DAYS
N/mm2 Hollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing unit A A A A (3.5) (4.5) (5.5) (7.0) Not less than 1 500 3.5 4.5 5.5 7.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 1.5
N/mm2 2.8 3.6 4.4 5.6 1.6 2.4 4.0 1.2
B (2.0) B (3.0) B (5.0) Hollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing units Solid load bearing units c (1.5)
Less than 1 500 but not less than 1000 Less than 1 500 but not less than 1 000 Not less than 1 800
D (5.0) D (4.0)
5.0 4.0
4.0 3.2
Note 1 -For Note 2-For
requirements methods
regarding
materials,
manufacture,
surface
texture,
texture and finish,
refer to the sfandurd.
of tests, refer to Appendices
A to F of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2185 (Part I)-1979 Specification for concrete masonry units: Part I H&low and solid concrete blocks (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3590-1966 LOAD BEARING LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE BLOCKS

1. Scope - Requirements for load bearing lightweight concrete blocks (solid and hollow) made from Portland cement and lightweight aggregates for use in the construction of concrete masonry walls. Aerated concrete blocks are not covered. 2. Dimensions - Shall be in one of the following nominal sizes; other sizes by mutual agreement. Actual size 1 cm less in length and height: Size A B C Length (cm) 40 40 40 Breudth (cm) 30 20 10 Height (cm) 20 20 20 3. Materials One of the following aggregates 3.1 Aggregates shall be used:
a) Granulated blast furnace slag under 1 250 kg/m3 bulk density and containing not less than 50 percent of lime. b) Foamed slag.
c )
Cinder aggregates.
d) Lightweight aggregates by expansion or bloating of slates, shales or clays; or by sintering of fly ash. e) Any suitable mixture of aggregates given above. 3.2 Natural sand or crushed stone may be added to any of the above. All aggregates shall pass through 12.5 mm IS Sieve; not more than 10 percent shall pass through 300 micron IS Sieve. At least 15 percent shall be retained on 10 mm IS Sieve and 40 percent on 4.75 mm IS Sieve. Fineness modulus 1.6 to 2.6 for fine and 4.4 to 5.15 for coarse aggregates. 15
2.1 Tolerance - k 3 mm for length and + 1.5 mm for breadth and height. 2.2 In case of hollow blocks total width of cavities, not to exceed 66 percent of total breadth. Net horizontal cross sectional area, not less than 50 percent of gross area. Shell thickness not less than 50 mm for size A and B and 30 mm for Size C.
SP : 21-1983
4. Mix -Not richer than aggregates (by volume). 5. Physical Requirements
1 cement:6
combined
5.1 Compressive Strength cm2 of gross area at 28 days. 5.2 Density -
Not less than 28 kgfl
5.3 Drying Shrinkage - Not to exceed 0.06 percent. 5.4 Moisture Movement - Not to exceed 0.05 percent. 5.5 Water Ahsorl>tion - Not to exceed 250 kg/m3. 5.6 Moisture Content total water absorption. Not to exceed 40 percent of
Not to exceed 1 600 kg/m3.
Note-For
methods of test, refer to Appendices A to E of the standard.
For &tailed
information, refer to IS : 3590-1966
Specification for load bearing lightweight
concrete
blocks.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4996-1968 REINFORCED CONCRETE FENCE POSTS

1. Scope - Requirements for reinforced concrete fence posts for genera1 purposes. Recommendations for the provisions of wire holes and their spacing, as well as the erection of post-and-wire fence have also been included. Reinforced lightweight concrete fence posts and prcstrcssed concrete fence posts are not covered. 2. Classification tapering on ail four sides. The cross-sectional dimensions and the reinforcement shall be adequate to conform to strength requirements given in 4.
Note - Some of the common sizes and shapes for reinforced concrete fence posts with other details such as reinforcement, fencing wire spacing from ground level, spacing of line post and strainer post and suitability of particular size of fence post for use are given in Appendix B of rltc, standard for general guidance. Ihese may be used provided the strength requirements are fulfilled.
4 Line Posts -
Line posts are intermediate posts forming the majority in a post-and-wire system and are intended to carry the fencing wire between the strainer posts. Posts notched on three sides and used with struts or braces as strainers at the comers or ends, or at intermediate positions in a line of fence.
3.2 Tolerances - +15 mm on overall length, f3 mm on cross-sectional dimensions and 0.5 percent on straightness of fence post. 4. Strength Test shall
b) Strainer Posts -
4.1 Impacr Test - When tested, specimen show no visible permanent cracking.
c) Strut or Brace 3.
Member used in inclined position for supporting the strainer post.
4.2 Static-Load Test - The static load required to produce first visible crack in post shall be as given below: Line post Strainer post 70 kgf, Min 250 kgf, Min
Shape and Dimensions
3.1 Shall be rectangular or circular in section. May be of uniform section or tapering on two sides or
Strut or angle post 45 kgf, Min
Note l-For
recommendations
typical details and dimensions of line post, strainer post and brace for fencing intended for various uses, for for manufacture of reinforced concrete under field conditions and for recommendations for erection of fence
posts, refer to the standard.
Note 2 - For method of tests, refer to Appendix C of the standard. For detailed information,
refer to IS : 4996-1968 Specification for reinforced concrete fence posts.

16
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 5482-1969 AUTOCLAVED
CELLULAR CONCRETE BLOCKS

No. 1 and 2) 5.1 Compressive ducti\qiry Density in Oven Dq Condirion (kg/m) Strength and Thermal Con-
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for autoclaved cellular concrete blocks having density up to 1 000 kg/m3. 2. Dimensions Length (cm) 50 50 50 50 Note dimension.
(Nominal) Breadth (cm) Height (cm) 20, 20, 20, 20, 1 cm 25 25 25 25 or or or or 30 30 30 30
Compressive Strength Min

~kGradPZ;kca~$$?!lm2) (kgf/cm2) (kgf/cm2) 20 40 15 30
Thermal Conducriviv
or or or or
60 60 60 60
10 15 20 25
45 l-550 55 I-650 65 l-750 75 I-850 851-i 000
0.18 0.21
Actual dimension shall be
less than nominal
50 60
70
40 50
60
0.26 0.32
0.36
2.1
Tolerances
f 2 mm for height and breadth,
and + 3 mm for length.

Note Formode of measurement,sce Fig.
1ofthcstundrrd.
5.2 Dry Shrinkage - Not more than 0.05 percent for Grade 1 and 0.1 percent for Grade 2. 5.3 Fire Resistance - Walls made by the blocks shall have the following tire grading: 12 cm thick wall 2 hours fire resistance 15 cm thick wall 3 hours tire resistance 19 cm thick wall 4 hours lire resistance 25 cm thick wall 5 hours tire resistance
3.
Classification
Grade 1 and Grade 2.
4. Finish - Faces shall be rectangular, opposite faces parallel and all arrises shall be square and straight. Blocks shall be free from all defects. 5. Physical Properties
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 6441 (Part I)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part I Determination of unit weight or bulk density and moisture content, IS : 6441 (Part II)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part II Determination of dry shrinkage, IS : 6441(Part V)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part V Determination of compressive strength, IS : 3346-1980 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) (first revision) and IS : 3809-1966 Fire resistance test of structures.
refer to IS : 5482-1969 Specification for autoclaved cellular concrete blocks.
17
IS : 575 1-1969 PRECAST CONCRETE COPING BLOCKS

1. Scope - Requirements for precast concrete coping blocks, giving details of material for manufacture, workmanship, functional requirements and essential dimensions to meet them.
Note - The blocks serve as &fence against entry moisture into hollow concrete block walls. Functional requirements are: a) should prevent downward penetration of water. b) should direct water clear of walls below. c) should resist lateral displacement, either by its weight or by mechanical means such as clip type coping or by use of cramps and dowels. d) should allow for thermal and moisture movements. e) should be durable.
2.2
Length -
1 m or as agreed. for cross-sectional
2.3 Tolerkzces - + 3 mm profile and + 6 mm for length.
of
3. Shape - Coping blocks shall slope to the rear so as to reduce wash of water and accumulated dirt over face of wall. The slope shall be as steep as possible for rapid shedding of water. Note - Foi examples of concrete copings such as splayed and saddle back copings, set Fig. 3 of the srandurd. 4. Weight - Not less than 35 kg/h tomed coping without cramps. for flat bot-
2.
Dimensions
and Tolerances 5; Fixing and Jointing -Ends of coping blocks shall be jointed by means of dowels, cramps or joggled mortar joints. Flashing of non-corrodible material is adopted at joints in coping blocks to prevent leakage. 6. Fittings - Stopped ends, hipped stopped ends, stooled ends and right-angled returns, shall be available to match the coping blocks.
2.1 Dimension of Cross Section -The form of cross section shall be as agreed to mutually. Overall width shall be determined by referring to thickness of wall to which coping is to be applied. Note type tid For minimum dimensions of the cross section for clip for tlat bottomed copings, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the
standard.
refer to IS : 5751-1969 Specification for precast concrete coping blocks.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 5758-1970 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS

1. Scope - Requirements of precast concrete units for kerbs, channels, edgings quadrants and kerbs and gutters in range of sections, for use in carriageways and footways. 2. Designation -Dimensions of horizontal face shall be given first and the dimensions of vertical face be second. 3. Dimensiqns .3.1 Straight K&s
a)
c) Half-batter d) Half-section 3.2
kerbs kerbs
150 x 300, I25 X 250 mm 150 x 125 mm
Straight Channels
a) Rectangular kerbs 300 x 150, 250 x 125, 250 X 100 mm 250 x 125 mm
b) Channels kerbs 150 x 300, 125 x 250, 100 x 250 mm 150 x 300, 125 x 250 mm 18 3.3 Edgings mm.
Rectangular
50
250,
50 X 200,
50 X 150
b) Splayed kerbs
3.4 Quadrant - Depths 125, 250 or 300 mm and radius 300 or 450 mm with faces to match the sections of straight kerbs.
SP : 21-1983
3.5 GutterAprons - Width shall range from 150 to 2 500 or 3 000 but usual width shall range from 300 to 900 mm. Usual range of height 125 to 200 mm. The thickness of precast kerb shall be 75 to 150; minimum thickness of channel 125 or 100 mm.
3.6 Lengths - Uniform length of 1 m for straight kerbs, straight channels, edgings and 1 m maximum normally for straight kerbs and gutters.
Note - For standard sections of concrete kerbs, channel, standard sections of concrete edgings, standard cohcrete quardrants and typical sections of kerb and gutter, see Fig. 1 to 5 of the
Type of Product
Dimensions (mm) 150x 300 125x250 100x 250 150x300 125x250 150x300 125x250 150x 125 250x 125 50x 250 50 x 200 50x 150
Load to be Supported (kg0 2 275 1 360 910 2 275 1 360 2 275 1 360 820 1 360 318 272 204
a) Rectangular
kerbs
b) Splayed kerbs c) Half-batter d) Half-section kerbs kerbs
standard.
4. Tolerances - +3 mm on length + 1.5 and -3 mm on width.
and height;
e) Channels f) Edgings
5.
Moulding - When made under hydraulic pressure, the pressure employed shall not be less than 7 MN/m*. Tests
6.1.1 If tests are carried out after a longer period, the load to be supported shall be increased by the ageing factor given below:
Age of sample (months) 2 1.1 3 1.15 4 1.2 5 1.25 6 1.3
6.
6.1
Transverse Strength - When tested 28 days after they are manufactured, the unit shall support without injury, at least for one minute, the loads given in the following table.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the
Ageing factor
6.2 WaterAbsorption - Shall not exceed 3 percent in the first 10 minutes and 8 percent after 24 hours. standard.
refer to IS : 5758-1970 Specification for precast concrete kerbs.
19
IS : 5820-1970 PRECAST CONCRETE CABLE COVERS
1. Scope - Requirements for reinforced and unreinforced.precast concrete covers for covering cables.
2.
4.
Tests
Covers -
Classification
Description
4.1 Impact Strength for Reinforced more than one transverse crack.
Conditions
Not
Cl& EHV HVP HV LV 2.1 3.
Where Normally Used
Reinforced, with peak Unreinforced, with peak
22 kV and 33 kV underground power cables 1.1 kV to below 22 kV underground power cables For power cables 1.1 kV and below
Arch type covers are also sometimes used. Dimensions

Class Type No. Shape L
4.2
-
Transverse
Strength for
Unreinforced
Covers
Average breaking load shall not be lower than the value specified in 3.
Average Breaking Load Dimensigns (mm) T# for Unreinforced Covers, Min W T (kg)
EHV HVP HV LV
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3
W = Length, Width.
With peak do do do Flat do do do do
450 600 300 450 300 450 250 300 450
230 230 180 180 180 180 150 180 180
50 50 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
75 75 65 65 -
450 750 300 350 300 350 200 200 200
Note 1 --L,
T = Total thickness in case of flat type and thickness of flat portion excluding peak in case of cover with peak.
T = Total thickness including peak in case of cover with peak. Note 2-For typical concrete cable cover, flat type and with peak, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard.
3.1 Tolerance - On length and width + 3 mm, and on thickness + 2 mm.
%te 1 -For manufacturing details with regard to the aspects such as mixing, moulding, protection from frost and reinforcement details, refer to 5 of the standard. Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5820-1970 Specification for precast concrete cable covers.
20
SP : 21-1983
IS : 6072- 197 1 AUTOCLAVED REINFORCED CELLULAR CONCRETE WALL SLABS

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete wall slabs, having density above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3. 2. Terminology - The cellular concrete consists of an inorganic binder (such as lime and cement) in combination with finely ground material containing silicic acid (such as sand), gas generating material (such as aluminium powder), water, and harmless additives (optional); and steam cured under high pressure in autoclaves. 3. Classification - Shall be classified on basis of oven-dry density (without reinforcement) and compressive strength: No. 1) 5.2 Tolerances - For 500 mm and below, + 2 mm; over 500 mm, * 5 mm.
Note the standard.
For form tolerances for wall slabs, refer to Table 1of
6. Finish - Tongue at one side and groove on the other side. Alternatively groove on both sides for filling with cement Fortar. Longitudinal edges shall be chamfered. 7. 7.1 7.2 Physical Properties
Density -
Range as specified in 3.
-
Dry Shrinkage
Not more than 0.09 percent.
Class
A B c D E
Gross Density
(kg/m3) to 1 000 to 850 to 750 to 650 550 to
7.3 Residual. water content at the time of delivery shall be declared by the manufacturer. 7.4
Fire Resistance -
Over Over Over Over Over
850 750 650 550 450
and and and and and
up up up up up
Not less than 2 hours.

and Thermal Con-
7.5 Compressive ductivity:

ClflSS
Strength
4. Designation - By indicating compressive strength (in kgf/cm*), horizontal load bearing capacity, that is, design load (in kkf/cm*), length (in m), breadth (in mm) and thickness (in mm). 5. Sizes
Compressive Strength, Min (kgf/cm*)
Thermal Conductivity, MUX (kcaVm/h/C)
A B C D E
70 60 50 35 20
0.36 0.32 0.26 0.21 0.18
5.1 Preferred Dimensions - Length 1 to 6 m; width 600 mm; thickness 150 to 250 mm with increments of 25 mm.
Note l-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3809-1966 Specification for fire resistance test for structures, and IS : 6441 (Part I to IX) Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products as appropriate.
Note 2 - For details of manufacture with regard to aspects such as reinforcement, formation of cells of cellular concrete (method of
autoclavation) and finish, refer to 6 of the standard. Note 3 -
For structural requirements, refer to 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6072-1971 Specification for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete wall slabs.
21
IS : 6073-1971 AUTOCLAVED REINFORCED CELLULAR CONCRETE FLOOR AND ROOF SLABS

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete floor and roof having density above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3. 2. Terminology - The cellular concrete consists of an inorganic binder (such as lime and cement) in combination with finely ground material containing silicon dioxide (such as sand), gas generating material (such as aluminium powder), water and additives (optional); and steam cured under high pressure in autoclaves. 3. Classification - Shall be classified on basis of over-dry density (without reinforcement) and compressive strength: Class A B C D E Gross Density Over Over Over Over Over 850 750 650 550 450 and and and and and up up up up up (kg/m3) to 1 000 to 850 to 750 to 650 to 550 No. 1) 5.2 Tolerances - For 500 mm and below, + 2 mm; over 500 mm, + 5 mm. Note - For form tolerancesfor tloor and roof slabs, refer to Table 1 of rhc srrmdcrrd. 6. Finish - Tongue at one side and groove on other side. Alternatively, groove on both sides for filling with cement mortar. Longitudinal edges shall be chamfered. 7. 7.1 7.2 Physical Properties Range as specified in 3. Not more than 0.09 percent.
Density -
Dry Shrinkage
7.3 Residual water content at the time of delivery shall be declared by the manufacturer. 7.4 7.5 Fire Resistance Not less than 2 hours.
Compressive Strength and Thermal Conductivity: Compressive Strength, Min (kgf/cm2) 70 60 50 35 20 Thermal Conductivity, Max (kcal/m/h/C) 0.36 0.32 0.26 0.21 0.18
Class
4. Designation - By indicating compressive strength , (kgf/cm*), load bearing capacity, that is, design load (kgf/m2), length (m), breath (mm) and thickness (mm). 5. Sizes
A B C D E
5.1 Preferred Dimensions - Length 1 to 6 m; width 600 mm; thickness 75 to 250 mm with increments of 25 mm.
Note l-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3809-1966Specification for fire resistance test of structures, IS : 6441 (Part I)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part I Determination of unit-weight or bulk density and moisture content, and IS : 6441 (Part II)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part 11Determination of dry shrinkage, and IS : 6441 (Part V)-1972 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products: Part V Determination of compressive strength.
Note 2-For
details of manufacture with regard to aspects such as reinforcement, formation of cells of cellular concrete (method of autoclavation) and finish, refer to 6 of the standard. structural requirements, refer to 8 of the standard.
Note 3-For
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6073-1971 Specification floor and roof slabs.
for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete
22
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6523-1972 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE AND WINDOW FRAMES

1. Scope - Requirements for precast reinforced concrete door and window frames. Use of such frames is recommended to be restricted to a maximum opening width of 2.25 m.
2. Shape and Dimensions - Cross section 60 X 100 mm or 70 X 75 mm for single shutter door and 60 X 120 mm for double shutter door. Overall sizes (width and height) of frames shall conform to IS : 4021-1975*.
Note 1 - Suitable adjustments in cross-sectional shape may be made by agreement between the purchaser and the supplier to provide suitable groove for wall plaster, etc, provided the overall dimensional requirements given above are not affected. Note 2 -For overall dimensions of the frame, the width of the frame shall be the total length of the horizontal piece measured out-to-out; the height of the frame shall be the total height measured from the lowestendof the vertical piece (in case of three member frame or the outer edge of the lower horizontal member in case of four member frame) to the outer edge of the toe horizontal piece.
DOOR
3.
Requirements
Materials
3.1
3.1.1 Cement - Ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement, or blast furnace slag cement or pozzolana cement. 3.1.2 Aggregates -Well graded mixture of coarse and fine aggregates. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be 10 mm. 3.1.3 Concrete -Not IS : 456- 1978*). weaker than M 20 (see
3.1.4 Reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, mud, oil, grease or any other coating which may reduce the bond between the concrete and the steel. A slight film of rust may not be regarded as harmful but the steel shall not be visibly pitted by rust.
*Code of practice
revision).
*Specification (first revision).
for timber door, window
and ventilator
frames
for plain and reinforced
concrete
(rhird
Note-For requirements in regard to manufacture (construction and finish, positioning of reinforcement, casting, curing, etc), arrangements for fixing of hinges to frames, arrangements for door and window fixtures and erection along with illustrations, refer to
the standard.
For detailed information, window frames.
refer to IS : 6523-1912 Specification for precast reinforced
concrete door and
23
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 459-1970 UNREINFORCED CORRUGATED AND SEMI-CORRUGATED ASBESTOS CEMENT SHEETS (Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements of unreinforced corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets designed for roof coverings and walls of different types of buildings and for decorative and other purposes. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances See Table 1. No. 1) 3.3 Impermeability - Shall not show during 24 hours of test any formation of drops of water except traces of moisture on lower surface. 3.4 Acid Resistance not exceed 1150 g/m2. Amount of acetic acid shall
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES OF CORRUGATED All dimensions in millimetres.

OVERALL WIDTH
AND SEMI-CORRUGATED
SHEETS
SL
No. 9
TYPEOF SHEET
h~cti 0F DEPTH OF CORRUGATION CORRUGATION
EFFECTIVE WIDTH
NOMINAL THICKNESS
LENGTH OF SHEET
Corrugated Sheets
48
146
1 050
1 010
1 750, 20@& 25000r 3ooo 1 750, 2tw ;5gor
ii)
Semicorrugated Sheets
45
338
1 loo
1 014
Tolerances on Dimensions
+3 -5
+6 -2
+10 -5
+10 -5
+ Free -0.5
+5 -10
Note - For shapes of cormgated and semi-cormgated see Fig. 1 and 2 of /he standard.
sheets,
3.5 4.
Frost Cracking Test (Optional) - Shall not show signs of cracking or surface alterations.
3.
Physical
and Mechanical
Characteristics less than 5
3.1 Load Bearing Capacity -Not N/mm width of specimen. 3.2 Water Absorption of dry weight.
Note l-For Note 2-Fcr method methods
Finish - Shall have rectangular shape; corrugation true and regular; edges straight and clean; smooth surface on exposed side; free fr;m visible defects.
Not to exceed 28 percent
of measurements
of different
dimensions
of the sheets, refer to 4 of rhe StUndUrd.
of tests, refer to IS
: 5913-1970 Methods of test for asbestos cement products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 459-1970 Specification for unreinforced corrugated and semicorrugated asbestos sheets (second revision).
24
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1592-1980 ASBESTOS
clas1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, sification, dimensions, tests and acceptance criteria for asbestos cement pressure pipes of Class 5, Class 10, Class 15, Class 20 and Class.25. 2. Classification
CEMENT
PRESSURE
PIPES
(Second Revision)
Table 1. Nominal thicknesses of different classes and diameters of pipes at finished ends (measured at 25 mm beyond bevelled ends) shall be as given in Table 1. 3.2 Length - Nominal length for pipes diameter shall be 3 m, 4 m or 5 m. 4. 4.1 Tolerances On External Diameter at 100 nun frcRn Ends: of all
2.1 Shall be classified with respect to hydraulic test pressure as given below:
Class
Hydraulic Test Pressure
N/mm* 5 0.5 10 1.0 15 1.5 20 2.0 25 2.5 2.2 Relationship between bursting pressure (BP), hydraulic test pressure (TP) and normal hydraulic working pressure (WP) shall not be lesser than values given below:
Ncwzinal Dimneter
SOEn 350 to 500 600
Tolerance
mm +0.6 kO.8 +1.0
4.2 On Internul Diameter - Checked by means of a sphere or a disc of diameter less than nominal internal diameter (d) of pipe by (2.5+0.01d). 4.3 On Thickness of Wall (at Finished Ends)
Nominal Diameter
mm 80 and 100 125 to 200 250 to 600 3. 3.1 Dimensions
BP Tp 2 1.75 1.5
& 4 3.5 3.0
Nominal Zkkness
mm Up to and including 10 Over 10 up to and including Over 20 up to and including Over 30
Note Plus tolerance shall be free.
Tolerance
mm 20 30 -1.5 -2.0 -2.5 -3.0
Nominal diameters of pipes shall be as given in
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION AND DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES

SL
NOM
DIA
No.
CLASS 5 h
CLASS 10 h
Thickness External Thickness External Dia Dia (1) (2) mm

80
CLASS 15 h
Thickness External Dia (7) mm 9.5 10.0 11.0 13.0 16.5 17.0 20.0 21.0 24.0 26.5 29.0 35.0 (8) mm 99.5 121.0 147.0 176.5 233.5 284.5 340.5 392.0 448.0 498.0 554.5 665.5
\r
CLASS 20 A
CLASS A
25 ,
Thickness External Thickness Dia (9) mm 11.0 13.5 14.0 16.5 22.0 23.0 27.0 27.5 32.0 35.5 39.0 46.0 (10) mm 101.5 126.5 152.5 183.0 242.5 294.5 352.5 405.0 463.0 515.0 572.5 686.5 (11) mm 13.5 16.5 17.5 21.0 27.5 28.5 34.5 35.0 39.5 44.0 48.5 58.0
External Dia (12) mm 106.5 132.5 159.5 191.0 253.5 305.5 366.5 419.0 478.0 532.0 591.5 710.5
(3) mm 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 14.5 16.0 17.5 19.5 23.5
(4) mm 99.5 120.0 145.0 171.0 221.0 271.0 322.5 379.5 432.0 482.0 536.5 643.5
(5) mm 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 11.5 12.0 14.0 14.5 16.0 17.5 19.5 23.5
(6) mm 99.5 120.0 145.0 171.0 225.0 276.5 328.5 379.5 432.0 482.0 536.5 643.5
0
ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) xii)
100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600
NOTE - External diameters at finished ends of the pipes specified in the table are already in practicai use and are specified for the purpose of interchangeability. Due to inherent characteristics of the manufacturing process and common moulds forall classes, external diameter may not be equal to internal diameter plus twice the thickness in all cases.
25
SP : 21-1983
4.4
On Nawinal Length + 50 mm Except for pipes from which bursting -20 mm test pieces have been cut. 1 On Straightness Nominal Diameter so~om200 250 to 450 500 to 600 Maximwn Deviation 4.5 1 Where 1 is 3.5 1 length of pipe 2.5 1 1 in m
6.2 Hydraulic Bursting Test - Unit bursting stress shall not be less than 20 N/mm2 for sizes up to and including 300 mm diameter and 22 N/mm* for sizes 350 mm diameter and above. 6.3 Transverse Crushing Test - Unit transverse crushing stress shall not be less than 44 N/mm*. 6.4 Longitudinal Bending Test - (Only on pipes of 150 mm, diameter and less). Unit longitudinal bending stress shall not be less than 24.5 N/mm*. 7. Joints are: Two types of joints normally provided
4.5
5. Finish - Internal surfaces should be regular and smooth. Finished ends should be to suit type of joint used. 6.
Tests
6.1
Hydraulic Pressure Tighbtess Test - To be performed on all pipes. Pipe shall not indicate any loss or visible sweating on outside surface for test pressure as given in 2.1 maintained for 30 seconds. Test time may be reduced to 10 seconds for pipes of diameter 350 mm or less, provided pressure is increased by 10 percent.
Note-For
a) Asbestos cement couplings with rubber sealing rings, and b) Cast iron detachable joints with rubber sealing rings and bolts and nuts. 7.1 The assembled joints shall be flexible and capable of withstanding hydraulic pressure specified in 2.1, when pipes are set at permissible angular 1 170 deviation which is not less than External dia in mm but need not exceed 8.
methods of tests, refer to IS : 5913-1970 Methods of test for asbestos cement products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1592-1980 Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1626 (PART I)-1980 ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS, GUTTERS AND GUTTER FITTINGS AND ROOFING FITTINGS
PART I PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of socketed asbestos cement building and sanitary pipes and pipe fittings of diameter 50 to 150 mm for use as rain-water pipes, soil, waste and ventilating pipes. 1.1 The following pipes and pipe fittings are covered: a) Single socketed pipe, b) Loose socket, c) Plain bend, d) Swan neck, e) Sanitary bend,
26
f-l Single and double equal junctions, g) Single and double unequal junctions,
h) Single and double equal inverted junctions
with spigot branch, Hexagonal rain-water head, k> Shoe, ml Cone cap cowl, n) Slotted vent cowl, and P) W. C. connectors.
2. Workmanship - Interior surface of pipes and pipe fittings should be regular and smooth.
SP : 21-1983
3.
Dimensional
Requirements
1.05 for all diameters of pipes and pipe fittings. 3.3.2 On thickness - Shall be + 1.0 mm for pipes and pipe fittings of nominal diameter 50, 60, 80 and 100 mm and + 1.5 mm for 150 mm diameter of pipes and pipe fittings. 3.3.3 On nominal length - Shall be AI10 mm and +5 mm for pipes and pipe fittings respectively. 3.3.4 3.3.5 4. On overall length On depth of sockets Shall be f 10 mm. Shall be +5 mm.
3.1 Nminal Diameter and Thickness - Nominal diameter of pipes and pipe fittings shall correspond to internal diameter (bore), tolerances not being taken into account. Nominal diameters for pipes and pipe fittings except for items given in 1.1(e), 1.1(g) and 1.1(p) and corresponding thicknesses for all pipes and pipe fittings shall be as follows: Nwninal Diameter of Pipe or Pipe Fitting mm 50 60 80 100 150 Thickness of Pipe or Pipe Fitting mm 6.5 6.5 8.0 8.0 9.5
Physical Requirements of pipes shall not
4.1 Deviation in straightness exceed the following: Nuninal Dimneter mm 50 to 60 80 to 150
Maximum Deviation mm 5.5 1 4.5 1
3.1.1 Nominal size or bore diameter of sanitary bend and W. C. connectors shall be 100 mm. Thickness 8.0 mm. 3.1.2 Nominal size or bore diameter of single and double unequal junctions shall be [(a/b)mml 60/50, 80/50, 100/50, 80/60, 100/60, 100/80, 150/80 and 150/100 where a is bore diameter for main pipe and b for branch pipe. Thickness shall be as given in 3.1 for corresponding diameter. 3.2 Length
where 1 is nominal length of pipe in m. 4.2 Hydraulic Pressure Test - To be carried out on all pipes and pipe fittings except on items given in 1.1 (m) and 1.1(n) and pipe fittings provided with access doors: Pipes and pipe fittings shall show no fissure or visible sweating on outside surface when subjected to internal hydraulic pressure of 0.1 MN/m2 maintained for 30 seconds. 4.3 Hydraulic Bursting Test (for Pipes Only) Pipe shall indicate a minimum bursting stress of 5 MN/m2 . 4.4 Transverse Crushing Test (for Pipes Only) Unit transverse crushing stress at failure shall not be less than 14 MN/m2. 4.5 Longitudinal Bending Test (for Pipes Only) - Unit longitudinal bending stress shall not be less than 12.5 MN/m2. 4.6 Water Absorption Test - Mean water absorption shall not be more than 28 percent of dry mass of material. 4.7 Acid Resistance Test - Mean amount of acetic acid used in testing shall not exceed 1 150 g/m2.
3.2.1 Nominal length - Nominal length shall correspond to useful lengths of socketed pipes exclusive of internal depth of socket, not taking tolerances into account, and shall be 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2 and 3 m. 3.2.2 Overall length - Shall be sum of nominal length in accordance with 3.2.1 and length of socket.
Note - For other dimensions of pipes and pipe fittings, referto Tables 3 to 16 of dze standard, read with appropriate figures.
3.3
Tolerances
3.3.1 On internal diameter of plain ends and sockets - Ratio of actual diameter and nominal diameter over a section should lie between 0.95 and
Note-For
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1626 (Part I)-1980 Specification for asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings: Part I Pipes and pipe fittings (first revision).
27
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1626 (PART II)-1980 ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS, GUTTERS AND GUTTER FITTINGS AND ROOFING FITTINGS
PART II GUTTERS AND GUTTER FITTINGS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of asbestos cement gutters and gutter fittings used in buildings. f) Stop End and Union Clip for Gutters -
2. Workmanship - Interior surface of gu,tter and their fittings should be regular and smooth. 3.
Dimensional . Requirements:
Nominal size for half round gutters 150, 250 and 300 mm. Nominal size (mmX mmX mm) 500x 150x 250, 450x 150x 300, 300x 150x225 and 275x125~175 for boundary wall gutters; 905x200X225,600X 150x225, 450x 125x 150 and 400x 125x250 for valley gutters. g) Angle for Gutters Refer to the standard.
a) Valley Gutter - Nominal size (mmx mmxmm) 900~200~225, 600~ 150X 225, 450x 125x 150 and 400x 125~250. Thickness 12.5 mm.
b) Boundary
Wall Gutter - Nominal size (mmxmmxmm) 500~ 150~250, 450~ 150~300,300~ 150x225 with thickness 12.5 mm. Nominal size 275~125~175 mm with thickness 10.0 mm.
Note - For detailed dimensions for various hems of gutters and their fittings, refer to Tables 2 to 7 and appropriate figures of dze standard.
3.1
Tolerances
3.1.1
Onkngth OnproJile -
Shall be +lO mm. Shall be +3 mm. Shall be f 1.5 mm.
3.1.2 3.1.3 4.
4.1
cl Half Round Gutter - Nominal size 150, 250

and 305 mm. Thickness 9.5 mm.
On thickness -
d) Drop End and Nozzle fir Boundary Wall and

Valley Gutters -
Nominal diameter 100 and
150 mm.
4 Drop
End and Nozzle for Half Round Gutters - Nominal size 150, 250 and 300 mm.
WaterAbsorption Test - Mean water absorption shall not exceed 28 percent of dry mass of material. 4.2 Acid Resistance Test - Mean amount of acetic acid used in testing shall not exceed 1 150 g/m*.
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 5913-1970 Methods of test for absestos cement products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1626 (Part II)-1980 Specification for asbestos cement pipes andpipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings: Part II Gutters and gutter fittings (first revision).
28
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1626 (PART III)-1981 ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS, GUTTERS AND GUTTER FITTINGS AND ROOFING FITTINGS
PART III ROOFING FITTINGS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of unreinforced asbestos cement roofing fittings to be used in conjunction with corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets conforming to IS : 459-1970*. 1.1
The following Ridges: a> 1) Serrated adjustable ridges, 2) Plain wing adjustable ridges, 3) One piece plain angular ridges, 4) Unserrated adjustable ridges for hips, and 5) Close-fitting adjustable ridges. b) Eaves filler pieces, Ridge finials, Apron pieces, Barge boards or corner piece, e) 0 Rooflights, !a Northlight curves or ventilator curves, h) Cowl type ventilators, 3 Expansion joints for semi-corrugated sheets and fittings like ridges and northlight curve, and W Louvres, S type. roofing fittings are covered: 3. Shapes, Dimensions and Tderances - Shapes, dimensions and tolerances of various fittings shall be as given in the standard, read with appropriate figures. 4. Physical Requirements 2. Classification sified as below: Roofing fittings shall be clas-
a) According to type of roofing sheets-they are to be used with, and b) According to shape and size of fitting.
z$
4.1 Free& frcwz Defects - All finished products shall be free from visual defects that impair appearance or serviceability. Surface of fitting shall be of uniform texture and shall have neatly trimmed edges. 4.2 Water Absorption - Mean water absorption shall not be more than 28 percent of dry mass of material. 4.3 Impermeability - Specimen shall not show during 24 hours of test any formation of drop of water except traces of moisture on lower surface. 4.4 Acid Resistance Test - Average quantity of acetic acid used in testing shall not exceed 1 150 g/m.
*Specification for unreinforced cormgated and semi-conugated asbestos cemknt sheets (second revision).
Note-For
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1626 (Part III)-1981 Specification for asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings: Part III Roofing fittings (first
revision).
29
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2096-1966 ASBESTOS CEMENT FLAT SHEETS

1. Scope - Requirements regarding composition, dimensions and tests of asbestos cement flat sheets (compressed and uncompressed) intended for interior and exterior use. 4.1
Compulsory Tests Transverse strength Shall conform to 2.
41.1
2.
Classification
4.1.2 Thickness - Average at 4 points approxi.. mately, 3 cm from edge shall conform to 3.1. 4.1.3 4.2 Density Shall conform to 2. Optional Tests Shall not exceed 28
a) Compressed Sheets - Having a minimum unit bending stress of 225 kgf/cm* and density exceeding 1.6 kg/dm3. b) Uncompressed Sheets - Having a minimum unit bending stress of 160 kgf/cm* and density exceeding 1.2 kg/dm3. 3.
3.1 Dimensions and Tolerances
4.2.1 Water absorption percent of dry weight.
Thickness (Npminal) - Shall be 5,6,8, 10 and 15 mm. Tolerance + 5 percent. 3.2 Length and Width - Nominal length shall be 2 400,l 800 or 1 200 mm and nominal width shall be 1 200 mm. Tolerance + 5 mm. 4. Tests
Note-For
4.2.2 ImpermeabiCity - Specimen shall not show during 24 hours of test, formation of drops of water, except traces of moisture on lower surface. 4.2.3 Frost cracking - Specimen shall not show signs of cracking or surface alteration. 4.2.4 Resistance to acidified waters - Amount of acetic acid used in testing shall not exceed 0.115 g/cm.
methodsof test. refer to Apnendices A to F of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 20961966 Specification for asbestos cement flat sheets.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2098-1964 ASBESTOS
1. Scope - Requirements regarding composition, dimensions and tests of asbestos cement building boards.
CEMENT BUILDING BOARDS

Tolerances - Length and width f5 mm Thickness f 0.5 mm
3. 3.1 Tests
2.
Dimensions
and Tolerances
Class A
- Length 2 400,180O or 1200 mm Width I 200 mm Thickness 6.5 mm Class B - L.ength2400,1800or1200mm Width 1 200 mm Thickness 5 mm Class C -Length2400,1800or1200mm Width 1 200 mm Thickness 4 mm
Transverse Strength - Average breaking load of two specimens taken from same board, tested in perpendicular directions, shall be not less than 20 kgf for Class A; and 15 kgf for Class B and Class C. Breaking load of either specimen shall be not less than 15 kgf for Class A and 10 kgf for Class B and Class C. 3.2 Water Absorption cent of dry weight. Shall not exceed 40 per-
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendix A of the standardand Appendix D of IS : 459-1970 Specification for unreinforced
corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets (second revtsion).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2098-1964 Specification for asbestos cement building boards.
30
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6908-1975 NON-PRESSURE ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for asbestos cement pipes and fittings suitable for use with gravity flow at atmospheric pressure, intended for sewerage and drainage applications. 2. General Appearance and Finish L- Shall be seamless, compact and homogeneous with regular and smooth internal surface. May be given suitable internal and external coatingif required. Shall be capable of being easily cut or drilled. 3. Classification according to crushing 4. 4.1 No. 1) Dimensions and Geometrical Pipes Characteristics
Standard lengths - 3 m or 4 m for 100 to 4.1.1 250 mm nominal bore pipes and 4 m or 5 m for 300 to 1 050 mm nominal bore pipes. (Length measured between extremities for pipes with plain ends and effective length for socketed pipes.) 4.1.2 turer. Thickness shall be stated by the manufac-
3.1 Pipes - Classified strength as given below: Nominal Bore I Minimum
Ultimate Crushing Load h 3 Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 (2) kgf/m 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 5 870 870 870 870 870 870 870 760 360 950 (3) kgf/m 3 570 3 940 4 460 4 840 5800 6 550 7000 7600 8 930 9 670 10 120 (4) kgflm 3 570 3 870 4300 4900 5 200 5 650 5 950 6400 6700
Tolerances - On nominal length, +50 and 4.1.3 -20 mm. On outside dia at turned ends, + 1 mm. On thickness at turned ends: f 1.5 mm on thickness up to 11 mm, +2 mm on thickness over 11 up to 15 mm, +2.5 mm on thickness over 15 up to 20 mm, f3 mm on thickness over 20 up to 30 mm, rfr3.5 mm on thickness over 30 up to 40 mm, and +_4 mm on thickness over 40 up to 60 mm. 4.1.4 Ovality -No sphere or disc. obstruction to passage of
(1)
mm 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 375 450 525 600 675 750 825 900 975 1 050 3.2 Fittings
4.1.5 Struightness - Deviation in millimetres from straightness shall not exceed the following limit: a) For 100 to 200 mm bore pipes b) For 225 to 525 mm bore pipes c) For 600 to 1 050 mm bore pipes where 1 - nominal 4.2 Fittings Bends length of pipe in m. 51 41 31
4.2.1
6700 7 900 8 780 9 370 10 270 11000 11 900 12 650
a) Moulded bends - Nominal bore 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 and 225 mm. b) Lobster back bends - Nominal bore 225, 250,300,375,450,525,600,675,750,825 and 900 mm. 4.2.2 Junctions - Nominal bore of pipe 125,150,175,200,225,250,300,375,450,525 600 mm. 4.2.3 Saddle branches 150 to 1 050 mm. Nominal 100, and
bore of pipe
3.2.1 Bends - Moulded or fabricated in polygonal shape. Angles shall be 11?4, 22h, 45 or 90. 3.2.2 3.2.3 Junctions Saddles 45 or 90. 45 or 90. 31
4.2.4 Thickness and tolerances - Thickness shall be as for corresponding size and class of pipes. Tolerances same as specified in 4.1.3.
Note - For detailed dimensions of fittings, refer to Tables 3 to 6 of the standard.
SP : 21-1983 5. Physical and Chemical Characteristics of Pipes 6.2 Trunmerse Crushing Strength - Junctions shall not fracture below the loads for pipes of corresponding bore and class given in 3 above. 6.3 7.
5.1 Internul Hydrostatic Pressure Test - Pipes shall not show leakage or swearing on their outside surface at a pressure of 2.55 kgf/cm2. 5.2 Trunsvrrse Crushing Strength - Pipes shall not show fracture below the loads for the diameter and class given in3 above. They also shall have a minimum transverse crushing stress of 367 kgf/cm2. 5.3 Longitudinal Bending Strength - Class 1 pipes of 100, 125 and 150 mm nominal bore shall not fracture below 385, 525 and 800 kgf respectively.
Chemicul Churucteristics Joints
As for pipes.
7.1 Joints shall be made of material similarto the pipe. 7.2 Rubber sealing rings IS : 5382-1%9*, shall be used. complying
that of with internal
Chrmicul Charucteristics (Soluhility in Acid Test) - Acetic acid neutralised shall not exceed 0.1
5.4 g/cm2. 6. Physical and Chemical Fittings Characteristics of
7.2.1 Assembled joint shall withstand hydrostatic pressure of 2.55 kgf/cm*.
7.3 Total angular deviation in degree from straight line shall be not less than 1 150 outside dia in mm at ends or 6 whichever is smaller. The axial draw at each end of the joint shall be not less than 25 mm.
*Specification for
6.1 Internal Hydrostutic Pressure Test - For bends and junctions up to 225 mm bore only. Shall show no leakage or sweating at pressure of 2.55 kgf/cm*.
Note-For
rubber sealing
rings for gas mains, water mains
and sewers.
methods of tests for reauirements given in 5 and 6 refer to IS : 5913-1970 Methods of test for asbestos cement products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6908-1975 Specification for non-pressure asbestos cement pipes and fittinis for sewerage and drainage.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 458-I 97 1 CONCRETE PIPES (WITH AND WITHOUT REINFORCEMENT)

(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements a;ld test for reinforced and unreinforced cement concrete pipes, pressure and non-pressure types, used for water mains, sewers, culverts, and irrigation. Prestressed and non-circular pipes are not covered. 2. Classification For drainage and irrigation, above ground or in shallow trenches and irrigation, culverts carrying light traffic 32 For drainage No. 1) For drainage and irrigacarrying tion, culverts heavy traffic
NP3 - Reinforced conCrete, heavy duty, nonpressure pipes
NP 1-Unreinforced concrete, non-pressure pipes NP2 - Reinforced crete, light-duty, pressure pipes con-
NP4 - Reinforced concrete, heavy duty, nonpressure pipes
For drainage and irrigation, culverts carrying very heavy traftic, such as railway loadings
non-
Pl -Reinforced conCrete pressure pipes tested to hydrostatic pressunz of 2 kg/cm2
For gravity mains, design pressure not exceeding 2/3 of test pressure
SP : 21-1983
P2 - Reinforced concrete pressure pipes tested to hydrostatic pressure of 4 kgf/cm* P3 - Reinforced concrete pressure pipes tested to hydrostatic pressure of 6 kgf/cm2
For use on mains, design not exceeding pressure For use on mains, design not exceeding pressure
pumping pressure l/2 test
Note 2 - For dimensions of spigot and socket ends in case of NPI class pipe. refer to Table 8 of hr smndurd.
3.2
Tolertrnces a) Length b) Internal diameter of pipes or socket Up to 300 mm 400 mm Over 400 mm + 1 percent
pumping pressure l/2 test
Unreinforced and reinforced non-pressure withstand test pressure of 0.7 kgf/cm2. 3. 3.1 Dimensions
pipes shall
+3 mm - 1.5 +6 -3 mm +_ k.;5 percent
4. Pipes Internal Diameter of Pipes (in mm) and
Workmanship
and Finish
ChS
NPl NP2
80,100,150,200,225,250,300,350,400 . 450
4.1 Ends of the pipe shall be square with longitudinal axis. Tolerance 3 mm for pipes up to 600 mm diameter and 6 mm for pipes over 600 mm diameter. Free from cracks and visible defects. 4.2 Deviution fiorn Struight mm for every metre run. 5. Tests shall not exceed 3
80, 100, 150,200, 225, 250, 300, 350,400, 450,500,600,700,800,900,1000,1 100, 1200,1400,1600and1800 b 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000,1100and1200 400,500,600,700,800,900, 1200,1400,1600and1800 1000,l 100,
NP3 NP4 Pl
5.1 Every pressure pipe shall be tested for hydrostatic pressure.

Note -The
the pipe. pipe joints shall withstand the same pressure as
P2 P3
80, 100, 150, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350,400, 450,!%0,600,700,800,900, 1000, 1 100 and 1 200 L80, 100, 150, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350,400, 450, 500 and 600 80,100,150,200,225,250,300,350and400
5.2 Selected following. 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3
specimen test
shall
be tested
for
the
Hydrostatic
Three edge hearing test or sand bearing test Absorption test -
cent of the dry weight in first 10 minutes
shall not exceed 2.5 perand 6.5 percent at the end of 24 hours. 5.2.4 Bursting test - Ultimate tensile strength of concrete not less than 21 kgf/cm2.
Note 1 - For wall thickness. length of barrel and collar of pipes, the minimum reinforcements and strength test requirements of seven types of pipes, refer to Tables 1 to 7 of the sumkwd.
Note 1 -For
requirements of material, design and manufacture, refer to the stundurd.
Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to 1S : 3597-1966Methods of test for concrete pipes and 456-1978 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 458-1971 Specification for concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement) (second revision).
33
IS : 784-1978 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PIPES (INCLUDING FITTINGS) (First Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements of ptestressed concrete cylinder and non-cylinder pipes (including fittings) with nominal internal diameter in the range of 80 mm to 1 800 mm, in which permanent internal stresses are deliberately introduced by tensioned steel counteract the stresses caused in the pipe under service to the desired degree.
2. b) For pipes of length 4 m and above: Internal Diameter Tolerance A \ Over test In areas within 600 mm of an end of the pipe of the pipe mm +6 +9 z!I 12 mm +9 + 12 f 12
Termindogy
2.1 Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe - A welded sheet steel cylinder with steel socket and spigot rings welded to its ends, lined with concrete suitably compacted and circumferentially prestmssed to withstand internal pressure and external design loads and subsequently coated with cement mortar to protect the steel cylinder and ptestressing wires. 2.2 Prestressed Concrete Non-cylinder Pipe - A suitably compacted concrete core longitudinally pmstressed with pm-tensioned high tensile steel wire embedded in the concrete, circumferentially prestressed to withstand internal pressure and external design loads and subsequently coated with cement mortar/ concrete to protect the circumferential prestressing wire.
Up to 90 mm Over 900 mm, upto 1 600mm Over 1 600 mm 3.2.3 Thickness
- Shall be as below: Tolerance mm Iii 1.5 + 2.0 f 3.0 It(3mm+ lmmfor every 15 mm or part thereof over 50 mm, limited to maximum of 5 mm)
Wall Thickness Up to 25 mm Over 25 mm, up to 35 mm Over 35 mm, up to 50 mm Over 50 mm
3. 3.1
Dimensions and Tderances

4.
Dimensions - The internal diameter and the length of pipes shall be as specified in Table 1.
TABLE 1 INTERNAL DIAMETER PIPES AND LENGTH bNGTHOFhiI m and 2, 2.5, 4, 5 or 6 2.5, 4, 5 or 6 OF
Workmanship and Finish
4.1
IIWXNALDIAMETEROF PIPE mm 80, 100, 125, 150,250,300,350 400 450,500,600,700,800,900,1000, 1100,1200,1400,1600and1800
The maximum permissible deviation from the straight on internal surfaces of any pipe throughout its length shall not exceed 3 mm for every metre length for all pipe diameters.
4.2 Pipes shall be free from local depressions or bulges greaterthan 5 mm in depth and extending overa length, in any direction, greater than twice the thickness of barrel. 5.
Tests
Visual Inspection Dimensional Characteristics
3.2
Tolerances Length Shall not vary by more than + 1
5.1
5.2
3.2.1 percent. 3.2.2
internal diameter
a) For pipes of length less than 4m: _+5mm * 10mm For dia up to 300 mm For dia exceeding 300 mm and up to 800 mm 34
5.3 Hydrostatic Proof Test - The hydrostatic proof test pressure shall be one and a half times the working pressure except where the strength has to be increased to take care of surge or water hammer. In such cases, the pressure shall be the working pressure, plus allowance for surge, or one and a half times the working pressure, whichever is the greater.
SP : 21-1983
5.4 Permeability Test - The drop of water level in the stand pipe shall not exceed 1 cm3 in half an hour taken over a period of 2 hours.
Note l--For Note 2-For
5.5 Three-Edge Pipes). I
Bearing
Test (for Non-cylinder
requirements regarding materials, design criteria, manufacture, fittings and joints, refer to the standard. methods of tests and other test details, refer to the stundurd and IS : 3597-1966 Methods of test for concrete pipes.
For detailed information, fittings) (first revision).
refer to IS : 784-1978 Specification for prestressed
concrete pipes (including
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1916-1963 STEEL CYLINDER REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES

1. Scope - Requirements and methods of tests for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes of nominal internal dia 200 mm to 1 800 mm for use in water mains, sewers, irrigation works, etc, having (a) spigot and socket ends, .and (b) plain ends on slip-in type ends suitable for field welding. Requirements for specials are not covered. 2. Classification Class 1 2 3 4 5 Special class 3. Materials conform to When plate conform to Test Pressure (kgf/cm*) 5 10 15 20 25 Above 25 350 and 400 450 to 1 100 1 200 to 1 800 45 50 70 20 25 30 25 25 40 Working Pressure 50 percent for pumping mains, and 67 percent for gravity mains 4. Dimensions
4.1 Dicaneter - Internal 200, 250, 300, 350,400, 450,500,600,700,900, 1 100, 1 200, 1 400, 1 600 and 1 800 mm. Tolerance +3 mm for pipes up to 300 mm diameter and lesser, of f 6 mm or + 1l/i percent for larger pipes. 4.2 Barrel Thickness Thickness (mm) Inner Face to Centre of Steel (mm)
15
Diameter (mm)
Outer Face to Centre of Steel (mm) 25
200t0300
40
3.1 Steel plates for cylinder shall IS : 226-1975* or IS : 2062-1962t. thickness exceeds 20 mm, it shall IS : 2062-1962t.
3.2
Aggregates - Maximum size 10 mm or onethird the thickness of concrete covering. Concrete andMortar - Minimum cement content 380 kg/m3 of concrete and minimum cube strength 3.50 kgf/cm* .
3.3 Specilicationforstructuralsteel(standardquality)(fifih revision). Wpecification for stmctural steel (fusion welding quality) (Frsr revision). Note-For
5. Tests - Each steel cylinder shall undergo hydraulic test for test pressure given in 2. 6. Workmanship and Finish - Pipes shall be straight and free from cracks. The ends of pipes shall be square with their longitudinal axis. No opening .between ends in contact shall exceed 3 mm in pipes up to 600 mm dia and 6 mm in pipes larger than 600 mm dia. The surface of pipes shall be smooth, dense and hard.
detailed requirements of material, design and manufacture, and method of test, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1916-1963 Specification for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes. 35
SP : 21-1983 /
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4350-1967 CONCRETE
POROUS PIPES FOR UNDER DRAINAGE

TABLE 2 COLLAR DIMENSIONS MINIMUM
LENGTH
1. Scope - Requirements for porous pipes made of concrete for use in under drainage, ranging from 80 mm to 900 mm nominal internal diameter with three types of joints. 2. Materials Cement - Ordinary and low heat Portland cement and Portland slag cement. Use of high alumina cement resisting cement is optional. or sulphate Aggregate - All aggregates shall pass through 20 mm IS Sieve and retained on 4.75 mm IS Sieve. 3. Shape and Dimensions
NOMINAL INTERNAL COLI.AR DIME~SIOXS GAMETES 0F RPE ,-A-7 Minimum Caulking Minimum Thickness Space (1) mm (2) mm (3) mm
(4) mm
801
150
250) 300 350 4oG>

450 500 >
3.1 Pipes may have butt ends; or rebated or ogee ends. 3.2 Dhensions of Pipes -- See Table 1.
16
30
150
19
35
200
TABLE
1 DIMENSIONS FOR CONCRETE POROUS PIPFS

EFFECI IVE LENGTH MINIMUM WALL
THICKNESS
600
NOMINAL.
JOINTS
700 > 800
19
40
200
lNTFRNAL DIAMETER (1) mm 801
19
45
200
(2) m
(31
mm
(4)
wo>
;g
2.0
25
3.4.1 Deviation frm straightness ceed 3 mm per metre run.

Butt, rebated or ogee
Not to ex-
4. Tests - Selected specimens shall be subjected to the following tests.

30
;; 6001 700) 800 WO
2.5 or 3 2.5 or 3 .o 2.5 or 3.0 2.5 or 3.0
35
4.1 Load Test - Specimens shall support a minimum load of 2 000 kg uniformly distributed per metre length of pipe without showing any signs of failure. 4.2 Infiltration Test - Rate of infiltration be less than the following: Nuninal Internal Dia (mm) shall not
40 45 50
Butt, rebated or ogee Butt, rebated or ogee Butt, rebated or ogee
3.3 Dhensions See Table 2. 3.4
for Collar (for Butt End Pipes) 80- 100 150 250 300-900
Tolerance - Lengths + 1 percent. lntemal diameter +3 mm Up to 300 mm -1.5 mm 300 to 400 mm +6 mm -3 mm Over 400 mm + 1.5 percent -0.75 percent For detailed
requirements of materials, manufacture
Rate of tnfltration per Metre Length of Pipe (litre/min) 60 120 180 300
Note-
and finish, methods of tests and typical
sketch, refer to Ihe standard. under

drainage.
refer to IS : 4350-1967
Specification for
concrete porous pipes for
36
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 73 19- 1974 PERFORATED

1. Scope reinforced work.
Note 1 -
CONCRETE PIPES
The minimum Tolerances a) Overall length +l percent laying length shall be 1 m.
Requirements of perforated nonconcrete pipes for use in underdrainage
4.1
4.2
Reinforced mutual agreement.
concrete
pipes may be supplied
by re-
b) Internal diameter of pipe

and socket Up to 300 mm Over 300 up to 400 mm Over 400 mm +1.5 _. 75 percent 11.5 mm +2 mm 13 mm shall not exceed +3 - 1.5 mm
Note 2 - These pipes anz used in infiltration galleries, claiming water logged areas, etc.
2.
Classification
a) Circular Perforations Pipes - 5 to 8 mm dia, perforations arranged in rows parallel to axis, and spaced about 75 mm centre to centre along rows. Rows shall be spaced over not more than 165 of circumference. b) Slotted Perforations Pipes - Slots shall be circumferential in.direction, width 3 to 5 mm and length and spacing as in table in 4 below. Two rows of slots spaced 165.
c) Barrel wall thickness

up to 25 mm over 25 mm to 30 mm over 30 mm to 50 mm
4 Deviation
3 mm/m
from straight
3. Materials - Size of aggregate shall not exceed one-third the thickness of pipe or 20 mm. In case of concrete other than controlled concrete, mix shall have minimum cement content of 360 kg/m3 and a minimum compressive strength of 185 kgf/cm2at 28 days in work tests. If mortaris used, it shall have a minimum cement content of 450 kg/m3 and a compressive strength of not less than 185 kgf/cm* at 28 days in work tests. 4. Sizes and Mmensions Internal Dia Minimum Thickness of Barrel Rows of Perforation Perforation per Row
Note - For detailed physical test and dimensional requirements for standard strength of bell and spigot, perforated nonminforced conctete underdrainage pipe, refer to Table 1 with Fig. 1 of rhe srundard.
5. 5.1
Shall be substantially free from fractures, cracks and blisters, laminations and surface roughness.
5.2 Joints - Spigot and socket type (tongue and groove joint, collar joint, etc, permissible by mutual agreement).
Length of Slot
Spacing of Slot
Minimum Strength (Three-Edge Bearing Method)
(1)
mm 80 100 150 200 225 250 300 350 400 450
(2)
mm
(3)
(4) 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
(5) mm 25 25 37.5 50 50 50 75 75 75 75
(6)
mm 50 75 75 100 100 100 150 150 150 150
c/J
kg/m 1 560 1 560 1 560 1 670 1 670 1690 I 880 2 020 2 230
25 25 25 25 25 25 30 32 32 35
37
SP : 21-1983
5.3
Curves
Specials -
Shall have spigot and socket ends. shall be at 90, 45 and 22%.
6. 6.1
Tests Three-Edge Bearing Test or Sand Bearing Test
5.4
Two weeks for ordinary cement and 1 week for rapid hardening cement. Steam curing is also permissible.
Water Curing -
6.2 Absorption Test - Total absorption at the end of 24 hours shall not exceed 8 percent of dry weight.
Note-For
tat details, refer to IS : 3597-1966 Methods of tests for concrete pipes.
refer to IS : 7319-1974 Specification for perforated concrete pipes.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7322-1974 SPECIALS FOR STEEL CYLINDER CONCRETE PIPES

Scope - Requirements and methods of tests for steel cylinder reinforced concrete specials for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes conforming to IS : 1916-1963* having internal diameter from 200 to 1 800 mm. Covers specials having: a) spigot and socket ends, 1.
4.
REINFORCED
Dimensions
The nominal internal diameter for bends, tees, and scour tees and flanges shall be 200,250,300,350, 400,450,500,600,700,900, 1 100, 1 200, 1400, 1 600 and 1 800 mm.
Note - Fordetailed dimensions for bends, tees, scour tees and flange details, see Fig. 1 to 4 of the standard.
5.
4.1
b) plain ends or slip-in type ends suitable for

field welding, or
cl flanged ends for connection with valves and

accessories. 2. Classification - Specials have the same classification as for pipes given in 2.10 of IS : 19161963*, but shall have test pressure as below: Class 1, 2 and 3 Class 4 and 5 Special class kgf/cm* 15 25 Above 25, as specified by the purchaser
Tolerances
I f40 mm
a) Arm length b) Arm length (specified) c) Internal dia up to 300 mm over 300 mm
+ 10 mm +3 mm +6 mm or 11% percent, whichever is less + 1
d) Angular deviation 6.
Note - As a general guide the corresponding working pressures for these specials may be taken as 50 percent and 67 perLent of the above values for pumping mains and gravity mains respectively.
6.1
3. Materials - Aggregate size shall not exceed one-third the wall thickness or 10 mm. Concrete mix shall have minimum cement content of 450 kg/m3 and a minimum compressive strength of 200 kg/cm* at 28 days works test. If mortar is used minimum cement content shall be 600 kg/m3 and compressive strength of 200 kg/cm* at 28 days works test.
*Specification for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes.
Specials shall be free from cracks when placed in site trench, no opening between ends in contact shall exceed 3 mm in specials up to 600 mm dia and 6 mm in specials larger than 600 mm dia.
6.2 Specials shall be free from local dents or bulges greater than 3.0 mm in depth and extending over a length in any direction greater than twice the thickness of barrcl. 7. 7.1 38
Tests
Specimens shall be hydrostatically tested at
SP : 21-1983 works before lining with concrete. Where this is not practicable, unlined special may be tested by application of a penetration oil or other approved means, by mutual agreement. 7.2 Hydrostatic Test - According IS : 1916-1%3* and IS : 3597-1966t. to 7.1 of 7.3 Penetration Oil Test - A hot paraffin oil (at temperature generally 20C below its flash point) when poured over the weld from the inside surface, should not show any sign of leakage of its vapour on the outside of the welded joints.
*Specification for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes. tMethods of test for concrete pipes.
Note-For
requirements regarding design and manufacture, refer to 4 and 7 of the s~undard.
For detailed information, concrete pipes.
refer to IS : 7322-1974 Specification for specials for steel cylinder reinforced
39
SECTION
POZZOLANAS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title
IS:
Page
1344-1981
Calcined clay pozzolana (second revision) Fly ash for use as pozzolana and admixture (first revision)
43
44
IS : 3812-1981
42
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1344-1981 CALCINED CLAY POZZOLANA
(Second Revision)
1. Scope-Requirements of calcined clay pozzolana for part replacement of unblended cements, for use with lime, for use as an admixture and for manufacture of Portland pozzolana cement conforming to IS : 1489-1976*, and gives guidelines for manufacture of calcined clay pozzolana. 2. Designationing grades: Shall be supplied in the followMagnesium oxide (MgO) Sulphuric anhydride (SO,) Soda and Potash (NazO + KzO) Water-soluble alkali Water-soluble material Loss on ignition Not more than 3 percent Not more than 3 percent Not more than 3 percent Not more than 0.1 percent Not more than 1 percent Not more than 10 percent Table 1.
Grade Designation
Grade I
General Use
4.
Physical Requirements -see

TABLE 1 PHYSICAL
Grade II
For incorporation in unblended cement mortar and concrete and in lime-pozzolana mixture, and for manufacture of Portland pozzolana cement. For incorporation in unblended cement mortar and concrete and in lime-pozzolana mixture. Also for manufacture of Portland pozzolana cement by intergrinding method subject to requirements of IS : 14891976*.
REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENT A
SL No.
CHARACTERISTIC =
-Chade I
Grade II(4) 250
(1) (2) i) Fineness - Specific surface in
(3) 320
3. Raw Materials-Clay for manufacture of pozzolana shall conform generally to the following chemical requirements on an oven dry basis (at 105C):
m2/kg by Blaines permeability method, Min ii) Lime reactivity - Average corn4.0 3.b pressive strength in N/mm2, Min iii) Compressive strength* at Not less than 80 28 days, Min percent of the strength of corresponding plain c e m e n t mortar cubes 0.15 iv) Drying shrinkage, Mux 0.10 *Applicable in case of pozzolana to be used for manufacture of Portland-pozzolana cement only.
Contents Silica+altmnna +iron oxide Not less than 70 per(SiOz + Al,O, + FezOJ) Silica (SiOs) Calcium oxide (CaO) cent Not less than 40 percent Not more than 10 percent
Constituents
5. Delivery-Packed in bags of 50 kg net. Tolerance + 2.5 percent per bag and f 0.5 percent per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
*Specification for Portland-pozzolana cement (second revision). Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1727-1%7 Methods of test for pozzolanic materials (first revision) and for other details of testing, refer to the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1344-1981 Specification for calcined clay pozzolana (second
revision).
43
SP :.21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS :, 3812-1981 FLY ASH FOR USE AS POZZOLANA AND ADMIXTURE
(First Revision)
1. ,SCope- Extraction and physical and chemical requirements of fly ash for use as a pozzolana for part replacement of cement, for use with lime, for use as an admixture and for manufacture of Portland-pozzolana cement conforming to IS : 1489-1976*.
Note-Fly ash with loss on ignition value up to I2 pcrccnt may be used for replacement of cement.
TABLE 1
SL No.
CHEMICAL
REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENT
CHARACTERISTIC
(1) 9 Silicon dioxide
(2)
2. Designation-Shall grades: Grade Designation Grade I
be supplied in following General Use
(SKI,) plus aluminium oxide (Alz03) plus iron oxide (FezOl), percent by mass, Min ii) Silicon dioxide (SiOz), percent by mass, Min iii) Magnesium oxide (MgO), percent by mas,
(3) 70.0
35.0 5.0 2.75 1.5 12.0
. Max
iv) Total sulphur as sulphur trioxide (SO& percent by mass, MUX v) Available alkalis as sodium oxide (NazO), percent by mass, Max (see Note I) vi) Loss on ignition, percent by mass, Max
For incorporation in cement mortar and concrete and in lime pozzolana mixture, and for manufacture of Portlandpozzolana cement. For incorporation in cement mortar hnd concrete and in lime pOZZOlaila mixture. Also for manufacture of Portland-pozzolana cement subject p requirements of IS : 14891976*.
Note I - Applicable only when reactive aggregates are used in concrete and especially requested by the purchaser. Note 2 - For determination of available alkalis, IS : 4032-l968* shall be referred to. *Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
Grade II
TABLE 2
SL
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
REQUIHEMEN
CHARACTERISTIC
No. Grade
A Grade
I (2) (3) (: 320 i) Fineness - Specific surface in 250 m2/kg by Blaines permeability method, Min ii) Lime reacfivily - Average com40 3.0 pressive strength in N/mmz, Min iii) Compressive strength at Not less than 80 percent of the 28 days, Mh strength of corresponding plain cement mortar cubes 0.15 iv) Drying shrinkage, percent, Max 0.10 0.8 v) Soundness by autoclave test, ex0.8 pansion of specimens, percent, Max (1)
3. Extraction-From flue gases of ground or pulverized coal, or lignite fired boilers by any suitable process, such as cyclone separation or electrostatic precipitation. 4.
5.
Chemical Requirements-See Physical Requirements--See

*Specification for Portland-porzolana
Table 1. Table 2.
cement (second
revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1727-1967Methods of test for pozzolanic materials (first revision) and for other details of testing, refer to the stun&&. For
detailed information, refer to IS : 3812-1981 Specification for fly ash for we as pozzolana and admixture (first revision).
44
SECTION
BUILDING LIMES
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title
Page
IS: 712-1973 IS : 2686-1977 IS : 3068-1975 IS : 3115-1978 IS : 3182-1975 IS : 4098-1967 IS : 4139-1976
Building limes (second revision) Cinder aggregates for use in lime concrete (first revision) Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregates for use in lime concrete
yirst revision)
47
50
51
Lime based blocks yirst revision) Broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar (first
revision)
::
Lime-pozzolana mixture Sandlime bricks (first revision)
53 54
46
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 712-1973 BUILDING LIMES

(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for construction purposes. 2. Classification: Class AClass Class for building limes
used Class D -
BC-
Eminently hydraulic lime used for structural purposes. Semi-hydraulic lime used for masonry mortars. Fat lime used for finishing coat in plastering, whitewashing, etc, and
Class E -
with addition of pozzolanic material for masonry mortar. Magnesium lime used for finishing coat in plastering, whitewashing, etc. Kankar lime used for masonry mortars. -See Table 1.
3. 4.
Chemical
Requirements
See Table 2.
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL
SL
BEQUIBEMENTS
, REQUIREMENTS h
TYPE OF TEST / Class A
No.
Class B
Class C Hydrated (7) 85
Class D Quick (8) 85 Hydrated (9) 85
Class E Hydrated (10) 25
--Hydrated _Quick
Hydrated . Quick (5) 70 (6) 85
(1)
(2)
percent, Min
(3) 60
(4) 70
9 Calcium and magnesium oxides,

ii) Magnesium oxide, percent: Max Min iii) Silica, alumina and ferric oxide, percent, Min iv) Unhydrated oxides, percent, Max v) Insoluble residue in hydrochloric acid less the silica, percent, Max vi) Insoluble matter in sodium carbonate solution, percent, Max vii) Loss on ignition, percent, Max
5 25 -
5 -
5 -
5 -
5 -
5 -
I5
I5
--
8 -
5 -
5 -
5 for large lump, 7 for lime other than large lump 5 5 5
5 for large lump, 7 for lime other than large lump 5
5 for large lump, 7 for lime other than large lump 5 5
viii) Carbon dioxide, percent, Max ix) Cementation Min MUX value:
0.6 -
0.3 0.6
0.3 0.6
47
TABLEt 2
SL TYPB OF TEST
PHYSICAL REQUREMENTS
REQlJIRF.MEm
6 .. Class D A Class E \ Hydrated (10)

E 8 t; E
No.
CkX%A Hydrated (3) Shall leave no residue on 2.36mm IS Sieve, not more than 5 percent on MOmicron IS Sieve and the fraction passing through 850 - micron IS Sieve shall leave not more than 10 percent (of this fraction) on 300 - micron IS Sieve vQuick (4) -
Class B Quick (6) -
Chss c A (5) Hydrated (7) v Quick (8) -
(I)
(2)
Hydrated (9)
i) Fineness
Shall leave no residue on 2.36~mm IS Sieve, not more than 5 percent on 850 - micron IS Sieve and the fraction passing through 850-micron IS Sieve shall leave not more than 10 percent (of this fraction) on 300micron IS Sieve
Shall leave no residue on 850-micron IS Sieve, not more than 5 percent on 300 - micron IS Sieve and the fraction passing through 300-micron IS Sieve shall leave not more than 10 percent (of this fraction) on 212micron IS Sieve
Shall leave no resi- Shall leave no residue on 2.36 due on 850 micron mm IS Sieve, IS Sieve,not more not more than 5 than 5 percent on percent on 850300 - micron IS micron IS Sieve Sieve and the fracand the fraction tion passing throupassing through gh 300-micron IS 850 - micron IS Sieve shall leave Sieve shall leave not more than 10 not more than percent (of this fraction) on 21210 percent (of micron IS Sieve this fraction) on 300 - micron IS Sieve
ii) Residueon slaking (on the basis of quick lime taken), Max, txxent, by
10 on WO-micron IS Sieve
5 on 850-micron IS Sieve, the fraction passing through this Sieve when further passed through 3Ofbicron IS Sieve shall leave residue 5
5 on 850-micron IS Sieve, the fraction passing through this Sieve when further passed through 3O@micron IS Sieve shall leave residue 5
iii) Setting time
In the putty of standard consiinitial stency, set shall take place in not less than 2 hours and final set within 48 hours
In the putty of standard cons1 initial stency. set shall take place in not less than 2 hours and final set within 48 hours
iv) Compressive strength, Min
17.5 kgf/cm2 after 14 days and 28 kgf/cm2 after 28 days shall, however, show an increase over that at 14 days
12.5 kgf/cmz after 14 days and 17.5 kgf/ cm2 at 28 days shall, however, show an increase over that at 14 days
10.5 kgf/crG after 14 days and 17.5 kgf/cm2 after 28 days shall,. however; show an increase over that at 14 days Modulus of rupture not less than 7.0 kgf/cm2 at 28 days
v) Transverse strength
Modulus of rupture not less than 7.0 kgf/cm2 at 28 days
Modulus of rupture not less than 7.0 kgf/cmz at 28 days
-.
vi) Workability
t2
vii) Volume yield
Shall require not less than 12 bumps to attain an average spread of 19 cm from an initial spread of 11 cm on the flow table 1.7mlpergor as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier -
Shall require not less than 10 bumps to attain an average spread of 19 cm from an initial spreadofllcm on the flow table
Shall require not less than 12 bumps to attain an average spread of 19 cm from an initial spread of 1 I cm on the flow table 1.4 ml per g or as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier
Shall require not less than 10 bumps to attain an average spread of 19 cm from an initial spread of 1 I cm on the flow table
viii) Soundness
The Le. Chatelier moulds shall not exhibit more than 10 mm expansion
The Le Chateliar moulds shall not exhibit more than 10 mm expansion
The Le Chatelier moulds shall not exhibit more than 10 mm expansion
ix) Popping and pitting
Shall not exhibit any disintegration popping or pitting on the surface
Shall not exhibit any disintegration popping or pitting on the surface
SP : 21-1983 5. Packing - Hydrated lime in jute bags lined with polythene or craft paper bags containing 50 kg. Quick lime in metal 50 kg. or other suitable containers of
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 6932 (Parts I to X)-l973 Methods of test for building limes and IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement.
For
detailed information, refer to IS : 712-1973 Specification for building limes (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2686- 1977 CINDER AGGREGATES FOR USE IN LIME CONCRETE (First Revision)
1. scope - Requirements aggregates in lime concrete. 2. General for cinder for use as
4.
Grading IS Sieve IO-mm 4.75~mm 2.36-mm 1.18~mm 600-micron 300~micron 150micron
Average grading is as under:
Percentage Passing
100 80 60 40 30 25 16
Cinder aggregates shall be well-burnt obtained from furnaces using coal as fuel. It shall be clean and free from clay, dirt, wood ash or other deleterious matter.
furnace residue
3.
Classes Class A Class B Class C for general purposes, for interior work not exposed to damp conditions, and for precast blocks. 5.
Characteristics
5.1 Sulphate Content - Shall not exceed 1 percent when expressed as sulphur trioxide. 5.2 Loss on ignition - Shall not exceed 10 percent for Class A, 20 percent for Class B and 25 percent for Class C.
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of
thesrundard.
For detailed information, concrete (first revision).
refer to IS : 2686-1977 Specification for cinder aggregates for use in lime
50
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3068-1975 BROKEN BRICK (BURNT CLAY) COARSE AGGREGATES FOR USE IN LIME CONCRETE (First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for coarse aggregate prepared from broken bricks for use in lime concrete. 2. Quality - Shall be prepared from well burnt or over burnt broken bricks conforming to IS : 10771976*. Shall IX free from under burnt particles, soil and silt. Dust shall be removed by screening over 4.75 mm IS Sieve. 3. Physical Properties 3.2 Water soluble matter shall not exceed 1 percent.
3.3 Aggregate impact value not to exceed 50 percent. 4. Size Grading shall be as specified below:
IS Sieve 80-mm 40-mm 20-mm 4.75-mm
Percentage Passing, by Weight

100 95-100 45-75 -
3.11 Water absorption after 24 hours on immersion in water shall not exceed 25 percent.
*Specification for common burnt clay building fjhird revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standurd and IS : X40-1970 Method of test for determining aggregates impact value of soft coarse aggregates.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3048-1975 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregates for use in lime concrete (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 31151978 LIME BASED BLOCKS (First Revision)

1. Scope - Dimension, quality and strength requirement of lime based blocks (both hollow and solid) used for walls, internal partitions and filler walls. 2. Generd Requirements - All blocks shall be sound, faze from cracks, broken edges, distortion and other defects. Bedding surface shall be at right angles to face of blocks. The ends of blocks may be plain, tongued and grooved or double grooved. 3. Types a) Type A Block with both faces keyed for plastering. Block with both faces smooth and suitable for use without 51 4. 4.1 plastering or rendering on either side. c) Type C Blocks with one face keyed and one face smooth.
Dimensions
Actual Sizes
Length Width Height 39 cm 10, 20, 30 cm 9, 19cm
4.2 Tolerances - +5 mm in length and f 1.5 mm in width and height. 4.3 Hollow block shall be made with one or more cavities and wall thickness at any point shall not be less than 40 mm.
b) Type B -
SP : 21-1983 5. Physical Requirements Shall not be less than I 000 not fall below minimum 20 percent. 5.3 Drying Shrinkage cent. average value by more than Shall not exceed 0.1 perShall not exceed 0.05
5.1 Bloc4 lkrzsir~ kg/n+.
5.2 Compressive Strength - Average strength shall not be less than 3.5 N/mm (35 kgf/cmz), on gross area and compressive strength of any individual block shall
5.4 Moisture M~~~ementpercent.
Note-For methods of measuring dimensions of blocks and methods of tests, refer to IS : 2185 (Part I)-1979 Specification for concrete masonry units: Part I Solid and hollow concrete blocks (second revision).
For detailed informution,
refer to IS : 3115-1978 Specification for lime based blocks (first revision).
-i SUMMARY OF
IS : 3182-1975 BROKEN BRICK (BURNT CLAY) FINE AGGREGATE FOR USE IN LIME MORTAR
(First Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirement for broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar. 2. General Quality - Shall be prepared from broken/solid bricks conforming to class 50 of IS : 1077-1976*. Shall be free from underburnt particles, pyrites, soil and silt. 3. 3.1 Physical Properties Quantity of clay, fine silt and fine No. 1) 4. Grading - Particle size grading (for use in lime mortars for masonry work) shall be as follows: IS Sieve 4.75mm 2.36-mm 1.18-mm 600 pm 300 flrn 150 pm
Percentage Passing (by mass)

100 90 to 100 70 to 100
40 to 100
Impurity -
5 to oto
70 15
dust shall not exceed 5 percent by weight.

*Specification for common burnt clay building bricks (third
revision).
Note-For method of test, refer to IS : 2386 (Part II)-1963 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part II Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3182-1975 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate .for use in lime mortar (first revision).
52
IS : 4098-1967 LIME-POZZOLANA
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for lime-pozzolana ture for use in construction works. 2. Types a) LP40 For masonrv mortars and plasters of grade 30 to 50 kgf/cm2 -and for foundation concrete.
r
MIXTURE
No. 1 and 2) 3. Requirements See Table 1.
mix-
3.2 Soundnc~ - Shall remain firm and hard without signs of distortion, cracking, etc, after being subjected to 55f2.5C for 7 days. 4. Delivery - In bags containing 50 kg net. Tolerance: +2.5 percent per bag and kO.5 percent per wagon load.
b) LP20 -
For masonry mortars and plasters of grade 15 to 30 kgf/cm2 and for foundation concrete. For masonry mortars and plasters of grade 7 to 15 kgf/cm2.
c) LP7
SL
TABLE 1 REQUIRJDIENTS OF LIME-POZZOLANA MIXTURES (Clause 3)

C%ARACWRISTIC
REQUIREMENTS
No. / LP40 i) ii) iii) iv) Free moisture, percent, Max Loss on ignition, percent, Max Fineness, percent, retained on 150-micron IS Sieve Setting time (by Vicat apparatus), hours: a) Initial, Min b) Final, MUX v) Compressive strength: Average compressive strength of not less than 3 mortar cubes of size 50 mm posed of one part of lime-pozzolana mixture and 3 parts of standard by volume, kgf/cm? a) 7 days, Min b) 28 days, Min vi) Water retention-flow after suction of mortar composed of one part of pozzolana mixture and 3 parts of standard sand by volume, percent of original Min 5 20 10 2 24 comsand 20 40 70 10 20 70 3 7 70 LP20
5
LP7
5
20 10 2 36
20 2 48
limeflow,
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the sfondard, IS : 1727-1967Methods of test for pozzolanic materials (first revision), and IS : 2250-1980 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4098-1967 Specification for lime-pozzolana mixture.
53
IS : 4139-1976 SANDLIME BRICKS (First Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements regarding dimensions, compressive strength, classes and drying shrinkage of sandlime bricks.
2. General Requirements - Bricks shall be sound, compact and uniform in shape and free from visible cracks, warpage and organic matter. 3. Dimensions - Shall be 190~ 90X 90 mm and 190~90~40 mm. Tolerance of length +3 mm and of breadth and height +2 mm. 4. Classes - Shall be of the following 4 classes depending on average compressive strength: Class / 75 100 150 200 Average Compressive Strength kgf/cm2 (N/mm2) A Not less than 75 (7.5) 100 (10) 150 (15) 200 (20) Less loo 150 200 than (10) (15) (20)
5. 5.1
Physical Characteristics
Minimum average wet compressive strength not be less than what is specified for each in 4. Compressive strength of any individual shall not fall below this minimum average by than 20 percent. Shall not exceed the
shall class block more
5.2 Drying Shrinkage figures given below: Class 75 100 150 200
Drying Shrinkage (Percent of Wet Length) 0.025 0.025 0.035 -
Note- For methods of tests, refer to Appendix A of thesfandurdand IS : 3495 (Part I)-1976 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks: Part I Determination of compressive strength (second revision).
refer to IS : 4139-1976 Specification for sandlime bricks (first revision).
54
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS : 1127-1970 IS: IS: IS: IS : IS : IS : 1128-1974 1130-1969 3316-1974 3620-1979 3622-1977 6250-1981 Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship building stones for masonry work yirst revision) Limestone (slab and tiles) (first revision) Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles) Structural granite (first revision) Laterite stone block for masonry first revision) Sandstone (slabs and tiles) (first revision) Roofing slate tiles yirst revision) of natural
Page 57 58 59 60 60 61 62
56
IS : 1127-1970 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DIMENSIONS AND WORKMANSHIP OF NATURAL BUILDING STONES FOR MASONRY WORK
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones used for various types of masonry. 2. Dimensions - See Table 1 (based on thickness of joints 3 mm for ashlar; 6 mm for block in course and 10 mm for square rubble).
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS
SL
OF NATURAL BUILDING STONES

LENGTH BREADTH HEIGHT
No.
TYPE OP MASCINRY w
(1)
(3) mm
(4) mm 297 347 397 194 244 90 90,140 90,140,190 90,140,190 90,14$190,240 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290 297 347 397 194 244
(5)
mm
i) Stones for ashlar
597 697 797 394 494 90 140 190 240 290 390 440 490 590
ii) Stones for block in course
iii) Stones for square rubble
90 90,140 90,140,190 90,140,190 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290
iv) Stones for random rubble
May be of any sire and shape but not less than 150 mm in any direction
v) Stones for sills and lintels
a)
890,
99% lOOR
1 190, 1290
90,190,290,390,490
90,140,190
b) 1390, 1490, 159% 1690, 1190 vi) Stones for arches, domes and circular moulded work vii) Coping stones
190,290,390,490,590
140,190,240,290
The dimensions depend on the particulars of the curve 190,290,390 490,590,690, 790 390,490,590, 690,790 200,300,400,500 600 100,150,200
viii) Kerb stones
100,200,300
300,400,500
57
SP : 21-1983 3. Tolerance - For ashlar _+5 mm in length and breadth and f3 mm in height. For other types of masonry + 5, - 10 mm in length and breadth and +5 mm in height. Note-For 4. Workmanship Stratified rocks shall be so
quarried and dressed that the stones, when set in

building, are laid along plane of stratification.
details of dressing of stones, refer t0 4.3 of the .HUndWd.
For &tailed
information, refer to IS : 1127-1970 Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones for masonry work (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 112% 1974 LIMESTONE (SLAB AND TILES) (First Revision)

1. Scope-Requirements for dimensions and physical properties of limestone slabs and tiles for use in flooring and face work.
General Requirements - Stone shall be without any soft veins, cracks or flaws and have a uniform texture. Curvature shall not exceed 5 mm in any direction. 3. Dimensions Shall be as follows:
4.
Tolerance in Thickness - + 5 mm up to 25 mm and +5 mm for thickness above 25 mm. 5. Physical Properties See Table 1.
2.
TABLE 1
PHYSICAL PROPERTlES LIMESTONE SLABS
OF
Length
15 to 60 cm in stages of 5 cm 60 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm 100 to 150 cm in stages of 10 cm
Breadth 15 to 60 cm
in stages of 5 cm 30to 1OOcm in stages of 10 cm do
Thickness
15 to 95 mm in stages of 10 mm do
SL No. (1) i) ii) iii)
CHARACTERLWCS
REQUIREMENTS
(3)
(2)
Water absorption
Transverse strength Durability
0.15 percent by weight

70 kgf/cm* Shall not develop signs of spalling, disintegration of cracks
25 to 95 nun in stages of 10 cm
Note- For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1121(Part II)-1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties ofnatural building stones: Part II Transverse strength (first revision), IS : 1124-1974Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS : 1126-1974Method of test for determination of durability of natural building stones (first revirion).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1128-1974 Specification for limestone (slab and tiles) first revision).
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1130-1969 MARBLE (BLOCKS, SLABS AND TILES)

1. Scope - Reqtiirements for sizes, physical properties, quality and workmanship of marble (blocks, slabs and tiles). 2.
3.
5.2 Slnhs - +2 percent +3 percent for thickness.
for length
and width; for
Classification
(a) white, and (b) coloured.
5.3 Tiles - +4 percent for linear dimensions; thickness, see 4.2. 6. Physical
TABLE
SL 1
Properties
-See
Table 1.
General Requirements - The marble, as far as possible, shall be free from foreign inclusions and prominent cracks. Sizes
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MARBLE

REQUIREMENT
CHARACTERISTIC
4.
4.1 Blocks and slabs shall be supplied in following sizes:
Length
Blocks Slabs
Width
Thickness
30 to 250 cm 30 to 100 cm 30 to 100 ctn 70 to 250 cm 30 to 100 cm 20 to 150 mm

All the
sizes given above are in stage of 10.
No. (1) (2) i) Moisture absorption after 24 hours immersion in cold water ii) Hardness (Mhos Scale) iii) Specific gravity
(3) 0.4 percent by weight, MUX
3 Min 2.5 Min
Note -
7. Workmanship - Edges of slabs and tiles shall be true. Finish may be one of the following: a) Sand and/or abrasive reflective surface. b) Hone finish no gloss. c) Polished surface. finish A flat non-
4.2
Size @Tiles .- 60x60 cm, 50x50
cm, 40x40
cm, 30x30 cm, 20x20 cm, and 10x 10 cm. Thickness 18 to 24 mm in the same piece.
A velvety finish with little or Highly polished glossy
5. 5.1
Tolerance
Blocks
1 -A
finish -
+2 percent for all dimensions.
Note
short note on grouping of marble in the two categories mentioned above in 2 is given in Appendix A of rhe standard.
Note 2-For method of tests, refer to IS : 1122-1974 Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS : 1124-1974Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and Porosity of natural building stones (first revision).
refer to IS : 1130-1969 Specification for marble (blocks, slabs and tiles).
59
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 33 16- 1974 STRUCTURAL
GRANITE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements in regard to selection, grading and strength of structural granite for the various constructional uses.
Granite is a structural andomamental stone because of strength, durability and resistance to wear and abrasion. Fine grained variety takes and preserves high polish and is suitable for ornamental and monumental work. Available in different colours such as grey, mottled grey, red, pink, dark blue, white or green, depending on component minerals. Granite containing injurious minerals such as pyrites and marcasite shall be excluded. Note -
3.2
Specijic Gravity -
Shall not be less than 2.6. Shall not be more than 0.5
3.3 Water Absorption percent.
its high compressive
4. 4.1
Dimensions
2. .
General Requiredents injurious
flaws,
Shall be free from veins, cavities and similar imperfec-
Slabs - Dimensions of slabs, as specified. Tolerance f 2 mm in length and breadth and + 1 mm in thickness. Bottom face may be rough, but top face shall be fine dressed and joint faces shall-b dressed back square with top surface for at least 50 mm without hollowness or spalling off.
tions. 3.
Strength Requirements
Strength -
,*
Shall not be less than
4.2 Blocks for Masonry - Dimensions of blocks, as specified. Tolerance +5 mm for facing blocks. Edges of blocks shall be dressed according to IS : 11291972*.
*Recommendations
3.1
Compressive 1 000 kgf/cm*.
for dressing of stones yirst
revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1121 (Part I)-1974 Method of test for determination of strength properties of natural building stones: Part I Compressive strength (first revision), IS : 1122-1974Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building stones (first revision), and IS : 11241974 Method of test for determination of water absorption and apparent specific gravity of natural building stones (first revkion).
refer to IS : 33161974 Specification for structural granite.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3620-1979 LATERITE
STONE BLOCK FOR MASONRY
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions, physical properties and workmanship for rectangular blocks of latetite stone for use in construction of walls and partitions .
2. General Requirements - Shall be without any soft veins, cracks, cavities, flaws and similar imperfections. Shall be exposed for three months before using but exposure to rains be avoided. 3. Dimensions - Shall be supplied in the foRowing standard sizes (other sizes by mutual agreement): Length mm 390 490 590 Bieadth mm 190 / Thickness mm - 190 190 290
60
SP : 21-1983 3.1
4. 4.3 Compressive Strength - Not less than N/mm* (for satumted dry samples). 3.5
Tolerance
+5 mm on all dimensions.
Physical Properties
Not more than 12 percent Not less than 2.5. 5. Workmanship - Blocks shall be of uniform shape with straight edges at right angle and edges be rough and chisel dressed.
4.1 4.2
Water Ahsorption by mass. Specific Gravity -
Note - For methods of tests, refer to IS: 1121 (Part I)-1974 Method of test for determination of strength properties of natural building stones: Part I Compressive strength (first revision) and IS : 1124-1974Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision).

revision).
refer to IS : 3620-1979 Specification
for laterite stone block for masonry (first
SUMMARY OF
i
IS : 3622-1977 SANDSTONE (SLABS AND TILES) (First Revision)

3.1.1
Tolerances +3 mm for thickness.
Scope - Requirements for dimensions and physical properties of sandstone slabs and tiles for use in flooring, roofing and face work. 1.
2.
3.2 Machine Cut Slabs - Sizes shall be same as mentioned in 3.1 with true and square edges. 3.2.1 Tolerances - f 1 mm breadth and f 3 mm for thickness. 4. Physical Properties -See for length and
General Requirements
2.1
The stone shall be without any soft veins, cracks and flaws and shall have a uniform texture and colour.
Table 1.
2.2 The deviation of surface from straightness shall not exceed 5 mm for slabs and 1 mm for tiles. 3.
Dimensions
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SANDSTONE SLABS

SL
CMARACT~~RISTIC
(2) Water absorption Transverse strength Resistance to wear
REQUIREMENT
3.1
Rough Cut - Sandstone slabs and tiles of rough cut edges shall be of sizes as specified Mow: Length 15 to 360 cm in stages of 5cm _ Breadth 15to90cm in stages of 5 cm Thickness 15 to 100 mm in stages of 5mm
E.
i) ii) iii)
(3) Not more than 2.5 percent by mass Not less than 7 N/mm* (70 kgf/cm*) Not greater than 2 mm on the average and 2.5 mm for any individual specimen Shall not develop sign of spalling, disintegration of cracks
Note - Ibe size in between (of length and breadth) shall be reckoned as next lower size. This aspect will also cover tolerance in length and breadth.
iv)
Durability
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1121 (Part II)-1974 Method of test for determination of strength properties of natural building stones: Part II Transverse strength (first revision), IS : 1124-1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision), IS : 1126-1974Method of test for determination of durability of natural building stones (first revision) and IS : 1706-1972Method for determination of resistance to wear by abrasion of natural building stones (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3622-1977

revision).
Scification
for sandstone (slabs and tiles) (first
61
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6250-1981 ROOFING SLATE TILES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of dimensions, physical properties and workmanship of slate tiles used for sloped roof covering. Requirements in regard to method of laying and fixing of tiles are covered in IS : 5119 (Part I)-1968*. 2. General Requirements - Slate shall be free from veins, cracks, or other similar source of weakness. Shall be of uniform colour and texture and shall not contain white patches and deleterious minerals. Slate shall be of reasonably straight cleavage and grains shall be longitudinal. 3. 3.1 Dimensions and Tolerances Note - Other sizes as mutually agreed to. 3.1.1 4. Tolemnceof f5mmonlengthandbreadth. See Table 1.
Physical
Properties
5. Workmanship - Unless specified otherwise, the slates shall be of uniform thickness and rectangular shape with reasonably full corners and edges shall be true. The exposed surfaces shall be finished as specified.
Standard sizes of tiles shall be as follows:

Length Breadth Thickness
mm 600
mm 300
mm 15 Min
500
250
TABLE 1
15Min
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SLATE TILES
REQUIREMENT (3)
SL No. (1) i)
CHARACTERISTIC (2)
Water absorption Modulus of rupture Depth of softening Permeability Sulphuric acid immersion (see Note) Wetting and drying
ii) iii) iv) v) vi)
a) Maximum average: 2 percent by mass b) Variation should not exceed 20 percent between individual sample 60 N/mm2 (dry), Min 40 N/mm* (wet), Min O.OSmm,MUX No water shall ooze from the bottom Shall show no sign of delamination along the edge of swelling, softening, flaking of the surface and shall not exhibit gaseous evolution during immersion Shall show no sign of delamination or splitting along the edge nor flaking of the surface
Note - This requirement is related to the conditions of atmospheric pollution and the slate tiles shall be subjected to this requirement only if required by the purchaser.
*Code of practice for laying and fixing of sloped roof covering: Part I Slating.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to E of the sfandard and IS : 4122-1967 Method of test for surface softening of natural building stones.
For detailedinformation, refer to IS : 6250-1981 Specificationfor roofing slate tiles (first revision).
62
SECTION
CLAY PRODUCTS FOR BUILDING
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title BLOCKS IS: 3952-1978 BRICKS IS : IS: IS : iS : IS : IS : IS : IS: 1077-1976 2180-1970 2222-1979 2691-1972 3583-1975 4885-1968 5779-1970 6165-1971 Common burnt clay building bricks (third revision) Heavy duty burnt clay building bricks yirst revision) Burnt clay perforated building bricks (second revision) Burnt clay facing bricks (first revision) Burnt clay paving bricks first revision) Burnt clay sewer bricks Burnt clay soling bricks Dimensions for special shapes of clay bricks Burnt clay hollow blocks for walls and partitions first revision)
Page
65
66 67 67 68 69 69 70 70
BURNT CLAY JALLIES IS : 7556-1975 TILES IS: IS : IS : IS : IS : IS : 654-1972 1464-1973 1478-1969 2690 (Part I) - 1975 2690 (Part II)-1975 3367-1975 Clay roofing tiles, Mangalore pattern (second revision) Clay ridge and ceiling tiles (first revision) Clay flooring tiles first revision) Burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part I Machine-made @-St revision) Burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part II Hand-made Qirst revision) Burnt clay tiles for use in lining irrigation and drainage works yirst revision) Hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs: Part I Filler type yirst revision) Hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs: Part II Structural type (first revision) 72 73, 74 75. 75 76 76 77 Burnt clay jallies 71
IS : 3951 (Part I)-1975 IS : 3951 (Part II)-1975
64
IS : 3952-1978 BURNT CLAY HOLLOW BLOCKS FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS (First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions, quality and strength of hollow blocks made from burnt clay and having perforations through and at right angles to the bearing surface.
Note - These blocks are tight in weight for masomy constmction and also being hollow, impart thermal insulation to the building.
Type C -
Blocks with one face keyed and one face smooth.
4.
Dimensions Length cm 19 29 Breadth cm 19 9 Height cm 9 9
2.
General Requirements
2.1 Blocks shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall be of uniform colour. Shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides, sharp straight edges at right angle; and a fine compact and uniform texture. 2.2 Blocks shall be free from excessive winding or bowing. Winding or bowing in length dimension, concavity or convexity in external face of blocks, and angles between sides and joining edges shall be not more than 5 mm. Note - For testing details regarding trueness of shape, refer
to 3.2 of the standard.
9 14 29 Thickness of shell and web shall be not less than 11 and 8 mm respectively. 5. Tolerances Dimensions cm 9 14 19 29 Tolerance mm +4 +5 +7 +10
3.
Types Type A Type B Blocks with both faces keyed for plastering or rendering. Blocks with both faces smooth for use without plastering or rendering on either side.
6. Crushing Strength - Minimum average value shall be 3.5 N/mm2 (35 kgf/cm2). The strength of individual block shall not fall below the average value by more than 20 percent. 7. Water Absorption by mass. Not more than 20 percent
Note-For
methods
of tests. refer to ADDendices A and B of the stundurd.
For detailed information, partitions (first revision).
refer to IS : 3952-1978 Specification for burnt clay hollow blocks for walls and
65
IS : 1077-1976 COMMON BURNT CLAY BUILDING BRICKS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of common burnt clay building bricks used in buildings. Note - For burnt clay bricks having compressive strength more than 400 kgf/cm, sre IS : 2180-1970*. 2. Classification 4. Dimensions 19~9x9 cm and 19~9x4 cm. be
5. Tolerances - Dimensions of bricks within the following limits per 20 bricks:
shall
Sub-class A
cm
Sub-class B
cm 380+30 180+ 15
Class Designation
Average Compressive Strength, Not Less Than, ksflcm2

350 300 250 200 175 150 125 100 75 50 35
a) Length b) Width c) Height: (For 9-cm high bricks) (For 4cm high bricks)
Note -
380+ 12 180f6
350 300 250 200 175 150 125 100 75 50 35
18O_t6
180+ 15
80+3
80+6
bricks, refer to 52.1
For measurement of tolerances of burnt clay building and Fig. 2 of the standard.
6.
Physical
Requirements
2.1 Each class of bricks shall be further divided into sub-classes A and B based on tolerances and shape. 3. General Quality - Shall be hand or machine moulded and free from cracks and flaws and nodules of free lime. Frog of 1 to 2 cm deep shall be provided for 9 cm high bricks. No frog is required for 4 cm high bricks and extruded bricks.
Note - Shape and size of the frog shall conform to either Fig. 1A or Fig. 1B of rhe srmdard.
6.1 Compressive Strength - Shall conform to 2. Compressive strength of any individual brick shall not fall below this minimum requirement by more than 20 percent. 6.2 Water Absorption - Shall be not more than 20 percent up to Class 125 and not more than 15 percent for higher classes. 6.3 Efflorescence - Shall be not more than moderate up to Class 125 and not more than slight for higher classes.
3.1 Sub-class Abricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp comers and uniform colour. Subclass B may have slightly distorted and rounded edges.
*Specification
for heavy-duty burnt clay bricks vrst revision ).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Part Q-1976, IS : 3495 (Part II)-1976 and IS : 3495 (Part III)-1976 Method of test of burnt clay building bricks: Part I Determination of compressive strength (second revision). Part II Determination of water absorption (second revision). Part III Determination of efflorescence (second revision).

(third revision).
refer to IS : 1077-1976 Specification for common burnt clay building bricks
66
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2180-1970 HEAVY DUTY BURNT CLAY BUILDING BRICKS (First Revision)

(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements regardi.ng dimensions, general quality and physical properties of heavy-duty burnt clay building bricks. 2. Classification - Classified compressive strength: Class 400 in accordance with No. 1 and 2) slightly distorted and rounded edges. 4. 5. DimensionsTolerances 19~9x9 cm and 19X9X4 cm.
Dimensions
cm / 9 19 6. Physical Properties 6.1
Tolerances
mm /\ Sub-class A +3 +6 Sub-class B +7 +15 \
Bricks of compressive strength not less than 400 kgf/cm* but less than 450 kgf/cm* Class 450 - Bricks of compressive strength not less than 450 kgf/cmz Sub-class A and B - Based on tolerance and shape.
Compressive Strength -
As given in 2.
3. General Quality - Shall be made either by pressing or by extrusion process. Shall be free from cracks and other flaws and lime nodules. Sub-class A bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and emit ringing sound. Sub-class B may have
6.2 Water Absorption - Shall be not more than 10 percent by weight after immersion for 24 hours. 6.3 6.4
Ejjlorescence Bulk Density -
Shall be nil. Not less than 2.5 g/cm3.
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second revision).

(first revision).
refer to IS : 2180-1970 Specification for heavy duty burnt clay building bricks
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2222-1979 BURNT CLAY PERFORATED
BUILDING
BRICKS
( Second Revision)
1. Sc*bpe - Requirements in regard to dimensions, quality and physical requirements of perforated burnt clay building bricks for use in walls and partitions. 2. General Quality - Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall have rectangular faces, uniform colour, and texture. 3. Dimensions 19x 19x 9 cm and 29X 9X 9 cm. 67 4. Tolerances
Dimension
cm 9 19 29
Tolerance
mm +4 +7 +10
5. Perforations - Area shall not exceed 30 to 45 percent of area of face. In case of rectangular
SP : 21-1983
perforations, larger dimension shall be parallel to longer side of the brick. Dimensions parallel to short side shall be not more than 20 mm for rectangular perforations (25 mm for circular). Area of each perforation shall not exceed 500 mm*. Thickness of any shell shall not be less than 15 mm and that of any web not less than 10 mm. 6. Physical Requirements
6.1 Compressive Strength 7 N/mm* on net area. 6.2 Water Absorption 15 percent by mass. 6.3 EfJlorescence slight. 6.4
-
Shall be not less than
Shall be not more than be not more than
Shall
Warpage -
Shall not exceed 3 percent.
Note-For

(second revision).
refer to IS : 2222-1979 Specification for burnt clay perforated building bricks
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2691-1972 BURNT CLAY FACING BRICKS (First Revision)

(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements regarding dimensions, quality and strength of burnt clay facing bricks used in buildings and other structures. 2. Classification Class I - Compressive 100 kgf/cm* Class II - Compressive 75 kgf/cm* No. 1 and 2) 5. Tolerances_
Dimension Tolerance
cm 19 9 4 6. 6.1 Physical Class i f3 +2 +1.5 Requirements
mm 0X Class 11 +5 +3 +2
strength strength
not less than not less than
3. General Quality - Shall be of uniform colour and free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime and of even text;ure. Shall have rectangular faces and sharp strength right angles edges. 4. Dimensions 19~9x9 cm and 19X9x4 cm.
Compressive Strength -
As given in 2.
6.2 Water Absorption - Shall not exceed 15 percent after immersion for 24 hours. 6.3 6.4
Ejjlorescence -
Shall be nil.
Warpage -
Shall not exceed 2.5 mm.
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of test of burnt clay building bricks (second revkion).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2691-1972 Specification for burnt clay facing bricks (first revision).
68
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3583-1975 BURNT CLAY PAVING BRICKS (First Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements regarding dimensions, quality and strength, and methods of sampling and test for burnt clay paving bricks for use in construction of pavements. 4. Tolerances
Dimension 175 4 9.5 and 9 Tolerance ;r6 f 1.5
2. General - Shall be mechanically shaped and not hand moulded. Shall have smooth rectangular faces and sharp comers.
+3
5.
Physical Properties
Strength -
5.1 Compressive than 400 kgf/cm2.
Shall
be
not
less
3. Dimensions 19.5X 9.5X4 cm.

Note-For
19.5X9.5X9
cm
and
5.2 Water Absorption - Shall be not more than 5 percent by weight after immersion for 24 hours.
methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495(Parts I to IV)-1976Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3583-1975 Specification for burnt clay paving bricks (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4885-1968 BURNT CLAY SEWER BRICKS

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements regarding dimensions, quality, strength and methods of sampling and testing of sewer bricks used for sewers of sanitary (domestic) sewage. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances No. 1)
edges fmm plane surface and straight line shall be 2.5 mm. 3. General Quality - Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of lime. Shall have plane rectangula; faces with sharp edges and comers. 4. Compressive Strength - Average shall be not less than 175 kg/cm2 and for individual brick, shall be not less than 160 kg/cm2.
2.1 Dimensions - 19~9x9 cm and 19X9X4 cm. (For oval and other special shaped sewers, bricks may be tapered suitably.) 2.2
Tolerances Dimension Tolerance
19 9 4 2.3
Warpage -
mm +5 +2 f1.5 Tolerance for warpage of face or
5. Water Absorption - Average shall he not more than 10 percent and for individual brick, shall be not more than 12 percent.
6.
EMtorescence -
Shall be not more than slight.
Note-For
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4885-1968 Specification for burnt clay sewer bricks.
69
IS : 5779-1970 BURNT CLAY SOLING BRICKS

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements in regard to dimensions, general quality and physical properties of burnt clay bricks for soling of roads. 2. Dimensions 19~9x4 cm and 19x9X9 cm. 5. 3. Tderances - Overall dimension of 20 bricks, selected at random and arranged in a straight line and in contact with each, on a level surface shall be within the following limits: Length Width Height For 9-cm high brick For 4-cm high brick
Nate-
No. 1)
4. General Quality - Shall be free from cracks and other flaws and lime nodules. Shall have, as far as possible, plane rectangular faces and straight right angle edges. Physical Properties Strengrh Shall be not less than
5.1 Compressive 50 kgf/cm*.
350 to 410 cm 165 to 195 cm 165 to 195 cm 74 to 86 cm
5.2 Water Absorption - Shall be not more than 20 percent by weight after 24 hours immersion in cold water. 5.3 Effirescence slight. Rating shall be not more than
For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second revision).
refer to IS : 5779-1970 Specification for burnt clay soling bricks.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 61651971 DIMENSIONS FOR SPECIAL SHAPES OF CLAY BRICKS

1. Scope - Dimensions for special shapes of clay bricks used in building and other civil engineering construction. It does not lay down the specification of the special shapes for clay bricks and the same shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards (see IS : 1077-1976* and IS : 2180-1970t). 2. Dimensions Shape Major Overall Dimensions cm 9X9X9 19X9X9 19X4X9 Shape Major Overall Dimensions cm 29x4 29x9x 14.5 19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9 19x 9x9 19X9X9
b) Copings i) Half round coping ii) Saddle back coping c) Bullnose bricks i) Single bullnose or bullnose header ii) Double bullnose iii) Bullnose stretcher iv) Bullnose mitre v) Bullnose double vi) Bullnose on end d) Corner bricks i) Squint 30 ii) Birdsmouth 30 iii) Header splay 70
a) Ciosers i) Snapheader closer ii) King closer iii) Queen closer

revision ) .
*Specification for common burnt clay building bricks (ahid TSpecification for heavy duty burnt clay building bricks yirsr
revision).
SP : 21-1983
Shape
Major Overall Dimensions cm 19X9X9 19X9X9 .19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9 19x 9x9
Shape
Major Overall Dimensions cm 19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9 19X9X9
iv)
Single cant or plinth header v) Double cant
e) Plinth bricks i) Plinth stop ii) Plinth stretcher iii) Plinth internal return iv) Plinth header v) Plinth internal return vi) Plinth external return
t) Culvert bricks i) Culvert 10 cm ii) Culvert 20 cm g) Chimney or well type bricks i) Chimney or well header ii) Chimney or well stretcher
Note-For
exact
shape of clay bricks and detailed dimensions, refer to
Fig. 1 to 7
of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6165-1971 Dimensions for special shapes of clay bricks.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7556-1975
BURNT CLAY JALLIES

wide and 3 mm deep. 3. General Quality - Shall be made from suitable clay. They are often hand moulded, but superior quality jallies are machine made by wire-cut process. Shall be free from webor shell cracks, flaws or nodules of free lime. Shall be uniform in colour and texture. In case ofwire-cut jallies, cut faces shall be at right angles and parallel to each other. Warpage shall not exceed 3 percent when placed between two parallel straight edges. 4. Physical Requirements value shall be not value shall not
1. Scope - Dimension, quality and strength requirements of burnt clay jallies having perforations of ornamental designs.
are suiiable for providing a screen on verandah, construction of parapet or boundary walls, etc.
Note - Burntclay jallies
2. 2.1
Dimensions
and Tolerances
Srandurd Sizes (in cm) 19x 19x 19x 19x 19x 19x 14x 14x 10 5 10 5 14x 14x 10 14x 14x 5 14X9X5 9X9X5
2.2 Thickness of shell shall be not less than 10 mm and that of web not less than 8 mm. 2.2.1 2.3 2.4 Total void area shall not exceed 40 percent. +3 percent. with mortar shall be 10 mm
4.1 Breaking Load - Average less than 12kgf/cm width. 4.2 Water Absorption exceed 15 percent. 4.3 EfJlorescence slight . -
Average
Tolerance
Rating shall be not more than
Keys for bonding
Note-
For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7556-1975 Specificationfor burnt clay jallies.
71
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 654-1972 CLAY ROOFING TILES, MANGALORE
PATTERN
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for machine-pressed clay interlocking rooting tiles of the Mangalore Pattern. 2. Classilication - Class AA and Class A with characteristics given in Table 1. 3. General Quality
a) Shap - Placed on plane surface, gap at corners shall be not more than 6 mm.
No. 1 to 3) Minimum overlap shall be 60 mm lengthwise and 25 mm widthwise. 5. Weight -Average of 6 tiles shall be not less than 2 kg and not more than 3 kg. 6. 6.1 Strength Requirements Water Ahsorptior~ Test Load
Shall conform Water shall to Table not drip 1. at
b) Lugs -
At least 2 batten lugs and 2 eave lugs not less than 15 mm at bottom and 10 mm at top shall be provided. Projection shall be 7 to 12 mm for batten lugs and not less than 10 mm for eave lugs.
of thickness
6.2 Permeability bottom. 6.2 Breaking Table 1.
Test -
Shall
conform
to
c) Tie down ha/e 4. Dimensions
1.6 to 2 mm diameter.
Overall Length mm 410 420 425
Overall Width mm 235 250 260
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF ROOFING TILES (Clauses 2, 6.1 and 6.2)

SL
CHARACTERISTIC
RBXJIRMENTS
NO.
--~~ (2) Water absorption, percent, Max Breaking load. kgf, &fin: a) Average
~
Class AA
\
Class A
(1)
i) ii)
(3) 19
100 (for 410 x 235 mm) 110 (for 420 x 250 mm and 425 x 260 mm) 90 (for 410 x235 mm) 100 (for 420x250 mm and425x26Omm)
(4) 24
80 (for 410 x235 mm) 90 (for420x250 mm and 425 x 260 mm) 68 (for 410 x 235 mm) 78 (for 420,x 250 mm and 425 x 260 mm)
b) Individual
Note 1-For Note 2-For
typical details of Mangalore tile, see Fig. 1 of the standard. tolerances, refer to 5.2 of the standard. methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.
Note 3-For
For detailed information, (second revision).
refer to IS : 654-1972
Specification for clay roofing tiles, Mangalore pattern
72
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1464-1973 CLAY RIDGE AND CEILING TILES (First Revision)

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for machine-pressed clay ridge and ceiling tiles. Does not cover tiles of irregular sizes, shapes and colour and those made to meet special requirements. 2. Classilication - Class AA and Class A with characteristics given in Table 1. 3. Shape - The gap at corners of ceiling tiles, when placed on plane surface shall be not more than 6 mm. Ceiling tiles are of two types, namely, double lug and single lug. 4. No. 1)
Dimensions
of Ridge Tile
a) Length - 375, 400 and 435 mm; tolerance f5 mm. b) Width nnd Height - Base 265 mm, height 100 mm; tolerance 215 mm. c) Thickwss - Shall be not less than 10 mm. 5. Dimensions of Ceiling Tile - Thickness not less than 10 mm. Length of lug not more than 20 mm.
TABLE
CLASSIFICATION
OF RIDGE AND CEILING
TILICS
(Clause 2)
SL No. (1) i) ii)
CHARACTERISTIC
/ (2) Water absorption, percent, Max Breaking strength, kgf, Min (for ridge tiles only): a) Average b) individual
REQUIREMENTS A Class A Class AA (3)

19
(4)
24
1.50
1.10 0.95
1.25
Note 1 -Common
patterns of ridge and ceiling tiles are shown in Fig. 1 and 2 of the sfundard.
Note 2-For
methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.

revision).
refer to IS : 1464-1973 Specification for clay ridge and ceiling tiles (first
73
,IS : 1478-1969 CLAY FLOORING TILES (First Revision)

(With Amendments No. 1 and 2)
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions, and strength for clay flooring tiles.
quality
2. Classification - Class 1, Class 2 and Class 3 with characteristics given in Table 1.
3. General Quality - Shall be uniform in size, shape and free from irregularities. Faces shall be plain, grooved, fluted or figured as specified and edges shall be square. 4. Dimensions 150 X 150 X 15 mm
TABLE 1
SL No. (1)
CLASSIFICATION
OF FLOORING TILES
REQUIREMENTS
150 X 150 X 20 mm 200 X 200 X 20 mm 200 x 200 x 25 mm 250 x 250 X 30 mm Depth of grooves or frogging underside of tiles not to exceed 3 mm. 5. Tolerances a) Length and breadth - Average f5 mm, individual -t2 mm. b) Thickness - Average +2 mm, individual +l mm. 6. Warpage - Shall not exceed 2 percent edges and 1.5 percent along diagonals. along
CHARACTERISTIC / (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
i) ii)
Water absorption, percent, Max Flexural kgficm

$firz
10
19
24
strength width, 6 5 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0
a) Average b) Individual iii) Impact, maximum height in mm of drop of (35 mm diameter, mass 170 g ) steel ball: a) b) c) d) IS mm 20 mm 25 mm 30 mm thick thick thick thick
25 60 75 80
20 50 65 70
I5 40 50 60
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1478-1969 Specification for clay flooring tiles (first revision).
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2690 (PART I)-1975 BURNT CLAY FLAT TERRACING

PART I MACHINE-MADE
TILES
(First Revision)
(With 1. Scope - Requirements clay flat terracing tiles. for machine-made Amendment burnt No. 1) c) Thickness d) Tolerunce 4. Warpage direction. 20 and 15 mm. +2 percent.
2. General Quality. - Shall be uniform in shape, sizes and free from irregularities. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 250 to 150 mm in stages of
Shall not exceed 1 percent in any
a) Length 25 mm. b) Widrh Note-For
5. Water Absorption cent. 6. Flexural 15 kgf/cm2. Strength
-Shall
not exceed 15 per-
200 to 100 mm in stages of 25 mm.
methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the sfandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2690 (Part I)-1975 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part I Machine-made (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2690 (PART II)-1975 BURNT CLAY FLAT TERRACING

PART II HAND-MADE
TILES
(First Revision)
(With 1. Scope - Requirements flat terracing tiles. 2. Dimensions Amendment No. 1) for hand-made burnt clay 3. Warpage - Shall not exceed 2 percent of the dimensions in any direction. 4. Water Absorption cent by weight. 5. Compressive 75 kgflcm2. Shall not exceed 20 per-
and Tolerances 250 to 150 mm in stages of
a) Length 25 mm. b) Width -
Strength
200 to 75 mm in stages of 25 mm. 25 to 50 mm in stages of 5 mm. +3 percent.
Shall be not less than i
c) Thickness d) Tolerances Note-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts I to IV)-1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (second reVisi%.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2690 (Part II)-1975 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part II Hand-made (first revision).
75
IS : 3367- 1975 BURNT CLAY TILES FOR USE IN LINING IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE WORKS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for machine-pressed, wire-cut, or hand-made rectangular burnt clay tiles used for lining irrigation canals and for drainage channels (other than sewage works). 2. General - Shall be uniform in size, shape and free from irregularities and impurities. Tile shall be without frog. 3. Dimensions 300 X 150 X 50 mm. +5 mm in
iii) iv)
5.
Physical
Properties
1
-See
Table 1.
PROPERTIES &QUlREMENTS / \ Class 105 Ciass 75 (3) (4) JO5 15 15 3 75 20 12 3
TABLE SL No. (1) i) ii)
PHYSICAL
CHARACTERISTIC
(2) Compressive strength, k&m,
Min
Water absorption, percent, kgth?,
3.1 Tolerances - f 1Omm in length, width, + 1.5 mm in thickness. 4. Classification -
Max
Transverse strength,
Min
Warp, mm, Max
Class 105 and Class 75 (see 5).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3495 (Parts and Appendices A and B of the standard.
I to IV)-1976 Methods
of tests of burnt clay building
bricks (second revision),
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3367-1975 irrigation and drainage works (first revision).
Specification
for
burnt
clay tiles for
use in lining
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3951 (PART
I)-1975 HOLLOW
PART I FILLER TYPE
CLAY
TILES
FOR FLOORS AND ROOFS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions, quality and strength requirements of hollow clay filler tiles having perforatibns parallel to their length and intended for use in floors and roofs. 2.1 Winding or Bowing - Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm length or width. 2 2 Concavity or Convexity - Shall be not more . than 5 mm per 30 cm run at any point on either diagonal. 2.3 Angles Between Sides and Joining Edges Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run. Note - Tests for of the standard. 76
tNeneSS
2. General Requirements - Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall be of uniform colour and shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and straight right angled
IX@.%.
of shape arc illustrated in Fig. 1 to 3
SP : 21-1983
3. 3.1
Dimensions Dimensions
and Tolerances
3.3 Thickness - Shall be not less than 11 mm for shell and not less than 8 mm for web.
Length
340,391;.m440,490 540, 590, 640, 690 740 3.2
Width
35EOO 250: 200
Height
SosO 100: 110
4.
Breaking Strength lOkgf/c& length. -
5. Water Absorption 20 percent.
Shall be not more than
Tolerance -
+5 percent.
Note ,l -Typical
Note 2-For
shapes of hollow clay filler tiles are shown in Fig. 4 of the stundurd.
methods of tests, reter to Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3951 (Part I)-1975 Specification for hollow clay tilesforfloors roofs: Part I Filler type (first revision).
and
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3951 (PART II)-1975 HOLLOW CLAY TILES

FOR FLOORS AND ROOFS
PART II STRUCTURAL TYPE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for quality, dimensions, bulk density, water absorption and strength requirements of structural hollow clay tiles suitable for floor/roof. 2. General Requirements - Shall be free from cracks, flaws or inclusion ofany deleterious materials. 2.1 Shall have at least one plane of symmetry in cross section. 2.2 Shall have serrations (not deeper than 3 mm and not wider than 6 mm) on all faces designed to be concreted or mortared or plastered. 2.3 Winding or Bowing - Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm length or width. 2.4 Concavity or Convexity - Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run at any point on either diagonal. 2.5 Angle Between Sides and Joining Edges be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run. Shil 6. Water Absorption cent by weight. Shall not exceed 10 per3. 3.1 Dimensions Dimensions Length Width Height 290 and 390 mm 90 to 190 mm in stages of 50 mm 125 to 200 mm in stages of 25 mm and Tolerances
3.2 Thickness - Shall be not less than 12 mm for shell and not less than 10 mm for web. 3.3 Tolerances - +5 percent on length and width. +5 percent on height.
Note - Hollow tiles may be either with small perforations or large holes or a combination of the two.
4. Bulk Density - Shall be not below 0.9 g/cm3 and not more than 1.2 g/cm3. 5. Compressive Strength - Average not less than 200 kgf/cm2. Individual not less than 150 kgflcm*.
Note - Tests for trueness of shape are illustrated in Fig. 1 to 3 of the standard.
Note 1 -Typical Note 2-For
shapes of structural clay units for flooring and roofing are shown in Fig. 4 of the standard.
methods of tests, refer to 5.1.1 and Appendices A and B of the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3951 (Part II)-1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs: Part ZZStructural type (first revision).
77
SECTION
GYPSUM BUILDING MATERIALS
SY : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS IS IS IS IS IS 2095-1982 2547 (Part I) - 1976 2547 (Part II) - 1976 2849-1964 8272-1976 8273-1976 Gypsum plaster boards (first revision) Gypsum building plasters: Part I Excluding premixed (first revision) Gypsum building plasters: Part II Premixed light-weight Non-load bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid and Gypsum plaster for use in the manufacture of fibrous Fibrous gypsum plaster boards
Page 81 82
light-weight
plasters
plasters (/ifirstrevision) 83 84 hollow types) 85 plaster boards 86
80
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2095-1982 GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for gypsum plaster board intended to be usedas a vertical or horizontal lining in buildings, excluding that which has been subjected to secondary manufacturing operations. It includes boards manufactured to receive either direct surface decoration or gypsum plaster finishes.
2.
USe.
of the two longitudinals of the boards shall not differ more than +3 mm per metre length of the diagonal. 3.1.1 Tolerance - The tolerance on dimensions shall be as given below: Type Tolerance in mm on w--7 Width Length Thickness 0 -5 0 -8 0 -6 0 -6 f0.6
Types -
Shall be classified
according
to their Gypsum wall-board Gypsum baseboard : i) Non-perforated ii) Perforated
2.1
Gypsum Wall-boards - Gypsum wall-board has a face to which decoration may be applied.
2.2 Gypsum Wall-board with Reduced Water Absorption Rate - These boards have additives in the core and/or the paper liners to reduce water absorption mte and may be suitable for special applications in buildings where the reduced absorption properties are required to improve the performance of the board. 2.3 Gypsum Wall-board with Improved Core Cohesion at High Temperatures - These boards have mineral fibres and/or other additives in the gypsum core to improve core cohesion at-high temperatures and would have a face suitable for direct decoration. 2.4 Gy&m Plaster Baseboard - These boards have a face suitable to receive gypsum plaster and may be perforated during primary manufacture. 2.5 Gypsum Plaster Baseboard with Improved Core Cohesion at High Temperatures - It is a combination of 2.3 and 2.4. 3.
ZlZO.6
3.2 Transverse Strength - Breaking load for gypsum plaster boards shall be in accordance with Table 2.
TABLE 2 BREAKING LOAD OF GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS
THICKNESS BREAKING LOAD,
TYPE OF BOARD
Min
mm Transverse Direction N (3) 140 180 220 125 165
h Longitudinal Direction N (4) 360 500 650 180 235
(1) Plasterboard
(2) 9.5 12.5 15.0
Requirements
Baseboard
9.5 12.5
3.1
Dimensions - The width, length and thickness of the boards shall be as given in Table 1. The lengths
3.3 WaterAbsorption - The limitsofwaterabsorption shall be specified by the purchaser as required. 4. Finish - The surfaces of the boards shall be true and free from imperfections that would render the board unfit for use with or without decoration.
TABLE
1 DIMENSIONS OF GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS

WIDTH (2) LENGTH I~ICKNESS
Typo OF BZIARD (1)
(3) mm
(4)
mm
mm 9.5, 12.5 and 15 9.5 and 12.5
Wall-board
600, 900 and 1200 400 and 900
1 800 to 3 600
in steps of 1OOmm 1200, 1500
Baseboard
. _and 1 800
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 2542 (Part II/Set 1 to 8)-1981 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and information, refer to IS : 2095-1982 SpecifiTtion for gypsum . . plaster boards (first revision).
products: Part II Gypsum products (first revision).
For detailed
81
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
Is
: 2547
(PART I)-1976 GYPSUM BUILDING PLASTERS

PART 1 EXCLUDING PREMIXED LIGHT-WEIGHT PLASTERS
(First Revision)
1. Scope-Requirements regarding classification, chemical and physical requirements for gypsum building plasters which possess a definite set due to hydration of calcium sulphate, anhydrous or hemihydrate to form gypsum and are used in the manufacture of gypsum building products. Premixed light-weight building plaster not included. 2.
Classification a) Plaster of park,
2) Metal lathing plaster. Type II Final coat plaster: 1) Finish plaster,

2) Board finish plaster,
C) Anhydrous gypsum plasters (for finishing

only), and
d) Keenes plaster (for finishing only). 3. 4. Chemical Requirements -see Physical Requirements Table 1.
b) Retarded hemihydrate gypsum plaster: Type I Under-coat: 1) Browning plaster, and
See Table 2.
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSlTION

SL PARTICULARS
No. (1) (2) i) SOa, percentby mass,Min ii) CaO, percent by mass,Min
iii) Soluble magnesium salts expressed as percentage of MgO,
MCZA
of
PARIS
RETARDED HEMEMXWE
&HYDROUS
KEFNES PLASTER
GYPSUM
PLASTER (5) 40
GYPSUM (4) 35 213 of SO3 0.3 0.3 Not greater than 9 and less than 4 3*
(3) 35 213 of SO3 0.3 0.3 Not greater than 9 and less than 4 -
(6)
47 213 of SO3 0.3 0.3 2.0 Max
-
213 of SO3 0.3 0.3 3.0 Max -
iv) Soluble sodium salts, expressed as percentage of Na20,

Max v) Loss of ignition, percent by mass
vi) Free lime, Min, percent
*Applicable to metal lathingplaster.
TABLE 2 PIWSICAL RJXQURFMENTS

SL
PARTICULARS
No.
REQUIREMENTS h
Plaster of Paris
(3) 120-900 20-40 5
Retarded Hemibydrate
Gypsum Plaster (4) 120-900 60-180 14*
Anbydrous Gypsum
Plaster (5) 20-360 -
Keen& Plaster
(6) 20-360 (Continued)
(1)
(2)
i) Settingtime,minutes: a) Plastersand mixture. b) Neatplaster

ii) Transverse strength, kgf/f/cmz,
Min
82
SP : 21-1983
TABLE
PHYSICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Contd
SL No.
PARTICULARS
I
Plaster of Paris
(3)
(1) iii) Soundness
(2)
REQUIREMENTS h Retarded Anhydrous Hemihydrate Gypsum Gypsum Plaster Plaster (4) (5) Set plaster pats shall not show any sign of disintegration, popping or pitting TDiameter of the indentation shall not be less than 3 mm and not more than 4.5 mm Set plaster pats shall not show any sign of disintegration, popping or pitting Diameter of the indentation shall not be more than 4mm 1.0
Keenes Plaster
(6)
Set plaster pats shall not show any sign of disintegration, popping or pitting Diamerer of the indentation shall not be more than 3.5 mm 1.0
0.5 at 96 h
Set plaster pats shall not show any sign of disintegration, popping or pitting
iv) Mechanical resistance of set neat plaster
v) Residue on 1.18 mm IS Sieve percentage, Max vi) Expansion on setting percentage, Max -
5.0
1.07
0.20 at 24 h$
*Applicable to undercoat plasters only. TApplicable to final coat plasters. SApplicable to board finish plasters only. Note-For methods, of tests, refer to IS : 1288-1973 Method of test for mineral gypsum and gypsum products (first revision), IS : 2542 (Part I/Set. 1 to 12)-1978 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products: Part I Plaster and concrete (first revision) and Appendices A to C of the standard.
For detailed info&nation, refer to IS : 2547 (Part I)-1976 Specification for gypsum building plasters: Part I Excluding premixed light-weight plasters (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2547 (PART II)-1976 GYPSUM BUILDING PLASTERS

PART II PREMIXED LIGHT-WEIGHT PLASTERS
(First Revision)
Scope - Requirements for premixed lightweight plaster consisting of gypsum plaster and lightweight aggregate used in general building operations. 1.
b) Metal lathing plaster c) Bonding plaster Type B Final coat plaster 3. Physical and Chemical Table 1. 83 Finish plaster.
Requirements -See
2.
Classification
Type A Under-coat plasters: a) Browning plaster
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 PROPERTIES OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF PLASTERS
St
No.
PARTICULARS
UNDERCOAT PLASTERS (TYPE A) Browning Plaster Metal Lathing Plaster (3) 0.25 Bonding Plaster
FINAL COAT PLASTER (TYPE B). FINISH PLASTER
(1)
i) Sum of soluble sodium and magnesium salt contents expressed as percentages of sodium oxide (Na20) and magnesium oxide (MgO) by mass, Max
ii) Dry bulk density, MUX,kg/m3
(2)
0.25
(4) No upper limit
(5) 0.25
640
850
770
770 l& 1.0 -
Diameter of the indentation shall not be lesstban4mmand not more than 5.5 mm
iii) Dry set density, MUX, kg/m3 iv) Compressive strength, Mfn, N/mm2 v) Free lime content, percent,by mass, Min
vi) Mechanical resistance
1040
1.0
0.93 -
2.5
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 2542 (Part I/Set 1 to 12)-1978 Method of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products: Part I Plaster and concrete (first revision) and Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2547 (Part II)-1976Specificationfor gypsum building plasters: Part II Premixed light-weight plasters (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2849-1964 NON-LOAD BEARING GYPSUM PARTITION BLOCKS (SOLID AND HOLLOW TYPES)
1. Scope - Requirements for gypsum partition blocks for use in non-load bearing construction in inteior of buildings and for protection of columns, elevated shafts, etc, against tire. 2. Type and Shape i Solid or hollow type, rectan84
gular in shape with straight and square edges and true surfaces. 3. Scoring - Scoring shall not reduce materially thickness of shell when surfaces of block are scored.
SP : 21-1983
4.
Size
holes and not less than 70 mm for blocks having
Length mm
Height mm
Breadth mm
Hollow Blocks Side

and
Edge Thickness mm , Min

Ellrpttcal or Rectangular Holes
/Circular
Holes 700 Mar in multiples of 100
300 Max
in multiples of 100
75
100 125 150
15 20 25 15 elliptical or rectangular holes.
20
20 30 20
5. Tolerances - Shall be 43.0 mm on length; and f 1.5 mm on height and breadth. 5.1 Sum of thickness of two side shells plus thickness of central vertical web of 150 mm wide blocks shall not be less than 50 mm for blocks having circular
6. Compressive Strength 5 kgf/cm2 on gross area.
7. Visual Inspection - Shall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges and other imperfections.
Note-For method of test, refer to IS : 2542 (Part II)-1964 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products: Part II Gypsum products.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2849-1964 Specification for non-load bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid and hollow types).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8272- 1976 GYPSUM PLASTER FOR USE IN THE MANUFACTURE OF FIBROUS PLASTER BOARDS
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and tests for calcined gypsum plaster used in manufacturing fibrous plaster boards covered in IS : 82731976*.
Note - Gypsum building plasters are extensively used for general building operations and for the manufacture of preformed building products which have the specific advantages of lightness and high tire resistance. Generally used as covering for walls, ceilings and partitions in normal dry environments.
shall contain not less than 42 percent sulphur trioxide

(SO3).
3.
Properties IS
3.1 Fineness - Residue retained on 600-micron Sieve shall not be mote than 1 percent by mass. 3.2 Compressive 76 kgf/cm2. Strength -
2. Chemical Composition calcium sulphate hemihydrate
Consist essentially of (CaS04. YzH20) and
3.3 Initial Setting Time - Shall be 25 + 5 minutes (unless otherwise agreed mutually).
*Specificationfor fibrous gypsum plaster boards. Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1288-1973 Method of test for mineral gypsum and gypsum products (first revision) and Appendices A to C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8272-1976 Specification for gypsum plaster for use in the manufacture of fibrous plaster boards. a5
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8273-1976 FIBROUS GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS

1. Scope - Method of manufacture, tests and sampling of fibrous gypsum plaster boards for use as a lining material for ceiling, dry surfacing material for walls or for light weight partitions.
gypsum plaster board is a composition of gypsum plaster and sisal, coconut or other tibre forming body of regular dimensions. The boards are used as covering for walls, ceilings andpartitions in normal dry environments in buildings. They are comparatively light and have high fire resisting properties.
2.5 Tolerances - Length +6 mm. Width +3 mm. Thickness + 1 mm. 3. 3.1 Tests
Thickness
Note -Fibrous
2. 2.1
Dimensions Shape -
and Tolerances Square or rectangular in shape.
3.2 Transverse Bending Test - Dellection shall not exceed 19 mm when subjected to appropriate proof load of 34 kgf. If deflection under proof load is less than 6 mm, load shall be increased until failure occurs. Specimen shall then dellect not less than 6 mm before failure occurs.
2.2 Dimensions Length: 1 200 and 1 500 mm. Width: 400, 600, 800 and 1 200 mm. Nominal thickness: 12 mm. 2.3 2.4
Wright @Plaster Weight of Fibre method method
3.3 Test for Determining Fihre Contents - Test as specified in IS : 2542 @art I/Set 1 to 12)-1978* for wood fibre content in wood fibre gypsum plaster shall be used.
*Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products: Part I Plaster and concrete f&r revision). A and B of the standard.
10 kg/m2 of board.
250 g/m2 of board.
Note I.-For
of tests, given in 3.1 and 3.2 refer to Appendices of manufacture, refer to 4 of fhe standard.
Note Z-For
refer to IS : 8273-1976 Specification for fibrous gypsum phster
boar&.
86
SECTION
TIMBER
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Page TIMBER CLASSIFICATION Classification (revised) AND GRADING Coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantlings) (third revision) Non-conifer&s sawn timber (baulks and scantlings) yirst revision) Cut sizes of timber (second revision) Timber for cooling towers 90 92 95 97 of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution 89
IS : 399-1963
CONVERSION IS: 190-1974 IS : 1326-1976 IS : 1331-1971 IS : 2372-1963
88
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 399-1963 CLASSIFICATION OF COMMERCIAL TIMBERS AND THEIR ZONAL DISTRIBUTION (Revised)

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Details of the common commercial timbers cording to their various uses, availability of these timbers important properties. zonal distribution of of India, classified acand information on the and on some of their No. 1) 4. Classification - Tables I, II, III, IV and V of the standard list respectively important timbers commercially available in the five zones described under 3 and classified according to their uses given under 2. Against each species of timber, the availability in that zone, average weight and the range of weight of air-seasoned timber in kg/m3 and lb/ft3, durability, treatability, refractoriness to air seasoning and strength coefficient are given. 4.1 Availability - The availability of timbers categorized under three classes indicated below: is
2. Uses - The uses are classified under the following categories: a) Constructional purposes, including building construction, houseposts, beams, rafters, cart-building, bridges, piles, poles and railway sleepers; b) Furniture and cabinet making; c) Light packing cases; d) Heavy packing similar stores); e) Agricultuial cases (for machinery and
implements
and tool handles;
X : Most common, 1 415 m3 (I 000 tonnes) and more per year Y : Common, 355m3 (250 tonnes) to 1 415 m3 (1 000 tonnes) per year Z : Less common, below 355 m3 (250 tonnes) per year 4.2 Weight - The range of weights per moisture content for The range of weights in parentheses. figures for average weight and cubic metre (or ft3) at 12 percent all the timbers have been given. is given below the average weight
f ) Tumery articles and toys; and g) Veneers and plywood. 3. Zones - The territories comprising India, Sikkim* and Bhutan have been divided into live zones as indicated on the Map (see page 85 of the standard), which comprise roughly the following areas: I North Zone Jammu and Kashmir, Punjab, Himachal Pradesh, Delhi, Uttar Pradesh and Rajasthan Assam, Manipur, Tripura, West Bengal, Bihar, Orissa, Sikkim, Bhutan, Andamans, North East Frontier Agencyt and Nagaland Madhya Pradesh, Vidharbha areas of Maharashtra State and the north east part of Andhra Pradesh (Godavari delta area) Maharashtra State (except Vidharbha areas), Gujarat and north west part of MysoreS Madras, Andhra Pradesh (except the Godavari delta area), Kerala and MysoreS (except north west part)
4.3 Durability - The timbers are classified for durability according to the average life of these test specimens as follows: High Moderate : : Timbers having average life of 120 months and over Timbers having average life of less than 120 months but of 60 months or over Timbers having average life of less than 60 months
II East Zone
Low
III Centre Zone
IV West Zone
4.4 Treatability - The classification is based to represent approximately the degree of resistance offered by the heartwood of a species to the penetration of the preservative fluid under working pressure of 10.5 kgf/cm2. ?he treatability of timbers has been classified as follows: a) Heartwood easily treatable b) Heartwood treatable, but complete penetration of pnxervative not always obtained c) Heartwood only partially treatable d) Heartwood refractory to treatment e) Heartwood veIy refractory to treatment, penetration of preservative being practically nil from side or end 89
V South Zone
*Now, Sikkim is a part of India. tNow, known as Anmachal and Meghalaya. SNOW, known as Karnataka.
SP : 21-1983 4.5 RfJractoriness to Air Seasoning - The timbers are classified, as stated below, under three categories, depending upon their behaviour with respect to cracking and splitting during normal air-seasoning practice suitable for the species concerned: High refractoriness (indicated High in the tables), Moderate refractoriness (indicated Moderate in the tables), and -Note 1 -For classification of timbers according to their uses for various zones, refer to Tables 1 to V of the s&ndurd. Note 2-For key for field identification of commercial timbers (softwoods and hardwoods) based on their general properties, refer to IS : 4970-1973 Key for identification of commercial timbers (first revision).
Low refractoriness tables).
(indicated
Low
in the
4.6 Comparative Strength Coejjicients - The figures for comparative strength coefficients for various uses for all the timbers have been arrived at by suitably grouping the various important mechanical properties that come into play for any particular use, and giving due weightage to the relative importance ofthese properties.
For detailed information, distribution (revised).
refer to IS : 399-1963
Classification
of commercial
timbers
and their zonal
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 190-1974 CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBER (BAULKS .AND SCANTLINGS) (Third Revision)

(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements of timber (baulks and scantlings). 2. Species Botanical Name Abbreviated Symbol CHR CYP DE0 FIR KAL KPI SPR coniferous sawn No. 1 and 2) Width and thickness Volu,ne to nearest centimetre
correct to 3 places of decimal when computed in m3.
Trade Name Chir cypress Deodar Fir Kail Khasi Pine Spruce
Pinus ro.xburghii Sargent Cupressus torulosa D. Don. Cedrus deodara D . Don. Abies spp. Pinus wallichiana A.B. Jacks Pinus insularis Endl. Picea smithiana Boiss Generally
5. Requirements - Shall be air-seasoned to a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a depth of 15 mm from surface, excluding 30 cm from each end. 6. Grading - Special Grade; Grade 1 and Grade 2, depending on prohibited and permissible defects. 7. Prohibited and Permissible Defects
3. Dimensions sizes: Length - 2, 2.5, Cross section 12.5 cm, 25 x 4. Measuremeuts, Length -
available in following
3 and 3.5 m. 20 X 10 cm, 25 X 12.5 cm, 20 X 15 cm, 20~ 15 cm, 30X 15 cm. Rounding OtT
7.1 Prohibited Defecrs - Sawn timber of all three grades shall be free from spiral or twisted grain, warp, any kind of decay or live insect attack. Special Grade sawn timber shall be free from centre heart, wane, cup shakes, borer holes (dead infestation) or sap stain (blue stain) also. Grade 1 shall be free from cup shakes also @ee also Table 1). 7.2 Permissible Dejects - Defects tc, the extent specified in Table 1 shall be permissible.
to nearest lower 0.01 m.
90
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR DIFFERENT GRADES OF CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBERS
(C1m.se7.1 and 7.2)

SL
No.
(1)
DEFECr (2)
SPECIAL(hADE
GRADE
(3) MUXdeviation of 1 in 16 Total length of all longest end splits at each end shall not exceed 6 cm per metre run of piece a) Nil
(4) MUXdeviation of 1 in 10 Total length of all longest end splits at each end shall not exceed 38 cm per metre run of piece a) Live knots up to 25 mm in dia; and live knots from 25 to 35 mm in dia to the extent of 3 knots per metre length of piece shall be permissible provided these are not grouped or located in such a manner as to affect unduly the yield and strength of converted timber. Live knots from 35 to 50 mm in dia to the extent of one knot per me:re length of piece b)Dead knots up to 15 mm in dia to the extent of not more than two knots per metre length of piece and dead knots from 15 to 25 mm in dia to the extent of one knot per metre length of piece. Knots more than 25 mm not permitted
GR4Dn2 (5) MUXdeviation of 1 in 8 Total length of all longest end splits at each end shall not exceed 10 cm per metre run of piece a) Live knots up to 35 mm in dia; and live knots from 35 to 50 mm in dia to the extent of 3 knots per metre length of piece shall be permissible provided these are not grouped or located in such a manner as to affect unduly the yield and strength of converted timber. Live knots from 50 to 75 mm in dia to the extent of one knot per metre length of piece b)Dead knots, even more than two, up to 15 mm in dia provided they are not numerous and not grouped or located in such a manner as to affect unduly the yield on conversion and usefulness of the timber. Dead knots from 15 to 25 mm in dia to the extent of three knots per metre of length of piece. More than 25 and up to 35 mm two knots per metre length. Knots more than 35 mm in dia not permitted Permissible Not exceeding 25 mm in depth on any face. In case one of faces is entirely free from cracks, the opposite face may have a few individual cracks up to 40 mm in depth Permissible Up to one-fourth of width on a broad face subject to a max of 80 mm and up to one-third of width
(Continued)
i) Cross grain ii) End splits
I
iii) Knots
b) Dead knots up to 15 mm in dia to the extent of one knot per metre length of piece
iv) Sap wood v) Surface cracks
Permissible Not exceeding 7.5 mm in depth on any face. In case one of faces is entirely free from cracks, the opposite face may have a few individual cracks up to 10 mm in depth Not permissible Not permissible
Permissible Not exceeding 15 mm in depth on any face. In case one of faces is entirely free from cracks, the opposite face may have a few individual cracks up to 25 mm in depth Permissible Up to one-fifth of width on a broad face subject to amaxof70mmandup to one-third of width on
vi) Sap stain vii) Wane
91
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR DIFFERENT GRADES OF CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBERS - Contd
SL
No.
(1)
DEFECT (2)
SPECIALGRADE
GRADE]
(3)
(4) narrow face subject to a max of 50 mm provided that one broad face is completely free from that defect. Wane shall be measured at the deepest Part
GRADE 2 (5) on narrow face subject to a max of 60 mm provided that one broad face is completely free from this defect. Wane shall be measured at its deepest Part Permissible on two faces only provided such holes are not deeper than 10 mm and are scattered, on a single face only provided they are not deeper than 20 mm and are well scattered Permissible when it is not farther than 50 mm from the nearest edge Permissible to a total length (MUX)of 150 mm. When measured along arc and up to a max depth of 150 mm provided they appear only on one end
viii) Borer holes (dead infestation)
Not permissible
Permissible on one face only provided such holes are not deeper than 10 mm and are well scattered
ix) Centre heart
Not permissible
Permissible when it is not farther than 35 mm from the nearest edge Not permissible
x) Cup shake
Not permissible
8.
than
End Coating length
Up to a distance of 25 mm more of split to prevent and to minimize
end cracking, splitting,
etc.
Note-For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS : 3364 (Part IQ-1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber: Part II Converted timber (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 190-1974 Specification for Coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantlings) (third revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1326-1976 NON-CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBER (BAULK AND SCANTLINGS) (First Revision)

(With Amendment
of non-coniferous Scope - Requirements timber in the form of baulks and scantlings.
No. 1) Length Cross-section = 2, 2.5 and 3.5 mm = 20xlOcm 20X 12.5 cm
1.
sawn
2.
Dimensions and Measurements

Dimensions - Dimensions shall be as ordered. sawn timberis generally available in follow-
20X 15 cm 20X 20 cm
25x 12.5 cm 25x 15 cm 30X 15 cm 92
2.1
However,
ing lengths and cross-sections:
SP : 21-1983
2.2
Measurements,
Rounding
Off
Length -to the nearest lower 0.01 m. Width and thickness - to the nearest 1 cm. Volume - correct to 3 places of decimal when computed in m3. 3. Requirements - Shall be air-seasoned to a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a
SI
depth of 13 mm from surface, excluding 30 cm from each end. Plugging of defects shall not be permissible. 4. Grading - Special Grade, Grade 1 and Grade 2, depending on prohibited and permissible defects. 5. Prohibited Defects Grade 2 Bow Decay Live insect attack Spiral or twisted grain Split across the grain Spring Warp -
Special Grade
i)
Grade 1 Bow Decay Live insect attack Spiral or twisted grain Split across the grain Spring Warp Cup Cup shake -
No. ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x)

xi)
Bow Decay Live insect attack Spiral or twisted grain Split across the grain Spring Warp Cup Cup shake Centre heart Wane Defects TABLE
6.
Permissible
Defects
1
to the extent
specified in Table 1 shall be permissible.

FOR DIFFERENT SAWN TIMBER
PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS OF NON-CONIFEROUS
GRADES
GRADE 2 (5) Permissible on two faces only provided such holes are not deeper than IO mm and are scattered, on a single face only provided they are not deeper than 20 mm and are well scattered Permissible provided it is not farther than 50 mm from the nearest edge and is sound and boxed
Max
SL No. (1) i)
DEFECT (2)
SPECIALGRADE
(3)
GRADE 1 (4) Permissible on one face only provided such holes are not deeper than 10 mm and are well scattered
Borer hole ( dead infestation )
Not permissible
ii)
Centre heart
Not permissible
Permissible provided it is not farther than 25 mm from the nearest edge and is sound and boxed MUX deviation of I to 10 Not permissible Not permissible
iii) Gross grain iv) Cup v) Cup-shake
MUX deviation of 1 to IS Not permissible got permissible
deviation of 1 to 5
Max of 5 mm for any width Up to a total length of 150 mm when measured along the arc and up to a maximum of 150 mm in depth provided they appear only on one end Total length of all longest end splits at each end shall not exceed 8 cm per metre of the length
(Conrinuedj
vi) End-splits
Total length of all longest end splits at each end shall not exceed 4 cm per metre of the length
Total length of all longest end splits at each end shall not exceed 6 cm per metre of the length
93
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR DIFFERENT GRADES OF NON-CONIFEROUS SAWN TIMBER - Cod
SL
No.
DEFECT (2)
SPECIAL GRADE (3)
GRADE 1 (4)
GRADE
(1)
(5) Live knots from 35 to 50 mm in dia and dead knots up to 30 mm in dia provided they are not so numerous or so grouped or located as to affect unduly the strength of the piece Permissible
vii) Knots
Live knots up to 20 mm in dia and dead knots up to 10 mm in dia provided they are not so numerous or so grouped or located as to affect unduly the strength of the piece Permissible
Live knots from 20 to 35 mm in dia and dead knots up to 15 mm in dia prbvided they aie not so numerous or so grouped or located as to affect unduly the strength of the piece Permissible
viii) Sap stain ( blue stain ) ix) Sap wood
a) For haldu, kanju, mango, a) For haldu, kanju, mango, Permissible salai, semul, jhingan, garusalai, semul, jhingan, garuga-permissible up to 100 ga-permissible up to 100 percent percent b) For species of timber other b) For species of timber than (a) permissible than (a) permissible up to 25 percent of the 25 percent of the cross sectional area of any sectional area of any piece other up to cross piece Not exceeding 12.5 mm in depth in any face. In case. one of the faces is free from cracks the opposite face may have a few individual cracks up to 15.0 mm in depth Up to one-fourth of the width on a broad face, subject to the maximum of 80 mm and one-third of the width on the narrow face provided that one broad face and one narrow face is completely free from this defect. Wane shall not be present in more than 30 percent of the total number of pieces accepted at any one time
x)
Surface cracks
Not exceeding 7.5 mm in depth in any face. In case one of the faces is free from cracks the oppgsite face may have a few individual cracks up to 10mm in depth Not permissible
Not exceeding 10mm in depth in any face. In case one of the faces is free from cracks the opposite face may have a few individual cracks up to 12.5 mm in depth Up to one-fifth of the width on a broad face, subject to a maximum of 60 mm and up to one third of the width on the narrow face provided the one broad face and one narrow face is completely free from this defect. Wane shall not be present in more than 30 percent the total number of pieces accepted at any one time
xi) Wane
7.
End Coating - Up to a distance of 15 cm or at least 25 mm more than length of split to prevent and to
minimize
and cracking,
splitting,
etc.
Note 1 -For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS : 3364 (Part II)-1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber: Part II Converted timber (first revkion). Note
2-For
species of timber covered by this specification, refer to Appendix A of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1326-1976 Specification for non-coniferous and scantlings) (first revision).
sawn timber (baulks
94
IS : 1331-1971 CUT SIZES OF TIMBER (Second Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements regarding specification of converted timber normally stocked in timber depot both for structural and non-structural purposes. It refers to cut sizes of timber as stocked and does not take into consideration any reduction or allowance relating to subsequent use. 2. Dimensions - Preferred length shall be 50 cm and upwards in steps of 10 cm. Nominal sizes of width and thickness shall be as given in Table 1.
Note - The size of cut timber specified in Table 1 are at a moisture content of 20 percent. A method for adjustment of dimensionsat different moisture content is given in Appendix A of f/l< slnIr&l~t/. Note In a given lot, the negative variation shall not exceed by more than 10 percent of the lot.
4. Grading - Shall be graded after seasoning at a moisture content not less than 12 percent. 4.1 Structural USC> - Based on permissible and prohibited defects, timber for structural use shall be of three grades, namely, Grade 1, Grade 2 and Grade 3. The estimated effects in reduction of basic strength of timber of Grade 1, Grade 2 and Grade 3 are not more than 12.5, 25 and 37.5 percent respectively. 4.2 Non-structurul Use - Based on permissible and prohibited defects, timber for non-structural use shall be of two glades, namely, Grade 1 and Grade 2. 5. 5.1 Defects Structural Use
3.
Tolerances a) For width and thickness 1) 100 mm and below 2) Above 100 mm b) For length -t3 -0+ %nm - 3 + 25mm -0
5.1.1 Dejects prohibited - Loose grains, splits, compressive wood in coniferous timber, heart wood rot, sap rot, warp, worm holes made by powder post beetles and pitch pockets shall not be permitted. 51.2 Permissible dejkcts - Defects to the extent specified in Table 2 shall be permissible.
TABLE 1 SIZES OF CUT TIMBER FOR STOCKING PURPOSES (Clause 2)

THICKNESS
(cm)
WIDTH
(cm) \
X X X X X X X X X X
I .o
1.5
/ 4.0
X X X X X -
/\ 5.0
X X X X X X -
6.0
X X X X X X -
8.0
X X X X X X X X
10.0
X X X X X X X X X
12.0
X. X X X X X X X x X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
14.0 16.0 18.0
2 2.5 3 4 5
6 8
_ _ 20.0 22.0 24.0 X X X 26.0

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
_ 28.0
X X X X X X X X X X
_ 30.0
X X X X X X X X X X
10
12
--
14
16
X X
18 20
---
___ _
" x = preferred size of the width.
195
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 2
PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR CUT SIZES OF TIMBER FOR STRUCTURAL USE (Clause 5.1.3) GRADE 1 GRADE 2 Permissible at its deepest portion up lo a limit of l/6 of the width of the surface on which it occurs Other than those due to powder post beetles, are permissible Not more than 1 in 15 GRADE 3 Permissible at its deepest portion up to a limit of I/4 of the width of the surface on which it occurs Other than those due to powder post beetles, are permissihle Not more than 1 in I2
SL No. i) Wane
DEFECT
Permissible at its deepest portion up to a limit of l/8 of the width of the surface on which it occurs Other than those due to powder post beetles, are permissible Not more than 1 in 20
ii)
Worm holes
iii) iv)
Slope of grain Liveknots
Permissible maximum size of live knot on faces corresponding to different width (Max) of wide faces of cut sizes of timber ( ranging from 75 to 600 mm ) shall vary from 10 mm to 159 mm. For detailed requirements for each grade, refer to Table 2 of the stun&d Permissible depth ( Max ) corresponding to different width of the face of the timber ( ranging from 75 to 600 mm ) shall vary from 12 mm to 300 mm. For detailed requirements for each grade refer to Table 2 of tile standard. permitted. -
Checks and shakes
5.2 Non-structural
5.2.1 Defects
Use
prohibited
rot, brashness,
shakes,
insect
Heartwood rot, sap attack shall not be
5.2.2 Permissible dejects - Defects to the extent specified in Table 3 shall be permissible.
TABLE 3 SL No. DHECI
PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR CONVERTED TIMBER FOR NON-STRUCTURAL USE GRADE 1 GRADE 2 1 in 12 25. mm 2 Permitted provided these shall be completely bored or cut out and tightly plugged with a cross-grained seasoned timber being of the same species of timber and properly glued, so that its grain run in the direction of the main piece One-fourth of the total thickness of piece or 6 mm whichever is less 5 percent of length Permitted except on the exposed edges, provided they are clear and filled up with the putty or filler. When these are located on the exposed edges of the core, they shall be cut out and fitted and glue in with plug of similar species of timber with grains running in the same direction as that of the pieces (Continued)
i) Slope of grain ii) a) Live knots: Size, Max Number per metre b) Decayed knots, dead knots, and knot holes
1 in15
13 mm 1 Not permitted
.
iii) Checks iv) End split (largest together ) v) Pitch pockets at end and added 3 mm depth, MUX 3 percent of length
96
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 3
PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR CONVERTED FOR NON-STRUCTURAL USE - Contd
TIMBER
St No. vi) vii) viii) ix) Bow
Dm
GRAOE1
GRADE 2
2mmper3OOmm Deviation of 1 percent lmmper3m 1 mm up to 5 cm thickness 2 mm for 5-10 cm thickness 4 mm for more than 10 cm thickness 4.mm per 3 m of length Permitted in pieces over 250 sq cm of cross section provided it is sound and well boxed 4mmper3moflength Not more than.4 percent on the surface on which it appears
4mmper3oOmm Deviation of 2 percent 2mmper2m 2 mm up to 5 cm thickness 3 mm for 5-10 cm thickness 6 mm for more than 10 cm
Warp Spring Cracks
x) xi)
Twist Centre heart
6mmper3moflength
Permitted
xii) xiii)
C&p Wane
8mmper3moflength Not more than 8 percent on the surface on which it appears
Note-For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS : 3364 (Part II)-1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber: Part II Converted timber (firs2 revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1331-1971 Specification for cut sizes of timber (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2372-1963 TIMBER FOR COOLING TOWERS

1.
Scope -
Species,
treatments for timber cooling towers.
grades, requirements and used in the construction of

for cooling towers arc:
net retention of 128 kg/m3 or pentachlorophenol5 percent concentration to a net retention of 8.8 kg/m2. 3.2 Fill minimum To be treated under pressure with a average retention of 16 kg/m3 of timber with
2.
Species -
Suitable
Rotanical Name Cedrus deodara Loudon Pinus wallichiana A. B. Jacks Pinus roxburghii Tectona grandis Linn. f
Trade Name deodar

kail
chir teak
arsenic-copper-chromate of acid-cupricchromate or with 160 kg/m3 of creosote/fuel oil mixture or 12 kg/m3 with pentachlorophenol (95 percent chlorinated phenols), in 5 percent concentration. 3.3 Penetration of Preservative - Depth 100 percent in sapwood of all species and minimum of 1 cm in deodar, kail and teak and 2 cm in chir for heanwood.
Note For detailed requirement of treatment, refer to
3. 3.1
Treatment
Structural and Shell Members - With copperarsenic-chromate or acid-cupric-chromate to a net retention of 12 kg/m3 or cr~osote/fuel oil mixture to a
AppendixA of the standard,
97
SP : 21-1983 4. Grading - Select grade, standard grade. common grade depending on permitted defects. and ments of permissible standard. defects refer to 4.3 of the
5. Prohibited Defects (for All Grades) - Loose gmin, splits, compression wood, heartwood rot, warp, warmholes which are likely to affect strength, pitch pockets, centre-heart (pith). shakes, twisted grain and wane. 6. Permissible Defects For detailed require-
7. Dimensions - Nominal sizes, rough finished dimensions and dressed dimensions for various thicknesses shall be as given in Table 1. 8. Tolerance
Length f 5 mm
Other dimensions
+ 1.5 mm
TABLE 1 NOMINAL
AND DRESSED
DIMENSIONS
(Clause 7) Nominal rough thickness or width, mm Minimum rough sawn thickness or width, mm
Dressed thickness or width, mm 25 23 21 32 30 27 38 35 32 50 47.5 45 75 72.5 70 Over I 00 otf off 5 10
refer to IS : 2372-1963
Specification for timber for cooling towers.
98
SECTION
BITUMEN AND TAR PRODUCTS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title
Page
IS IS IS IS
: : : :
73-1941 214-1961 218-1961 702-1961
Paving bitumen (revised) Coal tar pitch (revised) Creosote and anthracene oil for use as wood preservatives Industrial bitumen (revised)
101
(revised) 102 103 104
100
IS : 73-1961 PAVING BITUMEN (Revised)

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Physical and chemical requirements of paving bitumen for use in roadways, airfields and allied construction. 2; 2.1 Types and Grades
Types
No. 1)
classified into five grades according to their penetration and shall be designated as S35, S45, S65, S!IO and s200. Note - For example, A25 means that paving bitumen corresponding to this grade is from Assam Petroleum and has approximately a penetration value of 25.
a) Paving bitumen and
from Assam Petroleum
(A),
2.2.3 Intermediate mutual agreement. 3. Requirements
grades
shall
be subject
to
b) Paving bitumen from other sources (S). 2.2

Grades
2.2.1 Paving bitumen from Assam Petroleum shall be classified into six grades according to their penetration and shall be designated as A25, A35, A45, A65, A90 and A200. 2.2.2 Paving bitumen from other sources shall be
3.1 The material shall be homogeneous foam when heated to 175C.
and shall not
3.2 Ash - No mineral matter other than naturally contained in the material, shall be present. 3.3 Shall satisfy the requirements given in Table 1.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVING BITUMEN

SL C~ARAC~ERI~~C
REQUIREMENT FOR GRADES
No.
A25 A35 s35 (1) (2) (3) 0.99 0.2 175 (4) 0.99 0.2 175 A45 s45 (5) 0.99 0.2 175 A65 S65 (6) 0.99 0.2 175 S90 (7) 0.98 0.2 175 A200
s200 (8) 0.97 0.2 175
i) Specific gravity at 27OC, Miw ii) Water, percent by weight, Max iii) Flash point, Pensky Martens
ClosedType,C, Min
iv) V)
Softening point, C Penetration, at 25 C 100 g, 5 seconds in l/100 cm
55 to 70 _ 20 to 30
55 to 70 30 to 40
4s to 60 40 to 50
-45 to 60 60 to 70
35 to 50 80 to 100
30 to 45 175 to225 -
vi) Ductility, at 27C in cm, Min
5 (Z) ,::, 1 60 b:,

1 60
(::, 1 60
vii) a) Loss on heating, percent by weight, Max b) Penetration of residue [expressed as percentage of item
1 60
1 60
15 (No value given) 2 60
(~11,&fin
viii) Matter soluble in carbon disulphide, percent by weight, Min
99 99
99
99
99
99
Note- Wherever two values are given, the values given in bracket shall be applicable to Type S bitumen and other applicable to Type A bitumen. All other values are applicable to both Types A and S bitumen.
101
SP : 21-1983
Note-For methods of .tests, refer to IS : 1202-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of specific gravity Cfirsf revision), IS : 1203-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of penetration (firs! revision), IS : 1205-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of softening point (Jir\/ ~~,itio~), IS : 1208-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of ductility Cfirsf revision), IS : 1209-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of flash point and fire point Cfirsf revision), IS : 121 l-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of water content (Dean and Stark method) Cfirsr revision), IS : 1212-3978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of loss on heating Cfirst revision), and IS : 1216-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide or rrichlorocthylcnc cfir.s/ revisions).
refer to IS : 73-1961 Specification for paving bitumen (revised.)
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 216-1961 COAL TAR PITCH (Revised)

1. Scope - Requirements for the .range of four grades of coal tar pitch from soft to hard consistehcies -with softening points varying from 45 to 92C intended for the production of waterproofing, protective and binding compounds employed in masonry, steel, timber and concrete structures and also for the preparation of roofing felts.
Coal tar pitch is also used for caulking of decks, as a binder for carbon electrodes and coal briquettes, for damp-proof courses, flooring mastics and as a base for coal tar paints. This is not suitable for formulation of quick drying black enamels nqr for road construction, for which purposes reference toIS : 215.1961* may be made. 2.
b) Soft medium pitch c) Hard medium pitch d) Hard pitch 3. 3.1 Requirements Cornpositiorl The material shall be:
Note -
a) either the residue of the direct distillation of crude tar produced by the high temperature carbonization of coal in coke ovens or retorts. or b) obtained by fluxing back such pitch residues with high boiling coal tar distillates to give products of the desired softening point. 3.2 The materra shall also comply with the requirements, according to grade, given in Table 1. 102
Grades four grades:
Shall be classified into the following
a) Soft pitch
*Specification tor mad tar (reprised).
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS
FOR COAL TAR PITCH
(Clause 3.2)
SL
No.
CHARACTERISTIC
/
REQUIREMENTFOR GRADES
A
Soft Pitch
Soft Medium Pitch (4) 1.22t01.32 58 to 68C
Hard Medium Pitch (5) 1.22to 1.32 70 to 80C
Hard Pitch
(1) i) Specific gravity at 27C ii) Softening point iii) Distillate:
(2)
(3) 1.20 to I.-30 45 to 5s0c
(6) 1.28 to 1.38 82 1092C
Percent by weight below 27OC,Max Percent by weight below 300C, MUX iv) Matter insoluble in toluene (free carbon), percent by weight, Max vj Ash, percent by weight, Max
4 8 25
4 8 28
3 4 30
No Test No Test 35
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.8
gravity First revision), IS : 12051978
materials: Determination of specific Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of softening point First revision), IS : 1213-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of distillation test (first revision), 1s : 1215-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of matter insoluble in toluene (.irsf revision), and IS : 1217-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of mineral matter (ash) Cfir.sr revkim). Note-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 1202-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous
refer to IS : 216-1961 Specification for coal tar pitch (revised).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 218-1961 CREOSOTE AND ANTHRACENE OIL FOR USE AS \ WOOD PRESERVATIVES (Revised)
1. Scope - Requirements of materials commercially known as coal tar creosote (or creosote oil) and anthracene oil for use as wood preservatives mainly in the treatment of railway sleepers, telegraph and telephone poles, and timber for general use. 2. 2.1 Types Creosote a) Type I - suitable for use in admixture fuel oil, and with 2.2 3. Anthracene Requirements Oil Shall be of one type only.
3.1 Shall be homogeneous and free from any admixture of petroleum or similar oils. Shall consist of pure distillates of high temperature coal tar. 3.2 Liquidity - Shall liquefy completely on being warmed to 38C, with stirring; and shall remain liquid on cooling to 32C and on standing at temperature for 2 hours. 3.3 Shall also comply with the requirements Table 1. 103 given in
b) Tyl>e/f - suitable 1or use alone, or in admixture with fuel oil.
SP : 21-1983
-~~
~~-~
FOR CREOSOTE AND ANTHRACENE OII TABLE 1 REQ UDREMENTS
(Clause 3.3)
SL No. CkAFlAClXRBTIC 1 REQUIREMENTS A \
Creosote Type I
(3) 1.03 to 1.10 2.0 0.50
Creosote Type. II (4) 1.03 to 1.10 2.0 0.50
Anthracene Oil (5) 1.09 to 1.15 2.0 0.50
(1) 0 Specific gravity, 38/38 C
(2)
ii) Water content, percent by volume, Max iii) Matter insoluble in benzene, percent by weight, Max iv) Distillation fractions, percent by weight (per 100 g), distilling up to: a) 210C, Max b) 235C, Max c) 315C, Max d) 355 C, Min 4 Specific gravity of distillation fractions, 38/3PC, Min: a) Fraction between 235 and 315C b) Fraction between 315 and 355C
5 30 75 1.025 -
2 10 55 1.025 -
2 40 45 1.025 1 .os5
Note-1For methods of tests, refer to 1s : 1202-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of specific gravity First mMw@,IS : 121 i-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of water Content (Dean and Stark method) (first revision), IS : 1213-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Distillation test (first revision), and
IS : 1214-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of matter insoluble in benzene
(first reViSiO@.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 218-1961 Specification for creosote and anthracene oil
for use as
-
wood preservatives (revised).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 702-1961 INDUSTRIAL BITUMEN (Revised)

1. Scope - Physical and chemical requirements of industrial bitumen for use in buildings and for other industrial purposes. Note 1 - Any single grade or blend of two or more grades could be used for the following:
a) Manufacture and fixing of roofing and dampproofing
felts; lhe grade 135/10 is used in the manufacture of battery containers and the grade 155/6 in the rubber industry.
Note 2 -These grades are essentially suitable for industrial purposes. But some of the grades can be used for paving purposes also.
2. Grades - Industrial bitumen either fully blown

or semiblown shall be of the following ten grades: 75115 65 I25 75130 85 I25 85 I40 90115 105 120 115/15 135110 155 I6
b) Manufacture ?f plastic bitumen for leak stops;

3
Fixing of heat insulation materials for buildings, refrigeration and cold storage equipment; .
d) Manufacture of waterproof packing paper; e) Manufacture of pipe asphalts; 0

Manufacture of joint fillers; and
g) Manufacture
of bituminous filling compounds for cable boxes for sealing accumulators and batteries.
Note - The two figures given in the grades denote approximate values of softening point and penetration in that order; for example, 85 /25 means that industrial bitumen corresponding to this grade has approximately a softening point of 85C and a penetration of 25.
104
SP : 21-1983 3. Requirements -See
Table 1.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL LIMIT FOR BITUMEN
GRADE
SL
CHARACTERISTIC
NO.
(1) (2)
75/15 (3) 1.00 to 1.05 200
65125 (4) 1.00 to 1.05 200
75130 (5) 1.doto 1.05 200
85125 (6) 1.00 to 1.05 200
85140 (7) 1.00 to 1.05 200
90/15 (8) 1.01 to 1.06 200
105/20 (9) 1.01 to 1.06 200
115/15 (10) 1.01 to 1.06 200
135/10 (11) 1.02 to 1.07 200
155/6 (12) 1.02 to 1.07 200
i) Specific gravity at 27C
ii) Flash point, Pensky Martens Closed Type, C, Mire iii) Softening point, OC
65 to 80 10 to 20 2.5 0.30
55 to 70 20 to 30 10 0.30
70 to 80 25 to 35 3 0.30
80 to 90 20 to 30 3 0.30
80 to 90 35 to 45 3 0.30
85 to 100 10 to 20 2 0.30
95 to 115 15 to 25 2 0.30
110 to 120 8 to 20 2 0.30
130 to 140 7 to 12 1 0.30
150 to 160 2 to 10 0 0.30
iv) Penetration, at 25%, 100 g, 5 seconds in l/100 cm v) Ductility, at 27%, in cm, Mk vi) Loss on heating, weight, Max percent by
vii) Matter soluble in carbon disulphide, pepcent by weight, Min
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
-Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1202-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminousmaterials: Determination of specific gravity Cfirsr revision), IS : 1203-1978 Methods for testing. tar and bituminous materials: Determination of penetration (first revision), IS : 1205-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of softening point (first revision), IS : 1208-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of ductility (first revision), IS : 1209-1978Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of flash point and fire point (first revision), IS : 1212-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of loss on heating (first revision), and IS : 1216-1978Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide or trichloroethylenc (firs/ revision).
refer to IS : 702-1961 Specification for industrial bitumen (revised).
105
SECTION
FLOOR COVERINGS AND OTHER FINISHES
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Page
GENERAL IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS : 777-1970 : ~1237-1980 : 1542-1977 : 3461-1980 : 3462-1979 : 3463-1966 : 4457-1982 : 4832 (Part I)-1969 : 4832 (Part II)-1969 : 4832 (Part lII)-1968 : 4860-1968 Glazed earthenware tiles first revision) Cement concrete flooring tiles Qirst revision) Sand for plaster first revision) PVC asbestos floor tiles (first revisio;z) Flexible PVC flooring first revision) Polystyrene wall tiles Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tiles (firsr revision) Chemical resistant mortars: Part I Silicate type Chemical resistant mortars: Part II Resin type Chemical resistant mortars: Part III Sulphur type Acid-resistant bricks 109 110 111 112 ,113 114 116 116 117 118 119
LINOLEUM IS : 653-1980 RUBBER FLOORING IS : 809-1970 BITUMINOUS IS : 1195-1978 IS : 8374-1977 Rubber flooring materials for general purposes first revision)
.
Linoleum
sheets and tiles (second revision)
120
121
FLOORING Bitumen mastic for flooring (second revision) Bitumen mastic, anti-static and electrically conducting grade 122 124
108
IS : 777-1970 GLAZED EARTHENWARE
TILES
(First Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope Requirements for glazed earthenware No. 1 and 2) 4.2 Warpage +0.5 -0.3 mm +0.7 149X 149 mm tiles: _. 4 mm 99X 99 mm tiles:
Note For methodof test for watpage, refer to Appendix A of
tiles and associated fittings generally used for finishing
the surfaces of walls and floors of water-closets, bathrooms, kitchens, hospitals and similar places where cleanliness is an import&t factor. 2. Dimensions - 149 x 149 mm and 99 x 99 mm. Thickness 5, 6 and 7 mm (for tiles and fittings). For dimensions of fittings, see Table 1. 3. Tolerances Lengths - Average kO.8 mm, individual Thickness - + 0.5 mm. 4. Trueness of Shape
thestandard.
5. Performance Requirements Shall not exceed 18 per-
5.1 Water Absorption cent. kO.5 mm.
5.2 Crazing - Shall not show any sign of crazing after two cycles of test in an autoclave. 5.3 cm. Impact Strength Not less than 0.02 kgf.m/
4.1 Squareness - Variation from right angle shall be not more than ,0.5 mm per 100 mm run.
5.4 Chemical Resistance - Glazed surface (white or cream colour) shall show no deterioration.
TABLE 1
SL FITTING
DIMENSIONS
LENGTH
OF FITTINGS
FOR GLAZED
HEIGHT
EARTHENWARE
TILES
RADIUS OF ROUNDING
WIDTH
mm
No.
mm
mm
.4T
GIRNERS
mm i) Cove base, straight top Same as for corresponding tiles do 25, 31, 37 Same as for corresponding tiles do 150 150 Same as for corresponding tiles do 25
ii) Round edge tile iii) Corner cups iv) Angles, glazed
25, 31, 37
10 to 20 -
v) Ridges vi) Legs vii) Cornice viii) Capping beads Note-Fittings
50
,
25, 31, 31 23 25, 31, 37 50 12
associated with glazed tiles as given in this Table are shown in Fig. 1 of the standard.
Note-For
methods of test, refer to 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 777-1970 Specification for glazed earthenware tiles (first revision).
109
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1237-1980 CEMENT CONCRETE
FLOORING
TILES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for cement concrete flooring tiles of plain cement, plain coloured and terrazo types. Chequered tiles are not covered. 2. Terminology
SL No.
5.2 Thickness of Wearing Layer - The minimum thickness for various classes of tiles shall be as specified in Table 1.
TABLE
THICKNESS CLASS OF TILE
qF WEARING
LAYER MINIMUM THICKNESS OF WEARING LAYER mm 5 5
2.1 Plain Cement Tiles - Tiles having a wearing surface wherein no pigments and stone chips are used. 2.2 Plain Coloured Tiles - Tiles having a plain wearing surface wherein pigments are used but no stone chips. 2.3 Terrazo Tiles - Tiles at least 25 percent of whose wearing surface is composed of stone chips in a matrix of ordinary or coloured Portland cement mixed with or without pigments and mechanically ground and filled. 3. Classification a) General Purnose Tiles - Used for flooring of normally lightly loaded, such as in office buildings, schools, colleges, hospitals and residential buildings.
i) ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Plain cement and plain coloured tiles for general purpose Terrazo tiles with chips of size varying from the smallest up to 6 mm, for general purpose Terrazo tiles with chips of size varying from the smallest up to 12 mm, for general purpose Terrazo tiles with chips of size varying from the smaller up to 20 mm, for general purpose Plain cement and plain coloured tiles, for heavy duty
b) Heavy
Duty Floor Tiles - Used for heavy conditions, foot paths, entrances and staircases of public buildings, passages of auditoriums and storage godowns.
6. General Quality - Wearing layer of tiles shall be free from projections, depressions, cracks, holes, cavities and other blemishes. Edges of wearing layer may be rounded. 7. Finish - Colour and texture of wearing layer shall be uniform throughout its thickness. No appreciable difference in appearance of tiles from point of view of colour of aggregate, its type and its distribution on surface of wearing layer shall be present. 8. Physical Requirements - All tests shall be carried out not earlier than 28 days from the date of manufacture. 8.1 Flatness of Tile Surface - The amount of concavity and convexity shall not exceed 1 mm. 8.2 Perpendicularity - The longest gap between the arm of the square and the edge of tile shall not exceed 2 percent of length of edge. 8.3 Straightness - The gap between the thread and the plane of tile shall not exceed 1 percent of length of edge. 8.4 Water Absorption exceed 10 percent. 110 Average value shall not
4. 4.B
Dimensions Size shall be as follows:

Length mm Breadth Thickness
mm 200 250 300
mm 20 22 25
200 250 300
4.1.1 Half tiles rectangular available.
in shape shall also be
4.1.2 Other shapes and sizes of tiles may be manufactured when agreed to mutually provided all other requirements are met. 5. Tolerances
5.1 On length or breadth, it shall be + 1 mm and on thickness +5 mm.
SP : 21-1983
8.5 Wet Transverse Strength not be less than 3 N/mm2. 8.6 Resistance to Wear teed the following values:
Average value shall
2) Wear on individual
specimen
4 mm
b) For heavy duty floor tiles: 1) Average wear 2) Wear on individual specimen 2mm 2.5 mm
The wear shall not ex-
a) For general purpose tiles: 1) Average wear

Note-For
3.5 mm
reauirements in regard to materials. manufactuie and for methods of tests refer to the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1237-1980 Specification

revision).
for
cement
concrete
flooring
tiles (first
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1542-1977 SAND FOR PLASTER (First Revision)

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements of naturally occurring sands and crushed stone sands (or crushed grave sands) used in mortars for internal wall and ceiling plastering, and external plastering using mixes of lime cement, composite lime - cement or gypsum (with or without admixtures) and sand. 2. Quality No. 1) specified in 6.2.2 of IS : 2386
standard solution (Part II)-1963*
2.3 Compressive strength of mortar cubes 1 cement: 6 sand shall not be less than 30 kgf/cm2 at 28 days. 2.4 Amount of water for gauging shall be that required to give a How between 110 to 115 with 25 drops in 15 seconds. 3. Grading IS Sieve 9.50-mm 4.75-mm 2.36-mm 1.18-mm 600 -micron 300 -micron 150 -micron Percentage Passing 100 95-100 95-100 90-100 80- 100 20-65 o-15
2.1 General - It shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter. 2.2 Deleterious Material - Shall not contain impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal, mica, shale, sea shells, organic impurities, etc, in such quantities as to affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of plaster, etc. 2.2.1 Cluy, jine silt and jne exceed 5 percent by weight. dust Shall not
2.2.2 Organic impurities - Colour of liquid shall be below that indicated by comparison on with the Note l-Tolerance
Note 2-For
*Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part 11Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities.
of 5 percent is allowed except on 600-micron and finer sieves.
crushed stone sands, permissible limit on 150-micron sieve is increased to 20 percent.
Note J-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1727-1967Methods of test for pozzolanic materials (first revision), IS : 2250-1980Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars (first revision), IS : 2386 (Part I)-1963 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part I Particle size and shape, and IS : 2386 (Part II)-1963 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Part II Estimation of deleterious materials and organic-impurities.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1542-1977 Specification for sand for plaster (first revision).
111
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3461-1980 PVC ASBESTOS FLOOR TILES (First Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements for smooth surfaced homogeneous PVC asbestos floor tiles. Laminated floor tiles and floor tiles having embossed surface are not covered in this standard. 2. Materials - Blended composition of thermoplastic binder (vinyl chloride polymer and/or vinyl chloride copolymers), asbestos fibre, tillers and pigments. 3. 3.1 Dimensions Sizr and Tolerances shape as agreed to mutually. Tolerance, + 0.4 mm on 200 mm size and +OS mm on 250 mm size. For larger size tolerance shall be rfrO.2 percent. 3.2 Thickness ante, f0.15 mm. 1 S, 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0 mm. Toler-
4. Colour and Finish - Tiles shall be plain or mottied. Plain tiles shall have colour uniformly distributed through tiles. Mottled tiles shall have colours distributed at random throughout thickness of tile. 5. Physical Requirements
FLOOR TILES
200 and 250 mm square. Other size and

TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS
See Table 1.
Ok PVC ASBESTOS
SL No. (1) i)
CHARACTERISTIC
REQUIREMENT (3) Gap between the sides of the tile and the arms of the metal jig shall not be greater than 0.15 mm for last 50 mm towards the farther end from the junction of the arms Change in any linear dimension shall not exceed 0.25 percent Shall not be inferior to that of No. 5 of the 8 standard patterns of blue dyed woolen fabric specified in IS : 686-l957* Loss in weight shall not exceed I percent Shall not exceed 0.75 mm Average indentation at the end of one minute shall not exceed 0.38 mm and no individual reading shall deviate from the average by more than 0.05 mm. In relation to the one minute indentation figures, the average indentation at the end of 10 minutes shall not exceed the value specified?
SL No. (1)
CHARACTERISTIC (2)
REQUIREMENT (3) and no individuil reading shall deviate from the average by more than 0.05 mm Average indentation shall not exceed 0.82 mm and no individual reading shall deviate from the average by more than 0.05 mm Shall not exceed 0.15 mm After immersion in various substances and when tested the width of the scratch on the surface shall not exceed 3 mm. The colour of the treated test piece shall show no significant change when compared with the untreated test piece Shall deflect at least 25 mm without breaking Shall not suffer a fracture To be agreed between the purchaser and the supplier
(74
Squareness
b) At 46 f 2C
ii) iii)
Dimensional stability Colour fastness daylight to
vii) viii)
Residual indentation Resistance to various substances
iv) V) vi)
Volatile matter Curling Indentation a) At 21+2C
ix) x) xi)
Deflection Impace Abrasion resistance
*Method for determination of colour fastness of textile materials to daylight. tFor detailed requirements of indentation limits at 27 + 2C, refer to Table 2 of the standard.
Note 1 -
For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3464-1980 Methods of test for plastic floor covering and wall tiles cfirs! revision). Note 2-For categories of tests, refer to 6 of the sfandurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3461-1980 Specification for PVC asbestos floor tiles (first revision).
112
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3462-1979 FLEXIBLE PVC FLOORING
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements unbacked for homogeneous flexible PVC flooring including laminated PVC flooring in which the composition of each of the laminate is substantially the same. 1.1 The flooring may be supplied lengths or in tile form. in continuous 3.2 Thickness - Standard thickness of floor covering shall be 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 and 3 mm. 3.2.1 Laminate type coverings shall have a top wearing layer of 0.5 mm up to 2 mm thick flooring and 1 mm for flooring of thickness between 2 and 3 mm. 3.3
Tolerances As specified in Table
1.
2. Materials - Blended composition of thermoplastic binder {vinyl chloride polymer and/or vinyl chloride copolymer), fillers and pigments. 3. 3.1 Dimensions and Tolerances
3.4 Non-standardSizes - Other sizes and thicknesses as agreed to mutually provided requirements on tolerances as given in Table 1 are met. 4. Colour and Surface Characteristics - Flooring shall have a uniform wearing surface. The colour and the pattern shall extend through full thickness of flooring for flooring not laminated and it shall extend to full thickness of top layer in case of laminated flooring.
5.
Linear Dimensions Sheets or Rolls Tiles Width 1 000, 1 500 and 20QOmm 250, 300, 600 and 900 mm square
Requirements
See Table 1:
TABLE
SL No. (1) CHARACTERISTIC (2)
1 REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENT
OF PVC ASBESTOS
SL No. il)
FLOOR TILES
REQUIREMENT (3)
CHARACTERISTIC (2)
(3)
Thickness
ii)
Width of sheet or roll
iii)
Tile size
iv)
Squareness (for tiles
only)
v)
Dimensional stability
The mean thickness shall not differ by more than 0.13 mm from that specified. The variation between any two measurements shall not exceed 0.20 mm Width shall be not less than that specified and not more than 6 mm than the specified The dimensions shall not vary from the specified dimensions by more than 0.10 percent Gap between the sides of the tiles and the arms of the metal jig shall not be greater than 0.15 mm towards the farther end from the junction of the arms Charge in any linear dimension shall not exceed 0.4 percent for sheet and 0.25
vi)
Colour fastness daylight
to
vii) viii) ix)
Curling Residual indentation Flexibility Resistance to various substances
x)
xi)
Ply adhesion
percent for tiles. After the test the specimen shall show no signs of curling Shall not be inferior to that of No. 5 of the 8 standard patterns of blue dyed woollen fabric specified in IS : 686-1957* Shall not exceed 0.75 mm Shall not exceed d. 10 mm Shall not break, crack or show any other signs of failure The average scratch width obtained after immersion shall not exceed 2 mm. The colour of the treated test pieces shall show no significant change when compared with untreated material Adhesion between plies iq any test piece shall be not less than 1.05 kN/m
(Continued)
113
SP : 21-1983
TARLE I
CHARACTERISTIC
REQUIREMENTS OF FLEXIBLF PVC FLOORING -
Comd
SL No. (1) xii)
REQUIREMENT (3) Change in any linear dimen, sions shall not exceed 0.4 percent No exudation of plasticizer shall be apparent nor shall there be any change in appearance. The mandrel test shall not produce surface cracking
SL No. (1) xiv)
CHARACTERISTIC (2) Elastic product
REQUIREMENI (3) The mean product of tensile strength and elongation shall be not less than 2 MJ/m3
(2) Moisture movement
xiii)
Heat ageing and exudation
*Method of determination materials to daylight.
of colour
fastness
of textile
refer to IS : 3462-1979 Specification for flexible PVC flooring
(first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3463-1966 POLYSTYRENE
1. Scope - Requirements for polystyrene tiles to be used on interior surface of walls, partitions and ceilings. 2. Workmanship - Shall be free from flow marks, sinks, warpage, blemishes.and other defects. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 114 Size, mm
WALL TILES
99x99 rf:1 1.25 0.625kO.125 1.05 148.5X 148.5 f1.5 1.75, 2.00 0.625&O. 125 1.35
Tolerance in length, mm Thickness, Min , mm Cavity depth, Min ,
SP : 21-1983
4.
Requirements
-See
Table 1.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF POLYSTYRENE WALL TILES
SL
ChRACTERIsTIC
REQUIREMENT
SL
CHARACTERISTIC
REQUIREMENT
No.
No.
(1)
(2)
(3) Gap between sides of tile and arms of metal jig shall not exceed 0.003 mm for each 1 mm run, with a maximum gap of 0.30 mm The base surface of each tile shall be Bat. The maximum height of any gap between lip and flat surface detectable by a feeler gauge shall not exceed 0.25 mm The face surface of each unembossed tile excluding edges, shall be flat such that the maximum gap between surface and straight edge detectable at any point on face surface with a feeler gauge shall not exceed 0.75 mm
(1)
(2)
(3) No difference in colour shall be observed between exposed and non-exposed part of tiles No contrast shall be observed when tiles, including mottled and white, are placed on black and white surface No cracking or crazing shall be detectable to naked eye The appearance of face surface of tile shall be unchanged and edges of tiles shall not deviate from a straight line in any direction by more than 0.75 mm The limit to be agreed between the purchaser and the supplier. Maximum value shall not exceed 5 percent To be agreed between the purchaser and the supplier
i) Squareness
iii) Colour fastness to daylight or artificial light iv) Opacity
ii) Flatness
v) Cracks and crazing
vi) Resistance to deformation
heat
vii) Water absorption
viii) Non-inllamability
Note l-For Note Z-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 3464-1980 Methods of tests of plastic floor covering and wall tiles Cfirst revbion). categories of tests, refer to 6 of Hzestundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3463-1966 Specification for polystyrene wall tiles.
115
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4457-1982 CERAMIC UNGLAZED ACID RESISTING TILES
VITREOUS
(First Revision j
1. Scope - Requirements reous acid resisting tiles. for ceramic unglazed vitTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF CERAMIC UNGLAZED VITREOUS ACID RESISTING TILES
REQUIREMENT
2. Finish - The finished tile, when fractured shall appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogeneous. Tile shall be sound, true to shape, flat and free from flaws and other manufacturing defects. 3. Dimensions and Tolerance
SL CHARACTERISTIC No. 8 Squareness
The gap between the inner edge of the square and the adjacent side of the tile shall not exceed 1 mm per 100 mm run k1.5 mni
k2.0 mm
ii)
3.1 Dimensions - Size-(i) 100X 100 mm or 98.5X98.5 mm, (ii) 150X150 mm or 148.5X148.5 mm, and (iii) 200X200 mm or 198.5~ 198.5 mm. Thickness - 25, 20, 12 and 10 mm. Depth of grooves on underside shall not exceed 3 mm. 3.2 4.
iii) iv)
VI
vi) vii)
Warpage: for size (i) for size (ii) tor size (iii) Water absorption Compressive strength Flexural strength Resistance to acid Abrasion resistance
Tolerance Requirements
f 2.5 percent.
See Table 1.
2 2.5 mm 2 percent, MUX 70 N/mm* (700 kgf/cm*), Min 20 N/mm* (200 kgf/cm*), Min Loss in mass shall not exceed 1.5 percent i) Average wear 2 mm, MUX individual ii) Wear on specimen 2.5 mm, Max
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to G of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4457-1982 Specification for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tiles (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4832 (PART I)-1969 CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS

PART I SILICATE TYPE (With Amendment No. 1)
1. Scope - Requirements for chemically setting silicate type of chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units. Such mortars are resistant to most type of acids except hydrofluoric and 116
concentrated orthophosphoric acids. They are not resistant to alkalis or to boiling water and steam. They deteriorate by continued exposure to water.
SP : 21-1983
2.
Materials
TABLE
1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SILICATE TYPE CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS

PROPERTY REQUIREMENT
2.1 Binder - Solution of sodium silicate or potassium silicate with silica/sodium oxide or silica/ potassium oxide molecular ratio of 3 to 3.7. Specific gravity 1.4. 2.2 2.3 3.
SL
No.
I
Silicate Type Silicate Type (4) 20 40 150 5 18
Fillers -
Silica, quartz, ganister, andesite, etc.

(1)
0)
Working time at 27 f 2C, Min minutes Flexural strength at 7 days, Min. kgf/cmz Compressive strength at 7 days, Min , kgf/cmz Bond strength Min , kgf/cmz Absorption of toluene, Max, percent by weight
(3) 15 35 100 5 18
Setting Agent Physical
Fluoride or acid .compound. See Table 1.
0 ii)
Requirements
iii) iv) v)
4. Chemical Requirements - Limits of chemical resistance may be settled between the purchaser and the supplier. Note 1 - For methods resin type.
of tests, refer to IS : 4456 (Part I)-1967 Methods of test for chemical
resistant
mortars:
Part
I Silicate type and 1 of IS : 4441-1980
Note 2 - For general guide for chemical resistance of silicate type mortars to various substances, Code of practice for use of silicate type chemical resistant mortars (first revision).
refer to Table
For detailed information, Part I Silicate type.
refer to IS : 4832 (Part I)-1969 Specificqtion for chemical resistant mortars:
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4832 (PART II)-1969 CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS

PART II RESIN TYPE No. 1) Physical Requirements -See Table 1. (With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for resin type chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical-resistant masonry units. Such mortars have good resistant to non-oxidizing mineral acids and poor resistance to oxidizing mineral acids.. Fairly resistant to inorganic alkalis. Resistant to water; hence give impermeable joints. Used for joining acid-proof bricks and tiles. 2. 2.1 Materials 3.
4. General Requirements - Resin, shall have viscosity. Filler material shall have properly graded particles that will permit preparation of a minimum joint thickness of 1.5 mm. 5. Chemical Resistance Requirement -The limits may be settled between the purchaser and the supplier. 6. Shelf Life - For phenolic and polyester resins is about 3 months and for furane and epoxy resins about 12 months from date of manufacture. 117
Resins -
Phenolic,
furane, epoxy, polyester.
2.2 Fillers - Siliceous or other inert fillers. Shall be graded so as to permit 1.5 mm joints. 2.3
Catalyst -
May be incorporated
in fillers.
SP : 21-1983
TABLE I
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS PARTICULARS
OF RESIN TYPE CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS

REQUIREMENTS FOR
SL
No.
TYPEOF Moa~~a
/\ Phenolic
Type (1) (2)

i) Working time at 27 +2C, Min, minutes ii) Flexural strength at 7 days, Min, kgf/cm* (3) 20 75 350 10 1
Furane Type
(4)
Epoxy Type
(5)
Polyester Type
(6)
20
75 350 10 1
20
150 500 12
20
150 500 12 1
iii) Compressive strength at 7 days, Min, kgf/cm*

iv) Bond strength,Min, kgf/cm2 v) Absorption, MUX, percent by weight
Note Note l-For
In the test for bond strength the joint shall not fail at or below the value specified. methods of tests, refer to IS : 4456 (Part I)-1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part I Silicate type and
resin type. Note 2-For general guide for chemical resistance of resin type mortars to various substances, refer to Table I of IS : 4443-1980Code of practice for use of resin type chemical resistant mortars (first revision).
For detailed information, Part II Resin type.
refer to IS : 4832 (Part II)-1969 Specification for chemical resistant mortars:
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4832 (PART III)-1968 CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS

PART III SULPHUR TYPE
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements of sulphur type chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units. Such mortars have good resistance against most of the acids except concentrated oxidizing acids, but have poor resistance to alkalis. Used for jointing acid resistant bricks or tiles. 2.
Composition
No. 1) Physical Requirements -See Table 1.
3.
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SULPHUR

TYPE CHEMICAL R-FSISTANT MORTARS
a) Sulphur b) Inert tiller -
55 to 70 percent 30 to 45 percent
c) Sieve analysis of silica filler 425 micron 1s Sieve - material retained 5 percent, Max 150 micron IS Sieve - material retained 10 percent, Min 75 micron IS Sieve - material retained 35 percent, Min
NoteFor other fillers, requirements given at SI No. (vii) of
SL PROPERTY REQUIREMENT No. (1) (2) (3) i) Compressive strength at 48 hours, Min. kgf/ 280 cm2 ii) Tensile strength at 48 hours, Min , kgf/cm2 30 iii) Flexural strength at 48 hours, Min , kgf/cm2 70 iv) Bond strength at 48 hours, Min. kgf/cm* IO v) Proportion of original strength retained after 20.0 thermal shock test, Min, percent vi) Moisture absorption, Max, percent I.0 vii) Tendency of aggregate to settle,Mar, variation 0.6 from unity
4.
Chemical Resistance Requirements - The limits may be settled between the purchaser and the supplier.
5. Storage Life - Shall not be less than 2 years. Shall be placed in a dry place away from fire.
Table 1 shall apply.

Note l-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 4456 (Part II)-1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part 11Sulphur type.
Note 2-For general guide for chemical resistance of sulphur type mortars of various substances, refer to Table l of IS : 4442-1980 Code of practice for use of sulphur type chemical resistant mortars (first revision).
For detailed information, Part III Sulphur type.
refer to IS : 4832 (Part III)-1968 Specification for chemical resistant mortars:
118
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4860-1968 ACID-RESISTANT
1. Scope Requirements of acid-resistant bricks. 4. Warpage Note -
BRICKS
Not more than2.5
mm at any point.
refer to 2.4.1 of the
Such bricks are designed primarily, for use in chemical and allied industries and are used in masonry, flooring,
For measurement of warp,
etc, subject to acid attack, lining of sewers carrying industrial effluents, etc. Made out of suitable clay or shale with low lime and iron content, felspar, Hint or sand and vitrified at high temperatures. 2. 3. Dimensions Tolerances Dimensions (mm) 230 114 64 Tolerances (mm) k3.5 k2.0 k1.0 230
X
stundard. 5.
Classification
114
64 mm.
5.1 Class I - Recommended for severe type of corrosive environments as obtained in storage tanks, pickling tanks, etc. 5.2 Class II - Recommended for areas subject to occasional spillage of acids, fumes, and contact with dry chemicals as in fertilizer silos. 6. Performance Requirements Sc>e Table 1.
TABLE 1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF ACID-RESISTANT BRICKS

SL cIMMXERlSTIC
No. (I)
i)
REOUlRpMwrS A
(2) Water absorption, percent. MUX
Class I Bricks (3) 2 100 700 Loss in weight shall not
Class II Bricks
(4)
4 70 50
ii) Flexural strength, kgf/cm* , Min iii) Compressive strength. kgf/cm z, Min iv) Resistance to acid
exceed I.5 percent

v) Resistance to wear ( optional ) Average wear shall not exceed 2 mm
Loss in weight shall not exceed 4.0 percent

-
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to D of thestundardand concrete flooring tiles (first revision).
Appendix A of IS : 1237-1980 Specification for cement
For detailed-information, refer to IS : 4860-1968 Specification for acid-resistant bricks.
119
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 653-1980 LINOLEUM SHEETS AND TILES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of linoleum manufactured as sheets or tiles on a hessian backing and used as floor covering. It does not include jute canvas as backing material. 2. Materials
Jaspe and Marble Linoleum 3.2 Moire, Composition shall be of different colours extending from wearing surface to backing at random to form a variegated surface.
Note - For illustrations of plain, moire, jaspe and marble linoleum, see Fig. 1 to 4 of he standard.
2.1 Wearing surface of linoleum shall be made from oxidized or polymerized linseed oil or suitable drying oil, with necessary driers; rosin or resin or their combination; cork flour or wood flour or both; mineral fillers; and colouring material or pigments. 2.2 The paint, if used, for painting the hessian backing shall conform to the following requirements:
Characteristic Requirement, Percent
4. 4.1
Dimensions
Linear
and Tolerances
Dimensions
4.1.1 Sheets - Shall be supplied in rolls of lengths not less than 5.5 m. Standard width shall be 2 .O m.
4.1.2 square.
Tiles -
Size shall be 228,305 and 457 mm thickness shall
Red Oxide Whiting Linseed oil White spirit 2.2.1 cent. 3. Type
4 77 14 5
4.2 Thickness - Standard overall be 4.5, 3.2, 2.0 and 1.6 mm. 4.3
Tolerances -See
Table I.
Permissible variation shall be +0, - 1 per-
4.4 Cork Tiles - Shall be of sizes and thickness as specified in 4.1.2 and 4.2 respectively. 5. Finish - Wearing surface shall be smooth, uniform and be free from indentations, cracks and protruding particles. Hessian backing shall not be painted uniess otherwise specified. 6. Physical Requirements -SEC Table I.
3.1 Plain Linoleum - Composition shall be of uniform colour extending throughout full thickness from wearing surface to hessian backing.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF LINOLEUM SHEETS, LINOLEUM TILES AND CORK TILES

SL No. (1) (2) (3) CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT
i)
ii)
Width of sheet Tile size (see Note)
iii) :v) v) vi) vii)
Thickness Squareness (for tiles only) Seasoning (for plain linoleum only) Residual indentation Flexibility
Average value shall not vary by morel than + 3mm 228kO.4 mm 305 f 0.45 mm 457 f 0.60 mm Average value shall not vary by more than + 0.15 m Gap between the sides of the tile and the arms of metal jig, shall not be greater than 0.25 mm at any point along the sides The cut surface shall show no difference in colour or grain, between the edges and the centre, 24 hours after the cut has been made Shall not exceed 10 percent of the original overall thickness Shall not crack or break
(Conrirtued)
120
SP : 21-1983
TAHLX 1 HEQUIKEMENTS OF LINOLkXJM SHIXTS, l,INOLt%M TILE5 AND COHK TILES SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT
Corzrtl
No. (1) viii) Water absorption (2)

For Thickness. mm 4.5 3.2
(3)
Water Absorption, Percent, 5.5 6.5 Max
ix) x)
Ageing
2.0 1.6 After ageing the
10 11.5
Shall colour
sheets shall show no sign of discolourarion. also satisfy the requirements of residual indentation, flexibility,
fastness, water absorption after ageing

Colour fastness to artificial light Shall not be inferior to that of No. 5 of the 8 standard dyed wool cloth as spccificd in IS : 2424-1967 at the time of ac:ual cutting of the tiles. to artificial light (xenon lamp). -patterns of the blue
Note *Method
The tolerances on sizes are applicable of determination
of colour fastness of textile material
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 9704-1980 Methods
of test for linoleum
sheets and tiles.

revision).
refer to IS : 6.53-1980 Specification for linoleum sheets and tiles (second
SUMMARY OF
IS : 809-1970 RUBBER FLOORING MATERIALS FOR GENERAL PURPOSES (First Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements, composition, workmanshidand tests ibr rubber flooring material suitable for covering floors of domestic and public buildings, cinemas, hospitals, large stores, ships, transport vehicles, etc. It does not cover speciai types of rubber floorings used for electrical insulating purposes. conductive or anti-static flooring having chemical and oil-resistant properties. 2. 2.1 Types With regard to topping: Type A Type B 2.2 plain or marbled ribbed or fluted 3.3
3. 3.1
Requirements
Appeurutzce - Shall be of first class workmanship, satisfactorily vulcanized, free from sulphur bloom and objectionable odour and blisters, cracks and embedded foreign matter. The edges and ends shall be cut true and square.
3.2 Colou~~ - Shall not be affected by cleaning with water and a washing soap or floor polish.
Diriwr~simr~.s
3.3.1
SlrEct.s
Mi~~irn~r~u Width
Thickness
With regard to backing: Type C - with fabric backing or fabric insen Type D - with sponge rubber backing Type E -- with plain rubber backing 121
mm 2.5 Over 3 and up to 5 Over 5 and up to 6.5
Length 5?O 3.5 2.5
mm 900 900 900
SP : 21-1983
3.3.2 Tiles - 200x200 mm, 300x300 mm and 500x 500 mm. Any thickness as specified for sheets. 3.3.3 Tolerance +f.:
--v.L
4. 4.1
Performance Hardness -
Requirements Shall not be less than 65 IRHD. Not more than 0.5 percent Shall not exceed 15
mm
-
on
thickness.
Minimum thickness of wearing surface shall be 1 mm for multiple stratum backed type and 3 mm for Type D flooring.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3400 (Part II)-1980 revision). IS : 3400 (Part X)-l977 Methods of test for vulcanized and Appendix B of ;he srandard.
4.2 Wuter Absorption by weight. 4.3 Compression percent.

Methods rubbers:
Set -
of test for vulcanized rubbers: Part 11 Hardness Cfirsr Part X Compression set at constant strain (first revision),
For detailed information, purposes (first-revision).
refer to IS : 809-1970 Specification for rubber flooring
materials for general
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1195-1978 BITUMEN MASTIC FOR FLOORING (Second Revision)

1. Scope four grades of bitumen mastic of ground limestone, coarse ._ . if required, incorporated with 1.2.1 Grades I and II may be used as a polished flooring for light traffic or as an underlay to other floor coverings. 1.3 This does not cover special grades of bitumen mastic flooring, such as chemical resistant, oil resistant or spark free flooring; for these purposes special bitumen mastics are available. Note - A guide to the selection of the appropriate given in Appendix A of the standard. 2. Material
grade is
1.1 Requirements for for flooring, composed aggregate and pigment, asphaltic cements.
1.2 Bitumen mastic floorings are graded according to usage as follows: Grade Grade Grade Grade I II III IV Special flooring Light duty flooring Medium duty flooring Industrial factory flooring
2.1 Bitumen - The physical properties of bitumen used shall conform to those specified in Table 1.
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BITUMEN

SL No. CHARACTERLWIC
I
REQUIREMENT FOR A
Grade I
A
Grades
Mastic asphalt
for flooring
Coloured mastic
asphalt for
\/
II, III and IV /\
\ \
Mastic asphalt
for flooring (5) 5to15 100C
Coloured mastic
asphalt for flooring (6, 5 to 15 IooC
flooring
(1) (2) Penetration at 25 C (3) 105C (4) 105C
i)
ii) Softening point ( ring and ball ), Max
iii) Solubi!ity in CS2, percent, Min

iv) Ash content ( mineral matter ), Max, percent by mass v) Loss on heating for 5 h at 163C. percent by mass
60
30
60
30
99.5
0.5
60
30
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
122
SP : 21-1983
Note IS
For
IS : 1205-1978t,
methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978*, IS : 1208-1978$, IS :1212-19789, and
: 1217-1978/l. Aggregate
3. Composition - Excluding proportions of coarse aggregate retained on a 600micron IS Sieve as given in 2.2.2, the bitumen mastic shall have composition given in Table 2.
TABLE 2 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC
2.2
2.2.1 Fine aggregate - Naturally occuring limestone rock ground to a grading as given below and aggregate shall bve a calcium carbonate content of not less than 80 percent by weight: Grading / Passing 75micron IS Sieve Passing 212-micron IS Sieve and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve Passing 600-micron IS Sieve and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve Passing 2.36-mm IS Sieve and retained on 600-micron IS Sieve Retained on 2.36-mm IS Sieve Percentage by Weighty /N Min 45 10 10 5 Max 55 30 30 20 Nil
REQUIREMENT B
PERCENTAGE BY MASS
, (1)
Soluble bitumen Passing 75-micron IS Sieve
(2)
12.0 40.0 8.0 8.0
(3) 18.0 56.0 25.0 32.0
Passing 2 1Zmicron IS Sieve and retained on 7%micron IS Sieve Passing 600-micron IS Sieve and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve
4.
Hardness Number a) At the time ojmanufacture: Not more than 15* at 45C Not more than 12* at 35C Not more than 40$ at 35C
Grade I Grade II and III Grade IV
b) At the time of laying: 2.2.2 Coarse aggregate - Clean igneous or calcareous rock or siliceous material obtained from natural deposits. If limestone chippings are used for flooring, its aggregate crushing value shall not be greater than 28. The percentage and size of coarse aggregate (depending upon the thickness of finished work) for bitumen mastic as well as for coloured bitumen mastic shall be as follows: Grade 1 Grade II and 111 Not less than than 12 at Not less than than 12 at 2 nor more 45C 2 nor more 35C
Note - lie temperature of 45C is intended for Grade 1 bitumen mastic only because of its high degree of hardness at lower temperatures.
Grade I and II III IV
Size and Type of Coarse Aggregate Retained on 600~micron Min passing 4.75-mm Retained on 600~micron Min passing 4.75-mm Retained on 600-micron Min passing 9.5-mm IS Sieve 85 percent IS Sieve 100 percent IS Sieve 85 percent IS Sieve 100 percent IS Sieve 95 percent IS Sieve 90 percent
Perrentage
Thickness mm 15-20 20-30 30-50
15-25 25-35 30-50
Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: *Determination of penetration fjrst revision). TDetermination of softening point (/irs? revision) *Determination of ductility @rsr revision). EjDetermination of loss on heating Qkst revision). /iDetermihation of mineral matter (ash) yirst revision). VDetermined by the wet sieving method.
*After addition of specified coarse aggregates. before addition of specified coarse aggregate. in bitumen mastic, refer to Appendix C and for method
Note l-For method for determination of binder content and fine aggregates for determining hardness number, refer to Appendix D of the standard. Note 2-For manufacturing details, refer to 5 of the standard.
For detailed information, revision).
refer to IS : 1195-1978 Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring
(second
123
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8374-1977 BITUMEN MASTIC, ANTI-STATIC ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTING GRADE

1. Scope - Requirements of bitumen mastic for anti-static and electrically conducting grade.
Note - In locations where it is necessary to take brecautionary measures against the accumulation of static electricity, Roaring should have uniform electrical conductance to a degree which will always ensure that under the fastest rate of generation of any charge that can possibly occur in practice, a dangerous potential can not exist.
AND
3.2 Aggregates and Fillers -The aggregates and fillers used in preparing bitumen mastic should be of inert nature and should have the gradings as given below:
Sieve lksignalion /x Passing

IS Sieve 75-micron Retained on IS Sieve 75-micron 212~micron 600-micron 2.36 mm
Percentage by Mass
2.
Terminology an upper of
2.1 Electrically Conducting - Having limit of resistance of 5 X IO4 ohms.
2.2 Anti-sratic - Having a resistance over 5 X 104 ohms and less than lo8 ohms. 3. Materials shall conform
2 12-micron 600-micron 2.36-mm
45 to 55 (filler) 10 to 30 10 to 30 5 to 20 Nil
4. to as
composition
3.1 Bitumen - Requirements specified in Table 1.

IS IS
Note - For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978*, : 1205-1978t, IS : 1208-1978$, IS : 1212-19785, and : 1216-1978 I/. 1
4.1 Bitumen mastic composition for electrical conducting and anti-static grade are made by incorporating bitumen in conjunction with other suitable materials like carbon black of the conductive grade like graphite. 4.1.1 The bitumen content shall be between 13 to 18 percent by mass of the total mastic.
Note - For method of preparation of bitumen mastic, refer to clause 4.2 of the standwd.
TABLE
SL
PHYSICAL
PROPERTIES
OF BITUMEN
REQUIREMENT
CHARACTERISTIC
No. (2) (1) i) Softening point (ring and ball method) ii) Penetration at 25C in 11100 cm iii) Ductility at 27C, M&in cm iv) Loss on heating, percent, Max v) Solubility in CSz, percent, Min
(3) 65 to 100C 5 to 20 2 0.3

99
5.
Properties
5.1 Hardness number of bitumen mastic as laid shall be 4 to 12 at 35C unless otherwise agreed to mutually. 5.2 Resistance of products after being manufactured shall have electrical conductance between 5 X lo4 ohms and 2 X IO6 ohms.
Note - Industrial bitumen of the grades 90/15 and 75/15 conforming to IS : 702-1961 Specification for industrial bitumen (revised) are two typical examples of binder which will satisfy the requirements of this table.
Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: *Determination of penetration yirst revision). TDetermination of softening point yirsr revision). *Determination of duaility (first revision). 5Determination of loss on heating yirst revision). //Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide yirsr revision).
Note-For
methods
of tests, refer to clause 6 and Appendix
A of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8374-1977 Specification for bitumen electrically conducting grade.
mastic, anti-static and
124
SECTION
10
WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING MATERIALS
sl : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS IS IS IS IS IS IS 1322-1970 1580-1969 2645-1975 3037-1975 3384-1965 5871-1970. 7193-1974 Bitumen felts for waterproofing and damp-proofing (second-revision) Bituminous compounds for waterproofing and caulking purposes (first revision) Integral cement waterproofing compounds Cjrst revision) Bitumen mastic for use in waterproofing of roofs Bitumen primer for use in waterproofing and damp-proofing Bitumen mastic for tanking and damp-proofing Glass fibre base coal tar pitch and bitumen felts Page 127 129 130 130 131 132 133
126
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1322- 1970 BITUMEN FELTS FOR. WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) 3. Weight - The weight of ingredients of bitumen felts for 10 m2 shall be not less than those specified in Table 1. 4. Finish - Finished material shall be free from visible external defects, such as holes, oil patches, ragged or untrue edges, breaks, cracks, tears, protuberances and indentations. (for 1. (for 2. 5. Dimensions 10 m and 20 m. 6. Width 90 and 100 cm and lengths
1. scope - Requirements for saturated bitumen felts (underlay) and selEfinished bitumen felts used for waterproofing and damp-proofing. 2. Classification a) Fibre base i) Type 1 ii) Type 2 Saturated felt for underlay Self-finished waterproofing) Self-finished waterproofing) felt Grade felt - Grade
Other Requirements
See Table 2.
b) Hessian base Type 3 - Self-finished proofmg) Self-finished proofing) -
felt Grade felt Grade
(for water1. (for damp2.
TABLE 1
SL No. TYPE OF FELT
/
MINIMUM
WBIGHT OF BITUMEW FELTS
(Clause 3)
Untreated Base (See Note 1) Saturant
WEIGHTFOR 10 m2
A \
Coatant
Bitumen Content
Total Weight of the Finished Bitumen Felt in Dry Condition with Mica Dusting Powder, A4in (See Note 2) CI) 8.5 21.9 30.8
(1)
Fibre Base
(2)
Q) 4.0 5.0 4.0
(4) 4.5 5.7 4.5
(5) 10.7 21.8
(6) 4.5 11.9 17.1
i) Type 1, Underlay ii) Type 2, Self-finished felt, Grade 1 iii) Type 2, Self-finished felt, Grade 2 Hessian Base
iv) Type 3, Self-finished felt, Grade 1 v) Type 3, Self-finished felt, Grade 2
2.3 2.3
1.8 1.8
17.7 31.8
12. I 20.2
22.3 36.4
Note l-The
weight of the untreated base shall be taken as in the dry condition. allowance of 0.5 kg minimum mica dusting powder in dry condition, except for Type 1.
Note 2-Includes
127
SP : 21-1983
TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF BITUMEN FELTS
(Clause 6)
SL No. TYPE. OF FELT / (1) i)Spel (2) BREAKING STRENGTH, Min A Warpway Weftway (3) kgf (4) ksf PLIABILKY TEST \ (5) i) The roll shall not show cracks on unrolling ii)Consider any surface rupture exceeding 5 mm in length as failure i) The roll shall not show cracks on unrolling STORAGE %KKING TEST (6) HEAT RESJSTANCE TEST (7) PRESSURE HEAD TEST WATEii ABSORPTION TEST, Max (9) -
(8) -
72
24
ii) Type 2 (all grades )
95
60
The test pieces shall be examined after cooling After release of the load, the layers of felt shall be capable of being separated without damaging the coatant in any way
ii) Consider any surface rupture exceeding 5 mm in length as failure
The test pieces The test pieces shall show shall show no sign of melting no sign of of the bituleakage men compound -
5.0 percent
iii) Type 3 ( all grades )
135
90
i) The roll shall not The test pieces-_T4e test pieces The test pieces &-ill show no shall show no shall be exashow cracks on, sign of meltmined after sign of leakaunrolling , ingofthe bituge cooling men compound ii) Consider any After release of surface rupture the load, the exceeding 5 mm layers of felt in length as shall be capafailure ble of being sepala& without damaging the coatant in any way
2.0 percent
Note -
For methods of tests. refer to Annendex A of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1322-1970 Specification for bitumen felts for yvaterproofing and damp-proofing (second revision).
128
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1580-1969 BITUMINOUS COMPOUNDS FOR WATERPROOFING AND CAULKING PURPOSES (First Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements and methods of tests for bituminous compounds applied cold and used for stopping leaks and waterproofing of porous masonry, concrete floors, walls and roofs and also as caulking agent for crevices and vertical joints between steel plates, folded sections, wood joints, precast concrete cladclings, blocks, etc. 2. Requirements
iii)
No. 1 and 2)
TABLE
REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS CAULKING COMPOUNDS

REQUIREMENT (3) 0.5 Not greater than 40
SL No. (1)
CHARACTERISTIC (2)
i) ii)
Water content, percent by weight, MUX Ash content, percent by weight Flow
2.1 Form - Shall be semi-stiff and smooth suitable for application with hand, trowel or gun at 27C and above. 2.2 Composition -Bitumen and flux oils with or without addition of vegetable or resinous oils cutback with volatile thinners and mixed with non-g&y absorbent fillers. 2.3 Keeping Quality - Not less than 6 months in original sealed containers. 2.4 Physical Requirements -See Table 1.
Shall satisfy the requiregiven in ment Appendix A of fhe
standard
iv) v) Flash point, C, Mb1 Flexibility and adhesion 35 Shall satisfy the requirein given ment Appendix B of the
standard
iv) Consistency: a) Before setting (test after 1 h) b) After setting (test after 24 h) Not less than 100 Not less than 80
Note-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard, IS : 1209-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of flash point and fire point (first revision), IS : 1211-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of water content (Dean and Stark method) (first revision), and IS : 1217-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of mineral matter (ash) (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1580-1969 Specification waterproofing and caulking purposes (first revision).
for
bituminous
compounds
for
129
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2645-1975 INTEGRAL CEMENT WATERPROOFING COMPOUNDS (First Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements for integral cement waterproofing compounds, which shall be assessed by: 2.2 Setting time of cement mixed with waterproofing: Initial - not less than 30 minutes; tinal not more than 600 minutes. 2.3 ComDressive Strennth -Of mortar cubes using the recommended pioportion of waterproofing compound shall be as follows: At 3 days-Not
Note - Proportions as recommended by manufacturers, not exceeding 3 percent by weight of cement. but
4 Permeability
to water, and
b) Physical tests of setting time and compressive

strengths of cement mixed with the walerproofing compounds.
2.
Requirements
less than 160 kgf/cmz, nor less than 80 percent of the 3 days compressive strength of cubes made without the compound. At 7 days-Not less than 220 kgf/cmz. nor less
than 80 percent of the 7 clays compressive strength of cubes made without the compound. 2.4 The chloride content and sulphatecontent product shall be declared by the manufacturer. : 69251973
Methods
2.1 Permeability to water of specimens prepared with the recommended proportion of the compound shall be less than half the permeability of similar specimens prepared without the addition of the compound.
in the
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, IS for determination of water soluble chlorides in concrete admixtures, and Appendix A of fhe standard.
of test
For detailed information, compounds (first revision).
refer to IS : 2645-1975 Specification
for
integral cement
waterproofing
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3037-1965 BITUMEN MASTIC FOR USE IN WATERPROOFING OF ROOFS

1. Scope - Requirements for bitumen mastic suitable for waterproofing of roofs. Not intended to be used as a paving material or to withstand exceptional conditions, such as acid or alkali actions. General Characteristics - It shall consist of a mixture of bitumen, aggregates and mineral filler in such suitable proportions as to give it a semi-fluid consistency when heated to about 180C. The mastic at this temperature shall be easily compressible by trowels into a compact and uniform layer not less than 10 mm in thickness. b) c) d) e) Penetration Ductility Loss on heating Solubility in CS2 10 to 30 3 to 30 2 percent, Max 99 percent, Min
2.
IS IS
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978*, : 1205-1978t. IS : 1208-1978$, IS : 1212-19785, and : 1216-197811.
3.
3.1
Materials Bitumen Physical properties: 55 to 90C
Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: *Determination of penetration yirsf revision). tDetermination of softening point yirsr revision). $Detennination of ductility yirst revision). $Detennination of loss on heating yirsr revision). //Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide trichloroethylene (first revision).
or
a) Softening point, Ring and Ball
130
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Aggregate - Crushed rock or gravel (Silicious, granite or limestone) and mineral fillers (cement or limestone dust) - Grading:
Percent h) weight
4.
Composition
of Mastic -See
Table 1.
MASTIC BY
TABLE
1 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN ANALYSIS

REQUIREMENT
SL No. (1) i) Bitumen
PERCENTAGEBY WEIGHT OF TOTAL MASTIC (3 15 to 20
Passing 75micron
IS Sieve (filler) and passing
40 to 45 15 to 20
(2)
Retained on 75-micron 425micron IS Sieve Retained on 425-micron 2-mm IS Sieve
Aggregate passing
4.7%mm IS Sieve and retained on 2.00~mm IS Sieve iii) 2.00~mm IS Sieve and retained on 425-micron IS Sieve iv) 425-micron IS Sieve and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve V) 75-micron IS Sieve (mineral filler) 5. Hardness at 45C.
ii)
18 to 20 12 to 18 12 to 18 35 to 40
and passing
15 to20
Retained on 2 mm and passi,ng 4.75-mm IS Sieve Retained on 4.75-mm IS Sieve
20 to 30
Number
2 to 8 at 25C and 10 to 65
Nil
Note l-For methods of determination of binder content and fine aggregates in bitumen mastic, and for determination of hardness number, refer tq Appendices C and D of IS : 1195-1978 Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring (second revision). Note 2-For method of preparation of bitumen mastic, refer to 4 of the slandard.
For detailed information, proofing of roofs.
refer to IS : 3037-1965 Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water-
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3384-1965 BITUMEN PRIMER FOR USE IN WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for bitumen primer for application to concrete and masonry surfaces and to be used with bitumen in damp-proofing and waterproofing below or above ground level. No. 1) 2. Requirements - Primer shall be free from water and shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1 and shall preferably be made from the same grade of bitumen as used in bonding.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF PRIMER

SL
CHARACTERISTIC
R&uIREMENT
No.
(1) (2)
(3)
i) Viscosity by standard tar viscometer, 4-mm orifice, in set, at 25C ii) Distillation fractions, percent by volume of the primer: a) Up to 22X, hh b) Up to 36oC,MUX iii) Tests on residue from distillation up to 36@c a) Penetration at 25C. 100 g, 5 set in l/100 cm b) Mattersoluble in carbon disulphide, percent by weight, Min
4to24
35
65
20 to 50
99.0
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of penetration (first revision), IS : 1206-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of viscosity (first revision), IS : 1213-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Distillation test (first revision), and IS : 1216-1978 Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of solubility in carbon disulpbide or trichloroethylene (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3384-1965 Specification for bitumen primer for use in waterproofing and damp-proofing.
4
131
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 5871-1970 BITUMEN MASTIC FOR TANKING AND DAMP-PROOFING

1. Scope - Requirements for bitumen mastic used as covering material for damp-proofing of underground tanks, basements of buildings, water reservoirs, swimming pools, irrigation canals, etc. 2. General Characteristics - The mastic shall consist of a mixture of bitumen, aggregates and mineral filler in such suitable proportions as to give a semi-fluid consistency when heated to about 180C. At this temperature, the mastic shall be easily compressible by trowels into a compact and uniform layer not less than 10 mm thick. 3. 3.1 Materials Bitumen Physical properties. calcium carbonate content not less than 80 percent by weight. 3.3 Aggregates -Shall be fine aggregate consisting of natural sand, or crushed limestone or crushed hard rock. Grading is given below for guidance: Percent, by Weight Passing 75micron IS Sieve Passing 212micron and retained on 75micron IS Sieve Passing 600-micron and retained on 2 12-micron IS Sieve Passing 2.36~mm Sieve and retained on 600-micron IS Sieve Retained on 2.36-mm IS Sieve 4. Composition
I
Oto 10 10 to 18 40 to 54 24 to 40 Nil
a) Softening point (ring and ball method) 50 to 90C b) Penetration at 25C, in l/100 cm 20 to 40 10 1 99
of Mastic -
See Table 1.
MASTIC BY
TABLE
c) Ductility at 27C, Min , in cm d) Loss on heating, percent, MUX e) Solubility in CSZ, percent, Min
COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN ANALYSIS

&QUlREMEhT
SL
No.
PERCENTAGEBY WEIGHT,
TOTALMASTIC (1) i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) (2) Soluble bitumen Aggregate passing 75-micron IS Sieve Aggregate passing 212-micron IS Sieve and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve Aggregate passing 600-micron IS Sieve and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve Aggregate passing 2.36-mm IS Sieve and retained on 600-micron IS Sieve Aggregate retained on 2.36-mm IS Sieve (3) 15 to 17 42 to 52 3 to 10 15 to 25 7 to 20 Nil
Note - For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1203-1978*, IS 1205-1978t, IS : 1208-1978$, IS : 1212-19789 and IS :1216-197811.
3.2 Filler - Limestone or other suitable mineral powder passing 75micron IS Sieve, and having
Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: *Dete&nination of penetration yirst revision). tlktermination of softening point Cjirst revision ). $Determination of ductility fJ?sr revision ). &Determination of loss on heating yirst revision ). /&terminatiod of solubility in carbon disulphide (firs? revision)
5. Hardness 50 at 25C.
Number -
Shall be between 20 and
Note 1 -For methods of determination of contents of bitumen mastic composition and for determination of hardness to Appendices C and D of IS : 1195-1978 Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring (second revision). Note 2-For method of manufacturing bitumen mastic, refer to 5 of the standard.
number,
refer
For detailed information, proofing.
refer to IS : 5871-1970 Specification for bitumen mastic for tanking and damp-
132
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7193-1974 GLASS FIBRE BASE COAL TAR PITCH AND BITUMEN FELTS
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for bitumen or coal tar pitch treated felts (for pipe-wraps known as outerwrap) and self-finished bitumen felts used for waterproofing and damp-proofing.
Note - Glass fibre base bitumen felts are suitable for waterproofing and damp-proofing in buildings and other situations where penetration of moisture is to be stopped. Glass fibre has the advantage that it does not rot by continuedexposure to moisture.
No. 1)
b)Twe 2 -Grade
I - Talcum, mica or sand surfaced glass fibre base bitumen felts for waterproo ting .
I1 - Talcum, mica or sand fibre base bitumen felts for
c) Type 2 -Grade
surfaced glass damp-proofing.
2.
Classification a) Type 1 - Bitumen or coal tar pitch treated felts or pipe wrapping (outerwrap) glass fibre base, talcum, mica or sand surfaced.
3. Dimensions -Bitumen felts in width of one metre and generally in lengths of 1, 10 and 20 m. Glass fibre felts generally in length of 100 mm. 4. Weight - The weight of ingredients used in manufacture of glass fibre felts for 10 m* shall be not less than those specified in Table 1.
TABLE
1 MINIMUM WRIGHT BASE FELTS hTREATED BASE
OF BITUMEN FOR 10 rn2 TREATED BASE
GLASS
FIBRE
SL No.
TYPE OF FELT
COATANT
TOTAL b%IGHT. IN DRY CONDITION INCLUDING SURFACING MATERIALS (6) kg 5.5 18.0 25.0
(1)
(2)
(3) ks 0.4 0.4 0.4
(4) kg 4.5 -
(5) kg 15.3 22.0
8 ii) iii)
Type 1 Type 2 Grade I Type 2 Grade I1
133
SP : 21-1983
5.
Other Requirements -See
Table 2.
BEQUIBEMENTS OF GLASS FIBBE FELTS PLIABILITY TEST \ (5) a) The roll shall not show cracks on unrolling b) Consider any surface rupture exceeding 5 mm in length as failure a) The roll shall not show cracks on unrolling
STORAGE STICKINGTps~ HEAT PRESSURE HUD TEST wATF.R ABSORPTION lb-r, Max
TABLE 2 SL No. TYPE OF FELT / (1) (2) MINIMUM BREAKING STRENGTH h Waipway Weftway (4) (3) kgf 30 kgf 15
RE.VUTANCE
TEST
(6) -
(7)
(8)
(9)
i) Type 1
ii) Type 2 (all grades)
50
30
The test pieces shall be examined after cooling After release of the load, the layers of felt shall be capable of being separated without damaging the coats in any way
The test pieces shall show no sign of melting of bitumen compound
The test pieces shall show no sign of leakage
2 percent
b) Consider any surface rupture exceeding 5 mm in length as failure
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to Appendix B of rhe stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7193-1974 Specification for glass fibre base coal tar pitch and bitumen felts.
134
SECTION
11
SANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER FITTINGS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title GENERAL IS : 771 (Part I)-1979 (Part II)- 1979 (Part III/Set l)- 1979 Glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part I General requirements (second revision) Part II Specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory sinks (second revision) Part III Specific requirements of urinals, Section 1 Slab urinals (second revision) Part III Specific requirements of urinals, Section 2 Stall urinals (second revision) Part V Specific requirements of shower trays (second revision) General requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances (second revision) Enamelled cast iron water-closets, railway coaching stock type (second revision) Flushing cisterns for water-closets and urinals (valveless siphonic type) (third revision) Cast iron brackets and supports for wash-basins and sinks (second revision) Cast copper alloy screw-down bib taps and stop valves for water services (second revision) Caulking lead (third revision) Self-closing taps (first revision) Cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part I General requirements (second revision) Part II Specific requirements of HD circular type (second revision) Part III Specific requirements of HD double triangular type (second revision) Part IV Specific requirements for MD circular type (second revision) Part V Specific requirements for MD rectangular type (second revision) Part VI Specific requirements for LD rectangular type, Section 1 Single seal (second revision) Part VI Specific requirements for LD rectangular type, Section 2 Double seal (second revision) Part VII Specific requirements for LD square type, Section 1 Single seal (second revision) Part VII Specific requirements of LD square type, Section 2 Double seal (second revision) Pillar taps for water supply purposes (second revision) Automatic flushing cisterns for urinals (first revision) Plastic water-closet seats and covers (third revision) Vitreous sanitary appliance (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (second revision) Part II Specific requirements of wash-down water-closets (third revision) Part III Specific requirements of squatting pans (third revision) Part IV Specific requirements of wash-basins (second revision) Part V Specific requirements of laboratory sinks (second revision) 136
Page
139 140 140 141 141 142 142 143 144 145 146 146 147 148 149 151 152 153 155 156 157 159 159 160 161 161 163 165 168
j
(Part III/Set 2)- 1979 (Part V)-1979 IS : 772,1973 IS : 773,1964 IS : 774-1971

IS : 77%1970
IS : 781-1977 IS : 782-1978 IS : 1711-1970 IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 (Part II)-1974 (Part III)-1974 (Part IV)- 1974 (Part V)- 1974 (Part VI/Set I)-1974 (Part VI/Set 2)-1974 (Part VII/Set l)- 1974
(Part VII/Set 2)-1974 IS IS IS IS 17951982 2326-1970 2548-1980 2556 (Part I)-1974 (Part II)-1973
: : : :
(Part III)-1981 (Part IV)-1972 (Part V)-1979

*
SP : 21-1983
Title GENERAL - Contd IS : 2556-Contd (Part (Part (Part (Part (Part (Part (Part VI) VI/Set VI/Set VI/Set VI/Set VI/Set VI/Set l)-1979 2)-1974 3)-1974 4)-1974 5)-1974 6)- 1974 Part VI Specific requirements of urinals Section 1 Bowl type (third revision) Section 2 Half stall urinals (second revision) Section 3 Squatting plates (second revision) Section 4 Partition slabs (second revision) Section 5 Waste fittings (second revision) Section 6 Water spreaders for half stall urinals (second revision) Part VII Specific requirements of half round channel (second revision) Part VIII Specific requirements of siphonic wash-down waterclosets (second revision) Part IX Specific requirements of bidets (third revision) Part X Specific requirements of foot rests (second revision) . Part XI Specific requirements for shower rose Cfirst revision) Part XII Specific requirements for floor traps Part XIII Specific requirements of traps for squatting pans Part XIV Specific requirements for integrated squatting pans Part XV Specific requirements of universal water-closets Ferrules for water services (first revision) Copper alloy waste fittings for wash-basins and sinks (first revision) Plug cocks for water supply purposes (first revision) Waste plug and its accessories for sinks and wash-basins (first revision) Cast iron gratings for drainage purposes Gel-coated glass fibre reinforced polyester resin bath tubs Plastic flushing cisterns (valveless siphonic type) for water-closets and urinals Vitreous enamelled steel kitchen sinks Vitreous enamelled steel wash-basins
Page
168 170 171 172 172 173 174 175 176 177 177 178 178 180 181 182 182 183 183 184 184 186 187 188
(Part VII)-1973 (Part VIII)-1973 (Part IX)- 1979 (Part X)- 1974 (Part XI)- 1979 (Part XII)-1973 (Part XIII)-1973 (Part XIV)- 1974 (Part XV)-1974 IS : 2692-1978 IS : 2963-1979 IS : 3004-1979 IS : 3311-1979 IS : 5961-1970 JS : 6411-1972 IS : 7231-1974 IS : 8718-1978 IS : 8727-1978 WATER METERS IS : 779-1978 IS : 2104-1981 IS : 2373-1981 PIPES AND FITTINGS IS : 404 (Part I)-1977 IS IS IS IS
: : : :
Water meters (domestic type) (fifth revision) Water meter boxes (domestic type) (first revision) Water meters (bulk type) (third revision)
189 190 190
407-1981 651-1980 1230-1979 1536-1976
IS : 1537-1976 IS : 1538 (Parts I to XXIII)-1976 IS : 1729-1979 IS : 1879 (Parts I to X)-1975
Lead pipes: Part I For other than chemical purposes (second revision) Brass tubes for general purposes (third revision) Salt-glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (fourth revision) Cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings (second revision) Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (second revision) Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision) Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (second revision) Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (first revision) Malleable cast iron pipe fittings (first revision)
191 192 194 195 196 197 198 200 202
137 .
SP : 21-1983
Title PIPES AND FITTINGS - Contd IS : 3006-1979 IS : 3076-1968 IS : 3486-1966 IS : 3589-1981 IS : 3989-1970 IS : 4984-1978 IS : 49851981 IS : 5504-1969 IS : 5531 (Parts I to III)-1977 IS : 6163-1978 IS : 6418-,l 971 IS : 7181- 1974 IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 (Part II)-1975 (Part III)-1975 (Part IV)- 1975 (Part V)- 1975 (Part VI)- 1975 (Part VII)-1975 (Part VIII)-1975 IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976 (Part II)-1976 (Part III)- 1976 (Part IV)-1976 (Part V)-1976 (Part VI)-1976 (Part VII)-1976 IS : 8329-1977 IS : 8360 (Part I)- 1977 (Part II)-1977 (Part III)-1977 IS : 8794-1978 Chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (first revision) Low density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies (first revision) Cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (150 to 2 000 mm nominal size) (first revision) Centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (first revision) High density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies, sewage and industrial effluents (second revision) Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies (first revision) Spiral welded pipes Cast iron specials for asbestos cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage Cfirstrevision) Centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision) Cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering purposes Horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for water, gas and sewage Injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part I General requirements Part II Specific requirements for 45 elbows Part III Specific requirements for 90 elbows Part IV Specific requirements for 90 tees Part V Specific requirements for 45 tees Part VI Specific requirements for sockets Part VII Specific requirements for unions Part VIII Specific requirements for caps Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements Part II Specific requirements for 90 bends Part III Specific requirements for 90 tees Part IV. Specific requirements ^_. for reducers . Part V Specific requirements for terrule reducers Part VI Specific requirements for pipe ends Part VII Specific requirements for sandwich flanges Centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements Part II Specific requirements for 90 tees Part III Specific requirements for 90 bends Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes
Page
206 207 208 209 210 212 .212 214 216 218 219 221
222 223 223 224 225 226 227 228 228 229 230 230 231 232 233 234
235 236 236 237
138
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 77 1 (PART I)- 1979 GLAZED FIRE-CLAY SANITARY APPLIANCES

PART I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - General requirements for materials, manufacture. finish. methods of test. sampling and inspection of all glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances. 2. Material and Manufacture - Fire clay bodies are moderately fine. porous. off-white bodies using natural fire clays. ball clays or stoneware clays and clay grogs covered by a glaze properly matured and fitted to the body. 3. Minimum Thickness be less than 8 mm. At any place shall not No. 1)
shall possess an impervious surface. It shall have a high gloss and shall normally be white. 5. Finish - It shall not show to the unaided eye blemishes or defects hiexcess of those specified in Table 1 of rhe srandard.
6.
4. Glazing - All visible surfaces of the body shall be glazed surfaces coming in contact with floor or wall and the underside, of sinks. etc. may be unglazed. 4.1 The glazed shall be uniform, free from craze and
Performance - The appliance shall statisfy the following performance requirements: a) Warpage b) Crazing c) Wafer absorption - Shall not be more than 15 percent. d) Thermal shock - Shall not show any sign of injury. e) Chemical resistance - Shall have no loss of reflectivity of the glaze. f) Modulus ofrupture - Shall not be less than 20 MPa. g) Resistance to staining and .burning
Note -
For test procedures
refer to 8 of the srandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part J-1979 appliances: Part I General requirements (second revision).
Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary
139
SP : 21-19817
SUMMARY OF
IS
77 1 (PART II)-1979 GLAZED FIRE-CLAY SANITARY APPLIANCES

PART II SPECIFIC
REQUIREMENTS (Second OF KITCHEN AND LABORATORY SINKS
Revision)
b) Laboratory sinks 600~400~ 5*x350x 450X300X 400x250~ 200 mm 150 mm 150 mm 150 mm intowhich the
1. Scope - Requirement for the pattern, sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances of kitchen and laboratory sinks made of fire clay. 2.
2.1
Requirements
Note - The sinks shall have a circular waste interior of the sinks shall drain.
The general requirements for material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, shall conform to IS : 771 (Part I)-1979*.
2.2
2.3
Tolerances On dimensions of 50 mm and over +4 percent _+2 mm On dimensions less than 50 mm
Sizes a) Kitchen sinks 750X450x250 mm 600 X450 X250 mm 500x400x200 mm
*Specification for glazed tire-clay sanitary appliances: Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part II)-1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part II Specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory sinks (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS
771 (PART III/Set

PART Ill
l)-1979 GLAZED APPLIANCES

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS Section 1 Slab Urinals
FIRE-CLAY
OF URINALS
SANITARY
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirement for the patterns, sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of slab urinals made of fire-clay. 2.
2.1
2.2
Sizes a) Batter slab b) End slab 1oOOx6Oomm 1 000 X 450 mm 1OOOX 360mm
Requirements The general requirements for materials, manuof test, sampling and inspection shall 771 (Part I)-1979*.
facture, methods conform to IS :
Note - Shall be manufactured either as a single or two urinals. The inside surface shall be regular and smooth.
2.3
Tolerances f 4 percent +2 mm
Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part I General requirements (second revision).
On dimensions of 50 mm and over On dimensions less than 50 mm
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part IIUSec I)-1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part III Specific requirements of urinals, Section 1 Slab urinals (second revision). 140
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
-IS
771 (PART
III/Set
PART III
2)-1979 GLAZED APPLIANCES

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS Section 2 Stall Urinals
FIRE-CLAY
OF URINALS
SANITARY
(Second Revision)
Scope - Requirements tion, dimensions, iolerances made of fire-clay.
2.
1.
for the sizes, construcand finish of stall urinals
Note sizes.
The stall urinals may be made in other shapes and
Requirements
2.3
Tolerances On dimensions On dimensions of 50 mm and over less than 50 mm +4 percent k-2 mm
2.1 For general requirements of materials, manufacture, methods of test, sampling and inspection, refer to IS : 771 (Part I)-1979*. 2.2 Size 1 140X460x400
mm
*Specification for glazed tire-clay sanitary appliances: Part 1 General requirements (secotzd rerision ).
2.4 Construction - Shall be manufactured either as a single urinal or as a range of two or more urinals. The inside surface shall be regular and smooth throughouk The bottom shall have sufficient slope from the front towards the outlet.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part III/See 2)-1979 Specificatidn for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part III Specific requirements sf urinals, Section 2 Stall prinals (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS
771 (PART V)-1979 GLAZED FIRE-CLAY APPLIANCES

PART V SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
SANITARY
OF SHOWER TRAYS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope Requirements
struction, dimensions, tolerances
for the pattern, size, conand finish of shower 2.3
Note -
Shower trays may be made in other shapes and sizes.
trays made of fire-clay. 2.
Tolerances On dimensions On dimensions of 50 mm and over less than 50 mm k4 percent +2 mm
Requirements
2.1 The general requirements for material, manufacture, methods of test, sampling and inspection shall conform to IS : 771 (Part I)-1979*. 2.2 Size 600~600 (excluding X 100 mm
skirting all around)
2.4 Construction - The inside surface shall be uniform and smooth except for grooves provided for skid resistance. Shower trays shall have a circular waste hold into which the interior of tray shall drain.
Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part I General requirements (second revision )
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part V)-1979 Specification for appliances: Part V Specific requirements of shower trays (second revision).
glazed fire-clay
sanitary
141
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 772-1973 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ENAMELLED CAST IRON SANITARY APPLIANCES
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment No. 1) d) Pinholes - not more than two for coloured wares and not more than four for white wares; e) Specks - Less than 1 mm and not exceeding 5 in number. Specks less than 0.25 mm in size shall not be treated as defects unless in sufficient number to form discoIouration; and D Flaw - The number shall not exceed Small - 2, MUX Medium - 22, Max Large - None. 3.
1. Scope - General requirements of material, thickness, warpage, enameliing, acid and alkali resistance, inspection rules and marking, for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances like water-closets and commodes. 2. Requirements - Thickness of cast iron base not less than 6.5 mm. Tolerance +3 percent on specified dimensions. War-page shall not exceed 5 mm per metre for edges set against wall or floor and 7.5 mm per metre for other edges. Finishing in vitreous enamel fused to cast iron base; enamel thickness not less than 0.5 mm. 2.1 Defects - Not more than one of the following when examined through inspection window is permitted: a) Crazing; d) Dimples, rundown, sagging; c) Blisters - not more than on interior surface;
Nobe-For test procedures refer to the standard.
Tests for Enamel

a) Enamel shall be of acid and alkali resisting quality. b) Abrasion test - Shall withstand test for resistance to scratching by Powder No.5 (on Mohs Scale).
refer to IS : 772-1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iroh sanitary appliances (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 773-1964 ENAMELLED CAST IRON WATER-CLOSETS, RAILWAY COACHING STOCK TYPE
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for material, workmanship, manufacture, dimensions and finish of enamelled cast iron railway type water-closets generally used in the coaching stock of the Indian Railways.
20 mm diameter threaded nipple fixed to threaded hole cast in the body of the water-closet and secured by a check nut. Inlet shall protrude out at least by 25 mm (see also Fig. 1). 3. Finish - Inside and outside surfaces of each fixture shall be coated with vitreous enamel thoroughly fixed to the cast iron base. Shall be uniform, noncrazing, free from discolouration and impervious. 142
2. Requirements - Shall be of one piece construction. Bottom flange shall not be less than 10 mm thick, and shall be provided with not less than 6 holes of 6.5 mm diameter. Inlet or supply horn shall consist of
SP : 21-1983
OVERALL HEIGHf=475 HEIGHT FLOOR
mm
ABOVE = 350 mm l9 6*5,6 HOLES
Note-Tolerance
+ 3 percent on specified dimensions limited to 5 mm. All dimensions m millimetres
Fig. I
Enameled
Cast Iron Water-Closet
Note l-For general requirements refer to IS : 772-1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances (second revision). Note
2 -For
detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 773-1964 Specificat& coaching stock type (second revision).
for enameled c@t iron water-closets, railway
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 774-1971 FLUSHING CISTERNS FOR WATER-CLOSETS AND URINALS (VALVELESS SIPHONIC TYPE)
(Third Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 to 5) respectively. The body of pressed steel cistern shall be of seamless or welded construction. The thickness of body and cover shall not be less than 1.6 mm and 1.3 mm respectively before coating, and shall be porcelain enamelled or otherwise protected against corrosion. The outlet of each siphon or stand pipe shall be securely connected to the cistern by means of lock nut made of copper base alloys, hot-dipped galvanized steel or hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron. b) Cover - Shall be of the same material as the body. c) Flush Pipe - Steel tube, lead pipe, copper alloy pipe, polyethylene pipe, unplasticized PVC pipe, or smooth bore cast iron pipe. Diameter 32 + 1 mm for high-level and 38 + 1 mm for lowllevel cistern. Minimum thickness 1 mm for steel and 3.5 mm for lead pipe.
Note No flush pipe will be required for a coupled
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, construction, operation and testing of manually operated high-level and low-level, valveless siphonic action type sanitary flushing cisterns for water-closets and urinals.
2.
Terminology
2.1
High Level Cistern - Minimum height between top of pan and underside of cistern, 125 cm.
2.2 Law Level Cistern - Maximum height between top of pan and underside of cistern, 30 cm. 2.3 Coupled Cistern - Cisterns intended to operate sitting on flat surface provided at the back portion of siphonic wash down w ater-ciosets , 3.
Material and Construction

a) Cistern Thickness of the body including cover shall be not less than .5,6 and 13 mm for cast iron, vitreous china and fire-clay cisterns 143
cistern.
SP : 21-1983
d) Bolts, Nuts, Chain -Galvanized steel, nonferrous metal or other corrosion resisting material. Chain shall sustain dead load of 50 kg without deformation of links. e) Ball Valve - Diameter 15 mm. f) Lever - Shall not project greater than 35 cm measured from the centre of the cistern to the end of the lever. g) OverJlow Pipe - Not less than20mm bore for high-level and low-level cistern and 15 mm for coupled cistern. Shall incorporate mosquitoproof device. 4. Operation a) Discharge capacity 5, 10 and 12.5 litres; Tolerance + 0.5 litre
b) Discharge rate
5 lines with a tolerance of +0.5 litre in 3 seconds
ci Working water level
-Min
6.5 cm below effective top edge of cistern
d) Discharge shall operate when cistern is filled 1 cm below working water level. e) Endurance test Components shall not show damage or defects after 3 000 operations
Note-For
method of test refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 774-1971 Specification for flushing cisterns for water-closets and urinals (valveless siphonic type) (third revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 775- 1970 CAST IRON BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS FOR WASH-BASINS AND SINKS
(Second Revisiorz)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, construction, workmanship, dimensions, weights and finish of cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins -_ and sinks. 2. Types and Weights j) Built-in single rail type bracket for wash basin k) Built-in cantilever type bracket for wash basin m) Wall fixing single rail type bracket for wash basin 2.0 1.5 1.2 1.0
Weight kg
Cantilever a> for sink support for sink 1.8 1.8 2.7 27 3.
n) Wall fixing cantilever type

bracket for wash basin P) Strap and leg support with front towel rail for wash basin
b) Recessed cantilever support

cl Wall fixing bracket for sink 4 Wall fixing bracket with
recess for sink
As mutually agreed
Construction
and Workmanship
e) Strap and leg support for sink
0 Strap and leg support with

recess for sink
1.8 1.8 2.0
Brackets for building into wall shall include a lugged portion, and a flange at bottom to indicate wall line. Lugged portion shall be slotted. b) Brackets for screwing to wall shall have back fixing plate. c) Supports with horizontal strap and supporting leg, or cast iron brackets with supporting leg shall be arranged for wall fixing. Leg support 144
g) Bracket and leg support for

sink
h) Bracket and leg support with

recess for sink
SP : 21-1983
shall be 15 mm bore steel tube or casting and shall terminate in a flahge for fixing to floor. d) Strap or bracket and supporting made separately.
Note-For
leg shall be
4. Finish - Painted. enamelled. For hospital porcelain enamelled.
galvanized or porcelain use, chromium plated or
dimensions and figures refer to the standard.
For detailed information, rej2r to IS : 77.5-1970 Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for washbasins and sinks (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 781- 1977 CAST COPPER ALLOY SCREW-DOWN BIB TAPS AND STOP VALVES FOR WATER SERVICES
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, dimensions, construction, workmanship, finish and testing of cast copper alloy screw-down bib taps and stop valves for water services. 2. Nominal Sizes a) Bip taps b) Stopvalves 50 mm. 3. Materials a) Body, body components and washer plate I b) Spindle, glands, handles, washer plates, nuts, etc. _c) Washers Fibre, leather, rubber asbestos composition Asbestos or material similar Brass rod (extruded or rolled) Cast brass, leaded tin bronze 8, 10, 15, 20 and 25 mm. - 8,10,15,20,25,32,40and 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 Tolerance No. 1 and 2)
4. Dimensions given below:
Overall length of stop valves is as
Nominal Size
mm ,
Overall Length
n Internally Threaded mm 45 50 60 70 85 100 110 135 + 3 mm. Externally Threaded mm 65 75 85 100 125 135 145 175 \
Note - For detailed dimensions of bib taps, stop valves and components refer to the standard.
d) Gland packing
5. Tests - Shall withstand minimum internal hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa for at least 2 minutes without leakage or sweating.
For detailed information, refer to .IS : 781-1977 Specification for cast copper alloy screw-down bib taps and stop valves fur water services (second revision).
145
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 782- 1978 CAULKING
LEAD
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for different types of caulking lead suitable for use in water supply and sanitary installations.
2. Types a) Pig Lead - Used in caulking joints in gas, water and sewer lines, where it is possible to use cast lead caulking. b) Lead Wool and Lead Yarn - Used in caulking joints in gas, water and sewer lines where it is impracticable to use cast lead (such as inverted joints, under water joints, etc). Such joints will withstand greater displacement than cast lead joints. 3. capable of being easily caulked. b) Lead Wool - Free from sulphur. Shall consist of fine strands or plaited ribbons. Section not lessthan0.13mmandnotmorethan0.9mm. Lead Yarn c> Free from sulphur. Shall consist of tine strands of plaited ribbons. Cross section of individual strand shall be triangular. Section not less than 0.13 mm and not more than 0.9 mm.
4.
Packing
a) Pig lead in pigs of 35 kg + 10 percent, each or linked ingots. b) Lead wool and lead yarn, in the form of ropes packed in wax paper or polythene sheets and finally put in polythene lined hessian bags to prevent oxidation of lead.
Material and Quality

a) Pig Lead Shall be of uniform softness and
refer to IS : 782-1978 Specification for caulking lead (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1711- 1970 SELF-CLOSING
TAPS
(First Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) c) Force required for operation shall not exceed 7 kgf. d) Device which closes tap without release of handle after discharge of a fixed quantity may be incorporated. 4.
1. Scope - Requirements regarding nominal sixes, material, manufacture and workmanship, design, construction, finish, testing and marking of self-closing taps with or without stuffing box.
2. 3.
Nominal Sizes Design
15 mm and 20 mm.
Material
a) Body, cover, lever or push button Cast iron, malleable iron castings, cast brass, leaded tin bronze Mild steel, gun metal
a) Concussive push-button exceeding 2 m. b) Non-concussive type.
type for heads not b) Spindle 146
SP : 21-1983
c) Spindle spring
d) Cage and valve e) Seat washers f) Other washers and gaskets
Phosphor bronze wire, copperized spring steel wire, or any corrosion resisting alloy having tensile strength not less than that of phosphor bronze wire Leaded tin bronze Synthetic rubber Vulcanized fibre, brass or any other equally suitable material
5.
Tests
5.1
Shall withstand internal hydraulic pressure of 20 kgf/cm2, for a minimum period of 2 minutes without leakage or sweating.
5.2 Endurance Test - Shall not show leakage or failure of spring or other parts after 50 000 operations.
refer to IS : 1711-1970 Specification for self-closing taps (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART I)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE AND FRAMES

PART I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .
COVERS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope -General requirements for cast iron manhole covers and frames intended for use in drainage and water works. Grades and Types
Heavy Duty (HO) - for use in heavy vehicular traffic conditions. Medium Duty (MD) - for use under light traffic conditions, such as footpaths and cycle tracks. Light Duty (LO) - for use in domestic premises or places not subjected to wheeled traffic loads. 3. and warping. c) Shall have raised chequered design to provide non-slip grip. Rise of chequer not less than 4 mm. d) Lifting key and key holes shall be provided. e) Shall be coated with a material having base with a black bituminous composition. Coating shall not flow when exposed to 63C and shall not be so brittle as to chip of at 0C. without fracture following f) Shall withstand loads for minimum period of 30 seconds, when subjected to the prescribed test: HD - Double triangular or circular - 35 tonnes MD - Circular or rectangular - 5 tonnes LD - Rectangular or square - 1 tonne
2.
Requirements
a) Shall be of grey cast iron. b) Shah befreefrom air and sand holes, cold shuts
Note-For
method of test refer to the sfandwd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : I726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron hanhole frames: Part I General requirements (second revision).
covers and
147
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1726 (PART II)- 1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE AND FRAMES

PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF HD CIRCULAR TYPE
COVERS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for materials, dimensions and tolerances, weights and marking of heavy duty circular type manhole covers and frames. No. 1 and 2) 3. Minimum Weights
Clear Opening
mm 500
Weight of Cover
kg 85
2.
Dimensions and Tolerances and tolerances see Fig. 1.

Note For detailed dimensions
For dimensions
Weight of Frame kg 85
100
refer to rhe standard.
560
108
4 REMOVED)
PLAN (WITH
HALF
COVER
A Lz 560 +5
c .E 660 +3
E YZ 8 10 f3
Tolerances
Fig. 1 Heavy Duty Circular Cover and Frame 148
SP : 21-1983
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing, key-ho!es and key, refer to IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1726 (Part II)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part II Specific requirements of HD circular type (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1726 (PART
PART III
III)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE AND FRAMES

OF HD DOUBLE TRIANGULAR
COVERS
TYPE
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for materials, dimensions and tolerances, weights and marking of heavy duty double triangular type manhole covers and frames. No. 1) Minimum Weights
3.
Clear Opening
mm 500 560 149
Weight of Cover
kg 118 140
Weight of Frame
kg 111 115
2.
Dimensions and Tolerances and tolerances see Fig. 1.
For dimensions
Note -
For detailed dimensions refer to the srandard.
SP : 21-1983
DEPTH RECESSES RETAINING T FOR DIRT BUCKET BAR IN EACH SEATING
OF
FRAME
= 150
2 mm HOLES
22mm DIA CORED IN COVERS
. PLAN
(WITH HALF
E COVER REMOVED)
A mm 500
560
C mm
530 580
E mm
780 810
Tolerances Fig. I
+5
+4
+3
Heavy Duty Double Triangular Solid Type Cover and Frame
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture workmanship, sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer to IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part I General requkements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : I726 (Part III,)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part III Specific requirements of HD double triangular type (second revision).
150
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART IV) - 1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE AND FRAMES

PART IV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
COVERS
FOR MD CIRCULAR TVPE
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) 3.
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, dimensions , tolerances, weights and markingof medium
duty (MD) circular type manhole covers and frames. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances and tolerances see Fig. 1.
Note standard. For detailed dimensions
Minimum Weights Clear Opening

mm 500 560
For dimensions
refer to the
Weight of Cover
kg 58 64
Weight of Frame kg 58 64
and tolerances REGlSt ER
PRIZING SLOT --/
DEPTH OF FRAME= 100+2 mm
E PLAN CWITH HALF

COVER REMOVED>
A
mm
c
mm
E
mm
500 560
Tolerances +5
580 630
+3
710 760
f3
Fig. 1 Medium Duty Circular Cover and Frame

151
SP : 21-1983
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship. sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer to IS : 1726 (Part I)-1971 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part 1 General requirements (second wvision).

frames:
refer to IS : I726 (Part IV)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and Part IV Specific requirements for MD circular type (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART V)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE AND FRAMES

PART V SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS (Second .FOR MD RECTANGULAR
COVERS
TYPE
Revision)
No. 1) For dimensions 2. Dimensions and Tolerances and tolerances see Fig. 1.
Note COVER A C
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, tolerances, weights and marking of medium duty (MD) rectangular type manhole covers and frames.
OPENING CLEAR FOR OPENING
For detailed dimtnsbns refer to the
standard.
-DEPTH OF FRAME = 160 mm
PLAN ABCDEF mm mm 610 Tolerances Fii. I +5 455 +5
mm 685 $3
mm 530 +3
mm 840 +3
mm 685 +3
Medium Duty Rectangular Cover and Frame 152
SP : 21-1983
3..
Wnimum
Weight -
Cover 80 kg. and
Frame 64 kg.
%ote-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing. key-holes and key, refer to IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole colers and frames: Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : I726 (Part V)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part V Specific requirements for MD rectangular type (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1726 (PART VI/SEC
l)- 1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE AND FRAMES

FOR LD RECTANGULAR TYPE Section 1 Single Seal
COVERS
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for materials, dimensions, tolerances, -weights and marking of light duty (LD) rectangular type with single seal manhole covers No. 1) and frames. 2. Patterns and 2). Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 (see Fig. 1
OPENING
FOR
COVER
PLAN
(WITH
HALF
COVER
REMOVED)
Fig. 1 Light L3ut.y Single Seal Rectangular Cover and Frame (Pattern 1) I53
SP : 21-1983
OPENING FOR COVER C
CLEAR OPENING A
-1
CLEAR OPENING 8
DEPTH OF FRAME =30*2 mm
PLAN
Fig. 2 3.
(WITH HALF COVER REMOVED)
Light Duty Single Seal Rectangular Cover and Frame (Pattern 2) For dimensions 4. Minimum Weights
Dimensions and Tolerances tolerances see Fig. 1 and 2. ABCDEF We mm mm mm 455 610 685 Pattern 1 455 610 675 Pattern 2 Tolerances +5 +5 +3
and
Note -
Type
mm mm mm 530 710 560 525 695 545 +3 f3 +3
the standard.
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
Weight of Cover kg 23 15
Weight of Frame kg 15 10
For detailed dimensions, refer to
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer to IS .: 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part 1 General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1726 (Part VI/Set 11-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part VI For specific requirements for LD rectangular type, Section 1 Single seal (second revision).
154
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1726 (PART VI/SEC
2)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE AND FRAMES

FOR LD RECTANGULAR TYPE Section 2 Double Seal
COVERS
PART W SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of materials, dimensions, tolerances, weights and marking of light duty (LD) rectangular type with double seal manhole covers and frames.
2. Dimensions and Tolerances and tolerances see Fig. 1.

Note-For
For dimensions
detailed dimensions refer to the standard.
EAR
OPENING
BELOW COVER
HEAD
OF SCREW SURFACE DEPTH
3mh OF
FIXING PARS 13mm THICK ON BOTTOM OF INSIDE OF FRAME
OF FRAME =40+2mm
PLAN (WITH
HALF COVER
REMOVED)
Thickness of frame = 40 + 2 mm
A B C D E F
Tolerances
Fig. I
mm mm mm mm mm mm 455 610 145 590 775 620 +5 +5 +3 +3 f3 -+3
Light Duty Double Seal Rectangular Cover and Frame 155
SP : 21-1983
3.
Minimum
Weight -
Cover 29 kg, and
Frame 23 kg.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling. testing, key-holes and key. refer to IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1726 (Part VI/Set 2)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part VI Specific requirements for LD rectangular type, Section 2 Double seal (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
1s : 1726(PART VII/SEC i)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE ANDFRAMES

PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS F&I LD SQUARE TYPE Section 1. Single Seal
COVERS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements OF materials, dimensions, tolerances, weightsand marking of light duty square type with single seal manhole covers and frames. 2. -b&ensions and Tolerances (in mm) dimensions and tolerances see Fig: 1.
Note -
No. 1 and 2) 3. Minimum Clear Opening mm 455 610 Weights Weight of Cover kg 13 25 Weight of Frame kg 7 13
For
For detailed dimensions refer to the
standard.
156
SP : 21-1983
PLAN
(WITH
HALF
COVER
REMOVED)
ABCDEF mm mm 455 610 Tolerances Fig. I

Note-For
mm 495 680 +3
mm 495 680 f3
mm 530 715 +3
mm 530 715 +3 .
455 610 +5
+5
Light Duty Single Seul Cover and Frame (Square Type)
general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer to IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : I726 (Part VII/Set I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part VII Specific requirements for LD square type, Section I Single seal (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1726 (PART VII/SEC
2)-1974 CAST IRON MANHOLE AND FRAMES

FOR LD SQUARE TYPE Section 2 Double Seal
COVERS
PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements of materials,. dimentolerances, weights and marking of light duty square type with double seal manhole covers and frames.
sions,
No. 1 and 2) 3. Minimum Clear Opening

mm
Weights Weight of Cover

kg
Weight of Frame
kg
2. Dimensions and Tolerances and tolerances see Fig. 1.

Note -
For dimensions 455 610 157
23 37
15 18
For detailed dimensions refer to the srandard.
SP : 21-1983
PLAN (WITH
HALF COVER REMOVED)
WLEAR OPENING *FRAME OPENING DEPTH OF FRAME=40+2
mm
A mm 455 610
Tolerances
BCDEF mm mm mm mm mm 455 565 565 600 600 610 700 700 740 740
+5 +3 +3 f3 +3
+5
Fig. I
Light Duty Double Seal Cover and Frame
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, sampling, testing, key-holes and key, refer to IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1726 (Part VII/Set 2)-1974 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames: Part VII Specific requirements for LD square type, Section 2 Double seal (second
revision). 158
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1795- 1982 PILLAR
TAPS FOR WATER
SUPPLY
PURPOSES
(Second Revision)
regarding material, 1. Scope - Requirements manufacture and workmanship, construction, finish and testing of pillar taps (draw-off top). 2. 3. Nominal Sizes 15 mm and 20 mm. Cast brass or leaded tin bronze Materials a) Body, body components, capstan head and washer plate b) Spindle, gland, washer plate and nut c) Washer 4. Construction 4.1 For detailed dimensions of body, backnut, bonnet and gland, capstan head, spindle and washerplate, and screw threads, refer to the standard.
4.2
Anti-splash
device shall be fitted, if required.
Brass rod (extruded or rolled) or brass Synthetic or natural vulcanized rubber, tanned vegetable hydraulic leather, high density polyethylene, vulcanized fibre.
5. Finished Mass - Minimum .finished mass of 15 mm and 20 mm size pillar taps shall be 650 g and 1175 g respectively. 6. Finish - Shall be nickel-chromium be capable of taking high polish. plated. Shall
7. Testing - Shall withstand internally applied hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa (20 kgf/cm*) for 2 minutes without leaking or sweating.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1795-1974 (first revision).
Specification for pillar taps for water supply purposes
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2326- 1970 AUTOMATIC
FLUSHING
CISTERNS
FOR URINALS
(First Revision)
regarding materials, 1. Scope - Requirements nominal sizes, construction and performance requirements for automatic flushing cisterns of the type used for flushing urinals. b) Depth - Minimum clearance above- highest water level -25 mm. c) Siphonic Apparatus 1) Material - Copper, or other non-ferrous metal, or cast iron protected against corrosion. 2) Minimum thickness of copper siphon Spun or pressed domes, 0.9 mni; Fabricated domes, 0.56 mm; Internal parts, 0.45 mm; and Copper bottom, 0.9 mm (1.25 mm for brass bottom). 3) Outlet connection - 25 mm. d) Lid - Shall be mosquito-proof. 5. Performance Requirements for Siphons a) Shall deliver not more than 2.5 litres per urinal at intervals of 10 to 20 minutes. b) Shall discharge at rateof not less than 5 litres in 7 seconds when fitted with straight open ended flush pipe 20 mm bore and 90 cm long. 159
2.
Nominal Size - 5, 10 and 15 litres. Tolerance 20.5 litre. Minimum capacity = 2.5 litres per urinal served. Materials - Cast iron; glazed earthenware; vitreous china or pressed steel or other approved impervious material. Construe tion a) Body thi<knessnotlessthan5,6and 13mmfor cast iron, vitreous china and earthenware respectively. Minimum thickness 1.6 mm for pressed steel which shall be porcelain enamelled or otherwise protected against corrosion.
3.
4.
SP : 21-1983

(first revision).
refer to IS : 2326-1970 Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for urinals.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2548- 1980 PLASTIC WATER-CLOSET SEATS AND COVERS
(Third Revision)
regarding material, 1. Scope - Requirements manufacture, dimensions, finish and testing of plastic seats and covers for use with water closets. 2. Materials - Made of phenolic plastics, styrene; ureaformaldehyde or polypropylene. 3. Manufacture a) Underside of seat may be flat or recessed. Seat may be closed or open front mattem (see Fig. 1). b) Material for Hinging Device Type A - Copper alloys with nickel chromium plating (bronze or brass); stainless steel; aluminium alloy (with anodic coating); zinc base alloy (with nickel chromium plating); and suitable plastic (with reinforcement).
Type B -
e) Seats shall have smooth finish and shall be non-absorptive and free from cracks or crevices.
80 TO 100 mm WIDTH OF OPENING FOR OPEN FRONT SEAT_ RUBBER OR PLASTIC BUFFER7 POSITION OF COVER
poly-
Mild steel (with nickel chromium plating); aluminium alloy (with anodic coating); and suitable plastic (with reinforcement).
Note-Minimum
thickness of cover/seat shall be 3 mm.
All dimensions in millimetres
c) Boltsfor Hinging Device shank length.
65 mm, minimum 4.
Fig. I
Plastic Cover and Seat
d) Buffers - Plastic or rubber; not less than 3 of size 25 X 40 X 10 mm for full-round seats and not less than 4 for open-front seats.
Note l-For
Note
Strength - Shall withstand load of 1 150 N at specified locations for 30 minutes without any damage or permanent distortion.
detailed dimensions refer to 4 of the stundard. procedure for load test for strength refer to 5.2 of fhe standard.
2-For

(third revision).
refer to IS : 2548-1980 Specification for plastic water-closet seats and covers
160
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART I)- 1974 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(Second Revision)
Scope -General requirements for materials, manufacture, methods of test, inspection and marking of all vitreous sanitary appliances.
2. MininmumThickness any place in an appliance. Not less than 6 mm at
1.
maximum specified warpage (see Tables 1 to 3 of the standard) shall not slide under the appliance without force. 4.3 Crazing crazing. None of test pieces shall show
3. Glazing - All surfaces of the body visible after installation shall be glazed. Glazing shall be uniform, free from craze and impervious. Lead content shall not exceed 5 percent of soluble lead in case of glazes containing lead. 4.
4.4 Water Absorption - Not exceeding 0.5 percent (average) and 0.75 percent (individual). 4.5 Chemical Resistance - No loss of reflectivity of glaze when compared with the control sample. 4.6 Modulus of Rupture - Not less than 350 kgfl cm2 (averageof lOsamples). Individual testvalue shall not vary more than IfI20 percent of mean value. 4.7 Resistance to Staining and Burning - No stain shall remain on eitherof test pieces when tested according to prescribed method.
Performance Requirements
4.1 Permissible Blemishes and Defects - Refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard. 4.2 Warpage Feeler gauge of thickness equal to
see 8 of the standard.
Note-For
test procedures
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART II)- 1981 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF WASH-DOWN WATER-CLOSETS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, patterns, sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances, finish and marking for vitreous wash-down water-closets.
2. a) Pattern IHeight 390 mm, front and rear (see Fig. 1); Height 390. mm, front and rear
b) Pattern 2 -
Requirements
Patterns and Sizes
Note -
(see Fig. 2).

For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to the
2.1
standurd .
161
SP : 21-1983
WEION =3SO
Fig. 1
Water-Closet (Pattern I)
Fig. 2
Water-Closet (Pattern 2)
2.2
Each water-closet shall have atleast 2 floor fixing holes of 6.5 mm minimum diameter. Flushing rim may be boxed or open type. Flushing rim and inlet shall be self-draining type.
2.3
2.5 Anti-siphonage vent horn (50 mmkfin dia) set at an angle of 45, where required by local sanitation authority. 2.6 Test - For flushing testkequirementssee the standard. 2.6 of
2.4 Integral trap P or S type. For P-trap, slope of outlet shall be 14 below the horizontal.
Note-For general requirements refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part II)-1981 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part II Specific requirements of wash-down water-closets (third revision).
162
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2556 (PART III)-1981 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART III SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF SQUATTING PANS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, patterns and sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances, finish and marking for squatting pans. 2. 2.1 Requirements Patterns and Sizes a) Long b) Orissa (see Fig. c) Rural Note standard.
2.3 Pan of 630 mm should be of box rim type. Flushing rim and inlet shall be of self-draining type. 2.4 Trap with P or S outlet (with or without an inspection vent) for long and Orissa pattern when specified. The trap shall conform to IS : 2556 (Part XII)- 1973*. 2.5 Inside of bottom of pans shall have sufficient slope from front towards outlet to enable quick disposal while flushing. 2.6 Test - For flushing testjrequirementssee the standard. 2.6 of
580 and 630 mm (see Fig. 1). 580 x 440 mm and 630 x 450 mm 2). 425 mm (see Fig. 3).
For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to the
2.2 Each pan except rural pattern shall have an integral flushing rim of suitable type.
*Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part XIII Specific requirements of traps for squatting pans.
I-
610 / 660 -~_170+5
TO 320
TO 340
580/ 630 All dimensions in millimetres.
Fig. 1
Long Pattern Squatting Pan
163
SP : 21-1983
HEIGHT
Fig. 2
Orissa Pattern Squatting Pan
HEIGHT = 275
Fig. 3
Rural Pattern Squatting Pan
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part III)-1981 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part ZZI Specific requirements of squatting pans (third revision).
164
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2556 (PART IV) - 1972 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES
(VITREOUS CHINA)
PART IV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF WASH-BASINS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for material, patterns and sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances for vitreous wash basins. 2. 2.1 Requirements Patterns and Sizes a) Flat back 660 X 460 mm (Surgeons basin) (see Fig. 1)
4::: modem (seeFig.2
No. 1 and 2)
Note-For
smndard.
detailed dimensions and tolermces refer to he
2.2 One piece construction including combined overflow and soap holder. Those installed in surgeons room and operation theatre shall not be provided with soap holder recess and combined overflow. 2.3 Waste hole of minimum all) and 10 mm depth. 65 mm diameter (over-
and 3)
450~ b) Angle back -
4 300 mm (see Fig. 4)
2.4 Slot type overflow area not less than 5 cm2 and area of overhow channel 4 cm2, minimum. 2.5 Glazed pedestal, if specified, shall be so designed that height from floor to top of basin rim is 75 to 80 cm.
600 X 480 mm (see Fig. 5) 400 X 400 mm (see Fig. 6)
PO0
min.-/
~28
So OR 35e
HEIGHT s 200min.
+CENTRE
0F BRACKET OF srum+ (6101 660
All dimensions in millimetres. Fig. I Fiat Back Wash Basin (Surgeons Basin)
165
SP : 21-1983 I I I 0 /
I
HEIGHT
= 290 max.
I-
I-k=
CENTRE
OF BRACKET 580/500 6301550

All
STUDS
40x15 mm x DEPTH SUFFICIENT TO TAKE 5mm STUD
-------I
in mlilimetrer.
dimensions
Fig. 2
Flat Back Wash Basin with Two Tap Holes

35 mm + OR 29 mm SO TAP HOLE HOLES (ALTERNATIVELY AT A DISTANCE C/C MAY BE TWO TAP OF 200 PROVIDED)
TO 225mm
HEIGHT
= 290 max
CENTRE
OF
BRACKET
STUDS
5801500
All dimensions in millimerres.
--I_
-40
x 15mm
x.DEPTH 5mm STUD
SUFFICIENT
TO TAKE
Fig. 3
Flat Back Wash Basin with Single Tap Hole

ALTERNATIVF POSITION5
7
300
All
dimensions
in millimetrec.
HEIGHT
= 225 max.
Fig. 4
Flat Back Wash Basrn with Single Tap Hole (Size 450 x 300 mm) 166
SP : 21-1983
LBOmm
HEIGHT = 290 mm max.
--600mm~
Fig. 5
Angle Back WaFhBasin (Pattern I)
SOAP RECESS
HEIGHT = 200 mm max.
4OOmm
____I
Fig. 6 Angle Back Wash Basin (Pattern 2)
Note-For general requirements refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (.wcond revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part IV)-1972 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part IV Specific requirements of wash basins (second revision).
167
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2556 (PART V)-1979 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART V SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF LABORATORY SINKS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding patterns and sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances of laboratory sinks.
Note -
On dimensions less than 50 mm On diameter of waste hole

For detailed dimensions
I!I 2 mm +3mm
refer to dte standard
2. 2.1
Requirements Patterns 400 450 500 600 600 x X x x x

and Sizes
2.2
With or without overflow arrangements. minimum and
250 300 350 400 450
x X x x x
150 mm (LX B x H) 150mm 150 mm 200 200 mm mm
2.3 Waste hole 65 mm diameter 10 mm depth. 2.4
Shall be provided with rim, when specified.
2.5 Waste fitting of glazed vitreous ware shall be provided, when specified. f4 percent
2.1.1 Tolerances On dimensions 50 mm and over
Note-For general requirements refer to IS General requirements (second revision).
: 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification
for vitreous sanitary
appliances
(vitreous
china): Part I
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part V)-1979 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part V Specific requirements of laboratory sinks (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2556 (PART VI/SEC l)- 1979 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS Section 1 Bowl Type OF URINALS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding patterns, sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of bowl type urinals made of vitreous china. 2. 2.1 Requirements Patterns and Sizes a) Flat back - 430 mm, Min X260 mm, Min X350 mm, Min (see Fig. 1); and b) Angle back - 340 mmX410 mm, Min x 265 mm, Min (see Fig.2). 2.1.1
Tolerances:
2.2
On dimensions 50 mm On all angles
less than
+2 mm f3
Note -
One piece construction with integral box rim with minimum of 12 holes.
flushing
2.3 Not less than 2 fixing holes on each side of minimum diameter of 6.5 mm. 2.4 When installed there shall be no liquid left over in the bottom of the pan of the urinal after flushing. 168
On dimensions and over
50 mm
+4 percent
SP : 21-1983
2, 63mm
(p min. HOLES ON EACH SIDE
PROJECTION
= 260mm
min.
Fig. I
Bowl Pattern Urinal (Flat Back)
HEIGHT = 340 mm
Fig. 2
Bowl Pattern Urinal (Angle Back)
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VI/See l)-1979 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals,Section 1 Bowl type (third revision). 169
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART VI/SEC 2)- 1974 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF URINALS Section 2 Half Stall Urinals .
(Second Revision)
Scope - Requirements regarding patterns, sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of half stall urinals made of vitreous china. 2. 2.1 Requirements
Patterns and Sizes a) Flat back - 580~ 380% 350 mm, Min 450 x 350x 300 mm, Min (see Fig. 1) b) Angle back - 580X400X500 mm, Min 450x 375 x 350 mm, Min (see Fig. 2) t--380135d .----Dj
1.
2.1.1
Note -
Tolerance
50 mm and over f4 percent.
Fir detailed dimensions refer to rhe s&zndard.
On dimensions
PROJECTION
* 500/350
PROJECTION
8 350/300
Fig. 2
Half Stall Angle Back Urinal
2.2
One piece construction with or without integral flushing box rim. Those without such rim shall have ridges in sides of interior of bowl to divert water towards front Iip. Where specified, the waste fittings shall be glazed vitreous ware. Shall satisfy test for cleanability.
Fig. 1 Half Stall Flat Back Urinal

Note 1-For
2.3
test procedure see 2.5 of the standard.
Note 2-For general requirements refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VUSec 2)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 2 Half stall urinals (second
revision).
170
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF URINALS Section 3 Squatting Plates
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements regarding patterns, sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of squatting plates made of vitreous china.
b
No. 1) On dimensions and over 50 mm +4 percent
2. 2.1
Requirements
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to rhe standard. .
Patterns and Sizes

600 x 350 mm 450 X 350.mm (see Fig. 1) 3 less than f2 mm
2.2 2.3
One piece construction. flushing pipe, to be con-
Integral longitudinal nected to flush pipe.
2.1.1
Tolerances
On dimensions 50 mm 2.4 Integral flushing pipe connected to sump by three 13 mm dia holes.
Fig. 1
Squatting Plate Urinal
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VI/See 3)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 3 Squatting plates (second
revision).
171
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF URINALS Section 4 Partition Slabs
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requiements regarding sizes, constmction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of partition slabs made of vitreous china for urinals. 2. 2.1 Requirements
Sizes and
No. 1) 2.1.1
Tolerance
50 mm and over 3-4 percent.
On dimensions
. Note -
For detailed dimensions refer to tie srundurd.
Dimensions (mm) Height

mm 825 675 Min
2.2 Width (Min)

z-z 325
Size mm X mm X mm
Shall be one piece construction and with fixing arrangement at the flatback top. Shall alsobeprovided with countersunk hole at the bottom end.
825 x 450 x 100 675 x 325 x 85
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VI/See 4)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals,Section 4 Partition slabs (second
revision).
SUMMARY
OF
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS Section 5 Waste Fittings OF URINALS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding patterns, sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of waste fittings made of vitreous china for urinals. 2. 2.1 Requirements
Patterns and Sizes
2.1.1 Tolerances On dimensions less than 50 mm On dimensions 50 mm and over
+2 mm +4 percent
Overall length Outside dia of cylindrical portion Dia of domical portion
=95mm = 40mm = 62 mm,Mau
2.2 One piece construction. Adequate number holes (each 8 mm dia) for efficient drainage.
of
2.3 Finish - Holes of domical portion visible after installation shall be glazed externally.
For detailed information, refer to Is : 2556 (Part VI/See 5)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitaty appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 5 Waste fittings (second revision).
172
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF URINALS Section 6 Water Spreaders for Half Stall Urinals
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, manufacture and wokmanship, nominal sizes and dimensions and finish of vitreous china spreader for use in conjunction with half stall urinals complying witi IS : 2556 (Part VI/Set 2)-1974. 2. 2.1 Requirements No. 1) 2.1.1
Tolerances
On dimentions 50 mm On dimensions and over less than 50 mm +2 mm -+4 percent
Shape, Size and Dimensions

Overall size =95 X 95 X 67 mm (width x height x depth)
Note -
For detailed dimensions refer to the smndard.
*Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 2 Half stall urinals (second revision).
2.2 One piece construction with integial flush inlet. Not less than 2 fixing holes, each minimum 6.5 mm diameter. Interior of flush inlet horn shall not be glazed. Bottom of spreader shall have sufficient slope with adequate number of holes for efficient flushing.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VI/See 6)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part VI Specific requirements of urinals, Section 6 Water spreaders for half stall urinals (second revision).
173
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART VII)-1973 VITREOUS SANITARY . (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLIANCES
OF HALF ROUND CHANNEL
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment No. 1) Depth Note -
Scope - Requirements for materials, shape and sizes, dimensions and tolerances for half-round channel made of vitreous china.
2.
1.
85 mm for type A and 60 mm for type B.
Other shapes and sizes by mutual agreement.
Requirements
2.2
Tolerances
On dimensions On dimensions 50 mm and over less than 50 mm f 4 percent f 2 mm.
2.1 Shapes, Sizes and Dimensions - Shall be plain, with socket, or with stop end, and shall have 50 mm internal radius: Length Width 300 or 600 mm 150 mm
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to pclestundard. 2.3 Finish - Shall have uniform smooth glazed and impervious surface.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VI&1973 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part VII Specific requirements of harf round channel (second revision).
174
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART VIII)-1973 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART VIII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF SIPHONIC WASH-DOWN WATER-CLOSETS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) 1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, patterns, flushing cistern, dimensions, test method, tolerances and finish of siphonic wash-down waterclosets of vitreous china.
WIDTH OF CLOSET [min.) = 340
2. 2.1
Requirements
Patterns
a) Double trap pattern with S or P trap (see Fig. 1). b) Single trap pattern with S or P trap (see Fig. 1). Other agreed patterns permissible. Depth of each seal for trap, n,ot less than 50 mm.
Note -
For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to tie
standard.
2.2 Low level type flushing cistern; discharge capacity not less than 10 litres. Discharge rate test shall not be applicable. 2.3 For flushing test/requirements see 2.4 of the
* \ standard.
Fig. 1 Siphonic Wash-Down Water-Closet
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part VIII)-1973 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part VIII Specific requirements of siphonic wash-down water-closets (second revision).
175
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2556 (PART IX)-1979 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART IX SPECIFIC REQUlREMEilTS OF BIDETS
( fhird Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, shape and size, construction of vitreous bidets. 2. Requirements 2.2 permissible; but tolerances, distance between tap holes, dimensions of spray hole and waste hole shall be as soecified in rhe standard.
Note For detailed dimensions refer to rhe standard.
2.1 Shape and Size - Made in 3 sizes as large, medium and small (see Fig. 1). Other agreed sizes
Shall be provided with flushing rims.
150 min.-
Size
A 600 f 10 530 f 10 490 + 10
Height
G Win)
Large Medium Small
350 f 15 380 f 10 350 f 15 380 + 10 350 f 15 370 f 10 in millimetres.
375 360 335
All dimensions
\
Fig. I
Bidet
for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part IX)-1979 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part IX Specific requirements of bidets (third revision).
176
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2556 (PART X)- 1974 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART X SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF FOOT RESTS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for materials, shape, size and dimensions for foot rests made of vitreous china. 2. 2.1 Requirements
NoteOther agreed shapes and sizes permissible.
No. 1)
Design of face should be such as to permit easy flow of water towards rim or bowl of squatting pan. Underside grooved.
Shapes and Sizes

Rectangular shape: Minimum size = 250 X 125 mm; Thickness = 15 mm, Min. 2.2 Finish - Surface shall be uniform and smooth except for serrations. Edges shall be rounded or chamfered .
for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part X)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part X Specific requirements of foot rests (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2556 (PART XI)- 1979 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART XI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOWER ROSE
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture and construction, performance, dimensions and tolerances, finish and marking for shower rose made of vitreous china. 2.4 Diameter of each hole 1.2 mm f 10 percent. Tolerances On dimensions On dimensions less than 50 mm 50 mm and over +2 mm f4 percent
3.
2.
2.1
Requirements May be round, octagonal or of other shape.
2.2 Size of shower rose shall be 100 mm when measured across the diameter and the inlet connection shall be of 15 mm size.
Note Other sizes by mutual agreement
4. Performance Test - When fitted at a height of 2 100 mm above floor level, shall wet an area of the floor, having 450 mm as its minimum dimension, under a minimum head of 3 m. 5. Finish - Inside uniform and smooth. of the shower rose shall be
2.3
Number of hol.es 145 + 10.
Note l-For for vitreous Note 2-For
general requirements regarding material, manufacture and methods of test refer to IS sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (second revision). dimensions and tolerances see 2.4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XI)-1979 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Par{ XI Specific requirements for shower rose (first revision).
177
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART XII)- 1973 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART XII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FLOOR TRAPS
(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) 1. Scope - Requirements for materials, shape, size, dimensions and finish of floor traps made of vitreous china. 2. 2.1 2.2 Requirements Shall be manufactured without vent. Grating shall be removable. 3.1 2.4 3. Depth of water seal shall be 50 mm, Min. DimensIons and Tolerances
Overall length = 310 mm Gverall height = 150 mm Diameter of grating (.I&)
95 mm +4 percent rt2 mm
2.3 Inside surface of trap and socket and the grating (all over) shall be glazed.
Note 1 -For detailed dimensions see Fig. 1 of the sfundurd.
Tolerance On dimensions 50 mm and over On dimensions less than 50 mm
Note 2-For general requirements regarding materials, manufacture, finish and methods of test refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XII)-1973 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part XII Specific requirements for floor traps.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2556 (PART XIII)- 1973 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART XIII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SQUATTING PANS OF TRAPS
(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) 1. Scope - Requirements for materials, patterns, constructions, dimensions, tolerances and finish for traps for use with squatting pans conforming to IS : 2556 (Part III)-1973*. 2. Requirements 2.3 Minimum water seal JO mm (20 mm for rural pattern). 2.4
2.5
Dimensions -See
Fig. 1 and 2.
2.1 Pattern - Traps for long pattern and Orissa pattern pans may be with P or S outlet as given in Fig. 1, and for rural pattern pans as shown in Fig. 2. Other patterns may be made, but tolerances on dimensions, minimum dimensions where specitied and flushing test herein specified shall be followed. 2.2 Shall be in onepiececonstruction, and shall have anti-siphonagevent horn on outlet side, where required by local authority.
*Specification
(second revision).
Tolerances On dimensions of 50 mm and over + 4 paent On dimensions less than 50 mm + 2 mm +3 On angle of outlet
3. Finish -Inside of trap shall be glazed and smooth. Exterior surface of outlet and interior of inlet socket shall not be glazed, and shall be rough or scored or grooved. 4. Flushing Tests - See 2.6 of the standard.
Note - Trap for rural pattern pan may not be subjected to flushing tests.
for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous
china): Part III Specific requirements of squatting pans 178
SP : 21-1983
990miw
Fig. 1
Traps for
Long Pattern and Orissa Pattern Pans
.-Fig. 2 Trap for Rural Pattern Pan
Note-For general requirements regarding materials, manufacture and methods of tests, refer to IS : 2556 (Part I)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part I General requirements (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XIII)-1973 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part XIII Specific requirements of traps for squatting pans. ,
179
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2556 (PART XIV)-1974 VITREOUS SANITARY APPLIANCES (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART XIV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR INTEGRATED SQUATTING PANS (With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for materials, manufacture and construction, dimensions and tolerances, tests, finish and marking of integrated pans made of vitreous china. 2. Requirements No. 1 and 2) 2.2 2.3
Dimensions Tolerances
See Fig. 1.
On dimensions of 50 mm and over & 4 percent On dimensions less than 50 mm f 2 mm f 3 On all angles Top surface shall not vary from designed plane or contour more than 6 mm. 3. 4. Finish Flushing Inside shall be uniform and smooth. Tests-See 2.3 of the standard.
2.1 Rim shall be box or open type. Flushing inlet may be located at narrow end or broad end or both ends. Anti-siphonage vent horn shall be provided where required by local authorities. Water seal shall be 50 mm, minimum.
All dimensions
in millimetres
Fig. 1 Integrated Squatting Pan

Note-For general requirements Specification for vitreous sanitary regarding materials, appliances.(vitreous manufacture. finish and methods china): Part I General requirements of test refer to IS (second revision).
: 2556 (Part I)-1974
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XIV)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part XIV Specific requirements of integrated squatting pans.
180
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2556 (PART XV)- 1974 VITREOUS SANITARY (VITREOUS CHINA)

PART XV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS WATER-CLOSETS (With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture and construction, performance, dimensions and tolerantes, finish and marking for universal water closets made of vitreous china. 2. 2.1 Requirements FOR UNIVERSAL
APPLIANCES
No. 1 and 2) 2.3 Integral flushing rim shall be of box type.
2.4 Anti-siphonage vent horn shall be provided where required by local authority. 2.5 2.6 Water seal shall be 50 mm,Min.
Dimensions - See Fig. 1. Tolerances

On dimensions On dimensions On all angles _ of 50 mm and over f4 percent less than 50 mm f2 mm rt3
Sizes and Patterns -See
Fig. 1.
2.7
a) 450 mm P trap or S trap b) 530 mm P trap or S trap Other sizes and patterns may be made; however, they shall conform to tolerances on dimensions and flushing, tests specified in this standard. 2.2 P trap closets shall be in one piece. S trap closets may be mad& in one or two pieces. Each closet shall have not less than 4 floor fixing holes of 6.5 mm dia, minimum.
3. Finish -Inside surface of closet and trap shall be uniform and smooth. Serrated part of the outlet of the closets shall not be glazed externally. Inside of the inlet socket and the serrated part of the S bend shall not be glazed. 4. Flushing Tests See 2.6 of the standard.
HEIGHT = 380 max.
t-p
All
570/650 _1 dimensions in millimetres.
Fig. I Universal Water-Closet

Note-For general requirements regarding materials, Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous
___: 2556 (Part I)-1974
manufacture, finish and methods of test, refer to IS china): Part I General requirements (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part XV)-1974 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part XV Specific requirements of universal water-closets.
181
SP : 21.1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2692-1978 FERRULES FOR WATER SERVICES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for nominal sizes, material, manufacture and workmanship, construction, sampling and testing of copper alloy screw down ferrules for use on water supply mains. Requirements
plugs and caps. Brass rod for washer plates and nut. Washer shall be of leather, vulcanized fibre, rubber or copper. 2.3 Component parts shall be interchangeable.
2.
2.4
2.1 Nominal Sizes - 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm. 2.2 Materials - Leaded tin bronze for bodies,
Note-For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.
Testing - Shall withstand hydraulic pressure of at least 2 MPa for 2 minutes without leakage or sweating.
refer to IS : 2692-1978 Specification for ferrules for water services (first
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2963- 1979 COPPER ALLOY WASTE FITTINGS FOR WASH-BASINS AND SINKS
(First Revision)
Requirements for materials, manufac1. Scopeture and workmanship, nominal sizes, dimensions and finish of copper alloy waste fittings used in washbasins and sinks complying with IS : 771 (Part II)1979*, IS : 2556 (Part IV)-1972tand IS : 2556 (Part V)-19791:.
*Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part I1 Specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory sinks (second revision). tSpecification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part IV Specific requirements of wash-basins (second revision). SSpecification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part V Specific requirements of laboratory sinks (second revision )
2.
2.1
Requirements
Materials Body Nut Brass or leaded tin bronze Brass rod

32 mm for wash basins.
2.2
Nominal Sizes -
50 mm for sinks.
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to the figures in rhe standard.
2.3
Finish -
Nickle chromium plated.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2963-1979 Specification for copper alloy waste-fittings for washbasins and sinks (first revision).
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3004-1979 PLUG COCKS FOR WATER (First Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements of plug cocks of 15 mm, 20 mm and 25 mm nominal size with a key head for use underground for water supply purposes up to 1 MPa working pressure.
2.
SUPPLY
PURPOSES
2.2
Nominal Size Note -For
15, 20 and 25 mm.

refer to the standard.
detailed dimensions
2.3
Requirements
Materials - Cast brass and leaded tin bronze for bodies and components. Brass rod for washers, plug nuts, union nuts and tail pipes.
2.1
TypesofEnd - Plug cocks shall have each body end suitable for one of the following types of joints.
a) b) c) d)
Plain ends for lead (wiped) joint, Socket end for capillary solder joint, Union and tail piece for lead (wiped) joint. Union and tail pipe for capillary solder joint, and e) Union for copper tube compression joint. 2.1.1 Ends for (b), (d) and (c)by mutual agreement. When ends are to suit mild steel tubing complying with IS : 1239 (Part I)-1973* the purchaser shall provide the details.
*Specification for mild steel tubes and tubulars and other wrought steel fittings: Part I Miid steel tubes (dclird revision).
2.4 Taper of the side of plug and body shall be 1 in 15 (1 in 7/5 included angle). 2.5 The larger end of the plug taper shall project 6f 1.5 mm from the body. 2.6 Finish of Body Ends - Body ends intended for direct plumbing to lead pipe shall be finished by machining and grinding.
Note -For details of nut and tail pipe, when the outlet has a union for lead, refer to the standard.
2.7 Hydraulic Test - Shall be tested for body and seat tests under internal hydraulic pressure of at least 2 MPa and 1 MPa respectively.
suppb Purposes

(first revision).
refer to IS : 3004-1979 Specification for plug cocks for water
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3311-1979 WASTE PLUG AND ITS ACCESSORIES FOR SINKS AND WASH-BASINS
(First Revision)
Scope - Requirements for materials, manufacture, construction, testing and finish of waste plug, chain and stay suitable for use in wash-basins and sinks complying with IS : 771 (Part II)- 1979*, IS : 2556 (Part IV)-1972.t and IS : 2556 (Part V)-1979$. Dimensions of the waste plug have been specified so as to suit waste fittings covered in IS : 2963-1979s. 1.
2. 2.1
Requirements Materials, Manufacture and Construction

a) Waste plug - Rubber of hard and durable quality or any other equally suitable material. b) Chain - Phosphor bronze or brass wire of minimum diameter 1.8 mm with brazed oval links approximately 13 mm long (any other equally suitable corrosion resistant material allowable). Overall length of chain not less tian 300 mm. c) Stay - Chain stay shall be bolt type or screw type, made of brass or othercorrosionresistant material.
Note For details refer to Fig. 1 of he standard.
*Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part II Specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory sinks (second revision ) . tSpecification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part IV Specific requirements of wash-basins (sea& revision). SSpecification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part V Specific requirements of laboratory sinks (second revision). @pacification for copper alloy waste fittings for wash-basins and sinks (Frst revision).
183
SP : 21-1983
2.2 Loud Test deformation
Shall withstand
20 kgf without
2.3 Finish plated.
Chain
and stay shall be chromium
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3311-1979 Specification for waste plug and its accessories for sinks and wash-basins (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
1s : 5961- 1970 CAST IRON GRATINGS FOR DRAINAGE PURPOSES

1. Scope - Requirements use in drainage works.
for cast iron gratings for
5. Note For detailed dimensions see Fig. 1 of Z/Wstandard.
Weight - 75 kg minimum.
2. Materials - Frame and cover shall be of grey cast iron. Hinge pin shall be of mild steel wire. 3. Manufacture and Workmanship - Frame and cover shall be free from air and sand holes, cold shuts and warping. 4.
6. Coating 1 Shall be with a material having tar base with a black bituminous composition. Coating shall be smooth and tenacious which will not flow at a temperature of 63C, and which is not so brittle as to chip off at 0C. 7. Test - Gratings shall withstand without fracture a load of 35 tonnes for a minimum period of 30 seconds when subjected to loading test described in IS : 1726 (Part I)-1974*.
*Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames intended for use in drainage works (second revision).
Dimensions and Tolerances

Size of frame =6OOx560mm (outside dimensions) Height of frame =lOOmm
4.1
Tolerance On internal dimensions of the top of the frame
f2 mm
For detailed information, purposes.
refer to IS : 5961-1970
Specification for cast iron gratings for drainage
SUMMARY OF
IS : 641 l- 1972 GEL-COATED GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED POLYESTER RESIN BATH TUBS
1. Scope - Requirements for materials, construction, workmanship, finish, performance and testing for gel-coated glass fibre reinforced polyester resin bath tubs.
2. materials). 2.2 Polyester Resin - Shall be resistant to hot water and weathering. Ratio of not less than 1:2 of glass tibre to polyester is recommended. 2.3 Gel-Coat - Shall be provided on working surface. Resin used in gelcoat shall be isophthalic grade of polyester or epoxy resin or equivalent.
Note - For details regarding the standard.
chemical composition see 3 of
Materials
2.1 Glass Fibre Reinforcing Material - Shall be non-alkaline E Type Grade (A Type Grade made from indigenous raw materials is also permissible, since E Type Grade is being made from imported raw
184
SP : 21-1983
3. 3.1
Workmanship
and Finish
6.
Performance
Requirements
Defects Which Cannot he Permitted: a) Small pores, wrinkle, craze, bubbles, defective impregnation, superficial defects, injuries and aggregate defects on the following parts: Upper rim, inner wall, bottom apron and other readily visible faces. b) Defective impregnation on obscure faces. and superficial defects
6.1 Impact Resistance - Shall not show cracks in gel-coat when subjected to impact test. 6.2 Hardness barcol impressor. Minimum reading 40 points on
6.3 Cracking or Crazing or crazing after oven test. 6.4 Water Absorption in 24 hours. 6.5 Gel-Coat and 1 mm. -
Shall not show cracking Not more than 0.5 percent shall be between 0.25
Thickness
3.2
Permissible
Defects:
si No. i> ii) iii) iv) v) vi)
Defects
Upper Rim
Inner Wall
Apron
Bottom
Readily Visible Parts
2 Traces of mending 2 2 2 Not conspicuous Impurities 2 3 2 3 Not conspicuous 2 3 3 Pin holes 2 Not conspicuous Colour bolts Should not be conspicuous Unevenness Should not be conspicuous Deformity Horizontal section of the upper rim should drain off water readily. Bend of section in contact with wall should be less than 5 mm. Other deformities should not be conspicuous.
4.
DimenGons Overall length at top = 1 680 to 1 700 mm 730 to 760 mm Overall width at top = 500 to 570 mm Height above ground =
6.6 Resistance to Boiling Water crazing, bubbles or discolouration.
There shall be no
6.7 Resistance to Hydrochloric Acid - There shall be no crazing, discolouration, or exposure of glass fibre. 6.8 Tensile Strength for Laminates less than 635 kgf/cm*. Shall not be
5.
Requirement
5.1 Each bath tub shall be one piece unit with an ooeninz for waste outlet. An overflow shall normally bk procided. Apron (side panel) may be provided integrally or separately. 5.2 Thickness shall not be less than 2 mm for apron; 3 mm for inner wall and bottom; and 4 mm for bottom bend.
Note-For test procedures see 8 of fhe standard.
6.9 Lcxzd Test on Rim, Support and Unsupported Areas - Shall withstand the prescribed tests.
For detailed
information.,
refer
to IS : 6411-1972
Specification
for
gel-coated
glass fibre reinforced
polyester resin bath tubs.
185
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7231-1974 PLASTIC FLUSHING CISTERNS (VALVELESS SIPHONIC TYPE) FOR WATER-CLOSETS AND URINALS
1. Scope - Requirements for manually operated, high-level and low-level valveless siphonic type plastic flushing cisterns for water-closets and urinals.
Note - A high level cistern is intended to operate with a minimum height of 125 cm (between top of pan and underside of cistern) and a low-level cistern with maximum height of 30 cm.
5.2 Working Wafer Level - Shall be 6.5 cm (Min) below effective top edge of cistern and shall bepermanently marked inside. 5.3 Freedom from Selfaiphonage - Siphonic systern shall be capable of being rapidly brought into action when water is at the working water level, but shall not self-siphon, or leak into flushpipe when water level is upto 1 cm above invert of overtlow pipe. 5.4 Reduced Water Level - Discharge shall operate satisfactorily when cistern is filled to a level 1 cm below working water level. 5.5 Discharge Capacity Tolerance f 0.5 lines. 5.6 Discharge Rate in 3 secotds. 6. Tests 5, 10 and 12.5 litres.
2.
Materials a) Cistern and Cover - High density polyethylene. b) Flush Pipe - Seamless or welded steel tube, lead pipe; copper alloy pipe; low or high density polyethylene pipe; unplasticised PVC pipe; or smooth bore cost iron pipe (for low level flushing cistern). c) Ovetflow Pipe - High density polyethylene or unplasticized PVC pipe.
Average rate shall be 5 litres
3. 3.1 3.2
Requfrements Wall thickness shall be 4 mm, Min. Cistern shall be mosquito-proof.
6.1 Endurance Test - Cistern and component parts shall not show signs of damage or defects after 3 000 operations. 6.2 Distortion Resistance - Cistern shall not bulge more than 6 mm and the cover shall not be dislodged. 6.3 Dead Loud Test scribed test. Shall withstand the pre-
3.3 Chain shall be strong enough to sustain 50 kgf without permanent deformation. 4. Finish - Surface shall be free from blisters and delaminations. 5. Operation and Performance Requirements
5.1 Siphonic Arrangement - Shall be on valveless siphon principle. Shall operate on a single operation of lever.
Note-For
6.4 Front Thrust Test - (Applicable to cisterns intended for low-level use) - Shall withstand the prescribed test. 6.5 Impact Test teat. Shall withstand the prescribed
test procedures see 8 and Appendices A to D of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7231-1974 Specification for plastic flushing cisterns (valveless siphonic type) for water-closets and urinals.
186
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 871% 1978 VITREOUS ENAMELLED STEEL KITCHEN SINKS

1. Scope 7 Requirements regarding material, construction and workmanship, patterns and sizes, dimensions and tolerances and marking for vitreous enamelled steel kitchen sinks. 2. Material thick. 3. Mild steel sheet minimum 1 mm ,5.4
Acid Resistance There shall be no
5.4.1 White enamelled sinks loss in weight.
5.4.2 Coloured enamelled sinks form to classes AA, A and B. 5.5
Shall
con-
Patterns and Sizes Sl No.
Defects -
Shall be liable to rejection
if finish
Pattern
Overall Length mm
750 600 500 450 400 750 600 1050 800
Overall Width mm
450 450 400 400 400 500 500 500 500
Overall Depth ( in mm) I

mm mm 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
i)
Flat-rim
ii)
Flat-rim ledge
iii)
Flat-rim ledge, with double compartment
4. Tderances - Overall length and width shall not vary by more than +2 percent. Note- Kitchen sinks may be made in other patterns and sizes
where mutually agreed.
shows any of the following
defects:
a) Crazing
b) Dimples, rundown and sagging

Blisters c> - not more than two in number on the interior surface shall be permitted provided they can not be broken by a pressure of a finger nail. Pin holes - maximum 2 for coloured sinks and 4 for white enamelled sinks. There shall be nogmuping and they shall not penetrate to the metal. Specks - shall be leas than 1 mm in size and maximum 5 in number and there shall be no grouping. 5.6 Minimum 0.2 mm, and Maximum 0.5 mm.
5. Surface Coating - Interiors of sinks shall be adequately and evenly coated with vitreous enamel of quality complying with requirements given 4.1@ 4.5. Atleast one ground or primer coating preferably white, or coloured enamel coating shall be applied on the outer surface. 5.1 Finish - Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uniform and visually satisfactory.
d)
e)
Thickness of Enamel -
5.2
Abrasion
Shall
withstand
resistance
to
scratching. 5.3 Alkali Resistance weight after the test.
There shall be no loss in
5.7 Warpage of edges set against wall and edges of roll rims shall not exceed 5 mm/m. Warpage of all other edges shall not exceed 7.5 mm/m.
Note-For test procedures refer to IS : 772-1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances (second revision), and IS : 3972-1968 Methods of test for vitreous enamelware.
refer to IS : 8718-1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel kitchen sinks.

187
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8727 - 1978 VITREOUS ENAMELLED

1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, construction and workmanship, patterns and sizes, dimensions and tolerances and marking for vitreous enamelled steel wash basins. 2. Material Mild steel sheet of thickness 1 mm.
STEEL WA&BASINS
5. Surface Coating - Interiors of wash basins shall be adequately and evenly coated with vitreous enamel of quality complying with requirements given in 5.1 to 5.5. Atleast one ground or primer coating preferably white, or coloured enamel coating shall be applied on the outer surface. 5.1 Finish - Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uniform and visually satisfactory.
Min. 3.
Patterns and Sizes
Pattern
Nominal Size (Overall Length X Overall Width) mm

mm
x
5.2 Abrasion scratching.
Shall
withstand
resistance
to
5.3 Alkali Resistance -There weight. 5.4
shall be no loss in
i) Flat-back Flat-back ii) Flat-rim
(Type 1) 480
500
(Type 2) 500 600 480 500 510 530 450
x
x x x x x x x 450 Dia
430 450
450 500 430 400 450 430 400
Acid Resistance
wash basins -There Shall
5.4.1 White enamelled shall be no loss in weight.
5.4.2 Coloured enamelled wash basins conform to classes AA, A and B. 5.5 Dclfects - Shall be liable to rejection shows any of the following defects: a) Crazing b) Dimples,
if finish
iii) Oval iv) Round 3.1
Tolerance
On overall dimensions +2 percent
Note 1 - Wash basins may be made in other patterns and sizes where mutually agreed. Note 2 - For detailed dimensions and figures refer to rhe
standard.
4.
Requirements
4.1 Basin shall have an integral soap holder recess or recesses which shall drain into the bowl. 4.2 A slot type of overflow having an area of not less than 500 mm2 shall be provided in the front or back of the bowl and shall be designed to facilitate cleaning of the overflow. The cross-sectional area of passageway of overflow shall be 400 mm2, minimum.
Note-For test procedures (second revision), and IS
on interior surface shall be permitted provided they cannot be broken by a pressure of a finger nail. d) Pinholes - maximum 2 for coloured wash basins and maximum 4 for white enamelled wash basins permissible. There shall be no grouping of pinholes and they shall not penetrate to the metal. el Specks - Shall be less than 1 mm in size and maximum 5 in number and there shall be no grouping. 5.6
Thickness @Enamel -
rundown and sagging c) Blisters -Not more than two in number
Minimum 0.2 mm,arJ Maximum 0.5 mm.
5.7 Watpage of edges set against wall and edges of roll rims shall not exceed 5 mm/m . Warpage of all other edges shall not exceed 7.5 mm/m.,
for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances
refer to IS : 772-1973 Specification for general requirements : 3972-1968 Methods of test for vitreous enamelware.
refer to IS : 8727-1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel wash-basins.
188
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 779-1978 WATER
METERS (DOMESTIC
No. 1 and 2)
TYPE)
(Fifth Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Inferential (horizontalflow) and semipositive types of water meters with threaded end connections and of nominal sizes up to and including 50 mm. The specification applies to both wet-dial and dry dial (including magnetic type) water meters. 2. Ndnal Sizes 15, 20, 25, 40 and 50 mm. Body made from 5.4 ContinuousRunning Capacity - Shall becapable of giving discharges not less than as given below without the headloss exceeding 3 mm.
Nominal Size of Meters l-A-<

mm 15 20 25 40 50
Discharge per Hour

Type Inferential Type litres 2500 3 500 5 500 16 000 23 000
Semi-positive litres 2 000 3 400 5 500 10 ooo 15 000
3. Material and Manufacture Type A or B materials. a) TypeAb) TypeB-
Bronze or brass. Ferrous metals (with suitable protection) or suitable plastics.
Nominal Size of Meters

mm 15 20 25 40 50 5.5
Discharge per Hour YAP,

Semi-positive litres 1000 2000 3000 6000 9 000 Type Inferential litres 1500 2 500 3500 8 000 14 000 Type
4.
Overall Dimensions Size
Length Including Nipples

mm 250 i90 380 430 470
Width, Ma.X
mm 130 130 i40 230 250
Height, MaX
mm 180 18(,
LOi
mm
15 20 25 40 50
Minimum Starting Flows Minimum Starting Flow per Hour /\

Semi-positive 1itres 10 15 20 25 35 Type Inferential 1itres 40 60 75 100 175 Type
250 300
Nominal Size of Meters /

mm 15 20 25 40 50 5.6 5.7
Tolerance 5.
on overall length = + 5 mm Requirements Suitable for use with water up
Performance
5.1 Temperature to 45C.
Life Test -
Shall withstand
the specified test.
5.2 Hydrostatic Test - Both Type A and Type B shall withstand pressure of 2 MPa. 5.3 Nominal Capacity Rating - Shall be capable of giving discharges not less than as given below without the head-loss exceeding 10 m.
Note-For
Metering Accuracy -
+2 percent.
6. Frost Protection Devices - Meters liable to damages by frost shall be protected with suitable frost protection devices.
test procedures and for the method for determination of head loss in water meters refer to the sfondard.

revision). -
refer to IS : 779-1978 Specification for water meters (domestic type) (fifth

-___
189
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2104-1981 WATER
1.
METER BOXES (DOMESTIC
TYPE)
(First Revision)
Scope - Requirements for materials, dimensions and contstruction of boxes for water meters of nominal size conforming to IS : 779-1978*.
2. Sizes and Shape 4.
Manufacture
Construction: a) Cast iron boxes - Minimum thickness of box shall be 8 mm for Size 1 and 10 mm for Size 2. b) Mild steel boxes - Minimum thickness shall be 3 mm. c) Precast reinforced concrete boxes Thickness of wall shall not be less than 40 mm. d) Sloth for pipe - Height of slot shall be half the clear inside height of box and width shall be 40 mm for Size 1 and 75 mm for Size 2 with a tolerance of +3 mm.
4.1
2.1
Shall be of two sizes and suitable for the water meters of following sizes: Size. 1 - for 15, 20 and 25 mm water meters, and Size 2 - for 40 and 50 mm water meters. 2.2 Shape Oval or rectangular. Minimum Length mm 600 900 inside Width mm 600 600 clear dimenHeight mm 500 600
3. Dimensions sions: Size 1 2
Note - For typical illustration of water meter boxes of different materials, refer to Fig. 1 to 5 of rhe standard.
*Specification
for water meters (domestic type) @_@I revision)
4.2 Fabrication and Fittings - Locking arrangement may be provided either with a dog-and-clamp armngement or alternatively, by means of a padlock. Suitable anchorage for fixing box to concrete or masonry bed plate shall be provided.
Fordetailed revision).
information,
refer to IS : 2104-1981 Specification for water meter boxes (domestic type) (first
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2373- 1981 WATER

1. Scope - Requirements of bulk type water meters of the following types: a) Vane-wheel (impeller) type water meters from 50 to 300 mm; and b) Helical type water meters from 50 to 500 mm.
Note - For typical illustration of the above two types of water meters, refer to Fig. 1 and 2 of fhe Smmard.
METERS (BULK TYPE)

water impinges on the runner over a part or the whole of its circumference. 2.2 Helical Type Meter - Axial flowmeter whose runner is provided with a number of vanes forming a multi-threaded helix. 3. Nominal Sizes (Bore of Inlet) - 50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,400 and 500 mm. 4. Performance Requirements Suitable for use with water up
(Third Revision)
2.
Terminology
2.1
Vane-Wheel Type Meter - Meter whose runner or impeller is mounted on a vertical spindle, which has several vanes symmetrically spaced round its axis. The 190
4.1 Temperature to 45C.
SP : 21-1983
4.2 Hydrostatic Test - Shall withstand of 1.6 Mp a (16 kgf/cm*). 4.3
a pressure
4.4
Capacity Ratings Capacity Ratings of Water Meters in Litres per Hour

I \
Minimum Starting Flow Nominal Minimum Starting Flows in Size Litres per Hour h /
Vane-Wheel 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 250 500 700 1000 2400 3 200 6 400 Type Helical Type
Nominal Size
Vane-Wheel Type (At Headloss of lOm,Mar)

50
Helical Type (At Headloss of 3m,Mar) 50 000 125 000 200 000 500 000 800 000 1 100000 1500000 2000000 3000000 5000000
80
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 500
30 50 70 150 250 400 500 -
000 000 000 000 000 000 000
500 1000 1500 3500 5 500 9000 14 000 20 000 25 000 3s 000 4.5 Metering Accuracy - The accmacy at lower limit of flow shall be calculated at one-thirtieth of nominal capacities of meters as given in 4.3 and shall be f2 percent for both types of meters. 5. Frost Protection Devices - Meters liable to be damaged by frost shall be protected with suitable frost protection devices.
Note - For reccxnrnended capacities for intermediate flows,

refer to 5.3.2 of the standard.
Note -
For materials and manufacture details, refer to the standard.

revision).
refer to IS : 2373-1981 Specification for water meters (bulk type) (third
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 404 (PART
I)-1977 LEAD PIPES

PURPOSES
PART I FOR OTHER THAN CHEMICAL
(Second Revision)
_ 1. Scope - Minimum requirements for other than chemical purposes. for lead pipes 3. chemical Composition
2. Freedom from Defects - Shall be free from laminations, flaws, pronounced extrusion marks and shall as far as possible, be smooth and of uniform wall thickness throughout. 191
a) Composition No. 1 - LeadMin 99.8 percent Antimony, Max 0.06 percent Tin, Max 0.075 percent Tellurium, Max 0.005 percent Total impurities, Max 0.2 percent
SP : 21-1983
b) Composition
No. 2 - Lead, Min 99.25-99.8 percent Antimony, Max 0.1 percent Zinc, Max 0.005 percent Copper, Max 0.07 percent Tin, Max 0.50 percent Total of other elements, MUX 0.075 percent to be used for various shall be as given below:
4.
Dimensions
Nominal Internal Diameter mm 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100 125 Note - Forcalculating the
Wall Thickness
cl Chemical composition
applications
2,3,4y 8 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10
2,3,4,6,8,10 3,4, 6, 8, 10 3,4, 6, 8, 10 4, 6, 8, 10 4, 6, 8, 10 6, 8, 10 6, 8, 10 6, 8, 10
Application
Composition No.
1 1
1
1) Service and distribution pipes 2)

3) to be laid underground Service pipes to be fixed or laid above ground Cold water distribution pipes to be fixed or laid above ground Hot water distribution pipes to be fixed or laid above ground Soil, waste and soil-andwaste ventilating pipes Flushing and warning pipes Heavy weight gas pipes Light weight gas pipes
weights, the density of lead shall be taken as 11.37 kg/cm-. For details regarding weights of pipes of different thicknesses see Table 1 of the sfurzdar-d.
5.
1
Tolerances
a) Internal diameter b) Wall thickness L, percent f 7.5 percent except for any local increase to receive the marking
4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
Note-
2
1 2
6.
Flare Test -
Shall withstand the prescribed test.
For details regarding
test, see 7 of the standard.
refer to IS : 404 (Part I)-1977 Specification for lead pipes (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 407- 1981 BRASS TUBES FOR GENERAL PURPOSES (Third Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements of solid drawn brass tubes for general purposes. Specifies the preferred method of designating tubes by their outside diameter and lays down the permitted tolerances on outside diameter, thickness and length of tubes.
2. Freedom from Defects - Shall be reasonably round, straight, clean, smooth, uniform in diameter and free from cracks, seams, slivers,scaIe, etc. 192 3. Condition - May be supplied following conditions: a) b) in one of the
c)
As drawn and stress relieved - hard temper (HD), Temper annealed (TA) (tubes heat treated over their full length to an intermediate temper), and Annealed (0).
SP : 21-1983
4. 4.1
Sizes and Tolerances Sizes

Outside Dia In
5.
Pressure Tests -
(If required by purchaser.)
Preferred No. Series 2 2.5 4 5 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 25 28 32 35.5 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315
Wall Thickness (mm) 0.5 0.5, 0.6 0.5 to 1.0 0.5 to 1.2
0.6 to 1.5 0.6 to 1.5 0.6 to 1.5
5.1 Hydraulic Test - When tested, tubes shall show no sign of weeping, leaking or permanent increase in diameter at any point.
Note For details of test, refer to 9 of rhe standard.
5.2 Pneumatic Test - Tubes shall show no sign of leaking when tested to an air pressure of 0.42 MPa while immersed in water. 6. 6.1 Physical Test Tensile Strength and Hardness Requirements Temper Tensile Hardness Strength Vickers I MPa HV 285 Min 75 Mar (TA) 300 Min 80-l 10 400 Min 135 Min 285 Min 80 Max (TA) 320 Min 80-l 10 400 Min 130 Min
1
0.6 to 1.5
1 0.8 to 2 1 to 1.5 1 to 2.5 1 to 1.5 1.2 to 3

1.2, 1.5
Grade
CuZn30As
Annealed (0) Temper annealed Hard (HD) Annealed (0) Temper annealed Hard (HD)
1.5 to 4 1.5 to 5 1.5 to 6 1.5 to 8 1.5 to 8 2to 12 2.5 to 12 8 to 12 8 to 12 8 to 20

1, 1.2,
CuZn37
6.2 DrijXng Test outside diameter shall diameter of the drifted more than the original 1S, 2,
Tubes up to 100 mm nominal not show crack or flaw, until the end measures at least 30 percent diameter.
Note - Wall thicknesses shall be 0.5,0.6,0.8, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16 and 20 mm. 4.1.1 Length Up to 6 m. For tolerances,
6.3 Flattening (for Tubes not Exceeding 100 nvn Outside Diameter) - Test piece shall not crack. 6.4 Double Bend Test (for Round Tubes Over 100 mm Outside Diameter) - Test piece shall not crack on the outside of either bend. 6.5 Mercurous Nitrate Test - As drawn and stress relieved (after the final draw) tubes shall withstand the prescribed test without showing any sign of cracking.
4.2 Tolerances IS : 5493-1983*.

*Dimensions revision).
refer to 4 of
for wrought
copper and copper alloy tubes yirsf
Note - For test procedures refer to IS : 2866-1965 Method for Vickers hardness test for copper and copper alloys, IS : 2655-1965 Method for tensile testing of copper and copper alloy tube, IS : 2305-1962 Method for mercurous nitrate test for copper and copper alloys, and IO of the standard.
refer to IS : 407-1981 Specification for brass tubes for general purposes (third
193
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 651- 1980 SALT-GLAZED
STONEWARE
PIPES AND FITTINGS
(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope the following:
Thickness of Pipe or Fitting, mm Increase in Mass, Percent
1.1 Requirements regarding material and performance for stoneware pipes (straight pipes) and fittings (taper pipes; bends; taper bends; junctions; half-section channels, straight and taper; channel junctions; channel bends; channel interceptors; gully traps and inspection pipes). 1.2 Dimensions of salt-glazed stoneware pipes and fittings are grouped into two sections, A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings which normally form part of a pipe line and which are subject to same connections, specifications and tests as straight pipes. Section B includes dimensions of fittings which are commonly used but do not form a part of the normal pipe line. The fittings in Section B being hand-moulded articles their conformity to dimensional specifications are not required to he so accurate as for those in Section A. 2. Classifications a) Grade A - Pipes which comply with requirements of this standard, but of which only 5 percent have been subjected to the hydraulic test and found satisfactory. Fittings are not subjected to hydraulic test. b) Grade&l - Pipes and fittings which comply with requirements of this standaid, and all of which have passed hydraulic test. 3. Requirements a) Shall be sound, free from visible defects, and b) Glaring shall be free from crazing. 4. Tests
Hydraulic
Up to and including 20 Over 20 and up to 25 Over 25 and up to 32 Over 32 and up to 38 Over 38
6 7 8 9 10
c) Resistance toAcid (Optzimal) - Soluble matter shall not exceed 0.25 percent. d) Resistance to Action of Magnesium Sulphate (Optional) - There shall be no evidence of pittings, softening, spalling or cracking. e) Crushing Strength - Not less than 16 kn/m in length. 5. Internal Diameter of Pipes - Shall be 100, 150, 200, 230: 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm. The tolerances shall be 3, 5, 6, 6, 8, 8, 8, 10, 10, 12 and 12 mm respectively. 6. Length and Straightness of Barrels or Straight and Taper Pipes (Exclusive of Internal Depth of Socket) a) Length - 600,750 or 900 mm. b) Tolerance - + 10 mm for 600 and 750 mm pipes and f 15 mm for 900 mm pipe. cl Deviation from Straightness - Shall not exceed 5 mm for 600 mm pipe, 6 mm for 750 mm pipe and 7 mm for 900 mm pipe.
7. Tapers, Bends and Junctions -Internal diameters of taper pipes, half-section straight channels, half-section taper channels, and junctions shall be selected from those given in 5. 7.1 Barrels and branches of half-section channel junctions may be any of the diameters given in 5 but the diameter of branches shall not exceed that of the barrel diameter. The angle at junction shall be 45 + 3 or 90 + 3.
Non-preferred size.
Pipes shall withstand test pressure of 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2) on barrels and 0.075 MPa (0.75 kgf/cm*)on fittings without signs of injury or leakage.
Test -
b) Absorption Test Note 1 -For

Note 2-For
Increase in mass of test piece by absorption of water shall not exceed
detailed dimensions of pipes and fittings refer to the standard. test procedures refer to the standard.
For detailed
information,
refer to IS : 6.51-1980 Specification
for salt-glazed
stoneware
pipes and fittings
(fourth revision).
194
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1230-1979 CAST IRON RAINWATER
PIPES AND FITTINGS

1800 1800 5.9 1800 7.5 1800 9.1
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for cast iron rainwater pipes, half-round gutters, their fittings and accessories.
1.1 The requirements of O.G. gutters and fittings ate covered in Appendix A of the standard. 2. 2.1 Dimensions and Mass
Length, mm Minimum weight for 1 800 mm length, kg
Pipes and Fittings Nominal Size, mm
2.2.1 Tolerance Thickness of gutters and its fittings 50 53 3 1 20 1800 63 4 60 7

7.5
-1.0 mm
75 79 3 1 20 1800 89 4 65 7 11
100 104 3 1 20 1800 114 4 65 7 14
125 130 3 1 20 1800 139 4 75 9 20
150 156 4 1 20 1800 167 4 75 9 26
Pipes
External dia, mm Thickness, mm Projection of spigot bead, mm Width of spigot bead, mm Width of spigot bead, mm Internal dia, mm Thickness, Min, mm Internal depth, mm Thickness of beads, mm Nominal mass of 1 800 mm pipe without ears, kg
Sockets
Mass
Note - Unless otherwise specified, pipes and fittings shall be supplied without ears. For details refer to rhe standard.
2.1.1 Tolerances External dia of barrel
Length of gutters Length of gutter fittings Mass
+13.0 mm +3.0 mm -10 percent
Internal dia of socket Depth of socket Thickness Thickness of fittings Length of pipe Length of fittings Mass 2.2
+ 3mm for 50 and 75 mm pipes +3.5 mm for 100 and 125 mm pipes f4 mm for 150 mm pipes +-3 mm t-10 mm rfil mm -1.0 mm 2 13.0 mm f3 mm - 10 percent
3.
Freedom from Defects - Pipes and fittings shall be sound and fme from surface and other de-
fects .
4. 4.1
Tests
Brine11 Hardness Test - The hardness of external umnachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB. Hydrostatic Test - Shall withstand pressure test without showing any leakage, sweating or other defect of any kind.
Half-round Gutters and Fittings
4.2
Nominal size, mm Width, mm Radius, mm Thickness, mm
75 75 40 3
100 100 50 3
125 125 65 3
150 150 75 3
4.3 Hammer Test - When tested for soundness pipe shall emit a clear ringing sound.
Note 1 - For dimensions of bends, shoes, branches, offsets, union sockets, holderbats, rainwater heads, refer to the standard. Note 2-For test details, refer to the standard and IS : 1789-1961 Methods for Brine11hardness test for grey cast iron.
refer to IS : 1230-1979 Specification for cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings
(second revision). 195
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1536-1976 CENTRIFUGALLY IRON PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER,
CAST (SPUN) GAS AND SEWAGE
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope 4. 4.1 No. 1 to 3) Sizes
Socket and Spigot Pipes
1.1 Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron pipes for pressure main lines for water, gas and sewage, manufactured in metal or sand moulds. 1.2 Applicable. to cast iron pipes having spigots, sockets or flanges as specified in this standard, and also to pipes with other types of joints particularly rubber joints. In case of rubber joints the inner profile of socket end of the pipe shall depend on the type of rubber joint ensuring that the overall dimensions are maintained for reasons of safety and interchangeability. 2. Classification - Class LA, Class A and Class B depending on thickness. Class A and Class B pipes allow respectively 10 percent and 20 percent increase in thickness over Class LA. For special cases Classes C, D, E, etc may be derived after allowingcorresponding increases of thickness of 30,40 and 50percent, etc, over Class LA. 3. Requirements
-
a) Working length 6 m.
3.66,
4, 4.88,
5, 5.5 and 150, 200,
b) Nominal
diameter - 80,100, S25, 250, 300,350,400,450,500,600,700,750, 800, 900 and 1 000 mm. Pipes
4.2
Flanged
a) Working length - 2, 2.8, 3, 4, 4.88, 5, 5.5 and 6 m. b) Nominal diameter - 80, 100,125, 150,200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm. 4.3
Tolerances On diameter 4.3.1
External diameter of barrel (4.5 + 0.001 5 DN) Internal diameter of socket (3 + 0.001 DN)
&-/if=+ +%f=&
3.1 Hardness of 230 HB.

3.2
Shall not exceed Brine11 hardness
WhereDN is nominal diameter in mm andf is caulking space of joint in mm and is equal to 9 + 0.003 DN.
4.3.2 On length
Modulus of rupture shall be not less than 40 kgf/mm* for pipes up to 300 mm dia cast in metal moulds. 3.3 Tensile Test - Minimum strength.
Ring Test -
a) Socket and spigot, and plain ended pipes +25mm b) Flanged pipes + 10 mm.
Max deviation from straight line shall not 4.3.3 a) 20 kgf/mm2 for pipes cast in metal moulds (dia exceed (1.25 L) mm where L = length in over 300 up to 600 mm). . metres . b) 18 kgf/mm2 for pipes cast in metal moulds (dia over 600 mm). Note - For dimensions of sockets, spigots and flanges, etc, c) 18 kgf/mm2 for pipes cast in sand moulds (all and for detailed dimension of pipes refer to the standard. diameters). 5. Mass - Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15 3.4 Hydrostatic Test - All pipes shall withstand kg/dm3. Tolerance on standard mass f5 percent. following test pressures: __-_.___ 1) Class LA: 35 kgf/cm2 at works and 12 kgf/cm2 after installation 2) Class A: 35 kgf/cm2 at works and 18 kgf/cm2 after installation Cast Socket and Spigot Pipes 3) Class B: 35 kgf/cm2 at works and 24 kgf/cm2 after installation 1) Class A: 35 kgf/cm2 at works and 18 kgf/cm2 after installation Cast Flanged Pipes Up to 600 dia { 2) Class B: 35kgf/cm2 at works and 24 kgf/cm2 after installation ~____~ __~_~
NoteFor test procedures
For detaiied
information,
refer to IS : 1536-1976
Specification
for centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure
pipes for water, gas and sewage (second revision).

___-
196
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1537- 1976 VERTICALLY CAST IRON PRESSURE FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
PIPES
(First Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope 3. No. 1 to 3) Sizes a) Working length of socket and spigot pipes 3.66, 4, 4.88. 5 and 5.5 m. b) Working length ofjlangedpipes - 2 to 3 m for 80 mm nominal diameter pipe and 2 to 4 m for others. c) Nominal diameter of socket and spigot pipes andfiangedpipes - 80, 100, 125, 150,200, 250,300, 350,400,450,500, 600,700,750, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 500. d) Tolerances 1) Length (socket and spigot, and plain ended pipes) f20 mm. 2) Length (flanged pipes) ?I 10 mm. 3) Max deviation from straight line shall not exceed (1.25 L) mm where L is length in metres .
Note - For dimensions of sockets, spigots, flanges, etc, refer to the standard.
1.1 Requirements for cast iron pipes for pressure main lines of water, gas and sewage manufactured by vertical casing in sand moulds. 1.2 Applicable to pipes with sockets (for lead joints) or flanges. Standard may also be made applicable to other types of joints specially rubber joints, where overall measurements shall be adhered to, to ensure interchangeability. 2. 2.1 2.2 Requirements Hardness Shall not exceed 210 HB.
Tensile Strength - Shall not be lower than 15 kgf/mm*. The test shall be carried out in accordance with IS : 2078-1%2*. Hydrostatic Test - Pipes shall withstand following test pressures (kgf/cm*). Socket and Flanged Pipes Spigot Pipes A \ class A Class B Class A Class B 300 mm 20 25 20 25 300 and 600 mm 20 25 15 20 600 and 1000 mm 15 20 10 15 1000 and 1500mm 10 15 10 10
2.3
Diameter
1) Upto 2) Over upto 3) Over upto 4) Over upto
4. Mass 7.15 kg/dm3. 4.1
Density
of cast
iron
is taken
as
*Method for tensile testing of grey cast iron. Note-For test details refer to the standard.
Tolerance
on standard mass + 5 percent.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1537-1976 Specification for vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision).
197
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1538 (PARTS I TO XXIII)-1976 CAST IRON FITTINGS FOR PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Part I covers general requirements for cast iron fittings for pressure pipes of water, gas and sewage. It is applicable to all cast iron fittings having spigots, sockets or flanges as specified in this standard and also to fittings with other type of joints, the general dimensions of which, except those relating to the joints, conform to this standard. Parts II to XXIII cover specific requirements and dimensions of sockets and spigots, sockets of fittings, flanges of pipes and fittings, raised flanges, standard flange drillings, flanged sockets; flanged spigots; collars; double socket bends; tees all sockets; double socket tee with flanged branch; crosses; all sockets; double socket tapers; caps; plugs; bellmouth pieces; double flanged bends; flanged tees; flanged crosses; double flanged tapers; body flanges; and blank flanges respectively. 2. 2.1 General Requirements Hardness Shall not exceed 2 1OHB. Note - For Brine11 hardness test, see 5.1 and also IS : 17891961*.
No. 1) Mass
4.
4 Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/dm3.
b) Tolerance on standard mass for bends, fittings

with more than one branch and non-standard fittings + 12 percent. c) Tolerance on standard mass of other fittings + 8 percent. Note - Fittings of a heavier mass than the maximum may be accepted provided they comply with all other requirements. 5. Coating - Where coating material has a tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife. 6. 6.1 Dimensions Sockets and Spigots of Pipes (Lead Joint) Nominal Dia External Dia of Spigot (DE) mm 98 118 144 170 222 274 326 378 429 480 532 635 738 790 842 945 1 048 1 152 1 256 1 567
of socket
2.2 Tensile Strength kgf/mm2.
Shall not be lower than 15 Shall withstand Fittings without -Branches or with Branches not Exceeding l/2 Principal Dia 25 20 following
(DN)
mm 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1 100 1 200 1 500 Fittings with Branches Greater than 112 Principal Dia
Internal Dia of Socket (DI) mm 116 137 163 189 241 294 346 398 449 501 553 657 760 813 865 968 1 072 1 177 1 281 1 594
(LX) given above is
2.3 Hydrostatic Test test pressures (kgf/cm*): Diameter
25 a) Up to 300 mm 20 b) Over 300 and up to 600 mm 10 15 c) Over 600 and up to 1 500 mm 3. Tolerances on External Diameter of Barrel and Internal Diameter of Socket a) External dia of spigot + 1/2f= +(4.5+0.0015 (DE) ON) b) Intemaldiaofsocket +-1/3f=+(3+0.001 UN) (D0 Where DN is nominal diameter of fitting in mm andf iscaulking space of the joint in mm and is equal to 9.0+0.003 DN. 198
Note - Internal diameter applicable to fittings also.
SP : 21-1983
6.2
Flanges of Pipes and Fittings
Nominal Dia Flange Dia Nominal Dia Flange Dia mm mm mm mm 670 200 500 80 780 220 600 100 250 895 125 700 285 750 960 150 1 015 340 200 800 1 115 900 250 395 1 230 445 300 1000 505 1 340 350 1 100 565 1 200 1 455 400 615 1800 450 1 500
6.3 Flange Sockets, Flanged Spigots, Collars and Double Socket 114, ll8,1l16, II32 Bends Nominal Dia - 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,400,450, 500, 600, 700,750,800,900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, and 1 500 mm. 6.4 Tees: All Sockets, All Flanges Nominal Dia of Branch mm
Nominal Diameter (DN) Naninal Diameter (DN) of Branch of Body mm mm 150 80 200 80 250 80 300 80 300 100 350 80 350 100 400 80 400 100 450 100 500 150 600 150 700 150 750 150 800 200 900 200 1 000 200 1 100 250 1 200 250 1 500 250 6.6 Crosses: All Sockets, All Flanges 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,
Nominal Dia of body mm 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 ,500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1 100 1200
Nominal Diameter 250 and 300 mm 6.7
80 80, 100 80, 100, 125 80, 100, 125, 150 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300 200, 250, 300, 350 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 500 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 350,400, 450, 500, 600,700 400,450,500, 600, 700, 750 400,450, 500,600, 700, 750, 8% 450,500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900 500,600,700, 750, 800, 900, 1 000 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100 600,700,750, 800,900, 1 000,l 100, 1200 750, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 500 1 500 6.5 Double Socket Tee with Flanged Branch Nominal Diameter (ON) ofBody mm 80 100 125 Nominal Diameter (DN) of Branch mm 80 80 80 199
Double Socket and Double Flanged Tapers Nominal Diameter (DN) (&tall Dia) mm 80 80, 100 80, 100, 125 100, 125, 150 125, 150, 200 150, 200, 250 200, 250, 300 250, 300, 350 350, 400 for double socket, and 300,350,400 for double flanged tapers 350,400,450 400,450, 500 500, 600 600,700 600,700,750 I 700, 750, 800 800,900 900,lOOO 900, 1 000 for double socket, and 1 000,l 100 for double flanged tapers 1 000, 1 200 for double socket, and 1 100,l 200 for double flanged tapers
Nominal Diameter (DN) (Large Dia) mm 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1 100 1 200 1 500
SP : 21-1983
6.8
Caps and Plugs
6.10
Double Flanged % and % Bends % and % Bends
Nominal diameter (DN) - 80. 100; 125, 150,200, 250,300,350,400,450,500,600,700,750,800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500 mm. 6.9
6.10.1
Nominal Dia - 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300,350,400,450,500,600,700,750,800,900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500 mm.
6.10.2 % Duck Foot Bends
Bell Mouth Pieces

Nominal Dia Big End Dia
Nominal Dia Big End Dia
Nominal Dia 350,400, 6.11

Split Puddle
80,100,125,150,200,250,300,
or Body Flanges
mm 80 100 125 150

200 250 300 350 400 450
Note
Note
mm 125 150 , 175 200

285 350 450 525 600 650
detailed dimensions
mm 500 600 700 800

900
1 000 1 100 1200 1 500
mm 750 900 1 050 1200 1 350 1 500 1 650 1 800

2 250
450, 500 and 600 mm.
Nominal Dia -
80, 100,125, 150,200,250,300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 750, 900, and 1 200 mm. Blank
6.12
Flanges
Nominal Dia -
80, 100, 125, 150,200,250,300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500 mm.
l-For Z-For
and sketches
of cast iron fittings
refer to the sfandurd.
details of tensile test specimen
refer to fhe slandurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1538 (Parts I to XXIII)-1976 pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (second revision).
Specification for cast iron fittings for
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1729-1979 SAND CAST IRON SPIGOT AND SOCKET SOIL, WASTE AND VENTILATING PIPES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes together with details of fittings and accessories. These pipes and fittings are suitable for use above ground only. 2.4 Ears shall be provided only if specifically required. When provided, they shall have following projections: 32 mm 50 and 75 mm dia 38 mm 100 and 150 mm dia 3. 3.1 pipe 5 Socket 76 6 Dimensions (in mm)
Straight Pipes and Sockets Nominal Size 50 75
2.
Requirements
2.1 Shall be free from defects, other than any unavoidable surface imperfections and shall be such that they could be cut. Shall emit clear ringing sound when struck with light hand hammer. 2.2 Shall emit clear ringing sound when struck with light hand hammer. 2.3 Hydraulic Zest - Pipes and fittings shall withstand a hydrostatic pressure of 0.07 N/n& for minimum 15 seconds without showing any signs of leakage. These tests shall be carried out after an internal or external coating. 200
85 5 101 6
100 110 5 129 6
150 160 5 181 6
mass of pipe (kg) excluding ears Nominal i
1 500 mm length 1800 mm length 2 000 mm length
9.56 13.83 18.14 26.70 11.41 16.52 21.67 31.92 12.65 18.37 24.15 35.66
SP : 21-1983
3.2
Doors
Short Radius Bends
With and Without Access
3.12 Straight Inspection Pieces Nominal Size 50, 75, 100, 150
Nominal Size
0 (Bend)
3.13 Loose Sockets and Collars Nominal Size 50, 75, 100, 150
50,75, 100, 150 92l% l;oO, 95 l& 100 11241 100 104 3.3 Large Radius Bends
Nominal Size 75, 100, 150 0
3.14 Cast Iron Holderbats Nominal Size 50, 75, 100? 150
3.15 Wire Balloons Galvanized Steel or Copper Nominal Size 55, 75, 100, 150
92l% 95 100 112%, l;oO, 1;5

Projection
3.16 Sanitary Connections 3.16.1

Socket to Fit WC Outlet Dimension Noininal Size = 100
3.4
Off-Sets
Nominal Size 50,75,
100, 150
Equal Branches
76, 114, 152, 229 and 305

With and Without Oval Access 0 3.16.2
3.5
Doors
Pipe - Internal dia, Min Socket - Internal dia, Min

S and P Branches and Bends
100
150
Nominal Size 50,75,
Nominal Size 3.16.3

Bends
100 100
Pipe Length
100, 150
Unequal Access Doors Nominal Size
100 3.6
92% 95 100 112% 9 l;oO, 1135 103

With and Without 0 Oval
Nominal 3.16.4
Size
Short Connection
Branches
Nominal Size
100 3.17 Bossed Systems
150, 225, 300, 450, 600

Pipes and Connections for One Pipe
Main pipe Branch pipe 3.7
75, 100 100.150 i 92?4, 95, loo, 50, 50, 75, 100 112?4, 120, 135
Singles, Equal and Unequal Branch Pipe
100
Parallel Branches, Main Pipe

100 100
Nominal size of basin and bath connector (single and double)= 100 mm.
Note -For dimensions of rectangular access doors (for straight pipes and large radius bends, roof outlet square grating, circulargrating, Dgrating, bent), straight inspection pieces with rectangular access door, vent pipe roof connectors, floor trap, floor trap (Nahani), 90 and 100 mm WC connectors with antisyphon socket, refer to the standard.
50 Socket and Spigot Type 0
3.8
Inverted Branches, Nominal Size
4.
Tolerances Wall thickness External dia of barrel
95 112% 180 Branchpipe pipe Main 3.9

Trap
50 50
100 100
501 100
Nominal Size
50,
75,
100.
150
3.10 Oval Access Doors Nominal Size 50, 75, 100, 150
Internal dia of socket Depth of socket Length
1.0 mm f3 mm for 50 and 75 mm dia +3.5 mm for 100 mm dia f4 mm for 150 mm dia f3 mm for all dia + 10 mm for all dia +26 mm for pipes and f 10 mm for fittings : 5519-
Note -
For tolerances on other dimensions, refer to IS
3.11 Diminishing Pieces Large diameter Small diameter 75 50 100 50 100 7.5 150 100 201
1979*.
*DeviationStor untoleranced castings Cjtrst revision).
dimensions
and mass of grey iron
SP : 21-1983
5. Weight dm3. Tolerance 6. Coating detailed
Density of cast iron taken as 7.15 kg/ - 10 percent Where coating

dimensions
similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77C but not so brittle at a 0C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife.
material
has tar or
Note-For
and sketches
refer to fhe sfandurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1729-1979 Specification for sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1879 (PARTS I TO X)-1975 MALLEABLE CAST IRON PIPE FITTINGS
(First Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Part I covers general requirements for malleable cast iron pipe fittings screwed in accordance The dimensions specified with IS : 5541%4*. (centre-to-face , face-to-face and centre-to-centre) are essential for interchangeability. Dimensions which are not included in the standard are left to the discretion of the manufacturer depending on the end use of the fittings. These fittings shall be suitable for working pressure up to 1.38 MN/m2 in the case of water and up to 1.035 MN/m2 in the case of steam,.air, gas .and oil. Parts II to X cover specific requirements regarding dimensions, weights and marking for elbows, tees, crosses, bends, sockets, bushing and hexagon nipples, backnuts, caps and plugs, and unions respectively.
*Dimensions for pipe threads for gas list tubes and pressure tight screwed fittings (revised).
No. 1 to 4)
Metric system has been adopted in India and all quanappearing in this standard have been given in this system. However, it may be noted that the designation is based on the international practice of including nominal inch sizes of pipe threads at the outlets.
tities and dimensions
Note -
2. Designation - Fittings following particulars:
are designated
by the
Type of fitting (elbows, tees, bends, etc). Size designation - Nominal inch sizes of the pipe thread at the outlets. Right- and left-hand thread, where applicable. For sockets and hexagon nipples, with rightand left-hand thread, the letter R-L (rightleft) shall be added after the nominal size of the fitting Code number (see Table 1 of the srandurd).
202
SP : 21-1983
3. 3.1
Dimensions and Weights
3.6
Size Designation of Elbows, Reducing E2 %Xl/iX%, 1X%X%, 1X%X%, 1%X%X%,
Wall thickness of pipe fittings shall be as follows:
l%XlX1,11/2X1X1,1%X1%Xl%,2X1%X1%and 2Xl/2Xl/i.
Size
/4
36
3h
1%
1% 3.5 2
2 4 2.3
2% 4.5 2.5
3 5 2.8
3% 5.5 3
4 6 3.3
5 6.5 4
6 7.5 4.6
Wall thickness, mm Reinforcement, projection, mm Reinforcement, width, mm
2
1
2.5 1.3
2.5 1.3
2.5 1.5
3 1.5
3 1.8
3.5 1.8
3.6
4.6
4.6
5.1
5.1
5.6
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.5
7.1
8.1
8.9
Note-Elbows, tees, crosses, pockets and capsmaybe either plain or reinforced but they are not necessarily availablein both tYPes in all sizes. Bends, pitcher tees, twin elbows and long sweep fittings are supplied only in reinforced type.
3.2 Size Designation of Elbows Al, Male and Female Elbows A4, and Side Outlet Elbows Zal.
a)
Elbow Al 2%, 3,3%,
4,5
4/e,%, 36, %, %, 1, 1%) 1%) 2, and 6. %, Y,, 34, 55,
Size Designation UAI; Male and Female Union Elbows, Taper Female Union Elbows,
3.7
of Union Elbows, Flat Seat Union Elbows, Flat Seat UA2; Seat UAII; and Male and Taper Seat UA12.
b) Male and female elbows A4 3/4,
Size Designation /\
1, I%,
115, 2, 2Y2, 3, 3% and 4. %, %, %, 1, l%,
UAl % Y2 J/4 1 1% 144 2
UA2 3/Q h % 1 1% 1?4 2
UAll
Y4 J/ Y2 J/4 -1 1% 1% 2
UA12
h 3/s Y2 3/4 1 1% lY2 2
c)
Side outlet elbows Zal1% and 2.
3.3 Size Designation of Elbows, Reducing Al, and Male and Female Elbows, Reducing A4.
a) Elbows,
reducing
Al -
YE X % , l/4 X 3/g,
1% x 55, lY2 x 1,
% x 96, % x Y2, 1 x Y2, 1 x %, 1% x h, 1% x %, 1% x %,
3.8 Size Designation of Tees BI and Side Outlet Tees, Za2.
1% X l%, 2 x /i, 2 x %, 2 x 1, 2 X I%, 2 x 1% and 2% x 2. b) Male and female elbows, reducing A4 4i x 96, % x $5, 1 x % and lY4 X 1.
3.4 Size Designation of 45 Elbows Al 145 and 45 Male and Female Elbows A4/45 - Ya, %, %, 1, l%, 1% and 2.
TeesBl-
%,%,%,44,%,1,1%,1%,2,31/2, 3, 2/!z,4, 5 and 6. %, h; J/4, 1, l%, 1% and 2.

or
Side Outlet Tees, Za2 -
3.9 Size Designation of Tees -Reducing Increasing on the Branch Bl

%X%X%
%XMX% 95x Y4x h Yzx % x Y2 Y2x % x $5 h x 1 x Y2
%X%X%
%X%X% %X44X% %X1X% %X1%X% 1X%X1
3.5 Size Designation of Twin Elbows E21, I%, 1% and 2.
%, /z, % ,
1X%X 1 1X55X 1 1X%X1 1X1%X1 1x 1Yzx 1 1%X%X 1%
203
SP : 21-1983
lAX/zX 1% lAX%X 1% 15/4x 1x1s 1Ax 1%X 1% 11/qX2Xlvl 1%X /2x 1% 11/2X%X 1% 1Yzx 1x 1% 1%X 1?Ax 1%
1%X2X 1% 2XMX2 2X%X2 2X1X2 2x l/qX 2 2X11/2X2 21/2x 1X2% 2%X 15/4X2% 2% x I /Ix 2/2
2%X2X 2/2 3X1X3 3X1%X3 3x lYzX3 3X2x 3 3x21/2x3 4x2x4 4X3X4
3.14
Size Designation
of Crosses
Reducing
Cl
% x %x %x % 3/4 x J/8 x % x 3/s %x %x %x % 1x J/x IA% IXY2X IX/2 1X%X 1X%
lj/4X%XIf/4X% 11/4X%X11/4X% 1j/4XlX11/4Xl 11/2X%X 11/4X% 1?4x 1x IY2X 1 1%X l?AX 1%X 1% 2x1x2x1 2x 1Xx2x 1% 2XlY2X2Xl%
3.10 Size Designation

Run, Reducing Bl: h x x x 3/s % x $5x % 3hx
of Tees - Reducing on the Equal to or Increasing on the Branch
%x 3/s
3/4 x 3/8 x % 3/ x /2 x 3/8 % x h x %

3/ x 3hx J/s % x %x %
1X%X% 1X%X% lXYzX% 1x%x% 1X%X% 1X%X% 1x IX% 1X1X% 1x 1X% 1x l/AX%
%x 1x /!?
13/4X1/2X1 lAX%X% 1/4X%X 1 15/4x lXl/z 11/qx 1X% l/IX 1x 1 is/4X 11/qx/z 15/4x lj/qX% 1Ax 1/4x1 1Ax 1%X1 l%X%XlA 1!4X%X11/4
IYzxlxl 1%X 1x 1% l/iX l?AX% 1%X 1%X 1 l%Xl?AIXlvl 1%X 11/4x1/2 1%X1%X% 1%X1%X1 1%X 1%X 1% 2X%X 1?/2 2x 1x 1% 2x 1Ax 1% 2x 1AIAl/Tz 2Xl%X1/4
2x l%Xl/i 2X2X% 2X2X1 2x 2x 1%
2X2X 1!4 21/2x /2X2% 2%X%X21/2 3X%X3
3.11 Size Designation %, 1, 11/4, llh and 2.
of Pitcher Tees El -
J/a, %,
3.15 Size Designation of Bends Dl and Male and Female Bends 04 - j/4, 96, %, %, l?A, 1% and 2. 3.16 Size Designation of Long Sweep Bends Gl, Male and Female Long Sweep Bends G4, and Male Long Sweep Bends GB.
3.12 Size Designation of Pitcher Tees -Reducing on the Branch, Reducing the Run. and Reducing on Branch and Run El. -
J/4 x $5x 95
3/4 x I2 x 3/4
%X%X % 1X1/4X% 1X%X1 1x % x M 1X%X% 1X%X1 1X1X% 1Y4x %X 1% l?AX%Xl lj/qX%X 1% 1Xx 1X% 1Xx 1x 1 1/4XlX 1% lY$Xl?AX 1 3.13
lYzX%lX 1% 11/2x 1x 1% 1%X 1x 1% 1%2x 11/qx 1 i Y2 x 1/4x 1l/4 11/2x l/&X 1*/i 2x 2x 2x .2x 2x 2x 1x2 1Alx 1?4 1/4x2 IMX 1% 11/4x 1% lYzX2
a) Long sweep bends G 1, and male and female longsweepbendsG4-_,/4,%,/4,%,1, ll/q, l%, 2, 2%, 3, 3% and 4. b) Male long sweep bend G8 - 3/8, % , % , 1, l%, 1% and 2. 3.17
Glk5, G4/45Size Designation of 45 Long Sweep Bends and Male and Female Long Sweep Bends 3/4, 968, /i, %, 1, lf/4, l/i, 2, 2/4 and 3.
3.18
Size Designation of Sockets M2; Sockets, Rightand Left-Hand Thread M2R-L; Sockets, Reducing M2; and Eccentric Sockets, Reducing M3.
a) SocketsM2-1~,f/4,%,%,%,1,1f/4,1~,2, 2h, 3,3%, 4,5 and 6. /4, % , % , b) Sockets, M2R-Land 3. 204 right- and left-hand thread A, 3/, /i, %, 1, 1X, l%, 2, 21/i
Size Designation of Crosses Cl %, 1, 15/4, l%, 2,21/2,3 and4.
SP : 21-1983
c) Sockets,reducingM2 - %X%,%X%, %X%, Y2X%, /ix%, %X%, 3/4x%, %X%, IX%, lXY2,1X%, 1%X%, 1%X%, 1%X%, 1%X1, lMXY2, lMX%, 1%X1, 144X1%, 2X%, 2X%, 2X1,2X1%, 2X1%, 2YzXY2,2hX%, 244x1, 244X1%, 2%X144, 255x2, 3x44, 3x%,3X1,3X1%,3X1M,3~2,3~2%,4x2, 4x2% and 4x3. d) Eccentric sockets, reducing M3 - %x 44, IXM, 1X%, 1%x%, 1%X%, l%Xl,lY2XM, 1%X%, 1%x1, llhXl%, 2X%, 2x 1,2x 1% and 2x1%.
3.22 Size Designation of Back Nuts P4 %, 1, 1/4, I%, 2, 2% and 3.
% , 36, S,
3.23 Size Designation of Hexagon Caps TI, Round Caps 72, Plain Plugs l8, Beaded Plugs T9 and Countersunk Plugs Tl I. Size Designation h Tl %
% 1%
9 T9 %
Y4 % Y2 3/4
T2 % 14
?h Y2 3/4
T8 % %
% 44 3/4
Tll % 44 J/4
3.19 Size Designation of Male and Female Sockets M4, and Male and Female Sockets, Reducing M4. a) Equal Socket size designation %, 1 and 1%. M4 3/e, 52,
xl
1 1% 144
2 2% 3
1 1% 144
2 -
1 1% 144
2 2%
1 1% 1%
2 2%
1 -
b) Reducing socket size designation M4 %X%, %X-1/, l/ix%, %XYa, %XM, 1x44, 1X%, 1%X%, 1%X1, 1%X1, 1%X1%, 2X 1% and 2X 1%. 3.20 Size Designation of Bushings N4-%xX, %X%,%X%, %X%, vzX%, 1/2X%, %X%, %X%, %4x%, 1X%. 1X%, lXY2, 1X%, lY4X%, lY4XM, 1%X%, 1%X1, 1%X%, 1%X%, 11/4X%, lYzX1 lYzXl%,2X%, 2X%, 2X1,2X1%,2X1%, 21/2x1, 2%X l%, 2%X1%, 2%X2, 3x 1, 3X1%, 3x lY2, 3x2, 3x2%, 3%X3,4X2%, 4X3 and 4X3%. 3.21 Size Designation of Hexagon Nipples N8; Hexagon Nipples, Right- and Left-Hand Thread N8 R-L; ana Hexagon Nipples, Reducing N8. a) Equal nipple size designation N8 - %, % , %I, M, %, 1, l%, I%, 2,244,3,3% and 4. b) Equal nipple size designation M, %, 1, l%, 1% and 2. c) Reducing
%X%
3 4
3 3% 4
3.24 Size Designation of Unions, Flat Seat UI; Male and Femcle Unions, Flat Seat U2; Unions, Taper Seat Ul I; and Male and Female Unions, Raper Seat U12. Size Designation h Ul A
Y4 % Y2 3/4
u2 Y4 %a M 3/4
\ u12 Y4 % ?4 3/4
Ull %
A %a M J/4
1 1% 1%
2 254 3 4
1 1% 1%
2 -
1 1% 1%
2 241 3 4
1 1% 1%
2 2% 3 -
N8 R-L -
%.
45X% ?4X% %X%3 %X44 lXY2 1X%
nipple -1%x1/4 1%X% 1%X 1 144X% 11/4X% 144x 1 11/4x 1%
size reducing N8 2X% 2X% 2x1 2x 1% 2x1s 2%X 1% 242x2 3x2 3x244 205
Note -
For details regarding dimensions andweights, see PartsI

standard.
to X of the
4.
Pressure Test - Shall show no sign of leakage under either of following:
a) Internal hydraulic pressure of 2.068 MNIm2, or b) Internal air pressure of 0.690 immersed in water or light oil. MN/m2
SP : 21-1983
5.
Tolerances
up to 30 +1.5 30-50 *2 50-75 + 2.5 75-100 +3
Note 3 -
Dimensions, mm Tolerance, mm
Note 1 - Centre-to-face tees, crosses, etc. etc.
100-150 +3.5
150-200 +4
above 200 *5
dimensions apply to elbows, bends,
Centre-to-centre
dimensions
apply to return bends.
Note 2 - Face-to-face dimensions apply to sockets, nipples, 6. Finish-May be galvanized.
For detailed information, fittings.
refer to IS : 1879 (Parts I to X)-1975 Specification for malleable cast iron pipe
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3006- 1979 CHEMICALLY RESISTANT GLAZED STONEWARE PIPES AND FITTINGS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Material and performance requirements for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes (straight pipes) and fittings (taper pipes; bends, taper bends; junctions; half section channels, straight and taper; channel junctions; channel bends; channel interceptors; gully traps and inspection pipes). Dimensions of chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings are grouped into two Sections, A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings which normally form a part of a pipe line and which are subject to the same conditions, specifications and tests as straight pipes. Section B includes dimensions of fittings which are commonly used and which do not from a part of the normal pipe line. The fittings in Section B being hand-moulded, their conformity to dimensional specifications is not required to be so accurate as for those in Section A.
2. 3.2 Waterabsorptionshall Thickness of Pipe or Fitting Up to 20 to 25 to 32 to Over 20 25 32 38 38 mm mm mm mm mm notexceed thefollowing: Increase in Mass, Percent 3 4 5 6 8 Loss in mass shall not
3.3 Acid Resistance exceed 1.5 percent.
3.4 Alkali Resistance - Shall not show evidence of pitting, softening, spalling or cracking. 4.
Dimensions
Pipes, Barrels and Sockets Internal Diameter of Pipe a00 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 Mean Thickness of the Barrel and ofSocket, Min 12 15 16 20 25 30 35 37 40 43 Internal Depth of Socket Min 50 57 63 70 70 75 75. 76 80 90
Requirements
defects,
4.1
2.1
Shall be sound and free from visible such as, cracks, crazing, etc.
2.2 Shall give sharp clear note when struck with light hammer. 2.3 Interior and exterior surfaces of the pipes and fittings which remain exposed after jointing, shall be glazed. 3.
Tests
3.1 Pipes shall withstand hydraulic pressure of 0.3 MPa on the barrels and 0.15 MPa on fittings. The pressure shall be maintained for not less than 5 seconds without showing signs of leakage or injury. 206
SP : 21-1983
4.2 Length of the barrels of straight and taper pipes, junctions and half-section channels, exclusive of the internal depth of the socket, shall be 600,750 or 900 mm. 4.2.1 Tolerance on length + 10 mm for 600 mm and 750 mm length and + 15 mm for 900 mm length pipes. 4.2.2 Deviation from straightness shall not exceed 5 mm for 600 mm length of pipes, 6 mm for 750 mm length and 7 mm for pipes of 900 mm length. 4.3 Sockets - The interior of the sockets shall be conical, having a minimum taper of 1 mm, measured on the diameter, per 15 mm length. 4.4 Tapers, Bends and Junctions
5. Grooving - The interior of the sockets, and the exterior of the spigots shall be grooved cimumferentially and such grooving on the spigot shall be for a length equal to one and a half times the depth of the sockets, and the depth of such grooves shall be between 1 mm and 2 mm. 6. 6.1 Gully Traps Round Mouth Gully Traps Type Size mm 100x 100, 125x 100 and 150x 100 125x 100 100X 100, 150X 100 and 150X 150
P 6.2
4.4.1 Internal diameters of taper pipes, halfsection straight channel half-section taper channels, bends (one quarter, one eight and one sixteenth) and junctions shall be selected from 4.1. 4.4.2 Barrels and branches of half-section channel junctions may be any of the diameters given in 4.1, but the diameter of branches shall not exceed the barrel diameter. Angle at junction shall be 45 + 3 or 90 f 3.
Note 1 -For
detailed dimensions and sketches refer to /he s/ondurd.
Square-Mouth Gully Traps Type P Q S 100X 180x 125x 125x Size mm 100,125x 100,150x 100, 100 and 180x 150 100 100, 150x 100 and 180~ 150
Note 2-For
test procedures,
see 6 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 30061979 pipes and fittings (first revision).
Specification for chemically resistant glazed stoneware
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3076-1968 LOW DENSITY POLYETHYLENE FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
PIPES
(First Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for low density black polyethylene pipes of outside diameters up to 140 mm for use in potable water supplies. 2. Classification - Classified by pressure ratings (working pressures) as 2.5, 4.0,6.0 and 10 kgf/cm*. 3. Composition - Extruded from compound consisting of polyethylene in which carbon black and a suitable non-toxic antioxidant are evenly dispersed. 4. Lengths - Supplied in coils of nominal lengths of 25, 50, 100, 150 and 200 m. 207. No. 1 and 2) 5. Dimensions Dia (in mm) Tolerance +0.3 +0.3 +0.3 +0.3 +0.3 +0.3 + 0.4 Outside Dia 50 63 75 90 110 125 140 Tolerance +0.5 +0.6 + 0.7 +0.8 +1.0 +1.2 +1.3
Outside
10 12 16 20 25 32 40
Note 1 - For wall thicknesses for different working pressures see Table 1 of the standard.
SP : 21-1983
Note 2 - Recommended be -40 to +38C.
temperature
for above pipes shall
pipes shall be as below:
6. 6.1
Tests
Pipe Wall Thickness a5mm

> 5 mm
Tensile Strength 8.85 MPa (88.5 kgf/cm2) 8.85 MPa (88.5 kgf/cm2)
Elongation at Break
350 percent 200 percent
Hydraulic Test
6.1.1 General test - Coil of pipe shall withstand not less than twice the working pressure. 6.1.2 Batch test - Shall not burst nor show signs of localized swelling, leakage or weeping. 6.2 Tensile Strength -Tensile strength and elongation at break at 2 + 1C for different thicknesses of
Note-For test procedures, see 7 of
6.3 Reversion Test - Sample 15 cm long shall not alter in length after immersion A bv , more than 3 oercent in boiling water for one hour and allowed to cool to room temperature.
the standard. pipes for
For detailed information, refer to IS : 30761968 Specification for low density polyethylene potable water supplies (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3486- 1966 CAST IRON SPIGOT AND SOCKET DRAIN PIPES

1. Scope 3.2
Tolerances
Internal dia of socket Internal depth of socket Length Wall thickness f3 mm flOmm f20 mm - 15 percent
1.1 Requirements for cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes subject to low pressures. Note - Cast iron pipes for pressure purposes are covered by
IS : 1.537-1976*.
1.2
Applicable to pipes with sockets for lead joints.
2. Requirements - Metal shall satisfy the requirements of tensile test specified for Grade 15 of IS : 210-1970t. 3. 3.1 Dimensions (in mm)
4. Weight - Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/dm3. Tolerance = - 5 percent. 5. Hammer Test - Shall emit clear ringing sound when struck with a light hand hammer. 6. Coating-Where coating material has a tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard 80 I Internal dia Thickness { Internal dia Internal depth { 1 800 mm length 2 700 mm length 80 8 112 84 33 47 100 100 9 135 88 45 65 125 125 9.5 163 91 58 84 150 150 10 189 94 73 105 200 200, 11 241 100 105 152
Pipes and Sockets
Nominal Size Pipe Socket Nominal weight of pipes including socket length, exclusive of internal depth of socket
Note-For detailed dimensions and sketch, see Table 1 of the
standard.
enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77C but not so brittle at 0C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife.
*Specification for vertical cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage firer revision). TSpecification for grey iron castings (second
revision).
refer to IS : 3486-1966 Specification for cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes.
208
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3589-1981 6LECTRICALLY WELDED STEEL PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE (150 TO 2 000 am NOMINAL SIZE)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of electric fusion (arc) welded, electric resistance welded and induction welded carbon steel pipes for water, gas and sewage of nominal size from 150 to 2 000 mm and having joints with plain or bevelled ends for butt welding or sleeve welded joints (swelled and plain end). It does not cover steel pipes with screwed joints and requirements for specials, such as collars, tees and bends, etc. 5. 2. Designation - Pipes are designated by method of manufacture followed by number corresponding to the minimum specified tensile strength in MPa. For example, ERW 410 indicates electric resistance welded and induction. welded pipes having a minimum tensile strength of 410 MPa. Similarly EFW 410 would indicate electric fusion (arc) welded pipe having 410 MPa minimum tensile strength. 3. Lengths 6. 6.1 Nominal Size mm 1 150 1 200 1300 1 400 1 500 Thickness Nominal Size mm Above Above Above Above Above Minimum Thickness mm 4 5 6 7 8 10 Outside Dia mm 1 168.4 1 220 1 320 1 420 1 520 Nominal Size mm 1600 1 700 1 800 2 000 Outside Dia mm 1 620 1 720 1 820 2 020
150 to 300 300 to 500 500 to 600 600 to 850 850 to 1 200 1 200 to 2 000
3.1 Random Lengths - Steel tubes shall be supplied in single random lengths from 4 to 7 m or double random lengths of 7 to 14 m. In case of orders over 200 m, of any size, short random length shall be 2 to 4 m provided total of such lengths does not exceed 7.5 percent of total lengths. 3.2 Where length is specified variation as exact or cut mm for
Tolerances Outside Diameter a) Pipe body - kO.75 percent up to 500 mm size and f 1.00 percent for sizes over 500 mm. b) Pipe ends at distance of 100 mmfrom end of pipe) - + 1.6 and - 0.40 mm for pipes up to 250 mm and +2.4 and -0.80 mm for pipes over 250 mm.
length,
permissible
shall be !i
lengths up to 6 m. For every 3 m increase in length above 6 m, plus toierances shall be increased, by 2 mm with maximum of 20 mm. 4. Norninal Size mm 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 Outside Diameters outside Dia mm 168.3 193.7 219.1 244.5 273.0 323.9 355.6 406.4 457.2 508.0 558.8 Nawinal Size mm 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1 050 1100 Outside Dia mm 609.6 660.4 711.2 762.0 8 12.8 863.6 914.4 965.2 1 016.0 1 066.8 1 117.6 209
6.2 Thickness - f 10 percent for ERW pipes and + 15 and - 10 percent for EFW pipe. 6.3 Straightness cent of total length. Maximum deviation of 0.2 per-
7. Hydraulic Pressure Test pressure shall not exceed 5 MPa.
Maximum
test
8. Condition of Supply - Unless otherwise agreed to mutually, the pipe shall be supplied without any protective coating. 9. Mechanical Tests
9.1 Tensile Test - The tensile strength and percentage elongation of pipes shall not be less than the.
SP : 21-1983
following
values:
9.2 Percentage Elongation

on 5.65flo
Steel Grade 320 410
Tensile Strength
MPa
Flattening Test (for EI?W Pipes) - No opening shall occur by fracture in the weld and no cracks or bmaks on the metal. 9.3 Guided Bend Test (for EFW Pipes) Specimen
320 410
20 18
area of specimen.
with
shall not fracture completely.
So is original cross-sectional
Note - Tensile test shall be carried out in accordance procedure given in IS : 1894-1972*. *Methods for tensile testing of steel tubes (firer revision).
10.
Workmanship - Pipes shall be clearly finished and be free from defects, such as cracks, surface flame, laminations, etc. Repair of defects shall be permissible in weld seam of EFW pipes.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3589-1981 Specification for electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (150 to 2 000 mm nominal size) (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3989-1970 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST (SPUN) IRON SPIGOT AND SOCKET SOIL, WASTE AND VENTILATING PIPES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes together with the details of fittings and accessories. These pipes and fittings are suitable for use above ground only.
2.
3.3
Equal and Unequal Branches (SinglelDouble) With and Without Access Door Nominal Dia 50 75
100 1501 Off-Sets Nominal Dia 50 75 100 1 150 3.5
Angles of Bend 92Yz9 112% and 135
Requirements
3.4
2.1
Pipes and fittings shall be such that they may be cut, drilled or machined.
2.2 Shall emit aclear ringing sound when struck with a light hand hammer. 3.
Off-set
Dimensions (in mm) Socket and Spigot Pipes

Nominal dia Barrel dia (external) Internal dia 50, 75, 100, 150 57, 83, 109, 161 73, 99, 126, 179
75, 115 and 150
3.1
Taper Nominal Dia

/ Spigot 75 100 100 150 Socket 5 75 100 50, 75, 100 and 150 \
3.2
Bends With and Without Access Doors Nominal Dia Angles of Bend
92lh , 112% and 135 15oJ 210
3.6
Collars (Double Socket)

Nominal dia -
SP : 21-1983
3.7
C.I.)
Connectors (C.Z. to Stoneware andStoneware Nominal dia 100 and 150. (Stopper)
to
3.15
Traps with Vent Nominal Dia / 100 50 95, 135 and 180 Angle of Bend at rhe End
3.8
Connectors
-Plug
Nominal dia 3.9
50, 75, 100 and 150. 3.16 Angle of Bend 92?4, 11244 and 135 3.17
Larger Radius Bends Nominal Dia 751 1001 150
Floor Trap (Nahni) Nominal dia 50 and 75.
Shoe Bends and Cowls Nominal dia Note -
50, 75, 100 and 150.
3.10
Equal and Unequal Single Parallel Branches Nominal Dia w 100 100 100 50 4.
For detailed dimensions and sketches refer to the stun-
dard.
Tderances
External dia of barrel f 3 mm for 50 and 75 mm pipes * 3.5 mm for 100 mm pipes f 4.0 mm for 150 mm pipes Internal dia of socket+3 mm.
3.11
Equal and Unequal Inverted Branches Socket Nominal Dia I 50 100 100 Traps Nomind 50 75 100 Dia 50 95 f 112% and 180 50> 100 Angle of Bend at the End Angle of Bend
Type
Note -
For rubber joints minus tolerance shall be zero
5.
Weight -
3.12
Specific weightofcast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/dm3. Tolerance on weight: - 10 percent.
99,
135 and 180
3.13
1501 Access Door and Straight Inspection Piece Nominal dia 50,75, 100 and 150.
6. Test (If Required by Purchaser) - Shall withstand hydrostatic pressure of 0.7 kgf/cm2 maintained for 15 seconds without showing signs of leakage, sweating or other defects.
7.
3.14
Floor Trap Nominal dia 50, 75 and 100.
Cuating - Where coating material has tar or similar base, it shall be smooth, tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77C but not so brittle at 0C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3989-1970 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (first revision).
211
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4984-1978 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPES FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES, SEWAGE AND INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENTS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for high density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies, sewage and indusirial effluents. 2. Classification - Classified by pressure ratings (working pressures) at 27C as follows: Class of Pipe Class Class Class Class Class 1 2 3 4 5 Working Pressure 0.2 MPa 0.25 MPa 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1 MPa Outside Dia 32 40 50 63 75 90 110 125
140
Tolerance on Outside Dia + + + + + + + + 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.2 + 1.3
Outside Dia 200 225 250 280 315 355 400 450 500
Tolerance on Outside Dia + + + + + + + + + 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.6 2.9 3.2 3.6 4.1 4.5
of pipes,
Note - The above pipes are recommended for water temperature ranging from -40 to +4-W. The creep mpNre strength of the pipe diminishes with the increase in temperature above 27C and the working pressure should be modified as given in Fig. 1 of the
standard.
Note - For wall thickness of different classification see Table 1 of the standard.
4. Physical Characteristics - Pipes shall possess smooth internal and external surfaces corresponding to the manufacturing method. 5. Performance Requirements
3.
Dimensions Outside Dia 20 25
(in mm) Tolerance on Outside Dia + 0.3 + 0.3 Outside Dia 160 180 Tolerame on Oulside Dia + 1.5 + 1.7 5.1 Intern& Pressure Creep Rupture Test - Shall show no sign of localized swelling, leakage or weeping and shall not burst. 5.2 Reversion Test - Dimension; shall not change by more than 3 percent in the longitudinal direction.
Note-
For test procedures,
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4984-1978 Specification potable water supplies, sewage and industrial effluents (second
for high density revision).
polyethylene
pipes for
SUMMARY
OF
IS, : 4985-1981 UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
(First Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for plain end as well as socket end pipes made of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride for potable water supplies. No. 1) ratings (working pressures) at 27C as follows: Working Pressure Class of Pipe 0.25 MPa Class 1 0.4 MPa Class 2 0.6 MPa Class 3 1.0 MPa Class 4 212
2.
Classification
Shall be classified by pressure
SP : 21-1983
Note - The above pipes are recommended for water temperature ranging from 1 to +4YC. The recommended maximum safe working stress for these pipes is 10 MPa at 2@C. At higher temperature up to 45% the strength of the pipe reduces and the working pressure shall be modified in accordance with Fig. 1 of
the standard.
4.2 Opacity - Wall of socket portion and plain pipe shall not transmit more than 0.2 percent of visible light falling on them. 4.3 Effect on Water - Pipes shall not have any detrimental effect on composition of water flowing through them. When tested, quantities of various toxic substances extracted from internal walls of pipes shall not exceed the following concentrations in test solution: Lead (first extraction) 1 .O mg/litre Lead (third extraction) 0.3 mg/litre Dialkyl tin 0 and higher homologues measured as tin (third extraction) 0.02 mg/litre Other toxic substances (third extraction 0.01 mg/litre Note - 1.Omg/litre would mean 1 .O part per million by mass. 4.4 Reversion Test - A length of pipe of approximately 300 mm shall not alter in length by more than 5 percent. 4.5 Stress Relief Test - To be carried out for bell end pipes only. Test specimen shall not show blisters, excessive delamination or cracking or signs of weld line splitting. 4.6 Resistance to Sulphuric Acid - Mass of specimen shall neither increase by more than 0.32 g nor decrease by more than 0.013 g. 5. Mechanical Properties
3. 3.1
Dimensions Plain Pipes and Socket End/Bell End Pipes Nominal Outside Dia mm 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90 110 125 140 160 180 200 225 250 280 315 Mean Outside Dia, Max mm 16.3 20.3 25.3 32.3 40.3 50.3 63.3 15.3 90.3 110.4 125.4 140.5 160.5 180.6 200.6 225.7 250.8 280.9 316.0 Socket Length, L Min mm 14 16 19 22 26 31 38 44 51 61 69 76 86 % 106 119 131 146 164
3.2 Plain End Pipes for Plumbing Work - These shall be available in mean outside dia of 20,25,32,40 and 50 mm.
Note - For detailed dimensions including wall thickness of all types of pipes and tolerances, refer to 5 of rhe standard.
5.1 Hydrostatic Characteristics - When subjected to internal hydrostatic pressure test, the pipes shall not burst during the prescribed test duration. 5.2 Impact Strength at 0C - Pipe samples should meet the requirements given in Appendix K of the standard. 6. Supply of Pipes - Pipes shall be supplied in straight lengths of 4,5 and 6 m with a tolerance of + 10 and - 0 mm. It may be in other lengths as mutually agreed to.
of pipes and for methods of various tests, refer to Appendices
4.
Physcial and Chemical
Characteristics
4.1 Visual Appearance - Internal and external surfaces of pipe shall be smooth and clean, free from groovings and other defects. End shall be cleanly cut and be square with axis of pipe.
Note - For method of measurements A to J of the standard. of outside dia and wall thickness
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4985-1981 water supplies (first revision).
Specification
for unplasticized
PVC pipes for potable
213
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 5504-1969 SPIRAL WELDED

1. Scope - Requirements for spiral welded pipes suitable for use for conveying gas, water and oil. The suitability of pipe for various purposes is somewhat dependent upon its dimensions, properties and conditions of service, so that the purpose for which the pipe Outside Dia, mm Wall Thickness, mm 3.18 to 17.12 3.% to 15.88 3.18 to 15.88 4.78 l&8 4.78 to 20.62 4.78 to 19.05 5.56 1955 406.4 5.56 l&5 5.56 to 19.05 5.56 to 19.05 6.35 to 19.05 6.35 to 15.88 6.35 to 15.88
PIPES
is intended should be stated in the order. 2. Grades YSt 37. 3. Dimensions Standard Test Pressure, kgf/cm*, Min A YSt 21 70 to 176 70 I?6 49 176 56 176 46 176 39 1:8 39 to 134 35 12O 32 ltG 28 to 98 28 to 77 23 to 56 19 to 49 Yst 25 84 to 176 84 to 176 56 176 63 to 176 53 1?6 42 to 176 46 to 155 42 to 141 35 1;7 32 to 112 32 to 91 26 to 65 23 to 58 Yst 30 99 271 100 to 211 84 2:1 97 2L 88 2:1 75 271 79 2?l 76 2?1 61 2& 58 1:3 56 to 162 48 to 119 42 to 104 YSt 32 10s to 211 109 271 92 2?1 106 2PI 96 to 211 82 2L 86 to 211 69 to 211 67 2:1 64 to 193 61 to 162 52 to 130 46 to 114 YSt 37 122 2:1 123 2:1 104 2:1 120 2?1 109 2:1 92 271 98 2?1 86 2:1 75 2E 72 to 193 69 1:2 59 l?l 52 1;9 YSt 21, YSt 25, YSt 30, YSt 32 and
114.3
141.3
168.3
219.1
273.0
323
355.6
457.2
508.0
609.6
711.2
812.8
214
SP : 21-1983
Outside Dia, mm
Wall Thickness, mm 6.35 to 15.88 9.52 12.70 15.88
/ YSt 21 18 to 44 25 32 40
Standard Test Pressure, h Yst 25 21 to 51 28 37 46 YSt 30 37 to 93 50 67 84
kgflcm2, Min & YSt 32 41 El 55 73 91 Yst 37 46 to 115 62 82 103
914.4
1016,O
Noti - For details regarding weight and alternative test pressure see Table 1 of the standard.
making a jointer shall be less than 1.50 m. Skelp end welds shall be at least 0.3 m from the jointer weld.
Note -
4.
Tolerances a) Outside diameter b) Wall thickness For pipe sizes 457.2 mm and smaller For pipe sizes 508.0 mm and larger c) Length: Length Shortest Length + 1 percent 7. +15 percent - 12.5 +15 percent -10 3 Minimum Average Length in Shipment 5.50 m 11.0 m -
Forrequirements of welded jointerssee Appendix B of
the standard.
Physical Tests Tensile Properties Yield Strength Min kgf/mm2 Tensile Strength kgf/mm2 Elongation in 50.80 mm on Wall Zhickness 7.92 mm and Larger Percent 35 30 25 23. 22
for other wall
7.1
Grade of Pipe
Single random lengths Double random lengths As agreed to lengths -in excess of 6.1 m
2.75 m 4.30 m 40 percent of average agreed to
Yst YSt Yst YSt Yst
21 25 30 32 37
21.1 24.6 29.5 32.3 36.6
33.7 42.2 42.2 44.3 46.4*
Note - For details regarding elongation thicknesses see Table 3 of the standard.
5. Workmanship - Pipe ends shall be bevelled to an angle of 30 (+ 5 and -0) from a line drawn perpendicular to axis of pipe and with a root face of 1.60 + 0.8 mm. Both ends of submerged arc welded pipes shall have the inside weld reinforcement removed for a distance of approximately 100 mm from the end of the pipe. 6. Jainters - Jointers may be furnished to a maximum of 5 percent of order, but no lengths used in
Note-For test procedures, and 9 of the standard. refer to IS
7.2 Flattening scribed test.
Test -
Shall
withstand
the preShall with3 of
7.3 Submerged -Arc Weld Tests stand the prescribed test. 7.4 Hydrostatic this summary. Tests -
For test pressuressee
*For grade YSt 37 pipe in sizes 508 mm larger, with wall thicknesses 9.52 and smaller, the minimum tensile strength shall be 50.61 kgf/mm2. tensile testing of steel products
~_____
: 1608-1960 Method-of
~__
other than sheet, strip, wire and tube
For detailed ~__
information,
refer to IS : 5504-1969 --___
Specification
for spiral welded pipes. ____
215
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 5531 (PARTS I TO III)-1977 CAST IRON SPECIALS FOR ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(First Revision)
PART I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of engagement end of a fitting shall match outside diameter of asbestos-cement pressure pipe conforming to IS : 1592 - 1970*. Engagement length shall not be less than 75 mm. 5. Tolerances on Dimensions + 1.5 - 1.0 mm +15 -1Omm - (2.00 mm + 0.05 e) f (3.00 mm + 0.05 b) 1. Scope - General requirements for cast iron specials to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage. This standard (Part I) is applicable to cast iron specials for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes suitable for connection with cast iron detachable joints or asbestos cement couplings.
Note - Metric system has been adopted in India and all quantities and dimensions appearing in this standard have heen given in this system. However, it may be noted that the designation is based on the international practice of including nominal inch sizes of pipe threads at the outlets.
Machined outside dia Length and height Wall thickness Flange thickness
2.
Mechanical
Tests
2.1 Tensile Test - Minimum tensile strength 150 Nlmrr&( 15 kgf/mm2). Refer Appendix A of the stundurd for method of test. 2.2 Brine11 Hardness Test - Hardness of external unmachincd surface shall not exceed 215 HB. 3. Hydrostatic Test - Shall withstand (without showing leakage, sweating or other defects) the test pressure (maintained for at least 15 seconds) specified in Table 1 of IS : 1592- 1970* for the class of asbestos-cement pressure pipes with which they are to be used. 4. Dimensions -As specified in Parts II and III. The nominal diameter of a special corresponds to the internal diameter or bore of the pipe. Outside diameter
*Specification for asbestos-cement pressure pipes yirsr revision).
where, e = standard thickness of wall in mm, and b = standard thickness of flange in mm. 6. Mass - Density is taken as 7.15 kg/dm3. Tolerance on mass f 8 percent (In case of bends, fittings with more than one branch and non-standard fittings it shall be f 12 percent). Fittings of heavier mass may be accepted if they comply with all other requirements. 7. Coating - Where coating material has a tar or similar base, it shall be smooth, tenacious and hard enough not to flow at temperature upto 77C and not so brittle as to chip off (when scribed lightly with a pen knife) at temperature of 0C. When fittings are used for conveying potable water, coating shall not contain any constituent soluble in such water or any ingredient which will impart any taste or odour to potable water after sterilisation and washing of the mains.
PART II
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CAST IRON*PLAIN-END REDUCERS AND CROSSES 2.2

Dimensions (in mm)
BENDS, PLUGS,
1. Scope - Requirements for dimensions and mass of the cast iron plain-end bends, plugs, reducers and crosses for use with asbestos-cement pressure pipes. 2. Requirements
2.2.1 Nominal Dia Thickness
Cast iron plain-end
bends
80 8.6
100 9
125 9.5
150 10
200 11
250 12
300 13
2.1 General requirements for material, mechanical tests, hydrostatic test, tolerances, coating and marking shall be as given in Part I. 216
Bend Angles
90, 45 and 2230
SP : 21-1983
2.2.2 Nominal Dia Overall Length 2.2.3
Cast iron plain-end plugs 80 125 100 130 125 135 150 140 200 150 250 155 300 160
2.2.4
Cast iron plain-end Nominal Dia Overall Length Thickness
crosses
80 100 125 150 200 250 300 180 200 225 250 300 350 400 8.6 9 9.5 10 11 12 13
Cast iron plain-end Nominal Dia 100 125 150 200 250 300
reducers Inside Dia at Small End

80
80, 100 80, 100 00, 125, 150 25, 150, 200 50, 200, 250 = 400 mm
Overall length of reducer

Note-For
details regarding mass of cast iron specials for class 5, 10 and 15 see Tables 1 to 4 of Part II of the standard.
PART Ill
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CAST IRON PLAIN-END FLANGED SPIGOTS, TEESITs) AND WYES(Ysl 2.2.2 Nominal Dia 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 2.2.3 Cast iron plain-end tees Length of Tee
1. Scope -Requirements for dimensions and mass of the cast iron plain-end flanged spigots, tees and wyes for, use with asbestos-cement pressure pipes. 2. Requirements
Inside Dia at Reducer End, in Branch Line 80 80, 80, 80, 80, 80, 80, 100 100, 100, 100, 100, 100,
2.1 General requirements for material, mechanical tests, hydrostatic test, tolerances, coating and marking shall be as given in Part I. 2.2 Dimensions (in mm) spigots Overall Length 200 200 200 200 200 300 300
2.2.1 Nominal Dia 80 100 125 150 200 250 300
Cast iron plain-end flanged Dia of Flange 200 220 250 285 340 395 445
125 125, 125, 125, 125,
150 150, 150, 150,
360 400 450 500 200 600 200, 250 700 200, 250, 300 800 wyes
Flange H&s Thick- ,------*-. ness Number Dia. 21 22 22.5 23 24.5 26 27.5 4 8 8 8 8 12 12 19 19 19 23 23 23 23
Cast iron plain-end
Nominal Dia Inside Dia at Branch End 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 80 80, 80, 80, 80, 80, 80, 100 100, 100, 100, 100, 100,
125 125, 125, 125, 125,
150 150, 200 150, 200, 250 150, 200, 250, 300
Note-For
details regarding mass ofcast iron specials for class 5, lO#and 15, see Tables 1 to 3 of Part 111of the standard.
..~
For detailed
information, I_._______-
refer to IS : 5531 (Parts I io III)-I977
SpecificatioFfor
cast iron specials for
asbestos-cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision).
217
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6163-1978 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST (SPUN) IRON LOW PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(First Revision)
1. Scope
Nominal Dia External Dia of Barrel , Socket /r
1.1 Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes, known as LP pipes, for conveyance of water, gas and sewage, manufactured in metal or sand moulds. I.2 This standard is applicable to cast iron pipes having spigots and sockets as specified in this standard, and also to pipes with other types of joints particularly rubber joints. In case of rubber joints the inner profile of the socket end of the pipe shall depend on the type of rubber joint ensuring that the overall dimensions are maintained for reasons of safety and interchangeability. 2. 2.1 Mechanical Tests
80
98 118 144 170 222 274 326 378 429 480 532 635 738 790
Barrel /\
100 125 150

200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750
Internal Dia 116 137 163 189 241 294 346 398 449 501 553 657 760 813
Pressure Pipes \
Depth 84 88 91 94 100 103 105 107 110 112 115 120 122 123 Class Lp
Ring Test (for Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds)
Up to and including 300 mm nominal dia

2.2 Tensile Test 2.2.1
Modulus of Rupture 40 kgf/mn? , Min
5.2
Socket andSpigotLow Nominal Dia
Mass Approx kglm
Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds Nominal Dia Tensile Strength, Min 80
Over 300 mm and up to 600 mm Over 600 mm 2.2.2
20 kgf/mm2 18 kgf/mm2
Pipes Cast in Sand Moulds
Tensile strength (all diameters)
18 kgf/mm2, Min
3. Brine11 Hardness Test - Hardness of external unmachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB. 4. Hydrostatic Test - Shall withstand test pressure of 17.5 kgf/cm2 without showing leakage, sweating or other defects, when kept under pressure for 15 seconds. All pipes shall withstand a test pressure of 6 kgf/cm* after installation. 6. 5. 5.1
Joint)
100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750
External Dia 98 118 144 170 222 274 329 378 429 480 532 635 738 790
Thickness 4.9 5.1 5.4 5.7 6.5 7.0 7.6 8.8 9.4 10.0 11.4 12.6 14.0 14.6 10.25 12.94 16.82 21.04 31.48 42.00 54.27 72.20 87.70 105.70 132.20 175.80 226.60 253.40
Working length : 3.66, 4, 4.88 and 5.5 m. Tolerances a) External diameter of +(4.5+0.0015 DN) mm b) Internal diameter of + (3+0.001 DN) mm
Sizes (in mm)

Sockets and Spigots of Low Pressure Pipes (Lead
barrel: socket:
+ /2f = +
%f=
218
SP : 21-1983
c>Depth
of socket Nominal dia up to 600 mm : f 5 mm Nominal dia over 600 mm : + 10 mm
7. Mass 7.15 kg/dm3. Tolerance
Density
of cast
iron
is taken
as
f 5 percent.
4 Length : * 25 mm
4 Wall thickness : -(l
+ 0.05 e) mm
f) Maximum deviation from straight line (in mm)

shall not be greater than 1.25 times the length of pipe in metres. where f is caulking space of joint in mm 0.003 DN DN = Nominal dia in mm e = Wall thickness in mm
Note-For
standard.
9 +
Coating -Where coating material has tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow at temperature of 77C and not so brittle as to chip off at 0C when scribed lightly with a penknife. When pipes are used for conveying potable water, inside coating shall not contain any constituent soluble in such water or any ingredient which could impart any taste or odour to the potable water after sterilization and washing of the mains.
8.
methods of test, refer to IS : 1789-1961 Method for Brine11hardness test for grey cast iron and Apbendix A of rhe
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6163-1978 Specification for centrifugally pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
cast (spun) iron low
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6418-1971 CAST IRON AND MALLEABLE CAST IRON FLANGES FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
Scope - Covers grey cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering purposes, which shall be applicable from 0 to 300C for oil, water, steam, compressed air, gases and other noncorrosive fluids. Nominal Pressure
N/mm2 0.25 0.60
1.
1.1 Type of gasket and gasket materials are not covered in thestandard and shall be subject to agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
2.
Pressure and Temperature Rating
Type of Material
Cast Iron IS : 210 Gr 15 20 15 20 15 20 20 25 Mall&able% Cast Iron IS : 2107GrB IS : 2108GrC IS : 2107GrB IS : 2108GrC IS : 2107GrB IS : 2108GrC - 10 to 120 0.25 0.25 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 1.0 1.0 1.60 1.60 1.60 2.50 2.50 2.50
Design Pressure (Nlmm2) at Temperature C fl

150 180 200 220 250 260 3m
_ 0.23 0.56 0.58 0.58 _ 0.92 1.48 1.56 1.56 2.30 2.42 2.42
_ 0.20 _ 0.52 0.56 0.56 0.85 1.39 1.52 1.52 2.12 2.35 2.35
_ 0.20 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.80 1.30 1.50 1.50 2.00 2.36 2.30
_ 0.20 _ 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.80 1.30 1.40 1.49 1.80 2.20 2.20
_ 0.18 0.45 0.50 0.50 0.70 1.10 1.40 1.40 1.80 2.10 2.10
_ 0.17 _ 0.43 0.50 0.50 0.68 1.08 1.38 1.38 1.75 2.08 2.08
_ 0.15 _ 0.36 0.50 0.50 0.60 1.00 1.30 1.30 1.60 2.00 2.00
1.0 1.6
2.5
219
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - For grey cast iron flanges, the pressure and temperature rating shall be reduced by 25 Percent, where moderate shock (as may occur in efficient boiler feed main) is likely to be present. Note 2 interpolation. Intermediate 1 N/mmz= values may be obtained 0.012 kg/mm*. by linear
Table 10
2.5/l Integral grey cast iron flanges Nominal pressure : 2.5 N/mm* 10 to 500 mm Nominal size : 2.5/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges Nominal pressure : 2.5 N/mm* 10 to 150 mm Nominal size : 2.513 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges Nominal pressure : 2.5 N/mm* 6 to 150 mm Nominal size :
Table 11
3. Designation - By nominal size and flange table reference. First part of the table reference is nominal pressure and the second part indicates the material and type of flange as follows: a) Grey cast iron - integral (1) b) Malleable c&t iron - integral (2) c) Malleable cast iron - screwed boss (3) Table 2 0.25/l Integral grey cast iron flanges Nominal pressure : 0.25 N/mm* 10to40OOmm Nominal size: 0.6/l Integral grey cast iron flanges Nominal pressure : 0.6 N/mm* 10 to 3 600 mm Nominal, size : 0.6/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges Nominal pressure : 0.6 N/mm* 10 to 150 mm _ Nominal size : 0.613 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges Nominal pressure : 0.6 N/mm* 6 to 150mm Nominal size : 1.0/l Integral grey cast iron flanges Nominal pressure : 1 .O N/mm* 200 to 3 000 mm Nominal size: 1.6/l Integral grey cast iron flanges Nominal pressure : 1.6 N/mm* 10to10OOmm Nominal size : 1.6/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges Nominal pressure : 1.0 and 1.6 N/mm* 10 to 150 mm Nominal size :
Table 12
Note 1 - Nominal sizes are 6,8, 10, 15,20,25,32,40,50, 65,80, 100, 125, 150,200,250, 300,350,400,500,600,700, 800,900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800,2000,2200, 2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3600, 3 800 and 4000mm.
Table 3
Note 2 - For typical illustration of Integral Flange and Screwed Boss Flange see Figures 1 and 2 of the standard.
Note 3 standard.
see Tables 2 to 12 of the
Table 4
4. Thread of Screwed Flanges - Flanges up to 600 mm shall be threaded in accordance with IS : 3333 (Part I)-1967*. 5.
a)
Table 5,
Flange Facing
Smooth -
With no visible tool marks, or
Table 6
b) Serrated - With a continuous spiral groove of 1.5 mm pitch and approximately 0.25 mm deep. 6. General 6.1 Flange surfaces shall befreefromcasting defects and segregations. surface
Table 7
Table 8
6.2 It is recommended to use stud bolts with nuts on both sides for nominal pressures above 15 kgf/cm*. 7. Hydraulic Test - Test pressure applied to the joint shall not exceed 1.5 times the nominal pressure for flanges. --
Table 9
1.6/3 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges Nominal pressure : 1 .O and 1.6 N/mm* *Dimensions for petrolium industry pipe threads: Part I Line pipe threads. 6 to 150 mm Nominal size : _ ._.~ .~~.._ -_._... -. ____ __. For detailed information, refer to IS : 6418-1971 Specification for cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges
for general engineering purposes.
220
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7181-1974 HORIZONTALLY CAST IRON DOUBLE FLANGED PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(With Amendments 1. Scope -Requirements for double flanged cast iron pipes for pressure main lines of water, gas and sewage manufactured by horizontal castings in sand moulds . 2. Manufaiztpre -Metal quality not leas than Grade 15. F!$pes shall be such that they could be cut, drilled or &adhined. Hardness of external unmachined surface not greater than 2 10 HB . 3. Mechanical Tests -Tensile than 15 kgf/mm2. strength not less No. 1 and 2)
Flange Dia Flange Thickness
200 21
220 22
250 22.5
285 23
340 24.5
395 445 26 27.5
5.3 Standard Flange Drilling of Flanged Pipes and Fittings Nominal Dia Holes { 6. Number Dia 80100125150200250300 4 19 8 19 8 8 19 23 8 12 12 23 23 23
Tolerances On external diameter of barrel On flange thickness
4. Hydraulic Tests - Shall withstand, without showing leakage or sweating, a test pressure of 25 kgf/cm2, when kept under pressure for 15 seconds and struck moderately with a 700 g hammer. 5. 5.1 Sizes (in mm)
+3 -4.5 mm + (2 + 0.05 b) mm
where b is thickness of flange in mm. On length + 10 mm. Maximum deviation from straight c 1.25 times the length in metres. line, in mm
Double Flanged Pipes Nominal Dia Barrel Dia (External)

r Class A 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 Working 98 118 144 17.3 22.0 28.7 35.9 170 52.1 222 70.6 274 91.4 326 length = 2 to 3 m
Weight Per Metre Vpprox) , kgf

A \ Class B 19.8 25.4 33.1 41.6 60.1 81.8 106.1
7. Weight - density of cast iron is 7.15 kg/dm3. Tolerance f 5 percent. 7.1 Pipes of heavier mass shall be accepted if they comply other requirements of the standard.
8.
Coating
8.1 Where coating material has tar or similar base, it shall be hard enough not to flow at 77C but not so brittle at 0C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife. 8.2 When pipes convey potable water inside coating shall not contain any constituent soluble in such water or any ingredient which could impart any taste or odour to potable water after sterilization and suitable washing of mains.
5.2
Flanges of Pipes ana Fittings 100 125 150 200 250 300
Nominal Dia 80
Note 1 -For
Note
detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to the standard.
2-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1789-1961Method of Brine11hardness test for grey cast iron; and IS : 2078-1962 Method for tensile testing of grey cast iron.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7181-1974 Specification for horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for water, gas and sewage.
221
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7834 (PART I)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC SOCKET FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR WATER SUPPLIES
PART I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (With Amendment 1. Scope : General requirements regarding materials, manufacture, methods of test, inspection and marking of all types of injection moulded PVC socket fittings intended for connection, by using solvent cement, to PVC pipes covered by IS : 4985-1981*. 2. Materials - Polyvinyl chloride, and such additives as are needed for manufacture of sound pipe with good finish and without constituting a toxic hazard. 3. Size of Fitting - Designated by diameters of their sockets. Inside diameters of the sockets of the fittings shall correspond to outside diameters of pipes given in IS : 4985-1981*. 4. Thickness Not less than 3 mm. At Mid-Point of 6. No. 1) Nominal Size Socket Length Min 51 61 69 76 86 Mean So&et Internal Dia at Mid-Point I-~-, D, Min 90.1 110.1 125.1 140.1 160.2 D, Max 90.3 110.4 125.4 140.5 160.5
90 110 125 140 160
5.2 out-4 Roundness Tolerances of Socket Inside Diameter - Maximum tolerance (maximum dia minus minimum dia) shall be: a) b) less than or equal to 0.007 D, or equal to 0.2 mm (if 0.007 D is less than 0.2 mm) Requirements
5. Socket Length and Diameter Socket Length
Tests and Performance
5.1 Minimum socket length (L) of any fitting shall be = 0.5 D + 6 mm (subject to a minimum of 12 mm) where D = nominal inside diameter of fitting. Socket dimensions Nominal Size Socket Length Min 14 16 19 22 26 31 38 44 shall be as given below: Mean Socket Internal Dia at Mid-Point ,-A-l D, Min 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 16.1 20.1 25.1 32.1 40.1 50.1 63.1 75.1
PVC
6.1 Stress Relief Test - Shall not show blisters, excessive delamination or cracking, or weldline splitting. 6.2 Opacity - Wall of fitting shall hot transmit more than 0.2 percent of visible light falling on it. 6.3 Effect on Water - Shall not have any detrimental effect on composition of water flowing through them. Toxic substances extracted by water from internal walls of fitting shall not exceed the following: Lead (first extraction) Lead (third extraction) Dialkyl tin Cz and higher homologues measured as tin (third extraction) Other toxic substances (third extraction) 1.0 mg/l 0.3 mg/l 0.02 mg/l
D, Max 16.3 20.3 25.3 32.3 40.3 50.3 63.3 75.3 pipes for potable water
0.01 mg/l
*Specification for unplasticized supplies flrsr revision).
6.4 Short Term Hydraulic Test - Fitting shall withstand a pressure of 4.2+0.2 times the working -0 pressure for one hour without failure.
Note-
For test procedures
see Appendices
A to D of the sumfurd.
&or detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part I General requirements.
222
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7834 (PART II)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC SOCKET FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR WATER SUPPLIES
PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 45 elbows made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements FOR 45O ELBOWS
Size
mm 63 75 90 110 125 140 160
Note standard.
Laying Length
mm 14 16.5 19.5 23.5 27 30 34
Tolerance
mm +3.2 -1 +4 -1 +5 -1 +6 -1 +6 -1 +7 -1 +8 -1
2.1 Laying length and tolerance thereon shall be as follows :
Size
mm 16 20
Laying Length
mm 4.5 5
Tolerance
mm -tl +1 +1.2 -1 +1.6 -1 +2 -1 +2.5 -1
32
7.5 9.5 11.5
For typical illustration of a 45 elbow see Fig. 1 of the
2.2
Inside diameter of socket and socket length shall comply with those given in IS : 7834 (Part I)- 1975.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvenr cement joints for \\ater supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part II)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part II Specific requirements for 4.5 elbows.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7834 (PART III)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC SOCKET FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR WATER SUPPLIES
PART Ill SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolrances and marking for 90 elbows made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 32 40 50
63
FOR 90
ELBOWS
Size
mm 25
Laying Length
mm 13.5 17 21 26
32.5
Tolerance
mm +1.2 -1 +1.6 -1 i-2 -1 +2.5 -1 +3.2 -1
2.1 Laying length and tolerance thereon shall be as follows:
Size
mm 16 20
Laring Length
mm 9 11
Tolerance
mm fl +1 223
SP : 21-1983
Size
mm
Laying Length
mm
Tolerance
mm
Size
mm
Laying Length
mm
Tolerance
mm +7 -1 +8 -1
+4
-1 i-5 -1 +6 -1 +6 -1
56 63.5
Note standard.
For typical illustration of a 90
elbowsee Fig.
1 of zhe
2.2 Inside diameter of socket and socket length shall comply with those given in IS : 7834 (Part I)- 1975.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part III)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part III Specific requirements for 90 elbows.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7834 (PART IV)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC SOCKET FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR WATER SUPPLIES
PART IV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope --. Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 90 tee made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements FOR 90 TEES
Size
mm 63 75 90 110 125
Laying Length
mm 32.5 38.5 46 56 63.5
Tolerance
mm +3.2 -1 +4 -1 +5 -1 +6 -1 +6 -1 +7 -1 +8 -1
2.1 Laying length and tolerance thereon shall be as follows:
Size
mm 16 20 25 32 40 50 ___~__
Laying Length
mm 9 11 13.5 17 21 26
Tolerance
mm +1 fl +1.2 -1 +1.6 -1 +2 -1 +2.5 -1
140 160
Note standard.
71 81
For typical illustration of a 90 tee see Fig. 1 of rhe
2.2 Inside diameter of socket and socket length shall comply with those given in IS : 7834 (Part I) - 1975.
_______-_______-_--Note-For general rcqbirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 Specification for iniection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for waler supplics:.Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part IV)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part IV Specific requirements for 90 tees. ____-____--_ __-___
224
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7834 (PART VI)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC SOCKET FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR WATER SUPPLIES
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for sockets made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies. FOR SOCKETS
Size
mm
Laying Length
mm
Tolerance
mm
+2
-1
2.
Requirements
+2
-1
2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows:
+3
-1
Size
mm 16 20
Laying Length
mm 3 3
Tolerance
mm +1 +1
6 8
+3
-1 +3 -1 +4 -1
of socket see Fig. 1 of rhe
25
+1.6
-1 +1.6 -1 +2 -1
Note srandarri For typical illustration
50
+2
-1
2.2 Inside diameter of socket and socket length, and the tolerance thereon shall comply with those given in IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975.
83
+2 -1
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part W-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part VI Specific requirements for sockets. -
226
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7834 (PART VII)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC SOCKET FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR WATER SUPPLIES
PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIONS
1.
Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for union made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies. Requirements
Size
mm 40
Laying Length
mm 15
Tolerance
mm +2 -1
2.
2.1
Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows:
+2.5 -1
Size
mm 16 20 25
Laying Length
mm 13.5 13.5 13.5
Tolerance
mm +1 +1 f1.2 -1 +1.6 -1
63
21
+6.2
-1
Note standard.
For typical
illustration
of union see Fig.
1 of the
32
13.5
2.2
Inside diameter of socket and socket length shall comply with those given in IS : 7834 (Part 11-1975.
Note-For Specification
general requirements for injection moulded
regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 7834 (Part O-1975 PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part VII)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part VII Specific requirements for unions.
227
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7834 (PART VIII)-1975 INJECTION MOULDED PVC SOCKET FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS FOR WATER SUPPLIES
PART VIII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for caps made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Diameter of the Socket of Cap Shall be as FOR CAPS
follows: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 75, 90, 110, 125, 140, or 160 mm Note - For typical illustration of cap see Fig. 1 of dre standard.
Note-For general requirements regarding for injection moulded PVC socket fittings
material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 7834 (Part I)-1975 Specification with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part VIII)-1975 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part VIII Specific requirements for caps.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8008 (PART I)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
PART I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - General requirements. for materials, manufacture. methods of test and inspection and marking of all types of injection mouldkd HDPE fittings intended for connection to HDPE pipes covered by IS : 4984-1978 for potable water supplies. 2. Composition - Shall be moulded from a compound consisting of virgin polyethylene in which carbon black and a suitable non-toxic anti-oxidant are evenly dispersed . 3. Sizes and Dimensions of Fittings - Sizes of fittings shall be designated by their outsidediameters at free ends, which shall correspond to outside diameters of pipes given in IS : 4984-1978.. Outside diameters and corresponding wall thicknesses of fittings at free
Note-For test procedures refer to 7.3.1 and 7.3.2 of IS : 4984-1978 water supplies, sewage and industrial effluents (secondrevision).
ends for weld shall comply with those given in Table 1 of IS : 4984-1978. 4. Weld Length - Weld lengths at free ends of 90 bend and 90 tee shall be as follows: 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90110 Size, mm Weld Length, mm 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 15 Tolerance on weld length +l mm 5. Performance Requirements
5.1 Hydraulic Characteristics - There shall be no signs of localised swelling, leakage or weeping. 5.2 Reversion Test - Dimensions shall not change by more than 3 percent in longitudinal direction.
Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for potable
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene .(HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
228
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8008 (PART II)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded 90 bends made of HDPE for potable water supplies. 2. Requirements FOR 90 Size mm 40 50 63 75 90 110
Note standard. For typical illustration
BENDS Bend Laying Length mm 60 & 2 70 f 2 80 + 2 90 + 2 110 + 2 140 f 3

of 90 bend see Fig. 1 of the
2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows: Size mm 20 25 32 Bend Laying Length mm 35 f 1 40 + 2 50 f 2
2.2 Outside diameters and wall thicknesses at ends for welding shall comply with the requirements given in IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings
methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976 Specification for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part II)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part II Specific requirements for 90 bends.
229
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8008 (PART III)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
PART III SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimenCons and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded 90 tees made of HDPE for potable water supplies. FOR 90 TEES
Size
mm
50
Tee Laying Length

mm 50 f 2 58.5 f 2 84 f 2 98.5 + 2 122.5 + 3
of 90 tee see Fig. 1 of the
63 75 90 110
Note srandcrrd.
2.
Requirements lengths and tolerances thereon
2.1 Overall laying shall be as follows:
Size
mm
Tee Laying Length

mm
For typical illustration
20 25
32 40
25 + 1 30 zk 1
37.5 + 1 45 + 2
2.2 Outside diameter and wall thickness at ends for welding shall be in accordance with IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976.
methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 8008(Part I)-1976 Specification for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part III)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part III Specific requirements for 90 tees.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8008 (PART IV)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
PART IV SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded reducers made of HDPE for potable water supplies. 2. Requirements diameters at either end shail be FOR REDUCERS
shall be as follows:
Size
mm 32 x 63 63 x 75 63 x 90 75 x 90 90 x 110 110 x 160 160 x 225 230
Overall Laying Length

mm 60+-2 70 + 2 80 4 2 80 + 2 100 + 2.5 140 + 3 200 f 3.5
Two different 2.1 concentric.
2.2
Overall laying length and the tolerance thereon
SP : 21-1983
Note standard.
For typical illustration of reducer see Fig. 1 of rhe
welding shall (Part I)-1976.
be in accordance
with IS : 8008
2.3
Outside diameter and wall thickness at ends for
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part IV)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part IV Specific requirements for reducers.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8008 (PART V)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
PART V SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded ferrule reducers made of HDPE for potable water supplies. 2. Requirements FOR FERRULE REDUCERS Size mm 110 x 63 160 x 63 225 x 63
the standard.
Overall Laying Length

mm 89.4 f 2 98.5 + 2 102.8 + 2.5
2.1 Overall laying lengths and the tolerances thereon shall be as follows: Size mm 32 x 63 90 x 63 Overall Laying Length mm 48 + 2 74.3 f 2
Note - For typical illustration of ferrule reducer see Fig. 1 of
2.2 Outside diameter and wall thickness of straight pipe portion at reducer and shall comply with the requirements given in IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 8008 (Part D-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part V)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part V Specific requirements for ferrule reducers.
231
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8008 (PART VI)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
PART VI SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS (With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded pipe ends made of HDPE for potable water supplies. FOR PIPE ENDS No. 1)
Size
mm 90 110 125 140 160 180 200 225
Length
mm 25k1.5 30 + 1.5 3p+ 1.5 3Ok1.5 35+1.5 35 f 1.5 50 + 1.5 .50 +_ 1.5
Flange Thickness Dia of Flange

mm 12 + 1 15 + 1 15 f 15 f 1 1 mm 125 IL 2 155 f 2 188 f 2 188 f2 215 f 2 240 + 2 240 f 2 270 f 2
2.
Dimensions and Tolerances - Overall dimensions and tolerances thereon shall be as follows:
Size lxlm
20 25 32 40 50 63 75
Length
mm 16 f 1.5 16 f 1.5 16f1.5 16k1.5 20 f 1.5 2Ok1.5 20 + 1.5
Flange Thickness
mm 5 + 0.5 5 + 5f 5 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1
Dia of Flange
mm 50 f 56 65 70 80 95 105 1 +- 1 IL 1 + 1 f 1.5 f 1.5 + 1.5
20 f 1.5 20 f 1.5 30 f 2 30 f 2
Note 1 standard.
For typical illustration of pipe end see Fig. 1 of the
Note 2 - Outside diameter and wall thickness of the end to be welded to pipe shall comply with the requirements given in IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976.
Note-For genrral requirements regarding material, mamifacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part VI)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part VI Specific requirements for pipe ends.
232
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8008 (PART VII)-1976 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
PART VII SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS (With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded sandwich flanges made of HDPE for potable water supplies. FOR SANDWICH No. 1) Size mm 110 125 140 160 180 200 225 2.1 Flange Thickness mm 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 Dia of Flange mm 216.0 255.0 255.0 279.5 305.0 305.0 336.0 Dia of Number of Hole Bolts mm 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 FLANGES
2.
Dimensions and Tolerances - Overall dimensions of sandwich flanges and tolerances thereon shall be as follows:
Size mm 20 25 32 40 50 Flange Thickness mm 20 20 20 20 20 Dia of Flange mm 95.5 101.5 114.5 120.5 133.5 Dia of Hole mm 14 14 14 14 14 Number oj Bolts 4 4 4 4 4
63 75 90
Note-For
20 20 20
152.5 165.0 184.5
14 18 18
4 8 8
Tolerances AZ1.5 mm on flange thickness. + 1.5 mm on flange diameter for sizes 20 to 110 mm. f 2 mm on flange diameter for sizes 125 to 225 mm. Note - For typical illustration of sandwich flange see Fig. 1
the standard.
of
general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS : 8008 (Part I)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8008 (Part VII)-1976 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part VII Specific requirements for sandwich flanges.
233
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8329-1977 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST (SPUN) DUCTILE IRON PRESSURE PIPES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pipes for pressure main lines for water, gas and sewage, manufactured in metal or sand moulds. This standard is applicable to all cast iron pipes having spigots, sockets or flanges as specified in this standard, and also to pipes with other types of joints particularly rubberjoints. In case of rubber joints the inner profile of socket end of the pipe shall depend on the type of rubber joint ensuring that the overall dimensions are maintained for reasons of safety and interchangeability. 2. Grades Grade 1 and Grade 2. No. 1) 5. Hydrostatic Test - All pipes shall withstand the following hydrostatic test pressures kept for a minimum of 15 seconds without showing any leakage, sweating or other defects:
Nominal Diu mm Grade I N/llUl? Grade 2
N/mm2 3.5 3.5 3.5
up to 300 350 to 600 700 to 1 000 6. 6.1 Sizes (in mm)
6.0 5.0 4.0
Sockets and Spigots and Pipes (Lead Joint) External Diu of Buriel Socket h
3. Manufacture - Pipes having screwed on flanges shall be sealed at threaded joint between pipe and flange by a sealing compound suitable for use with raw and potable water (up to 100C) , gas and normal domestic sewage.
Nominal Dia
Internal Dia 80 to 1 000 98 to 1 048 116 to 1 072
Depth 84 lY0
4. 4.1
Mechanical
Tensile Test Nominul Diu
Tests
Grade
0.2 Percent Tensile Proof Stress, Strength Min, Nlmm2 N/mm2
Percent Elongution,
6.2 Screwed Flanges of Pipes and Standard Flange Drilling of Flanged Pipes: -Nominal Dia Dia of Range 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 200 220 250 285 340 395 445 505 565 615 670 780 16 16 20 20 20
Min 10 5
1 2
All AlI
300 300
420 420
4.2 Flattening Test - Shall attain a minimum vertical deformation given below:
Nominal Diu Verticul Deformution Nominul Diu Vertical Deformation
Number 4 8 8 8 8 12 12 of Holes 6.3

Socket and Spigot Pipes Barrel A
mm
,-*-* Grade 2 Grade 1 mm mm

6 7 8
mm
,-*-, Grade 2 Grade 1 mm mm

40 50 67 83
Nominal Dia I
Mass per Metre ,
80
400 500
External Dia 80 to 1 000 6.4 Flanged Flunges 98 to 1 048
Thickness 6.0 1:5
kg 12.2 to 309.3
Cast with Screwed
100
125
150 200 250 300 350 4.3

brine11
-
10 13 17 21 30 35
10 16 19 25 31 50 60
600 700 800 900 1 000
75 88 100 113 125
150 175 200 225 250
Pipes Centrifugally
Hardness
(of Externul
Unmuchined
Sutjutce)
Shall not exceed 230 HB. 234
Nominal Dia External Dia of Barrel Mass per Metre, kg
80 100 125 150 200 250 300
98 118 144 170 222 274 326 14.1 17.7 22.5 28.0 39.7 52.8 67.3
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - Nominal diameters are 80, 100,125,150,200,250, 3C!0,350,400,450,500,600,700,750,800,900and1 OOOmm. Note 2 - Working lengths for socket and spigot pipes: 3.66, 4, 4.88, 5, 5.5 and 6 m.
6.5
Tolerances -
See 10 of the standard.
7. Mass - Density is taken as 7.15 kg/cm3. Tolerante on mass shall be t 5 percent. For detailed information, refer to IS : 8329-1977 pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
8. Coating - Where coating has a tar or similar base it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow at 77C but not so brittle at 0C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife. When pipes are used for conveying potable water, inside coating shall not contain any constituent soluble in such water or any ingredient which could impart any taste or odour to potable water after sterilization and washing of mains. Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 836G (PART I)-1977 FABRICATED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES
PART I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - General requirements for material, sizes, performance requirements, sampling and marking of all types of fabricated HDPE fittings intended for connection to HDPE pipes covered by IS : 49841978* for potable water supplies. 2. Material -Pipes used for the fabrication of HDPE fittings for potable water supplies shall conform to IS : 4984-1978*. 3. -. Sizes and Dimensions ____ _of Fittings Sizes
fittings shall be designated by their outside diameters at the free end, which shall correspond to outside diameters of pipes given in IS : 4984-1978*. Outside diameters and corresponding wall thicknesses of fittings at free ends for weld shall comply with those given in Table 1 of IS : 4984-1978*. 4. Performance Requirements
of
*Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies, sewage and industrial effluents (second revision).
4.1 Hydraulic Pro@ Test - Fitting duly plugged, when subjected to a hydraulic proof test of twice the recommended working pressure at ambient temperature and for a period of 1 hour shall not show any sign of localized swelling, leakage or creeping, and shall not burst. high density
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8360 (Part I)-1977 Specification for fabricated polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8360 (PART II)-1977 FABRICATED POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS WATER SUPPLIES

PART II SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances and marking for fabricated HDPE 90 tees for potable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows: Size Overall La?ing mm Length 20 25 32 40 50 63 5:: 80 80 90 94.5 + 5 k f 2 2 2 2 4 Si:e mm 7.5 90 110 125 140 160 Overall Lq\ing Length mm 112.5 + 4 135 165 181.5 210 240 + f + f i 4 4 4 6 6 Size mm i80 200 225 250 280
HIGH DENSITY FOR POTABLE

TEES Size mm 315 355 400 450 500 Overall Laying Length mm 472.5 + 8 532.5 f 10 600 k 10 675 t 10 750 rf: 10
FOR 90
Overall Laying Length mm 270 & 6 300 + 6 337.5 + 8 375 -e 8 420 k 8
Sote - For ypical illustration of 90 fabricated tee see Fig. 1

of
the standard.
62.5 f 2
2.2 Outside diameters and wall thicknesses of pipes out of which 90 tees are fabricated shall comply with those given in IS : 8360 (Part I)- 1977. Wall thickness of a fabricated 90 tee shall not be less than that of the pipe to which it is to be welded.
Sate-For general requirements regarding material, sizes, method of test and sampling refer lo IS : 8360 (Part I)-1977 Specification for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed polyethylene
information, refer to IS : 8360 (Part IQ-1977 Specification for fabricated high density (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part II Specific requirements for 90 tees.
SUMMAR\-
OF
IS : 8360 (PART III)-1977 FABRICATED POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS WATER SUPPLIES

PART III SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances and marking for fabricated HDPE 90 bends for potable water supplies. 2.
2.1
HIGH DENSITY FOR POTABLE

BENDS
FOR 90
follo\vs: Size mm 20
25
O~~erall LciTirlg L eugth mm 100 5 3 100 = 3 100 2 3
Si:e
O\,ei-cdlLqirig
mm
40 50
Length mm 100 + 3 10023 108 ? 5
Requirements La>-ing lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as 236
30
63
SP : 21-1983
Size mm 75 90 110 125 140 160 180 200
Overall Laying Length mm 128 f 5 154 + 5 188 + 5 213 f 5 239 f 8 273 f 8 307 2 8 341 + 8
Size mm 225 250 280 315 355 400 450 500
Overall Laying Length mm 384 + 10 427 f 10 478 AZ10 538 +_ 10 606 + 12 683 + 12 769 f 855 f 12 12
Note - For typical illustration of 90 fabricated bend see Fig. 1 of r/l<standard. 2.2 Outside diameters and wall thicknesses of pipes out ofwhich90 bendsarefabricated shallcomply with those given in IS : 8360 (Part I)- 1977. Wall thickness of fabricated be& shall not be less than that of the pipe to which it is to be welded.
Note-For general requirements regarding material, sizes, methods of test and sampling refer to IS : 8360 (Part I)-1977 Specification for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8360 (Part HI))-1977 Specification for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies: Part III Specific requirements for 90 bends.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8794-1978 CAST IRON DETACHABLE JOINTS FOR USE WITH ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES
1. Scope - Requirements for cast iron detachable joints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS : 1592-1970. 2. Manufacture - Joints shall be such that they could be cut, drilled or machined. Castings may be accepted provided the hardness does not exceed the Brine11 hardness of 215 HB . 3. Mechanical Tests tensile 2. strength = 5.2 Nominal Dia 125 125 150 150 200 200 200 Collars Nominal Dia 80 100 125 125 150 150 200 200 200 Class 5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 5, 10 15 5, 10 15 5 10 15 Collar Width 38 42 46 46 50 50 56 56 56 Thickness 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.5 9.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 Class Width -7 Dia 5, 10 15 5, 10 15 5 10 15 29 29 31 31 35 35 35 16 16 16 16 20 20 20 Number 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Holes
3.1 Tensile Tests - Minimum 150 MPa (15 kgf/mm*). 3.2 Brine11 Hardness Tests -See
4. Hydrostatic Tests - Collar shall withstand the test pressure specified in Table 1 of IS : 1592-1970 for the class of asbestos cement pressure pipes with which they are to be used, without showing any leakage or sweating, etc. 5. 5.1 Dimensions Cast Iron Flange Nominal Dia 80 100 Class Width / 5,10, 15 5, 10, 15 27 27 Holes h Dia 16 16 Number 3 3 \
-.-
*Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes (first revision).
5.3 Diameter of engagement end of joints shall match the corresponding outside diameter of asbestos cement pressure pipes of different classes conforming to IS : 1592-1970*. 237
SP : 21-1983
6.
Tolerance
Dimensions
Wall thickness of collar Cored holes and other dimensions Drilled holes
Tolerances, mm
-(l f2 f 1.5 + 0.05 t) (see Note)
7.1 Tolerance - On mass of joints rubber rings and bolts) is -5 percent.

Note -
(excluding
Density of cast iron has been taken as 7.15 kg/M. --
8.
Coating
where t= standard thickness of collar.

Note No limit for
8.1 All cast iron parts shall be coated externally and internally with the same material unless otherwise agreed. 8.2 In all instances where the coating material has a tarot similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enoughnot to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife. 8.3 When the parts are to be used for conveying potable water, the inside coating shall not contain any constituent soluble in such water or any ingredient which could impart any taste or odour whatsoever to the potable water after sterilization and suitably washing out the mains.
plus toleranceis specified.
7.
Mass
Nominal Dia
Class
Mass of Joint (Approximate) (Excluding Rubber Ring and Bolts), kg

3.0 3.8 4.8 5.0 6.1 6.2 8.8 9.2 9.4
80 100 125 125 150 150 200 200 200
5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 5, 10 15 5, 10 15 5 10 15
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8794-1978 Specification for cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes.
238
SP :21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS : 204 (Part I)-1978 (Part II)- 1978 IS : 2051978 IS : 206-1981 IS : 208-1979 IS : 281-1973 IS : 362-1982 IS : 363-1976 IS : 364-1970 IS : 452-1973 IS : 453-1973 IS : 1019-1974 IS : 1341-1981 IS : 1823-1980 IS : 1837-1966 IS : 2209-1976 IS : 2681-1979 IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
Page 241 242 242 244 J 245 246 246 247 248 248 249 249 250 251 252 252 253 254 254 255 255 256 257 257 258 259 259 260 260 261 262 263 263 264 265 265 266 266 267
3564-1975 3818-1971 3828-1966 3843-1966 3847-1966 4621-1975 4948-1974 4992-1975 5187-1972 5899-1970 5930-1970 6315-1971 6318-1971 6343-1982 6602-1972 6607-1972 7196-1974 7197-1974 7534-1974 7540-i974 8756-1978 8760-1978
Tower bolts: Part I Ferrous metals (fourth revision) Part II Non-ferrous metals (jbuth revision) Non-ferrous metal butt hinges (third revision) Tee and strap hinges (third revision) Door handles (third revision) Mild steel sliding door bolts for use with padlocks (second revision) Parliament hinges (fourth revision) Hasps and staples (third revision) Fanlight catch (second revision) Door spring, rat-tail type (second revision) Double-acting spring hinges (second revision) Rim latches (second revision) Steel butt hinges Cfourth revision) Floor door stoppers (third revision) Fanlight pivots (jkst revision) Mortice locks (vertical type) (third revision) Non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) for use with padlocks (second revision) Door closers (hydraulically regulated) (second revision) Continuous (piano) hinges (first revision) Ventilator chains Steel backflap hinges Mortice night latches Indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories (first revision) Welded steel wire fabric for general use (first revision) Door handles for mortice locks (vertical type) (first revision) Flush bolts (first revision) Bathroom latches Mortice latch (vertical type) Floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for heavy doors Plastic window stays and fasteners Door closer-s (pneumatically regulated) for light doors weighing up to 40 kg (first revision) Ventilator pole Rebated mortice locks (vertical type) Hold fast Double action floor springs (without oil check) for heavy doors Mild steel locking bolts with holes for padlocks Mortice dead locks Ball catches for use in wooden almirahs Mortice sliding door locks with lever mechanism
240
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 204 (PART I)-1978 TOWER BOLTS

PART I FERROUS METALS
(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope Requirement for tower bolts made of ferrous metals. 2. Types - (a) Barrel, (b) semi-barrel, or spot welded, and (d) skeleton. (c) riveted plated and barrel and socket stove enamelled black. b) Semi-Burrel Tower Bolt - Bolt bright finished and other parts stove enamelled black.
C)
Note - For detailed classification of various types of bolts reference may be made to fhe standard.
Reveted or Spot Welded Tower Bolt - Bolt bright finished or plated and plate, straps and socket stove enamelled black.
Bolt bright finished or
3.
Dimensions Size (Length of Bolt)

mm Barrel tower bolt Semi-barrel bolt tower 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 and 300 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 375 and 450 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 375, 450, 600,750 and 900 375, 450, 600, 750 and 900
tolerances and sketches
d) Skeleton TowerBolts Diameter of Bolt

mm 10 or 12 10 or 12
Width of Barrel
mm 32 or 38 38 or 42
Riveted or spot welded tower bolt Skeleton tower bolt
10 or 12
40 or 45
10
32
Note-For
detailed
dimensions,
4.
Finish
a) Barrel Tower Bolt Bolts bright finished or
plated and plate and staples stove enamelled black.
Note-
For requirements
of materials
For detailed information, metals (fourth revision).
refer to IS : 204 (Part I)-1978 Specification for tower bolts: Part I Ferrous
241
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 204 (PART II)-1978 TOWER BOLTS

PART II NON-FERROUS (With Amendment METALS No. 1)
Note - For detailed dimensions, to the standard.
4. tolerances and sketches refer
(Fourth Revision)
1.
2.
Scope -
non-ferrous
Requirements metals.
for towerbolts
made of
Types Note -
(a) Barrel and (b) skeleton.
For detailed classification of various types of bolts reference may be made to the standard.
Finish
a) Brass Tower Bolts rel anodized. c) Zinc Alloy Tower Bolts oxidized or bronzed. d) Brass Skeleton Tower Bolts staples bright finished. Bolt and barrel Bolt, plate and Bolts Bolt, plate Bolt and barrel polished. Bolt and bar-
3.
Dimensions Type
Size (Length of Bolt in mm) 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 225, 250 and 300 375, 450, 600, 750 and 900 10 or 12 mm 32 mm for 10 mm diameter bolt 38 or 42 mm for 12 mm diameter bolt
of materials refer to the standard.
b) Aluminium Alloy Tower Bolts -
Barrel tower bolt Skeleton tower bolt Diameter of bolt Width of barrel
d Aluminium
Alloy Skeleton Tower Bolt, plate and staples anodized.
f) Zinc Alloy Skeleton Tower Bolts and staples oxidized or bronzed.
Note-For
requirements
For detailed information, refer to IS : 204 (Part II)-1978 Specification for tower bolts: Part IINon-ferrous metals (fourth revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 205-1978 NON-FERROUS METAL BUTT HINGES
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements from non-ferrous metals.

2.
for butt hinges
made
Material
Flap i) Extruded aluminium alloy
ii) Extruded brass Types

a) Extruded aluminium alloy butt hinges, Pin i) ii) iii) iv) Aluminium alloy Phosphor bronze wire or rod Mild steel wire or rod Brass wire .. iii) Cast brass iv) Brass sheet
b) Extruded brass butt hinges, c) Cast brass butt hinges, d) Sheet brass butt hinges. and
242
SP : 21-1983
4. 4.1
Dimensions Extruded Aluminium Alloy Butt Hinges Length mm 150 125 12.5 125 125 100 100 100 100 90 75 75 75 75 75 65 65 50 50 Breadth mm 75 75 63 63 63 75 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 45 40 45 40 45 40 4.3
Hinge Designation 75Dll 75Ell 75E12 75Fll 65Ell 65E12 65Fll 50Ell 5OE12 5OFll 40Fll
Length mm 75 75 75 75 65 65 65 50 50 50 40
Breadth mm 50 40 40 30 40 40 30 40 40 40 40
Hinge Designation 15OA22 125A22 125B21 125B22 125C22 lOOA lOOB21 lOOB22 lOOC22 9oc22 75C21 75C22 75D22 75E22 75F22 65E22 65F22 5OE22 5OF22 4.2
Cast Brass Butt Hinges Length mm 150 150 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 90 90 75 75 75 75 75 65 65 65 50 50 Breadth mm 85 85 85 85 75 75 70 70 65 65 85 85 75 75 70 70 65 65 65 55 65 55 65 55 40 40 35 60 40 35 40 40
Hinge Designation 15OAll 15OA12 125All 125A12 125Bll 125B 12 125Cll 125c 12 125C21 125C22 lOOA 1 lOOA 1OOB 11 lOOB12 lOOCl1 lwC12 lOoC21 looC22 1WC23 lOODl1 90Cll 90Dll 75Cll 75Dll 75Ell 75E12 75Fll 65Ell 65E22 65Ell 5OEll 5OE12 243
Extruded Brass Butt Hinges Length mm 150 150 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 90 90 75 Breadth mm 75 75 75 75 65 65 65 65 60 60 75 75 65 65 65 65 60 55 50 55 50 55
Hinge Designation 15OAll 15OA12 125All 125A12 125Bll 125B12 125Cll 125C12 125C21 125C22 lOOA 1 lOOA lOOBl1 lOOB12 lOoCl1 lOOC12 lOOC22 lOOC32 lOODl1 90Cll 90Dll 75Cll
SP : 21-1983
Hinge Designation 5OFll 4OFll 30Fll 25Fll
Length mm 50 40 30 25
Breadth mm 35 35 25 25
to the standard.
IS : 2525-1982* 1981t.
and IS : 3965-
Note - Fordetailed dimensions, tolerances and sketches refer
5. 5.1
Requirements
4.4
Sheet Brass Butt Hinges (For Cabinet) Hinge Designation 25SB 30SB 40SB 50SB Length mm 25 30 40 50 Breadth mm 15 15 20 25
Number of knuckles in each hinge specified in 4.1 to 4.3 shall not be less than 5 except in case of cast brass hinges of size less than 40 mm. In this case. and also for sheet brass hinges specified in 4.4, the number of knuckles shall not be less than 3. Screw Holes Shall be countersunk,
5.2
4.5
Tolerances Length + 1 mm. Breadth f 1 For extruded brass butt hinges, cast brass butt hinges and sheet brass extruded hinges. For butt alloy hinges see aluminium refer to IS : 2051978
6. Finish - Brass hingps shall have bright or satin finish and shall be suitably protected against discoloration. Aluminium alloy hinges shall be anodized.
*Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, wire (jirsr revision). tDimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, bar, rod and section (first revision).
Specification for non-ferrous
metal butt hinges (third
SUMMARY OF
IS : 206-1981 TEE AND STRAP HINGES
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel tee and strap hinges, that are commonly used irr geneml building construction.
2. Types - Tee hinges and strap hinges shall be of the following types: Type 1 2 3 Designation Light weight Medium weight Heavy weight
3. 3.1
Type 1 - Sizes (length) shall be 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350 and 400 mm. Tolerance +2 mm.
3.2 Type 2 - Sizes (length) shall be 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. Tolerance +2 mm up to 200 mm size and +3 mm on all other sizes in case of Tee hinges; and +-2 mm for all sizes in case of strap hinges.
244
SP : 21-1983
3.3 Type 3 - Sizes (1ength)shall be 150,200,250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm. Tolerance f2 mm up to 300 mm size and +4 mm on all other sizes in case of tee hinges; and % 2 mm for all sizes in case of strap hinges.
Note - For detailed dimensions, figures, refer to rhe standard.
tolerances and typical
4. Workmanship - Hinges shall be well made, free from burrs, flaws and defects of any kind. Movement shall be square, and working shall be free and easy, without any play or shake.
5.
Finish - Shall enamelled black.
be either
bright
or stove
For
detailed information, refer to IS : 206-1981 Specification for tee and strap hinges (third revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 208-1979 DOOR
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for materials, manufacture, dimensions and finish of door handles of the type that are commonly fixed to doors in buildings. 2. Types and Materials Type 1 Cast (cast iron, malleable cast iron, cast brass, cast aluminium or zinc alloy die casting), Type 2 Pressed oval (mild steel), Type 3 Present half oval (mild steel), Type 4 Fabricated 3. 3.1 Dimensions
Sizes Type Size Overall Length, Min Internal Depth, Min
HANDLES
No. 1)
(Third Revision)
Type
Size -Overall Length,

mm
Min
Internal Depth,
Min
75 90 100 15
mm 100 *125 150 115
mm 20 25 28 30 35 80
and figures, refer to- the
100 140 125 175 Note - For detailed dimensions

standard.
(brass or aluminium
alloy).
3.2 and Tolerances
Tolerances
Dimensions
up to 100 mm 101 to 200 mm 201 and above
* 1 mm + 1.5 mm +2mm
mm 1 15 100 125 150 2 75 100 115 135
4.
Finish Type 1 - Bright satin finish, nickle plated, copper oxidized, bronze finish for cast brass and zinc die cast handles. Stove enamelled black or copper oxidized for cast iron and malleable cast iron handles. Aluminium anodized to a bright, natural, mat or satin finish or dyed. b) Type 2 and 3 - Stove enamelled black. cl Type 4 - Bright satin finish, nickle plated, copper oxidized, bronze finish for brass handles. Aluminium anodized to a bright, finish, natural, mat or satin finish or dyed.
mm 125185 150/110 190/140 215/165 125 150 175 200
mm 20 25 25 30 20 25 28 30
For detailed information, refer to IS : 208-1979 Specification for door handles (third revision).
245
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 281-1973 MILD STEEL SLIDING DOOR BOLTS FOR USE WITH PADLOCKS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel sliding door bolts commonly used in general building construction, for locking doors, gates, etc, with padlocks. 4. 2. Types or bolt type. 3. Shall be of 2 types, plate type and clip b) Diameter of bolt plate type bolts 12 + 0.5 mm clip type bolts 16 f 0.5 mm Requirements a) Mild steel sheets and plates shall satisfy prescribed bend test. b) Mild steel wire shall have a minimum tensile strength of 40 kgf/mn$ and shall satisfy prescribed bend test. c) All screw holes shall be countersunk. 5. Finish a) Plate Type - Plates and straps stove enamelled black. Hasp and bolt finished bright or copper oxidized or plated with nickel or chromium b) Clip or Bolt Type - Copper oxidized or plated
Sizes Plate type sliding bolts: 150,200,250,300,375 and 450 mm. Clip type sliding bolts: 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 mm.
(Note Size represents length of the bolt.)
3.1
Tolerances
a) Length of bolt sizes 300 mm and below f 2 mm sizes 375 mm and 450 mm f 3 mm
Note l-For Note 2-For bend test details see 4 of the standard. detailed dimensions, tolerances
and figure refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 281-1973 Specification for mild steel sliding door bolts for use with padlocks (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 362-1982 PARLIAMENT
HINGES
2 3 Pressed (mild steel, alloy), and Fabricated (extruded alloy). aluminium aluminium
(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements manufacture, finish, marking ment hinges. regarding materials, and packing of parliaType Type
2. Types and Materials - Shall be of three types according to the material used: Type 1 - Cast (cast brass),
Note - Materials for different types are given above within brackets. For requirements of materials, refer to Table 1 of he
standard.
246
SP : 21-1983
3.
Dimensions Size of
and Tolerances Tolerance on Size Width
Note - For detailed dimensions of a11types of hinges, refer to Tables 2 to 4 to be read with Fig. 1 of fhe standard.
Hinges (Width Bet ween Flanges)

I mm 50
* For Aluminium and Cast Brass Hinges

mm +l +l *l *l *l &I +l +l
4. For Mild Steel Hinges
mm
mm
65
75 10 125 150 175
200
+2 +2 +2 +3 +3 +3 +3 +3
20+1 20*1 20+1 27+1 27kl 27+1 27&l 27+1
Manufacture - Hinges shall be well made and be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Washer shall be provided between knuckles for Type 1 and Type 3 hinges. Washer shall be made of nylon, plastic or other suitable material. In locations susceptible to corrosion, use of brass or phosphor bronze hinge pins is recommended in case of brass hinge. All screw holes shall be clean and countersunk.
5. Finish - Brass hinges shall have bright or satin finish and be suitably protected against discoloration. Aluminiumalloy hinges shall be anodized to a bright, natural, mat or satin finish or dyed. Mild steel hinges shall be finished bright or electro galvanized as specified. revision).
refer to IS : 362-1982 Specification for parliament hinges (fourth
SUMMARY OF
IS : 363-1976 HASPS AND STAPLES
(Third Revision)
1. Scope Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of hasps and staples. Width of brass or aluminium alloy hasps 4.2 Type 2 Size Width of hasp 65 75 25 25 90 100 125 150 175 25 32 38 45 50 40 40 46 46
2.
Types
Type 1 Mild steel, brass or aluminium alloy hasps and staples - safety type Type 2 Mild steel hasps and staples wire type
3.
Requirements
a) Hinge pin shall be of mild steel in case of mild steel hasps and staples, and of mild steel or brass incase of brass or aluminium alloy hasps and staples. b) Screw holes shall be countersunk.
Tolerance length of hasp width of hasp

Note 1 Note 2 standard.
5.
f 2 f 1.5
Size denotes the length of the hasp. For detailed dimensions and tolerances see 4 of tie
Finish
a) Mild Steel Hasps and Staples - Stove enamelled, black, b) Brass Hasps and Staples - Oxidized or covered with clear lacquer after polishing; and c) Aluminium Allay - Anodized.
4. 4.1
Dimensions and Tolerance (in mm) Type 1 Size

Width of mild steel hasps
90 115 150 175

38 38 45 45
refer to IS : 363-1976 Specification for hasps and staples (third revision).
247
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 364-1970 FANLIGHT
CATCH
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of fanlight catches commonly used on ventilators in buildings.
4.1 2. Dia of plunger 14 mm Size in plan 45X45 mm Size in elevation 45X50 mm
Tolerance -
Types (According to Material Used) a) Mild steel fanlight catches, b) Aluminium alloy fanlight catches, and c) Cast brass fanlight catches.
Note -
Dimensions above 5 mm up to 25 mm f0.5 mm, and Dimension above 25 mmfl mm.
For detailed dimensions see Fig. 1 of the standard.
3.
Requirements -- Screw holes shall be counter-
5.
Finish
Aluminium Brass S tee1 Alloy Anodized Satin finish Stove enamelled
sunk. 4.
Dimensions (For 14 mm catch) details regarding materials see 3 of the standard.
Note-For
For detailed information, refer to IS : 364-1970 Specification for fanlight catch (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 452-1973 DOOR SPRING, RAT-TAIL TYPE
(Second Revision)
Scope - Requirements for materials, dimensions, manufacture, finish and tests for door springs, rat-tail type commonly used in building construction.
2.
1.
5.
Performance Tests
a) Tail rod when pushed to maximum limit and released 100 times in quick succession the spring shall show no sign of damage or any permanent set. b) Torque required to push open the door through 90 shall not exceed 4 kgf/m.
Types (According to Material Used) a) Mild steel door springs, and b) Brass door springs.
3.
Sizes Note roller.
300 mm and 375 mm.
Size denotes distance between centres of spindle and
4.
Requirements
a) Tail rod 10 mm dia. b) Roller plate 1.6 mm thick. c) Base plate 2.5 mm thick (size 80x40 centre to centre of screw holes). d) Roller 22 mm dia and 3 mm thick.
mm
6. Finish - Mild steel door springs, casing, tail rod, spindle cap and base plate shall be stove enamelled black or copper oxidized. In case of brass, there shall be bright finished or copper oxidized. Spindle, roller plate and roller shall be bright finished and the spring if made of mild steel wire shall be copper oxidized or electro-galvanized.
Note 1 -For
Note 2-For
details regarding materials of door spring rat-tail type see 3 of the stundurd. detailed dimensions of door springs see Fig. 1 of the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 452-1973 Specification for door spring, rat-tail type (second
revision).
248
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 453-1973 DOUBLE-ACTING
1. Scope - Requirements for material, dimensions, $nufactu&, finish and tests of double-acting spring hinges and corresponding blank hinges used generally for swing doors. 2. Types (According to Material Used) a) Mild steel double-acting spring hinges, and b) Brass double-acting spring hinges. Sizes
SPRING
Performance
HINGES
(Second Revision)
4. Tests a) Door when pushed through 90 and released 2 000 times on each side in succession, the hinge and its components shall show no sign of damage. b) Door shall require force of 220.5 kgf for 100 mm hinges, 3+0.5 kgf for 125 and 150 mm hinges, at a distance of 45 cm from hinge pin to move door through 90.
3.
Size ofSpring Hinge

mm 100 125 150 Note 1 -For
Note 2-For
Size of Corresponding Blank Hinge

mm 70 75 75
5.
finish
a) Mild steel hinges copper oxidized. stove enamelled black or or
b) Brass hinges - satin, bright, nickel-plated, copper oxidized.
details regarding materials see 3 of the standurd. detailed dimensions see 5 and Fig. 1 and 2 of the stundurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 453-1973 Specification for double-acting spring hinges (second
revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1019-1974 RIM LATCHES
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of rim latches for general use. 2. Hand@ of Rim Latches - Left hand latch if fitted on left hand door. Right hand latch if fitted on right hand door. 3. Types
Type 1 Opens
No. 1)
Opens when handle is turned in any direction. 3.1 Type 1 rim latches shall either be left-hand or right-hand. 4. Sizes - 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end. 5. Material - Shall be of mild aluminium alloy or zinc base alloy. 249 steel, brass,
Type 2 -
when handle is turned in one
direction only.
SP : 21-1983
6.
Dimensions
(in mm)
7. 75 x60x 14 100x70~20 125 x70 x20 150 X70 x20
Size
75 100 125 150 Tolerance
Note standard.
Length xBreadth XDepth
Finish Brass latches Aluminium latches Steel late hes
Bright or satin finish Anodized finish Black japanned,stove enamelled black or copper oxidized
Z!Y 1 mm.
For detailed dimensions and tolerances see Y of the
8. Performance Requirement - When knob of latch is turned, the catch bolt shall draw smoothly into the body and shall be flush with the face of the body.
Note-For
requirements for materials of rim latches see Table 1 of the standard.
refer to IS : 1019-1974 Specification for rim latches (second revision).

.A
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1341-1981 STEEL BUTT HINGES (Fourth Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel butt hinges. 2. Types a) Light weight hinges, b) Medium weight hinges, c) Broad type hinges, d) Square type hinges, and e) Heavy weight hinges. 3. Dimensions Type
Type
Medium weight Broad type Square type Heavy weight
Sizes (Length)
mm 20,25,40,50,65 75,90, 100,125 and 150 50, 75, 100, 125 and 150 50, 65, 75, 90 and 100 50,65,75,90, 100, 125, 150, 175 and 200 mentioned above
3.1 Tolerance - On all sizes tolerance shall be 50.5 mm.
Sizes (Length)
Note - Fordetailed dimensions, tolerances and typical figure, refer to the standard.
4.
15, 25,40, SO::, 75 and 100
Light weight
Finish surfaces.
Shall be finished bright with smooth
kor detaiied information,
refer 70 IS : 1341-1981 Spe&fication for steel butt hinges (fourth revision).
250
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1823-1980 FLOOR DOOR STOPP-ERS
(Third Revision)
for floor door stopper 1. Scope - Requirements suitable for use with door shutters of 30, 35, 40 and 45 mm thickness. 2. Materials b) On thickness of cover plate +0.3 -0mm. mm and
Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances, Table 2 to be read with Fig. 1 of the standard.
refer to
a) For body or housing and cover plate Aluminium alloy (pressure die) castings or alwminium alloy sheets or brass sheet or cast brass or brass gravity die casting.
5.
Manufacture
b) For spring c)
3.
Phosphor drawn steel wire.
bronze
or hard
5.1 The stoppers shall be well made and free from defects likely to prevent its correct fixing or affect adversely its reliability in use. 5.2 Body or housing shall be cast in one piece and fixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel screws. 5.3 There shall be four countersunk stoppers to the floor. holes for fixing
For tongue - Aluminium alloy pressure die casting or cast brass or nylon or plastic.
Requirements a) b) Four countersunk per to floor. holes for fixing door stop-
c)
Body o,r housing shall be cast in one piece and fixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel screws. Rubber piece shall be attached to extreme end to absorb shocks. (in mm) 30 140 40 35 140 40 150 45 150
5.4 On the extreme end, a rubber piece shall be attached to absorb shocks due to pulling action of door. The rubber used shall comply with the following requirements: a) Relative density, Max b) Hardness c) Ageing for 24 h at, 100 +ic 1.3 60_+5 i) Charge in initial hardness +5, -0 -ii) Shall not develop brittleness or tackiness
4.
Dimensions
Thickness of door shutter Overall length of cover plate Width of cover plate Thickness of cover plate
40 40 40 4.5 for castings 3 for sheet metal
4.1
Tolerances a) On overall length of cover plate +0.5 mm.
6. Workmanship and Finish - Stoppers shall be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Aluminium door stoppers shall be anodized and brass stoppers be finished smooth. Stoppers may also be chromium or nickel plated, anodized or oxidized. The exterior of door stopper shall be in flush with floor and be finished bright or satin.
refZ+ to IS : 1823-1980 Specification for floor door stoppers (third revision).
251
SP
21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1837-1966 FANLIGHT PIVOTS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for fanlight pivots (also known as ventilator hinges).

2.
3.1
Tolerances
Pivot length and breadth Pin projection Pin dia +0.5mm +0.2mm +0.2mm
the standard.
Types
Type 1 Mild steel pivots Type 2 AIuminium , Type 3 Brass pivots / pivots 4.
Note - For detailed dimensions refer to
Finish
Type 1 Bright finished with smooth surface Type 2 Natural or anodized finish Type 3 Bright or satin finish
3.
Dimensions (in mm)

No.
Thickness oj Ventilator Shutter 25 30 30 35 35

requirements
Pivot Length 20 25 25 25 25
Pivot Breadth 50 50 65 65 75
Pin Projection
10
, Type 1
10
Pin Dia A Type 2 and 3 9.5 12.5 12.5 15 15 .
2 3 4 5
Note-For
12.5 12.5 15 15
12.5 12 16 16
for materials
see 3.1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1837-1966 Specification for fanlight pivots (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2209-1976 MORTICE LOCKS (VERTICAL TYPE)
(Third Revision)
1. Scope Sizes Requirements for mortice locks (vertiNote 2 standard.
For typical design of mortice lock see Fig. 1 of the
cal type). 2.
65,75 and 100 mm.
3.
Size shall be denoted by length of faceover the body in mm. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length specified for size.
Note 1 agreed. Morticelocks of other sizes may be made if mutually
Material - Material for different component parts shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 2 and 3 of the standard. Non-interchangeability - Two lever locks shall be manufactured to have non-interchangeable keys in abatchconsistingof aminimum of 24 locks. In
4.
252
SP : 21-1983
case of locks with more than two levers, these shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of minimum 100 locks. 5.
6.
Finish
a) Brass body b) Steel body ing. Finished smooth.
Manufacture
a) Body - Clear depth 15 mm, MUX. b) Locking bolt - Section not less 8x25 mm. than
Protective coating such as paint-
c) Aluminium alloy l&y
Anodized.
c) Lever spring - Lever spring fitted into the lever shall withstand the prescribed tests without showing signs of permanent set. d) Lock shah becapable of being opened with the key from both inside and outside.
d) Face plate and striking plate - Finished smooth and polished bright or satin (or may be chromium plated, anodized or oxidized). 7. Tests - Shall withstand the prescribed given 9.1.1 to 9.1.5 of the standard. tests
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2209-1976 Specification for mortice locks (vertical typ) (third revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2681-1979 NON-FERROUS METAL SLIDING DOOR BOLTS (ALDROPS) FOR USE WITH PADLOCKS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment for non-ferrous metal 1. Scope - Requirements sliding door bolts (aldrops) commonly used in general building construction for locking doors, gates, etc, with padlocks. 2. 3. No. 1)
JIimensions
Size (Length mm
Type
1 and 2
of Bolt)
Bolt Diameter
mm 16 18 16
Types
Brass sliding door bolts with sand-cast brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or clips and rolled or drawn brass bolts. Brass sliding door bolts with die-cast brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or clips and rolled or drawn brass bolt. Aluminium alloy sliding door bolts with hasp, staple and fixing clips of sheets, castings or extruded sections and fixing bolts and sliding bolts of extruded section or castings of aluminium alloy.
Type 3 Type 2 Type I -
150, 200, 250 and 300 375 and 450 200, 250, 300, 350, 375 and 450
3.1 Tolerances
On size +2
Bolt dia
+0.5 (Types 1 and 2) Nil (Type 3)

and tolerances see 5 of the
standard.
NoteFinish
4.
a) Brass bolts - satin, polished or plated; and b) Aluminium alloy bolts - anodized.
Note-For
requirements
of materials
see 4 of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2681-1979 Specification for non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) for use with padlocks (second revision).
253
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3564-1975 DOOR CLOSERS (HYDRAULICALLY
REGULATED)
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for exposed, type hydraul&lly regulated door closers for vertical hinge type doors opening to one side only and weighing not more than 80 kg. This standard does not cover requirements for concealed type hydraulic door closers and also the pneumatic or mechanical type door closers. 2. Nominal Sizes (in relation to weight and the width of door) 4. No. 1) Requirements a) Closing time shall be adjustable between 5 and 20 seconds by means of regulating screw. b) Hydraulic oil filling shall work satisfactorily between 49 and -10C. c) Strength and speed of closer shall be capable of being regulated by extending spring and adjustment in control Valve screw respectively. d) Each closer shall be supplied with one fitting key or a suitable spanner far adjusting the spring valve and regulating screw. 5. Performance Requirements
Designation of
Closer 1 2 3
Weight of Door (kg) up to 35 36 to60 61 to80
Width of Door (mm) up to 700 701 to 850 851 to 1 000
3.
Materials Component Part Material
5.1 When opened through 9O, the door shall swing back to 2Of 5 with normal speed, but thereafter speed should automatically get retarded and should smoothly negotiate with the latch (where provided). 5.2 Endurailce Test - After 50 000 operations against maximum specified load, closer shall show no failure, leakage of oil 01 other defects.
Note For test details see A-1.5 of the standard.
i) Non-porous body Cast iron/aluminium alloy/ and back plate zinc alloy ii) Main arm Cast iron/steel/zinc alloy/ aluminium alloy Note - For materials of other pans see 5 (Table 2) of he
standard.
6. Finish - Painted or lacquered. Aluminium body may be anodized. Mild steel parts shall be pickled and given phosphating treatment.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3564-1975 Specification for door closers (hydraulically regulated)
(second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3818-1971 CONTINUOUS
(With Amendment
(PIANO) HINGES
No. 1)
(First Revision)
1. Scope hinges, 2. Material Flap
Requirements
for continuous
(piano)
Pin
a) Mild Steel Wire - Shall satisfy prescribed wrapping test. Tensile strength 40 kgf/mm*. b) Aluminium Alloy
a) Mild Steel - Shall satisfy prescribed bend test b) Aluminium Alloy 254
3.
Requirements a) Hinge pin shall be of mild steel for mild steel
SP : 21-1983
hinges and of mild steel (galvanized) or aluminium ahoy for aluminium hinges. The aluminium alloy hinge pins shall be hard anodized to a minimum thickness of0.025 mm and sealed with oil, wax or lanolin. All screw holes shall be Countersunk. b) 4. Dimensions and Tolerances (in mm) Breadth Screw Hole Distance (Centre to Centre) A r \ Along Length Along Breadth 20f 1 75+2 4Ofl 15fl 75+2 30+ 1
Pin dia : 2 mm Thickness of flaps: 0.8 mm, Min and 1 mm, MU. 5. Finish - Mild steel hinges shall be bright polished, chromium plated or oxidized. Aluminium hinges shall be anodized.
Nominal Size 40 30
refer to IS : 3818-1971 Specification for continuous
(piano) hinges (first
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3828-1966 VENTILATOR CHAINS

1. 2. Scope Materials a) Staple b) Eye c) Wire Mild steel Aluminium alloy Mild steel Aluminium ahoy Mild steel Aluminium alloy Requirements for ventilator chains. a) Eye - Formed by forging and folding plate of 2.5 mm minimum thickness. Width 25 mm. b) Chain - Made from 1.8 mm minimum dia wire. Length300+5 mm. Eachlink30+2mm. c) Staple - Made of 2.5 mm minimum thick plate size 40x20 mm. Hook 5 mm dia and 5 mm internal radius of bend. 4. LoadTest - Assembly shall be strong enough to bear 20 kg load without deformat. 5. Finish Shall be protected against corrosion.
3.
Manufacture and Dimensions
refer to IS : 3828-1966 Specification for ventilator chains.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3843-1966 STEEL BACKFLAP HINGES

(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) 1. Scope of steel. 2. Types Requirements for backflap hinges made 3. Materials a) Flap - Cold rolled mild steel (shall satisfy the prescribed bend test). 255
Type I and Type II.
SP : 21-1983
b) Pin - Mild steel wire (shall satisfy the prescribed wrapping test; tensile strength shall not be less than 40 kgf/mm2). 4.
Note -
For detailed dimensions see 4 of he smdard.
5. Reqbirements and countersunk.
All screw holes shall be clean treatment. 65 65 75 75
Dimensions (in mm)

Nominal size Length (Tolerance Width over flaps: Min
6.
20 20 70 71.15 1.6
Finish 25 25 72 73.5 1.6 25
Finished with anticorrosive 30 30 80 81.5 1.6 40 90 91.5 1.8 40 40 85 86.5 1.6 45 45 50 50
+ 1)
Mar i Thickness
Width over flaps):
97 105 150 165 100 108 153 168 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8 50 105 108 1.9 65 125 128 2.4
75 76.5 1.6
refer to IS : 3843-1966 Specification for steel backfap
hinges.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3847-1966 MORTICE NIGHT LATCHES

Requirements for general use.
1.
Scope -
for mortice night latches 4.
Note - For materials for other components see 5 and Table 1 of the standard.
Requirements
a) Depth of. body shall not exceed 15 mm. b) Locking bolt section shall be not leas than 8x25 mm. c) Number of levers shall be not leas than two.
2. General - Nominal size shall be denoted by length of face over the body in mm. Termed left hand if fitted on the left-hand door and right-hand if fitted onright hand door. Two lever latches and latches with more than two levers shall have non-interchangeable keys for a batch of at least 12 and 60 latch& r&pectivelv. , 3.
5.
Finish a) Steel body - Protective coating such as painting b) Face plate and striking plate - Finished smooth and polished bright or satin (or may be chromium plated). c) Aluminium alloy - Anodized.
Materials
i) Mild steel ii) Aluminium alloy sheet iii) Cast brass (copper content shall not be less than 60 percent) iv) Brass sheet
For body, body cover, case plate, face plate and striking plate
6. Tests - Shall satisfy the prescribed performance tests and endurance tests.
Note-For
test procedures see 9 of the stundord.
\ For detailed information,
refer to IS : 3847-1966 Specification for mortice night latches.
256
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4621-1975 INDICATING BOLTS FOR USE IN PUBLIC BATHS AND LAVATORIES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for indicating use in public baths and lavatories.
bolts for b) Indicating c) Gears disc Aluminium alloy sheet Brass casting Aluminium alloy casting Brass casting
2. General - Operation of bolt may be achieved either by gear work or by displacement. Normally made in two sizes, namely, size 1 and size 2. When the bolt is drawn, it shall show the word ENGAGED on red background, and when it is withdrawn, it shall show the word VACANT on green background.
4.
Dimensions and Tolerances Size 1 (mm) 75 45 70 Size 2 (mm) 85 50 70 Tolerance (mm) fl fl fl
3.
Material
a) Body, knob and indicating spindle Aluminium alloy casting Extruded aluminiumalloy Brass casting Extruded brass Zinc base alloy dia casting.
Length of bolt --Breadth of bolt Dia of disc

Note standard.
and tolerances see 4 of rhe
5. Finish - Assembled bolt shall be satin finished or bright polished. Aluminium bolts shah be anodized.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4621-1975 Specification for indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4948-1974 WELDED
STEEL WIRE FABRIC FOR GENERAL USE
(First Revision)
Scope - Requirements for welded steel wire fabric for general use, such as fencing, window grill and crates. Not intended to cover fabric for concrete reinforcement (see IS : 15661967*).
2.
1.
Note - For chemical composition and bend test, refer to IS : 226-1975* and IS : 280-1972 t respectively. 3. Size
Quality of Wire
3.1
Mechanical Properties - Ultimate tensile strength not less than 42 kgf/mm2. Percentage of elongation shall be not less than 7 on gauge length of 8 times the diameter of wire. *Specification for hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement firsr revisbn).
2.1
Wire Diameters - 12.50, 11.20, 10.00, 9.00, 8.00,7.10, 6.30, 5.60,5.00,4.50, 4.00, 3.55,3.15, 2.8.0, 2.50, 2.24, 2.00, 1.80, and 1.60 mm.
*Specification for structural steel (standardquality) fij% revision). tspecification for mild steel wire for general engineering purpose (second revision).
257
SP : 21-1983
Size Dia of wire
3.2
T.olerance on Diameter (in mm)
For size of wire 1.6 to 5.6 mm + 0.050 For size of wire over 5.6 mm f 0.060 4. Mesh Sizes Commonly Available (in mm)
Size Dia of wire 2.0, 2.5, 3.15
b) Oblong mesh
50x25 75X25 75x50
2.5 to 4.5 3.15 to 5.0 3.15 to 5.6
a) Square mesh
20x20
25x25 31x37 50x50 75x75
2.0, 2.5, 2.5, 2.5, 5.0,
2.5, 3.15 3.15 3.15, 3.55, 4.0, 4.5 3.15, 3.55, 4.0, 4.5, 5.6
c) Tolerance i) Size of mesh - Not more than 5 percent. ii) Size of sheet or roll +25 mm or 1 percent whichever is greater. 5. Test for Welding - Average strength value of the weld shall not be less than 21 kgf/mm2 and the area of the wire to be taken into consideration for calculation is the longitudinal wire. Fabric having a diameter difference between transverse and longitudinal wire greater than 2 mm shall not be subjected to weld shear test.
Note-For
method of test, refer to clause 6 of the standard.
refer to IS : 4948-1974 Specification for welded steel wire fabric for general use
(first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4992-1975 DOOR HANDLES FOR MORTICE (VERTICAL TYPE)
LOCKS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for door handles for operation of mortice locks (vertical type) covered in IS : 2209-1976*. 2. Type Handle type and knob type. Brass, mild steel, aluminium alloy, 5. Performance Requirements - A sample picked out at random from a lot of 100, when fitted to a lock and operated 1000 times shall not show any damage or ineffectiveness in working. When the handle is in its extreme position in the lock and pulled horizontally with a load of 100 kgf, it shall not develop cracks, lose shape or get damaged. 6. Workmanship removed. All sharp edges shall be
3. Material etc. 4.
Dimensions and Tderances Size of door handle knob housing = (150+5)X(40+2)mm Length of handle =90f2 mm.
*Specification for mortice locks (vertical type) (third revision).
-. 7. Finish - Brass handles shall have natural $n jsh or shall be bright chromium electroplated. Aluminium alloy handles shall be anodized. Zinc base alloy die cast handles and mild steel handles shall be bright chromium plated.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4992-1975 Specification for door handles for mortice locks (vertical type) (first revision).
258
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5187 - 1972 FLUSH BOLTS
(First Revision)
1.
Scope -
cupboards 2.
Requirements and doors.
for flush bolts for use in
T,pe
Size (mm)
Throw of Bolt Face Plate (Min) Length, (Min) mm (mm) 200 100 150 200 250 300 30 15 15 15 15 15
Bolt Dia (mm)
Materials
a) Body and plate - Cast brass, cast aluminium and extruded aluminium alloy. b) Bolt - Cast brass, extruded brass and extruded aluminium alloy. c) Spring - Phosphor bronze and steel strip. 1 2 2 2 2 2 200 100 150 200 250 300 8fl 8fl 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1
3. Manufacture - Rod shall be retained maximum bolting position by the spring. 4.
in its
Dimensions and Tolerances:
Note - For typical illustration of Type 1 and 2 bolts see Fig. 1 of the standard.
Type Size Face Plate Throw of Bolt Bolt Dia (Mirt) (mm) Length, (Min) (mm) (mm) bm 1 100 100 821 20 1 8+1 150 150 25 For detailed information, refer to IS : 5187-1972
5. Workmanship and Finish - Shall have smooth and easy working when assembled. Brass bolts shall be satin or bright polished, or nickel or chromium plated or copper oxidized. Aluminium flush bolts shall be
anodized.
Specification for flush bolts (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS
1. Scope - Requirements finish of bathroom latches. Shape and Size
5899- 1970 BATHROOM

size and
LATCHES
for material,
2.
Overall size = 40x50 mm Thickness = 10 mm

Note For typical illustration see Fig. lof the standard.
alloy, and aluminium extrusions. b) Bolts - Brass cast, brass extruded, mild steel rod, cast iron, aluminium alloy and aluminium extrusions. c) Knob - Cast brass, cast iron, aluminium alloy and aluminium extrusions. 4. Workmanship and Finish - Latch shall be smoothly finished. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Cast brass body shall be given a protective coating such as painting. Specification for bathroom latches.
3.
Material
a) Body Cast brass, cast iron, aluminium
refer to IS : 5899-1970
259
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5930-1970 MORTICE
LATCH (VERTICAL
No. 1)
TYPE)
(With Amendment
1.
Scope -Requirements for mortice latches fa use ondoors, such as bath roomdoors, W.C. doors and doors to private rooms.
c) Mechanism - Latch shall operate easily from both sides of the door. Bolt shall turn into locking position when the thumb turn knob is turned through 90. d) Lever spring - Lever spring fitted into the lever shall withstand following tests without showing signs of permanent set. i) Lever spring shall be pressed down so as to touch top edge of lever and released. Repeat six times. ii) Lever spring shall also stand a transverse load of 15 kgf beforefailureofjointbetween levea and spring. 6. Workmanship and Finish - Brass body shall be finished smooth. Steel body shall be given a protective coating such as painting. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Face plate and striking plate shall be finished smooth and polished bright or satin, or chromium plated, anodized or oxidized. 7. Tests - The finally assembled latch shall withstand tests given in 9.1.1 to 9.1.3 of the standard.
2. Sizes - 65, 75 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length specified for size. Note - For typical illustration of a mortice lock see Fig. 1 of the standard. Material for different component parts shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.
3.
Material -
4.
Interchangeability - Component parts of latches of the same size andstype shall be completely interchangeable. Manufacture
a) Body - Depth 15 mm. b) Locking bolt mm. of body shall not exceed
S.
Section not less than 18 x 25
refer to IS : 5930-1970 Specification for mortice latch (vertical type).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6315-1971 FLOOR SPRINGS (HYDRAULICALLY FOR HEAVY DOORS

(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) nut.
REGULATED)
Scope - Requirements for concealed type floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for vertical doors weighing not more than 125 kg. In case of doors consisting of more than one leaf the weight of each leaf shall not exceed 125 kg.
2. Construction - Oil check shall work satisfactorily between 49C and - 10C without requiring any other change ecept by the adjustment of the Capstan 260
1.
Note - For typical details of floor spring see Fig. 1 of the

standard.
3.
3.1 Floor spring shall not show any change or deterioration in working after it has been subjected to 50 000 operations at a rate of not more than 6 to 8 operations per minute.
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Closing time of floor spring shall be easily adjustable between 3 and 20 seconds for which a suitable device to adjust the speed shall be provided.
3.3 Door leaf when opened through 90 plus 5 and released shall stand open till pushed back in the closing position. When opened to an angle less than 90, the door shall swing back automatically. 3.4 Force of not more than 2 kgf shall be required, at a distance of 1 m from the frame, to open the door leaf weighing 125 kg, through 90.
Note-For details regarding materials see 4 of the stmdurd.
4. 4.1
Finish
Floor spring shall be covered by one brass/ aluminium sheet which shall be flush with the floor. The cover sheet, shoe and top centre shall be polished or electroplated as mutually agreed.
4.2 Mild steel parts shall be given a synthetic stoving enamel finish according to prescribed sIrec$ications. Finish shall be smooth, uniform and shall not chip when tapped lightly with a pointed instrument.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6315-1971 Specification for floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for heavy doors.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6318-1971 PLASTIC WINDOW STAYS AND FASTENERS

1. Scope - Lays down performance and Rtnc tional requirements of window stays made of polypropylene and fasteners (handles) made of nylon.
2. 3.
Size and Shape

Length of window stay = 300mm Length of window fastener = 110 mm
Note For typical illustration see Fig. 1 of rhe srandurd.
Materials -
Requirements
of polypropylene: 4.
a) b) 4 d)
Density, 0.900 to 0.910 g/ml Tensile strength at yield, Min 315 kgf/cm* Impact strength, Min 3.7 kgf/cm (of notch) Walter absorption, MUX 0.04 percent e) Deflection temperature, Min 54C f) Weather resistance - Shall retain at least 50 percent of original alongation iit) Deformation underload, MUX 6.0 percent, 50C and 70 kg/cm*
Tests
4.1 Testfor Stays - Window stay shall be capable of restraining the shutter in three positions, at angles of 30, 60 and 90 with the frame. Tolerance in position of restraint: f5. 4.2 Test for Fasteners - Fastener shall be able to hold a force of 40 kgf (applied in increments of 5 kgf at one minute intervals).
Note-For
test procedures see 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6318-1971 Specification for plastic window stays and fasteners.
261
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6343-1982 DOOR CLOSERS (PNEUMATICALLY REGULATED) FOR LIGHT DOORS WEIGHING UP TO 40 kg
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for door closers (pneumatically regulated) for use on light doors weighing up to 40 kg. 2. Terminology 5.4 The speed of closing the door shall be adjusted by increase or decrease in the tension of helical spring. 5.5 The closer shall not show any sign of leakage in the air pressure. 5.6 Each closer shall be furnished with clear, detailed instructions for installation and regulation Of the closer.
Note - For typical illustration of the door closer, see Fig. 1 of the standard.
2.1 Door Closer (Pneumatically Regulated) - A pneumatic door closer (hereinafter called closer) is an equipment for automatic closing of doors and also for regulation of closing speed. 3. Materials 4 Cylinder - Brass tube mild steel tube/ aluminium tube, b) Piston/Piston Rod - Steel/cast iron/ aluminium alloy/zinc alloy, c) Brackets and Fittings - Mild steel/cast iron/aluminium alloy/zinc alloy/cast brass, 4 Spring - Steel, and screws - Brass/bronze/ d Regulating ah.uninium alloy/steel/zinc alloy.
6.
6.1 After being fitted in its position, when the door is opened through 90 and released, it shall swing back to an angle of 20 +5 with normal speed, but themaftcr the speed shall get automatically retarded till a smooth, final close is reached. 6.2 Endurance Test - The closer fitted to the door of maximum permissible weight shall be subjected to 50 000 operations at the rate of a maximum of 6 to 8 operations per minute. The number of operations to be carried out continuously at any time during the test shall not be less than 3 000. At the end of the test the closer shall show no defects, failure, or deterioration in its working. 7. Fildsb - The exposed surface shall be polished or pointed as agreed to mutually. In case of aluminium body, it may be anodized. All components of mild steel shall be pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease rust, scale or any other foreign element. The finish of mild steel surface shall be smooth, uniform and free from all visible defects with hard and tough film of enamel strongly adhering to the surface. All components shall be finished in colour as agreed to mutually.
4. DimelLsions and Tolerances - Shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 5. General Requirements
5.1 The surface of closer shall be clean, without sharpedges, free from cracks, dents, burrs or any other visible surface defects. 5.2 After fixing, the closer shall operate smoothly and quietly without any undue play during opening and closing operation. 5.3 The closer shall work satisfactorily at all temperatures between 40C and 10Cwithout requiring any other change except by adjustment of regulating screw.
Note -
For requirements regarding manufacture and details of finishing, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6343-1982 Specification for door closers (pneumatically regulated) for right doors weighing up to 40 kg (first revision).
262
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 66O2- 1972 VENTILATOR

POLE
1. Scope - Requirements rials for ventilator pole.

2.
for size, shape and mate-
free from fabrication, casting and surface defects. Surface shall be smooth. Two screw holes on side shall be counter sunk to suit wood screws No. 8. 5.
Dimensions
Length = 450 + 15 mm
Note - For typical illustration of a ventilator polesee Fig. 1 of the standard.
Finish
Bright finished, black painted or oxidized. Brass - Oxidized or plated. Aluminium - Natural or anodized finish. Wood -Waxed, french polished, varnished or painted.
Steel
and cast iron -
3. Materials - Cast iron, mild steel, cast brass, aluminium alloy, polypropylene or timber 4.
Manufacture -
Ventilator
pole hook shall be
refer to IS : 6602-1972 Specification for ventilator pole.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6607-1972 REBATED MORTICE LOCKS (VERTICAL

TYPE)
1.
Scope - Requirements suitable for use on double meeting stiles.
for rebated mortice locks leaf doors with rebated
b) Locking bolt - Section shall not be less than

12x 16 mm for all sizes of locks
c) Mechanism -
Locking mechanism shall be lever type with not less than two levers.
2. Sizes - 65,75 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end over the body in mm. The measured length shall not vary more than f 3 mm from the length specified for size.
Note - For typical design of rebated mortice locksee Fig. 1 of rhe standatd.
d) Lever spring -
Shall withstand the prescribed test. e) Keys - Two for each lock usable from inside and outside.
f) Latch bolt mm.
Section
not less than
12X 16
3.
Non-interchangeability - Two-lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of minimum of 24 locks. Locks with more than two levers shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a minimum of 100 locks. Manufacture
a) Body mm.
Note-For
4.
Workmanship and Finish - Brass body shall be finished smooth and polished. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Rebated face plate and striking plate may be polished, stained, chromium plated or oxidized. Steel body shall be given protectivecoating. Steel parts shall begiven specified protective treatment before painting.
6. Tests Shall withstand the tests specified in 9 of
5.
Depth of body shall not exceed 15
the standard.
requirements for materials for component parts of mortice locks see Table 1 of the standard.
refer to IS : 6607-1972 Specification for rebated mortice locks (vertical type).
263
SP : 21-1983
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel hold fasts for use with wooden doors and window frames.
2. Size and Dimensions Fig. 1. Shall be as given in
3. Manufacture - Shall be made from mild steel flats not less than 5 mm thick, and without any burrs or dents. 4. Finish sanded. Shall be given a coat of bitumen and
100-e
r
100
200
Fig. I Mild Steel Hold Fast
For detailed information, refer to IS : 71961974 Specification for hold fast.
264
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7197- 1974 DOUBLE ACTION FLOOR SPRINGS (WITHOUT CHECK) FOR HEAVY DOORS
1. Scope - Requirements for concealed type floor springs (without oil check) for vertical doors weighing not more than 125 kg. For doors having more than one leaf. the weight of each leaf shall not exceed 125 kg.
2. Type and Shape - For typical details of a floor spring see Fig. 1 of rhr standard.
OIL
brass or aluminium sheet which only shall be flush with the floor. Provision shall be made in floor springs for adjusting door leaf to final closed position by turning the adjusting screw. 6. Performance Requirements - A sample mounted to a door leaf weighing 125 kg shall be subjected to 50 000 operations (that is movement of door leaf through 180) at the rate of not more than 6 to 8 operations per minute. Floor spring shall not show any damage or deterioration at the end of test. A force of not more than 2 kgf shall be required at a distance of one metre from the door frame, to open the door leaf weighing 125 kg through 90. 7. Finish - Cover sheet, shoe and top centre pivot shall be polished, electroplated or anodized. Mild steel and cast iron parts shall be given a synthetic stoving enamel finish according to prescribed specifications. The finish shall be smooth, uniform and shall not chip when tapped lightly with a pointed instrument. Aluminium parts shall be anodized.
3.
Materials box, main body and half a) Foundation cover - Brass sheet 1.25 mm, Min thick, mild steel sheet 1.25 mm, Min thick, cast iron;
aluminium Min thick; Min thick castings 2 b) Spring alloy pressure die-castings 2 mm, aluminium alloy sheet 1.25 mm, or zinc base alloy pressure diemm, Min thick. rod Mild steel
Note - For requirements for materials for other parts of floor

spring see Table 1 of he standard. 4.
Di&ensions and Tolerances Construction -
tween the purchaser 5.
As agreed to beand the manufacturer. Floor spring shall be covered by
For detailed information, check) for heavy doors.
refer to IS : 7197-1974 Specification for double action floor springs (without oil
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7534-1974
1.
MILD STEEL LOCKING BOLTS WITH HOLES FOR PADLOCKS

Size
mm 200 250 300
Scope - Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finishof mild steel locking door bolts commonly used in general building construction for locking doors, gates, etc, withlpadlocks.
2. 3.
Length of Bolt Plate

mm 260f3 310f3 360+3
Lengdt of Bolt
mm 200f2 250+2 300+2
Dia of Bolt
mm 12kO.5 12f0.5 12f0.5
Sizes -
150, 200, 250 and 300 mm.
Dimensions and Tolerances Size

mm 150
4. Dia of Bolt
mm 12+0.5
Manufacture - Shall have smooth sliding action. Shall not have sharp edges and comers. Finish - Shall be copper oxidized, electrogalvanized or stove enamelled black. In case of stove enamelled locking bolts, the bolts may be finished bright.
Length of Bolt Plate

mm 210+3
Length of Bolt
mm 150+2
5.
For detailed information, padlocks.
refer to IS : 7534-1974 Specification for mild steel locking bolts with holes for
265
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7540-1974 MORTICE DEAD LOCKS

1. Scope Requirements for mortice dead locks. minimum of 24 locks. Locks withmore than twolevers shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a minimum of 100 locks. 5. Manufacture a) Body - Depth of body shall not exceed 15 mm. b) Locking bolt - Section shall not be less than 10X30 mm. c) Levers - Not less than two. d) Lever spring - Shall withstand the prescribed tests without showing any sign of permanent set. e) Keys - Two for each lock. 6. Finish - Brass body shall be finished smooth and polished. Aluminium alloy body be anodized. Face plate and striking plate shall be polished, painted, plated or oxidized. Steel body shall be given suitable protective coating. 7. Tests - Shall withstand of the standard. the tests specified in 9
Note - Mortice dead locks have a single bolt which is shot and withdrawn by means of key (from either side) providing reasonable degree of security. Being lock for occasional rather than frequent use it is well suited for use alone, or as an additional lbck for the doors of store rooms, cellers, warehouses, etc. 2. Sizes - 45, 65 and 75mm. Size is denoted by length of face over the body in mm. Measured length shall not vary by more than + 3 mm from length specified for size.
Note For typical details of mortice dead locks see Fig. 1 of
the standard.
3.
Material
3.1 Body, B&y Cover - Mild steel, cast brass, brass sheet, aluminium alloy castings and sheets and zinc base alloy casting.
Note - For requirements for materials for other component parts see Table 1 of the standard.
4. Non-interchangeability shall have non-interchangeable
- Two-lever locks keys in a batch of a
refer to IS : 7540-1974 Specification for mortice dead locks.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8756-1978 BALL CATCHES

1. Scope - Requirements for material, sizes and finish of ball catches for use in wooden almirahs.
2.
FOR USE IN WOODEN ALMIRAHS

closed position, it shall be retained in that position by the spring action of the ball catch and working shall be ensured in continuous usage. Door shall open only when it is pulled to open. Workmanship and Finish - Shall have smooth and easy working. Body and striking plate shall be satin or bright polished.
Sizes - 6,7.5,9.5 and 12.5 mrn.Size is denoted by the external diameter of the cylinder.
Note - For detailed dimensions ball catch refer to the standard.
and typical illustration of a
4.
3.
Manufacture
When
the almirah door is in
refer to IS : 8756-1978 Specification for ball catches for use in wooden almirahs.
266
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8760- 1978 MORTICE SLIDING DOOR LOCKS WITH

LEVER MECHANISM
1. Scope - Requirements for mortice sliding door locks having lever mechanism.
2. Siie - 70 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by the overall length of the body in millimetres measured from the outside face of the fore end to rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length specified for size.
Note - Locks of other sizes permitted where mutually agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 24 locks. Locks with more than two levers shall have noninterchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 100 locks. 6.
Finish
Brass body - Finished smooth Steel body - Suitable protective
coating such as
3. Shape and Design - Any shape but shall be capable of being opened with key from both sides.
Note - For typical illustration of mortice siding door locksee Fig. 1 of rhe sznndard
painting.
Face
Aluminiuy allay body - Anodized plate and striking plate - Finished smooth
and polished bright or satin. May be chromium plated, anodized or oxidized where so desired by purchaser.
4. Dimensions - As agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 5.
Non-interchangeability
Two
lever
locks
7. Tests - Shall withstand the tests specified in10 of the standard.
For detailed information, mechanism.
refer to IS : 8760-1978 Specification for mortice sliding door locks with lever
267
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
PLY WOOD IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
: : : : : : : Title Page revision) revision) (first revision)
303-1975 13281982 1659-1979 4990-1981 5509-1980 5539-1969 7316-1974
Plywood for general purposes (second Veneered decorative plywood (second Block boards (second revision) Plywood for concrete shuttering work Fire retardant plywood @firstrevision) Preservative treated plywood Decorative plywood using plurality of
veneers for decorative faces
271 273 274 275 276 278 280
PARTICLE BOARDS AND FIBRE BOARDS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS

: 1658-1977 : 3087-1%5 : 3097-1980 : 3129-1965 : 3308-1981 : -3348-1%5 : 3478-1%6
Fibre hardboards (second revision) Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes Veneered particle boards (jirst revision) Particle board for insulation purposes Wood wool building slabs Sfirst revision) Fibre insulation boards High density wood particle boards
281 282 283 285 286 287 288
270
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 303-1975 PLYWOOD
FOR GENERAL
No. 1 to 3) AC, AD, quality of .defects. Maximum
PURPOSES
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments
1. Scope - Requirements of different grades and types of plywood used for general purposes.
2. Grades (Depending bonding veneers): on type of adhesive used for
BB, BC, BD, CC, CD and DD based on face and back surface in terms of permissible For quality requirements see Table 1. number of permissible defects per m3 shall
a) Boiling water proof or BWP Grade b) Boiling water resistant or BWR Grade 1 c) Warm water resistant or WWR Grade d) Cold water resistant or CWR Grade 1
3.
Species of timber used shall be those given in Class 1 of Appendix A of the standard. Species of timber used shall be those given in Class I and II of Appendix A of the standard.
Types Based on Classification by Appearante - Classified into 10 types, namely, AA, AB,
TABLE SL No. (1) i) DEFECT , 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
be 3, 6, 9 and no limit for surface types A, B, C, D

respectively.
OF PLYWOOD FOR GENERAL PURPOSES
TYPE OF SURFACES
(2)
Blister Nil Nil Nil Occasional
ii) Checks
Individual check not Individual check not Individual check not Individual check not more than 100 mm in more than 50 mm in more than 25 mm in more than 125 mm in length, and the total length, and the total length, and the total length, and the total length not more than length not more than length not more than length not more than 300 mm/ma 1000 mm/ma 600 mm/ma 1 200 mm/m2 25 percent of the area Nil 5 cm/m2 Scattered up holes/ma to 50 percent of the area Nil 15 cm/ma up 12 Scattered holes/ma to 24 75 percent of the area 20 percent 15 cm/m2 Scattered up to holes/ma may permitted No restriction 50 be
iii) Discolouration 3 percent of the area (sound not injurious) iv) Discolouration (unsound) v) Dote vi) Insect hole Nil Nil Nil
vii) Joints
None in 250 mm wide Not more than one in No restriction 250 mm wide face face and in wider and in wider faces faces, one joint for one joint for every every multiple of multiple of 200 mm 200 mm in width provided no indiviprovided no individual piece is less than dual piece is less than 100 mm in width 125 mm in width Nil 2 up to 12 mm dia/ma 4 up to 20 mm dialma
viii) Knots (dead)
8 knots up to 20 mm in dia/ma including drop out knot holes may be permitted lo/ma No restriction
ix) Pin knots (dead) x) Pin knots (live)
Nil Permitted, provided they do not mar the appearance 3 up to 25 mm dia/m2
2/m2
6/m2 No restriction
No restriction
xi) Knots (tight)
6 up to 25 mm dia/ma
No restriction
No restriction
(Continued)
271
SP : 21-1983
TABLE
SL No. DEFECT
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
OF PLYWOOD
FOR GENERAL
PURPOSES - Confa
TYPE OF SURFACES h
(1)
(2) Nil 4 patches/m* provided Any number, provided they are all tight they are all tight -and are patches patches and do not matched for colour mar the appearance Any number, provided they are all tight patches and properly made
xii) Patches
xiii) Splits
One split, not more 2 splits, not more than 3 splits, not more than 6 splits, not more than 25 mm wide and 10 mm wide and than 1.0 mm wide 6 mm wide and total total length not extotal length not more and not longer than length not more than ceeding 400 mm 50 mm provided it is than 300 mm provi200 mm provided filled with a suitable they are filled with ded they are filled filler with suitable veneer suitable veneer inserts inserts. Splits up to 25 mm long and 0.8 mm wide may be ignored provided they are suitably filled No restriction Up to 4/m* provided Unlimited, provided they do not mar the they do not mar the appearance appearance No restriction
xiv) Swirl
4.
Dimensions
and Tolerances 240x 120 240x 90 210x 120 210x90 180x 120 180X 90 150x 120 150x 90 120x 120 90x 90
Above 120 cm Width 90 cm & below Above 90 cm Thickness up to 5 mm 6to9mm Above 9 mm
a) Size (in cm) 300X 150
+6 mm -0mm +3 mm -0 mm +6 mm -0 mm 210 percent +7 percent +5 percent
b) Thickness Board 3-Plv 5-Ply 7-Ply 9-Ply 1 l-Ply S1No. i) ii) iii) iv) BWP BWR WWR CWR
(in mm) Tlkkness 3.4. 5, 6 5; 6; 8; 9 9, 12, 15, 16 12, 15, 16, 19 19, 22, 25 5. Finish - Edge of the boards shall be trimmed square within 3 mm and sanded to a smooth finish. 6. Tests
6.1 Glue Adhesion - Shall have the following minimum shear strength (kg): Dry State 135 110 135 110 100 80 70 55 Mycological 100 80 100 80 80 65 35 30 Resistance to Moisture 100 80 100 80 80 65 35 30
Grade Average Individual Average Individual Average Individual Average Individual
c) Tolerance Length 120 cm & below
+3 mm and -0 mm 272
6.2 Moisture Content - Not less than 5 percent and not more than 15 percent.
SP : 21-1983
Note l-For species of timber to be used for faces, cores and cross-bands see Appendix A of the standard. Adhesive for bonding the veneers in different grades of plywood shall be the corresponding type of adhesive as specified in IS : 848-1974 Specification for synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision). Note 2-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1734 (Parts I to XX)-1972 Methods of test for plywood (first revision) and Appendix B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS : 303-1975 Specification for plywood for general purposes (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1328-1982 VENEERED DECORATIVE
PLYWOOD
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of types of plywood with ornamental veneers on one or both faces used for decorative purposes, such as furniture making, panelling of all kinds, including panelling for railway coaches, buses and ships. 2. Types and Type 2. Shall be of two types, namely,Type 1 synthetic resin. Decorative veneer shall be rotary cut or sliced not more than 1 mm thick. N&e- For species of timber commonly used for decorative veneers or decorative plywood, see Table 1 of the standard.
4.
Type 1 - Open splits, checks or open joints up to 150x0.5 mm permissible, provided these are rectified with a veneer insert bonded with synthetic resin adhesive. Shall be free from tom grain, dead knots, dote, discolouration and sapwood. Veneers shall be matched or mismatched to achieve decorative effect. Type2 - Same as Type 1 except that the rectified open splits, checks or open joints may be up to 200x 1 mm. Tight knots and patches not more than 25 mm in diameter, and pin knots not more than 4 mm in diameter shall be permissible. Sapwood would be permissible, if it does not affect appearance. Material - Species of timber for decorative face shall be specified by the purchaser. Timber for cores and backs shall be either of Class I or II specified in IS : 3031985*. Adhesive shall be BWR or WWR
3.
*Specification revision). for plywood for general purposes (second
Tolerances Length Upto 120mm Above 120 mm Width Up to 90 mm Above 90 mm
f3 mm f6 mm +3 mm f6 mm
Thickness + 10 percent of nominal thickness -5 percent of nominal thickness 5. Tests a) Moisture Content - Not less than 5 percent and not more than 15 percent. b) Water Resistance Test - Shall not show delamination or blister formation after the specified test. c) Test for Adhesion of Plies minimum of pass standard, Shall show a
Note- For methods of test see 9.1.2.1 of rhe standard. Finish - Edges of decorative plywood shall be 6. trimmed square within 3 mm and sanded to a smooth finish.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1734 (Part I)-1972 Methods of tests for plywood: Part I Determination of density and moisture content (first revision), IS : 1734 (Part V)-1972 Methods of tests for plywood: Part V Test for adhesion of plies (first revision), and 9.1.2.1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1328-1982 Specification for veneered decorative plywood (second revision). 273
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1659-1979 BLOCK BOARDS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of commercial and decorative blockboards meant for interior and exterior uses.
2.
4.
Dimensions and Tolerances Dimensions a> Length -
Grades and Types

Grades a) Grade I - Exterior grade meant for bus bodies, railway coaches, prefabricated houses, where it is likely to be exposed to rain, high humidity, etc. b) Grade 2 - Interior grade meant for furniture, partition, panelling, ceiling, etc.
2.1
300, 270, 240, 210, 180, 150 and 120 cm; b) Width - 150, 120 and 90 cm; and c) Thickness - 12, 16, 20, 25, 30, 32, 35, 38,40, 45 and 50 mm.
Tolerances a) Length +6 mm,

b) Width +6 mm, and c) Thickness f5 percent up to 35 mm thickness & 2.5 percent above 25 mm thickness.
Note - Length of diagonals shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm per metre length of diagonal.
5.
2.2.
types:
Types -
Each grade shall be of the following
a) Type I - Decorative tyype with ornamental veneers on one or both faces for use in high Class furniture, panelling, interior decorations, partitions, etc.
b)
Tests Dimensional Changes Caused by Humidity -
5.1 Type 2 Commercial type with faces of commercial timber for use for ordinary fumiture, table tops, partitions and panelling, seats of bus bodies, railway carriages, etc.
2.3
Representation by symbols Grade and Type

.Grade Grade Grade Grade 1, 1, 2, 2, Type Type Type Type 1 2 1 2
Dimensions shall not change by more than + 1 mm at relativehumiditiesof 9Opement and40percentcompared to the dimensions of the block board conditioned at 65 percent relative humidity. There shall be no delamination and the changes in local planeness shall not be more than l! 150. 5.2 Resistance to Water scribed test. Shall satisfy the pre-
Symbol
XDEC XCGM IDFC ICOM
3.
Materials Adhesive -
5.3 Adhesion of Plies - Veneers shall offer resistance to separation and the fractured surface shall show some adherent fibredistributed more or less uniformly. 5.4 Mycological Test - Shall show no appreciable signs of separation at the edges. 5.5 If required by the purchaser, additional tests, namely, central loading of plate test, flexural strength and deflection under sustained load test may be performed.
3.1
B WP type for Grade 1 and BWR or WWR type for Grade 2. Note - For details regarding timber for core, crossbands and face veneers of commercial type and decorative type, refer to
Appendices A and B of the standard.
Note-
For test procedures
see Appendices
C to H of the
standard.
refer to IS : 1659-1979 Specification for blockboards (second revision).
274
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4990-1981 PLYWOOD
FOR CONCRETE
SHUTTERING
WORK
(First Revision)
1. 1.1 Scope shuttering Requirements work. of plywood for concrete 3.3 Face with plastic coating, or with suitable overlay shall be dense, smooth, without blister and without patch marks and shah be of uniform colour. 4.
Recommended method for handling, storing and use of plywood of concrete shuttering and formwork is covered in Appendix A of the standard. 2.
Tests
Shall be between 5 and 15

,
4.1
2.1
Size (Length X Width) - 240 X 120, 240 X90., 210 x 120, 210 x 90, 180 x 120, 180 x90, 150 x 120,150 x90, 120x 120, 120 X 90,120 x60 and90 X90cm.
Moisture Content percent. Glue Adhesion
4.2
in Dry State
2.2 Thickness - 4,5,6 mm for 3-ply; 6,8, 10 mm for 5-ply; 13, 16 mm for 7-ply; 16, 19 mm for 9-ply; 22, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm for more than 9-ply. 2.3 Tolerances Length up to 120 cm and width up to 90 cm Length above 120 cm and width above 90 cm Thickness up to 5 mm Thickness above 5 mm
4.2.1 Glue shear strength - Average failing load shall be not less than 1 323.9 N and no individual value shall be less than 1 078.7 N. 4.2.2 Adhesion ofplies - The veneers shall offer appreciable resistance to separation and the fractured samples shall show some adherent fibms distributed mom or less uniformly. 4.3 Water Resistance Test
+3 mm +6 mm
* 10 percent
f 15 percent 4.3.1 Glue shear strength - Average failing load shall be not less than 980.7 N and no individual value shall be less than 784 N. 4.3.2 Adhesion of plies same as given in 4.2.2 Requirements shall be (
3.
Finish
3.1
Shall be smooth and the faces and back shall be free from harmful discolouration, pleates overlaps and loose knots. Edges shall be of smooth uniform finish. shah be permitted as
3.2 Gaps and open joints follows:
a) Inface - Provided the gap or opening does not exceed a width of 0.4 mm, if it-exceeds 0.4 mm, if it exceed 0.4 mm, this may be rectified by well fitted veneer inserts of a minimum width 4.8 mm provided the gram of the veneer does not exceed in deviation by more than 10 percent from the grain direction of the surrounding veneer.
4.4 Plywood for concrete shuttering work with plastic coating or with suitable overlay after being subjected to 72 hours boiling shall not show any softening, checking, cracking or deterioration of the surface layer. 4.5 Plywood manufactured from species not naturally durable, shall show more or less uniform absorption of preservative on the entire surface. 4.6 Tensile Strength
b) In Core (cross-band) -
Width of opening shall not exceed 0.8 mm in the case of 3-ply or 3.2 mm in the case of multi-ply, provided the openings are not less than 30 cm apart in any veneer and staggered not less than 15 cm between any veneer and the next one with the same grain direction. 275
a) Not less than 318 kN/m2, parallel to grain

direction of face veneers;
b) Not less than 220 kN/m2 at right angles to

grain direction of face veneers; and
c) Sum of tensile strengths in both directions not

less than 588 kN/m2.
SP : 21-1983
4.7 Mycological Test - Test piece shall show no appreciable signs of separation at edges of veneers and
Note-For IS IS IS IS IS
shall comply with requirements and 4.3.2.
given in 4.3.1
test procedures, refer to IS : 1734 Method of test for plywood:
: : : : :
1734 (Part 1734 (Part 1734 (Part 1734 (Part 1734 (Part
I)-1972 Part I Determination of density and moisture content (first revision) IV)-1972 Part IV Determination of glue shear strength (first revision) V)-1972 Part V Test for adhesion of plies (first revision) VII)-1972 Part VII Mycological test (first revkion) IX)-1972 Part IX Determination of tensile strength (fkt revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4990-1981 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5509-1980 FIRE RETARDANT
PLYWOOD
(First Revision)
1. scopeFireretardant formulations, method of treatment retentions and requirements of fire retardant plywood.
Type 4 Combination of ammonium phosphate and boron compounds Type 5 Combination of ammonium sulphate and ammonium phosphate 2.1 Where flame retardant and preservative tmatment am requited together, types of chemical and their retention shall be as follows:
2.
Flame Retard&s Type 1 Ammonium phosphates Type 2 Boron compounds Type 3 Ammonium sulphate
Tvpe
6 7 8 9 Ammonium Ammonium Ammonium Ammonium
Flame Retardant
Preservative
phosphate c phosphate/ammonium sulphate phosphate/ammonium sulphate/boron compounds phosphate/ammonium sulphate/boron compounds
Copper/chrome Copper/chrome Copper/chrome Copper/chrome
Retention of Preservative kg/m3, Min 6 6 6 8
276
SP : 21-1983
3. Preparation of Plywood for Treatment Plywood for treatment shall conform to BWR type and shall have moisture content not over 16 percent. 4. Recommended Situations Treatment for Different
5. Workmanship and Finish - Finished plywood shall be reasonably clean to handle and fme of dirt and stain other than any uniform colour of flame retardant solution. 6. Tests Requirements Shall be between 5 and 15
a) For interior use against fire
hazard, namely, interior linings, partitions andi fitments of ship cabins, boiler
houses, kitchens, ceiling of rail coaches, vehicle body interiors, exhibition stall, etc.
Type 1 to 5 with retention of fire retardant 20 kglm3, Min
6.1 Moisture Content percent.
6.2 Flammabiliry - Time taken for second ignition, not less than 30 minutes. 6.3 Flame Penetration - Not less than 15 minutes for every 6 mm thickness. 6.4 Rate cf Burning - Time taken to lose weight from 30 percent to 70 percent shall not be less than 20 minutes. 6.5 Retention qf Preservatives - Net value shall not be less than the values specified in 2.1 and 4.
b) For interior or exterior use

not subject to leaching by rain and water against fire hazard and high risk of decay or insect attack; namely wall and roof linings, external roofing, claddings or ceilings of buildings, vehicle bodies, etc. Note l-Dimensions
Type 6 to 9 with retention of fire retardant and preservative 15 kg/m3,
Min
and tolerances of fire retardant plywood shall conform to IS : 303-1975 Specification for plywood for general
purposes (second revision). Note 2-For test procedures for the tests specified, refer to IS : 1734(Part I)-1972 Method of test for plywood: Part I Determination of density and moisture content (first revision); IS : 1734 (Part III)-1972 Method of test for plywood: Part III Determination of fire resistance (first revision); and IS : 2753 (Part I)-1964 Methods of estimation of preservatives in treated timber and in treating solution: Part I Determination of copper, arsenic, chromium, zinc, boron, creosote and fuel oil.
Note 3-Plywood when tested for glue shear strength in dry state, mycological test, water resistance test and for any other mechanical property as agreed to shall meet requirements of BWR grade general purpose plywood conforming to IS : 303-1975 Specification for plywood for general purposes (second revision).
refer to IS : 5509-1980 Specification for fire retardant plywood (first revision).
277
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 5539-1969 PRESERVATIVE
1. Scope -Treatment of plywood for protection against fungi, termites and other insects and marine borers and requirements of preservative treated plywood. 2. Types of Preservatives a) Type 1 (Oil Type) - Coal tar creosote with or without admixture with various grades of petroleum and other oils having high boiling point.
TREATED PLYWOOD
ture content not exceeding 16 percent and shall have been bonded with water resistant glue of BWR type. 4. Choice of Treatment - This is governed by the timber species in the plywood, sapwood content and use after treatment. Recommended practice on choice of preservative and amount of absorption and service conditions is given in Table 1.
Note - For information regarding natural durability and degree of treatability of different species of timbersee Appendix B of the standard.
5.
b) Type 2 (Organic Solvent Type) - Copper/

zinc naphthenate, pentachlorophenol, hexachloride and DDT . benzene
Modes of Treatment
cl Type .J (Water Soluble Non-jking Type) Zinc chloride, boric acid, borax, sodium fluoride and sodium pentachlorophenate.
a) By pressure impregnation after manufacture.
b) By soaking
manufacture.
or surface
application
after
4 Type 4 (Water Soluble Fixed Type) Copper-chrome arsenic composition, acid,copper-chrome composition, chromated zinc chloride and copper chrome boric composition. 3. Preparation of Plywood for Treatment Plywood for preservative treatment shall have moisTABLE 1
cl By treatment of dry or wet veneers before

assembly. 6. Conditioning - Plywood after treatment shall be conditioned to a moisture content of not more than 14 percent for interior use and 18 percent for exterior uses. If the plywood is to be painted subsequently, the moisture content shall be between 6 and 14 percent.
RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT OF PLYWOOD FOR VARIOUS SERVICE CONDITIONS
TIMBER USED IN PLYWOOD ACCORDING TO THE RELEVANT INDIAN STANDARD ON PLYWOOD REQUIRED TOBE TYPE OF PRESERVATIVE RECOMMENDED MODE OF TREATMENT RECOM-
SL
No.
SERVICECONDITIONS FOR TREATED PLYWOOD
MINIMUM RETENTION
MENDED (4) Type 4 (Copper-chromearsenic composition or acid-copper-chrome composition) (5) Pressure process Veneer treatment
(1)
(2) i) Plywood in direct contact with water or ground and required to be painted as for pontoons, boats. rafts, tugs, fence posts, box, columns, etc (IS : 710-1976*)
TREATED (3) All
(6)
kg/m3 12.0 12.0
ii) Plywood in direct contact with water or ground and required to be painted as for pontoons, boats, rafts, tugs, fence posts, box, columns, etc (IS : 7101976) but plywood not requiring light painting or only back coal tar base (IS : 710-1976*) iii) Marine structures exposed marine borer danger (IS : 710-1976*) to
All
a) Type 4 (Copper-chromearsenic composition or acid-copper-chrome composition) b) Type, 1 [Creosote or creosote fuel oil mixture (50 : SO)]
Pressure process Pressure process
12.0
100.0
All
Type 1 [Creosote or creosote fuel oil mixture (50 : 5O)j
Pressure process
200.0
(Continued)
278
SP : 21-1983
TABLE
1 RECOMMENDED
PRACTICE FOR PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT OF PLYWOOD FOR VARIOUS SERVICE CONDITIONS Contd
SL No.
SERVICE CONDITIONS FOR TREATED PLYWOOD
(1)
(2)
plywood
TIMBER USEDIN PLYWOOD ACCORIXNG TOTHE RELEVANT INDIAN STANDARD ONPLYWOOD REQUIRED TOBE TREATED (3) All
TYPEOF PRESERVATIVE RECOMMENDED
MINIMUM MODEOF TREATMENTRETENTION REcotvfMENDED (5) Pressure process Veneer treatment Veneer treatment (6) 12.0 12.0 12.0
(4)
iv) Concrete shuttering (IS : 4990-19697)
Type 4 (Copper-chromearsenic composition or acid-copper-chrome composition) Type 4 (Copper-chromearsenic composition or acid-copper-chrome composition)
v) Plywood for outer cladding of houses, roofing, bunkers and shelters, and in other conditions exposed to rain, sun and outer weather but requiring painting (IS : 303-1875$ BWR Grade) vi) Plywood f6r outer cladding of houses, roofing, bunkers and shelters, and in other conditions exposed to rain, sun and outer weather but requiring painting, but paint and colour not important (IS : 303-1975$ BWR Grade) vii) Plywood for bus fiooring or rail coach flooring (IS : 303-1975$ BWR Grade)
All
All
Type 1 [Creosote or creosote fuel oil mixture (50 : 5O)l
Pressure process
100.0
All
Type 4 (Copper-chromearsenic composition or acid-copper-chrome composition) or Type 1 [Creosote or creosote fuel oil mixture (50 : SO)] Type 4 (Copper-chromearsenic composition or acid-copper-chrome composition) or Type 2
Pressure process
75.0
75.0 Pressure or soaking 5.5 4.5
viii) Plywood not in direct contact with ground or water but exposed and given paint or varnish regularly as in plywood for rail coach ceilings, partitioning and other interior use, bus interior, ammunition boxes, exterior doors, etc (IS : 303-1975$ BWR Grade) ix) Decorative panelling on rail coaches and ship building (IS : 303-l975$ BWR Grade) x) Plywood for internal uses in dry localities, such as inner partitions, panelling, wall boarding, ceiling and furniture (IS : 303-1975$ and IS : 132819705) *Specification tSpecification SSpecification OSpecification for for for for
All timbers except when only heartwood of durable timber is used
do
Type 2 or Type 3 not colour imparting Type 2 or Type 3 or Type 4
Pressure process or soaking Pressure process or soaking
4.0
do
4.0
marine plywood @st revision). plywood for concrete shuttering work. plywood for general purposes (second revision). veneered decorative plywood Cfirst revision).
Note- For information regarding natural durability and degree of treatability of different species of timber see Appendix B of the standard.
refer to IS : 5539-1969 Specification for preservative treated plywood.

279
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 7316-1974 DECORATIVE PLYWOOD USING PLURALITY OF VENEERS FOR DECORATIVE FACES

1. scopeCovers decorative plywood with omamental faces produced by use of plurality of veneers meant for decorative use, such as interior panelling of buildings, buses, ships, etc, and for decorative fumiture of all types.
2.
5.
Tolerances
Length up to 120 cm +3 mm -0 mm +6mm Length above 120 cm -0mm +3mm Width up to 90 cm -0 mm +6 mm Width above 90 cm -0mm Thickness +0.2 mm + 5 percent of nominal thickness -0.1 mm + 2.5 percent of nominal thickness Rectangular panels shall have their diagonal lengths not varying beyond 9 mm.
Material
2.1
Timber - Class I, II or III specified in IS : 303 - 1975*. Non-durable timbers and sapwood of all other timbers shall be given a preservative treatment .
2.2 Adhesive WWR. Synthetic resin adhesive BWR or
2.3 Plywood, when used, shall be BWR or WWR synthetic resin bonded type. 3. Permissible Defects - Open splits, checks or open joints not more than 150 mm long and 0.5 mm wide, provided the same are rectified with a matching veneer insert bonded with BWR or WWR adhesive. Decorative veneered surface shall be free from tom grain, dote, worm hole, discolouration or other visual defects. 4.
6. Finish - Trimmed smooth finish.
square
and
sanded
to
7.
Tests
Standard Dimensions
Length Width Thickness 240, 210, 180, 150, 120, and 90 cm 120 and 90 cm 3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 19 and 25 mm
general purposes (secondrevision ).
7.1 Moisture Content - Not less than 5 percent and not more than 15 percent when tested in accordance with IS : 1734 (Part U-1972*. 7.2 Water Resistance Test lamination or blister formation.
*Methods of test for plywood : Part and moisture content (/h-s? revision).
Shall not show de-
I Determination of density
*Specification for plywoodfor
refer to IS : 73161974 Specification for decorative plywood using plurality of
veneers for decorative faces.
280
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1658-1977 FIBRE HARDBOARDS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of fibre hardboards for general purposes. This standard does not cover requirements of insulation boards, wood particle boards (chip boards), and similar boards. 2. Types manufacture, properties. Classified according to their method of density, mechanical and physical between . ii) Standard hardboard iii) Tempered hardboard Tolerance (mm)+;.4 b) Width c) Length 3 4 5 6 9
f0.4
+0.4 +0.5 +0.7 +3 mm
1.2 m; tolerance
a) Medium hardboard - Density 0.35 g/cm3 and 0.8 g/cm3 b) Standard hardboard 0.80 g/cm3 Density
1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 3.0, 3.6, 4.8 and 5 5 m; tolerance +5 mm
more than
c) Tempered hardboard - Hardboard further treated during manufacture to modify their properties.
d) Boards shall be rectangular and shall have square edges. Difference between lengths of two diagonals shall not exceed +-3 mm per metre length of diagonal. 4. Requirements :
Thickness
mm a) Medium hardboard all thicknesses 3 b) Standard hardboard 4 5 6I 9 c) Tempered hardboard all thicknesses
Bending Strength (Modulus of Rupture Average)

MPa 6
Water Absorption After 24 h Immersion, Percent MaX

40
30
30 50
40
30 20
3,
Dimensions a) Thickness
and Tolerances (mm) 6 8 10 12
5.
i) Medium hardboard Tolerance(mm)+O.S
Workability and Finish a) Hardboards shall not crack, split or chip when drilled, sawed or nailed perpendicularly to the surface. b) Shah be free from warp. Note - For test procedures for determination of density, bending strength and water absorption see Appendices A, B and C of he standard.
+0.7 +0.7 f0.9
refer to IS : 1658-1977 Specification for fibre hardboards (second revision)
281
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3087-1965 WOOD PARTICLE BOARDS (MEDIUM FOR GENERAL PURPOSES

DENSITY)
1. Scope - Material, methods of manufacture, and finish of grades, types, sizes, construction medium-density wood particle boards for general purposes. It does not cover high-density particle boards of specific gravity exceeding 0.9, veneered particle board and also specially treated boards like moulded particle boards, compregnated boards or particle boards faced by impregnated paper surface.
2.
c) Sizing material (introduced primarily to increase water resistance) - Paraffin wax. 4.
Dime&ions and Tolerances

a) Length - 485 (480), 365 (360), 300, 270, 240, 210, 180, 150, 120, 100 and 90 cm. Tolerance +6 mm up to 150 cm and +9 mm above 150cm. _
Types and Designation Type

a) b) c) d) Flat pressed, single-layer board Flat pressed, three-layer board Extrusion pressed, solid board Extrusion pressed, tubular core board Designation FPSI FPTH XPSO XPTU
b) Width 45 cm.
180, 150, 120, 100, 90, 60 and
Tolerance + 6 mm up to 150 cm and f 9 mm above 150 cm.
cl Thickness -
6,9,12,16,19,20,22,22,25, 27, 30, 35, 40, 45 aIld 50 mm.
3.
Materials
a)
Tolerance f5 percent up to 25 mm and f2.5 percent above 25 mm.
Wood particles shall be produced by cutting wood into shavings, flakes, splinters or slivers on a chipping machine.
4 Lengths of two diagonals of a wood particle

board, rectangular panel, shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm.
b) Adhesive shall be BWR, WWR or unextended CWR type.
4 Edges of the board shall be straight with a

tolerance of 3 mm.
TABLE 1 STRENGTH AND OTHER CHARACTERISTICS OF VARIOUS TYPES OF WOOD PARTICLE BOARDS
TYPE OF BULK VARIATION WATER ABSORPTION, SWELLING PERCENT, SWELLING DUE TO SURFACE MINIMUM MODULUS OF RUPTURE MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH PERPENDICULARTO SURFACE (12) kgf/cm* 8 (13) kcal cm/ m2 hC FPSI 500 to 900 FPTH 500 to 900 XPSO 500 to 900 XPTU 500 to 0.12 wise (II) kgf/cm* 90 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY Max
FMARD DENSITY DENSITY,

PERCENT ,_A_.
MUX
._b-,
MUX
(1) (2)
kg/m3
2-h
Soaking
24-h ThickSoaking (5) ness
Length Width ABSORPTION ,_.-,

IN THICKNESS Length- Width-
MUX
wise (IO) kgf/cm* 90
(3)
(4)
(7) (3) (6) Percent Percent Percent 12 0.5 0.5
(9) Percent 9
f 10
30
70
+ 10
40
80
12
110
110
0.12
f 10
40
80
12
20
12
0.12
*10
45
80
12
10
0.06
900
Note-The values for minimum modulus of rupture should be multiplied by 0.8, when the thickness of the board exceeds 20 mm.
282
SP : 21-1983
5.
Physical
Characteristics
5.6
Modrclus
of Rupture (see Table
1)
5.1 Density - Shall be between 500 to 900 kg/m3. Variation in density shall not exceed 10 percent. 5.2 Moisture Content - Shall be between 7 and 16 percent. Variation of individual from mean shall not exceed f3 percent. 5.3 5.4 5.5
5.7
5.8
Tensile Strength Perpendicular to Surface (see Thermal Conductivity (see Table 1)
Table 1)
5.9 Workability - Shall not crack or split when drilled, sawed and nailed perpendicularto lbe surface. 6. Finish - Shall be of uniform thickness and density throughout thelength and width. These shall be flat and sanded to a smooth finish on both the -faces.
Water Absorption (see Table 1) Swelling in Water (see Table 1) Swelling Due to Surface Absorption (see Table 1)
Note-For test procedures, see IS : 2380-1963 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic materials and IS : 3129-1965 Specification for particle board for insulation purposes.
For detailed information, for general purposes.
refer to IS : 3087-1965 Specification for wood particle boards (medium density)
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3097-1980 VENEERED PARTICLE
BOARDS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements such as grades and types, material, manufacture, dimensions and tests for veneered particle boards. 2. Grades and Types - Shall be of two grades, namely, exterior (Grade I) or interior (Grade II). 2.1 Each gxade of veneered particle board shall be of the following four types: a) Type 2 - Solid core, general purpose (boards with faces of veneer of general purpose type). Sl No. 1. b) Type 2 - Solid core, decorative (boards with solid core but faced with ornamental veneers on one or both sides). c) Type 3 - Tubular co=, general purpose (boards with tubular core and faced with veneer of general purpose type). d) Type 4 - Tubular core, decorative (boards with tubular core faced with decorative veneers on one or both sides). 2.2 Designation - The grades and types shall be designated as follows:
Grade
Exterior Exterior Exterior Exterior Interior Interior Interior Interior (Grade (Grade (Grade (Grade (Grade (Grade (Grade (Grade I) I) I) I) II) II) II) II)
Tvpe
Solid core, general purpose Solid core, decorative Tubular core, general purpose Tubular core, decorative Solid core, general purpose Solid core, decorative Tubular core, general purpose Tubular core, decorative
mignation
EX SO GP EX SO D EX TU GP EXTUD IN SO GP IN SO D IN TU GP INTUD
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
283
SP : 21-1983
3.
Material
a) Particle boards shall be of medium density. b) Veneers for cross-band and faces shall be either sawn or rotary cut or sliced and shall be smooth. c) Adhesive used for bonding veneers shall be BWP or BWR for exterior grade (Grade I) boards and WWR or CWR for interior grade (Grade II) boards.
6.
Tests
6.1 Density - Density of each specimen shall not vary from mean density by mo= than f 10 percent.
6.2 Moisture Content between 7 to 16 percent. Average value shall be
6.3 Wafer Absorption - Value shall not exceed 25 percent for 2 h soaking and 50percent for 20 h soaking. 6.4 Water Resistance Test - Boards shall not show signs of disintegration and/or shall not delaminate. 6.5 Swelling in Water - Swelling in thickness in percentage of original thickness shall not be more than 7 percent due to general absorption and this shall be 5 percent in case of swelling due to surface absorption. 6.6 Adhesion of Plies - Adhesion of face veneers to the board core shall offer appreciable resistance and the exposed surface of veneer shall show sizes of some adherent fibres distributed more or less uniformly. 6.7 Static Bending Strength (Maximum Transverse Strength or Modulus of Rupatre in Bending) Average value of modulus of rupture shall not be less than 300 kg/cm*. 6.8 DeJection Under Sustained Load (Long Time Loading Test) - The deflection under load and residual deflection after removal agreed to mutually. of load shall be as
4. Finish - All boards shall be flat and squarely cut. Both faces shall be sanded to a smooth even surface. 5.
Dimensions and Tderances

Length a> 480, 365, 300, 270, 240, 210,
180,150,120,100and90cm. Tolerance f 5 mm up to 150 cm and + 10 mm above 150 cm.
b)
Width -
180,150,120,100,90and45
cm.
Tolerance
same as for length.
kc)Thickness -
6, 10, 12,20,25,30,35,40, 45 and 50 mm. Tolerance + 1 mm.

more than 2.5 mm.
4 Length of two diagonals shall not differ by

e) Edges shall be straight with a maximum
deviation of 3 mm.
Note-For test procedures, refer to the standard and IS lignocellulosic materials:
: 2380 Method of test for wood particle boards and boards from other
IS : 2380 (Part I)-1977 Part I Preparation and conditioning of test specimens (first revision) IS : 2380 (Part II)-1977 Part II Accuracy of dimensions of boards (first revision) IS : 2380 (Part III)-1977 Part III Determination of moisture content and density Cfirst revision) IS : 2380 (Part IV)-1977 Part IV Determination of static bending strength (modulus of ruputre and modulus bending) (firsf revision) IS : 2380 (Part XVI)-1977 Part XVI Determination of water absorption Cfirsf revision) IS : 2380 (Part XVII)-1977 Part XVII Determination of swelling in water Cfirst revision) IS : 2380 (Part XXI)-1977 Part XXI Planeness rest under uniform moisture content (first revSon)
of elasticity
in
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3057-1980 Specification for veneeredparticle boards (first revision).
284
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3129-1965 PARTICLE
1. Scope ticle boards. 2. Materials Requirements
BOARD FOR INSULATION PURPOSES

(With Amendment No. 1) b) Width 30 cm. 180, 150, 120, 100, 90,60, 45 and
of insulation type of par-
c) Thickness - 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, 27, 25, 22, 20, 16 and 12 mm. d) Tolerance Length and width +9 mm up to 150 cm and +15 mm above 150 cm. Thickness +0.8 mm up to 25 mm and f 1 mm above 25 mm. 4. 4.1
tion
a) Timber or other lignoceilulosic material like bagasse and solapith and jute sticks of density not exceeding 400 kgPm3. b) Adhesive type. c) Following materials particle mix: may be added to the BWR or WWR (unextended)
1) A preservative such as sodium pentachlorophenate or pentachlorophenol to the extent of 0.2 percent. 2) Sizing material like paraffin wax emulsion (to increase water resistance), not exceeding 1.5 percent. 3) Flame retardant chemical like ammonium phosphate and borax. 3. Dimensions
a)
Density - Shall not exceed 400 kgim3. Variashall not be more than f10 percent.
not exceed 16 per-
4.2 MoistureContent -Shall cent.
4.3 Thermal Conductivity - K value shall not exceed 7 kcal.cm/m2hC thickness (or 0.81 mW/ cm.(Z). 4.4 Transverse Strength less than 15 kgf/cm2. 4.5 Sound Absorption Frequency, c/s Absorption coefficient, Min Modulus of rupture not
and Tolerances
Length - 365,300,270,240,210,180,150, 120, 100, 90, 60,45 and 30 cm.
125 250 500 1 000 2 000 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS lignocellulosic materials Cfirst revision), @or
: 2380 (Parts I to XXI)-1977 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from other IS : 3308-1969 Methods of wood wool building slabs and Appendix A of the standufd.
detailed information,
refer to IS : 3129-1965 Specification for particle board for insulation purposes.

-
285
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3308-1981 WOOD WOOL BUILDING
SLABS
(First Revision)
regarding dimensions, 1. Scope - Requirements *eight and strength for wood wool building slabs. 2. Types
Light weight slabs, intended for a) Type lnon-load bearing partitions, ceilings, wall linings, permanent shuttering and roof insulation.
4.1
Tolerances f6 mm in length, *4 mm in width and f2 mm in thickness. Deviation from rectangular shape, not more than 5 mm.
5.
Requirements Shall not exceed
b) Type 2 - Heavy duty slabs, intended for load bearing situations and for use in roof construction. 3. Form and Texture - Slabs shall be of uniform thickness with rectangular parallel faces and shall have clean reasonably square edges and shall be of uniform texture. 4.
5.1 Dejection Under Test Load the following: Type Size mmxmm 2 000x500 1 220x610 2 000x500 1 220x610 Thickness mm 25 25 40 50 75 100 40 50 75 Test Load kg 100 165 90 90 120 150 120 160 240
Test Dejection Span (Max) cm 45 6 27.5 6 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 Shall 6 6 5 5 6 6 5 not exceed
Dimensions, Weights and Tolerances

Width Type mm 500 1 Thickness mm 12 20 25 40 50 75 100 40 50 75 12 20 25 40 50 75 100 40 50 75 Weight of the Slab, Max kg 5 8 11 12.5 16 22 27.5 25.0 30.0 40.0 3.5 6 8 9.5 12 16 20 18.5 22 30 2
Length mm 2 000
2 000x500 1 220x610
5.2 Thermal 0.08 W/m.C. 5.3
Conductivity -
2000
500
Sound Absorption Frequency Hertz Minimum Sound Absorption CoefSicient for 25 mm Thickness with Rigid Backing 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.5
1220
610
125 250 500 1000 2 000 4 000
1220
610
Note-For test procedures, refer to Appendix B of the Standard, IS : 3346-1966 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) and IS : 8225-1976 Method of measurement of absorption coefficient in a reverberation test.
refer
to IS : 3308-1981
Specification
for
wood wool building slabs (first
286
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3348-1965 FIBRE INSULATION

(With Amendment No. 1) 1. Scope - Requirements for insulating boards made of wood or sugar cane fibre. It also covers the following special types of fibre insulation boards: a) Bitumen b) Flame board. 2. bonded tibre insulating board, and retardant treated fibre insulating
BOARDS
Nominal Thickness mm 9 12 18 I 25 Length 365c,m300 270, 240 210, 180 150, 120 100, 90 60, 45 and 30
Mean Water
Type of Board
Bitumen- bonded fibre insulation board
Dimensions aud Tolerances: Type of Board Fibre insulation board, ordinary or flame retardant type Bitumen-bonded fibre insulation board Tolerance on length and width: ( 25 18 12 9 + to.75 * +.0.75 0.50I *3 mm up to 120 cm and + 6 mm above 120 cm. 3.4 Thermal Conductivity 5.6 kcal.cm/m2hC. Nominal Thickness mm 1; 18 c 25 Tolerance on Thickness *%5 +-0.75 * 1.00 k 1.25
Absorption at 27+2C, Max 25 25 20 20 Width 18:?50 120: 100 90, 60 45 and 30
3. 3.1 3.2
Requirements Density Transverse
Shall not exceed
Shall not exceed O.4g/cm3.

Strength
Type of Board Fibre insulating board ordinary or flame retardant type
Thickness mm
Mean Breaking Load Min, kg
Approximate Modulus of Rupture for Nominal Thickness, kg/cm2
( 25 18 12 9 Bitumen bonded fibre insulating board c 25 18 12 9 3.3

Water A bsorption
:12.8 7.2
;: 16
E 1: 3.5
Sound Absorption
32 :x --
Type of Board
Nominal Thickness mm 9 12 18 25 I
refer to IS
Mean Water
Fibre insulation board, ordinary or flame retardant type

Nate-For standard. test procedures,
Absorption at 27&2C, MaX 30 30 25 25

Specification
Frequency, c/s 125 250 500 1 000 2 000 Absorption coefficient, Min 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 : 4.. Special Requirement for Flame-Retardant Boards - Average maximum area of char, when tested for surface spread of flame, shall not exceed 75 cm2.
for wood wool building slabs and Appendices A to E of the
3308-1969
refer to IS : 3348-1965 Specification for fibre insulation boards. 287
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3478-1966 HIGH DENSITY WOOD PARTICLE BOARDS

1. Scope - Requirements of high density wood particle boards in flat sheet or moulded forms.
2. 3.3
Sizing -
Paraffin wax up to 1 percent, Max.
Types (Depending on Synthetic Resin Used) and .Grades (depending on extent of resin content)
Type
4.
Dimensions and Tolerances far Flat Sheets

a) Length - 180, 150, 120, 100, 90, 60 and 45 cm. b) Width - 150, 120, 100, 90 and 45 cm. c) Thickness - 50,45,40, 16, 12, 9,6 and 4 mm. d) Tolerance Length and width, + 6 mm. Thickness +-5 percent up to 25 mm, percent above 25 mm. +2.5 35, 30, 25, 22, 20,
1-
BWR typeof resin -
Grades A and B . Grades
Type 2 -
WWR or CWR type of resin A and B.
Each type and grade may be in flat sheet form or moulded form.
3.
Materials Timber Any suitable species.
3.1
Length of diagonals of a board shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm/m length of diagonal. Edges shall be straight with tolerance of 3 mm. 5. Physical Requirements in table given below:
Minimum Modulus Minimum Tensile Strength kg/cm2 350 300 200 225
3.2 Adhesive - As in 2. In grade A resin content is 20 to 50 percent and in grade B, 8 to 12 percent. Type
Grade Density Moisture Content
Shall be as specified
of
Rupture g/cm* Grade A Type 1 Grade B 1.2 0.9 Min 0.9 1.2 Min Type 2 Maximum Permissible Variation in Individual Specimen from the Mean Max+ 10 percent Max+2 percent Percent 3 to 7 kg/cm* 450
Water Absorption Ajter 24 h Immersion Percent, Max 10 25 25 15
Resistance to Boiling Water After 3 h Immersion
5to 16
5 5to to 10 16
400
250 300
Shall not show any sign of delamination Not specified
. Note-For test procedures, refer to 1s : 2380 (Parts 1 to XXI)-1977 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic materials (first revision) and 9.3 of the standard.
refer to IS : 3478-1966 Specification for high density wood particle boards.
288
SECTlON
14
DOORS AND WINDOWS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title WOODEN DOOR AND WINDOW FRAME AND SHUTTERS IS : 1003 IS : 1003 (Part IS : 1003 (Part IS : 1826-l%l IS : 2191 IS : 2191 (Part IS : 2191 (Part Timber panelled and glaied shutters: Part I Door shutters (second revision) Part II Window and ventilator shutters (first revision) Venetian blinds for windows Wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type): Part I Plywood face panels (third revision) I)-1980 Part II Particle board face panels and hardboard face panels II)-1980 (second revision) Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type): IS : 2202 Part I Plywood face panels (third revision) IS : 2202 (Part I)- 1980 Part II Particle board and hardboard face panels (second IS : 2202 (Part II)-1980 revision) Timber door, window and ventilator frames (first revision) IS : 4021-1976 Wooden side sliding doors IS : 4962-1968 Ledged, braced and battened timber door shutters IS : 6198-1971 I)-1977 II)-1966 291 292 293 294 295 2% 297 298 300 301 Page
METAL DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES AND SHUTTERS IS: IS : IS : IS : IS : IS : IS : 1038-1975 1361-1978 1948-1961 1949-1961 4351-1976 6248-1979 7452-1982 Steel doors, windows and ventilators (second revision) Steel windows for industrial buildings (first revision) Aluminium doors, windows and ventilators Aluminium windows for industrial buildings Steel door frames (first revision) Metal rolling shutters and rolling grills (first revision) Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators first revision) 302 303 304 306 307 308 309
290
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1003 (PART I)-1977 TIMBER PANELLED AND GLAZED SHUTTERS

PART; I DOOR SHUTTERS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship, finish, inspection and testing of timber door shutters with timber, veneered particle board, plywood, blockboard, hardboard and asbestos cement board panels used in domestic buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. This standard does not cover timber door shutters for industrial and other special buildings, such as workshops and garages. 2. Timber - Moisture content 10 to 16 percent for thickness 50 mm and above and 8 to 14 percent for thickness below 50 mm. All timbers shall be kilnseasoned. Sapwood of durable species and heartwood and sapwood of non-durable species shall be treated with suitable non-leachable type preservative.
Note standard.
No. 1)
We
9 DS 20
9 10 10 12 12 DS DS DS DT DT 21 20 21 20 21
Width 800
800 900 900 1 100* 1 100*
Height 1 905(1 2 005(2 1 905(1 2 005(2 1 905(1 2 005(2

945) 045) 945) 045) 945) 045)
Note 1 - In arriving at the standard widths and heights for panel doors, and allowance of 6 cm has been made for door frames, 4 cm for floor finish and 0.5 cm for clearance all round between door opening and door frames and 1.5 cm for rebate all round for the shutter into the frame. In case the modular height is taken from the finished floor level, the height shall be as given in bracket. Note 2 - Type of shutter is designated by symbols denoting, in sequence, width (number of modules in width of door opening); type (D=door, W=window, S=single shutter,T=double shutter) and height (number of modules in height of door opening).
For suitable species of timber see Table 1 of
the
3.
Requirements
4.2 No single panel shall ex4.3
Tolerance -
Shall be +3 mm on size of door.
3.1 Timber Panelling ceed 0.5 m* in area.
3.2 Plywood Panelling - Shall be of BWP grade minimum thickness 12 mm for single panel construction and 9 mm for 2 or more panel construction. 3.3 Blockboard Panelling than 10 mm. Thickness not more
Dimensions of Components (Finished Dimensions in mm) Thickness Width 40 f 1 100 + 3 Vertical stile,
top and freeze rail Lock rail Bottom rail Mounting Glazing bar 160+ 250 f 100 + 40 f 3 3 3 1 40 III 4Orf: 40 + 40 + 1 1 1 1
3.4 Particle Board Panelling - Shall be made of one piece of veneered particle board. Thickness shall be 12 mm, Min.
3.5 3.6
Hardboard
Panelling -
5. Glazing - Glass used for panels shall weigh not less than 7.5 kg/m*. 6. Finish
Tempered
quality.
Thickness
12 mm, Min.
Asbestos Cement Panelling - Minimum thickness 12mm incaseof singlepanel shutters and IOmm in case of 2 or mere panel construction. 80 cm from bottom of
3.7 Lockrail Centre Line shutter. 4. 4.1 Dimensions,
6.1 Defective knots, when permitted on surfaces exposed to view shall be completely bored or cut out and tightly plugged with the same timber species and properly glued in. Grains of plug shall run in direction of the grains of the piece. 6.2 Surfaces of door shutters which are required to be painted ultimately shall be covered by brush painting with a priming coat. Doors to be polished or varnished shall be given a priming coat of polish or varnish. *Combinedwidth of two shutters in closed position.
Sizes and Tolerances
Dimensions of Door Shutters (in mm) Width 700

700
Type 8 DS 20 8 DS 21
-
Height 1 905(1 945)

2 005(2 045)
For detailed information, refer td IS : 1003 (Part I)-1977 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutters: Part I Door shutters (second revision).
291
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1003 (PART II)-1966 TIMBER PANELLED AND GLAZED SHUTTERS

PART II WINDOW AND VENTILATOR SHUTTERS
(First Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, construction, sizes, workmanship, finish, inspection and testing of timber window and ventilator shutter with timber plywood, particle board, hardboard and asbestos cement panels used in domestic buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. It does not cover timber window and ventilator shuttersfor industrial buildings, workshops and garages. No. 1 to 3) c) Components Vertical stiles, top and freeze rails Bottom rail Glazing bars Mounting width for window shutter : Width 80 mm : Width 80 mm : Width 40 mm : 60 mm
2.
Dimensions a) Window Shutters Type 6WS 12 10 WT 12 12 WT 6WS 10 WT 12 WT 12 13 13 13 width (mm) 500 460 560 500 460 560
d) Thickness of shutter:20.25 or 30mm depending on size. Tolerance: + 1 mm. up to over
Height (mm)
1 100 1 100 1100 1 200 1 200 1 200
e) Tolerunces : f 1 mm on dimensions 40 mm. f3 mm on dimensions 40 mm.
Note 1 - Sizes are derived after allowing for thickness of frame and a margin of 5 mm all round for fitting into a modular opening based on 10 cm module. Note 2 - Type of shutter is designated by symbols, denoting width (number of modules in width of opening); type W-=window; V= ventilator; S=single shutter; T=double shutter, and height (number of modules in height of opening). f) Tolerances on overall dimensions: f3 mm.
b) Ventilator Shutters
T-e
Width (mm) Height (mm)
6V6
500 500
lOV6
900
500
12V6 1 100 500
Note-For details regarding materials, finish and glazing refer to IS : 1003 (Part I)-1977 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutters: Part I Door shutters (second revisionh
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1003 (Part II)-1966 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutters: Part II Window and ventilator shutters (first revision).
292
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1826-1961 VENETIAN
1. Scope - Covers material, constructional details, sizes, and requirements of open head custom made Venetian blinds made of either wood or metal slats. 2. Grades a) Grade 1 i) Shall have aluminium slats, ii) Shall have provision for locking slats or have dual ladder for each slat (so that slats may not fluttor), and iii) Shall be capable of being removed instaneously . b) Grade 2 - Shall have wooden slats. 3. Material
BLINDS FOR WINDOWS

No. 1) 4.6 Cord - Made of cotton yarn, nylon yarn or a combination of cotton and rayon. 5. Finish
(With Amendment
5.1 Aluminium slats shall be given a pretreatment and then suitable coats of primer and upper coats of paint which shall be of high gloss and of a baked enamel type. 5.2 Wooden Slats and Rails -For finishing one coat of sealer, one coat of primer-surfacer, putty and two coats of paint shall be applied. Paint used shall be of semi-gloss good quality enamel or cellulose paint. 6. 6.1 Testing Alumini,um Slats 6.1.1 Physical tests a) Tensile strength, Min: 3 375 kgf/cm2 b) Yield stress, Mitt: 3 100 kgf/cm* c) Elongation, MUX: 2.5 percent 6.1.2 Salt water test - Shall not show blistering, corrosion, chalking, change of colour and loss of gloss and adhesion. 6.1.3 Cold and hot water test for enamel Backed enamel finish shall resist soaking in cold water for 48 hours and for 30 minutes in boiling water. The enamel shall not blister and shall recover same hardness after being out of water for 2 hours. 6.1.4 test. Light test Shall withstand theprescribed
3.1 Timber - Wooden slats and rails shall be made from timbers having durability of class I and II timbers as given in IS : 399-1963*. 3.2 Metal - Aluminium alloy used for rolling slats shall conform to NS 4 of IS : 737-1974t. 4. 4.1 Requirements Grade I Grade 2 4.2 Slat Size Wooden &minillm Shall notexceed 500cm inwidth and 10 m* in area. Shall not exceed 275 cm in width and 7.5 m* in area. 48 + 0.5 mm wide and 2.5 f 0.3 mm thick. -48 & 0.5mmwidewhenforn~d. Thickness of coated aluminium slats shall be 0.254 to 0.375 mm with tolerance of -+ 0.004 mm. of
Note - For number of slats per blind of different heights

(drops), see Table 1 of the standard.
6.1.5 Rigidity test - Slats shall have sufficient flexibility so as to permit a 180 bend around a 7.5 cm dia cylinder without harm or permanent deformation or injury to finish when released to their original shape. 6.2 Ladder Web 6.2.1 Colour fastness and shrinkage - Face and cross tapes shall have good colour fastness to light and water, and shall not shrink more than 7 percent. 6.2.2 Breaking strength - Face tapes shall have breaking strength of 100 kgf, minimum and cross tapes, a minimum strength of 7 kgf without breaking or tearing away from the face tapes. 6.3 Breaking 80 kgf.
for breaking
4.3 Tilt Rail thick.
50 + lmm
wide and 20 k
1 mm
4.4 Tilting Device design.
Synchronised
worm and gear
4.5 Cord Lock -Automatic; shall be so designed that the blind can be held at any desired height.
*Classification of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution
(revised).
tspecitication for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip (for generalengineering pmposes) (second revision). Note-For
(first
Strength
of
Cords
At
least
revision)
test procedures, refer to IS and 9 of the standard.
: 1969-1968 Specification
load and elongation
at break of woven textile fabrics
For detailed
information,
refer to IS : 1826-1961
Specification
for Venetian blinds for windows.
293
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2191 (PART I)-1980 WOODEN FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS (CELLULAR AND HOLLOW CORE TYPE)
PART I PLYWOOD FACE PANELS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship and finish, and tests of cellular and hollow core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and face veneers. 2. Types a) Cellular decorative c) Hollow decorative type (CD) type (CN) type (HN) type (HD) 4. Materials MoisNre content shall not exceed 12 4.1 Timber percent.
Note -
For species of timbersee Appendix A ofthe standard.
b) Cellular non-decorative d) Hollow non-decorative 3. Sizes a) Width und height

,Designation 8 DS 20 Width (mm)
411.1 Timber shall be free from decay and insect attack. Knots and knot holes less than half the width .of cross section may be permitted. Pitch pockets, pitch streaks and harmless pin-holes shall be permissible except in the exposed edgesofthecoremembers where they shall be cut .out and filled in with carefully fitted glued pieces of wood of similar species and character with their grains running in the same direction. 4.2 Plywood - Commercial plywood shall be of BWP grade, at least type BC. Decorative plywood shall be of Grade I. 4.3
Cross-bands -
Height (mm)
8 DS 21 9 DS 20 9DS21 10 DS 20 10 DS 21 12 DT 20 12 DT 21
700 700 800 800 900 900 1 100* 1 100*
1 905 2 005 1 905 2 005 1 905 2 005 1 905 2 005
BWP grade. Phenol formaldehyde synthetic
4.4 Adhesives resin, BWP type.
Note - If modular height is taken from the finished floor level, the height of door shall be 40 mm more.
4.5 Particle Board -Flat-platen pressed or extrusion pressed type. Swelling of particle board in thickness and length shall not exceed 5 percent. 5. Requirements
Plywood for Face Panels
b)
Thickness
25, 30 or 35 mm, nominal.
cl Tolerances - On nominal width and height shall be +3 mm; tolerance on nominal -0 thickness shall be + 1.2 mm. Thickness of door shutter shall be uniform throughout with a permissible variation of 0.8 mm maximum.
Note 1 - In arriving at standard widths and heights, an allowance of 6 cm has been made for door frames, 4 cm for floor finish and 0.5 cm for clearance all round and 1.5 cm for rebate all round for the shutter into the frame. Note 2 - Type of shutter is designated by symbols denoting width (number of modules in width of door opening); type (D=door; S=single shutter; T=double shutter) and height (number of modules in height of door opening).
5.1
Minimum 3 mm,
thickness for cellular core shutters-
Minimum thickness for hollow core shutters for 25 mm thickness - 4 mm, Minimum thickness for hollow core shutter over 25 mm thickness - 6 mm. 5.2 Rebating leaved shutters. One third thickness for double
5.3 Shutters shall be shop-prepared tice locks or latches.

6.
for taking mor-
*Combined
width of two shutters in closed position.
Workmanship and Finish - All the four edges shall be square. Shutter shall be free from twist or warp.
294
SP : 21-1983
7. 7.1
Tests End Immersion Test There shall be no
7.2
7.3 7.4
Knife Test Adhesion Test Type Tests
delamination.
Specification for blockboards (secondrevision),IS : 4020-1967Methods of tests Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1659-1979 for wooden flush doors: Type tests and 9 of the standard. For detailed
information, refer to IS : 2Z91 (Part I)-1980 Specification for wooden frush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type): Part Z Plywood face panels (third revision).
SUMMARY OF 1s
: 2191
(PART II)-1980 WOODEN FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS (CELLULAR AND HOLLOW CORE TYPE) fART 11 PARTICLE BOARD FACE PANELS AND HARDBDARD FACE PANELS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, grade, types, sizes, construction, finish and tests of cellular and hollow core wooden flush door shutters with particle board face panels of veneered and unveneered types of practicle board and hardboard face panels. 2.
Core
4.
Material
Timber -
4.1
Same as in IS : 2191 (Part I)-1980*.
4.2 Particle Board - Shall be made with phenolformaldehyde adhesive. Swelling in thickness and length shall not exceed 5 percent. 4.3
Fibre Hardboard - Tempered.
Types and Designation

Type Designation
Cellular Decorative with skins of decorative veneered particle boards Non-decorative with skins of particle boards unveneered Non-decorative with skins of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers Hollow Decorative with skins of decorative veneered particle boards Non-decorative with skins of particle boards unveneered Non-decorative with skins of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers 3. Sizes and Tolerances in IS : 2191 (Part I)-1980*.
CDPV
4.4 Adhesive resin, BWP type. 5.
Phenol
formaldehyde
synthetic
Requirements
CNP
CNPV
Face Panel - Particle board thickness not less than 6 mm for cellular core and 9 mm for hollow core shutters. Hardboard thickness.not less than 4 mm for cellular core and 6 mm for hollow core flush doors.
5.2 Shutters shall be shop prepared for taking mortice locks or latches.
5.1
H D PV
6. Workmanship and Finish -All four edges shall be square. Shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane. 7. Tests - Requirements laid down in 9 of IS : 2191 (Part I)-1980* shall be complied with.
HNP
HNPV
Shall be same as given
*Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow) core type: Part I Plywood face panels (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2191 (Part II)-1980 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type): Part 11 Particle board face panels and hardboard face panels (second
revision). 295
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2202 (PART I)-1980 WOODEN FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS (SOLID CORE TYPE)
PART I PLYWOOD (Third 1. Scope - Requirements regarding types, sixes, material, construction, workmanship and finish , and tests of solid core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and face veneers.
4.
FACE PANELS
Revision)
Note 2 Type of shutter is designated by symbols denoting width (number of modules in width of door opening), type (D=door, S=single shutter, T= double shutter) and height (number of modules in height of door opening).
Materials Moisture content shall not exceed 12

Appendix A ofthesm&rd.
4 Blockboard, decorative,
BD BN
4.1 Timber percent.
b) Blockboard, non-decorative,
decorative, PD. PN,
Note - For speciesoftimbersee
cl Particle board with or without blockboard, 4 Particle board with or without blockboard,
non-decorative, 3. Sizes a) Dimensions
Designation 8 DS 20 8 DS 21 9DS20 9DS21 10 DS 20 Width (mm) 700 700 800 800 900 900 Height (mm)
Knots and knot holes less than half the width 4.1.1 of cross section of members in which they occur may be permitted. Pitch pockets, pitch streaks and harmless pin holes shall be permissible except in the exposed edges of the core members where they shall be cut out and filled in with carefully fitted glued pieces of wood of similar species and character with their grain running in the same direction. 4.2
Plywood
1 905 2 005 1 905 2 005 1 2 1 2 905 005 905 005
Commercial; BWP grade, at least type BC Decorative; Grade 1. 4.3

Cross Bands -
BWP grade. synthetic re-
10 DS 21 12 DT 20 12 DT 21
4.4 Adhesive sin, BWP type.
Phenol formaldehyde
1 100* 1 100*
Note - If Modular height is taken from finished floor level, height of flush door shall be 40 mm more.
4.5 Particle Board - Flat platen pressed or extrusion pressed type. Swelling of particle board in thickness and length shall not exceed 5 percent. 5. Requirements
b) Thickness c) Tolerances -
25, 30 or 35 mm, nominal. Width and height, f3 mm Thickness, + 1.2 mm.
L 5.1 Face Panel - Thickness of cross-band as such or in plywood shah be 1 to 3 mm. Face veneer 0.5 to 1.5 mm thick for commercial and 0.5 to 1 mm for decorative. 5.2 Rebating leaved shutters. One-third thickness in double
Thickness of door shutter shall be uniform throughout with a permissible variation of not more than 0.8 mm.
Note 1 - In arriving at the standard widths and heights for flush doors, an allowance of 6 cm has been made for door frames 4 cm for floor finish and 0.5 cm for clearance all round between the door opening and door frame and 1.5 cm for rebate all round for the shutter into the frame.
5.3 Locks - Shutters shall be shop-prepared for taking mortice locks or latches as may be ordered. 6. Workmanship and Finish - All four edges of the door shutter shall be square. Shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane. 296
*Combined
width of two shutters in closed position.
SP : 21-1983
7.
Tests There shall be

no
7.2
7.3
Knife Test Glue Adhesion Test

Type Tests
(second revision), IS
7.1 End lrnrnersion Test delamination.
7.4
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1659-1979 Specification for wooden flush doors: Type test and 9 of the standard.
for blockboards
: 4020-1967 Methods of tests
Fordetailed information, refer to IS : 2202 (Part I..-1980 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type): Part I Plywood face panels (third revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2202 (PART
PART II
II)-1980 WOODEN FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS (SOLID CORE TYPE)

PARTICLE BOARD AND HARDBOARD FACE PANELS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, grade, types, sizes, construction, finishes and test of wooden flush door shutters of solid core type with particle board face panels of both veneered particle board and unveneered particle.boards. 2. Types and Designation
Core Blockboard Decorative decorative cle boards Type with skins of veneered parti-
3. Sizes and Tolerances (Part 1>1980*.
Same as in IS : 2202
4.
Material
Designation
B D PV
4.1 Species of timber, moisture content and permissible defects therein and preservative treatment required for use in core and lipping shall conform to relevant requirements laid down in IS : 2202) Part I) 1980*. 4.2 Particle Boards - Made with phenol formaldehyde adhesive. Swelling in thickness and length not to exceed 5 percent. 4.3
Non-decorative (paintable) with skins of particle boards unveneered Non-decorative (paintable) with skins of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers Particle board with or without block board Decorative decorative cle boards Non-decorative of particle neered with skins of veneered parti-
BNP
Hard Boards -
Tempered.
B N PV
4.4 Adhesive - For bonding particle board or hard board face panels to the core shall be phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin (BWP type).
P D PV*
5.
with boards skins unveP N P*
Requirements
5.1 Face Panel - Thickness of each face panel of particle board shall be at least 4 mm and of hardboard at least 3 mm. 5.2 Shutters shall be shop-prepared mortice locks or latches. for taking
Non-decorative with skins of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers
P N PV*
*Where particle board headed care is used, the designations will be PED, PV, PE, NP and PE N PV respectively.
*Specification for wooden Aush door shutters (solid core type): Part I Plywood face panels (third rwision).
291
SP : 21-1983
6. Workmanship and Finish - All the four edges of door shall be square. Shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane.
7. Tests 1980*.
Same as given in IS : 2202 (Part I) core type):
*Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid Part 1 Plywood face panels (third revision).
For
detailed information, refer to IS : 2202 (Part II)-1980 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type): Part II Particle board and hardboard face panels (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4021-1976TIMBER DOOR, WINDOW AND VENTILATOR FRAMES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, construction, workmanship, and sizes of timber door, window and ventilator frames generally used in residential buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. This standard does not cover timber door, window and ventilator frames for industrial and other special buildings, such as workshops and garages. 2. 2.1 Timber c) Class C d) Class D Non-coniferous timbers other than teak (first and second grades) Coniferous timbers other than deodar (first and second grades) suitable for temporary structures only.
2.2 Moisture tintent - 10 to 16 percent for 50 mm and above in thickness and 8 to 14 percent for less than 50 mm thickness. _
Classijication
a) Class A Teakwood (superior, first and second grades) Deodar wood (first and second grades)
2.3
b) Class B -
Seasoning and Treatment - All timber shall be seasoned. Sapwood of durable species and sapwood and heartwood of non-durable species shall be treated with preservative. Pemtissible Defects
2.4
PERMISSIBLE
SL No. DEFECT
DEFECTS FOR VARIOUS CLASSES OF TIMBER FOR DOOR FRAMES

SUPERIOR GRADE TEAK FIRST GRADE SECOND GRADE
i) Cross-grain ii) Sound knots and live knots
Not steeper than 1 in 20 Not more than 0.5 percent of the area of the piece; 10 mm,
Max
Not steeper than 1 in 15 Not more than 1 percent of the area of the piece; 25 mm,
Max
Notsteeper than 1 in 12 Not more than 1.5 percent of the piece; 40 mm, Max
(Continued)
298
SP : 21-1983
PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR VARIOUS CLASSES OF TIMBER FOR DOOR FRAMES-Confd

SL
DEFECT
SUPERIOR GRADETEAK
FIRST GRADE
SECOND GRADE
No. iii) Pitch pockets or streaks None Permissible except on exposed edges, provided that they are clean and filled up with suitable putty or filler. Where pitch pockets or streaks are located on the exposed edges of the core, they shall be cut out and ftied with pieces of wood of similar species with grain running in the same direction. The piece shall be well glued Generally free from sapwood, but traces of sapwood properly treated with preservative shall be allowed Permitted provided they are filled Permitted provided they are not more than 10 mm in diameter and not more than one per member and provided such worm holes are plugged with similar timber in such a manner that the plugging merges with the surrounding area both as to colour and grain
iv) Sapwood
None
None
v) Pin holes vi) Worm holes
None None
None None
2.5 Defects Prohibited - Decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pocket or streaks on the exposed edges, borer holes, splits and cracks. 3. 3.1 Dimensions, Sizes and Tolerances 3.4 100 mm 120 or 140 mm 60 mm 3.5 Overall Widrh 79 89 99 119 79 89 99 119
Designation 6WS 13 10 WT 13 12 WT 13
Overall Height 129 129 129
Overall Width 59 99 119
Finished Dbnensions fir Frames a) Width for frames carrying one set of shutters b) Width for frames carrying two sets of shutters c) Thickness
Ventilator Sizes (in rwn) Designation 6V6 10 V 6 12V 6 Tolerance Overall Height 5? 59 59 +3 mm. -0 Overall Width 59 99 119
3.2
Door Sizes (in mm) Overall Height 199 199 199 199 209 209 209 209
Designation 8 DS 20 9 DS 20 10 DS 20 12 DT 20 8 DS 21 9DS21 10 DS 21 12 DT 21 _ 3.3
Note 1 - External sixes of assembled frames are derived after allowing a margin of 5 mm all round for fitting into a module opening based on 10 cm module. Note 2 - Type of shutter is designated by symbols, denoting width (number of modules in width of opening); type (TIcdoor, W=window, V=ventilator, S=single shutter, T=double shutter) and height (number of modules in height of opening).
4.
Requirements
Window Sizes (in mm) Designation 6WS 12 1oWT 12 12 WT 12 Overall Height 119 119 119 Overall Width 59 99 119 299
4.1 Holdfasts - 3 on each side for doors and windows 2 on each side for ventilators and windows less than 1 m height. 4.2 Joints - Framer shall have dovetail joints. Jamb post shall be through-tenoned into mortises of transom to full width.
SP : 21-1983
5. 5.1
Finish
wall and lintel shall be given a coating of coal tar. 5.2 All surfaces which are required to be painted ultimately shall be given a priming coat of a white lead-based primer. In case of frames to be polished or varnished, a priming coat of polish or varnish shall be given before delivery.
Defective knots, when permitted on surfaces exposed to view, shall be completely bored or cut out and tightly plugged with same timber species and properly glued in. Grain of the plug shall run in the direction of the grain of the piece. Face of the frame abutting the
For detailed information, frames (first revision).
refer to IS : 4021-1976 Specification for timber door, window and ventilator

,
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4962-1968
WOODEN SIDE SLIDING DOORS

3.4
3.5
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, type, shape, fabrication, assembly and finish of wooden side sliding doors (of the straight sliding type), its gear components and fittings.
2. Type and Size - Classified in accordance with mode of sliding of panels into the frame unit. Types 1 to 5 give clear opening, while Types 6 and 7 need no space at the sides. Overall size of dear shall be such as to cover modular opening completely.
Note - For typical arrangement see Fig. 2 of the standard. of panels of side sliding door
Guides Brackets -
Gun metal. Cast iron.
3.6 Shutter - Made of wood in accordance with IS: 1003 (Part 1>1977*, IS: 2191 (Part 1>1973t, IS : 2191 (Part 11>1%6$, IS : 2202 (Part I>19739 and IS : 2202 (Part 11>1%6//. 4. Operation - Shall be capable of being operated in either direction with force not exceeding 3kg/m of panel width, when panel is in motion. 5. Finish - AI1 components machined and finished smooth. Roller guides, fittings for locking arrangement, brackets, etc, may be hot-dip galvanized.
*Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutters: Part I Door shutters (third revision). t Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellularand hollow core type): Part I Plywood facepanels (second revisim). #Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type): Part II Particle board face panels and hardboard face panels (first revision). 9Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core typ): Part I Plywood face panels (second revision). //Specificationfor wooden flush door shutters (solid core type): Part II Particle board and hardboard face panels (first revision).
3.
Materials
3.1
Rolled steel sections shall be of weldablequality conforming to IS : 2062- 1969*. 3.2 Trucks - Made of 2 mm thick structural steel sheet, galvanized. 3.3 Roller - Grade 15 of IS : 210-1970t. cated or self-lubricating type.
*Specification revision). tSpecification for structural
Prelubri-
steel (fusion welding quality) firsf
for grey iron castings (second revision).
rejer to IS : 4962-1968 Specification for wooden side sliding doors.

300
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6198-1971 LEDGED, BRACED AND BATTENED TIMBER DOOR SHUTTERS

1. Scope.- Requirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship and finishofledged, braced and battened timber door shutters. Note- Thisis a simple form of door, and is frequently used Designation 9DS 20 9DS 21 10 DS 20 10 DS 21 12 DT 20 12 DT 21
Note 1 been given.
for temporary sheds,
warehouses, stores, etc, where appearance is not the main criterion. It is reIativeIy cheap, but has a tendency to twist if timber is not of goodquality, and if thinner ledges are used.
Width 800 800 900 900 560 560
Height 1 905 2 005 1 905 2 005 1 905 2 005
2.
Materials
For two shutter doors, only size of one shutter has
2.1 Timber shall be of four classes, namely, (a) teakwood, (b) deodarwood, (c) hardwoods other than teak, (d) softwoods other than deodar. Note- For classification of species of timber see Appendix A
of the standard.
Note 2 - In arriving at standard widths and heights, an allowance of 6 cm has been made for timber door frames, 4 cm for floor finish, 0.5 cm for clearance all round between door opening and door frame and 1.5 cm for rebate all round for the shutter into the frame.
2.2 Moisture Content, Max - 10 to 16 percent for timber of 50 mm and above, and 8 to 14 percent for timber thinner than 50 mm. 2.3 Defects Prohibited F Shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets or streaks on the exposed edges, borer holes, slits and cracks. 2.4 Grades of Timber and Permissible Defects Shall be graded as Superior Grade, First Grade and Second Grade on the basis of permissible defects in timber.
Note - For permissible defects for various classes of timber see Table 1 of the standard.
Tolerance on size of door shutter: f3 mm. 5. Dimensions of Components sions shall be as follows: Finished dimen-
Top and bottom ledges 150x30 mm; Middle ledge 2 200X30 mm: Braces 110 to 125x30 mm. 1 Battens 140 to 160x25 mm. All battens in a shutter shall be of uniform width. 6. Rebating -In case of double leaved shutters, meeting of the stiles shall be rebated 20 mm (splayed or square type). 7. Fittings - Three tee hinges for each shutter (one at centre and others 20 cm from top and bottom). Each shutter shall also have 2 barrel bolts and one sliding bolt for locking. 8. Finish - Well-planed and finished smooth. Surfaces to be painted, polished or varnished shall be given a suitable priming coat before delivery. Defective knots, where permitted in surfaces exposed to view, shall be completely bored or cut out and tightly plugged with a cross-gained plug (round or dovetailed) of similar species of timber and shall be properly glued in.
3. Designation - By symbols denoting width, type and height of door in succession. Width --Indicated by the number of modules of 10 cm in the width of door opening. Type D= Door; S= Single shutter; T= Double shutter. Height - Indicated by the number of modules of 10 cm in the height of door opening. Ewnple - 8 DS 2 1 would mean a shutter suitable for a single shutter door of 8 module width and 21 module height.
4.
Standard Sizes (in mm): Designation 8 DS 20 8 DS 21 Width 700 700 Height 1 905 2 005
For detailed information, door shutters.
refer to IS : 6198-1971 Specification for ledged, braced and battened timber
301
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1038-1975 STEEL DOORS,
WINDOWS
AND VENTILATORS
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, fabrication and finish of steel doors, windows and ventilators manufactured from rolled steel sections to standard sizes and designs. This standard does not cover steel doors, windows and ventilators for use in industrial buildings. 2. Standard Sizes, Tolerances and Designations 10 HS 12. The overall width and height to the outside of frames after allowing 10 mm clearance on all four sides (see Note 2) shall be 98 cm and 118 cm respectively. b) Two lO-module wide and 1Zmodule high horizontally glazed side hung windows coupled side by side with two fixed glass frameventilators attop, each IOmodulewide and 6 module high, is designated by 10 HF 6/10 HF 6 10 HS 12/10 HS 12 3. lOHF12 lOHF15 lOHS12 lOHS15 12HF12 12HF15 12HS12 12HS15 10HF6 lOHT6 lOHT6 12HF6 12HT6 liHC6 15HF12 15HF15 15HS12 15HS15 18HF12 18HF15 18HS12 18HS15 15HF6 15HT6 15HC6 18HF6 18HT6 18HT6 Materials
Sections -
a) Doors: 6HS20 6HS21 b) Windows: 5HF12 5HF15 5HF12 5HS15 6HF12 6HF15 6HS12 6HS!5 c) Ventilators: 5HF6 5HT6 5HC6 6HF6 6HT6 6HC6
8HS20 8HS21
lOHS20 lOHS21
12HS20 12HS21
3.1 Rolled Steel IS : 7452-1974*.
Shall conform
to
3.2 Glass Panes - 3 mm Min thick. Shall be provided on outside of frames.

Note 4. For sizes of glass pane see Table 1 of rhe standurd.
Fabrication
4.1
Side Hung Shutters - Hinges projecting type 65 to 75 mm wide. Friction hinges or peg stays (300 mm long) shall be provided.
4.1.1 Handle - Hot pressed brass, or cast brass, aluminium or steel.

4.2 Centre Hung Windows and Ventilators -
d) Tolerance: k1.5 mm.

Note 1 - Doors, windows and ventilators without glazing bars shall be designated by N in piace of H in the range shown. Note 2 - The external dimensions of width and height are derived after allowing 10 mm clearance all round for fitting into a modular opening based on 10 cm module. Note 3 - Designations are by symbols denoting width (number of modules in width of opening). type (C=centre hung shutter, F=tixed glass panes, H=with horizontal glazing bars, N= without horizontal glazing bars, S= side hung shutters T=top hung shutters) and height (number of modules in height of opening) .
Window shall be hung on two pairs of brass or aluminium cup pivots reveted to the inner and outer frames of the window to permit the window to swing to an angle of approximately 85. The opening portion of the window shall be so balanced that it remains open at any desired angle under normal weather conditions.
Weather Bar - Where fixed light occurs over external opening shutter, a push fit weather bar shall be provided. 4.3 4.4 Dams - Hinges for doors shall be of 50 mm projecting type. Non-projecting type of hinges may also be used.
a) Window of a width of 10 modules and height of 12 modules having horizontal glazing bars and side hung shutters is designated by 302
*Specification for hot tolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators.
SP : 21-1983
4.4.1 Mortice lock with not less than 4 levers or pins shall be provided for thedoor. It shall be operable from outside as well as from inside but in addition a bolt shall beprovided on the inside so that whendoor is locked from inside and bolted, it cannot be opened from outside with its key.
Note I-Handing
Note 2-For
4.4.2 In double shutter doors, the tirst closing shutter shall have a concealed brass extruded aluminium or steel bolt at top and bottom. 5. FInIsh - Painting, or hot dip galvanizing. or phosphating and painting
and direction of closing of doors shall be designated in accordance with IS : 4043-1969 Recommendations symbolic designation of direction of closing and faces of doors, windows and shutters. details regarding position of fixing holes, fixing screws and lugs see 7 of the standurd.
for

(secohd revision).
refer to IS : 1038-1975 Specification for steel doors, windows and ventilators
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1361-1978 STEEL WINDOWS
FOR INDUSTRIAL
No. 1) a) Window Sizes: INlOClO INlOTlO INlOBlO IN16ClO IN16TlO IN16BlO INlOC20 IN lOT20 INlOB IN16C20 IN16T20 IN16B20
BUILDINGS
(First Revision)
(With Amendment
1. Scope - Deals with steel windows suitable for use in industrial buildings and designed to suit openings based on a module of 10 cm.
2. Handing - Handing and direction of closing of sashes shall be according to IS : 4043-1%9*. 3. Designation - By symbols denoting in sequence, IN (to indicate industrial window)X Width expressed in number of modules XType (F= fixed sash, C=centre-hung sash, B= botton hung sash, T= top hung sash)x Height expressed in number of modules.
IN22ClO IN22T 10 IN22B 10 lNlOC15 INlOT INlOB IN22C20 IN2jT20 IN22B20 INlOFlO INlOF15 IN10F20
IN16C15 IN16T15 IN16B15 IN22C15 IN22T15 IN22B15 Inl6FlO IN16F15 IN16F20 IN22FlO IN22F15 IN22F20
Examples :
a) IN 10 C 15 indicates industrial window for opening 10 module wide (100 cm) by 15 module high (150 cm) with centre hung ventilator b) IN 10 C lo/IN 10 Cl0 indicates the comIN 10 C 15/IN 10 Cl5 bination of four windows, two of the type IN 10 C 10 on top and two of the type IN 10 C 15 at the bottom, all the four of them coupled both horizontally and vertically. 4.
b) Ventilator (openingpartof asash) shall beof onesizeanddesignedto fitintoouterframeof INlOClO and with 1.2 mm clearance. c) Tolerance for overall dimensions + 3 mm.
Note - Overall heights and widths to the outside of frames shall be derived after allowing 10 mm klearance all round for the purpose of fitting the sashes into modular openings. Thus, width and depth of IN 16 C 10 shall be 158 cm and 98 cm.
5.
Material
5.1 Sizes and Tolerances

*Recommendations for symbolic designation of direction of closing and faces of doors, windows and shutters.
Rolled steel IS : 7452-1974*.
sections
shall
conform
to
*Specification for hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators.
303
SP : 21-1983
5.2 Pivots metal.
and Spring Catches -
Non
ferrous or
ventilator,
and attached with screws.
5.3 Glass - Shall conform to IS : 2835-1977* IS : 5437-1969t.
6. Holes for Fixing, Coupling and Glazing Holes for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in the web of the outside frame sections (and of outer ventilator frame sections where these occur at the perimeter of the sash). Holes for glazing clips shall also be provided. 7. Fittings and Fixing Materials
7.3 Centre-hung and bottom hung ventilators shall have a bronze spring catch in the centm of the top section, suitable for operation by hand or pole (and by cord in case of centre-hung ventilators). The former shall be provided with a 30 cm peg stay of steel or a 30 cm bronze cam opener to hold the ventilator open in three different positions. Bottom-hung ventilators shall have folding side arms to limit the opening. 8. Composite Windows - Shall be despatched unassembled, but complete with necessary coupling components. Each coupling member will increase the overall height or width by 25 mm maximum which includes manufacturing tolerances. 9. Glass Sizes shall be as given below: abcdef 269 304 292 304 304 292 425 425 460 460 492 492
7.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a pair of brass cup pivots, each pivot consisting of an inner and an outer cup, permitting the swinging of the ventilator through at least 85 and so balanced that the h ventilator shall be capable of remaining open in any desired position. 7.2 Centre-hung ventilators shall be provided with a pulley with centre of the bottom section of the
Pane Designation Width (mm) Height (mm)
Note - For number of glass panes for each type of window see Fig. 4 of the standard.
*Spkcification for flat transparent sheet glass (second revision). /Specification for wired and figured glass.
10. Finish - All sashes and coupling members shall be either galvanised or painted.

(first revision).
refer to IS : 1361-1978 Specification for steel windows for industrial buildings
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1948-1961 ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, fabrication and dimensions of aluminium doors, windows manufactured from extruded and ventilators, aluminium alloy sections of standard sizes and designs, complete with fittings, ready for being fixed into the buildings. This standard does not cover the requirements for industrial doors, windows and ventilators. 2. Handing - Side-hung opening position of all doors and w indows shall be said to be right hand or left hand according to the side on which they are hinged looking from the inside. 3. Standard Sizes, Tolerances and Designations 304 No. 1) a) Types and sizes: lOHF6, 6HF6, 6HT6, lOHT6, lOHC6, 6HC6, 6HF9, 6HS9, 6 HT9 6HF12, 6HS12, 6HF15, 6HS15, 6HF21, 8 HC6. lOHF9, lOHS9, lOHF12, lOHS12, lOHF15, lOHS15, 8HS21,
12HF6, 12HT6, 12HC6, 12HF9, 12HS9, 12HF12, 12HS12, 12HF15, 12HS15, 12HS21,
15HF6, 15HT6, 15HC6, 15HF9, 15HS9, 15HF12, 15HS12, 15HF15, 15HS15, 8HF6,
18HF6 18HT6 18HC6 18HF9 18HS9, 18HF12 18HS12 18HF15 18HS15 8HT6,
SP : 21-1983
b) Tolerances
For frames Z!Z1.5 mm.
Note 1 - The external dimensions of width and height are derived after allowing 1.25 cm clearance all round for fitting into a modular opening based on 10 cm module. Note 2 - Designation is by symbols denoting width (number of modules in width of opening); type (C=centre hung shutters; F=fixed glass panes; H= with horizontal glazing bars; N= without horizontal glazing bars; S= side-hung shutters; T=top-hung shutters); and height (number of modules in height of opening).
5.2 Centre Hung Ventilators - Shall be hung on two pairs of cup pivots of aluminium alloy (IS Designation NS-4). 5.3 Doors - Outer fixed frame shall be of section Al - FX 8. Shu-tter frame shall be of either hollow sections Al - HF x 5 and Al -HF X 6 or of solid sections Al - F X 5 and Al - F X 6. 5.3.1 type.
Hinges -
Shall be of 50 mm projecting
Examples:
a) A window of width 10 modules (97.5 cm) and height 9 modules (87.5 cm), having horizontal glazing bars and side-hung shutters is designated by 10 HS 9. b) Two 10 module wide and 12 module high horizontally glazed side-hung windows coupled side by side with two fixed glass pane ventilators at top, each 10 module wide and 6 module high, is designated by 10 HF 6110 HF 6 10 HS 12/ 10 HS 12 Note 3 - Windows without horizontal glazing bars shall be designated by N in place of H in the range shown above.
5.3.2 A suitable lock for the door operable either from inside or outside shall be provided. 5.3.3 In double shutter doors the first closing shutter shall have a concealed aluminium alloy bolt at top and bottom.
5.4 Composite Units - Doors shall be coupled to windows or side 1ights by extruded aluminium sections made from aluminium conforming to IS Designation HE 9-WP. 5.5 Weather Bar - Where a coupling member is fitted over an external opening shutter, the coupling member should incorporate an integrally extruded weather bar.
Position of Bolts, Fixing Screws and Lugs Outer frames shail be provided with fixing holes centrally in the web of the sections.
Note - For details regarding positions of fixing holes and member of fixing lugs See 7 of the standard.
Note4 - Doors and side lights shall only be coupled with 12 module (117.5 cm) high windows.
6.
4. Materials Designation HE 9-WP 4.1 Aluminium Alloy -IS and HV 9-WP.
4.2 Glass Panes - Shall weigh at least 7.5 kg/m*. Glazing shall be outside of frames.
Note 5.
7. finish 7.1 Matt, 7.2
For sizes of glass panes see Table 1 of he standard.
scratch-brush anodized additionally.
or
polished.
May
be
Fabrication
5.1 Side-Hung Shutters - Hinges projecting type 67 mm wide. Friction hinges or peg stays (300 mm long) shall be provided.
A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate shall be applied by suppliers to protect the surface from wet cement during construction. This lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is completed.
For detailed information, ventilators.
refer to IS : 1948-1961 Specification for aluminium
doors, windows and
305
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1949-1961 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS FOR INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Deals with aluminium windows suitable for use in industrial buildings-and designed to suit openings based on a module of 10 cm. 2. Designation - By symbols IN (to indicate industrial window) X Width expressed in number of modules X Type (F = fixed sash; C = centre hung sash; B = bottom-hung sash; T = top-hung sash) x Height expressed in number of modules.
Examples
No. 1) Material a) Aluminium extruded section: IS Designation HE9WP. Hollow sections shall conform to IS Designation HVPWP. b) Cord-eyes, pulleys, brackets and catch plates shall be of aluminium or galvanized or cadmium plated steel. c) Pivots, peg stays and spring catches shall be of non-ferrous metal. d) Glass panes: Shall weigh 7.5 kg/m2. Sizes of glass panes shall be as given below:
4.
IN 10 C 15 indicates window for opening 10 module wide (100 cm) by 15 module high (150 cm) with centre-hung ventilator.
Pane Designation Width (mm) Height (mm)
abcdef 265 300 290 300 300 290 420 420 455 455 490 490
b) Composite wmdows
IN 10 C lo/IN 10 C 10 IN 10 C 15/IN 10 C 15 Indicates the combination of four windows, twoofthetypeIN 10ClOontopandtwoofthe typeIN 10 C 15 at bottom, all the four of them coupled both horizontally and vertically. 3. Sizes and Tolerances Sizes : INlOClO INlOTlO INlOBlO IN16C.10 IN16TlO IN16BlO INlOC20 IN lOT20 INlOB IN16C20 IN16T20 IN16B20 IN22C 10 IN22T 10 IN22B 10 INlOC15 INlOT INlOB IN22C20 IN22T20 IN22B20 INlOFlO INlOF15 IN lOF20 IN16C15 IN16T15 IN16B15 IN22C 15 IN22T15 IN22B 15 INlBFlO IN16F15 IN16F20 IN22FlO IN22F15 IN22F20
Note - For number of glass panes for each type of window see Fig. 5 of the standard.
5. Holes for Fixing, Coupling and Glazing Holes for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in the web of the outside frame sections and of outer ventilator frame sections where these occur at the perimeter of the sash. Holes for glazing chips shall also be provided, one hole being located in web of the section or tee, on each side of each pane. 6. Fitting and Fixing Materials
6.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a pairofcup-pivotsmadeoutof aluminium alloy sheetor chromium plated brass and each pivot consisting of an inner and outer cup, permitting the swinging of the ventilator through at least 85. The ventilator shall be so balanced that it can remain open in any desired position. 6.2 Centre-hung and bottom-hung ventilators shall have cast aluminium or bronze spring catch in the centre of the top section, suitablefor operation by hand or pole (chord in case of centre-hung). 6.3 Bottom-hung and top-hung ventilators shall be hung on aluminium alloy hinges. The former shall be provided with a pair of aluminium alloy folding side arms (tolimit theopening) and thelatterwith a300 mm long peg stay. Alternatively, top-hung ventilator may be provided with 30 cm cam opener. 306
b) Ventilators (opening part of a sash) shall be of

one size and designed to fit into outer frame of IN10 C 10 and with 1.2 mm clearance.
c) Tolerance for overall dimensions

Note - The than dimensions ance of 1.25 INlOC5=97.5
+3 mm.
overall width and height of window is smaller of modular opening by 2.5 cm, allowing a clearcm all round. Thus, width and height of cmx 147.5 cm.
SP : 21-1983
6.4 Two spring provided.
glazing
clips per pane
shall be
7. Composite Windows - Shall bedespatched unassembled, but complete with necessary components. Each coupling member will increase the overall height or width by 25 mm. For &tailed it&rrrtation, refer to IS : 1949-1961
8. Finish - Matt, scratch-brush or polished may be anodized additionally. A thick layer of transparent lacquer, based on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate, shah be applied, by the suppliers, toprotect the surface from action of wet cement during installation. This lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is completed.
Specification for aluminium
windows for industrial
buildings.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4351-1976 STEEL DOOR FRAMES (First Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements regarding material, dimensions and construction of steel door frames for internal and external use. Aluminium door frames not covered.
b) Tolerance
Note
+ 2 mm.
1-
X in the designation stands for protile designation, mm rebated for one set of shutter. mm rebated for one set of shutter. mm rebated for two sets of shutters.
such as A, B or C.
2. Material - Shall be manufactured from commercial mild steel sheets of 1.25 mm thickness, conforming to IS : 513-1973* or IS : 1079-1973.1. 3. Sizes, Tolerances and Designation a) Designation
Profile A=105~60 Profile B=125~60 Protile C= 165x60
Note 2 - Sizes are derived after allowing 5 mm clearance all round for fitting the frame into a modular opening based on 10 cm module. Note 3 - Designation by symbols denoting width (number of modules in width of opening); type (P=pressed steel frame); profile (A, B or C) and height (number of modules in height of opening).
Overall Width
mm 79 89 99 119 79 89 99 119
Overall Height
mm 199 199 199 199 209 209 209 209
8PX20 9PX20 1OPX20 12PX20 8PX21 9PX2 1 lOPX21 12PX21

*Specification SiOtl). %pecification revision ). for cold-rolled for hot-rolled
4.
Base Ties and Angle Thresholds - Base ties of pressed mild steel 1.25 mm thick adjustable to suit floor thickness of 25,30, 35 or 40 mm and removable, or alternatively, thresholds of mild steel angle 50X 25 mm, Min, shall be provided for external door frames.
5.
Fittings
carbon steel sheets (second revicarbon steel sheet and strip (third
5.1
Fixing Lugs - There shall be three adjustable lugs with split and tail to each jamb without fan light, and four for jamb with fan light. Head 25 mm wide x 1.6 mm thick, Min, and 95,120 or 160 mm long for
307
SP : 21-1983
profiles A, B and C respectively. Tail shall be 200 mm long, 40 mm. Min wide and 1 mm, Min thick. 5.2
Hinges
5.3 Lock-strike plate of steel, complete with mortar guard, shall be provided.
5.4 Shock Absorbers - Minimum 3 buffers, for side-hung door, and 2 buffers for double shutter door.
a) Frames fordoors 89 cm wide and above hinges welded to one jamb. b) Frames for doors 99 cm wide and above hinges, 3 welded to each jamb.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4351-1976
3 6
6. Finish - Door vanized or painted.

Specification
frames
shall
be hot-dip
gal-
for steel door frames
(first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6248-1979 METAL ROLLING
SHUTTERS
AND ROLLING
GRILLS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements regarding materials, fabrication and finish of metal rolling shutters and rolling grills for normal use. Note - Since the term rolling shutters is more commonly used, the reference in this standard is mainly to rolling shutters. However, since rolling shutters and rollinggrills are similar in design, construction and operation, all references to rolling shutters in this standard shall apply to rolling grills also. Special features of rolling grills, as different from rolling shutters have also been given. 2. Sizes - Specified by clear width (W) and clear height (H) of the opening. Width shall always be mentioned first. Stopper height shall be 1Ocm less than clear height, unless otherwise specified. 3. Types and Applicable Sizes 4. Requirements 4.1 Curtain shall be built up of interlocking lath section formed from cold rolled steel strips. Thickness of sheets not less than 0.9 mm for shutters up to 3.5 m width and 1.20 mm for 3.5 m width and above. 4.2 Lock Plate - Made of mild steel sheet not less than 3.15 mm thick, reinforced with mild steel angle section not less than 35 x 35 ~5 mm. Alternatively, it may be fabricated out of mild steel angles or Tee sections not less than 5 mm thick. 4.3 Guide Channels Fabricated out of mild 3.15 mm thickness.
and Bracket Plates -
steel
sheets
of minimum
4.4 Hood Covers - Made of mild steel sheets not less than 0.9 mm thick. 4.5 Safety Devices - For width up to 2.5 m, a properly fabricated and reinforced bottom lock plate shall be provided to give protection. For widths above 2.5 m, anchorage rods or central hasp and staple, or both may be provided. 5. Rolling Grills - Curtains may be built of aluminium alloy or cold rolled steel sheet links of 0.9 mm thickness assembled on tubes or rods, or out of 8 mm dia pild steel or aluminium alloy round bars. 5.1 Rolling Shutter-cum-Grill - In situations where a certain amount of ventilation combined wi& safety is called for the rolling shutter may have a small rolling grill portion either at top or at bottom or at both
308
a) Self-Coiling Type (Push-Pull Type or Manual type) - For sizes up to a clear areas of 8 m2 without ball bearings and 12 m2 with ball bearings. b) Gear-Operated Type (Mechanical Type) Shall be fitted with ball bearings. Used for a clear area up to 25 m2 if operated by bevel gear-box and crank handle, andup to 35 m* if operated by chain wheel and hand chain, mounted directly on the worm shaft. C) Electrically-Operated Type - For use up to about 50 m2 clear area. Operated by electric motor on 4001440 V, 3 phase, 50 cycles ac supply. Speed of movement of curtain shall not exceed about 10 cm/s.
SP : 21-1983
places. Height maximum.
of grill
portion
shall
be 0.5 m
6. Painting .- All component parts (except springs and the inside of guide channels) shall be given one Note-For details regarding
standard. types based on position
coat of a brushing quality ready mixed primer before despatch. Portions where there is contact between aluminium and steel shall be painted with zinc chromate primer.
of fixing, materials,
fabrication,
optional
features,
operation,
etc, refer to the

(first revision).
refer to IS : 6248-1979 Specification for metal rolling shutters and rolling grills
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7452-1982 HOT ROLLED STEEL SECYiIONS FOR DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
(First Revision)
regarding material, 1. Scope - Requirements nominal dimensions, tolerances, weights, finishing and supply of hot rolled steel sections used for door, window and ventilator frames and sashes.
Note - For situations where various sections are normally used, refer to Appendix A of the standard.
3.
Designation and Weight
Designation
T2 T3 T6 F2 F3 F5 F8
Weight Designation (kg/m)

1.036 1.14 0.839 1.46 2.28 1.55 1.92 F4B F7D FX6 FZ5 FX8 EZ7 KllB K12B -
Weight Yz 1:419 2.52 2.52 2.31 1.90 1.80 2.30
2. Material - Steel shall conform 1975* or IS : 2831-19751.
to IS : 2830-
4. Dimensions and Tolerances in Fig. 2 of the standard.

*Specification for carbon steel billets, blooms and rolling into structural steel (standard quality) (second tspecification for carbon steel billets, blooms and rolling into structural steel (ordinary quality) (second slabs for rerevision). slabs for rerevision). 5.
Shall be as given
Finishing - Rolled steel sections shall be free from rolling defects and shall be suitable for punching and/or welding.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7452-1982 Specification for hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators (first revision).
309
SECTION 15
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS : 280-1978 IS : 432 IS : 432 (Part I)-1982 IS : 432 (Part II)-1982 IS : 1139-1966 IS : 1566-1982 IS : 1785 IS : 1785 (Part I)-1966 IS : 1785 (Part II)-I%7 IS : 1786-1979 IS IS IS IS : 2090-1962 : 6003- 1970 : 6006-1970 : 7887-1975 Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement: Part I Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision) Part II Hard-drawn steel wire (third revision.) Hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel and high yield strength steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement (revised) Hard-drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement (second revision) Plain hard-drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete: Part I Cold-drawn stress-relieved wire (revised) Part II As-drawn wire Cold-worked steel high strength deformed bars for concrete reinforcement (second revision > High tensile steel bars used in prestressed concrete Indented wire for prestressed concrete Uncoated stress relieved strand for prestressed concrete Mild steel wire rod for general engineering purposes
Page
313
314 315 315 317
318 319 319 320 321 321 323
312
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 280-1978 MILD STEEL WIRE FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES (Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel wire of sizes 0.125 mm to 12.5 mm diameter for general engineering purposes. 2. Sizes 0.125 0.140 0.160 0.180 0.200 0.224 0.250 0.280 Diameter in mm 0.315 0.355 0.400 0.450 0.500 0.560 0.630 0.710 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.12 1.25 . 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.24 2.50 2.80 3.15 3.55 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.60 6.30 7.10 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.2 12.5 4. 4.1 Mechanical Properties Tensile Test Cotiition , Tensile Strength, MPa * Finishes other than Galvanized Annealed 500 Max Soft drawn 55OMax l/4 hard 450-650 112 hard 600-800 Hard 700-950 1MPa = lN/mm* = 1MN/m2 kgf/mm*. Galvanized 7
300-550 550-900 0.102 0
Note - Other sizes by mutual agreement. 3. Tolerances on Diameter only) (Applicable to coils
a) Galvanized - All sizes f 2.5 percent with a minimum of f0.025 mm b) Other finishes Size of Wire (mm> Up to 0.25 Over 0.25 up to 0.50 Over 0.50 up to 1 .OO Over 1.00 up to 1.50 Over 1.50 up to 2.50 Over 2.50 up to 5.00 Over 5.0 Tolerance (mm) fO.O1 kO.015 f0.02 f0.03 +_0.04 +0.05 +0.06
4.2 Wrapping Test (For Wire Smaller than 5 mm Dia) - Shall withstand without breaking or splitting being wrappea 8 times round its own diameter and subsequently straightened. 4.3 Bend Test (For Wire Dia 5 mm and Over+ Shall withstand being bent through 90 round a former of diameter equal to twice its own dia without breaking or splitting. 5. Finish - Annealed; annealed cleaned and limed; bright drawn; dull grey (dry drawn); galvanized; coppered, or tinned.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972Method for tensile testing of steel wire first revision), IS : 1755-1961Method for wrapping test of wire and 8 of the standard. Note 2-For chemical composition see 5 of the standard.
purposes (third revision).
refer to IS : 280-1978 Specification for mild steel wirefor general engineering
313
IS : 432 (PART I)- 1982 MILD STEEL AND MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL BARS AND HARD-DRAWN STEEL WIRE FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART I MILD STEEL AND MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL BARS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of mild steel and medium tensile steel plain bars in round and square sections for use as reinforcement in concrete. 2. Types and Grades a) Mild steel bars; Grade I and Grade II, and b) Medium tensile steel bars.
Note - Grade II bars am not recommended for use in structures located in earthquake zones subjected to severe damage and for structures subjected to dynamic loading (other than wind loading).
5.2
Coiled Rounds and Squares 310.5 mm for size up to and includ-
5.2.1 Size ing 12 mm.
5.2.2 Out of shupe - Permissible value at any cross section shall not exceed 0.65 mm.
Note 1 - Size shall be diameter in case of round bars and side width in case of square bars. Note 2 - No weight tolerance coiled round and square bars.
shall be applicable in case of
3. Freedom from Defects - Finished bars shall be sound and free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and rough, jagged and imperfect edges, etc. 4. Nominal Sizes - Diameter of round bars or side of square bars shall be 5,6,8, 10, 12,16,20,22, 25, 28, 32, 36, 40, 45 and 50 mm. 5. Tolerance 5.1 Bars in Straight Length 5.1.1 Size Size / mm 25 35 50 80 100 Including mm 25 35 50 80 100 mm +0.5 +0.6 f0.8 +1.0 f1.3 f 1.6 percent of dia or side width Tolerance
6.
Physical
Requirements
6.1 Ultimate tensile stress, yield stress and percentage elongation shall be as given in Table 1.
TABLE
1 MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES
OF BARS
ELONGATlON* PERCENT.
Min
SL TYPE AND NOMINAL SIZE OFBAR No.
ULTIMATE YIELD TENSILE STRESS STRESS
Min
Min
i)
Mild Steel Grade I For bars up to and including 20 mm For bars over 20 mm, up to and including 50 mm 410 410 250 240 23 23
ii) Mild Steel Grade II For bars up to and including 20 mm For bars over 20 to mm, up and including 50 mm iii) Medium Tensile Steel For bars up to and including 16 mm For bars over 16 mm, up to and including 32 mm For bars over 32 mm, up to and including 50 mm *Elongation cross-sectional 540 540 510 350 340 330 20 20 20 370 370 225 215 23 23
5.1.2 Ovality and out-of-square - Permissible ovality for round bars and out-of-square of square bars shall be 75 percent of total tolerance (plus and minus) specified on size. 5.1.3 , Over mm 10 16 Weight Size I\ Up to and Including_ mm 10 16 . Tolerance, Percent
on a gauge length 5.65 * area of the test piece.
where So is the
t-7 +5 +3 314
6.2
Bend Test -
Shall withstand the specified test.
SP : 21-1983
Note l-For
test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974 Method for bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube Cfirst revision) (both read in conjunctionwith IS : 226-1975 Specification for structural steel (standard quality) GJ?h revision) and 9 of the standard. Note 2-For chemical composition refer to see4 of thestandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 432 (Part I)-1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement: Part I Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 432 (PART II)-1982 MILD STEEL AND MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL BARS AND HARD-DRAWN STEEL WIRE FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART II HARD-DRAWN SiEEL WIRE
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of hard-drawn steel wire of medium strength used as reinforcement in concrete. 2. Freedom from .Defects - Finished wire shall be sound, free from splits, surface flaw, etc. 3., Nominal Sizes - 2.65,3.0,3.15,3.55,4.0,4.5, 4.75, 5.0, 5.3, 5.6, 6.0, 6.3, 7.1, 7.5, 8.0, 9.0, 9.5, and 10 mm diameter. 4. Tolerance Nominal diameter:
Length:
5. 5.1
Physical Requirements Tensile Propenies a) b) c) Ultimate tensile stress, @fin) 570N/mm2 Proof stress (0.2 percent), @fin) 480 N/mm2 Elongation over gauge length of 8 diameter, f&fin) 7.5 percent
-I-2 percent - 1 percent +6 mm up to 3 m +13 mm over 3 m
5.2 Reverse Bend Test - Test piece shall withstand, without showing any sign of fracture, one complete cycle of reverse bend.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire Cfirst revision), IS:1716-1971 Method for reverse bend testing of steel wire Cfirst revision) and 8 of the standard. Note 2-For chemical composition see 3 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 432 (Part II)-1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement: Part II Hard-drawn steel wire (third revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1139-1966 HOT ROLLED MILD STEEL, MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL AND HIGH YIELD STRENGTH STEEL DEFORMED BARS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
(Revised)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements and methods of test for hot rolled mild steel medium tensile steel and high yield strength steel deformed bars used as reinforcement in concrete. 315 No. 1,2 and 3) 2. Types a) Mild steel deformed bars, b) Medium tensile steel deformed bs?rs, and c) High yield strength steel deformed bars.
SP : 21-1983
3.
Deformations
4 Bond strength (at a measured slip of 0.025 mm)

shall exceed that of plain bar of same size by 40 percent or mom.
b) Angle between deformation
and axis of bar: not less than 45. When this is less than 7CP, deformation shall reverse in direction altematively . on each side
Weight - Basis of calculation: (a) Steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm* of cross sectional area per metre run, (b) nominal size of deformed bar is equal to diameter or side of plain bar having same weight per metre length. The weight thus calculated shall be checked against actualweight of bar 1 m long.
6.
5.
Tolerance
+4 percent (Total margin 8 percent)
c) Average spacing of deformation

shall not exceed 7/10 size of bar.
On weight for nominal size up to 8 mm dver 8 mm
d) Gaps between extreme ends of deformations

on opposite sides shall not exceed 12.5 percent of perimeter. Total width of longitudinal ribs shall not exceed 25 percent of perimeter when more than 2 such ribs are provided.
e) Average height of deformation shall not be less

than 4 percent of size for bars below 16 mm and 5 percent for 16 mm bars and above.
f2.5 percent (Total margin 5 percent) Cutting tolerance on length When minimum length is specified +75 mm When maximum length is specified -50 mm Specified length is not stated to be -25 mm and Mau or Min +75 mm
7.
Tensile Properties
7.1
SI No.
Property
Nominal Size of Bars All sizes
Mild Steel 42
Medium Tensile Steel Bars 55
High Yield Strength Steel Bars 15 percent greater than the measured yield stress 42.5 42.5 42.5 14.5
i) Tensile strength (kgf/mm*, Min)
ii) Yield stress: (kgf/mmz, Min) a) Mild and high yield strength steel bars 20 and below Over 20 up to 40 Over 40 16 and below Over 16 up to 32 Over 32 All sizes 26 24 24 23 36 35 34 20
b) Medium tensile steel bars
iii) Elongation (percentage, Min)
4.
Freedom from Defects - Finished bars shall be sound and free from cracks, harmful surface flaws, laminations, rough and imperfect edges, etc.
7.2
Bend Test -
Shah withstand the specified test. Shall withstand the specified
7.3 R&end test.
Test -
Note l-For test procedures, refer to 1S : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974 Method for bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube and 10 of the standard.
Note 2-For
chemical composition see 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1139-1966 Specification for hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel and high yield strength steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement (revised).
316
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1566-1982 HARD-DRAWN STEEL WIRE FABRIC FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for hard-drawn steel wire fabric consisting of hard-drawn steel wire with cross wires electrically welded to them for use as concrete reinforcement. b) Size of sheet 525 mm for dimensions up to 5 m. f?4 pexent for dimensions over 5, mm
2.
Types a) Oblong mesh, and b) Square mesh.
3. Material - Wire used shall be hard-drawn steel wire suitable for welding. 4. Sizes of Sheets or Rolls - Width of fabric shall be such as to fit in with modular size of 10 cm module. 5. Mass - Calculated on the basis that steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm2 of nominal cross-sectional area per metre run. Actual weight is determined by weighing any convenient size and if possible at least one square metre . 6. Tolerances a) Pitch: f7% percent
7.
c) Mass i) When neither maximum nor +6 percent minimum mass specified ii) When maximum mass speci- T y2percent fied iii) When minimum mass speci- _A* percent fied Mechanical properties
7.1 Shall meet the minimum requirements forphysical properties as prescribed in IS : 432 (Part II)-1982*. 7.2 Bend Test - Test piece shall withstand one complete cycle of reverse bend around a pin of size indicated below: Diameter of Specimen Wire 7.5 mm and under Over 7.5 mm Diameter of Pin Equal to diameter of specimen Equal to twice the diameter of specimen
*Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement: Part II Harddrawn steel wire (third revision).
Note l-For mesh sizes, weights and sizes of wires for square and oblong welded wire fabric commonly manufactured see Appendix A of the standard.
Note 2-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire (first revision), IS : 1716-1971 Method for reverse bend testine of steel wire ~first revision) and 11 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1566-1982 concrete reinforcement (second revision).
Specification
for
hard-drawn
steel wire fabric for
317
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1785 (PART I)-1966 PLAIN HARD-DRAWN FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

PART I COLD-DRAWN STRESS-RELIEVED WIRE
STEEL WIRE
(Revised)
(With Amendments No. 1 to 4) 4.2 Proof Stress - Proof stress (which produces a residual strain of 0.2 percent of original gauge length) shall not be less than 85 percent of minimum specified tensile strength. 4.3 Ductility verse bend test. Shall withstand the prescribed re-
1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of plain, cold-drawn, stress-relieved steel wire for use in prestressed concrete. 2. Nominal Sizes - 2.5, 8.0 mm (nominal diameter). 3. Tolerances +0.05 mm for nominal sizes 3,4, 5,7 and 8 mm and f0.02,5 mm for nominal size 2.5 mm. 4. Physical Requirements after 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 7.0 and
4.4 Relaxation Stress - Shall not exceed 5 percent of initial stress at the end of 1 000 hours. When it is not possible to conduct 1 000 hours relaxation test, wire may be accepted on basis of 100 hours test, provided that relaxation stress at 100 hours is not more than 3.50 percent of the initial stress and provided manufacturer furnishes proof establishing a relation between relaxation test values at 1 000 hours and 100 hours. 4,s Susceptibility to Stress Corrosion Manufacturer shall provide proof that wire is not susceptible to stress corrosion-. 4.6 There shall be no welds or joints in the finished wire as supplied to the purchaser. Any welds or joints made during manufacture to promote continuity of operations shall be removed.
revision), IS : 1716-1971 Method
4.1 Ultimate tensile strength and elongation rupture over a gauge length of 200 mm: Nominal diameter, mm Ultimate tensile strength, kgf/mm2, Min Elongation, percentage,
2.5 3 4 5 7 8 205 190 175 160 150 140 2.5 2.5 3 4 4 4
Min
Note I---For test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire f&t
for reverse bend testing of steel wire ffirst revision) and 7 of the standard. Note 2-For chemical composition see 3 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1785 (Part I)-1966 Specification for plain hard-drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete: Part I Cold-drawn stress-relieved wire (revised).
___ __~
318
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1785 (PART II)-1967 PLAIN HARD DRAWN FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

PART II AS-DRAWN WIRE No. 1) Tensile Strength Nominal Diameter (mm) 3.15 4.00 5.00 (With Amendment 1. Scope - Requiremerlts for manufacture, supply and testing of plain as-drawn steel wire for use in prestressed concrete pipes (for introducing circumferential compression, etc) and similar other purposes. 2. Nominal Sizes 3.15, 4.0 and 5.0 mm dia. 5.1
STEEL WIRE
Tensile Strength, (kgf/mm2) 180 175 160
Min
3. Tolerance - kO.02 mm for 3.15 mm size, and +0.03 mm for others. 4. Requirements a) Finished wires shall be sound, free from splits, piping, etc; and b) There shall be no welds in the finished wire. 5.
Note Note
5.2 ProofStress - 0.2 percentproof stress shall not be less than 75 percent of minimum specified tensile strength. 5.3 Ductility - Shall withstand the prescribed reverse bend test. When uncoiled the wire shall remain flat and shall not spring up. to Stress Corrosion 5.4 Susceptibility Manufacturer shall provide proof that wire is not susceptible to stress corrosion.
for tensile testing of steel wire Cfirst revision) and 7 of the stuand~rd.
Mechanical
I -For 2-For
Properties _--._
refer to IS
test procedures,
1521-1972
Method
chemical composition
see 3 of the
standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1785 (Part II)-1967 Sp&zification for plain hard drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete: Part II As-drawn wire. ______
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1786-1979 COLD-WORKED STEEL HIGH STRENGTH DEFORMED BARS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for cold-worked steel high strength deformed bars for use as reinforcement in concrete, in two strength grades as: Fe 415 (N/mm2) and Fe 500(Nlmm2). 2. Nominal Sizes (Diameters) Cross Sectional Area (mm21 28.3 50.3 78.6 113.1 201.3 Mass Per Metre Run 0%) 0.222 0.395 0.617 0.888 1.579 No. 1) Ncvninal Size Cross Sectional Mass Per Metre Area Run (Dimeter) (mm) (mm2) (kg) 18 254.6 1.999 20 314.3 2.467 22 380.3 2.985 25 491.1 3.855 28 616.0 4.836 32 804.6 7.994 40 1257.2 9.869 45 1591.1 12.490 50 1964.3 15.424 Note - The nominalsize (diameter) of a deformedbar is equal to thatof a plain roundbar havingthesamemasspermetrelength.
Nominal Size (Diameter) (mm) 6 8 10 12 16
319
SP : 21-1983
3.
Tolerances On specified lengths On minimum lengths +75 mm -25 mm +50 mm -0 mm
Characteristic
Tensile strength, Min
4. Nominal Mass - The density shall be taken as 0.007 85 kg/mm2 of cross sectional area per metre run. 5. Physical Properties Fe 415 . 14.5
l
Fe 500 Fe 415 A , / 15 per cent 10 percent more than more than the actual the actual 0.2 percent 0.2 percent proof stress proof stress
Characteristic
0.2 percent proof stress, / Min (Nlmm2) Elongation, percentage, Min (on gauge length of 5.65 A, where A is the cross sectional area)
Fe 500
6.
Chemical
Composition
Constituent
12.0 Carbon Sulphur Phosphorus
Percentage Max
Fe 415 0.25 0.055 0.055 Fe 500 0.30 0.050 0.050
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974Bend test for steel oroducts other than sheet, strip. wire and tube (first revision) and 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 17861979 Specification for cold-worked deformed bars for concrete reinforcement (second revision).
-
steel high strength
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2090-1962 HIGH TENSILE STEEL BARS USED IN PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

1. Scope - Requirements for high tensile steel bars (alloy steel having tensile strength of not less than 100 kgf/mm2) used in prestressed concrete. 2. Freedom from Defects - Finished bars shall be sound and free from splits, harmful surface flaws, rough, jagged and imperfect edges, and other defects. 3. Nominal Sizes 32 mm diameter. 4. Tolerances a) Nominal size f0.25 mm for bars up to 20 mm +0.5 mm for bars above 20 mm 10, 12, 16, 20,22, 25,28 and . b) Weight f2.5 percent (weight calculated on the basis that high tensile steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm2 of crosssectional area per metre run) Requirements 100 kgf/mm2. 80 percent and 90
5. 5.1
Physical
Tensile Strength, Min -
5.2 Proof Stress - Between percent of ultimate strength. 5.3
Elongation at Rupture, Min Modulus 16 x lo3
10 percent. to 21 X 103
5.4 Youngs kgflmm2
5.5 Relaxation - Relaxation of stress shall not exceed 5 kgf/mm2 at the end of 1 000 hours.
Nole I-For
standard. __-
test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products (firsf revision) and 9 of the chemical composition see 7 of the standard.
Note 2-For
For detailed information, prestressed concrete. __--
refer to IS : 20&l-1962 Specification for high tensile steel bars used in
320
SP : II-1983
SUMMARY IS :
OF
6003-1970 INDENTED
WIRE FOR PRESTRESSED

No. 1 and 2) 6.1
CONCRETE
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of indented hard drawn wire for use in prestressed concrete. 2. Chemical Composition - Shall be cold-drawn from steel. Steel shall contain not more than 0.05 percent each of sulphur and phosphorus. 3. Nominal diameter. 4. Tolerances Sizes 5.00, 4.00, and 3.00 mm
Ultimate Tensile Strength

mm 5 160 4 175 3 190
Nominal diameter,
Min tensile strength (kgf/mrn*)
6.2 Proof Stress - Shall not be less than 85 percent of the minimum specified tensile strength. 6.3 Ductility - Shall withstand without signs of fracture reverse bend test. showing
(on Nominal Diameter) -
f0.5 mm
6.4 Elongation After Rupture (on Gauge Length of 200 mm) Nominal diameter, mm 5 4 4 3 3 2.5
Min elongation
5. Geomelrical Characteristics - Shape and pattern of indentations shall be as mutually agreed, provided the indentations are in two lines diametrically opposite to each other and are staggered. 6. Physical Requirements
(Percent)
6.5 Relaxation - Relaxation stress shall not exceed 5 percent of initial stress at the end of 1 000 hours. 6.6 Susceptibility to Stress Corrosion Manufacturer shall provide proof that wire supplied is not susceptible to stress corrosion.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS reverse bend testing of steel wire Cfirsr
: 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire (first revision), IS : 1716-1971 Method for revision) and 8 of Ihe sfmdard.
refer to IS : 6003-1970 Specification for indented wire forprestressed
concrete.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6006-1970 UNCOATED STRESS RELIEVED FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of uncoated stress relieved, high tensile steel strands for use in prestressed concrete. The following types of strands are coveEd: a) Two wire strand, b) Three wire strand, and c) Seven wire strand. 2. Siie and Designation - Two wire and three wire strand designated by number and diameter of element wires. Seven wire strand designated by approximate overall diameter of the strand and the number of element
Wk.
STRAND
No. 1 and 2) 3. Material -Element wire shall be cold drawn from plain carbon steel, containing not more than 0.050 percent each of sulphur and phosphorus.
4.
Manufacture of Strand - Seven wire strand shall have a centre wire at least 1.5 percent greater in diameter than surrounding wires enclosed tightly by 6 helically placed outer wires with a uniform length of lay of at least 12 times but not more than 16 times the nominal diameter of the strand. Length of lay for 2 and 3 wire strands shall be uniform and shall be 24 to 36 times the diameter of element wire. Wires shall not unravel when strand is cut. After stranding, strands shall be subjected to stress relieving.
321
SP : 21-1983
5.
Dimensions
and Tolerances
a) Two and three wire strand Designation Nominal Diameter Element Wire (mm) 2.0 Ik 0.03 3.0 f 0.03 3.0 f 0.03 of Nominal CrossSectional Area of Strand (mm*) 6.28 14.2 21.3 Nominal Weight of Strand (kg/m) 0.049 63 0.116 0.166
2-ply 2 mm 2-ply 3 mm 3-ply 3 mm b) Seven wire strand Designation
Nominal Diameter Strand (mm) 6.3 7.9 9.5 11.1 12.7 15.2 + 0.04 f 0.04 + 0.04 kO.04 f 0.04 f 0.04
of
Nominal CrossSectional Area of Strand (mm*) 25.1 37.4 51.6 70.3 92.9 138.7
Nominal Weight of Strand (l&m ) 0.195 0.295 0.408 0.555 0.735 1.101
6.3 7.9 9.5 11.1 12.5 15.2
mm mm mm mm mm mm
7-ply 7-ply 7-ply 7-ply 7-ply 7-ply
6. 6.1
Physical Breaking
Requirements Strength Breaking Load, Min (kg0 1 2 3 4 7 9 12 16 23 300 600 900 536 031 525 700 783 133 0.2 Percent Proof Load (kg0 1 2 3 3 5 8 10 14 19 105 210 310 856 976 0% 795 266 663 __
Class
Designation
Breaking Load, Min (kg0
Class
Designation
0.2 Percent Proof Load 0 8 11 15 22 868 952 923 100
2-ply 2 mm 2-ply 3 mm 3-ply 3 mm 6.3 mm 7-ply 7.9 mm 7-ply 9.5 mm 7-ply 11.1 mm 7-ply 12.5 mm 7-ply 15.2 mm 7-ply
9.5 11.1 12.5 15.2
mm mm mm mm
7-ply 7-ply 7-ply 7-ply
10 14 18 26
433 061 733 660
6.2 Proof Load -- 0.2 percent proof load of the strand shall not be less than that specified in 6.1. 6.3 Elongation - Not less than 3.5 percent on a gauge length of not less than 600 mm. 6.4 Relaxation - Relaxation stress shall not exceed 5 percent of the initial stress at the end.of 1 000 hours.
Cfirsf revision)
Note-For
test procedures, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire
and 8 of Gzestandard.
For detailed infot?nation, prestressed concrete.
refer to IS : 6006-1970
Specification
for
uncoated
stress relieved
strand for
322
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7887-1975 MILD STEEL WIRE ROD F,OR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES

1. Scope - Requirements of hot-rolled mild steel wire rods up to a diameter of 30 mm and coil weight of 1 000 kg for general engineering purposes.
Note - Wire rods in drawing, although some Most of it is used for making annealed wire, rivets, etc. coil form are used mostly for further cold material is used for reinforced concrete. drawing wire for further conversion to galvanized wire, nails, wood screws,
3. 3.1
Tests
Tensile Tests
Tensile strength, Max Elongation, Min
Note 1 N/mm*=0.102 kgf/mmr.
540 N/mm2 23 percent
2.
Sizes and Tolerances
Diameter (mm)
Size Tolerance, (mm)
Out of Shape, Max (Difference Between Max and Min Dia) (mm) 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.6
Dump Test - To be carried out only if desired by purchaser. Test piece of length twice its diameter, cut from the wire rod, shall at room temperature withstand without fracture or crack while being compressed to half its length. Dump test shall not be made on wire rod below 6 mm diameter. 3.3 Bend Test - Test piece when cold shah, without cracking, be doubled over either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until internal diameter of the bend is not greater than twice diameter of the w ire rod. There shall be no bend test for wire rods below 6 mm diameter.
Cfirst revision) and IS
3.2
5.0
?I 0.3
f 0.3 + 0.4 z!z0.5 rt 0.5 f 0.5
5.5 6 to 7 8 to 10 11 to 20 21 to 30
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products Method for bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube Cfirsf revision). Note 2-Forchemical composition see 5 of the standard.
: 1599-1974
For detailed information, engineering purposes.
refer to IS : 7887-1975 Specification for mild steel wire rod for general
323
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title STRUCTURAL IS 1s IS IS IS : 226-1975 : 961-1975 : 1977-1975 : 2062-1980 : 8500-1977 STEEL Structural Structural Structural Structural Weldable steel (standard quality) (fifth revision) steel (high tensile) (second revision) steel (ordinary quality) (second revision) steel (fusion welding quality) (second revision) structural steel (medium and high strength qualities) 327 328 329 330 331
Page
SHEET AND STRIP IS IS IS IS : : : : 277-1977 412-1975 1079-1973 4030-1973 Galvanized steel sheets (plain and corrugated) (third revision) Expanded metal steel sheets for general purposes (second revision) Hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip (third revision) Cold rolled carbon steel strip for general engineering purposes (first revision) Cold-rolled medium, high carbon and low alloy steel strip for general engineering purposes 332 333 335 336 337
IS : 7226-1974 TUBES AND TUBULARS
IS : 1161-1979 Steel tubes for structural purposes (third revision) Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings: IS : 1239 Part I Mild steel tubes (fourth revision) IS : 1239 (Part I)- 1979 IS : 1239 (Part II)- 1982 Part II Mild steel tubulars and other wrought steel pipe fittings (third revision) IS : 4270-1967 Steel tubes used for water wells Elliptical mild steel tubes IS : 4516-1968 IS : 4923-1968 Hollow steel sections for structural use
338 339 340 342 343 344
326
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 226-1975 STRUCTURAL
STEEL (STANDARD
QUALITY)
(Fifth Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 to 4)
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel (standard quality) plate, sections bars, etc, designated as Fe 410-S (St 42-S) for use in structural work. Steel may also be supplied in copper bearing quality in which case it shall be designated as Fe 410 Cu-S (St 42-SC). Note - Steel specified in this standard is suitable for welding provided that the thickness of material does not exceed 20 mm. When the material conforming to this standard is over 20 mm thick, special precautions may be required in case the material is to be welded (see IS : 823-1964*).
3.
Freedom from Defects -Finished material shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, rough, jagged and imperfectedges, etc. Minor surface defects may be removed by grinding provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent (with a maximum of 3 mm). Mechanical Properties
Tensile Test
4. 4.1
Class
Thickness/ Diameter
mm
Tensile Strength
kgf/mm2 Bend test 42-54 42-54 42-54 Bend test 42-54 42-54
Yield Stress Min

kgf/mm2 only shall 26 24 23 only shall 26 24 be be
Percentage Elongation Min

required 23 23 23 required 23 23
Plates,
flats, angles,
tees, beams,
channels,
etc
Be(ow 6 6 to 20 Over 20 up to 40 Over 40 Below 10 IO to 20 Over 20
Bars (round,
square and hexagonal)
Note 1-I
N/mmz=
1 MN/mZ=0.102
kgf/mm2. requirements are complied with, the upper limit for tensile strength requirements.
that the yield stress and elongation may be raised by 3 kgf/mm2.
Note 2-Provided Note 3-If
agreed to mutually,
the material
with thickness
below 6 mm may be supplied
with tensile property
2.
Chemical Composition
Constituent Percent, Max
Carbon (for thickness/diameter 20 mm and below) Carbon (for thickness/diameter over 20 mm) Sulphur Phosphorus
0.23 0.25 0.055 0.055
4.2 Bend Test - Shall withstand without cracking the prescribed test when doubled over until internal diameter is not greater than3 times the thickness of test piece (2 times diameter in case of bars up to 25 mm diameter). 5. Dimensions and Tolerances - Dimensions of rolled steel products shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards as listed in Table 3 of the standard. Rolling and cutting tolerances shall conform to IS : 1852-1973*.
6.
Note - When steel is required in copper-bearing quality, the copper content shall be between 0.20 and 0.35 percent.
Weight - Shall be calculated on the basis that steel weighs 7.85 g/cd.
*Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (second revision).
*Code of procedure
for manual arc welding of mild steel.
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974 Method
for bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube (first revision) and 7 and 8 of the standard.

revision).
refer to IS : 226-1975 Specification for structural steel (standard quality) (fifth
327
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
(With Amendments 1. !kope - Requirements for high tensile steel of two grades designated as Fe 570-HT (St 58-HT) and Fe 54OW-HT (St 55-HTw) for use in structural work. Fe 57CMT (St 58-HT) is intended for use in structures where fabrication is done by methods other than welding. Fe 54OW-l-IT (St 55-HTw) is intended for use in structures where welding is employed for fabrication and where guaranteed weldability is required. Steel may also be supplied in copper bearing quality in which case the two grades shall be designated as Fe 570Cu-HT (St 58-HTC) and Fe 540 CuW-HT (St 55-HT WC).
Note - In this standard high tensile structural steel has been classified into two grades designated as Fe 570-HT (St 58-HT) and Fe 540 W-HT (St 55-HTw). Steel Fe 540 W-HT (St 55-HTw) is intended for use in structures where fusion welding is employed.
STEEL (HIGH TENSILE)

No. 1 to 4) 3.2 Bend Test - Shall withstand without cracking, the prescribed test when doubled over until internal diameter is not greater than 3 times the thickness of test piece (2 times in case of bars up to 25 mm diameter). 3.3 Weldability - Steel is acceptable if at no point the hardness exceeds 35Ow. If this limit is exceeded, it will be necessary to take special precautions when welding, the thickness of the plate being taken into account. Values higher than 350 HV may be accepted for certain low alloy steels. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances - Dimensions of rolled steel products shall conform to the relevent Indian Standards as listed in Table 4 of the standard. Rolling and cutting tolerances shall conform to IS : 1852-1973*. 5. Weight - Calculated weighs 7.85 g/cm. on the basis that steel
(Second Revision)
2. Freedom from Defects -Finished material shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, rough, jagged and imperfected edges, etc. 3. 3.1 Mechanical Properties
Tensile Test Nominal Thickness Diameter Tensile Strength, Min A

St 58-m &$/mm? Below 6 6 to 28 Over 28 up Over 45 up 6 to 16 Over 16 up Over 32 up Over 63
Note -
*Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (second r&&r).
\ /
Yield Stress, Min A

St 58-HT (kgf/mm2) shall 36 35 33 30 be St 55-HTw &#nm2) required 36 35 34 29
St 55HTw (kgf/mm2) test only 55 55 52 50
\.
to 45 to 63 to 32 to 63
Bend 58 58 58 55
kgfknn-3.
Percentage alongation : 20 Percent, Min

lN/mmZ= lMN/m2=0.102
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel products lfirsr revision), IS : 1599-1974 Method of bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube Cfirsf revision), 7, 8 and Appendix A of fhe sfandard. Note 2-For chemical composition see 5 of Ihe srandard.

revision).
refer to IS : 961-1975 Specification for structural steel (high tensile) (second
328
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1977-1975 STRUCTl JRAL STEEL (ORDINARY Qt JALITY)
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for two grades of mild steel (ordinary quality) designated as Fe 310-O (St 32-O) and Fe 410-O (St 42-O). The former grade is intended for general engineering purposes such as door and window frames, window bars, grills, gates, hand railings, builders hardware, etc, while latter is intended for use on structures not subjected to dynamic loading other than wind loads, such as platform roofs, foot over bridges, office buildings, etc. 2. Chemical Composition Constituents, Percent, Max A / Carbon Sulphur Phosphorus 0.30 0.070 0.070 0.30 0.070 0.070 4. 4.1 No. 1 to 3) Mechanical Properties Tensile Test
4.2 Bend Test - Shall withstand without fracture the prescribed test when doubled over until internal diameter is not greater than 3 times the thickness of test piece (2 times in case of bars up to 25 mm diameter). 5. Dimensions and Tolerances - Dimensions of rolled steel products shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards as listed in Table 2 of the standard. Rolling and cutting tolerances shall conform to IS : 1852-1973*. 6. Weight - Calculated weighs 7.85 g/cm3. on the basis that steel
Steel Designation
Fe 3 10-O (St 32-O) Fe 410-O (St 42-O)

Note -
Copper may be present up to a maximum of 0.35 percent.
3. Freedom frtirn Defects - Finished material shall be reasonably free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, rough, jagged and imperfect edges, etc. Minor surface defects may be removed by grinding provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent (with a maximum of 3 mm).
Steel Designation Fe 310-O
*Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (second revbion).
Product
Thickness/ Diameter (mm) Below 6 6 and above Below 10 10 and above Below 6 6 up to 20 Over 20 up to 40 Over 40 Below 10 10 up to 20 Over 20
Tensile Strength (kgf/mmz) Bend test 32 to 44 Bend test 32 to 44 Bend test 42 to 54 42 to 54 42 to 54 Bend test 42 to 54 42 to 54
Yield Stress Min (kgf/mm2) only only only shall shall shall 26 24 23 shall 26 24 be be be
Elongation Percent
Min
required 26 required 26 required 23 23 23 required 23 23
Plates, angles, flats, tees, beams,etc Bars
Fe 410-O
Plates, flats, angles, tees, channels, beams
only
be
Bars
Note 1- IN/mm2 = 1 MN/m2 = 0.102 kgf/m2. Note 2-Provided that the yield stress and elongation requirements are complied with, the upper limit for tensile strength may be raised by 3 kgf/mm*.
Note-For
test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972Method of tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974 Method of bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip, wire and tube (first revision), 7, 8 and Appendix A of the standard.
For detailed information, (second revision).
refer
to IS : 1977-197.5 Specification for
structural steel (ordinary quality)
329
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
STEEL (FUSION WELDING
QUALITY)
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel (fusion welding quality designated as Fe 4 10-W (St 42-W), intended for use in structures subjected to dynamic loading where welding is employed for fabrication and where fatigue and fluctuation and reversal of stresses are involved, such as crane gantry girders, bridges, etc. The steel may also be supplied in copper-bearing quality designated as Fe 410 Cu-W (St 42-WC).
3.2 Bend Test - Test piece shall withstand without fracture, being doubled over until internal diameter is not greater than three times its thickness (two times in case of bars up to 25 mm diameter). 3.3 Weldability Test - Shall satisfy the prescribed tests(applicable for plates with thicknesses between28 and 50 mm) 3.4 Charpy Impact Test- Shall be carried out at sub-zero temperature, if required by the purchaser. 2. Freedom from Defects - Finished steel shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, rough, jagged and imperfect edges, etc. Minor defects may be removed by grinding provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent (with a maximum of 3 mm). 4. Dimensions and Tolerances - Dimensions of rolled steel products shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards as listed in Table 3 ofthe standard. Rolling and cutting tolerances shall conform to IS : 1852-1973*. 5. Weight - Shall be calculated steel weighs 7.85 g/cm3. on the basis that
3. 3.1
Mechanical Properties Tensile Test

Class
*Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (second rwision).
of Steel Product
Nominal Thickness/ Diameter, mm Below 6 6 up to and including 20 Over 20 up to and including 40 Over 40
Tensile Strength, N/mm2 (kgf/mmz) 410-530 (42- 54) 410-530 (42-54) 410-530 (42-54) 410-530 (42-54) 410-530 (42-54)
Yield Stress, Min N/mm2 (kgf/mmz) 250 (26) 230 (24) 220 (23) 250 (26) 230 (24)
Percentage Elongation, Min (Guane Length) 5.65&23 23
Plates, sections (for example, angles, tees,

beams, channels, etc) and flats
23
Bars (rounds, square and hexagonal)
Below 10 10 up to and including 20
.
23 23
Over 20
Note-Provided the yield stress and elongation requirements are complied with, the upper limit for tensile strength may be raised by 30 N/mm*. Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974 Method of bend test for steel products other than sheets, strip, wire and tube (first revision) and 7 to 10 of the standard. Note 2-For chemical composition see 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2062-1980 Specification for structural steel (fusion welding quality)
(second revision).
330
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8500-1977 WELDABLE STRUCTURAL STEEL (MEDIUM AND HIGH STRENGTH QUALITIES)

1. Scope - Requirements of steels of medium and high strength qualities, for use in structural work. Where welding is employed for fabrication and guaranteed weldability is required, welding procedure should be as specified in Indian Standard Recommendations for metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels (under preparation).
Note 1 - Till such time, this Indian Standaid is published, welding procedure should be as agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer. Note 2 - These steels are specific class of steels in which enhanced mechanical properties are obtained by the incorporation of low proportions of one or more alloying elements, besides carbon.
grinding provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent below the minimum specified thickness. 3.
Mechanical Properties -
(See Table 1)
4. Dimensions - Unless otherwise agreed, the nominal dimensions of rolled products shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards given in Table 3 of the standard. 5. Tolerances - Unless otherwise agreed the rolling and cutting tolerances shall conform to IS : 18521973*. 6. Mass - Shall be calculated on the basis that steel weighs 7.85 g/cm.
*Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products revision). OF WELDABLE STRUCTURAL
ELONGA\
2.
Finished material shall be free from cracks; surface flaws; laminations: rough, jagged and imperfect edges; and other such defects. Minor surface defects may be removed by
TABLE
GRADE
Freedom from Defects -
first
MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES
STEELS
CHARPY V-NOTCH IMPACT TEST (AVERAGE OF 3 VALUES) -FkF
[See IS
: 1762
TENSILE STRENGTH ,
YIELD STRENGTH,Min A
(Part Q-1974*1
<6 mm
6-20 mm
21-40 mm
41-63 mm
>63 mm
TION, PERCENT,
BEND (INTERNAL DIAMETER),
Min
Min
N/mm2 Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe 440-HT 1 440-HT 2 490-HT 490-HTA 490-HTB 540-HT 540-HTA 540-HTB 570-HT 590-HT 640-HT 440-560 440-560 490-610 490-6 10 490-610 540-660 540-660 540-660 570-720 590-740 640-790
N/mm2 300 300 350 350 350 410 410 410 450 490 540
N/mm* 300 300 340 340 340 400 400 400 440 480 530
N/mm* 290 290 330 330 330 390 390 390 430 -
N/mm2 280 280 320 320 320 380 380 380 420 -
N/mm2 By agreement -do-do-do-do-do-do-do-do20 20 20 21 22 19 20 21 18 18 17

3u 3T 3T 3T 2T 3T 3T 2T 3T 3T 3T
J 40 45 35 40 30 -
J 30 35 25 30 20 -
Note l- -IN/mm2 Note 2-Higher Note J-The manufacturer.
= 1 MN/m2 = 0.102 kgf/mm* impact values than specified more stringent
= 1 MPa. will be subject to mutual agreement. may be agreed between the purchaser and the
requirements
than
those
specified
above
*Code for designation of steel Cfirst revision). t T is the thickness of the test piece.
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1608-1972 Method for tensile testing of steei products (first revision), IS : 1599-1974 Method for bend test for steel products other than steel strip, wire and tube (fkst revision) and IS : 1757-1974 Method for beam impact test (V-notch) on steel (first revision). Note 2-For chemical composition see 6 of the standard.
For detailed information, high strength qualities).
refer to IS : 8500-1977 Specification for weldable structural steel (medium and
331
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 277-1977 GALVANISED STEEL SHEETS (PLAIN AND CORRUGATED)
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for the following 4 classes of plain and corrugated galvanized steel sheets produced by hot dip process:
Class 1 Extra heavy coating of zinc, 75og/n?. Class 2 Heavy coating of zinc, nominal Class 3 Medium coating of zinc, 450 g/m:, and coating of zinc, Class 4 Light 375 g/m2. nominal 600 g/m2 nominal nominal for
Note For details regarding dimensions and weights see 6 of
the standard.
4.
Tolerances
Length - + 10 mm or +0.5 whichever is higher. Overall width after corrugation percent of length + 10 mm.
Length of diagonals of sheet shall not differ by more than 20 mm. Depth of corrugation Pitch of corrugation + 1.5 mm. 22.0
mm.
This standard also covers the requirements galvanized steel sheets in coil form.
Freedom from Defects - Galvanized plain sheets shall be reasonably flat and free from twist. Galvanized corrugated sheets shall be free from twist or buckle and shall have uniform corrugations, true in depth and pitch and parallel to the sides of the sheet.
3.
2.
Mass of an individual sheet - + 10 percent; on each bundle of sheets - +5 percent. 5. Bend Test - Test piece shall withstand bending through 180 round a mandrel of specified diameter without peeling or flaking of zinc coating.
Dimensions
Length - 1.8, 2.2, 2.5, 2.8 and 3 m. Width - 0.75 or 0.90 m. Thickness - 1.60, 1.25, 1 .OO, 0.80 and 0.63 mm. Corrugation, Depth - 18 mm (nominal); Pitch 75 mm (nominal). Number of corrugations per sheet Width beforecorrugation, mm Overall width, after corrugation, between crowns of outside corrugations, mm 8 10 11 1 000 885
6. Zinc Coating - The weight of coating, when tested according to prescribed methods, shall be within the following limits: Class
Specified coating (nominal), g/m2 Minimum coating by diagonal triple spot test, g/m2 Minimum coating by single spot test g/m2 1 750 625 2 600 500 3 450 350 4 375 275
750 900 660 800
550
425
300
250
Note-For
test procedures see 8 and 10 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 277-1977 corrugated) (third revision).
Specification for galvanised steel sheets (plain and
332
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 412-1975 EXPANDED METAL STEEL SHEETS FOR GENERAL PURPOSES
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for steel used for general purposes. 2. Size shortway expanded metal No. 1) (LWM) of the diamond, and width and thickness of the strands. 3. Dimensions Size of Sheet Normally Stocked \ SWM 1:: 14.63 7.30 7.30 14.60 3.75 4.85 4.85 7.30 ( 21.94 mm
of Mesh - Based on measurements of of mesh (SWM) and longway of mesh
Ref
NO. /
Size of Mesh (Nominal) A SWM mm 100 100 100 75 75 75 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 10 10 10 9.5 9.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
\ LWMmm 250 250 250 200 200 200 115 115 75 75 115 75 115 75 75 75 75 75 60 50 60 50 60 50 60 50 50 40 50 50 40 50 40 40 40 40 28.5 28.5
/ LWM ?:7mg 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 3.75 2.50 3.75 2.50 3.75 2.50 2.50 2.50 -2.50 2.50 3.75 2.50 3.75 2.50 3.75 2.50 3.75 2.50 3.75 2.50 2.50 3.75 2.50 3.75 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
Largest Standard Size of Sheets A
2.50 x 3.75
2.50 x 3.75 1.25 : 4.85 4.85 4.85 4.85 i! 3.75 3.75 > 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 4.85 1 3.75 A 3.00 3.00 3 .oo 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 2.00 2.00 2.Oc 2.oc 2.oc 333 3.75
2.50 x 3.75 2.50 x 3.75 & 1.25 x 3.75 2.50 x 3.75 2.50 x 3.75 & 1.25 x 3.75
2.50 x 2.75 & 1.25 x 2.75
2.50 x 1.75 & 1.25 x 1.75

(Continued)
SP : 21-1983
Ref
No
Size of Mesh (Nominal) /---A? SWM LWM

mm
Largest Standard Size of Sheets h

LWM mm SWM mm
Size of Sheet Normally Stocked \

mm
39 40 41 42 43 44
9.5 6 6 6
5
E 25 25 25 20
15
2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50

5. Mechanical Properties
2.50 ic 1.75 & 1.25 x 1.75 2.50 x 1.25
4.
Tolerances On nominal specified dimension On minimum specified dimension On mass *lOmm +10 -0 mm + 10 percent (steel weighs 7 650 kg/m3)
5.1 Tensile strength of blank steel sheets shall be between 280 and 380 MN/m*.
Note 1 N/mmz= 1 MN/m*=O. 102 kgf/mm*.
5.2 Bend Test - Test piece shall withstand without crack, being doubled over when cold, till the internal radius is not greater than 1.5 times its thickness and until the two sides of test piece are parallel. 6. Freedom from Defects - Finished expanded metal sheets shall be free from flaws, joints, welds, broken strands, laminations, etc. 7. Preservative Treatment - Shall be given suitable protective coating to prevent corrosion. a
Size of mesh: .On SWM On LWM +lmmupto20mm& +2 mm over 20 mm f2mmupto60mm& +4 mm over 60 mm
Note 1 -For
(first
test procedures, refer to IS : 1663-1972Method for tensile testing of steel sheet and strip of thickness 0.5 mm to 3 mm
(first revision).
revision),and IS : 1692-1974 Method for simple bend testing of steel sheet and strip less than 3 mm thick
chemical composition see 3.1 and 3.2 of
fhe standard.
Note 2-For
For detailed information, refer to IS : 412-1975 Specification for expanded metal steel sheets for general purposes (second revision).
334
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1079-1973 HOT ROLLED
CARBON
STEEL SHEET AND STRIP

No. 1)
(Third Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip intended for cold forming, drawing and other engineering purposes. Coils Out of square tolerance 25 mm in any 5 000 mm length 1 percent of width
2. Grades - Eight grades, designated as o-1079; D-1079; DD-1079; EDD-1079; St 34-1079; St 421079; St 50-1079 and St 52-1079. 3. Dimensions - Shall conform to IS : 1730 (Part II)-1974* and IS : 1730 (Part III)-1974t.
4.
Note 1 -
For tolerances
on flatness see 10.4 of the stun&d.
Note 2 - For tolerances on length, width thickness and weight of steel sheet and strip refer to IS : 1852-1973*.
Tolerances
Edge camber Cut length 0.5 percent of length
5.
Weight -
Calculated on basis that steel weighs
7.85 g/cm3. 6.
Tensile Properties
Grade
Tensile Strength (N/mm*)
Yield Stress Min (N/mm*)
Percentage Elongation, Min 200 mm Gauge Length
oD-
1079
1079
260 (for design purposes) 260 - 390 260 - 380 330 - 410 410- 490 490- 590 510- 610
kgf/mm*.
205 235 295 355
16 17 18 15 13 13
DD- 1079 EDD- 1079 St 34 - 1079 St 42 - 1079 St 50- 1079 St521079 Note - 1 MN/m*=0.102
*Dimensions for general engineering tDimensions for general engineering Note l-For
steel plate, sheet and strip for structural purposes: Part II Sheet (first revision). steel plate, sheet and strip for structural purposes: Part III Strip (first revision).
and and
7.
Rend Test and cutting
Shall withstand the prescribed test.

tolerances for hot-rolled steel products -~
*Rolling
(secondrevision).
test procedures, refer to IS : 1663-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel sheet and strip of thickness 0.5 mm to 3 mm (first revision), IS : 1608-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel products (first revision), IS : 1692-1974 Method of simple bend testing of steel sheet and strip less than 3 mm thickness (first revision) and 6 and 7 of the standard. Note 2-For chemical composition see 5 of the standard.
For detailed information, (third revision).
refer to IS : 1079-1973 Specification for hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip
335
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4@Kl-1973 COLD ROLLED CARBON STEEL STRIP FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
(First Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 to 3) 1. Scope - Requirements for cold rolled carbon steel strip having carbon content up to a maximum of 0.2 percent and of thickness up to 5 mm and width below 600 mm intended for general engineering purposes. Carbon steel strip covered by this specification may be case hardened but their suitability is not guaranteed. Temper
1
4. Hardness Test - Grade 0 strips, when subjetted to Rockwell hardness test shall conform to requirements given in table given below. Grade D sheets in annealed and skin-padded conditions shall also conform to hardness values given therein.
Tensile Strength
A
Rockwell Hardness B Scale

\\
A4in
N/tlld
Hard Halfhard Quarter-hard Skin passed Annealed (dead soft)
540 420 350 -
Max N/mm2 540 420 -
85 75 60 53 40
85 75 69 60
2. Tempers - Shall be supplied in any of the following tempers: Produced by heavy cold rolling No. 1 Hard Produced by cold rolling, annealNo. 2 Half hard ing and further cold rolling to give strip of intermediate No. 3 Quarter hard hardness values. No. 4 Skin passed Produced by light cold rolling after annealing No. 5 Annealed Produced by a final annealing process (dead soft) Extra three- Produced by varying degrees of hard, cold rolling quarter hard, medium hard, eighth hard
5. Edge Condition - Cold-rolled strips shall be supplied with mill, trimmed or slit edges. 6. Freedom from Defects - Shall be free from scale, rust, blisters, laminations, pitting and cracked edges. 7. Surface Finish - Bright, plating, mirror, matt, dark annealed and blue.
3. Bend Test - Angle of bend shall be 90, 180 and 180 for strips of temper No. 3, 4 and 5 respectively. Test piece passes test if outer convex surface is free from cracks. No bend test is required for temper No. 1 and 2.
Note 1 -For chemical composition and rolling tolerances see 5 and 12 of the standard.
Note 2-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1692-1974 Method for simple bend testing of steel sheet and strip less than 3 mm thick (first revision), IS : 1586-1968Methods for Rockwell hardness test (B and C scales) for steel Cfirsf revision) and 6 to 8 of thestandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4030-1973 Specification for cold rolled carbon steel strip for general engineeringpurposes (first revision). 336
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7226-1974 COLD-ROLLED MEDIUM, HIGH CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEEL STRIP FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
1. Scope - Requirements for cold-rolled medium, and high carbon and low alloy steel strips of thickness up to 3 mm and width up to 330 mm intended for general engineering purposes. 2. Chemical Analysis - Carbon content (percent) on ladle analysis shall be as follows: 4. Freedom from Defects - Shall be free from scales, rust, blisters, laminations, pitting and cracked edges.
5. Edge Condition trimmed or slit edges.
Shall be supplied with mill,
Medium Carbon h c40 0.35-0.45 c55 0.50-0.60
\r c70 0.65-0.75
High Carbon /x C80 0.75-0.85 C85 0.80-0.90 C98 0.90-1.05
II
High Carbon Low Alloy /\ T 120Cr35 1.10-1.30 1 lOCr35W2 1.0-1.20
Note - For manganese, silicon, sulphur, phosphorus, chromium and tungstencontents, refer to 4 of the srundurd.
6.
Surface Finish Note -
Bright finish.
For rolling tolerances see 9 of the standard.
3. Hardness Test - When subjected to Rockwell hardness test in accordance with IS : 1586-1%8* or IS : 5072-1%9t, shall conform to the requirements given below: Designation c40 c55 c70 C80 C85 C98 120 Cr 35 110 Cr 35W2 Annealed Hardness, Max 83.4 85.0 87.9 91.6 91.6 94.8 97.5 97.5 Annealed and Re-rolled Hardness, A HRC 28 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 Equivalent 290 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 HV Max \
160 165 175 190 190 205 220 220
*Methods for Rockwell hardness test (B and C scales) for steel (first revision). tMethod for Rockwell superficial hardness test (N and T scales) for steel.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7226-1974 Speci$cation for cold-roiled medium, high carbon and low alloy steel strip for general engineering purposes.
337
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1161-1979 STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL
PURPOSES
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for hot finished welded (HFW), hot finished seamless (HFS), and electric resistance welded (ERW) or induction welded plain carbon steel tubes for structural purposes. 2. Designation - Designated by their nominal bore and classified as Light, Medium and Heavy depending on wall thickness. They are further graded as YSt 210, YSt 240 and YSt 310 depending on the yield stress. 3. Dimensions (in mm) b) Thickness (all sizes): Welded tubes Seamless tubes + Not limited - 10 percent +Not limited - 12.5 percent
5. Workmanship - Tubes shall be free from scale, cracks, surface flows, laminations, etc. 6. Test - For mechanical tests (tensile test, flattening test, retest, etc) , refer to 10 of the standard.
Nominal Bore
Outside Diameter
Thickness A Light 2.00 2.35 2.65 2.65 2.9 2.913.25 3.25 3.25 3.65 3.65 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.85 4.85 Medium 2.65 2.65 3.25 3.25 3.25 3.65 3.65 4.05 4.05 4.50 4.85 4.85 4.85 4.85 5.40 5.60 Heavy 3.25 3.25 4.05 4.05 4.05 4.50 4.50 4.85 4.85 5.40 5.40 5.40 5.40 5.40 5.90 5.90 5.90 5.90 6.30 8.00
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 110 125 135 150 175 200 225 250 300 350
21.3 26.9 33.7 42.4 48.3 60.3 76.1 88.9 101.6 114.3 127.0 139.7 152.4 165.1 193.7 219.1 244.5 273.0 323.9 355.6
Note-For detailed information regarding weight, area of cross section, moment of inertia, modulus of section, radius gyration, etc. see Table 1 of the standard.
4.
Tolerances \ a) Outside diameter: Up to and including Over 48.3 mm
48.3 mm +0.4 mm -0.8 mm f 1.0 percent refer to IS : 1161-1979 Specification for steel tubes for structuralpurposes (third
338
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1239 (PART I)-1979MILD STEEL TUBES, TUBULARS AND OTHER WROUGHT STEEL FITTINGS
PART I MILD STEEL TUBES
(Fourth Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for butt welded and seamless, screwed and socketed and plain end mild steel tubes. 2. Designation - Designated by nominal bore and further classified as Light, Medium and Heavy, depending on wall thickness. All 3 types may be used for conveying gas and water, but only Medium and Heavy tubes are recommended foi- conveying steam. Mild steel socket shall be designated by the nominal bore of the tube for which it is intended. 3. Dimensions Nominal (in mm) Light No. 1) Butt welded medium heavy tubes Seamless tubes and + Not limited - 10 percent +Not limited - 12.5 percent
5. Hydraulic Test of 5 MPa.
Shall withstand a test pressure
6. Test - For details of tensile strength of length, bend test, flattening test on tubes and expansion test on sockets refer to 14 of the standard. Medium
Heavy \
ness Outside dia A / 2.0 2.35 2.35 2.65 2.65 3.25 3.25 3.25 3.65 3.65 4.05 4.5 4.85 4.85 Thickness 2.65 2.9 2.9 3.25 3.25 4.05 4.05 4.05 4.5 4.5 4.85 5.4 5.4 5.4
Bore
Outside dia
A
Thickness
Max
6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 10.1 13.6 17.1 21.4 26.9 33.8 42.5 48.4 60.2 76.0 88.7 113.9 -
Min 9.7 13.2 16.7 21.0 26.4 33.2 41.9 47.8 59.6 75.2 87.9 113.0 -
1.8 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.35 2.65 2.65 2.9 2.9 3.25 3.25 3.65 -
Max
10.6 14.0 17.5 21.8 27.3 34.2 42.9 48.8 60.8 76.6 89.5 115.0 140.8 166.5
Min 9.8 13.2 16.7 21.0 26.5 33.3 42 .O -47.9 59.7 75.3 88.0 113.1 138.5 163.9
Max
10.6 14.0 17.5 21.8 27.3 34.2 42.9 48.8 60.8 76.6 89.5 115.0 140.8 166.5
Min
9.8 13.2 16.7 21.0 26.5 33.3 42.0 47.9 59.7 75.3 88.0 113.1 138.5 163.9
Note 1 -For details regarding weight of tubes see 7.1 of /he sfandurd. Note 2-For dimensions of sockets see 7.1 of the standard. Note 3-Available in random lengths from 4 to 7 m. 4. Tolerances on Thickness + Not limited - 8 percent 7. Workmanship - Tubes shall be cleanly finished and reasonably free from scale. Shall be reasonably straight, free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, etc.
Butt welded light tubes
Note l-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1894-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel tubes (first revision), IS : 1328-1963 Method of flattening test on steel tubes, IS : 2329-1963 Method for bend test on steel tubes, IS : 2335-1963 Method for drift expanding test on steel tubes and 14 of the standard. Note 2-For chemical composition see 6 of the sfandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : I239 (Part I)-1979 Specification for mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings: Part I Mild steel tubes (fourth revision). 339
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1239 (PART II)-1982 MILD STEEL TUBES, TUBULARS AND OTHER WROUGHT STEEL FITTINGS
PART II MILD STEEL TUBULARS AND OTHER WROUGHT C 1. STEEL PIPE FITTINGS
Third Revision)
3.2 Wrought jttings 3.2.1 Screwed ends of jittings - Dimensions of nominal bore and minimum outside diameter shall be the same as for sockets given in 3.1.5.
Scope - Requirements for butt welded and seamless, plain ended, screwed and socketed mild steel tubulars (namely, pieces, nipples, long screws, bends and springs, return bends and sockets) and other welded and seamless wrought steel pipe fittings. The requirements of back nuts are covered in IS : 34681975*.
3.2.2
Elbows, tees and crosses equal
Nominal bore Minimum length centre to face

\
2. Designation - Tubulars are designated by their nominal bore. Sockets shall be designated by the respective nominal bore the tubes for which they are intended. Wrought steel fittings by type of fitting and size designation (that is nominal size in millimetres of the pipe thread at the outlets). 3.
3.1 Dimensions and Tolerances (in mm)
6 8 10 15 40 50 65 80 16 22 24 32 52 64 76 89
20 100 35 115
25 125 43 140
32 150 51 160
3.2.3
Elbows, reducing
Tubulars - Nominal bore of tubulars - 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125 and 150 min.
Nominal sizes of outlet - 8 X 6; 10 x 6; 10 x 8; 15x8; 15x lo; 20x8; 20x lo; 20x 15; 25x lo; 25x15; 25x20, 32x15; 32x20; 32x25; 40x15; 40x20; 40x25; 40x32; 50x15; 50x20; 50x 25; 50x 32; 50x40, 65x40; 65x50,80x25; 80x50; 100x50 and 100x80 3.2.4 -Tees, reducing (on the branch) Nominal sizes of outlets - 8 X6; 10x6; 10X8; 15x8; 15>;( lo, 20x8; 20x IO; 20x 15; 25x8; 25x 10; 25x 15; 25x20; 32x10; 32x 15; 32x20; 32x25; 40x lo; 40x15: 40x20; 40x25; 40x 3?; 50x 15; 50x20; 50x25; 50x32; 50x40; 65x25; 65x32; 65x40; 65x50; 80x25; 80x32; 80x40; 80x50; 80x65; 100x25; 100x40; 100x50; 100x80;
3.1.1
Pieces and long screws Approximate Nominal Bore Standard Length,
6,8, lo::, 20, 25 32, 40, 50, 65 80, 100 125, 150 3.1.2
Nipples
100, 150, 200, 250,
mm 150,200,250 200, 250, 300 250, 300,400 300,400, 500
Nominal bore Standard length

(Min)
6 Running Nipple Close Taper Nipple

Barrel Nipple 13 19 32
8
19 27 38
10
21 28 38
15 27
37 51
20
25
32
40
50
65
80 100 125 150
30
39 54
33
46 60
38
51 70
38
51 70
48
60 79
51
57
70
78
78
69 75 87 96 96 89 102 114 124 127
3.1.3 Bends and springs - Bends and springs shall be with 90, 112.5, 135 and 157.5 angles. k1.5. Tolerance
125x80; 125x100; 150x80; and 150x 100.

Tees, reducing (on the run and branch, or on run only)
3.2.5
3.1.4
Return bends
Nominal 6 44 8 51 10 64
sizes
of
outlets -
20x 15x 15;
Nominal bore Centre-to-centre

3.1.5 Sockets
distance
50 65 80 100 125 150 15 20 25 32 40 89 102 114 127 165 190 305 356 457 762 914
Nominal bore Outside dia, Min Length, Min
6 15
19
8 10 18.5 22
27 28
15 27
37
20 25 32 32.5 39.5 49
39 46 51
40 56
51
50 68
60
65 84
69
80 98
75
100 125 150 124 157 178

87 96 96
*Specification for pipe nuts @sr revision).
340
SP : 21-1983
25x20x20; 25X20X 15; 20x 15x20; 32x25~20; 32X25x25; 25X20x25; 40X32x25; 40X25x40; 32X25x32; 40x 32x40; 50X25x50; 40X32x32; 50x40~25; 50~40x40; 50x 32x 50; 65X50X50; 65~50x65; 50x40x50; 80x50~50; 80x50~80 and 100~80x80. 3.2.6 Tees (increasing on the branch)
'Nominal Size
(Bigger End) 50 65 80 100 125 150
Nominal Size (Smaller End) 15,20, 25,32,40 25, 32, 40, 50 25, 32, 40, 50, 65 40, 50, 65, 80 80, 100 80,100
Nominal sizes of outlets - 6 X 8; 8 X 10; 10 x 15; 15x20; 15x25; 20x25; 25x32; 25x40; 32x 40; 40x 50; 50x 65; 50x 80; 65x 80; and 80x 100. 3.2.7 Crosses, reducing
3.2.13 Caps
6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 Minimum length 19 24 27 37 38 44 51 54 60 67 73 86 98 98 3.2.14 Elbows, tees and crosses, male equal 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 90 95 100 110 115 125 140 150 180 200 230 Nominal size
Nominal sizes of outletS - 8x6; 10x8; 15x 10; 20x 15; 25x 15; 25x20; 32x 15; 32x25; 40x 15; 40x25; 50x25; 50x40; 65x50; 80x40; 80x50; 100x50; 100x80; 125x100; 150x80 and 150x 100. 3.2.8 Elbows, tees and crosses, side outlet, equal 15 20 25 32 40 50 32 35 43 51 52 64
Nominal size of outlet Minimum length centre to face
Nominal size of outlet Minimum length centre to face for all outlets 3.2.9
3.2.15 Y-Pieces and angle tees, male, equal; twin elbows and sweep tees, male, equal Nominal size -of outlets 3.2.16 15, 20,25, 32, 40,50,65, 125, and 150 80, 100,
Elbows, round, male a&female,
equal
Nominal size of outlet -
8, 10, 15,20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80 and 100.
Socket unions and pipe unions
3.2.10
Elbows, equal, 135 6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 16 17 19 22 27 33 38 44 51 60 73 105
Nominal size of outlet Minimum length center to face 3.2.11
Nominal size 6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 of outlet 100 125 150 Minimum Length: Socket 38 44 51 57 67 76 85 100 110 120 135 160 185 210 Pipe 95 100 110 115 120 125 135 140 150 165 180 205 215 230 3.2.17 Union bends 6,8,10,15,20,25,32,40,50,65and 80.
Y-Pieces, female, equal
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 Nominal size of outlet Minimum length 27 35 38 44 49 57 71 79 100 centre to face 3.2.12 Socket, reducing Nominal Size (Smaller End) 6 698 6,8, 10 8, 10, 15 8, 10, 15, 20 10, 15, 20, 25 15, 20,25, 32 341
Nominal size of outlets 3.2.18
Nipples, hexagon, equal
NoPninal Size (Bigger End) 8 10 15 20 25 32 40
6 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 Minimum 25 31 33 43 48 52 59 61 68 80 89 overall length 102 115 115 Note - For dimensions of plugsand hexagon bushes see Tables 20 and 21 of the standard. 4. Joints - Tubulars and fittings shall be screwed with taper or parallel threads or both. Sockets for tubulars shall have parallel threads.
Nominal size
SP : 21-1983
5. Pressure Tests - Each fitting after being screwed shall withstand without any signs of leakage: a) internal hydraulic pressure of 5 MPa, and b) internal air pressure of 0.7 MPa while immersed in water or light oil.
Note-For
6. Workmanship - Tubulars and fittings shall be cleanly finished and reasonably free from scale, surface flaws, laminations, etc.
detailed dimensions and tolerances see 7 and 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1239 (Part II)-1982 Specification for mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings: Part II Mild steel tubulars and other wrought steel pipe fittings (third
revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4270-1967 STEEL TUBES USED FOR WATER WELLS

(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for steel tubes used for water wells, such as casing, drive pipe and housing having following types of joints: a) Screwed and socketed butt joints, b) Screwed flush butt joints, c) Plain bevelled end pipes for butt welded joints, and d) Slip socket welded joints. 3. 2. No. 1 to 3)
Woes
a) Hot finished seamless (HFS) b) Hydraulic lap welded (HLW)
c) Electric automatic fusion welded (EFW) d) Electric arc welded (EAW) e) Electric resistance f) High frequency Dimensions welded (ERW) welded (HFJW)
induction
(in mm)
Nominal Size
Outside Dia
Screwed and Socketed Pipe
Thickness
Casing for Screwed Flush Butt Joints 9.5 9.5 11.0 11.0 11.0 12.7 12.7 Casing for Flush Plain and Pipes 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
100
150
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
114.3 168.3 219.1 273.0 323.9 355.6 406.4 457.2 508.0 558.8
6.3 8.0 8.0 9.5 9.5 -
Note l-In respect of casing for slip socket welded joints, same particulars as for casing for plain end pipes shall apply. Note 2-For details regarding sockets and weights-of pipes see 6 of the standard.
342
SP : 21-1983
4.
Tolerances
6.2
a) Outside dia - + 1 percent (3 mm MUX for socket) b) Thickness, seamless tube - + 15 percent - 12.5 c) Welded tube: Up to 406.4 mm outside dia -- + 15 - 12 5percent Over 406.4 mm outside dia - + l5 percent -10 5.
5.1 Requirements
Flattening scribed test.
Test -
Shall withstand the pre Not more than 20 mm in 6 m
6.3 Alignment Test length.
6.4 Hydraulic Pressure Test - Shall withstand test pressure of 2800 t/D kgf/cm* for St 42 and 3500 t/D kgf/cm* for St 55 subject to a maximum of 70 kgf/cnG (t = thickness in mm and D = outside dia in mm). 7. Coating of Tubes - Shah be coated with bituminous solution inside and outside. 8.
8.1 Protection of Ends
Screwed and socket butt joints shall have righthanded V-form threads. There shall not be more than six incomplete external threads. Threads in the socket shall be continuous.
5.2 Screwed flush butt joints shall have right-handed square form threads. 5.3 Plain-end pipes shall be supplied with both ends bevelled or both ends square cut or one end bevelled and one end square cut. 6. 6.1
Mechanical Properties
All threads shall becoated with apetroleum jelly or other suitable rust preventing compound.
8.2 Tubes withV-form andsquareform threads shall have the exposed male threads protected with steel rings or sleeves. Female threads shall beprotected with steel nipples or bushes. 8.3 For slip joint-casing, wooden protectors should be provided.
Tensile Test Type Grade Tensile YieM Elongation, Strength, Strengh, Percent, Min Min Min (kgf/mm2) (kgf/m&) St 55 55 31.5 95orrs* St 42 42 95orrs * 25
HFS HFS, HLW, c EFW,EAW, ERW and HFIW
*TS=tensile strength in kgf/m&.

Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 1894-1972Method for tensile testing of steel tubes first for flattening test on steeltubes.
revision) and IS : 2328-1963 Method
iefer to IS : 4270-1967 Specification for steel tubes used for water wells.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 45 16 1968 ELLIPTICAL
1. ScopeRequirements for welded and seamless elliptical mild steel tubes for structurals and heat exchangers.
MILD STEEL TUBES

2. Designation - Tubes are designated by a symbol indicating major axis, minor axis and thickness, preceded by the word Elliptical.
343
SP : 21-1983
3.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Length (ha)
28 28 30 30 33.5 33.5 35.5 35.5 38 38 40
Width (ba)
21 21 19 19 16.5 16.5 14 14 25 25 23
Thickness 1.6 2.0 1.6 2.0 1.6 2.0 1.6 2.0 1.6 2.0 1.6
Length (h,) 40 44 54 56 60 71.4 71.4 71.4 71.4 75 75
Width (ba) 23 19 25 36.5 30 21 21 21\ 21 15 15
Thickness 2.0 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.6 2.0
Note l--For details regarding weight, moment of inertia, elastic modulus and radius of gyration see Table 1 of the
standard.
Use - Shall be tested to one and a half times the working pressure specified. 7. Mechanical Properties
Note 2 -
Area of cross section =A = 0.785 398 (b,h, - bihi) in cm2 Weight = W=O.785 A (kg/metre) Moment of inertia = Ix = 0.049 087 (b,hi - bib:) in cm Elastic modulus of section = Zx = 0.098 175 (b, hi - bjhi2) in cm3 Where hi and bi are internal length and width of cross section, and h, and b, are external length and width of cross section.
7.1 Tensile Test - Minimum ultimate tensile strength 34 kgf1mn-G; minimum yield stress 21.5 kgfhnm2 and elongation shall not be less than 950 divided by ultimate tensile strength in kgflmm2 subject to minimum of 20 percent. 7.2
4.
Tdlerances a) Thickness ?I 10 percent
Bend Test
b) Outside dimensions - f0.5 mm up to 50 mm size and t- 1 percent above 50 mm size. Tolerance on weight c) For quantities of less than 150 m - +8 percent. For quantities of 150 m and above - +4 percent. 5. Lengths - Tubes shall normally be supplied in random lengths from 4 to 7 m. 6. Hydraulic Test for Tubes for Heat Exchanger
7.2.1 Finished tube shall not crack when bent cold with major axis in the plane of bending through 90 round a former having a radius at the bottom of groove equal to four times the outside length of major axis of tube. 7.2.2 Tubes shall not crack when bent at red heat through 90 round a former of radius two times the outside length of major axis. 8. Oiling and Painting - All tubes varnished painted or oiled externally. shall be
Note- For test procedures, refer to IS : 1894-1962Method for tensile testing of steel tubes (first revision) and IS : 2329-1963 Method for bend test on steel tubes.
refer to IS : 45161968 Specification for elliptical mild steel tubes.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4923-1968 HOLLOW STEEL SECTIONS FOR STRUCTURAL

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for hot and cold formed square and rectangular hollow steel sections for structural use. 2. Designation Hollow section shall be desig344 No. 1)
USE
nated by its outside dimensions, and its thickness in millimetres and shall befurtherclassified in CF RHS or HF RHS depending on whether it is cold formed or hot formed.
SP : 21-1983
3. 3.1
Dimensions (in mm)

Thickness (2) 2.90 3.65 4.50 3.25 3.65 4.50 3.25 4.05 4.85
Square Hollow Sections DesigThickDesignation nation ness (1) (1) (2) 50x50x2.90 25.4x25.4 x 2.65 2.65 x3.65 x3.25 3.25 x4.50 x4.05 4.05 32x32 x2.65 2.65 63.5 x63.5x 3.25 x3.25 3.25 x3.65 x4.50 x4.05 4.05 38x38 x2.90 x3.25 x4.05 2.90 3.25 4.05 75x75x3.25 x4.05 x4.85
b) Outside dimensions of sides c) Squareness of comers d) Exact length 7.2

Tensile Properties Grade Tensile Strength Min W/mmz)
1 percent of length of side 90+1 +3 mm

2
Yield Stress, Min &$/mm? 21.5 25 31.5
YSt 22 YSt 25 YSt 32
34 42 55
3.2
45x45x2.9 2.9 x3.65 3.65 x4.50 4.5 Rectangular Hollow Sections Thickness (2) 2.65 3,.25 4.05 2.90 3.25 4.05 2.90 3.65 4.50 3.25 3.65 4.50 Designation (1) 76.2x50.8x3.25 x3.65 x4.50 90x38x2.65 x3.25 x4.05 100x50x3.25 x4.05 x4.85 Thickness (2) 3.25 3.65 4.50 2.65 3.25 4.05 3.25 4.05 4.85
Elongation percent shall be not less than 950 divided by the tensile strength in kgf/mm2. 8. Specific Requirements Sections 8.1
Tolerances
for Cold Formed
Designation (1) 40x25 x2.65 x3.25 x4.05 50.8x25.4x2.90 x3.25 x4.05 63.5x38 x2.90 x3.65 .x4.50 76.2~38 x3.25 x3.65 x4.50
a) Thickness b) Outside dimensions of sides: Largest outside dimension across flats up to 63.5 mm Over 63.5 mm to 90 mm Over 90 mm c) Squareness of corners d) Exact length 8.2
Mechanical Properties
* 10 percent 20.5 mm kO.60 mm 1-0.75 mm 90 *lo +3 mm
8.2.1 Grade
Tensile properties of cold formed section

Tensile Strength, Min &3f~=+ 1 Yield Stress, Min
Note - For details regarding weight, moment of inertia, radius of gyration, elastic modulus andplastic modulusseeTables 1 and 2 of the standard.
(kgf/mm2> 25 31.5
Yst 25 YSt 32
42 55
4.
Weight - Shall be calculated on the basis that steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm2 per metre run. 5. Straightness in 600. Shall not deviate by more than 1 Shall be varnished.
8.2.1.1 If sections supplied in cold formed conditions without any heat treatment are subjected to stress relieving, annealing, brazing welding or similar heating, the mechanical properties may be reduced at the heated parts as follows.
Grade Tensile Strength, Min &m.J.mz 1 Yield Stress, Min
6. Oiling and Painting painted or oiled externally. 7. 7.1

Tolerances
Specific Requirements Hot Formed Sections Yst 25

, YSt 32
31.5 39.5
(kgf/mm2) 17.5 25
a) Thickness i) Welded tubes ii) Seamless tubes

Note-For
+ 10 percent * 12.5 percent
8.2.2 Elongation percent shall not be less than 950 divided by the ultimate tensile strength in kgf/mmr.
test procedures, refer to IS : 1894-1962 Method for tensile testing of steel tubes (first revision).
refer to IS : 4923-1968 Specification for hollow steel sections for structural use.
345
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title
is : 733-1975 IS : 737-1974 IS : 1254-1975 IS : 7094-1973 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods and sections (for general engineering purposes) (second revision) Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip (for general engineering purposes) (second revision) Corrugated aluminium sheet (second revision) Aluminium and aluminium alloy welded tubes for general engineering purposes
Page
349 350 351 352
348
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 733-1975 WROUGHT ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOY BARS, RODS AND SECTIONS (FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES)
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes. and Tolerancks As given in Designation 43000 46000 52000 Typical Uses Filler wire for welding Filler wire for brazing Panelling and structures, sheet metal work and domestic appliances, marine applications like sheathing/lining of boat bottom, etc Shipbuilding; rivets; pressure vessels and other processing tanks; cryogenics, and welded structures Welded structures, cryogenic applications, structural marine applications, rail and road tank cars, rivets and missile components Architectural uses, such as window/door-frames, wall facings, partitions, hand rails, etc, and other similar applications where surface finish is important and medium strength would suffice Structural applications of all kinds, such as road and rail transport vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers, milk containers, deepdrawn containers, and flooring Similar to 64430 Stressed structural applications requiring welding, such as bridges, chequered plates, dump-truck bodies, pressure vessels and rail coaches, etc
2. Dimensions IS: 39651969*. 3.
Designation and Typical Uses of Alloys

Typical Uses Panelling and moulding, refrigeration tubing, equipment for chemical, food and brewing industries; packaging; cooking utensils. Sheet metal work, architectural and builders h&ware, spun/ pressed hollow ware, deep drawn parts, cladding, welding wire, electrical appliances Corrosion resistant cladding on stronger alloys; impact extruded containers; food, chemical brewing and processing equipments; tanks and pipes; marine fittings; reflectors; pressed and anodized utility items, jewellery, and cable sheathing Heavy duty forgings, structures where high mechanical properties are of utmost importance, aircraft application of clad and armasheets, extrusions ments Stressed parts in aircrafts and other structures where high strength is of primary consideration. 53000
Designation 19000
54300
63400
19500
64430
24345
65032 74530
24534
Note-For chemical composition and mechanical properties (0.2 percent proof stress, tensile strength and elongation) see 5 (Tables 1 and 2) of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 733-1975 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods and sections (for general engineering purposes) (second revision).
349
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 737-1974 WROUGHT ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS, SHEET AND STRIP (FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES) ( Second Revision)
Typical Uses Vehicle panelling, fan blades and other applications same as of alloys 15900 (SIC) and 31000 (NS3) except those for bright anodizing purposes, detonators, utensils/holloware containers and closures Appliances and utensils, architectural trims, consumer durables with attractive anodized finishes Architectural applications; high anodizing quality kitchen ware and cooking utensils, consumer durables; bathroom fittings, auto trim, air-conditioner and TV housing; chemical equipment , marine applications and refrigerator trim General purpose alloy which can be used for most of the applications of alloys 31000 (NS3) and 19000 (SIC) Panelling and structures, sheet metal work and domestic appliances Shipbuilding; rivets; pressure vessels and other processing tanks; cryogenics and welded structures Welded structures, cryogenic applications, structural marine applications, rail and road tank cars, rivets and missile components Shipbuilding and other applications demanding moderately high strength with good corrosion resistance; rivets, zippers, welding wire, etc Structural applications of all kinds, such as road and rail transport vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers, milk containers, deep drawn containers and flooring Condition* O,Hl,H2 H3, H4
1.
Scope -
and aluminium
engineering 2.
Requirements for wrought aluminium alloys, sheet and strip for general purposes.
Designation 40800
Terminology
a) Sheer - Cold rolled product, 0.14 to 6.3 mm thick, supplied flat with sheared or slit edges. b) Strip - Cold rolled product, supplied in coil with slit edges, 0.14 to 5 mm thick.
51000-A
0, HI, H2 H3, H4
3. Dimensions and Tolerances IS : 2676-1981*.
As given
in
51000-B
0, Hl, H2 H3, H4
4.
Characteristics and Typical Uses of Alloys

Typical Uses Panelling and moulding; refrigeration tubing equipment for chemical, food and brewing industries; packaging; cooking utensils. Sheet metal work, architectural and builders hardware, spun/pressed hollowware, deep drawn parts, cladding, welding wire and electrical appliances Heavy duty forgings, structures where high mechanical properties are of utmost importance, aircraft application of clad sheets, extrusions and ornaments General purpose alloy for moderate strength applications, pressure vessels, irrigation tubing, heat exchangers, utensils and pressure cookers, roofing sheets, pilferproof and detonaair-conditioning tor caps, ducting fan blades and vehicle panelling General purpose sheet, roofing and siding, utensils, sheet metal work, vehicle panelling, pressure vessels and lamp caps Condition t 0, Hl, H2 H3, H4 51300
Designation 19000
0, HI, H2 H3, H4
52000
0, Hl, H2 H3, H4 0, Hl, H2 H3, H4
24345
w, WP
53000
54300 0, Hl, H2 H3, H4 55000
0, HI, H2
31000
0, Ii1
31500
64430
0,
w, WP
*Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip (prst revision). Wee 6 of the standard.
*See 6 of the standard.
350
SP : 21-1983
Designation 65032
Typical Uses
Condition*
Designation 74530
Typical Uses
Condition*
Structural applications of all kinds, such as road and rail transport vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers, milk containers, deep drawn containers and flooring
0, w, WP
Stressed structural applications requiring welding, such as chequered plates, bridges, dump-truck bodies, pressure vessels, rail coaches,etc.
w, WP
*See 6 of rhe stmdard.
See 6 of the standard.
Note- For chemical composition and mechanical properiies (0.2 percent proof stress,tensile strength, elongation and bend tes$) see 5 (Tables 1 and 2) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 737-1974 Specifkation for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip (for general engineering purposes) (second revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1254-1975 CORRUGATED
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Specifies the material, profile, dimensions and finish for corrugated aluminium sheet and covers requirements for a) general purpose sheet, b) industrial sheet, and c) building sheet.
ALUMINIUM
No. 1)
SHEET
(Second Revision)
3.3 Building Sheet Pitch : 19Omm Depth: 38 mm 4. 4.1 4.2 Dimensions
Thickness Width -
As mutually
agreed.
2. Material - Shall be made from sheets in alloy and temper conforming to Alloy 31000-H4, 31500H4, 40800-H4 or 51300-H4 of IS : 737-1974*. 3. 3.1 Profile
General purpose Industrial Building 4.2.1 Tolerance 1 and above in thickness.

Len@ -
: 650 and 800 mm overall : 795 mm overall : 830 mm overall

For sheets
General Purpose Sheer

Pitch : 75 mm Depth : 19mm
f 1Omm for sheets 0.45 mm less than 0.45 mm thick, tolerance shall be as mutually agreed. 4.3 1 800, 2 400,3 _+6 mm. 000 and 3 600 mm.
4.3.1
Tolerance -
3.2
Industrial Sheet
Pitch : 125rnm Depth : 38 mm -*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip (for general engineering purposes) (second revision). Note-For Woes of orofile see 4 of the standard.
4.4 Squareness -Diagonal distances of a sheet shall notdifferbymorethan20mmfor sheetsO. mm and above in thickness. For sheets less than 0.45 mm thick, it shall be as mutually agreed. 5. Finish As rolled.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1254-1975 Specification for corrugated aluminium sheet (second
revision).
351
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS :7094-1973 ALUMINIUM
AND ALUMINIUM ALLOY WELDED TUBES FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES

3. 3.1 Testing
1. Scope - Requirements of longitudinally welded tube of aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes. 2. Material
Tensile Test
2.1 Chemical Composition - Alloys SIB(19500), SIC(19000), NS3(31000), NS4(52000), NS5(53000), and NSS(55000) specified in IS : 737-1974*. 2.2 Mechanical Properties - Shall conform IS : 737-1974*, for the relevant alloys. to
3.2 Dtifting Expanding Test - Shall be capable of undergoing drifting by means of a taper drift having an included angle of 45 without showing crack or flaw until the outside diameter measures at least 25 percent more than the original diameter. 3.3 Flattening Test - Shall not show any visible crack in the weld region during flattening until the interior surfaces of the tube meet under load.
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip (for general engineering purposes) (second revision ).
Note-For test procedures, refer to IS : 2657-1964 Method for tensile testing of aluminium and aluminium alloy tube, IS : 4599-1%8 Method for drift expanding test on aluminium and aluminium alloy tubes, and IS : 4177-1967 Method for flattening test of aluminium and aluminium alloy tubes.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7094-1973 Specification for aluminium and aluminium alloy welded tubes for general engineering purposes.
352
SECTION 18
STRUCTURAL
SHAPES
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title STRUCTURAL IS : 811-1965 IS : 1173-1978 IS : 1852-1979 IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS

: : : : : : : : :
Page
SHAPES Cold formed light gauge structural steel sections (revised) Hot rolled and slit steel tee bars (second revision) Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products (third revision) Steel sheet piling sections Crane rail sections (first revision) AIuminium equal leg angles Aluminium unequal leg angles Aluminium channels Hot-rolled steel channel sections for general engineering purposes Light rails (first revision) Aluminium I-beams Aluminium tee-sections STANDARDS 367 368 369 369 371 372 355 358 359 361 361 362 363 364 364 365 365 366
2314-1963 3443-1980 3908-1966 3909-1966 3921-1966 3954-1966 3964-1980 5384-1969 6445-1971
DIMENSIONAL
,IS : 808-1964 IS : 808 (Part I)-1973 IS : IS : IS : IS : IS : IS IS IS IS

: : : :
IS : IS : IS :
Rolled steel beam, channel and angle sections (revised) Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beams: Part I MB series (second revrsion) 808 (Part II)-1978 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part II Columns-SC series (second revision) 808 (Part III)-1979 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beam, channel and angle sections: Part III Channel-MC and MCP series (second revision) 808 (Part V)-1976 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part V Equal leg angles (second revision) 808 (Part VI)-1976 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part VI Unequal leg angles (second revision) 1730 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and general engineering purposes: 1730 (Part-I)-1974 Part I Plate (first revision) 1730 (Part-II)-1974 Part II Sheet (first revision) 1730 (Part-III)-1974Part III Strip (first revision) 1731-1971 Dimensions for steel flats for structural and general engineering purposes (first revision) 1732-1971 Dimensions for round and square steel bars for structural and general engineering purposes (first revision) 2678-1972 Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, drawn tube (first revision) 3965-1981 Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, bar, rod and section (first revision)
375 376 376 377 378 379 380
354
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 811-1965 COLD FORMED LIGHT GAUGE STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTIONS

(Revised)
1. Scope - Lays down nominal dimensions, weight and geometrical properties for cold formed light gauge structural steel sections for normal applications, produced from strip and sheet steel less than 4.5 mm thick. For steel with a minimum yield stress of 23.20 kgf mm*, it is recommended that thickness should not be less than 1.25 mm.
Note - For mass production, cold rolling is more economical, while smaller quantities are economically produced on press brakes. The latter process, with its versatility of shape variation, makes this type of construction adaptable to special requirements. Members areconnected by welds, screws, bolts, cold rivets, etc.
Size
Thickness
Area
Weight per Metre (4) kg 1.819 2.262 2.830 3.562 1.210 1.505 1.869 2.336 2.934 0.753 0.959 1.191 1.477 1.841 0.557 0.708 0.877 1.084 0.361 0.456 0.563
(1)
mmX mm 60 X 60
(2)
mm 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 1.25 1.60 2.00
(3) cm* 2.317 2.881 3.605 4.537 1.541 1.917 2.381 2.975 3.737 O.%O 1.221 1.517 1.881 2.345 0.710 0.901 1.117 1.381 0.460 0.581 0.717
50 X 50
1.1
This type of light gauge sections is appropriate and economical: a) where moderate loads and spans make thicker, hot rolled sections uneconomical; b) where it is desired that load-carrying members should also provide useful surfaces; c) where sub-assemblies of such members may be pm-fabricated in the plant, making site erection simpler. 40 x 40
30 X 30
1.2 Tolerances on profile and ordered lengths, and to assist designers to evolve other sections, illustrative procedures are given in the standard. 2. Material IS : 1079-1973*. Sheet and strip shall conform to 3.2
20 X 20
Channels without Lips: Size Thickness Area Weight per Metre (4) kg 7.144 9.007 4.524 5.660 7.123 2.696 3.346 4.177 5.239 1.792 2.225 2.757 3.435 4.297 (Continued)
3. Dimensions and Properties - The nominal dimensions, weights and certain geometrical properties of cold light gauge structural steel sections shall be as given below: _ _ 3.1 Angles: Size Thickness Area Weight per Metre (4) kg 4.808 6.074 3.047 3.819 4.818
(third
(1) mmXmm 100 x 100 80 X 80
(2) mm 3.15 4.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 2.00 2.50 3.15 4:oo 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00
(3) cm* 9.101 11.474 5.762 7.211 9.074 3.434 4.262 5.321 6.674 2.283 2.834 3.512 4.376 5.474
(1)
mmXmm 100 x 100 80 x 80
(2)
mm 3.15 4.00 2.50 3.15 4.00
(3) cm2 6.125 7.737 3.881 4.865 6.137
60 x 60
50 x 50
*Specification for hot-rolled carbon steel sheet and strip

revision
355
SP : 21.1983
Site
Thickness
Area
Weight per Metre (4) kg 1.114 1.415 1.754 2.168 2.693 0.820 1.038 1.283 1.580 0.525 0.662 0.812 4.580 5.701 7.144 9.007 4.266 5.308 6.650 8.379 3.952 4.916 6.155 2.671 3.324 4.131 5.166 2.420 3.010 3.738 1.703 2.169 2.6% 3.346 1.310 1.666 2.068 2.561 1.114 1.415 1.754 1.016 1.290 1.597 356
3.3
Channels with Lips:

Size Thickness Lip Area Weight per Metre (5)
kg
mmX
(1)
mm
mm 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 ::: 3.15 4.00
(2)
(3) cm* 1.419 1.803 2.234 2.762 3.431 1.044 1.323 1.634 2.012 0.669 0.843 1.034 5.834 7.262 9.101 11.474 5.434 6.762 8.471 10.674 5.034 6.262 7.841 3.403 4.234 5.262 6.581 3.083 3.834 4.762 2.169 2.763 3.434 4.262 1.669 2.123 2.634 3.262 1.419 1.803 2.234 1.294 1.643 2.034
mmxmmmm 100 x 100
(1)
(2)
2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00
(3) mm 25 25 30 30 20 20 25 25 15 15 20 20 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 20 20 25 25 25 20 20 25 25 25 20 20 25 is 25 20 20 20 25 25 15 15 20 20 20
(4)
Cd
40 x 40
6.668 8.275 10.642 13.348 4.246 5.268 6.775 8.436 2.463 3.126 4.068 5.025 2.088 2.646 3.268 1.713 2.166 2.668 1.213 1.526 6.166 7.668 9.775 12.216 15.348
5.235 6.4% 8.354 10.478 3.333 4.136 5.318 6.623 1.934 2.454 3.194 3.944 1.639 2.077 2.566 1.345 1.700 2.095 0.952 1.198 4.840 6.020 7.673 9.590 12.048
30 x 30
80 x 80
1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 1.25 1.60 2.00 1.25 1.60 2.00 1.25 1.60 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15
20 x 20
60X
60
200x
50
50 x 50
180 x 50
40 x 40
30 X 30 200 x 80
160 x 50
2.00 2.50 3.15 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 1.60 2.00 2.50 I .25 1.60 2.00 2.50 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 1.25 1.60 2.00 1.25 1.60 2.00
140 x 40
180 x 80
120 x 40
5.846 -4.589 7.268 5.706 9.275 7.281 11.586 9.095 14.548 11.420 5.526 6.686 8.775 10.956 13.748 4.886 6.068 7.525 9,696 12.148 4.338 5.392 6.888 8.6Oi 10.792 3.835 4.764 5.907 7.612 9.536
100 x 40
160 X 80
80 x 30
140 x 70
60x
30
120 x 60
50 x 30
3.213 2.522 4.086 3.207 5.268 4.136 6.525 5.122 8.122 6.375 (Continued
SP : 21-1983
Size
Thickness
Lip
Area
mmXmm 100 x 50
(1)
mm
(2)
(3) mm 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 10 10 10 10
(4) cm2 2.713 3.446 4.268 5.525 2.213 2.806 3.468 1.588 2.006 1.463 1.846
Weight per Metre (5) kg 2.130 2.705 3.351 4.337 1.737 2.202 2.723 1.247 1.574 1.149 1.449 3.5
Size
Thickness
Lip
Area
Weight per Metre (5) kg 5.122 6.820 8.594 3.366 4.435 5.634 2.127 2.817 3.552
(1)
mmXmm 60 X 90
(2)
mm 2.50 3.15 4.00 .2.00 2.50 3.15 1.60 2.00 2.50
(3) mm 35 44 45 28 35 37.5 22 28 30
(4) cm* 6.525 8.688 10.948 4.288 5.650 7.176 2.710 3.588 4.525
1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 1.25 1.60 2 .oo 1.25 1.60 1.25 1.60
50x
75
80x
40
40x
60
60x 50x30
30
Rectangular Size
Box Section: Thickness Area Weight per Metre (4) kg 7.352 9.160 6.598 8.218 5.845 7.276 5.091 6.334 4.338 5.392 2.817 3.584 2.228 2.830 1.639 2.077 1.443 1.826
3.4
Hat Sections:
(1)
IlNIlXIIXIl Size Thickness Lip Area Weight per Metre (5) kg 6.888 9.046 11.734 4.387 5.711 7.364 2.629 3.445 4.337 2.253 2.880 1.364 1.826 3.509 4.450 5.514 2.150 2.830 3.508 1.639 2.077 1.345 10.282 13.681 / 180 x 180 160 x 160 3.6 200x loo
(2)
mm 1.60 2.00 1.60 2.00 1.60 2.00 1.60 2.00 1.60 2.00 1.25 1.60 1.25 1.60 1.25 1.60 1.25 1.60
(3) cm* 9.366 11.668 8.406 10.468 7.446 9.268 6.486 8 I.168 5.526 6.868 3.588 4.566 2.838 3.306 2.088 2.646 1.838 2.326
mmXmm 100 X 100
(1)
mm
c-4
(3) mm 35 44 50 28 3.5 40 22 28 30 22 25 16 20 22 25 25 16 20 20 15 15 12.5 44 56 44 56
(4) cm2 8.775 11.523 14.948 5.588 7.275 9.381 3.350 4.388 5.525 2.870 3.668 1.738 2.326 4.470 5.668 7.025 2.738 3.606 4.468 2.088 2.646 1.713 13.098 17.428
180 x 90 160 x 80 140 x 70 120 x 60 100 x 50 80 x 40 60 x 30 50x 30
2.50 3.15 4.00 2.00 2.50 3.15 1.60 2.00 2.50 1.60 2 .oo 1.25 1.60 1.60 2.00 2.50 1.25 1.60 2 .oo 1.25 1.60 1.25 3.15 4.00 3.15 4.00
80 x 80
60X60
50x 40x
50 40
100 x 50
Square Box Section: Size Thickness Area Weight per Metre (4) kg 9.864 12.300 8.859 11.044 77.854 9.788
(tintimed)
80x
40
60x 50X
30 25
(1) mmXmm 200 X 200
(2) mm 1.60 2 .oo 1.60 2.00 1.60 2.00
(3) cm* 12.566 15.668 11.286 14.098 10.006 12.468
100 x 150 80 x 120
10.893 8.551 14.628 11.483 357
SP : 21-1983
Size
Thickness
Area
(1)
mmxmm 140 x 140 120 x 120 100 X 100 80 X 80 60 X 60 50 X 50
(2)
mm 1.60 2 .oo 1.60 2.00 1.25 1.60 1.25 1.60 1.25 1.60 1.25 1.60
(3)
2
8:;6 10.868 7 446 9.268 4.838 6.166 3.838 4.886 2.838 3.606 2.338 2.966
Weight per Metre (41 kg 6.850 8.532 5.845 7.276 3.798 4.840 3.013 3.835 2.228 2.830
1.836 2.328
Thickness (1) 2:: 2.50 3.15 4 .oo 4. To lerances Straightness

a) Straightness -
Area (2) 15.71 mm2 20.62 27.58 37.70
Blank Width (3) 7.331 mm 7.592 7.932 8.377
Offset shall not exceed 1 in
600.
b) Profile - Deviation from profile dimensions shall not exceed zkO.5 mm. Deviation from 90 angle shall not exceed f 1. c) Thickness -See IS : 1852-1979*.
3.7
90 Comer:
Thickness (1) mm
1.25
Area (2) mm2

9.08
Blank Width
(3) mm 6.938
d) Length -
+ 75 mm of the ordered length.

-20 .
1.60
12.06
7.120
*Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products (rhird revision).
Note-For detailed dimensions and properties, namely, moment of inertia, moduli of section, etc, refer to Tables 1 to 11 of the standard.
For detailed information, sections (revised).

-
refer to IS : 811-1965 Specification for cold formed right gauge structural steel
-
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1173-1978 HOT ROLLED AND SLIT STEEL TEE BARS
(Second. Revisiort)
1. Scope - Lays down nominal dimensions, weights and basic geometrical properties.
2. c) lndian Standard Slit Light Weight Tee Bars (ISLT) d) Indian Standard Slit Medium Weight Tee Bars
Classification
a) Indian Standard Rolled Normal Tee Bars (ISNT) b) Indian Standard Rolled Deep Legged TeeBars (PDT)
GSMT)
e) Indian Standard Slit Tee Bars from H-sections (ISHT) 3.
Dimensions and Properties Moment&of Inertia Ixx IYY

lOtim lOklnl4
Designation
weight
Wm)
Nominal Size {Depth X Width)

mm Xmm
a) Indian Standard Normal Tee Bars ISNT 20 ISNT 30 1.1 1.8 20 x 20 30 x 30 0.005 0.018 0.002 0.008
fC%ntinued)
358
SP : 21-1983
Designation
Weight (kg/m) 3.5 4.4 5.4

10.0
Nominal Size (Depth ~Width)

mmxmm
Moments*of Inertia . Ixu IYY

lo6mm4 ( 0.061 0.123 0.214 0.620 1.64 5.41 10Gm4 0.029 0.057 0.097 0.292 0.768 2.50
ISNT ISNT ISNT ISNT ISNT ISNT
40
50
60 75
100 150
14.9
22.7
40 x 50 x 60x 75 x 100 x
40 50 60 75
100 150 x 150
b) Indian Standard Deep Legged Tee Bars ISDT 100 ISDT 150 8.1 15.7 100 x 50 150 x 75 0.990 4.50 0.0% 0.370
c) Indian Standard Slit Light Weight Tee Bars ISLT 200 ISLT 250 28.4 37.5 200 x 165 250 x 180 12.7 27.7 3.58 5.32
d) Indian Standard Slit Medium Weight Tee Bars ISMT 50 ISMT62.5 ISMT 75 ISMT 87.5 ISMTIOO 5.8 6.7 7.5 9.8 12.7 50 62.5 75 87.5 100 x x x x x 70 70 75 85 100 0.108 0.218 0.412 0.756 1.16 0.177 0.192 0.234 0.384 0.750
e) Indian Standard Slit Tee Bars from H-Section IN-IT ISHT ISHT ISHT
Note-For
75 100 125 150
15.3 20.0 27.4 29.4
75 100 125 150
x x x x
150 200 250 250
0.962 1.94 4.15 5.74
.-
2.30 4.97 10.0 11.0
detailed dimensions and properties, namely, sectional area, section moduli, etc, see Table 1 of the standard.

revision).
refer to IS : I I73- I978 Specification for hot rolled and slit steel tee bars (second
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1852-1979 ROLLING AND CUTTING TOLERANCES FOR HOT-ROLLED STEEL PRODUCTS
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Lays down rolling and cutting tolerantes for hot-rolled structural steel beams, channels, equal and unequal leg angles, tee bars, bulb angles, round and square bars (other than bars meant for fasteners), flats, plates, strips and sheets rolled from structural steels conforming to IS : 226-1975*,
*Specification for structural steel (standard quality)
revision (fifth
IS : 961-1975*,
IS : 1079-19737,
IS : 1977-1975$,
*Specification for structural steel (high tensile) (seco&

revision). SSpfxification revision).
revision). (third
fSpeciIication for hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip
for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second
359
SP : 21-1983
IS: 3747-19661- and IS:8500IS : 2062-1966*, 1977$ and relevant dimensional standards. 1.1 It does not cover dimensional tolerances for carbon and alloy constructional steel products which are. covered by IS : 3739-1972s. 1.2 If for any specific end uses, such as shipbuilding, machine components, pressure vessels, etc, special tolerances finer than those specified in this standard, OK unilateral tolerances are required, these shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 2. Calculation of Nominal Wdght - Shall be calculated on the basis that steel weighs 7.85 g/cm3. 3. Rolling Sections 3.1 Tolerances for Structural Steel
3.4
to 3.0 mm : + 2.0 -1.5 2.0 Width ofjlange - Up to 100 mm AZ2 mm Over 100 mm f 2 percent Weight - On one metre length: +2.5 percent (or f4 percent for steel conforming to Fe 310-O of IS : 1977-1975*). to 100mm 3.5 Bulb Angtes Deprh (length of longer leg) +2.5
-1.5
Tee Bars Depth -Up
to
+;:;mm
Up to 400 mm:
Width of flange (length of shorter leg) - Up to 100:+_2mm Weight - On one metre length : k2.5 percent (+4 percent for steel conforming to Fe 3 10-O of IS : 1977-1975*). 4. 4.1 Rolling Tolerances for Round and Square Bar
Beams and Columns Depth -Up to 600 mm: Az2.0 to f4.0 mm. Width of&nge - Up to 250 mm: +2.0 to f4.0 mm. Weight - On one metre length: +2.5 percent (or +4 percent for steel conforming to Fe 310-O-of IS : 1977-1975//).
Bars in Straight Length Size - Up to 100 mm :+ 0.5 to + 1.3 mm. Weight - Up to 16 mm : f7 to +3 percent. Coiled Rounds and Squares .Size - Up to 12 mm : +0.5 mm. Weight - No weight tolerance is applicable. Rolling Tolerance for Flats
4.2
3.2
Channels Depth -Up to 400 mm: k2.5 to k3.0 mm. Width of flange -Up to 100 mm: f2 mm. Weight - +2.5 percent (or f4 percent for steel conforming to Fe 310-O of IS : 1977-1975//). Equal and Unequal Leg Angles Length -Up to 100: f 1.5 to +2 mm. Weight - On one metre length: +5 percent in case of angle 3 mm in thickness and +5 percent -3 in the case of angles over 3 mm in thickness.
5.
3.3
Width - Up to 100 mm : f 1 .O to 22.0 mm. Thickness - Up to 12 mm : kO.5 mm. Over 12 mm : f4 percent subject to a maximum of 1.5 mm. Weight - On one metre length, 3 mm thickness: 4 5 percent. Over 3 mm thickness : +5 ~rcent
-5 -
*Specification for structural steel (fusion quality)@r revision). tspecification for steel for flanging and pressing. $Specification for weldable stmctural steel (medium and high strength qualities). gDimensiona1tolerances for carbon and alloy constructional steel products. //Specification for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second reviskwz) .
6. Cutting Tolerance - For all lengths of hotrolled steel products except strip, plate and sheet shall be+lOOmm -0 7. For tolerance of rolling and cutting for plate, strip and sheet refer to the standard.
*Specification for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second
revision). Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel
For detailed information, products (third revision).
refer
to IS : 1852-1979
360
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2314-1963 STEEL SHEET PILING SECTIONS

Lays down nominal dimensions and shape of-hot-rolled steel sheet piling sections. Sectional properties of these sections as calculated on nominal dimensions are also included. Some important requirements for sheet piles are (a) resistance to bending forces, (b) ease with which they can be driven and can be reclaimed for re-use, and (c) efficiency and water tightness. 2. Designation - Designated with the letters ISPS followed by section modulus per metre of wall in cm3 and letters Z, U or F denoting Z-type, U-type or flat type sections. 3. Material - Made from steel conforming to IS : 226-1975*, IS : 961-19751 or IS : 2062-1969$. 4.
1.
Scow -
5.
Tolerances
a) Weight :
+ 4 percent. 2.5
b) Length : Sections shall be supplied in lengths between 9 and 13.4 m, subject to a tolerance of +75 and -50 mm.
Dimensions
Designation Weight Weighthn2 per Metre of Wall (kg) 123.12 162.4 195.7 138 Section Manent of Sectional Inertia Moa!ulus Area per per Metre per Metre Metre of Wall of Wall (cm3) (cm21 (cm41 1 021 1 625 2 222 100 9 448.5 24 563 38 219 428 157 207 249 176 Perimeter per Metre Wall Centre to Centre Distance of Joints (cm> 400.0 402.5 420.5 400.0
(k/m) ISPS ISPS ISPS ISPS 1021 z 1625 U 2222 u 100F 49.25 65.37 82.7 55.2
(cm)
283 308 331 104
*Specification forstructural steel (standardquality) fifi/~ revision). ?Specification for structural steel (high tensile) (second revision). SSpecification for strucNra~ steel (fusion welding quality) (first revision )
refer to IS : 2314-1963
Specification for steel sheet piling sections.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3443-1980 CRANE RAIL SECTIONS
(First Revision)
1. Scope Lays down
other requirements dimensions, of crane rail sections. shape and where So is the area of cross-section 4. by of specimen.
Hardness -
Not less than 200 HB.

free from of length. respect to mm in rail
2. Designation - By letters ISCR followed head width of the rail section in millimetms.
3. Tensile Properties - Steel shall have a minimum tensile strength of 7 10 MPa with a minimum elongation of 14 percent on a gauge length of 5.65fi 361
5. Freedom from Defects - Shall be twist. Camber shall not exceed 0.2 percent The asymmetry of rail cross section with vertical axis shall not exceed 2 mm and 0.6 flange and head mspectively.
SP : 21-1983
6. Dimensions
Designation
and Properties:
6.1 Tolerances:
Head width +2 mm for other than ISCR 120 and 140 yt.rnrn Height for ISCR 120 and 140
Cross- Weight Head Bottom I I Set- (kg/m) Width Width1 XX (mm) Height (cm4) (~5) tional Area (mm) (cm21 50 60 80 100 120 140 90 357.5 105 654.6 130 1524 150 2806 170 4794 170 5528
tolerances
ISCR 50 38.0 29.8 ISCR 60 51.0 40.0 ISCR 80 81.8 64.2 ISCR 100 113.0 89.0 ISCR 120 151.0 118.0 ISCR 140 187.0 147.0
Note l-For detailed
111.4 195.9 468.6 920.0 1672.0 2609.0 properties,
+ 1 mm for ISCR 50, 60 and 80 +1.5 mm for ISCR 100 + 2 mm for ISCR 120 and 140. + 100,, - 0
Length of rail Weight
+ 3 percent and - 2 percent
dimensions,
and sectional
see Tables 2 to 4 of the standard. (non-metric sections) alongwith relevant tolerances and
Note 2-Dimensions sectional properties
of some of the rail sections commonly used in country are covered in Appendix A of rhe sfandard.
Note 3-For methods of tests refer to IS : 1500-1968 Method Methods for tensile testing of steel products (first revision).
of Brine11 hardness
test for steel (firsf revision), and IS
: 1608-1972
refer to IS7 3443-1980 Specification for crane rail sections (first revision). SUMMARY OF
IS : 3908-1966 1. Scope- Lays down dimensions equal leg angles for structural Use.
2. Designation - Indian Equal Leg Angles (ISALE) Standard
ALUMINIUM
of aluminium
EQUAL LEG ANGLES

3. Material - Shall be extruded from following aluminium alloys specified in IS : 733-1975*: HE 9, HE 10, HE 14, HE 15, HE 20, HE 30, NE 4, NE 5, NE6andNE8. 4. Dimensions Size x x x x x x x x x 4.0 5.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 and Sectional Properties Size x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 10.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 16.0 10.0 12.0 16.0 12.0 16.0 20.0
Aluminium
Designation and Size @IXB x tmm) ISALE 10 x 10 x 1.5 I SALE 10 x 10 x 2.0 ISALE 15 x 15 x 1.5 ISALE 15 x 15 x 2.0 ISALE 15 x 15 x 3.0 ISALE 20 X 20 X 2.0 ISALE 20 x 20 X 3.0 ISALE 25 x 25 X 2.0 ISALE 25 x 25 X 3.0 ISALE ISALE ISALE ISALE ISALE 25 30 30 30 35 x X X X X 25 X 30X 30 X 30 X 35 X 4.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 3.0
Designation and @IXB x tmm) ISALE 35 x 35 ISALE 35 x 35 ISALE 40 x 40 ISALE 40 x 40 ISALE 40 x 40 ISALE 50 x 50 ISALE 50 x 50 ISALE 50 x 50 ISALE 50 x 50 ISALE ISALE ISALE ISALE ISALE
Designation and 64xBxtmm~ ISALE 80 x 80 ISALE 100 x 100 ISALE 100 x 100 ISALE 100 x 100 ISALE 100 x 100 ISALE 120 x 120 ISALE 120 x 120 ISALE 120x 120 ISALE 150 x 150 ISALE ISALE ISALE ISALE ISALE 150 150 200 200 200 x x x x x 150 150 200 200 200
60 X 60x4.0 60 x 60 x 5.0 60x 60x6.0 80 x 80 x 6.0 80x 80 x 8.0 -_
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, bars, rods and sections (for general engineering pqoses) (second revision ) Note 1-A
Note 2-For
B denote lengths of legs and t the thickness of the angle. detailed dimensions and properties, namely, moment of inertia, radius of gyration,
etc, see 5 and Table 1 of the standard.
refer to IS : 3908-1966 Specification for aluminium equal leg angles. 362
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3909-1966 ALUMINIUM
1. Scope - Lays down dimensions unequal leg angles for structural use. of aluminium
UNEQUAL
LEG ANGLES
3. Material - Shall be extruded from following aluminium alloys specified in IS : 733-1975*: HE 9, HE 14,HE 15,HE20,HE30,NE4,NE5indNE8. 4. Dimensions (mm) and Properties
2. Designation - Indian Standard Aluminium equal Leg Angles (ISALU).
Un-
Designation and Size (Longer Leg X Shorter Leg xlhickness)

ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU JSALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU
Designation and Size (Longer Leg X ShorterLeg XlMAness)

ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 80 80 80 80 80 80 100 100 100 100 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 60 60 60 50 50 80 x 3.0 x 4.0 x 5.0 x 3.0 x 4.0 x 5.0 x 4.0 x 5.0 x 6.0 x 4.0 x 6.0 x 8.0 x 4.0 x 6.0 x 8.0 x 6.0 x 8.0 x10.0 x 6.0
Designation and Size (Longer Leg X Shorter Leg xlhickness)

ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU ISALU 100x80~ 100 x 80 x 120 x 80 x 120 x 80 x 120 x 80 x 125 x 80 x 125 x 80 x 125 x 80 x 150 x 80 x 150 x 80 x 150 x 80 x 200 x 100 x 200 x 100 x 200 x 100 x 200 x 150 x 200 x 150 x 200 x 150 x 8.0 10.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 10.0 12.0 16.0 12.0 16.0 20.0
20 x 10 x 1.5
20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 $I 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 10 x 15 x 15 x 15 x 15 x 15 x 20 x 20 x 20 x 20 x 20 x 20 x 25 x 25 x 25 x 25 x 25 x 25 x 2.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
50
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys. bars, rods and secdons (for general engineering purposes) (second revis~n). Note-For detailed dimensions and properties, such as, sectional area, moment of inertia, radius of gyration and modulus of section, see 5 and Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3909-1966 Specification for aluminium unequal leg angles.
363
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope aluminium Lays down dimensions channels. Indian Standards of structural Aluminium
CHANNELS
2. Designation Channels (ISALC).
3. Material - Shall be extruded from following aluminium alloys specified in IS : 733-1975*: HE 9, HE 14, HE 15, HE 20, HE 30, NE 4, NE 5 and NE 8. 4.
Dimensions and Sectional Properties Designation ISALC 120 x 60 x 8 ISALC 150 x 60 x 6 ISALC 150 x 60 x 8
ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 x x x x x x x 80 x 6 80 x 8 80 x 10 80 x 8 80 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 12
ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC
Designation 40X20X2 40 x 20 x 3
50 x 30 50 x 30 60 x 30 60 x 30 60X30X5 60 x 40 60 x 40 80 x 40 x x x x 3 4 3 4
Uesignation
x 4 x 5 x 4
ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC ISALC
80 x 40 x 5 80 x 40 x 6 100 x 40 x 5
100x40~6 100X50X5 100 x 50 x 6 100 x 50 x 8
120 x 50 x 5 120 x 50 x 6 120 x 60 x 6
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, bars, rods and sections (for general engineering purposes) (second
revision).
Note-For detailed dimensions and properties,such see 5 and Table 1 of Ihe standard. as sectional area, moment of inertia, radius of gyration and modulus of section
refer to IS : 3921-1966 Specification for aluminium channels.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3954- 1966 HOT-ROLLED STEEL CHANNEL SECTIONS FOR GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
Scope - Lays down nominal dimensions, weights and sectional properties of hot-rolled steel channel sections for general engineering purposes. This standard is mainly intended to cover channel sections for general use made from steel conforming to IS : 226-1975* or IS : 1977-19751_.
2. Designation - By, letters depth of channel in millimetres. ISCG followed by
1.
3.
IXmensions and Properties
Designa- Sectional Depth Flange Thi tion Width *Weight Web Fla Area
2
ISCG 16 ISCG 20 ISCG 40
0% 1.099 6.144
For detailed
mm 16 20 40
mm 10 10 32
mm 3.2 3.2 5.0
mm kg/m 3.2 0.76 3.2 0.86 7.5 4.82
and properties, such as of gyration and section moduli see 5 and Table 1 of the standard.
Note-
dimensions
sectional area, moment of inertia,radii
*Speciticationforstructural steel (standardquality) @VI revision). tSpecitication for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second
4. Rolling and Cutting Tolerances in IS : 1852-1979*.

*Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances steel products (third revision).
as specified
for hot-rolled
revision )
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3954-1966 Specification for hot-rolled steel channel sections for general engineering purposes. .
364
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3964-1980 LIGHT
RAILS
(First Revision)
1. 2. ScopeRequirements of light rail sections. 5.
Tolerances
Head width Web thickness Height Bottoih flange width Length of rail Weight per metre +2 mm + 1.0 -0.5 mm +1 mm f2 mm +50 mm +3 percent. should be
Designation -
figure denoting section.
By letters ISLR followed by a weight is kg per metre of the rail
3. Tensile Properties - Steel shall have a minimum tensile strength of 7 10 MPa with a minimum alongation of 14 percent on a gauge length of 5.656 where So is area of cross section of specimen. 4.
Dimensions Designation Sectional Area

cm2 ISLR ISLR ISLR ISLR 10 12 15 25
detailed method
6. Freedom from Defects - Rails reasonably free from twist, camber, etc.
Weight
kg/m 10 12 14.9 24.9
and sectional
Height
mm 63.5 69.85 79.38 104.78
properties
Head Width
mm 34.93 35.72 41.28 52.39
Head Thickness
mm 19.45 22.23 25.4 32.94
Web Thickness
mm 5.95 6.75 7.54 9.92
Bottom Flange Width

mm 63.5 60.0 76.2 100.01
12.74 15.24 18.98 31.68

dimensions
Note 1 -For Note Z-For
of rail sections,
refer to Tables
1 and 2 of rhe standard. (first revision).
of test, refer to IS
: 1608- 1972 Method for tensile testing of steel products

-
refer to IS : 3964-1980 Specification for light rails (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope aluminium Lays down dimensions I-beam sections. of structural
I-BEAMS
2. Designation - Designated ISALB followed by depth of section and width of flange in mm and weight in kg/m.
3.
4. Material - Sections shall be extruded from the following ahuninium alloys specified in IS : 733 1975* HE 9, HE 14, HE 15, HE 20, HE 30, NE 4, NE5andNE8.
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, bars, rods and sections (for general engineering purposes) (second revision).
Weight -
Calculated
on basis of 2.7 g/cm3. 365
SP : 21-1983
5.
Dimensions and Properties

Designation Designation Designation
ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB
40 40 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 80 80
x x x x x x x x x x x
20-0.4 20-0.6 30-0.9 30-1.2 30-1.1 30-1.5 30-1.9 40-1.9 40-2.4 40-2.1 40-2.7
ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB
80 100 100 100 100 100 120 120 120 120 120
x x x x x x x x X x x
40-3.2 50-3.4 50-3;9 60-3.9 60-4.1 60-4.7 60-4.7 60-5.0 70-5.6 80-6.1 80-7.4
ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB ISALB
150 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200
x x x x x x x x x
80-6.6 80-8.1 100-7.7 100-9.4 100-12.1 100-10.5 100-13.4 120-12.9 120-16.1
refer to IS : 5384-1969
Specification .for aluminium I-beams.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 64451971
1. Scope -Dimensions
aluminium structural and nominal tee-sections.
ALUMINIUM
weight of
TEE-SECTIONS
Tolerances As specified in
4. Dimensional IS : 3%5-1969*.
2. Designation - Designated as ISALT, followed by depth of section and width of flange in mm, and weight in kg per metre of section. Example : Alumininm tee-section of depth 25 mm, width 25 mm and weight 0.4 kg/m shall be designated as ISALT 25X25 - 0.4. 3.
5.
Material - Sections shall be extruded from following aluminium alloys specified in IS : 733-19753. HE9,HE 14,HE 15,HE200,HE30,NE4,NE5 and NE 8.
*Dimensionsfor wroughtaluminium and aluminiumalloys, bars, rods and sections (firs?revision). tSpecification for wrought aluminium and aluminiuq alloys, bars, rods and sections (for generalengineering purposes) (second
revision).
Dimensions and Sectional Properties
Designation ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT I SALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT I SALT ISALT _ 25 30 30 40 50 50 65 65 65 65 75 75 x x x x x x x x x x x x 25-0.4 30-0.5 30-0.7 50-0.8 50-1.2 50-1.6 65-1.6 65-2.1 65-2.7 65-3.3 75-2.4 75-3.1
Designation ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT 75 75 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 x x x x x x x x x x x x 100-2.8 100-3.7 75-2.0 75-3.1 754.5 75-5.4 100-4.2 100-5.2 100-6.2 75-5.2 75-6.2 100-5.9 ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT I SALT ISALT ISALT ISALT ISALT
Designation 125 x 100-7.0 150 x 75-5.9 150 x 75-7.0 150 150 150 150 175 175 200 200 x x x x x x x x 100-7.9 100-10.2 150-9.5 150-12.4 175-11.2 175-14.7 200-12.8 200-16.8
-._ refer to IS : 6445-1971 Specification for aluminium tee-sections. 366
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 808-1964 ROLLED STEEL BEAM, CHANNEL AND ANGLE SECTIONS
(Revised)
(With Amendments No. 1 to 5) Designation (1) ISLB 325 ISLB 350 ISLB 400 ISLB 450 ISLB 500 ISLB 550 ISLB 600 ISWB 150 ISWB 175 ISWB 200 ISWB 225 ISWB 250 ISWB 300 ISWB ISWB ISWB ISWB ISWB ISWB ISWB 350 400 450 500 550 600 600 Weight per Metre (2) kg 43.1 49.5 56.9 65.3 75 .o 86.3 99.5 17.0 22.1 28.8 33.9 40.9 48.1 56.9 66.7 79.4 95.2 112.5 133.7 145.1 27.1 30.6 34.6 37.3 40.0 43.1 46.8 51.0 54.7 58.8 63 .o 67.4 72.4 77.4 82.2 87.2 92.5 Sectional Area (3) cm2 54.90 63.01 72.43 83.14 95.50 109.97 126.69 21.67 28.11 36.71 43.24 52.05 61.33 72.50 85.01 101.15 121.22 143.34 170.38 184.86 34.48 38.98 44.08 47.54 50.94 54.94 59.66 64.96 69.71 74.85 80.25 85.91 92.21 98.66 104.66 111.14 117.89 down nominal dimensions, 1. Scope - Lays weight and basic geometrical properties of rolled steel beams, channel and angle sections. 2. Classification: a) Beams: i) Indian Standard Junior Beams (ISJB), ii) Indian Standard Light Beams (ISLB), iii) Indian Standard Wide Plange Beams (ISWB), and iv) Indian Standard Column Sections H-Beams (ISHB). b) Channels: i) Indian Standard Junior Channels (ISJC), and ii) Indian ,Standard Light Channels (ISLC). 3. Designation - Beams and channels shall be designated by abbreviation of the same as given in 2 followed by depth of section in millimetres. 4. 4.1 Dimensions Beams Designation (1) ISJB 150 ISJB 175 ISJB 200 ISJB 225 ISLB 75 ISLB 100 ISLB (P) 100 ISLB 125 ISLB 150 ISLB 175 ISLB (P) 175 ISLB .200 ISLB (P) 200 ISLB 225 ISLB 250 ISLB 275 ISLB 300 ISLB (P) 300 Weight per Metre (2) kg 7.1 8.1 9.9 12.8 6.1 8.0 8.6 11.9 14.2 16.7 16.7 19.8 21.1 23.5 27.9 33 .o 37.7 41.5 Sectional Area (3) cm2 9.01 10.2% 12.64 16.28 7.71 10.21 10.97 15.12 18.08 21.30 21.32 25.27 26.85 29.92 35.53 42.02 48.08 52.89 367
ISHB 150 ISHB 150* ISHB 150* ISHB 200 ISHB 200* ISHB 225 ISHB 225* ISHB 250 ISHB 250* ISHB 300 ISHB 300* ISHB 350 ISHB 350* ISHB 400 ISHB 4c0* ISHB 450 ISHB 450*
*The heavier sections in each size are to be obtained from the same set of rolls as the lighter sections by spreading of the rolls and the width of flanges of these sections will increase by an amount equal to the difference between the thicknesses of the webs.
SP : 21-1983 4.2 Channels: Designation Weight per Metre (2) kg 5.8 7.9 9.9 11.2 14.0 5.7 7.9 10.7
11.3 14.4
(1)
ISJC ISJC ISJC ISJC ISJC 100 125 150 175 200
Sectional Area (3)

cm2 7.41 10.08 12.67 14.24 17.77 7.26 10.02 13.67 14.35 18.39
Designation
(1)
ISLC ISLC ISLC ISLC (P) 150 175 200 (P) 200
Weight per Metre (2) k 15.6 17.6 20.6 21.5 24.0 28.0 33.1 33.1 38.9 45.8
Sectional Area (3)

cm2 19.88 22.42 26.26 27.41 30.60 45.72 42.19 42.20 49.54 58.34
ISLC 75 ISLC 100 ISLC 125 ISLC (P) 125 ISLC 150
ISLC 225 ISLC 250 ISLC 300 ISLC (P) 300 ISLC 350 ISLC 400
Note -For detailed dimensions and geometrical properties, namely, moment of inertia, section moduli, etc, refer to Tables I and 2 of the standard.
For detailed information, sections (revised).
refer to IS : 808-1964 Specification for rolled steel beam, channel and angle
SUMMARY OF
IS :
808 (PART I)-1973 DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-ROLLED

STEEL BEAMS
PART I MB SERIES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, weight and basic geometric properties of hot-rolled steel medium weight beams. Designation Weight Sectional Area (3)
cm2 24.9 32.3 39.7 47.6 58.7 66.7 78.5 92.3 111 132 156
Flange Width
(4) mm 85 100 110 125 140 140 141) 150 180 190 219
(1)
MB MB MB MB MB MB MB MB MB MB MB 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
(2)
kg/m, 19.5 25.4 31.2 37.3 46.1 52.4 61.6 72.4 86.9 104 123
2. Designation - As an example, a medium weight beam of depth 250 mm shall be designated as MB 250. 3.
Dimensions Weight (2) kg/m

11.5 13.4 15 .o
Designation (1)
MB 100 MB 125 MB 150
Sectional Area (3)

cm2 14.7 17.0 19.1
Flange Width (4)

mm 70 70 75
Note 1 -For detailed dimensions and sectional properties, namely, moment of inertia, section moduli, radius of gyration, etc, refer to Table I of the standard.
Note 2-For dimensional and weight tolerances, refer to IS : 1852-1979 Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808 (Part I)-1973 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beams:Part MB series (Second revision).
368
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 808 (PART II)-1978 DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-ROLLED STEEL SECTIONS

PART II COLUMNS - SC SERIES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, mass and geometric properties of hot-rolled steel column section - SC series. 2. Designation - A column of depth 200 shall be designated by the alphabet SC followed by the depth, for example, SC 200. 3. Dimensions and Sectional Properties Designation Mass kg/m 20.0 26.2 Sectional Area l(Y mm* 2.55 3.34 Designation Mass Sectional Area l@ mm* 4.24 5.34 6.44 7.68 8.98 10.9
kg/m
SC SC SC SC SC SC 140 160 180 200 220 250 33.3 41.9 50.5 60.3 70.4 85.6
SC 100 SC 120
Note l-The Note 2-For
width of flange of column shall be same as depth of column. detailed dimensions and properties, namely, moment of inertia, section moduli, etc. refer to Table 1 of rhe sfondurd.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808 (Part I&1978 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part II Columns - SC series (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 808 (PART III)-1979 DIMENSIONS IiOR HOT-ROLLED BEAM, CHANNEL AND ANGLE SECTIONS
PART III CHANNEL - MC AND MCP SERIES (
STEEL
Second Revision)
2. Designation - Medium weight channel shall be designated MC for sloping.flanges and MCP for parallel flanges, followed by depth of channel. 369
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, weight and basic geometric properties of hot-rolled steel medium weight channel sections with sloping and parallel flanges.
SP : 21-1983
3. Dimensions
Designation
Mass
(1)
MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC
(2)
kg/m 7.14 9.56 13.1 13.7 16.8 17.7 19.6 21.7 22.3 24.3 26.1 30.7 30.6 34.2 38.1 36.3 41.5 46.2 42.7 50.1
Sectional Area (3)

cm* 9.10 12.2 16.7 17.5 21.3 22.6 24.9 27.6 28.5 31.0 33.3 39.0 39.0 43.5 48.5 46.3 52.8 58.8 54.4 63.8
75
100
125
125* 150 150* 175 175* 200 200* 225 225* 250 250* 250* 300 300* 300* 350 400
Width of Flange (4) mm 40 50 65 66 75 76 75 77 75 76 80 83 80 82 84 90 92 94 100

100
Designation
Mass (2) kg/m

7.14 9.56 13.1 13.7 16.8 17.7 19.6 21.7 22.3 24.3 26.1 30.7 30.6 34.2 38.1 36.3 41.5 46.2 42.7 50.1
(1)
MCP MCP MCP MCP 75 100 125 125*
Sectional Area (3)

cm* 9.10 12.2 16.7 17.5 21.3 22.6 24.9 27.6 28.5 31.0 33.3 39.0 39.0 43.5 48.5 46.3 52.8 58.8 54.4 63.8
Width of Flange (4)

mm 40 50 65 66 75 76 75 77 75 76 80 83 80 82 84 90 92 94 100 100
MCP 150 MCP 150* MCP 175 MCP 175* MCP MCP MCP MCP MCP MCP MCP MCP MCP MCP MCP MCP
industry
200 200* 225 225* 250 250* 250* 300 300* 300* 350 400
*The heavier sections in each size intended for use in wagon building corresponding lightest section in that size group, by raising the rolls.
are to be obtained
from same set of rolls as the
Note I-For detailed dimensions the standard. Note Z-For dimensional (third revisionJ.
and sectional
properties,
namely,
moment
of inertia, section moduli,
etc. refer to Tables I and 2 of
and weight tolerances,
refer to IS
: 1852-1979
Rolling and cutting
tolerances
for hot-rolled
steel products
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808 (Part III)-1979 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel beam, channel and angle sections: Part III Channel -MC and MCP series (second revision).
370
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 808 (PART V)-1976 DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-ROLLED STEEL SECTIoNS

PART V ( EQUAL LEG ? GLES
Second Revision)
Designation (1) ISA 6060 x 5 x6 x8 x 10 ISA 6565 x 5 x6 x8 x 10 ISA 7070 x 5 x6 x8 x 10 ISA 7575 x 5 x6 x8 x 10 ISA 8080 x 6 x8 x 10 x 12 ISA 9090 x 6 x8 x 10 x 12 ISA 100100 x 6 x8 x 10 x 12 ISA 110110x x x x ISA 130130 x x x x ISA 150150 x x x x 8 10 12 16 8 10 12 16 10 12 16 20 Sectional Area (2)
2
1. scopeCovers nominal dimensions, weight and basic geometric properties of hot-rolled steel equal leg angles. 2. Designation - Equal leg angles shall be designated by the alphabet ISA followed by size and thickness in millimetres. For example, angles of size 50 x 50 mm and thickness 6 mm shall be designated as ISA 5050x 6. 3.
Weight per Metre (3) kg 4.5 5.4 7.0 8.6 4.9 5.8 7.7 9.4 5.3 6.3 8.3 10.2 5.7 6.8 8.9 11.0 7.3 9.6 11.8 14.0 8.2 10.8 13.4 15.8 9.2 12.1 14.9 17.7 13.4 16.6 19.7 25.7 15.9 19.7 23.5 30.7 22.9 27.3 35.8 44.1 KCknltinued)
5c.Y5 6.84 8.96 11.00 6.25 7.44 9.76 12.00 6.77 8.06 10.58 13.02 7.27 8.66 11.38 14.02 9.29 12.21 15.05 17.81 10.47 13.79 17.03 20.19 11.67 15.39 19.03 22.59 17.08 21.12 25.08 32.76 20.28 25.12 29.88 39.16 29.21 34.77 45.65 56.21
Dimensions:
Designation (1) ISA 2020 x 3 x4 ISA 2525 x 3 x4 x5 ISA 3030 x 3 x4 x5 ISA 3535 x 3 x4 x5 x6 ISA 4040 x 3 x4 x5 x6 ISA 4545 x 3 x4 x5 x6 ISA 5050 x 3 x4 x5 x6 ISA 5555 x 5 x6 x8 x 10 Sectional Area (2) cm* 1.12 1.45 1.41 1.84 2.25 1.73 2.26 2.77 2.03 2.66 3.27 3.86 2.34 3.07 3.78 4.47 2.64 3.47 4.28 5.07 2.95 3.88 4.79 5.68 5.27 6.26 8.18 10.02 Weight per Metre (3) kg 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.8 1.4 1.8 2.2 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.0 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.5 2.1 2.7 3.4 4.0 2.3 3.0 3.8 4.5 t *; 6:4 7.9 371
SP : 21.1983
Desigrzation (1)
Sectional Area
(2)
2
Weight per Metre (3)

kg
(Size x
Designation Thickness)
Sectional Area (2) cm2 4.71 9.40 12.7 27.9 18.7 23.2 27.5 33.9 43 .o 51.0 52.1 61.9 68.3 90.6
Weight
ISA 200200 x 12 4:?4 36.9 x 16 61.82 48.5 x 20 76.38 60.0 x 25 94.13 73.9 3.1 A supplementary list of equal leg angles as given below conforming to I!WR 657/I-1968 Structural steel sections: Part I Dimensions and sectional properties of hot-rolled equal leg angles - Metric series have also been adopted as Indian Standard sizes. They may be available by mutual agreement with the supplier. Designation Sectional Weight (Size ~Thickness) Area (1) (2) (3) mmXmmX mm cm2 kg/m 50 x 50 x 7 6.56 5.15 7.41 x8 5.82
(1) mmXmmxmm 60 x 60 x 4 70 x 70 x 7 100x100x6.5 x 15 120x 120 x 8 x 10 x 12 x 15 15 18 15 18 20 24
(3) kg/m 3.70 7.38 9.99 21.9 14.7 18.2 21.6 26.6 33.8 40.1 40.9 48.6 53.7 71.1
150 x 150 x x 180 x 180 x x x 200 x 200 x
Note I-For detailed dimensions and sectional properties, namely, moment of inertia, moduli of section, etc, refer to Tables 1 and IA of the standard.
Note 2 -For
(third
dimensional and weight tolerances, refer to IS : 1852-1179Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products
revision).
refer to IS : 808 (Part V)-1976 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part V
Equal leg angles (second revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS :
808 (PART VI)-1976 DIMENSIONS FOR HOT-ROLLED

STEEL SECTIONS
PART VI UNEQUAL LEG ANGLES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, weight and basic geometric properties of hot-rolled steel unequal leg angles.
2.
De&nation
Unequal leg angles shall be de372
signated by the alphabet ISA followed by size and thickness in mm. For example, angles of size 100 X 75 mm and thickness 6 mm shall be designated as ISA 10075 x 6.
SP : 21-1983
3.
Dimensions
Designation
(1)
ISA 3020 x 3 x4 X5 ISA 4025 x 3 x4 x5 x6 ISA 4530 x 3 x4 x5 x6 ISA 5030 X 3 x4 x5 x6 ISA 6040 x 5 x6 x8 ISA 6545 X 5 x6 x8 ISA 7045 x 5 x6 x8 x 10 ISA 7550 x 5 x6 x8 x 10 ISA 8050 x 5 x6 x8 x 10 ISA 9060 X 6 x8 x 10 x 12 ISA 10065X6 x8 x 10 ISA 10075 x 6 x8 x 10 x 12 IS4 12575 x 6
x8 x
Sectional Weight Area per Metre (2) (3) cm2 kg 1.41 1.1 1.84 1.4 2.25 1.8 1.88 2.46 3.02 3.56 2.18 2.86 3.52 4.16 2.34 3.07 3.78 4.47 4.76 5.65 7.37 5.26 6.25 8.17 5.52 6.56 8.58 10.52 6.02 7.16 9.38 11.52 6.27 7.46 9.78 12.02 8.65 11.37 14.01 16.57 9.55 12.57 15.51 10.14 13.36 16.50 19.56 11.66 15.38 19.02 1.5 1.9 2.4 2.8 1.7 2.2 2.8 3.3 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.5 3.7 4.4 5.8 4.1 4.9 6.4 4.3 5.2 6.7 8.3 4.7 5.6 7.4 9.0 4.9 5.9 7.7 9.4 6.8 8.9 11.0 13.0 7.5 9.9 12.2 8.0 10.5 13.0 15.4 9.2 12.1 14.9 373
Sectional Area (2) (1) cm* ISA 12595 X 6 12.92 X8 17.04 x 10 21.08 x 12 25.04 ISA 15075 X 8 17.48 x 10 21.62 x 12 25.68 ISA 150115 x x x x ISA 200100 8 10 12 16 20.72 25.66 30.52 40.00 29.21 34.77 45.65 34.29 40.85 53.73 66.29
Designation
Weight per Metre (3) kg 10.1 13.4 16.5 t 19.7 13.7 17.0 20.2 16.3 20.1 24.0 31.4 22.9 27.3 35.8 26.9 32.1 42.2 52.0
x 10 x 12 x 16 x x x x 10 12 16 20
ISA 200150
3.1 A supplementary list of unequal leg angles sections as given below conforming to ISO/R 657/H1%8 Dimensions of hot-rolled steel sections: Part 2 Unequal leg angles (Metric series) - Dimensions and sectional properties have also been adopted as Indian standard sizes. They may be available by mutual arrangement with the supplier. Designation (Size X Thickness) (1) mmX mmX mm 40 x 20 x 3 x4 x5 60 x 30 x 5 x6 60 x 40 x 7 65 x 50 x 5 x6 x7 x8 70 x 50 x 5 x6 x7 x8 75 x 50x 7 80 x40x x6 x7 x8 5 Sectional Area (2) cm* 1.73 2.26 2.77 4.29 5.08 6.55 5.54 6.58 7.60 8.60 5.79 6.88 7.95 9.00 8.31 5.80 6.89 7.96 9.01 Weight per Metre (3) kg 1.36 1.77 2.17 3.37 3.99 5.14 4.35 5.16 5.% 6.75 4.54 5.40 6.24 7.06 6.53 4.56 5.41 6.25 7.07
(Continued)
10
SP : 21-1983
Designation (Size X Thickness) (1)
mmXmmXmm
80x 60x 6 x7 x8 x7 x8 x 10
Sectional Area (2) cm* 8.11 9.38 10.6 9.01 10.4 11.8 14.1 8.73 10.1 11.4 14.1 11.2 15.5 19.1 22.7
Weight per Metre (3) kg 6.37 7.36 8.34 7.07 8.19 9.29 11.4 6.85 7.93 8.99 11.1 8.77 12.2 15.0 17.8
Designation (Size x Thickness) (1) mmxmmxmm 125 x 75 x 12 135 x 65 x 8 x 10 x 12 150 x 75 x x 150 x 90 x x x 200 x 100x 9 15 10 12 15 15
Sectional Area (2)
cm*
22.7 15.1 18.6 22.1 19.6 31.6 23.2 27.5 33.9 43 .o 50.5 60.0
Weight per Metre (3) kg 17.8 11.8 14.6 17.3 15.4 24.8 18.2 21.6 26.6 33.7 39.6 47.1
90x65~6
loo x5o ::!:

x8 x 10 100 x 65 x 7 120 x 80 x 8 x 10 x 12
200 x 150 x 15 x 18
Note l-For detailed dimensions and sectional properties, namely, moment cf inertia, moduli of section, radii of gyration, etc, refer to Tables 1 and 1A of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 808 (Part VI)-1976 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel sections: Part VI Unequal leg angles (second revision).
374
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1730 (PART II-1974 DIMENSIONS

PART I
FOR STEEL PLATE, AND STRIP FOR STRUCTURAL AND GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
PLATE
SHEET
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, are and weight of steel plates for structural and general engineering purposes. 2. DesignationBy letters ISPL followed by figures denoting length (mm) X width (mm) X thickness (mm) of the plate. 3. Dimensions (mm)
3.1 Standard Ncvninal Thickness - 5,6, 12, 14, 16, 18,20,22,25,28,32,36,40,45,50,56 and 63. 3.2
7, 8, 10,
Standard Nominal Sizes

1 600 1 800 2 000 2 200 2 500
1 900
950
1 000
1 100
1 200
1 250
1 400
1 500
Maximum Standard Nominal Thickness, mm

2200 2 500 2800 3 200 3 600 4000 4500 5 000 5 600 6 300 7 100 8 000 9 000 10 000 11000 12 500 13 500 --~ 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 63 63 %: 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 50 63 63 2: 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 45 6363 2: 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 45 40 63 63 2: 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 50 40 40 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 45 40 36 _____ 63 63 :: 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 45 40 36 32 63 63 :: 63 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 45 40 36 32 28 _____..-63 63 66.: 63 63 63 63 63 56 50 45 40 36 32 28 25 .-_-_ 63 63 2, 63 63 63 63 56 50 45 40 36 32 28 25 25 __.
4. Weight - Nominal weight cajculated that density of steel is 7.85 kg/cm3.

Note I--For nominal weights per metre of plates of different widths and thickness, see Table 3 of the sfondard.
on basis
Note 2-For tolerance on thickness size and weight of plate, refer to IS : 1852-1979Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products (thirdrevision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1730 (Part I)-I974 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and general engineeringpurposes:Part I Plate (first revision).
375
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1730 (PART II)-1974 DIMENSIONS FOR STEEL PLATE, AND STRIP FOR STRUCTURAL AND GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
PART II SHEET
SHEET
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions, area and weight of steel sheets for structural and general engineering purposes. 2. Designation - By letters ISSH followed by tiguresdenotinglength(mm) Xwidth (mm)X thickness (mm) of the sheet. 3.1 Standard Nominal Thickness 0.40, 0.50, 0.63, 0.80,0.90, 1.00, 1.12, 1.25, 1.40, 1.60, 1.80, 1.90, 2.00, 2.24,2.50, 2.80, 3.15, 3.55, 4.00, 4.30 and 4.65. 3.2 Standard Nominal Sizes (mm) Lengths Widths 3. Dimensions (mm) 1800,2 000,2 200,2 500,2 800, 3 200, 3 600,4 000. 600, 750, 900, 950, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 250, 1 400, 1 500.
Note l-
For details regarding nominal surface area and weight per sheets see Table 2 of the standard. has been calculated on the basis that density of steel is 7.85 g/ems.
Note 2-Weight
For detailed: information, refer to IS : 1730 (Part II)-1974 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and general engineering purposes: Part II Sheet (first revision).
Note 3-Tolerance on dimension and weight of sheets shall be as per IS : 1852-1979Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products (third revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1730 (PART III)-1974 DIMENSIONS FOR STEEL PLATE, AND STRIP FOR STRUCTURAL AND GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
PART III STRIP
SHEET
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Covers nominal dimensions and weight of steel strips for structural and general engineering purposes. 2. Designation ISST followed by figures (in Thickness 3.15 3.55 4.00 4.50 5.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 _ Width (see Note below) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 to to to to to to to to 1 550 1 550 1 550 1 550 1 550 1 550 1 550 1 550
mm) denoting 3. Dimensions
width X thickness. (mm) Width (see Note below) 100 100 100 100 100 100 to to to to to to 800 950 1 050 1 150 1 250 1 300 376
Thickness 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.24 2.50 2.80
Note - Standard widths are 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 650, 800, 950, 1 000, 1 050, 1 150, I 250, 1 300, 1 450 and 1 550.
4. Weight - Calculated steel is 7.85 g/cd.
on basis
that density
of
SP : 21-1983
Note l-For Note 2-For
weights per metre of strips of different widths and thicknesses see Table 1 of the standard. tolerances refer to iS : 1852-1979 Rolling andcutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1730 (Part III)-1974 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and general engineering purposes: Part III Strip (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 173 l-l 97 1 DIMENSIONS FOR STEEL FLATS FOR STRUCTURAL AND GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES (First Revision)
Scope - Specifies dimensions, weights and sectional areas of hot-rolled steel flats for structural and general engineering purposes. This standard is mainly intended to cover flats made from steel conforming to IS : 226_1975*,IS : 961-1975t,IS : 1977-1975$and 1.
IS: 2062-1969*. 2. Designation - Flats designated by width (in mm) followedby the letters ISF and thickness (inmm). 3.
Dimensions (imm)
Width
10 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 180 200 250 300 400
Thickness
3. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
12 12 12 12 !2 12 12 12 12 12 M 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
60 60 60 60 60 60 60
*Specification for structural steel (standardquality) (@I revision). tSpecification for structural steel (high tensile) (second revision). $Specification for structural steel (ordinary quality) (second revision).
*Specilic~tion for structural steel (fusion welding quality) @rst revision).
377
SP : 21-1983
Note 1-Weight standard.
shall be calculated
on the basis that steel weights
7.85 g/cm 3. For details
regarding
weight see Table
1 of the
Note 2-Flats
above
160 mm in width will normally
be supplied
in round edges.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1731-1971 Dimensions for steel flats for structural and general engineering purposes (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1732- 197 1 DIMENSIONS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE STEEL BARS FOR STRUCTURAL AND GENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES
(First Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Specifies dimensions, sectional areas and weights of hot-rolled round and square steel bars for structural and general engineering purposes. This standard is mainly intended to cover bars made from steel conforming to IS : 226-1975*, IS : 961-1975t, IS : 1977-1975$, and IS : 2062-19754. It does not cover bars for rivets and threaded components. 2. Designation - Round and square bars are designated by letters ISRO and ISSQ respectively followed by diameter or side width (in mm). 3. 3.1 Dimensions Round Steel Bars Designation ISRO ISRO -. 5 6 Designation ISRO ISRO
steel
No. 1) Designation 16 ISRO 18 ISRO 20 ISRO ISRO 22 ISRO 25 ISRO 28 ISRO 32 36 ISRO Note - Unit weight
Squhe
Designation ISRO ISRO ISRO ISRO ISRO ISRO ISRO ISRO 40 45 50 56 63 71 80 90
Designation ISRO ISRO ISRO ISRO ISRO ISRO ISRO 100 110 125 140 160 180 200
= 7.85 g/cm.
Steel Bars Designation ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ 32 40 45 50 63 80 100
Designation Designation ISRO ISRO

quality)
8 10
(standard
12 14
CJftil
*Specification for structural

for structural
revision )
fsp=ification for structural steel (high tensile) (second revision).

*Specification revision). revision). steel (ordinary quality) (sew&
ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ ISSQ
5 6 8 10 12 16 20 25
$Speciccationfor structural steel (fusion welding quality) (first -~. -____ For detailed information, refer to IS : 1732-1971 Dimensions for round and square steel bars for structural and general engineering purposes (first revision).
378
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2678-1972 DIMENSIONS FOR WROUGHT AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS, DRAWN
ALUMINIUM TUBE
(First Revision)
Scope - Lays down the dimensions and tolerantes for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys in the form of drawn tube with parallel bore.
is 2. Note - This standard : 738-1977*. should be read in conjunction with
1.
3. Tolerances - For tolerancesonwall thicknesses and on outside or inside diameters of drawn tube, see Tables 2 and 3 of the standard.
Dimensions
Nominal Outside Dia (mm) 4.0 5.0 6.3 I 8.0 10.0 12.5 ) 16.0 20.0 25.0 ? 31.5 40.0 50.0 > 63.0 80.0 > 100 125 > 160 200 250 Nominal Wall Thickness
(mm>
0.50 0.50 0.50 0.80 0.W 0.80 1.60 2.00 3.15 6.3 8.0 0.63 0.63 0.63 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.00 2.50 4.00 8.00 10.0 0.80 0.80 0.80 1.25 1.25 1.25 2.50 3.15 5.00 10.0 12.5 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.60 1.60 1.60 3.15 4.00 6.3 12.5 16.0 1.25 1.25 2.00 2.00 2.00 4.00 5.00 8.0 1.60 1.60 2.50 2.50 2.50 5.00 6.3 10.0 2.00 2.00 3.15 3.15 3.15 6.3 8.0 12.5 4.00 4.00 8.00 10.0 5.0 5.0 10.0 12.5 6.3 12.5 2.50
Note-Sizes
other than standard
shall be as agreed to between
the manufacturer
and the purchaser.
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, drawn tube (for general engineering purposes) (second revision).
-For detailed information, refer to IS : 2678-1972 alloys, drawn tube (first revision).
Dimensions for wrought aluminium
__-..and aluminium
319
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3965-1981 DIMENSIONS FOR WROUGHT ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS, BAR, ROD AND SECTION
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Lays down the dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium alloys in the form of bar, rod and section. 2. Dimensions
2.3 Standard WidthqofSquareBars 6.4,7,8,9,
10,11,12,14,16,19,20,24,26,32,38,50,55,60, 76 or 90 mm. 2.4 Standard thi~he~ses width of sections: of nzgular sections and 1.2, 1.6, 2,
2.1 Standard Diameters of Rods - 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,14,16,18,20,22,25,28,32,40,45,50,56,63, 71,80,90, 100, 110, 125, 140 or 160 mm. 2.2 Standard Width Across Flats of Regular 10, 12,14, 17, 19,22,24, Sections - 6.4,7,8,9, 27, 30, 32, 36,41,46, 50,55 or 60 nim.
a) Thickness of regular sections -
2.5,3.2,4,5,6,8,10,12,16,20,25,32,40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 or 200 mm.
b) Width of sections -
12, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250 or 320 mm.
Note-For all tolerances, namely, dimensional tolerances of regular sections and solid bars, tolerances for concavity, convexity, straightness and twist. and angular tolerance, refer to 4 of thestandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3965-1981 alloys, bar, rod and section (first revision).
Dimensions for
wrought aluminium
and aluminium
380
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title Covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steel: IS : 814 IS : 814 (Part U-1974 Part I For welding products other than sheets (fourth revision) IS : 814 (Part II)-1974 Part II For welding sheets (fourth revision) Classification and coding of covered electrodes for metal arc welding IS : 815-1974 of structural steels (second revision) IS : 1278-1972 Filler rods for gas welding (secorul revision) IS : 4972-1%8 Resistance spot-welding electrodes IS : 6419-1971 Welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding of structural steel IS : 7280-1974 Bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels IS : 8363-1976 Bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of steels
Page
383 384 385 386 387 388 389 389
382
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 814 (PART I)-1974 COVERED ELECTRODES FOR METAL ARC WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART I FOR WELDING PRODUCTS OTHER THAN SHEETS
(Fourth Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 to 3) 1. Scope - Requirements for the following two groups of covered electrodes of sizes 3.15 mm and above for metal arc welding of structural steel products other than sheets. Group 1 Normal penetration and deeppenelration electrodes (tensile range 4105 10 N/mm2) Normal penetration hydrogencontrolled electrodes (tensile range 510 610 N/mm2) b) All weld impact test: 1) EXXX-411, 412, 413 Up to and including 41J - Requirement not fulfilled. Including and over 475 - Requirement fultilled. 2) EXXX-414, 4 15 Up to and including 23J not fulfilled. Including and over 27J fulfilled.
c) Transverse -4ensile
Group 2 -
Requirement Requirement Tensile
2. Sizes - Designated by diameter of core wire in mm size shall be 3.15, 4, 5, 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5. Length - 350 or 450 mm. 3. Tolerance On size,f0.05 mmfor electrodes below 8 mm size +0.05 and - 0.1 mm for electrodes 8 mm and over. On length, +3 mm. 4. Requirements
test -
strength -
4 lO- 5 10 N/mm2.
d) Transverse bend tesr -There shall be no crack or defect greater than 3 mm I\cross test specimen ard 1.6 mm along the length. e) Transverse impact test - Three charpy V-notch impact tests shall be carried out. Results assessed in accordance with 5.1 (b). f) Test for determining di$usible hydrogen content - Shall not exceed 10 ml per 100 gof deposited metal. 5.2 Tests for Deep Penetration Electrodes a) Transverse tensile test - Tensile strength, 410-510 N/mm2. b) Transverse bend test - There shall be no crack or defect greater than 3 mm across test specimen and 1.5 mm along the length. c) Transverse impact test - Result shall be as specified in 5.1(b). d) Butt weld penetration test -- Interpenetration and fusion shall be thieved. e) Fillet weld penetration test - Penetration shall be not less than 4 mm for weld made with 4 mm electrode.
5.3 Tests for Hydrogen Controlled Normal Penetration Electrodes for Welding Medium Tensile Steel
4.1 Contact end shall be bare and clean to a length of 20 to 30 mm. 4.2 Arc-striking end shall permit easy striking of arc.
4.3 HUX covering shall be uniform in outside diameter and in thickness and shall fuse or burn or both evenly.
Note - For penetration requirements for deep penetration electrodes, refer to 8 of the standard. 5.
Tests Requirements
5.1 Tests for normal penetrationelectrodes including hydrogencontrolled electrodes for welding mild steel. a) All-weld tensile test: 1) For electrodes for welding mild steel Tensile strength, 41 O-5 10 N/mm2 Yield stress, 330 N/mm2, Min 2) For electrodes for welding medium tensile steel Tensile strength, 510-610 N/mm2 Yield stress, 360 Nlmm2, Min 383
a) All weld tensile test - Shall comply with 5.1 (a). b) All weld impact test - Assessment for EXXX-5 11,5 12,5 13 shall be in accordance with 5.1 (b) (i) and EXXX-514, 515 in accordance with 5.1 (b) (ii).
SP : 21-1983
c) Transverse tensile test 510-610 N/mm*. d) Transverse 5.1 (d) bend test -
Tensile
strength
e) Transverse impact test - Assessment be in accordance with 5.1 (b).
shall
Shall comply with
f) Tests for determining d@sible hydrogen content - Shall not exceed 10 ml per 100 g of deposited metal.
Note I- 1J =0.102 kgf/m. lN/mm*=O.l02
kgf/mmz. Note 2-For classification of the electrodes, refer to IS : 815-1974 Classification and coding of covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steels (second revision). Note 3 -For mechanical properties of present metal for test pieces, refer to Appendix A of the stmdd. Note 4-For methods bf tests, refer to Appendices B to E of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 814 (Part Z)-1974 Specification for covered electrodes welding of structural steeLPart Z For welding products other than sheets (fourth revision).
formetal
arc
SUMMARY OF
IS : 814 (PART II)-1974 COVERED ELECTRODES FOR METAL ARC WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART II FOR WELDING SHEETS
(Fourth Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of following two groups of covered electrodes of sizes 1 to 3.15 mm for metal arc welding of structural steel sheets:
Group 1 Group 2 Normal penetration electrodes (tensile range 410-510 N/mm*) Normal penetration trolled el=trodes 510-610 N/mm*) hydrogen con(tensile range
4. 4.1
4.2
Requirements
Contact end shall be bare and clean to alength of 2oto3omm. A=-skirting end shall permit easy strikingof arc.
4.3 Flux covering shall be uniform in outside diameter and in thickness. 5.
Workability
2. Sizes millimetres. Size
Designated
by diameter of core wire in
5.1 Electrodes shall produce suitable penetration for welding of sheets in order to obtain good bead L appearance and Sound joints.
5.2 Both initial and subsequent duced easily. arcs shall be pro-
1 1
1.25 1.25
1.6 1.6
2 2
2.5 2.5
3.15 3.15
Dia of core wire, mm Length, mm
5.3 Electrodes shall be free from harmful weld defects, such as porosities, undercuts, overlaps, etc. 200 200 200 250 200 250 300 350 250 300 350 350 450 6.
Test Requirements
6.1
3.
Tolerance
On size On length
k0.05 mm, and

+_3 mm. 384
Parent Metal - Tensile strength 410-510 N/mm* for normal penetration electrodes including hydrogen controlled electrodes for welding mild steel, and 510-610 N/mm* for hydrogen controlled normal penetration electrodes for welding medium tensile steel.
SP : 21-1983
6.2 Tensile Test - Tensile strength shall not be less than 410 N/mm* in case of normal penetration electrcdes including hydrogen controlled electrodes for welding mild steel (Group 1) and 5 10 N/mm* incase of hydrogen controlled normal penetration electrodes for welding medium tensile steel sheets.
Note l--For classification of the electrodes, welding of structural steels (second revision). Note 2-For detailed requirements refer to IS
6.3 Guide Bend Test crack beyond 1.5 mm.
Test piece shall develop no
6.4 Workability Test - The sectioned surface shall be inspected for porosities, undercuts and overlaps near the starting and finishing ends of the weld run.
and coding of cohered electrodes for metal arc
: 815-1974 Classification
of tests, refer to 9 of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 814 (Part II)-1974 Specification for covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steel: Part II For welding sheets (fourth revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 815-1974 CLASSIFICATION AND CODING OF COVERED ELECTRODES FOR METAL ARC WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEELS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - A systemofclassificationand coding of covered electrodes for metal am welding of mild steel (430 to 510 N/mm*) and medium tensile steel (510 to 610 N/mm*) of welding quality. 2. Basis for Coding Coding shall consist of: No. 1 and 2)
5 Having a high content of iron oxides or

silicates or both and producing a heavy solid slag. 6 Having a high content of calcium carbonate and fluoride. 9 A covering of any other type not classified above. b) Second digit indicates welding position(s) which the electrode may be used: 0 F, H, V, D, 0 1 F,H,V,O 2 F,H 3 F 4 F, H (horizontal fillet) 9 Any other welding position c) Third digit conditions: 0 D+ 1 D+,A90 2 D-,A70 3 D-,A50 4 D+,A70 indicates welding in
4 a prefix letter (indicating method of manufac-
b)
ture of the electrode), a code number of six digits indicating performance characteristics and mechanical properties, and cating specific properties).
c) in some cases one or more suffix letters (indi-
3.
3.1
Classification
and Coding
current
Prefiv Letters
E RSolid extrusion Extruded with reinforcement
3.2
Code Number of Six Digits

a) Fhst digit indicates type of covering: 1 Having a high cellulose content. 2 Having a high content of titania and producing a fairly viscous slag. 3 Containing an appreciable amount of titania and producing a fluid slag. 4 Having a high content of oxides or silicates or both of iron and manganese and producing an inflated slag.
5 D+,A10 6 D_t,A70 7 Df,A50 9 Any other current condition.
4 Fourth and fifth digit -
Digits 4 1 (indicating tensile strength of 410-510 N/mm2 and minimum yield stress of 330 N/mm* and 51 (indicating tensile strengthof 5 10 - 610 N/mm* and minimum yield stress of 360 N/mm*). combination metal. in with impact value of deposited
e) Sixth digit indicates percentage elongation
385
SP : 21-1983
Caie No. Including 4th & 5th Digit 410 411 412 413 4 14 415 510 511 512 5 13 514 515 Note l-For Note 2-For
Minimum Elongation, Percent 20 22 24 24 24 18 18 20 20 20
Temperature for Minimum Impact Value of47 J, C +27 0
3.3
St.&x Letters H J KLPHydrogen controlled electrodes
Iron powder covering giving a metal recovery of 1 IO- 130 percent inclusive Iron powder covering giving recovery of 1301-150 percent Iron powder covering giving recovery of over 150 percent Deep penetration , a metal a metal
-20
-30 -40 +27 O
-20 -30 -40
use of the classification and method of marking the coding of electrodes, refer to 6 of the sfundard. important characteristics of six types of coverings, refer to Appendix A of the sfandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 815-1974 Classification arc welding of structural steels (second revision). SUMMARY OF
and coding of covered electrodes
for metal
IS : 1278-1972 FILLER
RODS FOR GAS WELDING

No. 2.2 less and 3. 1 and 2) Length - It shall be 500 or 1 000 mm for rods than 2.5 mm dia and 1 000 mm for rods 2.5 mm above. The tolerance on length shall be +5 mm.
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments Requirements of ferrous and nonferrous filler rods for gas welding made of the following materials supplied in cut lengths:
1.
Scope -
a) Structural steels, b) Austenitic stainless steels, c) Cast irons (excluding spheroidal graphite and malleable iron castings), d) Copper and copper alloys, e) Nickel and nickel alloys, 0 Aluminium and aluminium alloys, and g) Magnesium and magnesium alloys. .2. 2.1
Requirements
corro-
3.1 Shall be free from surface imperfections, sion products, grease, excessive oxide, etc.
3.2 Structural steel filler rods shall have a protective copper coating; copper content not exceeding 0.4 percent by weight.

Size
3.3
on Diameter h Other Gas Welding Filler Rods go5
Diameter mm ,
Tolerance
Aluminium, aluminium alloy and magnesium alloy filler rods shall be supplied in as-manufactured condition.
Cast Iron Filler Rods mm 1, 1.25, 1.6, 2, 2.5 fO.08 3.15, 4, 5, 6.3 8, 10, 12.5 Note l-For
Note 2-A
3.4 Incase of austenitic stainless,steel fillerrods, the inter-crystalline corrosion test may be conducted. The test piece shall show no sign of cracking.
+0.08
+0.05 -0.10
chemical composition requirements, refer lo Tables 2 to 8 of the standard. Guide for selection and use of gas welding rods is given in Appendix A of the standard.

revision).
refer to IS : 1278-1972 Specification for filler rods for gas welding (second
386
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4972- 1968 RESISTANCE

1. ScopeCode numbers (in metric units), dirnensional requirements, and physical and mechanical properties for a series of spot-welding electrodes, cap electrodes and shanks, mainly intended for resistance spot welding of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. This
standard covers electrodes and with Morse tapers. with standard IS0 tapers
SPOT-WELDING
ELECTRODES
3.1.2 Straight electrodes with tapered shanks - Pointed, dome, flat, offset, truncated cone and spherical types. Overall length range from 38 to 102mmfornominalsizes1,2and3and64to125mm, 76 to 12.5 mm and 89 to 125 mm for nominal sizes 4,9 and 10 respectively.
3.1.3 Electrode sameasgivenin3.1.2,. nose configurations - Types Availableinallsizes (1 to 10). Application
2.
Materials Recommended
Class Material
Conductivity Percent (that for Standard Annealed Copper) 85
Vickers Pyramid Hardness (HV) 90
Cadmium copper containing 0.5 to 1 percent cadmium

Chromium copper containing 0.5 to 0.8 percent chromium Cobalt, beryllium copper
Spot-welding of coated steels, aluminium and its alloys Spot-welding of steels other than covered under class II and III
Spot-welding of stainless and heat resisting alloys
II
80-85
110
III
45-50
180
3. Specification for Electrodes with Standard IS0 Tapers

3.1 Sizes and Dimensions The size of an electrode with taper engage-
3.1.4 Standard single - bend elecrrodes, coldformed from standard straight electrodes - Pointed, dome, flat, eccentric and truncated types. Overall length 64,70,83 and 83 for nominal sizes 5,6,7 and 8 respectively. 3.1.5
formed Standard double-bend electrodes, coldfrom standard straight electrodes - Types,
3.1.1
ment with dimensions
of electrode
shanks and
electrode holders is given Table 1.
overall length and sizes are same as given in 3.1.4.
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
OF ELECTRODE
SHANKS
AND ELECTRODE
HOLDERS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
Major Dia (mm) 13.0 16.0 20.0 25.0

13.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 31.5 40.0
Engage Dia (mm) 12.7

15.5 19.0 24.5 12.7 15.5 19.0 24.5 31.0 39.0
Cooling Hole Dia (mm) 7.0 8.5 10.5 13.5 7.0 8.5
10.5 13.5 14.0 16.0
Taper (Inclusive)
Load
For straight loading not over

1 500 kgf l/10 l/10 l/10 l/10 l/5 l/5
For eccentric loading For straight loading over

> 1 500 kgf
387
SP : 21-1983
3.1.6 Caps and adapter shanks Nominal sizes 1 to 3.
Types A to F.
10.0 mm) and (28.5 and 10.0 mm) for nominal sizes 1, 2 atid 3 respectively in case of pointed and dome types. 4.1.2 Straight electrode with tapered shanks Types same as given in 4.1.1. Overall length range 32 to 102 mm for sizes 1 and 2 and 38 to 102 mm for size 3. 4.1.3 Single-bend electrodes, cold-formed from standard straight electrodes - Pointed, dome, Hat, eccentric and truncated types. Overall length 64, 70 and 83 mm for nominal sizes 1, 2 and 3 respectively. 4.1.4 Double-bend electrodes; cold-formed from standard straight electrodes - Types, overall lengths and sizes are same as given in 4.1.3. 4.1.5 to F. Morse caps and adapter shanks Types A
Note 1 - For dimensions of socket gauges for shanks, refer to Tables 2 and 3 with Fig. 1 of the standard. Note 2 - For electrode designations and other dimensional details, refer to Tables 1 and 4 to 8 and Fig. 2 of rhe standard. 4. Specification Morse Tapers for Electrodes with Standard
4.1 Sizes and Dimensions - Nominal size 1, 2 and 3. Major dia 12.24, 15.87 and 22.22 mm for sizes 1,2 and 3 respectively. 4.1.1 Morse electrode nose conjigurations Pointed, dome, flat, offset, truncated cone and spherical type. Nose lengths (19.0 and 6.5 mm), (22.0 and
Note l-For dimensions electrode of shanks of electrodes, designations
refer to Fig. 3 and for taper ring and plug gauges, details, refer to Tables
refer to Table 9 of thestandard.
Note 2-For
and other dimensional
10 to 14 and Fig. 4 of the standard.
refer to IS : 4972-1968 Specification for resistance spot-welding electrodes.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6419-1971 WELDING RODS AND BARE ELECTRODES FOR GAS SHIELDED ARC WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
1. Scope - Requirements of solid filler rods and wires for welding structural steels by inert gas tungsten arc welding (TIG), gas metal arc welding (MIG) or COZ welding processes. The chemical composition of filler rods and wires is also specified. 2. 2.1 Dimensions Diameter Form Wire Wire and rod Rod
Note -
Dia 0.8 to 1.6 2.0 to 5.0 2.2 Length of Rods
Tolerance +O.Ol, +O.Ol, -0.04 -0.07 mm mm
and Tolerances
Diameter less than 2.5 mm 500 or 1 000 mm Diameter 2.5 mm and larger 1 000 mm. Diameter 2.2.1 Tolerance +5 mm.
(0.5), 0.6, (Oy, 0.9, 1.0. (1.2), (1.6), (2.0), 2.4, 2.5, (3.2) * 4.0, 5.0
Preferred sizes are given in parentheses.
2.1.1
Toierance Dia 0.5 to 0.6 Tolerance +O.Ol, -0.03 mm

of reels and reeling conditions,
3. Finish -Filler rods and wires shall have a smooth finish and be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter. The copper content of coated rod or wire expressed as a percentage of rod (or wire plus coating) shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight. 4. Classification -S-l, S-2, S-3, based on their chemical composition. S-4 and S-5
Note
l-For
requirements chemical
refer to 5 and 6 of the standard.
Note 2-For
composition
of filler rods and wires, refer to 9 and 10 (Table 4) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6419-1971 Specification for welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding of structural steel.
388
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7280-1974 BARE WIRE ELECTRODES FOR SUBMERGED ARC WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEELS
1. Scope - Requirements of solid filler wires for submerged arc welding of structural steels (28-50 kgf/mm* yield strength and 34-70 kgf/mm* ultimate tensile strength).
Note -This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the manufacture and selection of bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels.
2.
3. Conditions of Wires - Filler wires shall have I smooth finish and they shall be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter. Temper and surface conditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semi-automatic welding equipment. The copper content of the coated wire expressed as a percentage of the wire and the coating shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight. 4. Classification - AS-l, AS-l Si, AS-2, AS-2 Si, AS-2 MO, AS-2 Ni, AS-3, AS-3 MO, AS-3 MO Ni, AS-4, AS-4 MO, AS-6 and AS-6 MO based on their chemical composition.
2.1
The diameters of wires shall be 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.15, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3 and 8.0 mm. 2.2 Tolerance to.05 mm.
Note 1 -For
on the diameters
of wires shall be
requirements chemical
of reels for wires and reeling conditions, details,
Note 2-For
composition
refer to 9 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7280-1974 Specification for bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels.
SUMMARY OF
IS : 8363-1976 BARE WIRE ELECTRODES FOR ELECTROSLAG WELDING OF STEELS

1. Scope - Requirements of solid bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of carbon and low alloy steels.
Note - This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the manufacturer and selection of bare wire electrodes forelectroslag welding of carbon manganese and low alloy steels.
3.
2. 2.1
The diameters of wires shall be 2.0, 3.15, 4.0, 5.0 and 6.3 mm.
Tolerance
Conditions of Wires - Filler wires shall have smooth finish and they shall be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter. Temper and surface conditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semi-automatic welding equipment. The copper content of the coated wire expressed as a percentage of the wire and the coating shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight.
on dia on wires shall be +O -0.05 mm. 2.3 Ovality of wire shall not exceed 50 percentof tolerance on dia.
Note l-For requirements chemical of coils for wires and reeling conditions, details, refer to 9 of the standard.
2.2
4. Classification - ES-2, ES-2 Si, ES-3, ES-3 MO, ES-3 MO Ni, ES-4, ES-4 MO, ELS4, ELS-4 MO. ELS-2 MO and ELS-2 MO Cr based on their chemical composition.
Note 2-For
composition
For detailed information, welding of steels.
refer to IS : 8363-1976 Specification for bare wire electrodes for electroslag
389
SECTION
20
THREADED FASTENERS AND RIVETS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS Title
IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
: : : : : : : :
Page
393 393 394 395 3% 397 398 398 400 400 402 403 405 405
406
207-1964 451-1972 723-1972 724-1964 725-1961 730-1978 1120-1975 1363-1967
Gate and shutter hooks and eyes (revised) Technical supply conditions for wood screws (second revision) Steel countersunk head wire nails (second revision) Mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes
(revised)
Copper wire nails (revised) Hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing (second revision) Coach screws (first revision) Black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts (diameter 6 to 39 mm) and black hexagon screws (diameter 6 to 24 mm) (first revision) Slotted countersunk head screws (third revision) Slotted cheese head screws (diameter range 1.6 to 20 mm) (first
IS : 1365-1978 IS : 1366-1968 IS : 1929-1982 IS : 2016-1967 IS : 2155-1982 IS : 2389-1968 IS :, 2585-1968 IS : 2687-1975 IS : 2907-1964 IS : 2998-1982 IS : 3063-1972 IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
revision)
Hot forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 mm diameter)
(first revision)
Plain washers (first revision) Cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm diameter)
(first revision)
Precision hexagon bolts, screws, nuts and lock nuts (diameter range 1.6 to 5 mm) (first revision) Black square bolts and nuts (diameter range 6 to 39 mm) and black square screws) (diameter range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision) Cap nuts (first revision) Non-ferrous rivets (1.6 to 10 mm) Cold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to 16 mm diameter)
408 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 415 416 416 417 417 418 419 420 421 422 422 423 424 424 425 426
(first revision)
3121-1981 3468-1975 3757-1972 4762-1968 5369-1975 5372-1975 5373-1969 5374-1975 5624-1970 6113-1970 6610-1972 6623-1972 6639-1972 6649-1972 6733-1972 6736-1972 6739-1972 6760-1972 8633-1976 8412-1977 8869-1978 Single coil rectangular section spring washers for bolts, nuts and screws (first revision) Rigging screws and stretching screws (first revision) Pipe nuts first revision) High tensile friction grip bolts (j?rst revision) Worm drive hose clips for general purposes General requirements for plain washers and lock washers ifirst
revision)
Taper washers for channels (ISMC) (first revision) Square washers for wood fastenings Taper washers for I-beams (ISMB) (first revision) Foundation bolts Aluminium fasteners for building purposes Heavy washers for steel structures High tensile friction grip nuts Hexagon bolts for steel structures High tensile friction grip washers Wall and roofing nails Slotted raised countersunk head wood screws Slotted round head wood screws Slotted countersunk head wood screws Round washers with square hole for wood fastenings Slotted countersunk head bolts for steel structures Washers for corrugated sheet roofing
392
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY IS :
OF
207-1964 GATE AND SHUTTER
HOOKS AND EYES
(Revised)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for gate and shutter hooks and eyes which are commonly used on doors and windows forkeeping them in position when kept open. 2. Types Type 1 Type 2 3. Mild steel and hard-drawn brass hooks and eyes, and Cast brass hooks and plates. (in mm) 5. 4. No. 1) 75(4), 100(5), 125(6.5), 150(6.5), 3.2 Type 2 200@).
Note - Figures in brackets indicate diameter (Average diameter in case of cast brass hooks) of unthreaded shank.
Sizes and Dimensions
Tolerances For length up to size 250 For length for size 300 For average diameter of cast brass hooks Finish -
+2 mm +3 mm +0.5 mm
3.1 Type I - 65 (4.17), 75(4.52), 100(5.23), 125 (5.59), 150(5.59), 200(6.30), 250(6.30), 300(7.01).
Note-For detailed dimensions and shapes, refer to Tables
The articles shall be finished bright.
I and II, and Fig. I and 2 of the sfundard.
For detailed (revised).
information,
refer
to IS : 207-1964
Specification
for
gate and shutter hooks and eyes
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 451-1972 TECHNICAL SUPPLY CONDITIONS FOR WOOD SCREWS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope screws. Technical supply conditions for wood No. 1) Screw Designation Depth of firead, Min, 0% 0.86 0.96 1.04
1.14
2. Dimensions and Tolerances - Shall conform to those giveb in respective standards. 2.1 Depth of Threads - (Measured at a distance 1.5 to 2 times nominal diameter from the point) Depth of Threud, Screw Designation Min, 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 :; 0.23 0.25 0.30 0.33 0.41 0.46 0.51 0.56 0.61 0.66 393
12 14 16 18 20 24 28 32 2.2 Permissible tolerances wood screws shall be js17. 3. 4. 4.1 shall head with Finish -
1.35 1.55 1.75 in nominal.
length
of
Self colour condition.
Workmanship The screws shall be cleanly finished and the head be true and concentric with the shank. Slots in the shall be clear, straight, free from burrs and central regard to the head.
SP : 21-1983
4.2 The threaded portion of the screw shall be formed by progressive reduction of the root diameter to obtain a uniform taper. The screws shall be gimlet pointed and the included angle of the gimlet point shall be between 28C and 44C. The thread form throughout the length of the screw shall be such that it will give the maximum bite into the wood when the screw is
rotated and strong enough to prevent distortion of thread. 4.3 Threads shall be clear and well-defined. At the end of the threaded portion nearest to the head, the root of the thread shall runout to the nominal diameter with a distance not exceeding one-quarter of the length of the threaded portion.

revision).
refer to IS : 451-1972 Technical supply conditions for wood screws (second
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 723-1972 STEEL COUNTERSUNK
HEAD WIRE NAILS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements head wire nails. 2. Dimensions Dimensions Shank of steel countersunk No. 1 to 3) 40 50 to 60 80 90 100 125 to 150 200 to 250 +1.5 +2.1 +2.6 +3.1 f3.4 rt3.8 f4.4 1 percent of
and Tolerances
(in mm)
2.1
Length
20 20 15, 20, 25 25, 30 25, 30, 40, 50 40 50 60 60 80 100 90, 100, 125 100, 125, 150 150 200, 225 250 (in mm)
Diameter
1.25 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 2.24 2.5 2.8 3.15 3.55 4 4.5 5 6.3 8 10 2.2 Tolerances
Head Diameter
3.4 3.8 4 4.5 4 4.5 5 5.6 5.7 6.4 7.2 8.1 9 11.3 14.4 18
2.3 Bend of shank shall not exceed length.
2.4 Eccentricity and ovality of centre of nail head from axis of shank. a) Maximum 12 percent of shank diameter for nails with shank diameter 2 mm and above. b) Maximum 14 percent of shank diameter for nails with shank diameter below 2 mm. Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of r/w standard. 3. Designation - As an example, a countersunk head nail of size 4.00 mm and length 100 mm shall be designated as Nail 4 x 100 IS : 723. 4. Finish Shall be supplied plain finished.
a) On shank dia 1.25 to 2.24 2.5 2.8 to 10 b) On length 15 to 20 25 to 30
+0.04 +0.05 +0.06 fl fl.2
5. Test (Bend Test) - Test piece shall not break or develop crack when doubled over by pressure or hammer blows until internal radius equals diameter of test piece and sides are parallel.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 723-1972 Specification for steel countersunk head wire nails (second
revision).
394
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 724-1964 MILD STEEL AND BRASS CUP, RULER AND SQUARE HOOKS AND SCREW EYES
(Revised)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes. 2.1 No. 1) Screw eyes shall be of one type only.
2.
Types a) Shouldered cup hooks b) Shouldered ruler hooks c) Shouldered square hooks d) Plain cup hooks e) Plain ruler hooks f) Plain square hooks.
3. Designation - Shall be based on type, length, and screw designation No. of the fitting. For example, shouldered cup hook of length 25 mm and of screw designation No. 5 shall be designated as Shouldered cup hook 25xNo. 5. 4. 4.1 Dimensions Shouldered Cup, Ruler and Square Hooks.
Dimension D (mm)
T(mm)
Designation 15 x No. 3 2.39

4.7
20 x No. 4 2.74
6.5
25 x No. 5 3.10 8.0
35 x No. 7 40 x No. 8 50 x No. 10 50 x No. 12 3.81 4.17 4.88 5.59 12.5 14.0 17.5 20.0
4.2 Plain Cup and Ruler Hooks
Dimension / D (mm) T (mm) 25 x No. 5 3.10 8.0
Designation A 30 x No. 7 40 x No. 8 3.81 4.17

10.0 12.0
45 x No. 8 4.17
15.0
50 x No. 8 4.17
18.0
4.3 Dimension / D (mm) T (mm) 20x No. 4 2.74

8.0
Plain Square Hooks
25 x No. 5 3.10
10.0
30x No. 6 3.45

14.0
Designation A \ 40x No. 7 50x No. 9 60x No. 12 75 x No. 14 3.81 4.52 5.59 6.30
15.0 4.4 20.0 24.0 28.0 --
Screw Eyes
Dimension 16 x No. 0 D (-1 T (mm)

1.52
5.5
Designation A 20 x No. 1 20 x No. 2 25 x No. 3 1.78 2.08 2.39 6.5 7.5 9.5 Designation A 40 x No. 10 4.88
12.5 395
25 x No. 4 2.74 9.0
30 x No. 5 3.10 12.0
I D (mm) T (mm)
30 x No. 6 3.45
11.0
35 x No. 8 4.17
12.0
45 x No. 12 5.59
15.0
50 x No. 14 6.30
19.0
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - D - Nominal diameter of unthreaded shank T - Threaded length of shank Note 2 -For detailed dimensions. tolerances and shapes,
refer to Tables I to V, and Fig. 1 to 7 of thestandard. 5.
Finish -
Hooks
and eyes
shall
be finished
bright.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 724-1964 Specification for mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes (revised).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 725-1961 COPPER WIRE NAILS
(Revised)
1. Scope - Covers the following types of wire nails: a) Rose-head boat nails, square shank, point. b) Countersunk-head boat nails, square sharp square point. c) Countersunk-head boat nails, square round point, d) Wrought tacks e) Cut-lath nails (Cut tacks)
copper square shank, shank, 2.5 Type (e) 20 (1.8) 15 (1.8) 10 (1.8) 10 (1.6) 2.4 Type (d) 30 (2) 25 (2) 20 (2) 20 (1.6) 2.3 Type (c) 40 (2.5), 25 (2.5)
2. Dimensions (in mm) - Lengths of different types of copper nails are given in 2.1 to 2.5. Values given in brackets are the sizes of shank across flats except in case of Type (e) where it is diameter. 2.1 Type (a) 110 (5) 80 (4.5) 60 (3.15) 45 (2) 30 (2.5) 110 (4) 80 (4) 60 (2.5) 40 (3.15) 30 (2) 100 (5) 80 (3.15) 60 (2) 40 (2.5) 25 (5) 100 (4) 80 (2.5) 50 (3.15). 40 (2) 25_(2.5)
3. Finish - Shall be finished bright and free from burrs and sharp edges except at the points. In case of tinned copper nails, tin coating shall cover nails completely and uniformly.
100 (3.15) 70 (4) 50 (2.5) 35 (3.15) 25 (2)
90 70 50 35 25
(5) (3.15) (2) (2.5) (1.6)
90 70 45 35
(4) (2.5) (3.15) (2)
90 60 45 30
(3.15) (4) (2.5) (3.15)
2.2
Type (b) 125 (5) 70 (3.15) 20 (3.15) 100 (5) 60 (4) 100 (4) 60 (3.15) 100 (3.15) 90 (3.55) 50 (3.55) 50 (3.15) 80 (5) 40 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 30 (3.15) 70 (5) 25 (3.15)
Note l-Head diameter of side of square shall be 2.5 times the size of shank in case of types (a), (b) and (c) and shall be 3 times the size of shank in case of types (d) and (e) copper nails. _ Note 2-For detailed dimensions, approgmate count of copper nails and tolerances refer to 4 (Table 1) with Fig. 1 to 5 of thestundmj.
refer to IS : 7251961
Specification for copper wire nails (revised).
396
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 730-1978 HOOK BOLTS FOR CORRUGATED
SHEET -ROOFING
\
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements gated sheet roofing. 2. Types a) J-type hook bolts b) L-tvpe hook bolts c j U-t+ hook bolts 3. Dimensions (in mm) for hook bolts for corruNo. 1)
6. Designation --The hook bolts shall be designated by the type, size, length, inside width (in case of L and U-type bolts) and number of the standard. For example, U hook bolt of type II with square nut of size MlO, inside width 80 mm and length 180 mm shall be designated as U Bolt II MlOX 180N - 801s : 730. 7. 7.1 General Requirements Hook bolts and nuts shall be surface protected
Trpe
J-Type Hook Bolts (Types I and II) L-Type Hook Bolts
size (ml)
M6 M8 Ml0 Mlo
Inside Width
:42 16 50, 60, 70 80, 95 110 50, 60, 80 90 50,60, 80 90
Preferred Length
70 to 150 in steps of 10 70 to 200 in steps of 10 70 to 200 in steps of IO 120 to 200 in steps of 10 150 to 200 in steps of 10 180,19Q,2OQ, 225 150 to 200 in steps of 10 225 150 to 200 in steps of 10 225
U-Type Hook Bolts (Types I and II)
M8 Ml0
Note
l-All
types of hook bolts are with square nuts.
Note 2-For tolerances and detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard. Note 3-The screw threads on the hook bolts shall conform to tolerance class 8g as specified in IS : 4218 (Part IV)-1976*.
4. Grade - Black IS : 1367-1%7t.
grade
(B)
as specified
in.
galvanized,
coating. If bolts and nuts are hot-dip the requirement shall be in accordance w.ith IS : 5358-1969*.
with suitable
5. Mechanical Properties IS : 1367-19677.
Property class 4.6 of
7.2 The square nuts used with bolts shall conform to IS : 2585-1968f.
\
*ISO metric screw threads: Part IV Tolerancing systems (first revision ) . tTechnica1 supply conditions for threaded fasteners yirsr revision).
*Specification for hot-dip galvanized coating on fasteners. tspecification for black square bolts and nuts (diameter range 6 to 39 mm) and black square screws (diameter range 6 to 24 mm) f&t revision).
Note-In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, refer to IS : 1367-1967 Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners uirst revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 730-1978 Specification for hook baits for corrugated sheet roofing
(second revision). e
397
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1120-1975 COACH SCREWS * (First Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements of hexagon head coach screws (hexagon head wood screws).
2.
Dimensions
(in mm)
3. Designation - As an example, a hexagon head coach screw of screw No. 10, length 30 mm and made of steel, shall be designated as Csach Screw No. 10X 30 IS : 1120 Steel. Range of Preferred Length (see Note 1) 20 - 35 20-100 25 - 110 25-200 25-200 25-200
Size No. Screw Designation 10 14 : 28 32

Note l-Preferred 190,200 mm.
Note 2-Threaded NoteJ-For Note 4-For
Diameter of Unthreaded Shank A Nominal Min Max 4.88 6.33 7.72 9.86 11.28 12.70
30,35,40,45,
5.00 6.43 7.85 9.98 11.40 12.83

50, 55,60,65,70,75,
4.72 6.05 7.47 9.00 11.02 12.45
lengths-20,25,
80, 85,90, 100, 110,120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180,
portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to two-thirds times the total length of the screw.
detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the standard tolerances, refer to 3 (Fig. 1) of the standard.
Note-In regard to the requirements not covered in thestundurd, refer to IS : 451-1972 Technical supply conditions for wood screws (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1120-1975 Specification for coach screws (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1363-1967 BLACK HEXAGON BOLTS, NUTS AND LOCK NUTS (DIAMETER 6 TO 39 mm) AND BLACK HEXAGON SCREWS (DIAMETER 6T0 24 mm)
(First Revision)
(With Amendment No. 1) 1. Scope - Requirements of black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts in the diameter range 6 to 39 mm and black hexagon screws in the diameter range 6 to 24 mm. 2.
2.1 Requirements
and screws and class 4 for nuts and lock nuts as specified in IS : 1367-1967*. 2.2 Grade Black Grade B of IS : 1367-1967*.
*Technical
sup&$)conditions for threaded fasteners yirst
Mechanical Properties -
Class 416 for bolts

398
revision).
SP : 21-1983
3.
Designation
- As shown in rhe following examples:
Fastener
Bolt with a nut and a lock nut Bolt with a nut Bolt only Screw Nut Lock nut Double chamfered nut
Size
Ml6 Ml6 Ml6 Ml6 Ml6 Ml6 Ml6
Length
70 70 .70 -
Designation
HexBoltM16 x 70NL IS : 1363 IS : 1363 IS : 1363 IS : 1363 IS : 1363 IS : 1363 IS : 1363
Hex Bolt M 16 x 70 N Hex Bolt M 16 x 70 Hex Screw M 16 x 70 Hex Nut M 16 Hex Lock Nut M 16 - Hex Nut DC M 16
4. Dimensions screws:
(in mm) -
Black hexagon bolts and
Size M6 W7)
M8 Ml0 Ml2 0414) Ml6 0418) M20 (M22) M24 (~27) M30 W33) M36 (M39)
Nominal
Diameter
Maximum Diameter 6.48 7.58 8.9 10.9 13.1 15.1 17.1 19.1 21.3 23.3 25.3 28.3 31.3 34.6 37.6 40.6
Minimum Diameter 5.7 6.64 7.64 9.64 11.57 13.57 15.57 17.57 19.48 21.48 23.48 26.48 29.48 32.38 35.38 38.38
Length of Bolts *
z-100 30-100 30-120 35-150 40-300 45-300 50-300 55-300 60-400 65-400 7 O-400 80-400 90-400 95-400 110-400 110-400
Length of Screws?
10-40 10-40 12-50 16-60 20-80 25-80 25-80 40-80 45-80 50-80 55-80 -
6 7 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 27 30 33 36 39
(28), 30, (32), 35, (38), 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, (95), 100, 110, 120, Note l-Preferred lengths for bolts-25, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380and400. Note 2-Preferred and 80. Note 3-Sizes Note 4-For lengths for screws-10, (1 l), 12, 14, 16, (18), 20, (22). 25, (28). 30, (32), 35, (38), 40,45, 50, 55,60, 65, 70. 75
shown in brackets detailed dimensions, lengths lengths ---
in 4, Notes 1 and 2 are of second preference. refer to Tables 2 and 3 of the standard.
* Kange of preferred
_---__-_
i Rangeof preferred
for bolts. for screws.
___._____--kTdz%formation, refer to IS : 1363-1967 Specification for black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts (diameter 6 to 39 mm) and black hexagon screws (diameter 6 to 24 mm) (first revision).
._ --.
399
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 13651978 SLOTTED COUNTERSUNK (Third Revision)

1. Scope - Requirements for slotted countersunk head screws in the diameter range 1 to 20 mm.
2. 4. Nominal Size Ml Ml.2 (Ml .4) Ml.6 (Ml .8) M2 (M2.2) M2.5 E3.5) E4.5) Nom 1.9 2.3 2.6 3.0 Z.;: 4:2 4.7 5.6 6.5 7.5 8.3 9.2 11 14.5 18 22 25 29 33 36
HEAD SCREWS
Dimensions (in mm)

Diameter MaX 1.90 2.30 2.60 3.00 3.40 3.80 4.20 4.70 65.E 7150 8.30 9.20 11.0 14.5 18.00 22.00 25.00 29.00 33.00 36.00 Min 1.76 2.16 2.46 2.75 3.10 3.50 3.90 4.40 5.30 6.14 7.19 7.94 8.84 10.57 14.07 17.57 21.48 24.48 28.48 32.38 35.38 Lengrh
Requirements
Mechanical Properties - Shall conform to the property class 4.8 as specified in IS : 1367 -1967*. Where brass or aluminium alloy is used, it shall have minimum tensile strength of 300 MPa.
2.1
2.2
Grade -Precision 1967*.
Grade
(P) of IS : 1367-
3. Designation - Shall be designated by name, nominal size, length, the number of this standard and the property class. For example, a slotted countersunk head screw of size M4, length 10 mm and of property class 4.8 shall be designated as: Cotintersunk Screw M4x 10 IS : 1365 -4.8
Technical supply
revision).
conditions
for threaded
fasteners
yirsr
E M8 Ml0 Ml2 (M14) Ml6 (Ml8) M20 Note 1 - Sizes shown in the parentheses
preference.
l-10 1-12 1-14 2-16 2-18 2.5-20 2.5-22 3-25 4-30 4-35 5-40 7-45 7-50 7-55 9-80 11-100 14-120 18- 140 22- 160 28- 180 28-200
are of second
refer to IS : 1365-1978 Specification for slotted countersunk
head screws (third
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1366-1968 SLOTTED CHEESE HEAD SCREWS (DIAMETER RANGE 1.6 to 20 mm)
(First Revision)
(With Amendment No. 1) conform to Classes 4.6, 4.8, 6.6 or 8.8 of IS : 13671967*. When brass or aluminium alloy is used for manufacture, it shall have minimum tensile strength of 30 kgf/mmZ .
1.
Scope - Requirements of slotted cheese head screws in the diameter range 1.6 to 20 mm for both coarse and fine pitches of screw threads specified in IS : 42181967*.
2.
Requirements
Mechanical properties Steel screws shall
2.2
Grade 1967*.
Precision
Grade
(P) of IS : 1367-
2.1
*IS0 metric screw threads.
*Technical revision).
supply
conditions
for threaded
fasteners
first
400
SP : 21-1983
3.
Types Type A Type B -
Screws that are fully threaded Screws that are partially threaded, thread length being not less than minimum specified.
10 mm, length 30 mmand of property class 4.8 shall be designated as Slotted Cheese Head Screw AM 10x30 - IS : 1366-4.8. 4.1 When brass or aluminium alloy is used for the manufacture, the words brass or aluminium shall replace the property class designation 4.8 in the designation given in 4. 5. Dimensions Minimum Diameter 1.46 2.06 1.86 2.36 2.87 3.32 4.32 3.82 4.82 5.82 7.78 9.78 11.73 13.73 15.73 17.73 19.67 (in mm) Length (Types A and B)* 316 Length (Type A)? 3445 6 8 lo8 lo10 12 16 20 25 25 40 50 16 16 18 18 20 22 25 22 25 30 35 40 50 55 60 70 75
4. Designation - As an example, a slotted cheese head screw of Type A and having nominal diameter Size Nominal Diameter 1.6 2 2.2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Maximum Diameter 1.6 2.2 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Ml.6 F$2.2) M2.5 M3 (M3.5) Z4.5) M5 M6 MS, M8x1 MlO, MlOx 1.25 M12, M12xM1.25 M14, (M14x 1.5) M16, M16x 1.5 (M18), (M18X 1.5) M20, M20x 1.5
4 4- - 20 22 5 - 25 g6: 30 35 lo8 - 45 40 lo10 12 16 20 25 25 40 50 50 80 90 100 105 110 110 110 110
Note I-Preferred lengths-3,4, 5, 6, (7), 8, (9), 10, (ll), 12, 14, 16, (W, 20, (22), 25, (28), 30, (32), 35, (3% 40,45.50,55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, (95). 100, (105), 110.
Note Z-Sizes
shown in brackets in 5 and Note 1 are of second preference.
detailed dimensions, refer tb Tables 1 and 2 of the standard. *Range of preferred lengths for Types A and B screws. tRange of preferred lengths for Type A screws.
Note J-For
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1366-1968 Specification for slotted cheese head screws (diameter range 1.6 to 20 mm) (first revision).
401
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1929-1982 HOT FORGED STEEL RIVETS FOR HOT CLOSING (12 TO 36 mm DIAMETER)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of hot forged solid mild steel and high tensile steel rivets (snap head, flat countersunk head and flat head rivets) for hot closing in the diameter range 12 to 36 mm intended for general engineering purposes. 2. Dimensions
Note l-Thenominaldiameters14,18,22,27and33mm are of second preference. Note 2 - Referred lengths - 28,30,32,35,38,40,45,50, 55,60,65,70,75,80,85,90,95,100,105,110,115,120,125, 130,135, 140, 145, 150,155,160,165,170,175,180,185,190, 200, 205, 210, 215, 220 and 225 mm.
2.1 Range of Preferred Length Diameter Combinations and Diameter of Rivet Holes: Diameter mm 12 14 16 18, 20 22 24 27 3330 36
Note ~-For
3. Tolerances - On length, + 1.5, 0 mm for diameter up to 16 mm and +3 .O, 0 mm for diameter above 16 mm. 4. Tests 4.1 Shear Test - Shear strength shall not be less than 260 MPa for mild steel rivets and 280 MPa for high tensile rivets. 4.2 Head Soundness Test - Rivets shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the fillet between head and shank.
5.
Range of Preferred Lengths (see Note 2) mm 28-80 32-95 35-110 40- 120 45-125 50-140 55- 160 65-180 70- 200 85-225 95-225
Diameter of Rivet Hole mm 13.5 15.5 17.5 19.5 21.5 23.5 25.5 29 :52 38
Designation - As an example, a high tensile steel snap head rivet of 16 mm diameter having a length of 70 mm shall be designated as Snap Head Rivet 16 X 70HTIS : 1929.Incaseofmildsteelrivet,the symbol I-II shall not be included in designation.
detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of
rhe srundurd.
Note 2-For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks&rivets, of tests, refer to IS : 10102-1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
tolerances,methods
For detailed information, refer to IS : 19~9-1982 Specification for hot forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 mm diarneter) (first revision).
402
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2016-1967 PLAIN
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements followine tvnes: for plain washers of the
WASHERS
(First Revision)
No. 1 to 4) Size (Diameter External Diameter 44 50 56 60 66 72 78 85 92 98 105 110 115 120 125 135 140 145 160 165 175 180 185 200 210 220 230 240 250 Ihickness For Bolt1 Screw Size
4 Machined
washers, for precision and semiprecision grade of general purpose bolts and screws, in diameter range 1.7 to 155 mm.
b) Punched
washers, Type A, for black grade general purpose bolts and screws, in diameter range 1.8 to 52 mm.
cl Punched washers,
2. Requirements
Type B, for slotted head screws, in diameter range 7.8 to 22 mm.
2.1 Shall be of steel, brass, aluminium specified material.
or any other
2.2 The washers shall be free from cracks, burrs, pits and other defects. The holes shall be reasonably concentric with the outer periphery. 3. Designation - A washer shall be designated by name, type, size, number of rhe standard and material. For example, a punched washer, Type B of size 14 mm made of brass shall be designated as Punched Washer B 14 IS : 2016 - Brass. 4. 4.1 Dimensions Size (Diameter of Hole) 1.7 (2) (E) 2.7 (33:72) (Z) 5.3 $:I) ld.5 (::) (S) (in mm) External Diameter 4 5 5 6 6.5 7 8 9 10 10 12.5 14 17 21 24 28 30 34 37 39 Thickness For Bolt1 Screw Size Ml.6 (Ml .8) (M?2) M2.5 M3 (M3.5) (My5) M5 (E) M8 Ml0 Ml2 (M14) Ml6 (M18) M20 (M22) 403 Machined Washers
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1 1 1.6 1.6 _ 1.6 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 14 14 14 14 16 16 16 18 18
M24 (~27) M30 (M33) M36 (M39) M42 (M45) M48 (M52) M56 (M60) M64 (M68) M72 (M76) M80 (M85) M90 (M95) Ml00 (M105) Ml10 (Ml 15) (M120) Ml25 (M 130) Ml40 (M150)
4.2 Punched Washers, Type A, for Hexagonal Bolts and Screws Size (Diameter of Hole) 1.8 (2.1) (22::) 2.9 3.4 (4) 4.5 (5) 5.5 6.6 Erternal Diameter 4 5 5 6 6.5 7 8 9 10 10 12.5 Thickness For Bolt/ Screw Size Ml.6 (Ml 8) (M2T2) M2.5 M3 (M3.5) $45) M5 M6
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1 1 1.6
SP : 21-1983
(Diameter
of Hole)
External Diameter 14 17 21 24 28 30 34 37 39 44 50 56 60 66 72 78 85 92
Thickness
For Bolt1 Screw Size (M7) M8
(7.6) 9 11 (:d, (ii) (% & (3363) ($ (ii) 52
1.6 1.6 2 2.5 2.5 3.15 3.15 3.15 3.15 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 8 8

Type B, for
Ml0 Ml2 (M14) Ml6 (Ml81 M20 (M22) M24 (M27) M30 (M33) M36 (M39) M42 (M45) M48
Round and
(Diameter of Hole) 4.5 (5) 5.5 n:6, 9
Size
External Diameter
Thickness
For Bolt1 Screw Size
11 (E) 18
(20)
22
Note 1 -
8 9 9.5 11 13 14 18 20 24 27 30 33
0.8 0.8 1 1.6 1.6 1.6 2 2.5 2.5 3.15 3.15 3.15
(My5) M5 (E) I!!! Ml2 (M14) Ml6 (M18) M20
Sizes in brackets are of second preference.
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions of machined washers, refer to Table 1 of the standard. Note 3 -For other dimensional requirements for punched washers, refer to Tables 2 and 3 of IS : 5369-1975*.
4.3 Punched Washers, Cheese Head Screws Size (Diameter of Hole) 1.8 (2.1) n:d, 2.9 3.4 (4) External Diameter 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 5 6 7
Thickness
For Bolt1 Screw Size
Tolerances - For tolerances on diameters, thickness, concentricity, permissible deviations for parallelism and flatness for machined and punched washers, refer to precision and ordinary washers respectively as specified in IS : 5369-1975*.
5.
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5
Ml.6 (Ml .8) (M2) M2.5
6. Finish - Plain washers shall be supplied in natural finish. At the request of purchasers, washers may be phosphate coated, nickel plated, tinned, galvanized, copper plated, cadmium plated, etc.
*Generalrequirements revision ). for plain washers and lock washers (firer
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2016-1967 Specification for plain washers (first revision).
404
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2155-1982 COLD FORGED SOLID STEEL RIVETS FOR HOT CLOSING (6 TO 16 mm DIAMETER)
(First Revision)
Requirements of cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing in the diameter range 6 to 16 mm, intended for general engineering purposes. 2.
1. Scope -
Note 2 - Preferred lengths - 12, 14, 16, l&20,22,24,26, 28,30,32,35,38,40,42,45,48,50,55,60,65,70,75,80,85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110 mm.
Dimensions
3.
2.1 Range of Preferred Length-Diameter Combinations and Diameter of Rivet Holes: Diameter mm 6 8 10 12 14 16 Note 1 ence .
Note ~-For
Tolerances -On length, +0.5, 0 mm for diameter up to 10 mm and 1 .O, 0 mm for diameter above 10 mm.
Tests Shear strength shall not be less
Range of Preferred Lengths (see Note 2) mm 12-55 14-70 18-85 20-100 22-110 24-110
Diameter of Rivet Hole mm 6.3 8.4 10.5 13 15 17
4.
4.1
Shear Test than 260 MPa.
4.2 Heat Soundness Test - Rivets shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of marking at the fillet between head and shank.
5.
The nbminal diameter 14 mm is of second prefer-
Designation - As an example, a snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter having a length of 30 mm shall be designated as Snap Head Rivet 6 X 30 IS : 2155.
detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of thestandard.
general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets, tolerances, methods of tests, refer to IS : 10102-1982Technical supply conditions for rivets.
Note 2-For
For detailed information, refer to IS : 215.5-1982 Specification for co/d forged closing (6 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision).
solid steel rivets for hot
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2389-1968 PRECISION HEXAGON BOLTS, SCREWS NUTS AND LOCK NUTS (DIAMETER RANGE 1.6 TO 5 mm)
(First Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) 1967 in respect of steel. When copper, brass, aluminium, aluminium alloy or phosphor-bronze is used in manufacture, material shall have minimum tensile strength of 30 kgf/mm*.
1. Scope - Requirements for precision hexagon bolts, screws, nuts and lock nuts in the diameter range 1.6 to 5 mm.
2.
Requirements
Properties - Shall conform to classes specified in IS : 1367405
2.2
Grade - Precision IS : 1367-1%7*.

revision).
grade
(P)
specified
in
2.1 Mechanical any of property
*Technical- supply conditions for threaded fasteners (+st
SP : 21-1983
3.
Designation Fastener Bolt Screw Nut Lock Nut -__

Note -
Size M4 M4 M4 M4
Length (mm) 20 20 ------_
Property Class 4.6 4.6 4 4

the
Designation Hex Hex Hex Hex Bolt M4~20 - IS : 2389 - 4.6 Screw M4 x 20 - IS : 2389 - 4.6 Nut M4 - IS : 2389 - 4 Lock Nut M4 - IS : 2389 - 4
When copper, brass, etc, are used for manufacture, material Fhall replace property class designations 4, 4.6, etc.
4.
Dimensions Size
(in mm) Nominal Diameter 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
lengths for bolts--12,
Maximum Diameter 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Minimum Diameter 1.46 1.66 2.06 1.86 2.36 3.32 2.86 3.82 4.32 4.82
Ml.6 (M1.8) (M?2) M2.5 (MM335)
(My5) M5
Note l-Preferred
Nominal Thickness of Bolt Head 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.7 2 2.5 2.8 3 3.5
Length of Bolt* 12-16 12-16 12-16 12,20 .14-25 16-28 18-40 18-70 22-75 22-75
Length of Screw t 3-12 3-14 3-16 3-20 3-25 4-28 440 5-70 5-75 8-75
14, 16, (18), 20, (22), 25, (28), 30, (32), 35, (38), 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, and 75. 5,6, (7), 8, (9), 10, (1 l), 12, 14, 16, (18). 20, (22), 25, (28), 30, (32), 35, (38), 40,45,
lengths for screws-3,4, Note Z-Preferred 50,55, 60, 65, 70, and 75.
Note 3-Sizes
Note 4-For
shown in brackets detailed dimensions,
in 4, Note 1 and Note 2 are of second preference. refer to Table 2 of rhe standard. preferred lengths are to be treated as screws).
*Range of preferred tR&nge of preferred
lengths for bolts (bolts with lengths less than the minimum lengths for screws.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2389-1968 Specification for precision hexagon bolts, screws, nuts and lock nuts (diameter range I.6 to 5 mm) (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2585-1968 BLACK SQUARE BOLTS AND NUTS (DIAMETER RANGE 6 TO39 mm) AND BLACK SQUARE SCREWS (DIAMETER RANGE 6T0 24 mm)
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for black square bolts and nuts in the diameter range 6 to 39 mm and black square screws in the diameter range 6 to 24 mm. 2. 2.1 Requirements Mechanical Properties Shall conform to 406 Class 4.6 for bolts and screws and Class 4 for nuts of IS : 1367-1967. 2.2 Grade - Black grade B as specified in iS : 1367-1967*. -__---_ *Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (first revisiun).
SP : 21-1983
3.
Designation
Fastener
Square Square Square Square Square bolt with square nut bolt only screw nut bolt with hexagon nut
Thread Size
Ml0 Ml0 Ml0 Ml0 Ml0
Length (mm)
30 30 30 30 Square Square Square Square Square
Designation
bolt MlOx30N - IS : 2585 bolt MlOx30 - IS : 2585 screw MlOx30 - IS : 2585 nut Ml0 - IS : 2585 bolt MlOx30HN - IS : 2585
3.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Size
Nominal Diameter
6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 27 30 33 36 39
Maximum Diameter
6.48 8.9 10.9 13.1 15.1 17.1 19.1 21.5 23.3 25.3 28.3 31.3 34.6 37.6 40.6
Minimum Diameter
5.7 7.64 9.64 11.57 13.57 15.57 17.57 19.48 21.48 23.48 26.48 29.48 32.38 35.38 38.38
Thickness of Head wcwzinal)

4 5.5 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 17 19 21 23 25
Length of Bolt*
25-100 30-120 35-150 40-300 45-300 50-300 55-300 60-400 65-400 70400 80-400 90400 100400 110-400 110-400
Length of Screw t
16-40 16-50 16-60 2080 25-80 25-80 40-80 45-80 50-80 55-80 -
M6 M8 Ml0 Ml2 (Ml41 Ml6 (Ml81 M20 (MW M24 (~27) M30 (M33) M36 (MW
Note I-Preferred lengths for bolts-S, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 13% 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380, and400.
Note 2-Preferred Note 3-Sizes Note 4-For
lengths for screws-
16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, and 80.
shown in brackets are of second preference. detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 2 and 3 of the sfandurd.
*Range of preferred lengths for bolts (bolts with lengths less than the minimum preferred lengths are to be treated as screws). tRange of preferred lengths for screws.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2.5851968 Specification for black square bolts and nuts (diameter range 6 to 39 mm) and black square screws (diameter range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision).
407
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2687-1975 CAP NUTS
(First Revision)
1. Scape - Requirements ter range 6 to 36 mm. 2. Requirements grade (P) specified in for cap nuts in the diameSize I------Nom Ml6 24 (M18) 27 M20 30 (M22) 31 36 M24 (M27) 41 M30 46 M36 55
r
-AMaU 24 27 30 32 36 41 46 55 -., Min 23.67 26.67 29.67 31.61 35.38 40.38 45.38 54.38 e, Min 7hickness, NGVl 26.75 30.14 33.53 35.72 39.98 45.63 51.28 61.31 20 22 25 28 30 32 34 44
2.1 Grade - Precision IS : 1367-1967*.
2.2 Mechanical Properties - Property class 6 for steel cap nuts sizes up to M 30 and Class 4 for sizes above M 30 as specified in Table 8 of IS : 1367 1967*. Brass or aluminium used for manufacture shall have ultimate tensile strength not less than 300 MPa (1 MPa=0.102 kgf/mmz). 3. Dimensions Size M6 M8 Mlb Ml2 Ml4 /_-/L_-, Nom 10 13 17 19 22
supply
Note 1 - Sizes given in brackets are of second preference. Note 2 --s =distance between parallel sides of hexagonal Note 3 standard.
(in mm) s Max 10 13 17 19 22

conditions
Min 9.78 12.73 16.73 18.67 21.67
e, Min Thickness, NOm 11.05 14.38 1; 18.9 14 21.1 16 24.49 18

fasteners @rsf
nut, and e =distance between extreme points of hexagon. For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
4. Designation - Shall be designated by the name, size and number of the standard. For example, a cap nut of size Ml0 shall be designated as Cap Nut Ml0 IS : 2687. 4.1 When brass or aluminium is used for manufacture the word Brass or Aluminium shall come at the end of designation.
*Technical revision ).
for threaded
refer to IS : 2687-1975 Specification for cap nuts (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 29074964
NON-FERROUS
3.
RIVETS (1.6 to 10 mm)

Dimensions (in mm) Diameter Corn; Lerlgth (see Note) IO-50 12-55 14-70 18-70
1. Scope - Requirements of copper, tinned copper, brass and aluminium rivets of sizes 10 mm and below, intended for general purposes. This does not cover, rivets for aircraft or ship building purposes. 2. Freedom from Defects -The rivets shall be cleanly finished with heads concentric with the shanks and shall be free from imperfections. The ends of rivets shall be square, cleanly sheared and free from rag or burr. The tinning of tinned rivets shall be uniform and be free from spots, pin holes, cracks, stains and blisters. The tinning shall adhere firmly and be non-porous. It shall not peel off. They shall be finished smooth and bright all over. 408
3.1 Range of Preferred Lengths bination Nominal Diameter 1.6 2 2.5 3 4 Length (see Note) 5-10 6-12 6-16 6-35 8-45 Nominal Diameter 5 6 8 10
Note - Preferred lengths - 5,6,7,8,9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 35,40,45, 50, 55, 60,65, and 70.
SP : 21-1983
3.2 a) b) c) d)
Rivet Heads Snap head Flat countersunk Flat countersunk Flat head
Note 1 -
On dia 8 and 10 D 1.75 d 2d 2d 2d H 0.6 d 0.29 d 0.5 d 0.25 d.
+o. 10 -0.20mm
head 120 head 90
4.2
Length -
+ 1.5 mm inclination of the head sh&l not
4.3 The-maximum exceed 2.
D=diameter of rivet head, G=height of rivet head, and D=nominal diameter of rivet. Fig. 1 to
Note - For tolerances on dimensions of heads of various types of rivets, refer to Tables 2 to 4 of the standard. 5. Designation - As an example, a snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter, having a length of 30 mm and made of copper, shall be designated as Snap Head Rivet 6x30 IS : 2907 Copper.
Note 2 - For shapes of these types of rivet heads,see 4 of rhe standard.
4.
Tolerances
Shank Diameter On dia 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3 and 4 Ondia5 and6 +0.05 mm -0.10 +o.os mm -0.15
4.1
6.
Tests
6.1
Flattening Test - Shall not crack on cold Rattening to twice diameter. rivets (1.6 to 10 mm).
refer to IS : 2907-1964 Specification for non-ferrous
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2998-1982 COLD FORGED STEEL RIVETS FOR COLD CLOSING (1 TO 16 mm DIAMETER)
(First Revision)
Scope - Requirements of cold forged rivets, for cold closing in the diameter range 1 to 16 mm, intended for general engineering pUrp0SeS. 1. 2. Material a) Grade I 197g*. b) Grade 2 1979t. 3. Steel Class 1A of IS ; 1875Diameter mm 1.4 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 8 II) 12 14 16 Range of Preferred
Lengths (see Note 2) :-m* 5- 10

6- 12 6- 16 6-35 7-40 S-45 10-45 12-55 14-65 14-70 18-85 20- 100 22-110 24-110
Steel lOC4 of IS : 1570 (Part II)-
Dimensions
Diameter of Rivet Hole mm 1.45 1.65 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 ::32 6.3 s:4 10.5 13 15 17
3.1
Range of Preferred Length-Diameter Combinations and Diameter of Rivet Holes Diameter mm 1 1.2 Range of Preferred Lengths (see Note 2) mm 3-6, 4-7 Diameter of Rivet Hole mm 1.05 1.25
*Specification for carbon steel billets, blooms, slabs and bars for forgings (fourth revision). tSchedules for wrought steels: Part II Carbon steels (unalloyed steels) (jut revision).
Note 1 - The mminal diameters 1.4,3.5,7 and 14 mm are of second preference. Note 2 - Preferred lengths - 3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 10, 12, 14, 16,1&u), 22,24,26,28,30,32,35,38,40,42,45,48,50,55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, and 110 mm.
409
SP : 21-1983
4. Tolerances - On length, +OS, 0 mm for diameter up to 10 mm and + 1 .O, 0 mm for diameter above 10 mm. 5. Tests
56 to 78 HRB (100 to 139 VPN) for Grade 2. 5.3 Head Soundness Test - Rivets shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the fillet between head and shank. 6. Designation - As an example, a countersunk head rivet, with a countersunk angle of 90, diameter 4 mm, length 24 mm and made from material Gradz 2 shall be designated as Countersunk Head (90) Rivet 4X24 Grade 2 IS : 2998.
5.1 Shear Test - Minimum shear strength shall be 230 MPa for Grade 1 and 200 MPa for Grade 2. 5.2 Hardness Test - Hardness on the head of rivet shall be 48 to 73 HRB (91 to 127 VPN) for Grade 1 and
Note l-For
Note I-For
detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.
general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets, tolerances, refer to IS : 10102-1982 Technical supply conditions of rivets.
Note 3-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1500-1968Method for Brine11hardness test for steel (first revision) and IS : 10102-1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2998-1982 (I to 16 mm diameter) (first revision).
Specification for cold forged steel rivets for cold closing
SCMMAHY
OF
IS : 3063-1972 SINGLE COIL RECTANGULAR SECTION WASHERS FOR BOLTS, NUTS AND SCREWS
SPRING
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements lar section spring washers 100 mm. 2. Types Type A Type B 3. Dimensions Spring washers with bent ends, and Spring washers with flat ends. (in mm) Tolerance on Internal Diameter (+) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.8 External Diameter, MCU Thickness (With Amendment No. 1) NoVn internal for single coil rectanguSize Diameter in the size range 2 to Tolerance on Internal Diameter (+) 0.8 0.8 0.8 1 1 1 1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 External Diameter, Max 7Xckness
Nom Internal Size Diameter
2 2.2 2.5 :3.5) 4 5 ;, 8 10 12
2.1 2.3 2.6 3.1 3.6 4.1 5.1 7.1 6.1 8.2 10.2 12.2
4.4 4.9 5.1 6.2 6.7 7.6 9.2 11.8 12.8 14.8 18.1 21.1
0.5 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.2 1.6 1.6 2 2.2 2.5 410
(14) 16 (18) 20 (22) 24 (27) 30 (33) 36 (39) 42 (45) 48 52 56 60 64 72 76 80 90 100
14.2 16.2 18.2 20.2 22.5 24.5 27.5 30.5 33.5 36.5 39.5 42.5 45.5 49 53 57 61 65 73 77 81 91 101
24.1 27.4 29.4 33.6 35.9 40 43 48.2 55.2 58.2 61.2 68.2 71.2 75 83 87 91 95 105 109 111 121 131
3 3.5 3.5 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 : 8 8
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 standard.
Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference. Steel weighs 7.85 kg/dm. For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
4.
Finish - Natural. May be phosphate coated, mixed plated, tinned, galvanized, copper plated, cadmium plated, etc, if specified. Designation -
6. General Requirements - The surface shall be free of scale and burrs. The washers shall be coiled without any kinks except in case of turned up ends. The ends of washers shall not abut when washers are compressed. 7.
Tests
Hardness in the range of 43 to Shall satisfy the require-
7.1 5.
Shall be designated by the nominal size, type, number of the standard and the surface protection, if any. For example, a single coil spring washer having a nominal size 10 mm of Type A with phosphate coating shall be designated as Spring Washer Al0 - IS : 3063 Phosphate coated.
Note-For test details, refer to 10 of the standard.
Hardness Test 50 HRC.
7.2 Permanent Set Test merits. 7.3 Twist Test fracture.
The washer shall show no sign of
For detailed information, refer to IS : 3063-1972 Specification for single coil rectangular section spring washers for bolts, nuts and screws (first revision).
SUMMARY OF
IS : 312j-1981
1. Scope -
RIGGING SCREWS AND STRETCHING
SCREWS
Proof Load kN 500.0 624.0
(First Revision)
Requirements regarding materials, components, dimensions, finishing and tests for rigging screws and stretching screws (doubleended and singleended) of the following nominal sizes: a) Rigging screws - Ml2 to M90 b) Stretching screws - M6 to M52 2. Nom Size K$ M80 M90 2.2 Length cOpen /Closed mm mm 1 360 1 760 1 440 1 860
Stretching Screws Body Length mm 100 125 160 200 225 250 315 355 400 450 450 450 450
Safe working load = A proof load.
Tolerance + 5 percent on all dimensions.
Dimensions
Rigging Screws (With ScrewedEye atBoth Ends) Proof Length Nom Size A Load (Dia of Closed OpZ kN Screw) mm mm Ml2 Ml6 M20 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39 M45 MS2 M56 M60 M64 M68 M75 330 370 400 475 550 550 600 600 660 700 750 775 800 1 070 1 120 1 270 525 550 570 700 825 825 875 875 960 %O 1000 1 025 1 050 1 450 1 590 1700 10.0 18.0 28.0 36.0 44.0 63.0 75.0 86.0 100.0 112.0 144.0 194.0 214.0 286.0 342 .O 400.0 411
2.1
Nom Size (Dia of Screw) M6 M8 Ml0 Ml2 Ml4 Ml6 M20 M22 M24 M30 M36 M45 M52
Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 -
Proof Load kN 2.0 3.0 6.0 9.0 12.0 15.2 22.4 32.4 40.0 63.0 90.0 142.0 190.0
For detailed dimensions and shapes of rigging screws, tubular body, screwed eye, screwed fork, screwed stud eye and stretching screws (open body, screw eyes and swivel eye), refer to Tables 1 to 6 of the standard.
SP : 21-1983
3.
Requirements
3.1 Galvanizing - All components of assembled stretching screw shall be galvanized by hot-dip process with a coating of $nc of minimum 98.5 percent purity. All screw threads shall be brush or spun galvanized. 3.2 Workmanship
3.2.3 Each component of the completed rigging screw or stretching screw shall be free from any visible flaw or defect. 4. Tests
4.1 ProofTesting - Each screw shall withstand the proof load without any sign of defect. 4.2 Tests for Galvanizing - Shall be tested in accordance with IS : 2633- 1972* and IS : 67451972:, if specified.
*Methods of testing uniformity of coating on fine,coated (first revision 1. articles
3.2.1 Rigging screw - The tubular body shall be neatly and clearly made and finished. The screwed eye, screwed fork and screwed stud eye shall be cleanly forged and finished. The thimble, when in place in the fork, shall be capable of free movement. 3.2.2 Stretching screw -The body, the screw eye and the swivel eye shall be solid forging without weld, neatly and cleanly made and finished. For detailed information, (first revision). refer to IS : 3121-1981
TMethodsfor determination coated iron and steel articles.
of weight of zinc coating on zinc
Specification for rigging screws and stretching Screws
SLMMARI
OF
IS : 3468-1975 PIPE NUTS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for pipe nuts, hexagonal and octagonal, in the size range & l/8 to % 6 for pipe threads according to IS : 554-1975* and in the size range G l/8 to G6 for pipe threads according to IS : 2843-1975t. 2. 2.1 Requirements Grade Semi-precision grade (S) of IS : 1367-1967*. 2.2 Mechanical Properties - Property class 6 of IS : 1367-1967*. For brass pipe nuts, the material shall have ultimate tensile strength of not less than 300 MPa (lMPa=O. 102 kgf/mm2). 3. Dimensions (in mm) Distance Between Parallel Sides, Norn 19 22 27 32 32 36 41 46 55 50 60 75 70
Size
(According to IS : 554 *) R,S R,y, R; % % M R, % R* 1 R$l R, 145 %2 (According to IS : 2643 t) G4g G1/4 G% (Z) (Z) Cl (G G 1% 1%) G 1?4 G 1%
External Diameter, Nom 18 20 25 30 30 33 38 43 52 47 56 70 65
Ihickness, Nom 6 6 6 8 8 9 9 10 11 10 12 13
R,2H
(GG2; G 2% )
80 90
16
85 95
Kbntintted)
*Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are required on the threads (second revision). tDimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes (first
revision )
*Technical
supply
conditions
for threaded
fasteners
(first
rmision ).
412
SP : 21-1983
Size (According to IS : 554) %3 %4 b-5 %6 (According to IS : 2643) (GG3L) G4 G4M (GGs5%) G6
External Diameter, Nom 100 115 128 143 158 172 182
Thickness, Nom 19 19 22 22 22 25 25
Distance Between Parallel Sides, NCTn 105 120 135 150 165 180 190
Note 1 - Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference

Note 2 For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the stundard.
4. Designation - Shall be designated by the name, size and number of the standard. For example, a hexagonal pipe nut of nominal size & 2 shall be For detailed information, refer to IS : 3468197.5
designated
as Hex Pipe Nut %-IS : 3468.
4.1 When brass is used for manufacture, the word Brass shall come at the end of designation. Specification for pipe nuts (first revision).
SCMMAR\
OF
IS : 3757-1972 HIGH TENSILE FRICTION (First Revision)

Scope - Requirements of high tensile friction grip bolts size Ml2 to M39. Such bolts used in conjunction with high tensile steel nuts and quenched and tempered steel washers are tightened to a predetermined shank tension in order that the clamping force thus provided will transfer loads in connected members by friction between parts and not by shear in or bearing on bolts or piles of connected members.
Size Diameter ofShark 12 16 20 22 24 27 30 33 36 39 Thickness Length of Threaded of Bolt Portion Head, Nom / \ 30 I 8 10 38 44 13 46 52 14 50 56 15 54 60 17 60 66 19 66 72 21 72 78 23 78 84 25 84 90 *Technical
relM.m).
GRIP BOLTS
1.
2.
Requirements Property class 8.8 or
2.1 Mechanical Properties 10.9 of IS : 1367-1%7* 2.2 Grade -
Black grade (B) of IS : 1367-1%7*.
2.3 Marking - Marked with 4 grooves (1 mm wide x 0.5 or 0.6 mm deep equally spaced) on the head. 3.
Dimensions (in mm)

Distance Befween Parallel Faces of Hex Head, Nom 22 27 32 36 41 46 50 55 60 65 Range of Preferred Lengths (see Note 1) 30-70 40-100 55-130 60-130 65- 150 70-160 80-180 100-200 100-200 100-200
Ml2 Ml6 M20 @I221 M24 0427) M30 (M33) M36 (M39)
IFor lengths up to 130 mm. SFor lengths over 130 mm up to 200 mm.
supply
conditions
for threaded
fasteners
(firsr
413
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 -Preferred lengths 65,70,75.80,90,100,110,120,130, 190, and 200 mm.

Note 2 -
30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 140, 150,160,170,180,
bolt of size M16, length 100 mm and of property class 10.9 conforming to the standard shall be designated as Friction GriD Bolt M16X 100~-IS : 3757 - 10.9. 5. Tests Bolts shall be subjected to tests specified
in IS : 1367-1%7*.
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners yirsf
Size shown in brackets are of second preference. dimensions and tolerances, refer to
Note 3 - For detailed Table 1 of the standard.
4.
Designation
As an example,
a friction grip
revision )
refer to IS : 3757-1972
Specification for high tensile friction grip bolts (first
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4762-l 968 WORM DRIVE HOSE CLIPS FOR GENERAL PURPOSES

(With Amendments 1. Scope -Requirements for worm drive hose clips of two types, for general purpose. This does not relate to worm drive hose clips for aircraft use. 2. Types Type A Type B 3. Size Dimensions Hose clips with serrated bands. Hose clips with pierced bands. (in mm) Internal Diameter Test Pressure Min
kgf/cmk 12
No. 1 and 2) Size Suitable for Hose Sizes W A4in 80 90 100 115 130 145 160 60 70 80 95 110 125 140
Note standard.
Internal Diameter ;Max-80 90 100 115 130 145 160

dimensions,
Test Pressure Min kgf/cm2
up
to
Suitable for Hose Sizes -xG?Z+ Min 9 12 14 16 18 22 25 30 32 38 45 50 Up t0 12 16 20 22 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70

test details,
80 90 100 115 130 145 160

For detailed
60 70 80 95 110 125 140
4.2
1 of the
refer to Table
16 20 22 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70
Note-For
12 16 20 22 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70
9 12 14 16 18 22 25 30 32 38 45 50
14.1 8.4
4. Designation - Shall be designated by the size, type and number of the standard. For example, a hose clip of nominal size 25 mm and with serrated band shall be designated as Hose Clip 25 A - IS : 4762 . 5. Finish - Various parts of the hose clip shall be smooth and shall be fEe from burrs and sharp edges. The parts shall be zinc plated or cadmium plated. 6. Tests - Shall satisfy the prescribed (a) torque test, (b) fatigue torque loading test, and (c) hydraulic pressure test.
refer to 10 of the standard.
refer to IS : 4762-1968
Specification for
worm drive hose clips for general -
414
SP : 21-1983
SUMMAKY OF
IS : 5369-1975 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLAIN WASHERS AND LOCK WASHERS
(First Revision)
General requirements and permissible deviation for plain washers, lock washers and similar parts. 2. 3. Grades Precision and ordinary.
1.
Scope -
3.1 Finish - Natural. May be phosphate-coated, nickel plated, tinned, galvanized, copper-plated or cadmium-coated. 3.2 Shall be free from cracks, burrs, pits and other defects. All sharp edges shall be removed.
Requirements
Note-For permissible deviation on main dimensions and concentricity of the hole with respect to outside diameter of precision grade washers as well as of ordinary grade washers, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, (first revision).
refer to IS : 5369-197.5 General requirements for plain washers and lock washers
SUMMARY OF
IS : 5372-1975 TAPER WASHERS

1. Scope - Requirements for taper washers for use with Indian Standard Medium Weight Channels @MC) with bolts in diameter range of 10 to 39 mm.
2.
FOR CHANNELS
Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 -
(ISMC)
(First Revision)
LX B are dimensions for taper washers in plan. Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference. For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
Dimensions (in mm)

Tbzkness Nominal L xB Size (see Note 1) e fiin Thick (Diameter End End 22 x 22 26 x 30 32 x 36 40 x 44 x 56 x 56 x 62 x 68x68 75 x 80 x 44 50 56 56 62 75 80 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4.3 5.7 6.8 8.1 9.2 9.9 9.9 10.5 11.2 11.9 12.4 For Bolt Size
standard.
3.
Grade -
Ordinary grade of IS : 5369-1975*.
Ml0 Ml2 Ml6 M20 Wl22) M24 (~27) M30 (M33) M36 @439)
4. Designation - Shall be designated by the name, size and number of the standard. For eitample , a taper washer of nominal size 18 mm shall be designated as Taper Washer 18 - IS : 5372.
*General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first
rev&n). Specification for taper washers for channels (ISMC)
For detailed information, (first revision).
refer to IS : 5372-1975
415
SP : 21-1983
SUMMAHY
OF
IS : 5373-1969 SQUARE WASHERS

(With Amendment I. Scope - Requirements for square washers intended for use in wood fastenings with bolts in diameter range 10 to 52 mm. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Sides 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 95 Thickness For Bolt Size Ml0 Ml2 Ml6 M20 M22 M24 (~27) M30
shali conform
FOR WOOD FASTENINGS

No. 1) Sides Thickness For Bolt Size %:) 0439) M42 M45 M48 M52
Naninal Size (Dia of Hole) (36) (i29) 45 48 52 56

Note -
Nominal Size (Dia sf Hole) 11.5 14 18 23 24 (ii) 33

Note-Other lock washers
100 125 110 135 140 150 160
6 8 8 8 10 10
Sizes in brackets are of second preference.
3. Designation - As an example, a square washer for wood fastenings having a nominal size of 18 mm shall be designated as Square Washer 18 IS : 5373.
to IS
requirements not covered in the standard cfirst revision).
: 5369-1975 General requirements
for plain washers
and
refer to IS : 5373-1969 Specification foi square washers for wood fastenings.
SUMMAKY
OF
IS : 5374-1975 TAPER WASHERS

I. Scope - Requirements for taper washers for use with Indian Standard Medium Weight Beams (ISMB) with bolts of 10 mm to 39 mm diameter: 2. Dimensions (in mm) For Bolt Size
FOR I-BEAMS (ISMB)

For Bolt .Size
(First Revision)
Nominal LxB Thickness Size (see Note I),--, (Diameter l&in Thick of Hole) End End 68 75 80 (42) Note 1 - L X %
Note 2 -
Nominal Size (Diameter of Hole) 11 14 18 (Z) \ 26 (30) 33
L x.B Thickness (see Note 1) ,AThin Thick , End End 22 26 32 44 40 x x x x 22 30 36 44 50 1.5 2 2.5 3 3 3 3 4.6 6.2 7.6 10 9.2 10.8 10.8 11.7
x 68 x 75 x 80
3 3 3
12.6 13.6 14.2
(M33) M36 (M39)
B are dimensions
of taper washers in plan.
Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference. refer to table given in 2 of
Ml0 Ml2 Ml6 (M22) M20 M24
Note 3 - For detailed dimensions, the standard.
3.
Grade -
Ordinary grade of IS : 5369-1975*.
56 x 56 56 x 56 62 x 62
4. Designation - As an example, a taper washer of nominal size 18 mm shall be designated as Taper Washer 18 IS : 5374.
General requirements revision). for plain washers and lock washers
(first
For detailed dimension, refer to IS : 5374-1975 Specification for taper washers for I-Beams (ISIWB) (first rfkision). 416
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 5624-1970 FOUNDATION
1. Scope - Requirements of foundation bolts in the diameter range 8 to 72 mm. 2. Requirements conform to (B) Size M36 M42 M48 M56 M64 M72x6
BOLTS
Nom Dia 36 42 48 56 64 72 Length of Bolts (see Note 1) 400-2 500-2 630-3 800-3 1 000-3 1600-3 500 500 200 200 200 200
2.1 Mechanical Properties - Shall property class 4.6 of IS : 1367-1%7*. 2.2 Grade - Shall conform specified in IS : 1367-1%7*.
to Black Grade
2.3 Shank Forms - At the discretion of manufacturer. Some typical forms are given in Appendix A of the standard.
Note For other requirements of bolts refer to IS
Note 1 - Range of preferred lengths. Note 2 - Preferred lengths 300,400,500,630,800,1000,1 3 200.

80, 100. 125, 160, 200, 250, 250,1600,2 000,2 500 and
: 1367-1%7*.
3.
Dimensions Size MS Ml0 Ml2 Ml6 M20 M24 M30
(in mm) Nom Dia 8 10 12 16 20 24 30 Length of Bolts (see Note 1) W-200 lOcL250 125-300 16&500 200-800 250-I 250 30&2 000
for threaded fasteners yirst
Note 3 -Foundation bolts shall have coarse pitch screw thread in the dia range 8 to 64 mm and 6 mm pitch screw threads for dia 72 mm, conforming to IS : 4218.. 4. Designation - As an example, a foundation bolt of nominal dia 20 mm, length 200 mm and with a hexagon nut and conforming to the standard shall be deslgnated as Foundation Bolt M20x200 N IS : 5624. \\ 4.1 If foundation bolt given in 4 is without nut, it shall be designated as Foundation Bolt M20~200 IS : 5624.
*ISO metric screw threads.
*Technical supply conditions

WViSbl).
Note-For
detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the standard. information, refer to IS : 5624-1970 Specification for foundation bolts.
For detailed
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6113-1970 ALUMINIUM FASTENERS FOR BUILDING PURPOSES

1. Scope - Requirements for J-type hook bolts and nuts, mushroom head seam bolts and nuts, and washers of aluminium for roofing sheets. Requirements
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners @rsl
2.2
Grade -
Black Grade B of IS : 1367-1967*.
Note - For other requirements in regard to manufacture, te lerance, tests, etc. of bolts and nuts, refer to IS : 1367 -1%7* and for requirements of washers, refer to IS : 5369-1975t.
2.
2.1 Material - Aluminium as specified in the standard.
and aluminium
alloys,
revision).
tGenera1 requiremmts for plain washers and lock washers (firsr
revision).
417
SP : 21-1983
3. 3.1
Dimensions
(in mm)
J-Type Hook Bolts Size Nominal Dia Thread Length, Min M6 6 25 MS 8 25 Ml0 10 25 Size of Nut M6 M8 Ml0
4. Designation -- As an example, seam bolt size M8, length 20 mm and material HG 19 of IS : 739Preferred Lengths 70,80, 70, 80, 170, 70, 80, 170, 90, 90, 180, 90, 180, 100, 100, 190 100, 190 110 120, 130, 140 and 150 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, and 200 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, and 200
3.2
Mushroom Head Seam Bolts and Nuts Size Nominal Dia Thickness Q Head (Nopn) 3 4 5 6 Size of Nut Preferred Lengths
M5 M6 M8 Ml0
5 6 8 10
M5 M6 M8 Ml0
12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and 50 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90 and 100 12,14,16,20,25,30,35,40,45,50,55,60,70, 80, 90 and 100 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and 50 1966* shall be designated IS : 6113 HG 19. as Seam Bolts M8 X 80
3.3 Washers - Types A, B, C and D. Hole diameter 5.8, 7, 10 and 12 for size 5, 6, 8 and 10 respectively.
Note - For detailed dimensions of bolts, nuts and washers, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard.
*Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, wire (for general engineering purposes) (revised).
refer
to IS : 6113-1970
Specification for aluminium fasteners for
building
SUMMARY
OF
IS :
6610-1972
HEAVY
WASHERS FOR STEEL STRUCTURES

42 mm. 2. Dimensions Tolerance on Outer Dia -1.30 - 1.30 -1.60 -1.60 - 1.60 - 1.60 -1.90 -1.90 - 1.90 -1.90 (in mm) Thickness Suitable for Bolt Size Ml2 Ml6 M20 M22 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39
1. Scope - Requirements for heavy washers for use in steel structures in the diameter range 14 to Nominal Size {Diameter) 14 18 22 24 26 30 33 36 39 42 Tolerance on Size +0.43 + 0.43 +0.52 +0.52 +0.52 +0.52 + 0.62 +0.62 +0.62 +0.62 Outer Dia
24 30 37 39 44 50 56 60 66 72
8 8
a
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
418
SP : 21-1983
3.
4.
Material -
Shall be made from steel. By nominal size and the number
of this standard.
Example: Washer 14 IS : 6610.
Designation -
Note-Other requirements of washers shall be as specified in IS : 5369-1975 General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revkion), for ordinary washers.
refer to IS : 6610-1972 Specification for heavy washers for steel structures.
SUMMARY OF
I$ : 6623-1972 HIGH TENSILE FRICTION GRIP NUTS

Requirements for high tensile friction grip nuts in the size range Ml2 to M39. 2.
1.
Scope -
Note - Property class 10 is not covered in IS : 1367-1967. For details of this class refer to Appendix A of the srandard.
Dimensions (in mm)
3.2
Grade -
Black
grade
(B)
according
to
IS : 1367-1%7*.
Size Dia
Ml2
Ml6
M20
M22
M24
(M27)
M30
(M33)
M36
(M39)
offfok
12
16 27 13
20 32 16
22 36 18
24 41 19
27 46 22
30 50 24
33 55 26
36 60 29
39 65 31
s, Nom (see Note 1) 22 Thickness @Head, Nom

Note l-Distance Note 2-Sizes Note 3-For
10
between paralIe1 sides.
within brackets are of second preference. detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 and for tolerances, refer to Fig. 1 of the standard. Note - Other requirements shall be as specified IS : 1367-1967 for Black (B) grade. in
3. 3.1
Requirements Mechanical Properties Shall conform to the class 8, 10 or 12 according to IS : 13674.
property 1967*.
the
Designation - By the name, size, the number of standard and symbol for mechanical properties.
IS : 6623 12.
Example: Friction Grip Nut M20
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (firit revision).
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners yirst revision).
refer to IS : 6623-1972 Specification for high tensile friction grip nuts.

419
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6639-1972 HEXAGON BOLTS FOR STEEL STRUCTURES

1.
size
scope -
Requirements for hexagon bolts in the range 12 to 39 mm for steel structures.

Dimensions (in mm)
Note 1 - For other requirements of bolts, refer to IS : 13671967 and for requirements of hexagon nuts used with bolts, refer to IS : 1363-1%7t.
2.
Size / Ml2 Ml6 M20 (M22) M24 (M27) M30 0433) M36 (M39) Note 1- Kange Nom 12 16 20 22 2A 27 30 33 36 39
Diameter A MaX 13.10 17.10 21.30 23.30 25.30 28.30 31.30 34.60 37.60 40.60
Min 11.57 15.57 19.48 21.48 23.48 26.48 29.48 32.38 35.38 38.38
Distance Between Parallel Side, Nom 19

24
Length of Bolts, Nom (see Note 1) 30-120 35-150 40-175 40-200 45-200 60-200 80-200 100-200 100-200 110-200
30 32 36 41 46 50 55 60
of preferred lengths.
Note Z-Preferred lengths-30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125, 130, 135, 140, 145, 150, 155, 160, 165, 170, 175, 180, 185, 190, 195 and 200.
Note 3-Siies Note 4-For Note
shown in brackets are of second preference. detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 and for tolerance, refer to Fig. 1 of the standard. clamping lengths for bolts, refer to Table 2 of the standurd.
Note 2 -For approximate weight of bolts with nuts, refer to Appendix A of ahe smndard for guidance.
S-For
3.
3.1
Requirements
Mechanical Properties - Shall conform to propertyclass4.6orB.BofIS : 1367_1%7*.Thebolts shall withstand a minimum shear stress of 260 MPa (for bolt testing purposes and is not related to actual design stresses). (B) grade according to
4. Designation - By size, length, number of the standard and property class. Example: Hex Bolt M12x30 IS : 6639 - 4.6.
3.2 Grade - Black IS : 1367-1%7*.
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (jirsr

revision).
*Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners @rsr

revision).
tBlack hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts (diameter 6 to 39 mm) and black hexagon screws (diameter 6 to 24 mm) Cfirst revision).
For derailed information, refer to IS : 6639-1972 Specification for hexagon bolts for steel structures.
420
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6649-1972 HIGH TENSILE FRICTION GRIP WASHERS

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for high-tensile friction grip plain circular and square taper washers for use with high-tensile friction grip bolts and nuts in the diameter range 12 to 3 9 mm. 2. Types Type A Type B Type C -
No. 1)
4.2 Material - C-45 steel according to IS : 15701961*. Phosphorus and sulphur content shall not exceed 0.04 and 0.05 percent respectively on ladle analysis, and 0.05 and 0.06 percent respectively on check analysis. 4.3 Heat Treatment -Washers shall be through quenched and tempered to have a hardness between 38 to 45 HRC (see IS : 1586-1968t).
Note - Other requirements shall be as for ordinary washers according to IS : 5369-19756.
Plain circular washers. Square taper washers for use with I -beams. Square taper washers Ibr use with channels. (in mm)
Washers
3. 3.1
Dimensions
5.
Plain Circular
the standard.
Designation - By the type, size and number of Example: Washer A 21 - IS : 6649.
Size (dia), nom For bolt size

External
13 Ml2
17 Ml6
21 M20
(23) M22
25 M24
(28) M27
31 M30
(34) M33
37 M36
(40) M39
dia, nom
24 3
30 4
37 4
39 4
44 4
50 5
56 5
60 5
66 5
72 5
Thickness, nom 3.2 Square Taper Washers
Size (dia), nom For bolt size Onesidedimension, nom (see

Note 1)
13 MI2
17 Ml6
21 M20
(23) M22
25 M24
(28) M27
31 M30
(34) M33
37 M36
(40) M39
30 26
36 32
44 40
50 44
56 56
59 59
62 62
68 68
75 75
80 80
Other side dime&ion, nom (see

Note 1)
Note l-a
and b are dimensions of taper washers in plan. shown within brackets are of second preference. detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.
Note 2-Sizes Note 3-For
4.
Requirements _
*Schedules for wrought steels for general engineering purposes. tMethods for Rockwell hardness test (I3 and C scales) for steel (firstrevision). *General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision).
4.1 Grade - As specified for ordinary washers in IS : 5369-1975*.

*General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 6649-1972 Specification for high tensilefriction grip washers.
421
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6733-1972 WALL AND ROOFING NAILS

(With Amendment 1. 2.
Type
No. 1) 3. Designation - Shall be designated length and the number of the standard. Examples: by size,
Scope -
Requirements
(in mm)
of wall and rooting nails.
Dimensions
of Nail
Size (Dia of Shank) 4.00 4.50 5.60 6.30
Dia of Length Head 8.0 9.0 13.4 15.1 30 40 50 60 70 80
Wall nail Roofing nail
Approx No. of Nails/ kg 260 190 95 80 60 50
Wall nail 4x30 IS : 6733 Roofing nail 5.6X50 IS ; 6733
4. General Requirements - Nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks on shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wastes. Wall nails shall have sharp points and roofing nails, a chiesel point. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with shanks. 5. 6. Finish Test Plain finished.
2.1 Maximum eccentricity and ovality of the centre of the nail head from axis of shank shall be 14 percent of shank diameter, Max.
Note 1 For tolerances, refer to Table 1 of dze srundard.
Note 2 - Length of tapered portion minted at bottom) of the nail shall be 1 to 1.5 times the diameter of shank.
6.1 Bend Test - Nails whe:i cold shall not break or crack when doubled over either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece and sides are parallel.
refer to IS : 6733-1972 Specification for wall and roofing nails.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6736-1972 SLOTTED RAISED COUNTERSUNK WOOD SCREWS

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements tersunk head wood screws. 2. Dimensions
(in mm)
HEAD
No. 1) Range of Preferred Lengths (se& Note 1) 12-75 15-75 15-75 20-75 25-75 30 -75 30-75 30-75 30-75
for slotted raised coun-
Screw No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank (Screw , \ , Designation) Nom Max Min 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 4.17 4.52 4.88 5.59 6.30 7.01 7.72 8.43 9.86 4.29 4.65 5.00 5.72 6.43 7.14 7.85 8.56 9.98 4.04 4.39 4.72 5.38 6.05 6.76 7.47 8.18 9.60
Screw No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank Range of ,-A-, Preferred (Screw Designation) Nom Min Lengths Max (see Note 1) 1.52 1.78 2.08 2.39 2.74 3.10 3.45 3.81 1.55 1.85 2.16 2.46 2.87 3.23 3.58 3.94 1.47 1.70 1.98 2.29 2.64 2.97 3.33 3.68 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 12 -25 12-30 12- 40 12-40 422
Note 1 - Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15,2O,i.5,30,35, 40,45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70 and 75 mm.
SP : 21-1983
Note 2 - Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to 2B times the total length of the screw. Note 3 - Dia of head CJ4u.x)shall be 2 times the diameter of unthreaded shank (Nom). Note 4 -For
skmlard.
Note 5 -
For tolerances,
see Fig. 1 of the standard.
detailed dimensions,
refer to Table
I of the
3. Designation - As an example, a slotted raised countersunk head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm ar.d made of steel shall be designated as Wood Screw No. 8x20 IS : 6736 Steel.
refer to IS
Note-In regard to the requirements (second revision).
not covered in thestandard,
: 451-1972 Technical supply conditions
for wood screws
For detailed information, screws.
refer to IS : 6736-1972
Specification for slotted raised countersunk
head wood
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6739-1972 SLOTTED ROUND HEAD WOOD SCREWS

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements wood screws. 2. Dimensions Size No. (Screw Designation)
0
No. 1) Range of Preferred Lengths (see Note 1) 25 -75 30-75 30-75 30-75 30-75
for slotted round head
Size No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank (Screw r------F Designation) Nom Min 14 16 18 20 24 6.30 7.01 7.72 8.43 9.86 6.43 7.14 7.85 8.56 9.98 6.05 6.76 7.47 8.18 9.60
(in mm)
I_ Range of ;$e;;sd (see Note 1) 8-12 8 -12 8 -12 8 -12 12-25 12-30 12 -40 12 -40 12-75 15-75 15-75 20-75
Dia of Unthreaded Shank b Nom 1.52 1.78 2.08 2.39 2.74 3.10 3.45 3.81 4.17 4.52 4.88 5.59 Max 1.55 1.85 2.16 2.46 2.87 3.23 3.58 3.94 4.29 4.65 5.00 5.72 Min 1.47 1.70 1.98 2.29 2.64 2.97 3.33 3.68 4:04 4.39 4.72 5.38
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
Note 1 - Preferred len& - 8, 10, 12, 15,20,25,30,35, 40,45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, and 75 mm. Note 2 - Rreaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to 2/3 times the total length of the screw. Note 3 - Dia of head @far) shall be 2 times the diameter of unthreaded shank QVCWZ). Note 4 standard. Note 5 3. For detailed dimensions, For tolerances, refer to Table 1 of the
see Fig. 1 of he standard.
Designation - As an example, a slotted round head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and made of steel shall be designated as Wood Screw No. 8 X 20 IS : 6739 Steel.
refer to IS
Note---In regard to the requirements (second revision).
not covered in thestandard,
: 451-1972 Technical supply conditions
for wood screws
refer to IS : 6739-1972 Specification for slotted round head wood screws. 423
!$I : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 676O- 1972 SLOTTED COUNTERSUNK

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements head wood screws. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Shank Min 1.47 1.70 1.98 2.29 2.64 2.97 3.33 3.68 4.04 4.39 4.72 5.38 6.05 Range of Preferred Lengths (see Note 1) 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 12-25 12-30 12 -40 12-40 12-75 15 -75 15-75 20-100 30-100 16 18 20 24 for slotted countersunk No. 1)
HEAD WOOD SCREWS

Range of Preferred Lengbcls (see Note 1) 30 -200 30-200 30-200 30-200
Size No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank , (Screw I Designation) Nom Max Min 7.01 7.72 8.43 9.86 7.14 7.85 8.56 9.98 6.76 7.47 8.18 9.60
Screw No. Dia of Unthreaded (Screw ,pA-s Designation) -Nom Max

0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14
NOW-In
1.52 1.78 2.08 2.39 2.74 3.10 3.45 3.81 4.17 4.52 4.88 5.59 6.30
1.55 1.85 2.16 2.46 2.87 3.23 3.58 3.94 4.29 4.65 5.00 5.72 6.43
Note 1 - Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15,20,25,30,35, 40,45,50,55,60,65,70,75,80,85,90,95,100,110,125,150, 175 and 200 mm. Note 2 - Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to 2/3 times the total length of the screw.
Note 3 - Dia of head @fax) shall be 2 times the diameter of unthreaded shank Qva).
Note 4 For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
standard.
Note 5 For tolerances, see Fig. 1 of the stundard.
3. Designation - As an example, a slotted countersunk head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and made of steel shall be designated as Wood Screw No. 8x20 IS : 6760 Steel.
refer to IS
regard to the requirements
not covered in thes/andurd,
: 451-1972
Technical
supply conditions for wood screws
(second revision).
refer to IS : 6760-1972 Specification for slotted countersunk head wood screws.
SUMMAHY
OF
IS : 8033-1976 ROUND WASHERS WITH SQUARE HOLE FOR WOOD FASTENINGS (With Amendment 3. No. 1) Dimensions (in mm) External Dia 22 28 34 45 58 68 92 Thickness 1 2 2 3.15 4 4 4 Suitable for Bolt Size M6 M8 Ml0 Ml2 Ml6 M20 M24
1. Scope - Requirements for washers with square hole for use in wood fastenings with bolts in dia range 6 to 24 mm. 2. Grade - Ordinary IS : 5369-1975*. grade as specified in
Size (Side of Square) 6.6 9 11 14 18 22 26 424
*General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision).
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - Dimensional tolerances as well as tolerances for form and position shall conform to those of ordinary washers of IS : 5369-197S*.
*General requirements for plain washers and lock washers Vrsr
m+sion).
4. Designation
with square designated IS : 8033.
- As an example, a round washer hole of nominal size 14 mm shall be as Washer With Square Hole 14
Note-In regard to the requirements not covered in thestandard, refer to IS : 5369-1975General requirements for plain washers and lock washers cfirsf revision).
For detailed information, wood fastenings.
refer to IS : 8033-1976 Specification for round washers with square hole for
SUMMAHY
OF
IS : 8412-1977 SLOTTED COUNTERSUNK FOR STEEL STRUCTURES

1. Scope - Requirements of slotted countersunk head bolts for steel structures in the dia range 10 to 24 mm.
2. Dimensions IS : 1367-1%7*.
HEAD BOLTS
(in mm)
Range of Preferred Lengths (see Note 1) 20-160 25 - 160 30 - 160 50-160 55 - 160 60 - 160
Nominal
Nominal Dia
4. Designation - As an example, a slotted countersunk head bolt of nominal size M16, length 70 mm with nut and property class 8.8 shall be designated as Slotted Countersunk Head Bolt Ml6 X 70 N IS : 8412-8.8. 4.1 When the bolts are required without nuts, the letter N appearing between length and number of the standard in the designation shall be omitted. 5. Mechanical Properties or 8.8 of IS : 1367-1%7*.
Size Ml0 Ml2 Ml6 M20 M22 M24 10 12 16 20 22 24
Property classes 4.6
Note 1 - Preferred lengths - 20,2~, 30,3~, 40.45, SO,SS,

60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, and 160 mm. Note 2 - For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Table 1 of the srandard. Note 3 - For lengths of fully threaded bolts, refer to Table 2 of the standard.
6. General Requirements - Nuts used with slotted countersunk head bolts shall conform to the requirements as specified in IS : 1363-1967t.
*Technical supply conditions for wire ropes and strands yirsr revision). tspecification for black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts (dia 6 to 39 mm) and black hexagon scnws (dia 6 to 24 mm) @rst revision).
3.
Grade -Black
grade
(B)
as
specified
in
Note-In regard to requirements not covered in the fasteners (first revision). For detailed information, structures.
standard,
refer
to IS : 1363-1967 Technical supply conditions for threaded for slotted countersunk
refer to IS : 8412-1977
Specification
head bolts
forsteel
425
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8869-1978 WASHERS FOR CORRUGATED

1. Scope - Requirements gated sheet roofing. 2. Types a) Bituminous felt washers, b) Steel washers, and C) Lead washers. 2.1 Bituminous felt washers and lead washers are of two types namely Type A and Type B, and steel washers are of four types namely Type A, Type B, Type C and Type D. 3. Dimensions Nominal Size @ia of Hole) 7 10 12 Note 1 applicable
SHEET ROOFING
for washers for corru4.
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions and shapes of washers of all types, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of fhe standard. Grade -Ordinary IS : 5369-1975*. grade specified in
5. Designation - As an example, a bituminous felt washer, Type A of nominal size 7 shall be designated as Bituminous Felt Washer A7 - IS : 8869. 6. General Requirements
6.1 Steel washers shall be galvanized by hot dipping as specified in IS : 5358-1969t. 6.2 Bituminous felt washers shall be suitably impregnated. These washers when heated and maintained at a temperature of 75+1C for 1 hour shall not get separated and flow out.
(in mm) Thickness 1.6 1.6 1.6 Suitable Bolt Size M6 M8 Ml0
in 2 and 2,l.
The dimensions given in the above table shall be

to all types of washers mentioned
*General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (@sr revision). Vpecification for hot-dip galvanized coatings on fasteners.
For detailed in-formation, refer to IS : 8869-1978 Specification for washers for corrugated sheet roofing.
426
SECTION
21
WIRE ROPES AND WIRE PRODUCTS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS : 278-1978 IS : 2365-1977 Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing (third revision) Steel wire suspension ropes for lifts, elevators and hoists (firer revision) Page 429 430
428
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 278-1978 GALVANIZED
STEEL BARBED WIRE FOR FENCING
(Third Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for two types of galvanized steel barbed wire with two strands of wire. 2. Types TypeA (Iowa type) - Barbs shall have 4 points, formed by twisting two point wires, each two turns, tightly around both line wires making altogether four complete turns. Type B (Glidden type) - Barbs shall have 4 points, formed by twisting two point wires, each two turns, tightly around one line wire making altogether four complete turns.
Note For details, see Fig. 1 of rhe standard.
4.2
Freedom from Defects
4.2.1 Line and point wires shall be circular in section, free from scales and other defects and shall be uniformly galvanized. 4.2.2 Line wire shall be in continuous lengths and shall not contain any welds other than those in rod before it is drawn. The distance between two successive splices shall not be less than 15 m.
Note - For requirements in regard to manufacture, ing and chromating, refer to 6 and 7 of the standard.
5.
galvaniz-
Designation - A galvanized steel barbed wire of Type A and of size designation 1 shall be designated as: Steel Barbed Wire, A- 1 IS : 278
3.
Sizes (in mti) Mass of Complete Barbed Wire 8/m 136-155 108-120 108-125 89-103 97-106 78-85 Distance Between Two Barbs 75+ 150+ 75+ 150+ 75+ 150+ 12 12 12 12 12 12
barbs
Nominal Diameter Size Desig- /ran nation Wire Wire 1 2 3 4 5 6

Note -
6.
Tests
2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.24 2.24
2.50 2.50 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
6.1 Tensile Test - Tensile strength of line wire shall be 390 to 590 N/mm*. Minimum breaking loads of completed barbed wind and individual line wires shallbe3.7and3.0kNfor2.50and2.24mmlinewire respectively. 6.2 Zinc Coating
Number of lays between the two consecutive
shall vary between 2 to 7.
6.2.1 Line wire - Shall satisfy the requirements as for light coated wire given in IS : 4826-1979*. subject to a reduction of not more than 5 percent of the specified values. 6.2.2 Point wire - Shall be tested only for mass of zinc coating. Shall meet the requirements as for light coated wire given in IS : 4826_1979*subject to a reduction of not more than 15 percent of the specified values. 6.3 Ductility Test - Line wire shall withstand wrapping and unwrapping eight turns round its own diameter without fracture.
*Specification for hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel wires (first revision).
3.1 Tolerances - f0.08 wire and point wire. 4. Requirements
mm on diameter of line
4.1 Material - Galvanized forming to IS : 280-1978*.
mild steel wire con-
*Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes

(rhird revision).
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 1521-1972 Method for tensile testing of steel wire (First revision), IS : 1755-1961 Method for wrapping test of wire, and IS : 4826-1979 Specification for hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel wires (first revision).
For detailed information, (third revision).
refer to IS : 278-1978 Specification for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing
429
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 23651977 STEEL WIRE SUSPENSION ROPES FOR LIFTS, ELEVATORS AND HOISTS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements of steel wire ropes for use with lifts, elevators and hoists having cars or platforms carrying passengers or goods and working in guides. Does not apply to ropes used for winding purposes in mines. Following rope constructions and size ranges are covered: 2.2 The actual diameter of rope shall be within +4 and - 1 percent of the nominal diameter. 3. General Requirements - The wire ropes shall conform to IS : 6594-1977* and also meet the following requirements. Core ,---A...._ I-iDre Steel
Construction 6x 19 (12/6/l) 6x 19 (9/9/l) 6x 19 (12/6+6 6 x 19 (9/9/l) 8x 19 (12/6+6

2. Rope Size, Tolerance Load
Tensile Designution * \ / 1 420 1 570 1 230

X X X X X X X X X X X X
Size Range 6 :?l2 6 to 20 6 to 20

8 to 20 8 to 20
F/l) F/l) and Minimum
X X X
x x x
x x
Breaking
3.1
The main core of rope shall be of fibre only.
2.1 The sizes of the rope, designated as nominal diametershall be 6,7,8,9, 10, 11,12, 13,14,16,18, 19 and 20 mm. Size range for different rope constructions is given in 1. Range of breaking load and mass for different rope constructions is given in following table:
3.2 If jointing by tucking is required, it shall be in case of wires 0.5 mm diameter and smaller. 3.3 The mass of ropes given in 2.1 are for fully greased ropes.
*Technical supply conditions for wire ropes and strands Cfirst
revision)
Nominal Diameter
mm
Approximate Mass Range

kg/l00 m /
Range of Minimum Breaking Load Corresponding to Tensile De@gnmion of Wires of

. 1 570 kN 17.4 24 29 37 45 55 65 76 88 115 146 163 180 to to to to to to to to to to to to to 19.1 26 34 43 53 64 76 90 104 136 172 191 212 1 230 kN 1 420 kN 15.7 21 26 33 to to to to 17.3 23 31 39
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 19 20
12.5 17.0 22.1 28.0 34.6 41.9 49.8 58.9 68.3 89.2 113 126 139
to to to to to to to to to to to to to
13.7 18.6 24.3 30.8 38.0 46.0 54.7 64.3 74.5 97.3 123 137 152
13.6 18.5 23 29 35 43 51 60
to to to to to to to to
15 20.4 27 34 42 50 60 70
41 to48 49 to 58 59 to 69 69to81 80 104 !32 147 163 to to to to to 94 123 155 173 192
69to81 90 to 106 114 to 135 127 to 150 141 to 166
Note l-The nominal diameter 19 mm is non-preferred. Note 2-For exact value of minimum breaking load and approximate mass corresponding refer to Tables 1 to 5 of rhe standard.
to each rope construction,
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2365-1977 Specification for steel wire suspension ropes for lifts, elevators and hoists (first revision).
430
SECTION
22
GLASS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS IS IS IS : : : : 2553-1971 2835-1977 3438-1977 5437-1%9 . Safety glass (second revision) Flat transparent sheet glass (second revision) Silvered-glass mirrors for general purposes virst revision) Wired and figured glass
Page 433 433 434 435
432
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2553-1971 SAFETY GLASS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and te% for safety glass meant for use in glazing windows and doors of buildings and land transport. 2. Types a) Toughened safety glass (T) b) Laminated safety glass (L) comprising of two or more sheets of glass bonded together with interlayers of plastics. 3. Requirements Special Selected 2835-1977* for Quality (SQ) or other than wind No. 1 and 2) b) Uniformity test. c) Fragmentation test. 3.4 Specific Requirements of Laminated Glass a) Thickness - 4 mm to 20 mm. Safety
b) Tolerance on thickness.
+ 0.4 mm for glass 4 to less than 7 mm thick. f0.5 mm for glass 7 to less than 10 mm thick. +0.6 mm for glass 10 mm and above.
3.1 Safety glass shall be made from Quality(SSQ) or AAQualityofIS : wind shields of vehicles and Selected A Quality of IS : 283S-1977* for shields.
c) Light stability test.
4 Boil test.
e) Fracture and adhesion test.
3.5 Optical Requirements - Specified only for wind screen and apply only to the primary vision area of wind screen. a) Optical deviation. b) Distortion of vision. c) Visual transmission.
3.2 Thickness shall be measured according to methodprescribed.inAppendixBofIS : 2835-1977*. 3.3 Specijc Requirements of Toughened Safety Glass a) Thickness - As specified in Table 1 of IS : 2835-1977*.
*Specification for flat transparent sheet glass (second revision). Note-For test requirements and methods,
refer to 4.2 of the standard.
-~-
refer to IS : 2553-1971 Specification for safety glass (second
revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 28351977
FLAT TRANSPARENT
SHEET GLASS
(Second Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements and method of sampling and test for flat transparent sheet glass for use in manufacture of photographic plates, projection slides, silvered glass mirrors, toughened or laminated safety glass and for glazing and framing purposes. 2. Classification: a) AA Quality or Special Selected Quality (SSQ): Intended for use where superior quality is required, such as safety glass for wind shields, high quality mirrors, photographic plates and projection slides. b) A Quality or Selected Quality (SQ):Intended for selected glazing and manufacture of 433 No.
1)
mirrors, safety glass other than wind shields etc; or Ordinary Quality (OQ): Incl B Quality ._ ___ _. tended for glazing and framing purposes. d) C Quality or Green House Quality (GQ): Intended for green house glazing, production of frosted glass, strips for flooring, etc. 3. Requirements clear and
3.1 Sheet glass shall be flat, transparent, free from any cracks.
3.2 Thickness (in mm) - 1.1, 1.4, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 4.8, 5.5, 6.3, 8.0, 9.0, lO.Oand 12.0mm
SP : 21-1983
(see Table 1 of the standard).

Note - For determination Appendix B of rhr standard. of thickness of sheet glass, refer to
Thickness 3 mm to 6.3 mm Thickness 8 mm to 12 mm
f2.0 mm +3.0 mm
3.3
Tolerunces on Cut
Thickness
Sizes
up to 2.5 mm
t1.5
mm
3.4 Distribution ofAllowable Defects - Sheet glass shall not have defects greater than those specified in Table 1. ._--__
'A'@ALI.N /Fb 'B'@AUTy REMARKS
TABLE 1 DISTRIBUTION OF ALLOWABLE DEFECTS IN SHEET GLASS

SL NO. DEFECTS
AA QUALITY
r----------sI-
(1) (2) i) Gaseous inclusion, maximum size, mm ii) Opaque gaseous inclusions, maximum size, mm iii) Knots, dirt and stones, maximum size, mm iv) Scratches, mbs and crush v) Bow, percent, Max vi) Reams, strings and lines vii) Waviness, mm viii) Sulphur stains Note lbreakage. C quality
Central (3) 1.5 Nil Nil Faint -0.25 Light 12.5 Nil
Outer (4) 3.0 Nil Nil Faint + Light 12.5 Nil
Central (5) 3.0 3.0 1.0 Faint ~O.S--3 Light 15.0 Nil
Outer (6) 6.0 6.0 1.0 Light
Central (7) 12.0 6.0 1.5 Light -1.o+
Outer (8) 18.0 12.5 2.0 Medium
Q,
Separated by at least 30.0 cm Separated by at least 61 .O cm Separated by at least 61 .O cm Separated by at least 61 .O cm which
Light 15.0 Nil
Medium Heavy 20.0 20.0 Inconspicuous ones allowed
sheet glass may have defect
of any size or intensity
bur shall no .stones or knots
may cause
Note 2--l% methods of tests for defects

refer to Appendix A of the standard.
given at SI No. (iv) to (vi), refer to 5.2 to 5.4 and for defects given at SI No. (vii),

revision).
refer to IS : 28351977 Specification for flat transparent sheet glass (second
SUMMAHY
OF
IS : 3438-1977 SILVERED-GLASS MIRRORS FOR GENERAL PURPOSES
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for silvered-glass mirrors used for general purposes. 2. Requirements reflecting surface, such as separation of silver from glass, sulphide or other spots, haze or other visible defects. 2.4 Copper Coating than 6.5 mgldm2. Amount coating of copper not less shall be applied
2.1 Shall consist of glass sheet coated with silver on one surface; the silver shall be protected by a metallic copper film, which in turn shall be covered by a protective coating. 2.2 Glass sheet shall comply with requirements for AA and A qualities of IS : 2835-1977*. Polished plate or float glass may be used if mutually agreed. 2.3 Silvering - Silver deposit not less than 10 mg/ dm2. Shall be free from defects or blemishes in the
*Specification for flat transparent sheet glass (second rekbn).
2.5 A suitable protective over the copper coating.
Note - For method of test for silver and copper coatings, refer to Appendix A of the sranabrd. 3. Tests
3.1 Testfor Waviness - A sketch comprising broad straight bands drawn at 45 to horizontal in a rectangle shall be waved in front of the mirror placed vertically. The image of the bands shall be free from distortion. 434
SP : 21-1983
3.2 Salt Spray Test - The silver shall not show pin holes, spots, fog, cloudiness, haze, separation or any other visible defect when subjected to the prescribed test. 3.3 Testing ofCopper and Silver Plating -Remove protective coating by suitable removers and flush with
Note-For methods
water. No silver shall be visible metallic copper plating.
through
exposed
3.3.1 On further treatment of copper plating with concentrated ammonia, a clear silver film without any pin holes, blemishes or other visual defects shall be exposed.
of tests given in 3.1 and 3.2, refer to 6.1 and 6.2 of the standura.
For detailed information, purposes (first revision).
refer
to IS : 3438-1977
Specification
for
silvered-glass
mirrors for general
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 5437-1969 WIRED AND FIGURED

1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for wired glass, wired-figured glass and figured glass.
Note - These glasses are used mainly for glazing partitions, doors and windows of buildings. Figured glass is suitable for glazing where decoration and screening, by diffusion of light, are main considerations.
GLASS
3.1.1 Wire Mesh Used - Steel wire of 0.46 to 0.56 mm diameter completely embedded at least 1 mm from surface. 3.1.2 Pattern ofMesh - Square or diamond with wires welded; orhexagonal with wires twisted. 3.1.3 Wire mesh shall not contain broken wires per square metre._ more than 3
2.
Requirements
2.1 Shall not contain any stones with cracks or stones bigger than 2 mm diameter. 2.2 In case of tinted glass, coloured patches shall not be permitted. 2.3 Flame-Proofness - Wired glass and wiredfigured glass shall satisfy the flameproofness test prescribed in Appendix A of the standard. 3. Dimensional Details 3.1 Wired Glass and Wired-Figured Glass Square or rectangular sheets; thickness 6.4 * 0.4 mm. For detailed information, refer to IS : 5437-1969
3.2 Figured Glass - Square or rectangular of the following thickness: Thickness mm 2 3 4 5 6 Specification for wired and figured 435 Tolerance mm +0.3 +0.3 +0.4 +0.4 +0.5 glass.
sheets
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS : 110-1%8 IS IS IS IS IS : 345-1952 : 419-1967 : 423-1961 : 424-1965 : 3709-1966 Ready mixed paint, brushing,, grey filler for enamels, for use over primers yirst revision) Wood tiler, transparent, liquid Putty, for use on window frames Cjirst revision) Plastic wood for joiners filler (revised) Plastic asphalt (revised) Mastic cement for bedding of metal windows Page 439 439 440 441 441 442
438
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 1 lo-1968 READY MIXED PAINT, BRUSHING, GREY FILLER

FOR ENAMELS, FOR USE OVER PRIMERS
2.6 Shall also comply with requirements Table 1.
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for enamels, for use over primers. The material is used as a filler over the primer in the painting system normally followed for enamels.
2. given in
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENT3 FOR READY MIXED PAINT, BRUSHING, GREY FILLER, FOR ENAMELS, FOR USE OVER PRIMBRS
SL No. &4RACTERISTlC m-m
Requirements
2.1
Composition shall be such as to meet requirements of the standard. For obtaining satisfactory flattening properties, use of slate powder along with extenders and pigments as may be necessary is recommended.
i) Drying time, hard dry
Not more than 12 hours Smooth and uniform and suitable for bmshing Smooth and matt to semi-glossy G=Y 2.0
ii) C&sistency
iii) Finish iv) Colour v) Residue on sieve, percent by weight, Max
2.2 Flattening Properties - Material shall not be inferior to approved sample when tested as prescribed in Appendix A of the standard. 2.3 Hold Out Pioperty - Shall pass test prescribed in Appendix B of the standard. 2.4 Water Content Shall not exceed 0.5 percent. Shall be within +3
vi) FlexibiQty and adhesion No visible damage or de(atIer48 hours air-drying) tadunent of fitIn vii) Flash point viii) Keeping properties ICotbelow 30C Not less than six months
2.5 Weight in kgper 10 Litres percent of approved sample.

Note-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 101-1964 Methods of test for ready mixed paints and enamels (second revbion).
For detailed information, refer to IS : 110-1968 Specification for ready for enamels, for use over primers (first revision).
mixed paint, brushing, grey filler,
SUMMARY OF
IS : .345-1952 WOOD FILLER, TRANSPARENT,

LIQUID
1. Scope - Requirements and the methods of test for the material commercially known as wood filler, transparent, liquid. The material is used for tilling wood surfaces prior to the application of undercoating varnish in the varnishing system normally followed for finishing woodwork.
439
Requirements
2.1 Shall be free from skins, foreign matter and undissolved water. The material shall be of a consistency suitable for straight application to wood and shall efficiently fill its pores.
SP : 21-1983
2.2 Composition -A varnish vehicle and filling material such as whiting, or barytes or silica, or gypsum or a mixture of these.
SL
TABLE 1 REQUIREhtENTS FOR WOOD FILLER. TRANSPARENT, LIOUID _

CHAR.~CTERIS~~
REQUIREMENT 3O.OC 40.0
2.3 Setting Time and Finish - When tested aS prescribed in Appendix A of the standard, setting time of the material shall be not more than one hour; and finish shall be such that grain of wood shall be clearly visible through varnish film. 2.4 Material shall also comply with the requirements given in Table 1.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS
No. i)
Flash point, Min percent MUX by weight,
ii) Volatile matter content,
iii)
Keeping properties
Not less than 6 months from the date of manufacture
: 197-1969 Methods of sampling and test for varnishes and lacquers Cfirstrevision).
refer to IS : 345-1952 Specification for wood filler, transparent, liquid.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 419-1967 PUTTY,
FOR USE ON WINDOW
FRAMES
(First Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for putty for use in fixing glass panes on wood and metal frames and for filling splits, cracks and holes in wood or metal. 2. Requirements No. 1)
cracking. After being moulded in place, it shall convert itself into a cohesive mass which will not yield to specified pressure after 72 hours. 2.4 The material shall also comply with the requirements given in Table 1.
TABLE SL
2.1
Shall be homogeneous paste and shall be free from grit and other visible impurities. 2.2 Composition - Shall consist only of whiting, linseed oil, raw and suitable varnish medium.
Form and Condition -
_
1 REQUIREMENTS FOR PUTTY, WINDOW FRAMES C&ARACT~~~STIC Residue on sieve, percent by weight, Max FOR USE ON
REQU~RE~~ENT 5.0 1.0 Not less than 6 months
No
i)
2.3 Consistency - The material, after thorough working in hands, shall have good plastic quality without sliminess or stickiness that would render it difficult to handle and apply. It shall work readily and smoothly under a palette knife without crumbling or
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 85-1950 Methods setting time, refer to Appendix A of rhe standard.
ii)
iii)
Water content,
weight, Max Keeping properties
percent
by
of test for oil pastes for paints;
and for method
of determination
of

revision).
refer to IS : 419-1967 Specification for putty, for use on window frames (first
440
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 423-1961
PLASTIC
WOOD
FOR JOINERS
No. I)
FILLER
(Revised)
(With Amendment
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of test for material commerciallv known as elastic wood, for joiners tilers. The material is usei for filling holes, cracks and other irregularities in wood to produce a smooth surface capable of taking suitable stain to match timber.
2.
Note - The nitrocellulose syrup shall consist of nitrocellulose, suitable resins, plasticizers, solvent and diluent.
2.3 Consktency -It shall be in such a condition that it can be easily worked into a smooth paste suitable for application by a palette knife for filling. 2.4 Performance - Twenty-four hours after application, it shall be in such a condition that it has not shrunk unduly, cracked or fallen away from the wooden surfaces to which it be applied. Shall be capable of being worked by a chisel, plane or saw, as if it were timber, and of holding nails screws and similar fixtures. 2.5 Keeping Qualities - Six months from the date of manufacture, in original sealed containers. 2.6 Marking - Containers shall be marked HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE in red letters and Flash point below 24.4C.
Requirements
2.1
Form and Condition - Shall be homogeneous and free from grit and other visible impurities. Cposition
a) Nitrocellulose syrup, percent, Min b) Wood dust passing through IS Sieve No. 15 (aperture 151 microns) with a maximum moisture content of 5 percent 77 Remainder
2.2
refer to IS : 423-1961 Specification for plastic wood for joiners fillers (revised).
SUMMARk OF
IS : 424-1965
PLASTIC
ASPHALT
(Revised)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for plastic asphalt used for stopping leaks in roofs and for protection of underground tanks. 2. 2.1 Requirements Fomz and Condition from Shall be a homogeneous dust, grit and other visible steel panel and is examined for setting properties after 24 hours with finger and by subjecting it to a definite load for a specific time. 2.5
Flexibiliq and Adhesion

a) Heat test - shall not slip more than 6.5 mm. b) Cold test- shall remain plastic and firmly adherent. c) Bend test - shall not crack or flake off.
paste and fEe impurities.
2.2 Composition - Not less than 30 percent by weiiht of bitumen, remainder being asbestos fibres and volatile thinners. 2.3 Consistency - Shall be in such a condition that it can be easily worked into a smooth paste suitable for application by a trowel without drawing or pulling. 2.4
2.6 The material shall also comply with the following requirements: a) Flash point - not below 35C. b) Keeping properties -not less than 6 months. 2.7 Water Content by weight. 441 Shall not exceed 0.5 percent
Setting Time -
A test film prepared on a mild
SP : 21-1983
Note- For methods of tests for setting time and flexibility and adhesion, refer to the Appendices A and B of fhe s~undurd. For other tests, refer to IS : 101-1964 Methods of test for ready mixed paints and enamels (second revision).
refer to IS : 424-1965 Specification for plastic asphalt (revised).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3709-1966 MASTIC CEMENT FOR BEDDING OF METAL WINDOWS

1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for mastic cement for bedding of metal windows. The material is intended for application by hand or with a putty knife. It is used for bedding, one metal window into another, metal windows into wooden frames, or metal frames into masonry or concrete. It is expected to be suitable for taking paint without lifting, bleeding or cracking. . 2. Requirements Note 1 - Up to 10 percent of whiting may be replaced by asbestos fibrous powder. One to two percent shall be replaced by yellow ochre to distinguish it from putty for fixing glass.
Note 2 - Oils shail be a mixture of 85 percent raw linseed oil and 15 percent castor oil.
2.3 Adhesion -The material shall satisfactorily adhe= to wood, masonry, concrete and metal frames of painted or etched galvanized steel or pre-treated aluminium. 2.4 Water Content Not more. than 0.5 percent.
2.1 Shall be in the form of a homogeneous paste, which after working in the hands, shall have good plastic quality. Shall work smoothly under a knife without crumbling or cracking and without sticking unduly to hand or knife. 2.2 Composition a) Whiting b) Oils
Note-For
2.5 Setting Properties - Spread material to a thickness of 5 to 6 mm on a mild steel plate 300 X 300 mm and approximately 2.5 mm thick. Keep it in vertical position under standard atmospheric conditions for 7 days. There shall be no cracks or sagging of the film and shall remain plastic. 2.6 Keeping Properties - Six months from the date of manufacture in original sealed containers.
80 to 85 percent by weight 15 to 20 percent by weight
methods of tests, refer to IS : 85-1950 Methods of test for oil pastes for paints.
refer to IS : 3709-1966
Specification for mastic cement for bedding of metal
windows.
442
SECTION
24
THERMAL INSULATION
MATERIALS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS : 3677-1973 : 3690-1974 : 4671-1968 : 6598-1972 : 7509-1974 : 7510-1974 : 8154-1976 : 8183-1976 Unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation (First revision) Unbonded glass wool for thermal insulation (jirsr revision) Expanded polystyrene for thermal insulation purposes Cellular concrete for thermal insulation Thermal insulating cements (Type 750) Thermal insulating cements (Type 350) Preformed calcium silicate insulation (for temperatures up to 650C) Bonded mineral wool
Page
445 446 447 448 449 450 450 452
444
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 3677-1973 UNBONDED ROCK AND SLAG WOOL FOR THERMAL INSULATION
(First Revision)
(With Amendment No. 1) Not more than 2 per-
1.
Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation. Can be used for temperature range 700C to -200C with suitable facing material.
2.
3.4 Moisture Absorption cent.
3.5 Incombustibility - Shall be rated as incombustible. Loss in total mass shall not exceed 5 percent. 3.6 Thermal conductivity the following: Mean Temwpture or k-value shall not exceed k-value in mW/cm ,--+n 200 kg/m3 0.42 0.50 0.60 0.72 150 kg/m3 0.46 0.52 0.62 0.75
Types
Type I - Loose rock and slag wool fluffy, light weight material). (shall be
Type 2 - Stitched rock and slag wool mats (shall be in the form of stitched mats with confining media on one or both sides. If confining medium is metallic cage, it shall be attached to the mat by stabbing at not more than 250 mm centres or by stitching at not more than 250 mm along width and 100 mm along length with twine or metallic wire not thicker than 0.7 mm. If confining medium is of hessian cloth, scrim cloth, kraft paper or glass tissue, it shall be stitched to the mat with suitable twine). 3.
kg/m3 0.48 0.54 0.66 0.78
kg/m3 0.50 0.56 0.68 0.80
50 100 150 200 3.7
Sulphur Content -
Shall not exceed 0.6 percent. - Type 2 material shall be 3 cm or 100 zb 3 cm, and in 60, 75, 90 and 100 mm. -5 mm.
Requirements
3.8 Width and Thickness supplied in widths of 90 + thickness of 25, 40, 50, Tolerance on thickness is 3.9
3.1 Apparent Density - As agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. Tolerance ? 15 percent on declared density.
3.2 Apparent density under specified load (in kg/m3) Apparent Density Under Speci$ed Load, Max h \ / At Factory At Site 95 105 136 150 165 115 130 165 185 200
Optional Requirements Moisture content Not more than 2 per-
3.9.1 cent.
3.9.2 Resistance to micro-organisms show any mould of bacterial growth. 3.9.3 Odour emission test apparent difference in odour. 3.9.4 Oil content -
Shall not
Load, kgfJcm2
There shall be no
Not more than 2 percent. Not more than 0.3 perNot more than Not more than
0.01 0.02 0.05 0.07 0.10
3.9.5 Carbon content cent of total carbon.
3.9.6 Resistance to vibration 1 percent by height of settlement. 3.9.7 Resistance to jolting 3 percent by height of settlement.
3.3 Shot Content - Shall not exceed the values given below. Any shot present shall not be more than 5 mm in any dimension. 500-micron IS sieve 5 percent (by mass) 250-micron IS sieve 15 percent (by mass) 445
3.9.8 Heat resistance - Shall not suffer visible deterioration in the fibrous structures. 3.9.9 Fibre than 7 microns. diameter Average not more
SP : 21-1983
3.9.10 Alkalinity between 7.0 and 10.0.
pH value of solution shall be
3.9.11 Corrosive attack - Shall not cause corrosion of. the surface on which it is applied.
Note-For methods of tests for requirements given in 3.2 and 3.9.10, refer to Appendices A and B of the sfundnrd. For other test methods, refer to IS : 3144-1965 Methods of test for mineral wool thermal insulation materials and IS : 3346-1966 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method). For detailed information, refer to IS : 3677-1973 thermal insulation (first revision). Specification for unbonded rock and slag wool for
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3690-1974 UNBONDED GLASS WOOL FOR THERMAL INSULATION
(F&t Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for unbonded glass wool for thermal insulation. Can be used for temperahire range of - 195C to 550C with a suitable facing material. 2. Types Type 1 - Loose glass wool (shall be fluffy light weight material). Type2 - Stitched glass wool mats (shall be in the form of stitched mats with a confining media on one or both sides. If the confining medium is of metallic cage, it shall be attached to the mat by stabbing at not more than 250 mm centres or by stitching at not more than 250 mm along width at 100 mm along length with twine or metallic wire not thicker than 0.7 mm. If confining medium is of hessian cloth, scrim cloth, kraft paper or glass tissue, it shall be stitched to the mat with suitable twine). 3. Requirements 3.3 Shot Content - Shall not exceed 10 percent by mass when sieved through 250-micron IS Sieve. Any shot present shall not be more than 2 mm size. 3.4 Moisture Absorption cent. Not more than 0.5 per-
3.5 Incombustibility - Shall be rated as incombustible. Loss in total mass shall not exceed 5 percent. 3.6 Thermal conductivity the following: Mean Temperature CC> 50 100 150 200 or k-vaIue shall not exceed k-value (mW/cmC) 0.43 0.52 0.64 0.78
3.7 Type 2 Material - Width as agreed. Tolerance on width: +3 mm. Thickness: 25, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90 and 100 mm. Tolerance on thickness: 5 mm. 3.8 Optional Requirements Shall not
3.8.1 Resistance to micro-organism support any mould or bacterial growth. 3.8.2 Odour emission test apparent difference in odour. 3.8.3 cent. Sulphur content -
3.1 Apparent Density - As agreed to between the supplier and the purchaser. Tolerance f 15 percent on declared density. 3.2 Apparent Density Under SpeciJed Load: Apparent Density, Max &g/m3) 130 145 180 210 240
There shall be no
Not more than 0.1 perNot more than 0.3 perThere shall be no There shall be no
Load &g/cm21 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.07 0.10
3.8.4 Carbon content cent of total carbon.
3.8.5 Resistance to vibration evidence of settlement. . 3.8.6 Resistance to jolting evidence of settlement. 446 -
SP : 21-1983
3.8.7 rons.
Fihre diameter -
Not more than 10 mic-
3.8.9 Alkalinity --pH between 7.0 and 10.0.
value of solution shall be
3.8.8 Heat resistance - Shall not suffer visual deterioration in the fibrous structures.
3.8.10 Corrosive attack - Shall not cause corrosion on the surface on which it is applied.
Note-For methods of tests for requirements given in 3.2 and 3.8.9, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. For other test methods, refer to IS : 3144-1965 Methods of test for mineral wool thermal insulation materials, and IS : 3346-1966 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method). For detailed information, insulation (first revision). refer to IS : 3690-1974 Specification for unbonded glass wool for thermal
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4671-1968 EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE THERMAL INSULATION PURPOSES

1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for expanded polystyrene in the form of rough shapes, finished boards and blocks and pipe laggings for thermal insulation. Primarily used in refrigeration and building applications in the temperature range -200C to 80C. 2. Types Type N - Normal Type SE - Self-extinguishing 3. 3.1 Requirements Dimensions 3.1.2 Thickness 100 mm. 3.1.3 Tolerance:
FOR
and
15,20,25,40,50,60,75
Finished boards and blocks Length, width and thickness Pipe laggings Outside diameter Inside diameter
Tolerance f2mm
f3mm f2mm Shall not
3.2 Thermal Conductiviry or k-vahe exceed the following values: Apparent Density &g/m> 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 447
k-value at 50C (mW/cmC) 0.41 0.39 0.37 0.35
3.1.1 Size Finished boards: 1X 0.5 m or other agreed sizes Pipe laggings : 1 or 0.5 m in length or other agreed length
SY : 21-1983
3.3 The material shall also comply ments given in Table 1. 3.4 Speciai Requirements
with require-
3.4.1 Flammability -The self-extinguishing type.
material
shall be of
for Type SE.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE

SL No. CHARAC~IS~C REQUIREMENTS AT VARIOUS NOMINAL A~P~ENTDENSITIRS A ' 15 kg/m3 i) ii) iii) iv) Compressive Gross-breaking strength at 10 percent deformation, stmngtfi in kg/cm*, in kg/cm2, Min 0.7 1.4 20 kg/m3 0.9 1.6 25 kg/m3 1.1 1.8 30 kg/m3 1.4
Min
Water vapour permeance, Thermal stability, Note -
in g/m2 24 h, MUX
50
1 A to D of the standard.
40
1
30
1
2.2 20
1
percent, Mar
For methods of test, refer to Appendices
Note-For insulation
standard.
method materials
of test for k-value, (two slab, guarded
refer to IS : 3346-1966 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal hot-plate method) and for method of test for flammability, refer to Appendix E of fhe
For detailed inform&ion, insulation purposes.
refer
to IS : 4671-1968
Specification
for
expanded
polystyrene
for
thermal
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6598-1972 CELLULAR CONCRETE FOR THERMAL INSULATION

1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for cellular concrete for thermal insulation.
Note - Cellular concrete (formed by producing gas or air bubbles in a cement or cement-sand slurry) is a versatile constmction material on account of its light weight, high thermal insulation, resistance to sulphate action, resistance to alternate cooling and thawing (when high pressure steam cured) and resistance to penetration of water. When cast in situ, it can be applied over flat roofs for thermal insulation.
2.2 Each of these two types shall have three grades, namely: Grade A - Light weight Grade B - Medium weight Grade C - Heavy weight 3. Materials a) Aggregate - Sand, ground quartz, shale fly ash, granulated slag, etc. b) Binders - Portland cement or lime. c) Glassing agents - Organic foaming agents based on resin soap, glue, surface active agents, or fine aluminium powder, zinc dust, calcium carbide, calcium hypochlorite, etc. Requirements Density Grade A B C 448 Average Bulk Density, Up to 320 321 to 400 401 to 500 kg/m3
2.
Types and Grades
2.1 Two types of material depending on manner of manufacture, namely: Type 1 - High pressure steam cured (autoclaved) material in the form of precast blocks. Type 2 - Cured under normal conditions (that is, under ambient pressure and temperature) by water. Either cast in situ or as precast blocks.
4. 4.1
SP : 21-1983
4.2
Crushing Strength
4.5 Dimensions - For Type 1 and Type 2, length 50 or 60 cm; width 20,25 or 30 cm; and thickness 7 S, 10, 15, 25 or 40 cm. 7.0 12.0 20.0 2.5 4.5 8.0 20 4.5.1 Tolerance: +3 percent on width and height and li- 1 percent on thickness.
A 0 C
4.3 Capillaq Absorption -- Shall not exceed percent in case of Type 1 cellular concrete. 4.4 Thermal Conductirit;v Grade Thermal Conductivity at 50C Mean Temp, Max mW/cmC 0.7 0.85 1.0
A 0 C
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3346-1966 Method of test for preformed block-type and pipe covering-type thermal insulation, IS : 5688-1970 Method for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) and Appendix A of the sfundard.
refer to IS : 6598-1972 Specification for cellular concrete for thermal insulation.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 7509-1974 THERMAL INSULATING CEMENTS (TYPE 750)

1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for thermal insulating cements for use at temperatures up to 750C (Type 750). Note - Typical material% used are:
a) diatomaceous earth (silica). calcium silicate with suitable proportion of heat-resistant binder and mineral wool and/or asbestos fibres; and b) predominantly mineral wool fibres with a suitable proportion of heat-resistant binder.
-TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR THERMAL INSULATING CEMENTS (TYPE 750)

SL No. CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENT
2. Requirements - The material (in the form of dry powder) shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1.
i) Consistency a) Method A, percent b) vethod B, percent ii) Dry covering capacity, m*, 1 cm in thickness per 100 kg of dry cement, Min iii) Volume change (shrinkage) upon drying, percent, Max iv) Compressive strength at 5 percent deformation, kgf/cm*, Min v) Dry adhesion to steel, kgf/cm*, Min vi) Linear shrinkage (length) after heat soaking at 75OC, percent, Max vii) Thermal conductivity, mW/cmC Max: Mean Temperature, C 95 260 370
35 to 45 175 to 235 20
25 0.7 0.35 3
0.75 0.80 0.85
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to IS : 5724-1970 Methods of test for thermal insulating cements, and IS : 3346-1966 Method the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method).
for
___-
refer to IS : 7.509-1974 Specification 449
for thermal
insulating
cements
(Type 750). .-
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 75 lo-1974
THERMAL
INSULATING
_-
CEMENTS (TYPE 350)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for thermal insulating cements for use at temperatures up to 350C (Type 350).
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR THERMAL INSULATING CEMENTS (TYPE 350)

SL No. CHARACBR~S~~ ZtEQUlREhENT
Note -
Typical materials used are: carbonate with reinforcing
a) basic hydrated magnesium asbestos tibres;
b) hydrated magnesium carbonate, reinforcing asbestos fibres;
calcium
silicate with
c) hydrated magnesium carbonate, light mass mineral wool, with reinforced asbestos tibres: and d) predominantly mineral wool tibres with a suitable proportion of heat-resistant binder.
i) Consistency: a) Method A, percent b) Method B, percent ii) Dry covering capacity, m*, 1 cm in thickness per 100 kg of cement, Min iii) Volume change (shrinkage) upon drying, percent, Max iv) Linear shrinkage (length) after 24 h heat soaking at 350C. percent, Max V) Compressive strength at 5 percent deformation, kgf/cm*, Min vi) Thermal conductivity, mW/cmC, Max Mean Tenperame, 100 150 200 250 c:
35 to 45 175 to 230 17.5
25 2.0 3.5
2. Requirements -The material (in the form of dry powder) shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS the determination of thermal conductivity
_~
0.92 1.00 1.07 1.12
: 5724-1974 Methods of test for thermal insulating cements,and

of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate
IS : 3346-1966 Method method).
for
refer to IS : 7510-1974 Specification for thermal insulating cements (Type 350).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8154-1976 PREFORMED CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION (FOR TEMPERATURES UP TO 65OOC)

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for preformed calcium silicate insulation intended for use in surfaces which reach temperatures up to 650C.
Note - This insulation is predominantly composed of reacted hydrous calcium silicate reinforced with suitable fibres so as to meet the specified requirements.
No. 1) b) wet (after 18 hours immersion in water) under a load of 170 kN/mZ.
2.3
Flexural
Strength -
The average value not less
than 240 kN/m*. 2.4 Heat Resistance - The material shall be deemed suitable for use under conditions of soaking heat for 24 hours at 650C up to the temperature at which the following requirements are met: a) Linear shrinkage 2 percent, Max b) Loss in weight 15 percent, Max c) Compressive Reduction in thickstrength ness under a load of 345 kN/m2, cent, Max 10 per-
2.
Requirements
2.1 Bulk Density - Average value 200 to 350 kg/m3. Tolerance: f 15 percent on the declared value. 2.2 Compressive Strength -Reduction in thickness shall not exceed 10 percent when a) dry under a load of 4 15 kN/m2, and
450
SP : 21-1983
2.5
Thermal Conductivity Mean Temperature C 100 150 200 Thermal Conductivity (Average), Max mW/cmC 0.65 0.75 0.80 Shall not exceed 1.5 per-
2.9.3
Pipe sections
500 or TO fit external 20, 25, 1 000 mm standard pipes of dia up to 219 mm 40, 50, 60 or 75 _
Length Diameter Thickness
2.6 Moisture cent by mass.
Content -
2.9.4 Curved segments (radiused and hevelled lags) - Lengths 500 or 1 000 mm and thicknesses 20, 25.40. 50. 60 and 75 _ for curved surface having external radius greater than 110 mm.
I I
2.7 Alkalinity - The i>H of the solution of material shall be between 7.0 and 10.0. 2.8 Standard Shapes - Flat blocks, bevelled lags, pipe sections or radiused and bevelled lags. 2.9 Standard Sizes Flat blocks 500, 600 or 900 mm 150, 300 or 600 mm 25.40,50,60,75 or 100 mm
2.10
Dimensional
Tolerance +3 mm -1.5 _ +3 +3 _ -0 +5mm - 1.5 mm +3
a) Flat blocks 1) Length and width 2) Thickness b) Pipe sections 1) Length 2) Inside diameter 3) Thickness (average)
2.9.1
Length Width Thickness 2.9.2
Bevelled lags 500, 600 or 900 mm

75 or 150 mm 25,40,50,60,75 or 100 mm
L=gth
Major width Thickness
2.10.1 Uniformity - Local thickness of insulation material at any point shall not vary from the average thickness by more than +3 mm.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3346-1966 Method for determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method), IS : 5688-1970 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe-covering type thermal insulation, IS : 5724-1970 Methods of test for thermal insulating cement,and Appendices A and B of fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8154-1976 Specification for preformed calcium silicate insulation (for temperatures up to 6.5OC). ____~ ._~ ~___
451
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 8183-1976 BONDED MINERAL WOOL

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for bonded mineral wool for thermal insulation. This can be used with a suitable facing material for a temperature range of - 40 to 700C. 2. Requirements 50 100 150 200 250 300 2.7 No. 1) Thermal Conductivity Thermal Conductivity mW/cmC , 2.1 Description - Material shall be mineral wool made from rock slag or glass processed from a molten state into fibrous form and shall be bonded with a suitable binder. Slabs are normally supplied unfaced but may have an applied finish of cloth, foil, wire netting, glass tissue, polythene or other material on one or both faces as may be specified. 2.2 Bulk Density Bulk Density kg/m3 12-50 50-80 80-120 120-160 Maximum Recommended Hot Face Temperature, C up up up up to to to to 250 400 550 750 0.49 Q.69 0.95 A Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.64 0.62 0.62 0.78 0.73 0.68 0.84 0.80 0.93 1.10 0.95 0.90 2.8 Sulphur Content - Shall not contain more than 0.6 percent of sulphur (after removal of the facing, if any). 2.9 Dimensions - Length: 100, 120, 140 cm or as agreed. Widths: 50, 60, 75 and 100 cm. Nominal thickness: 25, 40, 50, 65, 75 mm or as agreed. 2.9.1 Dimensional tolerances - For width and length: - % percent or - 3 mm; for nominal thickness in the range of 25 to 75 mm, it shall be -2 mm. Plus tolerance on all dimensions is permitted. 2.10 Optional Requirements Shall 2.10.1 Resistance to micro-organisms not show any mould or bacterial growth. \
Mean Temperature C
Group 1 2 3 4 2.2.1
Variation shall not exceed 2 15 percent.
2.3 Recovery after Compression - Recovery after compression of 75 percent of the original thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the original thickness. 2.4 Shot Content. - Shall not be more than the values given below. Any shot present in the bonded mineral wool shall not be greater than 5 mm in any dimension: IS Sieve 500-micron 250-micron Shot Content, Percent by Mass, Max 5 15
2.10.2 Odour emission test - Shall be no apparent difference in odour of the butter when compared with the blanks. 2.10.3 Resistance to vibration - Shall show not more than 1 percent height of settlement. 2.10.4 Resistance to jolting - Shall show not more than 3 percent height of settlement, or as agreed. 2.10.5 Heat resistance - Shall not suffer visible deterioration of the fibrous structure when heated to the maximum recommended temperature of use. 2.10.6 Alkalinity - ThepH of the solution of the material shall be between 7.0 and 10.0. 2.10.7 Corrosive attack - Material shall not cause corrosion of the surface on which it is applied.
2.5 Moisture Content and Moisture Absorption Shall not contain more than 2 percent moisture. Shall not gain in mass by more than 2 percent. 2.6 Incombustibility - Shall be rated as incombustible when it passes the prescribed test. LOSS in total mass shall not exceed 5 percent.
Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS : 3144-1965 Methods of test for mineral wool thermal insulation materials, IS : 3346-1966 Methods for the determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method), and Appendices A and B of the stnndard. ______I___-
For detailed
information,
refer to IS : 8183-1976
Specification
for bonded
mineral
wool.
452
SECTlON
25
PLASTICS
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title
IS : 2036-1974 IS : 2046-1%9 Phenolic laminated sheets (first revision) Decorative thermosetting synthetic resin bonded
Page
455 456 457 459
laminated
sheets
(jirst revision) IS : 2508-1977

IS : 6307- 197 1 Low density polyethylene Rigid PVC sheets films (first revision)
454
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2036-1974 PHENOLIC
LAMINATED
SHEETS
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for phenolic resin bonded laminated sheets with cellulose paper or woven cotton fabric as filler and covers eight grades. Covers only sheets of nominal thickness 0.4 to 50 mm for cellulose paper based grades and 0.4 to 100 mm for woven cotton fabric based grades. Specifies mandatory as well as optional requirements. 3. Mandatory Requirements
3.1 Appearance - Surface finish and edge finish shall be as agreed. Sheets of all grades shall be free from detrimental local deformation and splitting. 3.2 Flatness (for Sheets of Thickness Above) - Shall not exceed: 3.2 mm and
2.
Types and Grades
6.35 mm under 1 000 mm straight edge 3.00 mm under 600 mm straight edge 0.70 mm under 300 mm straight edge 3.3 Resistance to Hot Oil - Shall show no sign of splitting, blistering, disintegration or warping after the prescribed test. Note - For method of test refer to IS : 1998-1%2*. 3.4 Machining Test (for Sheets of Thickness 3.2 mm a&Above) - Shall be capable of being sawn, milled, drilled and tapped with M 3.5 tap and being shaped in shaping machine without showing obvious signs of splitting, cracking or chipping.
Note 1 - For tolerance on nominal thickness, refer to Table 1 of the standard. Note 2 - Requirements for physical characteristics, such as tensile strength, cross-breaking strength, electric strength, insulation resistance and water absorption, refer to Tables 2 and 3 ofthe
a) Type P -
Made from layers of cellulose paper using thermosetting synthetic resin as bonding medium. Graded as Pl , P2, P3, P4 and P5 on the basis of their electrical properties and resistance to water absorption, in the increasing order of such properties. Made from layers of woven cotton fabric using thermosetting synthetic resin as bonding medium. Graded as F 1, F2, F3 and F4 in the increasing order of coarseness of ~10th and increasing impact strength, but decreasing tensile strength.
b) Type F -
Note 1 - The number of threads in warp and weft of the fabric filter usually falls in the following range:
standard.
Grade
Fl F2 F3 F4
No,C$Threads (War/> and W#

37 to 39 per cm 18 to 39 per cm 12to20percm 1X to 39 per cm
4.
Optional Requirements
Note 1 -For requirements for physical characteristics, such as shear strength, compression strength, impact strength, electric strength, insulation resistance, power factor and permittivity, refer to Tables 4, 5 and 5A of rhe srandard. Note 2 as agreed.
Method of test and limits for punching test shall be
Note 2 - For details of each grade in regard to construction, properties and suitability for particular use, refer to 3.2 of he
standard.
*Methods of test for thermosetting laminated sheets.
synthetic
resin bonded
For detailed revision).
information, _~
refer
to IS : 20361974
Specification
for
phenolic
laminated
sheets
(first
455
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 20461969 DECORATIVE THERMOSETTING SYNTHETIC RESIN BONDED LAMINATED SHEETS
(First Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope No. 1) 3.3.2 Rectangularjnishedpanels - Dimensions shall be as mutually agreed. Unless otherwise agreed, the tolerance shall be as follows: For lengths and widths up to and including 320 mm For lengths and widths above 320 mm 3.4 Nominal Thickness mutually agreed. Tolerance f0.4 mm
1.1 Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for aminoplastic faced phenolic laminated sheets having coloured and/or patterned surfaces incorporated during manufacture. The material is intended for interior use. The specification applies to sheets in which the only filler is paper and does not cover sheets with a core of any other material, for example, hardboard. When used by itself, the material covered by this standard is not intended for load bearing applications. 1.2 The material may be used as wall panels or as veneer for wood or other surfaces. These laminated sheets require no additional decorative finish. Laminates with metal foil am not covered by this standard. 2. Types Type I - Having only one side bearing the decorative surface, the other side being roughened or given an appropriate treatment to promote adhesion to the base; and Type 2 - Having both sides bearing the decorative surface, the two sides may be different in colour or pattern or both. 3. Requirements
kO.125 percent
1.5, 3.0 mm or more as shall be as follows: f0.25 mm f0.30 mm As mutually agreed Finished
For thickness 1.5 mm For thickness 3.0 mm For thickness above 3.0 mm
3.5 Straightness Panels
sf Edges of Rectangular
For panels of length less than 0.6 m 0.6 m and above
0.4 mm Max from straight line 20.06 L mmMax from, straight line (L = length of straight line in metres).
3.6 Squareness of Rectangular Finisheti Panels - Out of square by not more than 3 mm per 2.5 m length. 3.7 Resistance to Dry Heat -There shall be no blistering or appreciable surface deterioration on loss of gloss. 3.8 Dimensional Stability - Dimensional change shall be not mom than 0.5 percent in machine direction and 0.9 percent in perpendicular direction. 3.9 Resistance to Immersion in Boiling Water Water absorption shall not exceed 10 percent. Increase in thickness of sheet shall not exceed 10 percent. There shall be no crazing, blistering or delamination. 3.10 Resistance to Staining - Shall not show any blistering or discolouration at the final examination. 3.11 Cross-Breaking Strength - Shall not be less than the following values: a) With decorative face in 850 kgf/cm2 tension b) With decorative face in 1 200 kgf/cm* compression (shall apply only to 1.5 mm thick sheets) 456
3.1 Appearance - Surface and edge finish, colour, pattern, etc , as mutually agreed. 3.2 Flatness
3.2.1 For 1.5 mm nominal thickness - Height above flat surface at the edges of the full manufactured and trimmed width shall not exceed 150 mm. 3.2.2 For nominal thickness 3 mm and over The departure at any point of its surface from a light straight edge shall not exceed the following: Length of Straight Edge mm 300 600 1 000 3.3 Nominal Length and Width Sheets for fabrication - Dimensions shall be as mutually agreed. and Max Departure mm 1.0 3.0 6.5
3.3.1 tolerance
SP : 21-1983
3.12 Impact Strength
Not less than 0.035 kgf.m.
3.14
Optional Requirements
3.13 Machining Test -Shall be capable of being sawn, milled, drilled and tapped without splitting or cracking.
Note l-For the benefit of users, general information has been given in Appendix A of fhe standard. Note 2-For methods of tests, refer to Appendices on proper
3.14.1 Colour fastness to artificial light - Shall not be inferior to standard pattern for light fastness rating No. 5.
use; application and maintenance of decorative laminated sheets
B to J of the srandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 20461969 bondedJaminated sheets (first revision).
Specification
for decorative
thermosetting
syn?hetic resin
SUMMAKY
OF
IS : 2508-1977 LOW DENSITY

1. Scope
POLYETHYLENE
FILMS
(First Revision)
1.1 Requirements and methods of sampling and test for natural (essentially colourless) and black colour (carbon black pigment) low density polyethylene tilms intended for packaging, agricultural operations and post harvest uses, construction work and allied purposes. 1.2 This shall cover flexible (non-rigid), unsupported flat or tubular films, 12.5 to 250 pm in thickness and width 250 to 7 500 mm, having a density between 0.908 and 0.938 g/ml at 27C.
Note -When the Nm is intended for use for fumigation purposes, film of thickness above 175 /*m shall be used. The actual thickness of the film to be used shall be as agreed between the purchaser and the supplier.
of normal clarity, low impact strength and slip has not been tested. 3. 3.1 Requirements General
3.1.1 Appearance - The film shall be uniform in colour, texture and finish and free from pinholes and substantially free from undispersed raw materials, streaks and particles of foreign matter. Shall have no other visible defects, such as holes, tears or blisters. 3.1.2 Film form - Film shall be furnished in the form of flat sheet or rolls or in the form of flat tubing or in any other form as mutually agreed. 3.1.3 Odour able odour. 3.1.4 3.2 Density Dimensional Shall be free from any objectionDensity shall be as given in 1.2.
1.3 Coloured film other than black shall be as agreed between the supplier and the purchaser. 2. Grades - Film shall be classified according to clarity, impact strength and slip. Each grade shall be designated by a set of 3 numerals: first one for clarity, second for impact strength and third for slip property. Numeral 0 shall mean the material has not been tested for that particular property. For clarity, impact strength and slip property, numerals 1, 2 and 3 shall mean the following: Numerals 1 2 3 4 For example, Clarity Low Normal High Impact Strength Low Normal High Slip Property Low Medium High Extra high
Requirements
3.2.1
Tolerance on thickness Tolerance percent 40 pm on width Tolerance mm *5 rt8 f20 f40 +65 f25 +20
Nominal thickness
Up to and including Above 40 pm 3.2.2 Tolerance
Nominal Width cm up to Above Above Above Above 457 50 50 and up to 125 125 and up to 250 250 and up to 300 300
Grade 210 shall mean that the film is
SP : 21-1983
3.3
Yield Tolerance One roll Lots of 250 kg Lots over 250 kg and up to 1 250 kg Lots over 1 250 kg + 10 percent f 10 percent + 5 percent f 3 percent
3.7.2
Normal impact resistant jlm Impact Failure Load, Min N 0 0.35 (35) 0.4D (40) 0.65 (65) 0.85 (85) 1.25 (125) 1.65 (165)
Average Thickness of Film Pm 20 25 40 50 75 100 3.7.3
3.4 Tensile Strength at Break - Not less than 10.79 MN/m* (110 kgf/cm*) in lengthwise direction and 7.36 MN/m* (75 kgf/m*) in crosswise direction for all thicknesses of film. 3.5 Elongation at Break Elongation at Break, Min A I , Lengthwise Crosswise percent percent 100 200 350 400
High impact resistant jilm
Thickness of the Film
a) Up to 100 ,um thickness Average Thickness of Film Pm 20 25 40 50 75 100 b) Over 100 pm thickness Average Thickness of Film Wn 100 150 200 225 250
for intermediate thicknesses
Impact Failure Load, Min N (80 0.9 1.05 1.40 1.75 2.45 3.15 (90) (105) (140) (175) (245) (315)
From 12.5 pm up tq but not including 75 pm 75 pm and over
3.6 Clarity - 45 gloss and haze of film shall conform to the requirements given below: Grade Low clarity film Normal clarity film High clarity film 45 Gloss, Min Below 30 30 to 55 Greater than 55 Haze, Max Greater than 15 percent 10 to 15 percent 6 to IO percent
Impact Failure Load, Min N (80 2.00 3.15 4.15 4.70 5.10 (200) (315) (415) (470) (510)
Note - These two measurements do not always correlate. The particular measurement concerned with the application of the material shall govern in case of an inconsistency.
Note - Valuesfor impactfailure load, given in 3.7.1 to 3.7.3

may be obtained by interpolation.
3.7
Impact Resistance Low impact resistant jilm Impact Failure Load, Min N (80 0.4 (40) 0.6 (60) 0.8 (80)
of test, refer to Appendix A of fhe standard.
3.7.1
3.8 Slip - Kinetic coefficient rial shall be as follows: a) Low slip film b) Medium slip film c) High slip film d) Extra high slip film
of friction for mate-
Average Thickness of Film Pm 12.5 20.0 25.0

Note-For methods
Greater than 0.8 Greater than 0.5 but not greater than 0.8 Great& than 0.2 but not greater than 0.5 Not greater than 0.2
For detailed revision).
information,
refer to IS : 2508-1977
Specification
for low density polyethylene
films
(first
458
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF.
IS : 6307-1971 RIGID PVC SHEETS

1. Scope - Requirements and methods of sampling and test for rigid PVC sheets of 0.10 to 12.5 mm in thickness, manufactured by calendering, extrusion or calendering followed by lamination. Note - The sheet consists of polyvinyl chloride, and/or a copolymer of which the major constituent is vinyl chloride, suitably compounded with other ingredients. It is put to a wide range of uses. General purpose rigid PVC sheets are used in display and advertising; chemical resistance type in chemical plants for tanks. tank linings, ductings etc; high impact sheets in helmets, aircraft map cases, parachute boxes, panellings etc; and vacuum forming type for domestic and industial trays, trays for developing photographs, refrigerator door panels, etc. The sheets shall be stacked horizontally on clean, firm and level ground in stacks not exceeding 25 cm in height.
2.
Nominal Thickness mm
Tolerance on Thickness, Percent /\ Emuded Calendered Calendered and Laminated (4) +20 f10 f10
(1) 0.10 to 0.24 0.25 to 0.49 0.50 to 0.74 0.75 to 1.24 1.25 t9 9.99 10.00 to 12.50
(2) +20 f15 +12 f10 f8 -
(3) f12 +10 +10 -
Types - May be transparent to opaque, colourless or coloured, and classified into: Type I Type 2 Type 3 -. Type 4 -
General purpose, Suitable for applications where chemical resistance is required, With high impact strength, and Suitable for deep draw vacuum forming.
3.2.1 The thickness of plain sheet shall be measured with a micrometer (gravimetrically up to nominal thickness of 0.24 mm). +5 for 3.3 Length and Width - Tolerance _. _ rectangular panels. For other shapes, the tolerances as agreed. 3.4 Squareness - Cut sheets shall not deviate more than 10 mm from a true rectangle of the same dimensions. 3.5 Physical Requirements -See Table 1.
3.
Requirements
3.1 Appearance - Sheet shall be uniform in colour, transparency and finish; reasonably free from detrimental scratches, creases, streaks, pinholes, dents, pimples and inclusions. 3.2 Thickness
TABLE
SL No. CHARACTERISTIC
3.6 Delamination Sheet) - Material nation.
(Calendered and Laminated shall show no signs of delami-
3.7 Colour Fastness - Shall be tested if agreed between the purchaser and the supplier.
OF RIGID PVC SHEET
REQUIREMENT / Type 1 Type 2 A Type 3 Type 4 1
REQUIREMENTS
9 Softening point, C, Min ii) Impact strength, number of failures iii) Tensile stress at yield; kg/cmz, Min iv) Dimensional change at 12OC, percent, Mar: a) Extruded or calendered
75 450 20 5 To
15 450 20 5 70 pass
65 No 380 20 5 the
50 failures 380 As agreed to 15 test
b) Calendered and laminated Resistance to concentrated sulphuric acid, percent, original shear v) strength, Min vi) Flammability
Note-For
methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to H of the stu&&.
For detailed
information,
refer to IS : 6307-1971
Specification 459
for rigid PVC sheets.
SECTION
26
CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and including 1 100 volts (second revision) IS : 1596-1977 Polyethylene insulated cables for working voltages up to and including 1 100 volts (second revision) IS : 9968 Elastomer insulated cables IS : 9968 (Part I)-1981 For working voltages up to and including 1 100 volts IS : 9968 (Part II)-1981 For working voltages from 3.3 kV up to and including 11 kV IS : 694-1977 Page 463 465
466 467
462
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 694-1977 PVC INSULATED CABLES FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UP TO AND INCLUDING 1100 VOLTS
(Second Revision)
(With Amcndmcnt No. I)
1. Scope - Requirements and tests for the following types of unarmoured PVC insulated cables with copper or aluminium conductors and flexible cords with copper conductors for electric power and lighting (including weatherproof cables and cables for low temperature conditions) for voltages up to and including 1 100 V. 1.1
Types of cables a) Cables for fixed wiring: 1) Single core (unsheathed); 2) Single core (sheathed); 3) Circular twin, three and four core (sheathed); 4) Flat twin with or without FCC (sheathed); and 5) Flat three core (sheathed). b) Flexible 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) cords:
2.2
Construction
2.2.1 Conductor - Conductors for cables for fixed wiring shall be solid and/or stranded type depending upon nominal cross-sectional area of conductors. For cables having nominal area less than 25 mm* shall be circular only and for nominal area 25 mm* and above, these may be circular or shaped. 2.2.2 Insulation -The vided with PVC insulation 2.2.3 Laying-up conductor shall be proapplied by extrusion.
of cores
4 Flat twin and three-core

ECC) by side.
cables (without Two or three cores shall be laid side
b) Flat-twin
Single core (unsheathed); Single core (sheathed); Parallel twin (unsheathed); Twisted twin (unsheathed); Circular twin, three and (sheathed); and 6) Flat twin (sheathed).
cables (with ECC) - Two COIES with a bare ECC (in centre) shall be laid side by side.
c) Circular twin, three-and four-core cables four core Two,three or four cores shal1 be laid together with a suitable right-hand lay. The interstices between cores may be filled with unvulcanized rubber, thermoplastic material or any other suitable material. A binder tape of plastic material or proofed copper may be applied over laid-up cores. d) Circular twin, three-and four-core flexible cords - Two, three or four cords shall be twisted together with a suitable right-hand lay. The interstices may be filled with sheathing material, textile material or strengthening cords of textile or any other suitable material. e) Parallel twin (unsheathed) flexible cords Two conductors shall be laid parallel and insulated simultaneously such that the cores can be separated readily without damage.
1.2 These cables are suitable for use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or,uneatthed) system for rated voltages up to and including 1 100 V. These cables may be used on dc system for rated voltages up to and including 1 500 V. 1.3 These combination rise due to temperature 2. cables are suitable for use where the of ambient temperature and temperature load results in a continuous conductor not exceeding 70C.
Requirements
Material
2.1
2.1.1 Conductor - The conductor shall be composed of plain annealed high conductively copper wines and aluminium wires in case of copper and aluminium conductors respectively. 2.1.2 Insulation PVC compound. sheath Shall be composed of
f) Twisted twin (unsheathed
flexible cords Two conductors shall be laid parallel and insulated simultaneously such that the cover can be separated readily without damage. Sheathing Shall be applied by extrusion.
2.2.4 463
SP : 21-1983
2.2.5 Thickness of insulation and sheath Range of average thickness shall not be less than the nominal values specified in the following table:
c) Wrapping test (for aluminium), d) Conductor resistance test, e) Test for thickness of insulation
and sheath,
We
Range of Nominal Sectional Area of Conductor (m2) l-630

0.5-4.0
a) Single-core PVC insulated cables (unsheathed) b) Flexible PVC insulated cords (unsheathed) c) PVC insulated and sheathed cables d) Flexible PVC insulated and cords
Note l-Nominal and 630 mm*. Note Z-For
Range of Nominal Thickness of Insulation (=I O.l-2.8

0.6- 0.8
Range of Nominal Thickness of Sheath (mm) -
l-50 0.5-4.0
0.6- 1.4 0.6- 0.8
0.8-1.8 0.9- 1 .o
cross-sectional area of conductor-l,
1.5, 2.5, 4.6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300, 400, 500
---~_
detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.
2.3 Cable Code - The following code shall be used for designating the cable:
Constituent
Aluminium conductor PVC insulation PVC sheath Earth continuity conductor
Code Letter
A Y Y (ECC)
f) Physical tests for insulation and sheath, g) Test for bleeding and blooming of pigments, h) Insulation resistance test, and j) High voltage test (water immersion test). 3.2 Acceptance Tests and (h) of 3.1. 3.3 Tests specified in (a) to (e)
Routine Tests
a) Conductor resistance test, and b) High voltage test or Spark test.
Note - For detailed constructional requirements refer to Section III of rlze srandard.
3.
Tests
3.4
Optional Tests
a) Cold bend test, b) Cold impact test, and c) Additional ageing test (for weather proof cables).
3.1
Type Tests
a) Annealing test (for copp?r), b) Tensile test (for aluminium),
Note-For test details, refer to IS : 5831-1970 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 8130-1976 Specification for conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords, and fhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 694-1977 Specification for PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and including I 100 volts. ----
464
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1596-1977 POLYETHYLENE INSULATED CABLES FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UP TO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS
(Second Revision)
1, Scope - Requirements and tests for the following types of unarmoured polyethylene (PE) insulated, PVC or PE sheathed cables with copper or aluminium conductors for electric power and lighting (including weatherproof cables) for voltages up to and including 1 100 v. 1.1 Types of Cables e) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath, f) Physical tests for PE insulation and sheath and for PVC sheath g) Fire resistance test (for PVC sheathed cables), h) Test for bleeding and blooming of pigments, j) Insulation resistance test, k) High voltage test and spark test, and m) Additional ageing test (for PVC sheathed weatherproof cables). 3.2 Acceptance Tests
4 Single core; b) Circular twin, three and four core; c) Flat twin with or without ECC (earth continuity conductor); d) Flat three core. and
4 Annealing test (for copper), b) Tensile test (for aluminium),
Note - For use as weatherpmf cables, the sheath of PE sheathed cables shall have a suitably dispersed carbonblack content, and the PVC sheathed cables shall meet the requirements Of additional ageing test.
c>Wrapping
test (for aluminium),
4 Conductor resistance test, e) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath, f ) Insulation resistance test, i?; Additional
3.3 High voltage test, and ageing test (for PVC sheathed weatherproof cables).
1.2 The cables covered in the standard are suitable for use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or unearthed) system for rated voltages up to and including 1 100 V. These cables may be used on dc systems for rated voltages up to and including 1 500 V. 1.3 The cables covered by the standard are suitable for use where the combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in continuous conductor temperature not exceeding 70C. 2. Size - Nominal cross-sectional area of conduction shah be 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35 and 50 mm2. Size 1 mm2 shall be for copper conductors only. 3. 3.1 Tests Type Tests a) Annealing test (for copper), b) Tensile test (for aluminium), c) Wrapping test (for aluminium), d) Conductor resistance test,
Routine Tests a) Conductor resistance test, and b) High voltage test.
3.4
Optional Tests aj Cold bend test (for PVC sheathed cables), and b) Cold impact test (for PVC sheathed cables).
4.
Identification
4.1 Cable Code - The following code shall be used for designating the cable: Constituent Aluminium conductor PA insulation PVC sheath PE sheath Earth Continuity Conductor Code Letter A 2Y Y
Note I -For
requirements regarding materials and construction, refer to Ihe standard.
Note 2-For test details, refer to IS : 5831-1970 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 6474-1971 Specification for polyethylene insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 8130-1976 Specification for conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords. and the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 1596-1977 Specification for polyethylene working voltages up to and including I 100 volts. 100 volts (second revision). 465
insulated cables for
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY ~OF
IS : 9968 (Part I)-1981 ELASTOMER

PART I FOR WORKING VOLTAGES
INSULATED
CABLES
UP TO AND INCLUDING
1 100 VOLTS
1. Scope - Requirements of elastomer insulated cables for fixed wiring, flexible cables and flexible cords for electric power and lighting for operation at voltages up to and including 1 100 volts. 1.1
1 100 V. These cables may be used on dc systems for rated voltages up to and including 1 500 V. 1.3 The cables covered in the standard are suitable for use where the combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to loads results in a conductor temperatute not exceeding the values given below: Type of Insulation Conductor Temperature; C, Max INonnal Operation Circuit 60 200 85 90 150 220 250 350
The following types of cables and cords are covered in the standard.
1.l .l
Cables for fixed iviring
a) Braided and compounded/varnished, b) Elastomer sheathed (general purpose), and c) Elastomer sheathed with earth continuity conductor (general purpose).
1.1.2 Flexible cables
a) Braided and varnished, and b) Elastomer sheathed (heavy duty).

1.1.3 Flexible cords
a) General purpose rubber b) Heat resistance synthetic rubber: 1) Butyl rubber, and 2) Ethylene propylene rubber c) Silicone rubber
a) Braided, b) Elastomer sheathed (general purpose), and c) Unkinkable flexible cords - braided and compounded (workshop type). 1.2 The cables covered in the standard are suitable for use on ac single phase or three-phase (earthed or unearthed) system for rated voltage up to and including
SI No.
Note - The short circuit temperatures mentioned above are based on the intrinsic properties of the insulating materials. It is essential that the accessories which are used in the above system with mechanical and/or soldered connections are suitable for the temperature adopted for the cable.
2. Size - The nominal cross-sectional area of various types of elastomer insulated cables and cords shall be as follows: Nominal Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor mm* 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300, 400, 500, 630 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16
Cables/Cords Single-core taped or untaped textile braided and compounded cables Single-core, circular twin-, three- and four-core elastomer sheathed cables Flat twin core cables (with and without earth continuity (conductor) and flat three-core (without earth continuity conductor) elastomer sheathed cables Single, twin-, three- and four-core glass fibre braided and varnished cables and cords Single-core, circu!ar twin-, three-, four- and fivecore, elastomer sheathed flexible cables Single-core circular, twin-, three- and four-core elastomer sheathed flexible cords Textile braided, single and twisted twin flexible cords Circular twin- and three-core, textile braided flexible cords Twin- or three-core unkinkable flexible cords (workshop type) 466
1.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. !A
0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5;2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50 6, IO, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300, 400, 500, 630 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2.5 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4
SP : 21-1983
3. 3.1
Tests
4.
4.1
Identification
Type Tests a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Persulphate test (for copper), Annealing test (for copper), Tensile test (for aluminium), Wrapping test (for aluminium), Conductor resistance test, Test for thickness of insulation and sheath, Fz;si;l tests for elastomeric insulation and
Cable I&n@cation - Cables or COGSshall be identified throughout the length of cables or cords by the,legends shown below, either printed or indented or embossed on cable:
Type of Cable Insulation Butyl rubber Ethylene propylene rubber Silicone rubber
Legend HR 85 HR90 HR 150
h) High vbltage test (water immersion test), and j) Insulation resistance test. 3.2 Acceptance Tests a) Annealing test (for copper), b) Tensile test (for aluminium), c) Wrapping test (for aluminium), d) Conductor resistance test, e) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath, f) High voltage test (water immersion test), and g) Insulation resistance test. 3.3 Routine Tests a) Conductor resistance test, and b) High voltage test or spark test.
4.2
Note- No legend is required for general purpose insulation. Cable Code - The following code shall be used for designating the cable:
Constituent Code Letter A Aluminium conductor R Elastomer insulation (rubber) B Braiding, compounding or varnishing R Elastomer sheath (rubber) Earth continuity conductor ECC Note - When the conductor material is coppir, no code letter is required for conductor.
Note l-For dimensions, such as thickness of insulation, thickness of sheath for various types of cables and cords, and for requirements regarding material and construction, refer to the standard. Note 2-For test details, refer to IS : 6380-1971 Specification for elastomeric insulation and sheath of electric cables, IS : 8130-1976 Specification for conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords. and the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 9968 (Part I)-1981 Specification for elastomer insulated cables: Part I For working voltages up to and including I 100 volts.
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 9968 (Part II)-1981 ELASTOMER

PART II FOR WORKING VOLTAGES
INSULATED
CABLES
11 kV
FROM 3.3 kV UP TO AND INCLUDING
1. Scope - Requirements for heat resisting elastomer insulated cables for fixed installations and flexible cables, suitable for the following voltage grades (UoAJ): a) Earthed Systems - 1.913.3, 3.816.6 and 6.35111 kV; and b) Unearthed Systems - 3.313.3, 6.616.6 and ll/ll kV. 1.1 Cables for fixed installations cover single- and three-core constructions with copper or aluminium
conductors, heat resisting elastomer insulated (with conductor and insulation screens as required), unarmouEd or wire/strip armoured, with overall sheath of PVC or I-ID HOFR elastomeric compound. 1.2 Flexible cables cover single- and three-core constructions with or without grounding conductors, copper conductors, heat resisting elastomer insulated (with conductor and insulation screens as required), unarmoured or armoured, with overall sheath of HD HOFR elastomeric compound. 467
SP : 21-1983
1.3 The cables covered in the standard are suitable for use where the combination of ambient temperature and temperature-rise due to load results in conductor temperatures not exceeding the following for normal sustained operation and for short-circuit conditions: BUtyl Rubber Insulated Cables Maximum conductor temperature for continuous operation Maximum conductor temperature during short circuit 85C Ethylene Propyltvne Rubber Insulated Cables 90C
3.2
Acceptance Tests a) Annealing test (for copper), b) Tensile test (for aluminium), c) Wrapping test (for aluminium), d) Conductor resistance test, e) Test for thickness of insulation *f) Partial discharge test, and g) High voltage test.
Routine Tests
and sheath,
3.3
a) Conductor resistance test, *b) Partial discharge test, and C) High voltage test. 3.4 Optional Tests a) Ozone resistance test, and b) Electrical test on semi-conducting metallic screen.
to cables
220C
250C
nonwith
2. Size - The sizes of conductor shall be 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300,400, 500, 630, 800 and 1000 mm2. 3. 3.1 Tests Type Tests
Note - Test marked as (*) are applicable conductor and insulation screens. 4. Identification
a) Annealing test (for copper),

b) Tensile test (for aluminium),
c) Wrapping test (for aluminium), d) Conductor resistance tests, e) Test for armour wires/strips, 0 Test for thickness of insulation and sheath, g) Physical tests for insulation, h) Physical tests for sheath, 9 Insulation resistance measuremerit at room temperature, k) Partial discharge test, m) Bending test, followed by partial discharge test, n) Dielectric power factor as ti.mction of voltage, P) Dielectric power factor as a function of temperature, q) Insulation resistance measurement at operating temperature, r) &ii;ngdcycle test, followed by partial discharge s) High voltage test for four hours.
4.1 Voltage Identijcation - The voltage grade of cable shall be identified throughout the length of cable by means of a tape bearing the voltage grade (for example, 6.35/11 kV or 6 350/11 000 V) or by voltage grade being printed, embossed or indented on the outer sheath. 4.2 Cable Identification - Cable shall also be identified throughout the length by the legend shown below, either printed or indented or embossed on cable: Legend Type of Cable Insulation HR 85 Butyl rubber HR 90 EPR 4.3 Cable Code - The following code shall be used for designating the cable: Constituent Aluminium conductor Elastomer insulation (rubber) Steel round wire armour Non-magnetic round wire armour Steel strip armour Non-magnetic strip armour Double steel strip armour Elastomer outer sheath (rubber) PVC outer sheath Code Letter A & Wa F Fa FF R R
Note 1 - Tests (k), (m), (n), (p) and (r) are applicable to screened cables only. Note 2 - In three-core cables, each test or measurement shall be carried out on all the cores. Note 1-For Note Z-For
requirements regarding materials, and construction,
Note - When conductormaterial is copper, no code letter is required for conductor.

refer to fhe standard. for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables, cables, IS : 8130-1976 Specification for conductors IS : 6380-1974 for insulated
test details, refer to IS : 5831-1970 Specification Specification for elastomeric insulation and sheath of electric electric cables and flexible cords, and fhe sfandard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 9968 (Part II)-1981 Specification for elastomer insulated cables: .Part II For working voltages from 3.3 kV up to and including 11 kV. --468
SECTION
27
WlRlNG
ACCESSORIES
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title
IS : 371-1979 IS : 1293-1967 IS : 2086-1963 Page
Ceiling roses (second revision) Three-pin plugs and socket-outlets (first revision) Carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses up to 650 volts
(revised
471 472 473 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 484 485 486 487 488. 489 490 491
2412-1975 Link clips for electrical wiring Cfirst revision) 2509-1973 Rigid non-metallic conduits for electrical installations. (first revision) 2667-1976 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (first revision) 3419-1976 Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits (first revision) 3480-1966 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring 3837-1976 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (first revision) 38541966 Switches for domestic and similar purposes 4160-1967 Interlocking switch socket outlet 46151968 Switch socket-outlets (non-interlocking type) 4649-1968 Adaptors for flexible steel conduits 4949-1968 21 Amp switches for domestic and similar purposes 5133 Boxes for enclosure of electrical accessories IS : 5133 (Part I)-1969 Part I Steel and cast iron boxes IS : 5133 (Part II)-1969 Part II Boxes made of insulating material IS : 6538-1971 Three-pin plugs made of resilient material IS. : 6946-1973 Pliable conduits and flexible conduits (non-metallic) for electrical installations IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 Conduits for electrical wiring: Part II Rigid steel conduits IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
: : : : : : : : : : : :
470
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 371-1979 CEILING
ROSES
(Second Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements for ceiling roses of surface and semi-recessed types, for use with single or multiple pendent lighting fittings and for use in circuits in which the nominal voltage does not exceed 250 V and the current does not exceed 5A. 2. Materials Base terminal a> housing and cover (having integral cord grip) and extension flange (where live parts are supported) - Vitrified ceramic or tough non-ignitable moulded insulating material. b) Cover (not incorporating cord grip) and extension flange (not supporting live parts) Materials as in (a) or alternatively suitable non-ignitable thermoplastic materials. cl Terminal and terminal screws - Brass, phosphor bronze and/or suitable equivalent material. Dimensions 3.7 Separating Barrier - Separating barrier forming an integral part of the base shall be provided between each terminal set to prevent the possibility of stray ends of conductor coming in contact with a conductor or terminal other than to which it is connected. The barrier shall be not less than 5.0 mm high. 3.8 The clearances and creepage distances between live parts of opposite polarity and between live parts and the following parts shall not be less than 0.3 mm: a) Metal fixing screws; b) Other metal parts; and c) Flat mounting surfaces. 4. Cord Grip - Ceiling roses shall be provided with means for gripping flexible cord which shall not damage the insulation and/or sheath of the cqrd and shall be such that the load on the cord is not transmitted to the terminals. 5. Construction - In surface type ceiling roses when installed in the normal manner, the base or pattress, terminal housing and cover in combination shall form an enclosure for the terminals and shall prevent access to any live metal. All terminals shall be so located that they are prevented from rotating when the terminal scows are turned. 6. Tests a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) j) k) Visual examination and inspection, Dimensional check, Insulation resistance (dry), High voltage, Moisture resistance, Screws and connections, Mechanical strength, Cord grip and strength in service, Water absorption, and Resistance to abnormal heat and fire.
3.
3.1 The parts of the enclosure made from moulded insulating materials shall have a minimum wall thickness of 1.3 mm, except in those places where knock-outs are provided. 3.2 The outside 63.5 mm. diameter shall not be less than screws shall be be of
3.3 The holes of the mounting 50.8 f 0.13 mm centres. 3.4 The holes of the fixing minimum 5 mm diameter.
screws
shall
3.5 The means of entry for the permanent wiring shall be capable of accommodating, with their outer sheathing, three 1.5 mm2 twin flat cables with earth continuity conductors. 3.6 The hole in the cover shall be not less than 7.3 mm diameter.
Note-For detailed requirements
and methods of tests, refer to 9 of the skmdurd.
refer to IS : 371-1979 Specification for ceiling roses (second
revision).
471
SP : 21-1983
SUMMAKY OF
IS : 1293-1967 THREE-PIN
PLUGS AND SOCKET-OUTLETS

No. 1 to 4) Dimensions / 5A tiiii) Diameter of earthing-pin ix) Length of slot in earthing pin, Min x) Length of slot in currentcarrying pin, Min 2.3.1 Tolerances Rating h 15A 30A \
(First Revision)
(With Amendments Requirements and tests for three-pin (two-pole and earthing-pin) plugs and socket-outlets of surface and flush type (shuttered and non-shuttered) suitable for ac and dc circuits having voltages up to 250 V. The standard ratings shall be 5, 15 and 30 amperes. 2.
1.
Scope -
7.06 8.71 9.53 10.5 17 25 7.5 10.5 17
Requirements
Material a) Plug base, plug cover, socket-outlet cover and insulating shutter - Tough non-ignitable material. b) Socket base - Tough non-ignitable insulating material or vitrified ceramic material. c) Pins, terminals, current carrying parts and earthing pin and earthing contact Phosphor-bronze, brass, aluminium ahoy or other suitable material. d) Non-current-carrying parts - Mild steel, ahrminium alloy or insulating material.
2.1
On dimensions given in (ii) and (viii) in 2.3 shall be + 0.025 -- 0.050;and on dimensions given in (iii) and (vi) shall be +1.04 -o.13mm
Note 1 - Socket contacts shall be self-adjusting for centres 0.15 mmgreaterorlessthan dimensionsgiven in<iJand(v) in2.3
Note 2 - For detailed Table 1 of the standard.
dimensions
and tolerances
refer to
2.2
Earthing-pin shall make and break contact before and after the associated current carrying pins. Connection of flexible conductor to earthing pin of plug shall be visible through an opening in plug. 2.3 Dimensions (in mm) Rating A 5A 15A 19.1 5.08 15.9 25.4 7.06 20.6
2.4 Clearances and Creepage Distances than 3.0 mm.
Not less
Note - For constructional requirements of 3-pin plugs and socket-outlet with regard to aspects such as protection against electricshock, plug cover and base, pins and socket contacts, cord enay and cord grip, ana terminals and screws, referto 5 and 6 of
dre standard.
Dimensions i) Distance c/c of currentcarrying pins ii) Diameter of currentcarrying pins iii) Projection from plug base to the top of current-carrying pins vi) Nominal width of slot in current-carrying pins c/c v) Distance of earthing-pin and current-carrying pin vi) Projection from plug base to the top of earthing-pin vii) Nominal width of slot in earthing-pin
\ 30A 36.5 7.93 28.6
3.
Tests
Type Tests Visual examination Interchangeability Voltage drop
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3 Effectiveness of contact shall not exceed 15 millivolts. 3.1.4 Withdrawal pull
0.6
0.8
0.8
22.2
28.6
39.7
3 to 60 N for 5 A plug 4 to 80 N for 15 A plug 7 to 100 N for 30 A plug 3.1.5 Insulation resistance (dry) 100 megohms. Not less than
20.6
28.6
36.5
3.1.6
High voltage
0.8
0.8
0.8
Moisture resistance - Insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms after moisture treatment. 472
3.1.7
SP : 21-1983
3.1.8 20C.
Temperature-rise
Shall
not
exceed
3.1.13
Cord grip to heat (for moulded insulating (for shutters only) to rusting Tests specified in 3.1.1
3.1.9 Breaking capacity - After drop shall not exceed 50 millivolts. 3.1.10 Mechanical strength
test,
voltage
3.1.14 Resistance material only) 3.1.15 3.1.16 Endurance Resistance
3.1.11 Water absorption - Shall not exceed 0.5 percent for ceramic and 1 percent for moulded insulating material. 3.1.12
Note l-For
3.2 Acceptance Tests to 3.1.10 and 3.1.15. 3.3 Routing Tests and 3.1.6. the standard. the standard.
Tests specified in 3.1.1,3.1.2
Screws and connections

detailed requirements and methods
of tests, refer to 10 of refer to Appendix
-For detailed information, revision).
Note 2-For
gauges for plugs and socket-outlets,
B of
refer to IS : 1293-1967 Specification ___-.--.__
for three-pin plugs and socket-outlets
(first
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2086-1963 CARRIERS AND BASES USED IN REWIRABLE ELECTRIC FUSES UP TO 650 VOLTS (Revised)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for rewirable type fusebases and fuse-carriers having a current rating up to and including 200 A and a voltage rating not exceeding 650 V between lines. All types of rewirable type electric fuses as well as fuse-elements are not covered.
Note It is undesirable to use rewirable fuses of rated currents higher than 100 A.
TYPE
No. 1 to 7) 3. Physical and Electrical Requirements
3.1 Mechanical Endurance - At the end of presctibed test, the fuse-base and fuse-carrier shall be examined for the following: a) The contacts shall not work loose, b) No damage shall be caused to any part of the fuse-carrier or fuse-base,
2.
Ratings Voltage Preferred values shall be as
2.1 Rated follows:
c) There shall be no displacement component parts, and d) The serviceability been impaired.
of any of the
For ac systems For dc systems
240 and 415 V 11.5, 250 and 500 V
of the fuse shall not have
2.2 Rated Currents - Preferred values shall be 6, 16, 32, 63, 100 and 200 A. 473
3.2 Mechanical Strength - Carrier and base shall show neither cracks nor permanent deformation.
SP : 21-1983
3.3 Withdrawal given below:
Force -
Shall be between valves Withdrawal Force,
Rated Current, A 6 16 32 63 100 200
fied, smoothly glazed, except in case of steatite and shall be free from defects such as dents and projections. 3.9.2 Temperature cycle - When bases and carriers axe subjected to temperature cycle test, the ceramic material shall withstand series of tests without breaking, cracking or crazing. Base and carrier shall also comply with requirements of 3.6 when subjected to high voltage test. 3.9.3 Water absorption - Material shall not absorb more than 2 percent of its weight of water when broken. 3.10 Non-&mmability - Materials shall be incapable of burning or giving off flammable vapours in sufficient quantity to ignite at a pilot flame when heated for 5 minutes in an oven at 300C.
Note - For constructional requirements of fuse-base and fuse-carrier with regard to aspects such as material, protection, handle or grip, screws current-carrying parts and terminals, refer to 4 of Ihe standard.
kgf 0.5 to 1.5 0.5 to 3.5 1.5 to 5.5 3.0 to 10.0 4.0 to 16.0 15.0 to 70.0
3.4 Temperature-Rise - Shall not exceed 55C in case of fuse-carrier contacts and 40C in case of fusebase contacts. 3.5 Insulation Resistance ohms. Not less than 10 meg-
3.6 Dielectric Strength - Carrier and base shall withstand the application of an ac voltage of 2 000 V rms for one minute without puncture of insulation or arching-over. 3.7 Breaking Capacity - Carrier and base shall be deemed to have failed the test if one or more of following occur: a) Any part of the fuse-carrier or the fuse-base ignites, b) The fuse-carrier is ejected, c) Any part of the fuse except the fuse-element and its covering is damaged to such an extent as to render it unserviceable, d) The insulation resistance reduces to below 100 000 ohms. 3.8 Water Absorption (for Non-ceramic Materials) - Materials shall be incapable of taking up water in sufficient quantity to cause appreciable swelling, laminating, warping or changing of the material. 3.9 Requirements Material
methods
4. 4.1
Tests Type Tests a) Test for mechanical endurance Test for mechanical strength c) Test for withdrawal force d) Test for temperature-rise 4 Insulation resistance test 0 High voltage test g) Test for breaking capacity h) Test for water absorption 8 Test on ceramic material k) Ignition test
4.2
Routine Test -
High voltage test.
of Ceramic Material shall be sound, thoroughly vitri-
3.9.1
Note-For
4.3 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in (a), (c), (d), (e), (f) and (h) of 4.1 and temperature cycle tests (for ceramic material).
of tests, refer to 7 of the sfandard.
refer to IS : 20861963
Specification
for carriers and bases used in rewirable type
electric fuses up to 650 volts (revised).
474
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 2412-1975 LINK CLIPS FOR ELECTRICAL
WIRING
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Requirements and tests for link clips (both joint link clips and link clips with separate linking eyes) for general wiring purposes. 2. Requirements sheet or strip in the 3.1.1 Linking eye 10x2 mm. 3.2 Size 15~6.5 mm and hole
Joint Link Clips

40 50 63 80 0.32 0.4 0.4 0.4 8 888 12.5 12.5 20 25 12.5 12.5 12.5
2.1 Material - Aluminium annealed condition.
2.2 Construction - Shall be smooth, free from dents or burrs, and shall have comers rounded off smoothly. 2.2.1 One fixing hole for sizes up to 40 mm and two for sizes over 40 mm. Size of hole 2.6 mm clear diameter and tolerance on hole +0.25, -0 mm. 2.3 Finish sion. 3. 3.1 Dimensions Shall be free from any mark of COTTO(in mm)
Size (Length) 16 25 32 0.32 0.32 0.32 Thickness 8 8 8 Width 10 10 Distance of 5 fixing hole Spacing of fixing holes
Note 4.
For details, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the smuiard.
Tests
4.1
Type Tests General examination Dimensions
4.1.1
4.1.2
Link Clips with Separate Eyes:

25 32 40 0.32 0.32 0.32 8 8 8 50 63 80 0.40 0.40 0.40 8 8 8
Size (Length) Thickness Width
4.1.3 Flexibility - Clips shall be wound round a mandrel 5 mm dia, and fixed with linking eye. It shall then be opened out, flattened by hand and again wound and fixed. At the end of 5 such operations, clip shall retain its flexibility and shall be fit for use.

revision).
refer to IS : 2412-1975 Specification for link clips for electrical wiring (first
415
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 2509-1973 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
(First Revision)
(With Amendments No. 1 to 3) 1. Scope - Requirements for circular rigid conduits manufactured from unplasticized PVC or copolymer material or other suitable non-metallic material and intended for the enclosure and protection of cables used in the wiring of electrical installations. Covers the conduits suitable for temperature between - SC,and + 60C. 2. Dimensions (in mm)
4.2 Bending Test -
Surface shall show no cracks
after bending. 4.3 Test for Resistance to Heat - Specimen maintained at a temperature of 60 + 2C for 240 hours. It shall not show any change which would impair its use. On cooling, it shall be capable of withstanding the impact test. 4.4
Test for Mechanical Strength
Nomirral out- 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 side dia Outsidedia, 16.3 20.3 25.3.32.3 40.3 50.3 63.3 MlW Inside dia, 13.4 17.2 21.6 28.2 35.8 45 56.8 Min Ecentricity , 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 MaX Ovality , 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.8
Max.
4 Rigidity - Deflection shall not be more than 25 mm. b) Resistance to impact - There shall be no cracks. c) Resistance to crushing - Flattening shall not be more than 1.0 percent of original outside diameter.
4.5 Tests for Electrical Characteristics
2.1 Tolerance on nominal outside diameter shall be +0.3 mm and -0 mm. 2.2 Size Designation meter. 2.3
Length -
a) Dielectric strength -No breakdown shall occur after application of high voltage. b) Insulation resistance - Not less than 100 megohms. 4.6 TestforResistance to Combustion - Specimen shall not bum to 25 mm mark and shall not show any flame or afterglow 5 seconds after removing the burner. 4.7 Testfor Resistance to Chemical Action - There shall be no visible deterioration after 1 week immersion in acid solution (330 ml HCl diluted to 1 litre) or alkaline solution (80 g of sodium hydroxide dissolved in water and diluted to 1 litre). 4.8 Copper Test - Shall show no evidence of formation of copper salts. 4.9 Testfor Resistance to Oil - Specimen shall not show any sign of penetration of oil or of cracking or splitting .
By nominal outside dia-
3 or 4 m or as specified.
3. Workmanship - The interior of conduits shall be free from obstructions. The ends of conduits shall be cleanly cut or formed plane and shall be free from burrs. 4. Tests
4.1 Checking of Dimensions - Outside diameter ovality; uniformity of wall thickness (eccentricity); inside diameter.
:
Note-For methods of tests, refer to 6 of rhe standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2509-1973 Specificationfor rigid non-metallic conduitsfor electrical instaltations{first revision).
476
SP : 21-1983
SUMMAHY
OF
IS : 2667-1976 FITTINGS FOR RIGID STEEL CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING
(First Revision)
(With Amendments 1. Scope - Material, dimensions and other re.-. quirements of screwed type fittings (couples, elbows, tees, bends and boxes) for use with rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring purposes conforming to IS : 9537 (Part II)-198 l*. Screw reducers are not covered . 2. Requirements Steel, cast iron or malleable cast 2.1 Material iron. No. 1 and 2)
Note - For profile and other details of IS0 metic threads, refer to Appendix A of he standard.
3. Dimensions (in mm) 3.1 Nominal sizes of outlets of fittings shall correspond to nominal outside diameter of conduits (16,20, 25, 32, 40, 50 and 63) covered by IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981*. 3.2 Minimum thickness of fittings (other than boxes) shall be equal to that of corresponding conduit thickness with which they are used. For cast fittings, the minimum thickness at the root of the thread shall be as follows: 1.5 mm forcast fittings of sizes 16,20 and 25 mm. 2.5mmforcastfittingsofsizes32,40and50mm. 3.0 mm for cast fittings of sizes 63 mm. 3.3 Tolerance - +5 percent on nominal dimensions . 3.4 Couplers Nominal size Length, Min 16 20 30 35 25 43 32 43 40 43 50 49 63 49
2.2 Fittings shall be fabricated or cast to the shape. The interior and the ends of fittings shall be free from burrs, dents, tins, sharp edges or projections and the like. 2.3 Couplers shall be screwed inside for entire length. 2.4 Elbow - Atis of elbow shall be quadrant of a circle (radius = its nominal size) plus astraight portion (of length=twice nominal size) at each end. 2.5 Normal Bend - Axis shall be quadrant of a circle (radius = 2% times nominal size) plus a straight portion (of length = twice nominal size) at each end. Half normal bend will be same as normal bend except that diversion shall be 45 instead of 90. 2.6 Circular Boxes - Shall be provided with lugs (thickness not less than 2.8 mm) for fixing covers; two lugs for small boxes and four lugs for large boxes. 2.7 Rectangular Boxes - Those used with 16 mm and 20 mm conduits are recognised as standard; and shall be provided with two lugs of thickness not less than 2.8 mm. 2.8 Coversfor Boxes - Shall be of steel, malleable cast iron, or other suitable material. Thickness shall not be less than 1.2 mm for steel covers; and not less than minimum thickness of box for malleable cast iron. 2.9 Protection Against Corrosion - Shall be treated both inside and outside, excluding machined surfaces and screw threads. Examples of protection are: a) Medium protection - Stove enamelling; Air-drying paint; Electrolytic deposits. b) Heavy protection - Hot-dip galvanized coating; Sherardizing. 2.10 Screw Threads IS0 metric threads.
3.5 Tees - Radius of axis shall be equal to nominal size and straight length at each end shall be twice the nominal size. 3.6 Boxes Circular boxes 16 60 50 3 2.8 1.6 20 60 50 3 2.8 1.6 25 60 50 3 2.8 1.6 20 80 70 3.5 2.8 2.5 25 80 70 3.5 2.8 2.5 32 80 70 3.5 2.8 2.5 3.6.1
Size of conduit Internal dia Internal depth Thickness, C.I. Thickness Mall C.I. Thickness steel 3.6.2 boxes : Height 37.5 50 I 75 ( 100 { 150 { B B B
Preferred internal dimensions of rectangular
Length I Breadth B
75 75 75 75 100 100 100 100 100 100
100 75 100 75 150 75 150 150
100 100 100 100 150 100
150 75 150 75 150 150
150 100 150 100
150 150 150 150
*Specification for conduits for electrical wiring: Part II Rigid steel conduits.
*Specification for conduits for electrical wiring: Part II Rigid steel conduits.
477
SP : 21-1983
Note 1 - Nominal sizes of elbows, bends (normal and halfnormal) and tees shall be same as given for couplers in 3.4.
4.
Tests a) Tests for visual examination, b) Dimensional check, c) Test for protective coatings, and d) Test for resistance to impact.
4(c),
Note 2 - For detailed dimensions of boxes, refer to Tables 5 to 7 of rhe standard.
Note-For methods of tests given in 4(b) and 4(d), refer to Appendices C and D and for method of test given in IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 Specification for conduits for electrical wiring: Part II Rigid steel conduits.
refer
t0
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2667-1976 Specification for fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (first revision).
___~
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3419-1976 FITTINGS FOR RIGID NON-METALLIC
CONDUITS
(First Revision)
(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for rigid conduit fittings (couplers, bends, elbows, tees, inspection sleeves and boxes) manufactured from unplasticized PVC or copolymer material or other suitable non-metallic material for use with non-metallic conduits conforming to IS : 2509-1973*. These conduit fittings suitable for temperature between -5C and +6OC; but will also be suitable for teinperature below -5C, subject to reduction in mechanical strength. Covers plain type fittings only. 2. 2.1 Requirements Shall be homogeneous and non-porous. No. 1) type and slip type coupling), elbows (normal type), tees (normal type and socketed type) and boxes (spout tipe circular) shall be as given in the table below: Nominal size Minimum wall thickness for couplers, elbows, tees Minimum overall length of couplers (slip type and clamp type) Minimum overall socketed of couplers length type 16 20 25 32 40 50
1.1 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.7
80
80
80 100 100 120
100 100 110 120 130 140
2.2 Inside and outside surfaces shall be smooth, fEe from projections and other defects. 2.3 Elbows - Area of opening of inspections elbow shall not be less than 2% times internal cross-sectional area of corresponding conduit. Minimum thickness of cover 1.5 mm. 2.4 Tees - Area of opening of inspection tees shall not be less than 3 times external cross-sectional area of corresponding conduit. Minimum thickness of cover 1.5 mm. 2.5 Cover of Circular Box 1.6 mm. Minimum thickness
Inside dia of collar 16.420.4 25.4 32.440.4 for couplers, elbows, tees, slip type coupling bends Outside dia of bends Minimum inside dia, normal type bends Minimum inside dia, slip type coupling bends socket Length of (socketed type couplers slip type coupling bends elbows, tees) Internal dia of spout type circular box 478 16 20 25 32 40
50.4
50
13.4 17.2 21.6 28.2 35.8 45 13.3 17.2 21.6 28.2 35.8 45
3. Dimensions (in mm) - Nominal size of outlets of fittings shall correspond to nominal outside diameter of conduits. Dimensions of fittings namely couplers (slip type, socketed and clamp type), bends (normal
*Specification for rigid non-metallic lations @rst revision ). conduits for electrical instal-
35
35
35
45
45
55
60
60
60
SP : 21-1983
Thickness of spout type

circular box Length of spouts of spout type circular box, Minimum
1.6 1.6. 1.6 18 20 23 -
4.1.6 Moisture exceed 1 percent.
absorption
test -
Shall
not
4.1.7 Test for resistance to chemical action Thete shall be no visible signs of deterioration after immersion of sample in acid solution (330 ml HCL sp gr 1.6 diluted to 1 litre of water) or alkaline solution (80 g of sodium hydroxide dissolved in water and diluted to 1 litre of water for one week. 4.1.8 Copper test - There shall be no visible evidence of formation of copper salt on sample. 4.1.9 Testfor resistance to oil no sign of cracking or splitting. Strip shall show
Note - For detailed dimensions and tolerances of fittings,

refer to Tables 1 to 9 of the standard.
4. 4.1
Tests
Type Tests Visual examination Checking of dimensions
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3 Test for resistance to heat - Specimens shall not show changes which will impairtheiruse after they are maintained at a temperature of 60 + 2C for 240 hours. On cooling they shall withstand impact resistance test.
4.1.4 Test for resistance to impact shall show no damage or cracks. 4.1.5
Note-For
4.1.10 Test for resistance to combustion Burning shall not spread. Flame shall die out in less than 30 seconds after removal of burner. 4.2 Acceptance Tests 4.1.2 and 4.1.5. 4.3 Routine and 4.1.2. Tests specified in 4.1.1,
Sample
Tests -
Tests
specified
in 4.1.1
Test for electrical characteristics

test details, refer to 7 of the standard.

(first revision).
refer to IS : 3419-1976 Specification for fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3480-1966 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING

(With Amendment 1. Scope - Requirements for flexible steel conduits for protection of cables in electrical installations. Such conduits shall not be used as an earth continuity conductor. 2. Requirements No. 1) 6.5 6.5 9 10 10 16 25 16 25 31 40 40 46 63 100 63 100 70 108 Nominal internal dia Internal dia External dia in norma1 position, M& Tums/metre in norma1 position, Min Bending dia, Min Linear breaking load, Min, kgf Bending fracture load, Min, kgf
13 20
315 235 200 160 100 100 100 55 35 63 90 150 225 350450
2.1 Strip steel used in manufacture shall be of mild steel, bright, cold-rolled and annealed. Shall be electro-galvanized or electro-tinned to a minimum thickness of 0.002 5 mm, or otherwise provided with equally effective protective coating. 2.2 Conduit shall be wound tightly and the strip so overlapped in subsequent helicis that no openings are seen in normal position. 2.3 Internal sharp edges. 3. surfaces shall be free from burrs and (in mm) 479
60 110 210 330 430 500 45 70 125 190 +l.O and -0
11.5 18 35
Tolerance on internal +0.5 and -0 dia
Dimensions
*Linear breaking beading.
load = Load at which coils pull off adjacent
SP : 21-1983
4. 4.1
Tests Tests for Dimensions
flaws and shall return to normal position damage to its outer or inner diameter.
without
4.2 Linear Breaking Test - Shall show no indication of yielding under a load less than that specified in above table maintained for 3 minutes when undergone the prescribed test. 4.3
4.4 Bend Fracture Test - Radius of bend shall be decreased until the yield point is reached under a load, not less than that specified in Table given in 3. 4.5 Crushing Test distortion. There shall be no permanent
Test for Flexibility -
Shall show no crack or
Note-For
For detailed information, wiring.
refer to IS : 3480-1966 Specification for flexible steel conduits for electrical
SUMMAR+ OF
IS : 3837-1976 ACCESSORIES FOR RIGID STEEL CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING
(First Revision)
1. Scope - Material, dimensions and other requirements of accessories (other than fittings) used with rigid steel conduits conforming to IS : 9537 (Part II)198 1* . Accessories include clips (ordinary), saddles (single and multiple), pipe hooks and crampets, plugs, lock nuts and bushes (externally screwed hexagonal and internally screwed circular). Requirements
shall be ribbed for reinforcement at smoothly cables. rounded in order to prevent abrasion of
Note - For constructionaldetails in respect of screw thread, spacing plates, plug, lock nuts and entry bush, refer to 3 of the
standard.
2.
2.4 Shall be protected against corrosion both inside and outside, excluding machined surfaces and screw threads. Examples of protection are: a) Medium protection - Stove enamelling; Air-drying paint, Electrolytic deposits, etc. b) Heavy protection - Hot-dip galvanized coating; Sherardizing, etc. 3.
2.1 Saddles crown.
2.2 Plug may be recessed to the thickness of the head, thickness of wall being not less than 3 mm. 2.3 The inside edges of entry bushes shall be 16 0.71 15 17 22 17 10 20 11.1
Dimensions (in mm)

25 0.9 20 32 1.25 25 40 1.25 25 41 50 41 31 Yl.8 50 1.25 25 50 65 55 44.4 Z.4 63 1.25 25
Size of conduit/bush Minimum thickness (ordinary clips, single and multiple saddles) Minimum width (ordinary clips, single and multiple saddles) Maximum width across flats (plugs) Maximum width across flats (lock nuts) Maximum width across flats (hexagonal bushes) Bore (hexagonal bushes) Circular bushes, external dia Circular bushes, bore
20 0.9 20 22 27 22 13.5 24 14.3
Z 30 19 29 19
4: 36 26.2 ;:.2
:: .
*Specification for conduitsfor electrical wirlng: Part II Rigid steel conduits.
Note I sions .
Tolerances shall be +5 percent on nominal dimen-
480
SP : 21-1983
Sore 2 - The material shall be mild steel for clips, saddles, plugs and lock nuts. mild steel forgings for pipe hooks and crampets. and shall be moulded insulating for bushes.
4.
Tests a) Visual examination, b) Dimensional check, and c) Test for protective coating (for medium and heavy protection).
Sote 3 - For detailed dimensions Tables 1 to 8 of r/w srnr~~~~nrtl.
of accessories.
refer to
refer to IS : 3837-1976 Specification for accessories for rigid steel conduits fer electrical wiring (first revision).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 3854-1966 SWITCHES FOR-DOMESTIC AND SIMILAR PURPOSES

(With Amendments 1. Scope No. 1 to 5) Tough non-ignitable insulating material. parts - Brass, copper, cl Current-carrying phosphor bronze, aluminium or silver alloy. 4 Springs - Corrosion-resisting metal.
1.1 Requirements for manually operated switches, such as tumbler switches, push-button switches and ceiling switches of the surface, semi-recessed or flush mounting type for domestic and similar geneial purpose; for wall or ceiling mounting, for Licorporation in cords, having a rating up to and including 30 A and suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated voltages not exceeding 250 V. 1.2 This does not cover contactors, circuitbreakers, isolating switches, mercury switches, auswitches, toggle response tomatic temperature switches for controlling electronic devices, switches including control switches on heating and cooking switches making outdoor switches, appliances, momentary contact, switch fuses or spitter units. 1.3 This also covers bell push switches of 5A rating and suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated voltage not exceeding 250 V. 2. Classification - Classified according to type of connections: a) Single-pole one-way switch, b) Double-pole one-way switch, c) Single-pole two-way and off switch, d) Single-pole two-way switch, and. e) Intermediate switch. 3. 4. Standard Current Ratings 5, 15 and 30 A.
e) Attachment Fttings,
current-carrying
screws and other nonsteel, parts - Mild
aluminium
4.2
alloy or insulating
material.
Cord Grip - Switches used with &.xible cords shall be provided with cord grips so that cords of conductors connected to the terminals are relieved from strain.
4.3 Terminals - Shall allow a conductor to be connected without special preparation such as soldering of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure and without damage to conductor. 4.3.1
Dimensions ofpillar type terminals (in mm)
Rated current, A Nominal thread dia, Min Dia of holes for conductor,
Min
5
3.54
15 4.5
30
6
3.5 2.53 0.6
7 4
Length of thread in pillar,

Min
Difference between dia of hole and nominal dia of screw, Max 4.3.2
Dimensions @screw
0.6
1.2
terminals
(in mm) 15
5
Requirements
4.1 Material _ Parts shall be made with the following materials: a) Base - Vitrified ceramic material or tough non-ignitable insulating material. b) Cover, switch-plate, dolly, pltsh button 481
Rated current, A Nominal thread dia, Min Length of screw under head,
Min
5
3.5
30
5
4 1.5
7 3
8.5 3
Length of thread in nut:

Min
SP : 21-1983
Difference between dia of head and thread part, Min Height of head, Min 4.4 Creepage Min. Distance
3.5
2.6 -
3.5 3 mm,
5.1.6 Over voltage and overcurrent capacity 130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated voltage, 10 times in succession at intervals of 30 seconds. 5.1.7 Endurance - 15 Ooo switch cycles for 5 and 15 amperes and 10 000 for 30 amperes. 5.1.8 5.1.9 5.1.10 Switches for inductive circuits Screws and connections Mechariical strength Shall not exceed and 1 percent for
and Clearance
Note 1 - For constructional details in respect of enclosures, cord grip, covers and switch plates, mounting of switches, current-carrying parts, operating cord, prevention against charring of base, and sealing compound, refer to 6 of rhe stundard.
Note 2 - For requirements regarding terminal and screws, and actuating mechanism, refer to 7 and 8 of the smndard. 5.
Tests Type Tests Visual examination
5.1.11 Water absorption 0.5 percent for ceramic material moulded insulating material. 5.1.12 Resistance to heat
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2 High voltage - Shall withstand ac voltage of 1 500 V rms for one minute under the sp.ecified test conditions. 5.1.3 Insulation resistance (dry) 100 megohms. 5.1.4 Moisture resistance ohms titer moisture treatment. Not less than
5.1.13 Tracking (applicable to moulded insulating materials only) - Tracking index not less than 175. 5.1.14 Cord grip
5.1.15 Resistance to rusting - Shall show no sign of rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride test. 5.1.16 Maximum pull - 50 N normal to plane of base and 75 N at 45 to plane of base. 5.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified to 5.1.6, 5.1.8, 5.1.10 and 5.1.16. 5.3 Routine and 5.1.2. Tests Tests specified in 5.1.1 in 5.1.1
Not less than 2 meg-
5.1.5 Contact resistance and temperature rise - Shall be capable of carrying rated current for half an hour without temperature rise of any part exceeding 25C.
Note-For
detailed
requirements
and methods
of tests, refer to 11 of the sfandurd.
For detailed purposes.
information,
refer to IS : 3854-1966
Specification
for switches
for
domestic
and similar
SUMMARY OF
IS : 4160-1967 INTERLOCKING
for interlocking type 1. Scope - Requirements switch socket outlets, rating up to 30A, suitable for use in ac and dc circuits at rated voltages up to 250 V. 2. 3. Standard Current Ratings 5, 15 and 30 A.
SWITCH SOCKET OUTLET

No. 1)
(With Amendment
b) Cover,
member material.
cover plates and of tough, non-ignitable
actuating insulating
cl Current
Recplirements Parts manufactured with following
carrying parts - of brass, copper, phosphor bronze, alurninium alloy, or other suitable material.
3.1 Material materials:
4 Springs - of corrosion resistant metal.

e) Attachment fittings, screws, non-current carrying parts - of mild steel, aluminium insulating material. 482 alloy or
a) Base - of vitrified ceramic material or tough non-ignitable moulded insulating material.
SP : 21-1983
3.2
Terminals - Shall allow a conductor to be connected without special preparation such as soldering of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure and without damage to conductor.
3.2.1 Dimensions ofpillar type terminals (in mm) 5 3.54 3.5 2.5 0.6 15 30 6 4.5 7 3 4 0.6 1.2
4.1.3 Interlocking action 4.1.4 Insulation resistance (dry) less than 100 megohms.
Shall not be
4.1.5 High voltage - Shall withstand ac voltage of 1 500 V rms for a period of one minute under the specified test. 4.1.6 Moisture resistance - Insulation tance shall not be less than 2 megohms. resis-
Rated current, A Nominal thread dia, Min Dia of hole for conductor, Min Length of thread in pillar, Min Difference between dia of hole and nominal dia of screw; Mar 3.2.2
Dimensions of screw type terminals (in mm) 5 3.5 4 1.5 3.5 2 15 30 5 5 7 8.5 3 3 5 5 3 3.5
4.1.7 Contact resistance and temperaturerise - Shall be capable of carrying rated current for half an hour without voltage drop in a switched pole of switch socket outlet measured from the terminal of the switch to the corresponding plug pin exceeding 0.1 volt and without temperature rise exceeding 25C. 4.1.8 Overvoltage and overcurrent cavacitv 130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated voltage 10 times in succession at intervals of 30 seconds. 4.1.9
4.1.10
Rated current, A Nominal thread dia, Min Length of screw under head, Min Length of thread in nut, Min Nominal difference between dia of head and threaded part, Min Height of head, Min
Endurance -
15 000 switch
cycles
for 5
and 15 A and 10 000 for 30 A.
3.3 Interlocking Mechanism - Moving member which locks the plug into the socket outlet shall not be more than 2 mm thick and shall not protrude more than 1.5 mm into the earthing pin of the plug. 3.4 Creepage than 3 mm. Distance and Clearance Not less
Test for switch socket outlets for ac inducScrews and connections Mechanical strength
tive circuits
4.1.11 4.1.12
Note 1 - For constructional details in respect of enclosures, covers andcover plates, mounting of switch socket outlet, current carrying parts, precautions against electrical contact, socket contacts, prevention against charring of base, sealing and holes, refer to 5 of the standard. Note 2 - For requirements regarding terminals and screws, and swtich actuating mechanism, refer to6 and7 of thesmndard.
4.1.13 Water absorption - Shall not exceed 0.5 percent for ceramic material and 1 percent for moulded insulating material. 4.1.14 Resistance to heat
4.1.15 Resistance to rusting - Shall show no sign of rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride test. 4.2 Acceptance Tests to 4.1.10 and 4.1.12. Tests Tests specified specified in 4.1.1 in 4.1.1
4. 4.1
Tests Type Tests Visual examination Dimensional check
4.1.1 4.1.2
4.3 Routine to 4.1.5.
Tests -
Note l-Test for tracking shall be applicable to mould insulating materials only and be carried out by manufacturer for proper selection of raw materials.
Note 2-For detailed requirements and methods of test, refer to 11 of the stmdard.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 4160-1967 Specification for interlocking switch socket outlet.
483
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 46151968 SWITCH SOCKET-OUTLETS (NON-INTERLOCKING TYPE)

(With Amendments No. 1 and 2) 3.3 Clearances and Creepage Distances than 3 mm. Not less
1. Scope - Requirements for switch socket-outlets of the non-interlocking type of the surface and flush type (shuttered and non-shuttered) having ratings up to 30 A and suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated voltage not exceeding 250 V.
2. 3.
Standard Current Ratings Requirements
5, 15 and 30 A.
Note 1 - For &mstmctional details in respect of enclosures, covers, cover plates, mounting of switch socketautlet, current carrying parts, precautions against electrical contact, earthing, socket contacts, prevention against charring of base, sealing and holes, refer to 5 of Phe standard. Note 2 - For requirements regarding terminals and screws, and switch actuating mechanism, refer to 6 and7 of the standard.
3.1
Materials - Parts shall be manufactured with following materials: a) Base - Vitritied ceramic material or tough non-ignitable moulded insulating material. cover plates and actuating b) Covers, member - Tough, non-ignitable insulating material. c) Current-carrying parts - Brass, copper, phosphor bronze, aluminium alloy, etc. d) Springs Corrosion resistant material.
4. 4.1
Tests
Type Tests Visual examination Dimensional check
4.1.1 4.1.2
4.1.3 Effectiveness of contact - Voltage drop between terminals of switch socket outlet and corresponding plug pin shall not exceed 25 and 60 millivolts in unswitched neutral pole and switched pole respectively. 4.1.4 Withdrawal pull - Between 3 to 60, 4 to 80 and 7 to 100 Newtons for 5, 15 and 30 A rating respectively, 4.1.5 Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms. (dry) Shall not be
e) Attachmentjttings, screws, non-currentcarrying parts - Mild steel, aluminium alloy or insulating material. 3.2 Terminals - Shall allow a conductor to be connected without special preparation such as soldering of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure and without damage to the conductor. 3.2.1 Dimensions ofpillar type terminals (in mm): 30 6 7 4 1.2
4.1.6 High voltage - Shall withstand ac voltage of 1 500 V rms for a period of one minute under specified test conditions. 4.1.7 Moisture resistance - Insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms after moisture treatment. 4.1.8 Contact resistance rise - Not mote than 25C. and temperature-
Rated current, A 5 15 3.5 4 Nominal thread dia, Min 4.5 Dia of hole for conductor, Min 3.5 Length of thread in pillar, Min 2.5 3 0.6 Difference between dia of hole 0.6 and nominal dia of screw, MUX 3.2.2 Dimensions of screw type terminals (in 15 5 Rated current, A 3.5 5 Nominal thread dia, Min 7 Length of screw under the 4 head, Min 3 Length of thread in nut, Min 1.5 Nominal difference between 3.5 5 dia of head and thread part, Min 2 3 Height of head, Min
mm): 30 5 8.5 3 5
4.1.9 Overvoltage and overcurrent capacity 130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated voltage, 10 times in succession at intervals of 30 seconds. 4.1.10 Endurance - 15 000 switch cycles 5 and 15 A and 10 000 for 30 A.
4.1.11 Switch socket-outlets for ac inductive circuits - 125 percent or rated current at 110 percent of rated voltage at 0.3 power factor, 100 times, at a rate approximate 7.5 switch cycles per minute. 484
3.5
SP : 21-1983
4.1.12 Screws and connections
sign of rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride

test. 4.1.17Endurance
4.1.13
Mechanical
strength
ofshutters
4.1.14 Water absorption
4.1.15 4.1.16
Resistance Resistance
to heat to rusting -
Shall show no
4.2 Acceptance Tests to 4.1.11 and 4.1.13. 4.3 Routine Tests - Tests specified in4.1.1,4.1.2, 4.1.5 and 4.1.6.
- 5 000 operations. Tests specified in 4.1.1
Note I-Test for tracking shall be applicable to mould insulating materials only and be carried out by manufacturer for Proper sektion of raw materials. \
Note 2-For
For &tailed
detailed requirements and methods of tests, refer to 10 of the standard.

information,
refer to IS : 4615-1968 Specification for switch socket-outlets (non-inrertockiw
type).
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4649-1968 ADAPTORS FOR FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUITS

Scope - Requirements for adaptors of clamp and solid types for flexible steel conduits intended for the protection of cables in electrical installations. Adaptors are used for connecting flexible metallic conduits to a rigid conduit or its fitting. Flexible steel conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor. 1.
2.5
Dimensions
(in mm)
2.
Requirements Malleable iron.
6.5 10 16 25 40 63 100 Nominal internal dia of flexible conduit External dia in 9 13 20 31 46 70 108 normal position, MaX Turns per metre in 315 235 200 160 100 100 100 normal position,
Min
2.1 Material -
2.2 Shall be protected against corrosion, both inside and outside, excluding machined surfaces and screw threads. Stoved enamel; airdrying paint; and electrolytic deposits. b) Heavy protection - t-lot-dip galvanized coating; sherardising.
Examples a) Medium protection
Depth of engage- 10 ment between and conduit adaptor, Min
15 15 25 30 35 45
Note - Tolerances on internal dia shall be (+0.5 and -0.0) and(+ 1.0 and-0.0) for nominaidiarange6.5 to 25 and40to 100 respectively.
3.
3.1
Tests Type Tests
2.3 Shall be fitted with external earthing lug with hole to accommodate not less than 4 mm* earthing wire. The lug shall be tapped and fitted with a headed clamping screw. Alternately, a headed earthing screw and washer shall be fitted to the solid portion. 2.4 Workmanship - Shall be free from burrs or sharp edges and edges of turns of fins shall be well-formed.
Note-For test details, refer to 10 of the standard.
a) Visual examination, b) Dimensional check, and c) Test for protective-coating (for medium and heavy protection). 3.2
Acceptance Tests
a) Visual examination, and b) Dimensional check.
refer to IS : 4649-1968 Specjjication for adaptors for flexible steel conduits. 485
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 4949-1968 2-AMP SWITCHES FOR DOMESTIC AND SIMILAR PURPOSES

(With Amendments 1. Scope - Requirements for manually operated 2-Amp single pole one-way switches, such as tumbler, push button, bell push and other types for domestic and similar purposes, for incorporation in cords, lampholders or for mounting on or in appliances or accessories where tappings cannot be taken, suitable for use on ac or dc circuits at rated voltages not exceeding 250 V. These switches shall not be used for wall mounting, where tappings can be taken. 2. Requirements with No. 1 and 2)
Note 1 - For amspuctional details in respect of enclosures, cord grip, covers and switch plates, current carrying pans and prevention against charring of base, refer to 4 of the srundard.
Note 2 - For requirements regarding terminals and screws, and actuating mechanism, refer to 5 and 6 of the srandard.
3. 3.1
Tests Type Tests Visual examination
3.1.1
2.1 Material - Parts shall be manufactured following materials:
a) Base - Tough, non-ignitable insulating material or vitrified ceramic material. b) Cover, switch-plate, dolly, push button Tough non-ignitable insulating material. C) Current-carrying parts - Brass, copper, phosphor bronze, aluminium or silver alloy. d) Spring - Corrosion-resistant metal. e) Attachmentjttings, screws, non-current carrying parrs - Mild steel, aluminium alloy or insulating material. 2.2 Terminals and Screws
3.1.2 High voltage - Shall withstand ac voltage of 1 500 V rms for a period of one minute under the specified test conditions. 3.1.3 Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms. 3.1.4 Moisture resistance ohms after moisture treatment. (dry) Shall not be
Not less than 2 megtemperature0.075 V and
3.1.5 Contact resistance and rise - Voltage drop not exceeding temperature rise not more than 25C.
2.2.1 Terminals shall allow conductor to be connected without special preparation, such as soldering of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. 2.2.2 Dimensions of pillar Qpe terminals 3 mm, Min, 3 mm, Min 2 mm, Min 0.6 mm, MUX
3.1.6 Overvoltage and overcurrent capacig 130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated voltage 10 times in sucession at intervals of 30 seconds. 3.1.7 Endurance - 15 000 cycles at a rate not exceeding 6 cycles/minute. 3.1.8 3.1.9 Screws and connections Mechanical strength Shall not exceed and 1 percent for
Nominal thread dia Dia of hole for conductor Length of thread in pillar Difference between dia of hole and nominal dia of screw 2.2.3 Dimensions
of screw terminals 3 mm, Min 3.5 mm, Min 1.5 mm, Min 3.0 mm, Min 1.8 mm, Mitt
3.1.10 Water absorption 0.5 percent for ceramic material moulded insulating material. 3.1.11 3.1.12 Resistance Cord grip to heat
Nominal thread dia Length of screw under head Length of thread in nut or fixed pa* Nominal difference between dia of head and threaded part Height of head
3.1.13 Resistance to rusting - Shall show no sign of rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride test. 3.1.14 Test with ac inductive circuits specified in 3.1.1
2.2.4 Screws for gripping conductor shall be rounded or chamfered at ends, so as to prevent damage to conductor. 2.3 Creepage Distances and Clearance than 3 mm. Not less
3.2 Acceptance. Tests - Tests to 3.1.6, 3.1.9 and 3.1.14. 3.3 Routine and 3.1.2. 486 Tests -Tests
specified
in 3.1.1
SP : 21-1983
Note-
For detailed
requirements
and methods
of tests, refer to 9 of the s!andurd.
For detailed
information,
refer
to IS : 4949-1968
Specification
for 2-Amp switches for domestic and
similar purposes.
SUMMAHY OF
IS : 5133 (PART I)-1969 BOXES FOR ENCLOSURE OF ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

PART I STEEL AND CAST IRON BOXES 3. Dimensions (in mm) Width, External Ma-X Depth, Internal 1. Scope - Requirements for boxes made of steel or cast iron intended to contain one or more electrical accessories and to be recessed into a wall or ceiling or similar flat surfaced structure. Such boxes may also be suitable for surface mounting.
Length, External
Max 75
100 135 180 195 260 135 180 195 260 300
75
100 75 100 75 100 135 180 135 180 200
35,
50
2.
Requirements with four fixing lugs
2.1 Boxes shall be provided which shall be threaded M5.
2.2 Knockouts in boxes for receptio? of conduits shall be nominal conduit size +0.25 mm with a tolerance of -0.00 f0.50 mm. 2.3 Protection Against Corrosion - Shall be protected both inside and outside excluding machined surfaces and screw threads.
50, 65 35, 50 50, 65 50, 65, 50, 65 65, 100 50, 65 65, 100 100
3.1 Tolerance (in mm) - On depth, _+1 for depth 35 and + 2 for depth 50 and above.
Note 1 - The minimum thickness of walls and base of boxes shall be 1.12 and 3.0 mm for steel and cast iron materials respectively. Note 2 - For detailed dimensions Table 1 with Fig. 1 of rhe standard. and tolerances, refer to
Examples a) Medium protection -
Stoved enamel, drying paint and electrolytic deposit.
air 4.
Tests Type Tests a) b) c) d) Visual examination, Dimensional check, Test for mechanical strength of lugs, and Test for protection against corrosion (for medium and heavy protection).
b) Heavy protection - Hot-dip galvanized coating and sherardizing . 2.4 Holes, not less than 5 mm shall be provided in the base of the box for securing it to a mounting surface. 2.5 Protective Earthing - Provision shall be made for an earthing terminal inside the box. The terminal shall be protected against corrosion and shall be metallically clean.
Note-For test details, refer to 6 of fhe standard.
4.1
4.2
Acceptance Test
a) Visual examination, b) Dimensional check, and c) Test for mechanical strength of lugs. -
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5133 (Part I)-1969 Specification for boxes for enclosure of electrical accessories: Part I Steel and cast iron boxes.
487
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 5133 (PART II)-1969 BOXES FORENCLOSURE ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

PART II BOXES MADE OF INSULATING Length, External Ma-X 180 195 260 300 MATERIAL Width, External Max 180 135 180 200 1. Scope - Requirements for boxes made of insulating material intended to contain one or more electrical accessories and to be recessed into a wall or ceiling or similar flat surfaced structure. Such boxes may also be suitable for surface mounting. 2. Requirements
OF
Depth, Internal 65, 100 50, 65 65, 100 100
2.1 Boxes shall be provided with four fixing lugs threaded M5, and located at the comers. 2.2 Holes not less than 5 mm shall be provided in the base of the box for securing it to a mounting surface. 2.3 Holes for reception of conduits shall be nominal conduits size +0.25 mm with a tolerance of - 0.00 f 0.50 mm. 2.4 Thickness of Walls and Basemm. 3. Dimensions (in mm) Not less than 2
3.1 Tolerance (in mm) - On depth, +-1 for depth 35 and f2 for depth 50 and above.
Note - For detaileddimensions and tolerances, refer to Table 1 with Fig. 1 of the standard.
4.
4.1
Tests Type Tests Testfor dimensions strength of lugs and
4.1.1 4.1.2 boxes
Test for mechanical
Length, External Mar 75

100
W&h, External Max 75

100
Depth, Internal 35, 50 50, 65 35, 50

50, 50 65 50, 65
4.1.3 Testfor water absorption - Water absorption shall not exceed 1 percent for moulded insulating material. 4.1.4 Test for stability at high temperature There shall be no appreciable distortion of box after the prescribed test at a temperature of 55f3C for a period of 48 hours. 4.2 Acceptance and 4.1.2. Tests Tests specified in 4.1.1
135 180
195 260 135
75
100 75 100 135
65
Note-For
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5133 (Part II)-1969 Specification for boxes for enclosure of electrical accessories: Part II Boxes made of insulating materlal.
488
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 6538-1971 THREE-PIN PLUGS MADE OF RESILIENT MATERIAL

(With Amendments No. 1 to 3)
1. Scope - Requirements and tests for three-pin (two-pole and earthing-pin) plugs having the base and cover, or either of these components, constructed of rubber or other suitable resilient material and suitable for use in ac and dc circuits having voltage up to 250V.
Note - These are intended to be used with socket-outlets conforming to IS : 1293-1967*. Note - For detaileddimensionsand tolerances, refer to Table 1 of the standard.
3.2.3 Terminals and Screws - The design shall allow a conductor to be connected without special preparations, such as soldering, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. When pillar type terminals are used, their dimensions shall be as follows: Current rating Nom thread dia, Min Dia of hole for conductor,
Min 3.5 mm
2. 3.
3.1
Standard Ratings Requirements Materials:
5 and 15 A.
15 A 4.0mm 3.5 mm 4.0mm
5A
a) Plug base and cover - of rubber (hardness <85 IRHD) or tough non-ignitable insulating material. b) Pins, terminals, current-carrying parts - of phosphor-bronze, brass, aluminium alloy, etc. c) Non-currentcarrying parts - of mild steel, aluminium alloy, or insulating material. 3.2
Construction 3.2.1 During insertion of plug into socket-outlet, it shall not be possible to touch a live pin after contact has been established between pins and socket contacts. Earthing pin shall make and break contact respectively before and after the associated current-carrying pins make and break contact with corresponding contacts.
Length of thread in pillar,

Min
2.5 mm 3.0mm 0.6 mm 0.6mm
Difference between dia of hole and nominal dia of screw, Max 3.3
Ageing -
Plugs shall be resistant to ageing. Not less
3.4 Clearances and Creepage Distances than 3.0 mm.
Note - For consnuctional requirements of three-pin plugs with regardto aspects such as earthing,plug cover and base, pins, cord entry and cordgrip, current-canying parts, finger grip, plugs with integralflexible cord. and terminalsand screws, referto 5 of he standard.
4.
4.1
Tests Type Tests
3.2.2
Dimensions ofplugs(in mm)-
SeeTable 1.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF PLUGS

cURIWNT RATING
A
5
i) Distance between earthing-pin and current-carrying pin (centre to centre) ii) Distance between current-canying pins (centre to centre) iii) Dia of earthing-pin iv) Dia of current-carrying pin v) Projection of current-carrying pins from plug face vi) Projection of earthing-pin from plug face
A 22.2
15 A 28.6
19.1 7.06 5.08 15.9 20.6
25.4 8.71 7.06 20.6 28.6
Visual examination, Test for interchangeability, Test for effectiveness of contact, Test for insulation resistance (dry), High voltage test, 0 Test for moisture resistance, iz) Temperature-rise test, h) Breaking capacity test, 8 Test for mechanical strength, k) Ageing test, m) Plug pin deflection test, n) Test for water absorption, P) Test for screws and connections (not applicable for moulded-on type plugs), Test for cord grip, :; Test for resistance to heat, and s) Test for resistance to rust. a) b) d 4 e) 4.2 Acceptance Tests - Tests specified in (a) to (j) of 4.1. 4.3 Routine Tests - Tests specified in (a), (b) and (e) of 4.1.
489
I
*Speciticarion for three-pin plugs and socket-outlets yirst
revision).
SP : 21-1983
Cfirsf
For detailed information, material.
Note-For test details, refer to 9 of the standard and IS : 1293-1967 Specification for three-pin plugs and socket-outlets revision). -_-
refer to IS : 6538-1971
Specification
for
three-pin plugs made of resilient
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 6946-1973 PLIABLE CONDUITS AND FLEXIBLE CONDUITS (NON-METALLIC) FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Scope - Requirements for pliable conduits and flexible conduits (non-metallic), plain or with corrugated walls (with or without non-metallic reinforcement) manufactured from unplasticized PVC or copolymer or other suitable non-metallic material, intended for the enclosure and protection of cables used in wiring of electrical installations, and suitable for working temperatures between -5C and -t6OC.
Note L- May be used forcircuit voltages not exceeding 650 V.
1.
2.2 Material and Workmanship - Shall be manufactured from self-extinguishing plastic materials and shall ensure reliable mechanical protection to the cables and withstand the stresses likely to occur during transport, storage and installation. 2.3 Mechanical Strength - Shall show no crack or deformation when bent or compressed, or exposed to impacts or e.xtreme temperatures, either during or after installation. 2.4 Resistance to Heat Shall be resistant to heat.
2.
Requirements
Size designated by
Dimensions (in mm) nominal outside diameter.
2.1
2.5 Electrical Characteristics - Shall pass tests for dielectric strength and insulation resistance. 3. Tests temperature. 3.1 Shall be made at the prevailing ambient
Nominal Size mm
Outside Diameter mm
Preferred Deliverf Coil Lengtks, 5 50 25 25 20 15 15
Type Tests a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) j) k) Test for checking Bending test Test for resistance Test for resistance Test for resistance Test for electrical Test for resistance Test for resistance Copper test Test for resistance of dimensions to heat to impact to crushing characteristics to combustion to chemical action to oil Tests specified in (a), (d),
16 20 25 32 40 50 63
16+0 -0.3 20+0 -0.3 25+0 -0.4 32+0 -0.4 40+0 -0.4 50+0 -0.5 63+0 -0.5
3.2 Acceptance Tests (f) and (g) of 3.1. 3.3 Routine Tests sions.
Test for checking
of dimen-
Note-For
details of tests, refer to 5 of the standard.
refer to IS : 6946-1973 Specification for pliable conduits and flexible conduits
(non-metallic) for electrical installations.

490
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY OF
IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 CONDUITS

PART II
FOR ELECTRICAL
WIRING
RIGID STEEL CONDUITS
1. Scope - Requirements and methods of test of threaded/threadable plain rigid steel conduits.
2.
4.
Dimensions
Nominal Size of Conduit (Outside Diameter) Tolerance on Outside Diameter Wall Thickness of Conduits
General Requirements - Conduits shall be so designed and constructed that they ensure reliable mechanical protection to conductors and/or cables contained therein. Conduit shall withstand stresses likely to occur during transport, storage, recommended practice and usage. Classification
mm 16 20 25 32
mm 0 -0.3 0 -0.3 0 -0.4 0 -0.4 0 -0.4 0 -0.5 0 -0.6
mm 1.4 to 1.8 1.4 to 1.8 1.4 to 1.8 1.4 to 1.8 1.6 to 2.2 1.6 to 2.2
.
3. 3.1
According to Resistance against Corrosine or Polluting substances:
a) Conduits with low protection, 40 b) Conduits with medium protection, c) Conduits with high protection, d) Conduits with high protection on the outside and low protection inside, e) Conduits with medium protection outside and low protection inside, and f) Conduits with high protection outside and medium protection inside.
Note 1 - Normally, protection mentioned at @) and (c) a~ commonly used. Note 2 - Typical examples of medium protection are stem enamelfing, air drying point and electrolytic deposits. Note 3 -Typical examples of high protection are hot-dip galvanized coating and sherardizing.
SO 63
1.6 to 2.2
4.1 Length - Conduits shall be supplied in straight lengths of 3 to 5 metres. 5. Construction - The inside and outside surfaces of conduits shall be reasonably smooth and free from burrs, flash and similar defects. The conduits shall be solid drawn or seam joined by welding. 6. Mechanical Properties
3.2
According to Mechanical Properties:
6.1 Bending Test - After the test, basic material or protective coating of conduits shall not show any cracks visible by normal or corrected vision without magnification. Seams, if any, shall not have opened, and section of conduit shah not have distorted unduly. 6.2 Compression Test - The difference between the initial diameter and diameter of flattened samples shall not exceed 10 percent of outside diameter measured before the test.
a) b) c) d) e)
Conduits for very light mechanical stmsses, Conduits for light mechanical stresses, Conduits for medium mechanical stresses, Conduits for heavy mechanical stresses, and Conduits for very heavy mechanical stresses.
Note l-For requirements regarding gauge for checking minimum and maximum outside diameter of conduits, measurement of thickness and screw threads, refer to the standard. Note 2-For test details and provisions regarding external influences, refer to the standard and IS : 9537 (Part I);1980 Specification for conduits for electrical installations: Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 Specification for conduits for electrical wiring: Part II Rigid steel conduits.
491
SECTION
28
GENERAL
SP : 21-1983
CONTENTS
Title IS : 1911-1967 Schedule of unit weights of building materials (first revision) Page 495
494
SP : 21-1983
SUMMARY
OF
IS : 1911-1967 SCHEDULE OF UNIT WEIGHTS OF BUILDING MATERIALS (First Revision)

Scope - Lays down unit weights of materials and parts or components used in buildings construction. The unit weights of other materials that are likely to be stored in a building are also specified in the standard for the purpose of load calculations. 2. Building Materials - Table 1 of the standard gives the unit weights of the following individual building materials used in building construction: Acoustical Aggregate, Aggregate, Aggregate, Asbestos Asbestos cement building pipes Asbestos cement gutters Asbestos cement pressure pipes Asbestos cement sheeting Bitumen Blocks Boards Bricks Brick chips and broken bricks Brick dust (SUZNZ-ZZ) Cast iron, manhole covers Cast iron, manhole frames Cast iron pipes Cement Cement concrete, plain Cement concrete, reinforced Cement concrete pipes Cement concrete, prestressed Cement mortar Cement plaster Cork Expanded metal Felt, bituminous for water-proofing and damp-proofing Foam slag, foundry pumice Glass 495 Ceilings Cement concrete, plain Cement concrete, reinforced Damp-proofing Earth filling 4. Store and Miscellaneous Materials - Unit weights of the following store and miscellaneous materials intended for dead load calculations and other general purposes are given in Appendix A of the standard. Agricultural and food products Chemicals and allied materials Finishing Flooring Roofing Walling 3. Building Parts and Components - Table 2 of the standard gives the unit weights of the following building parts or components: materials coarse fine organic
1.
Gutter, asbestos cement Gypsum Iron Lime Linoleum Mastic asphalt Masonry brick Masonry stone Metal sheeting, protected Mortar Pipes Plaster Sheeting Slagwool Soil and gravels Steel sections Stones Tar, coal Terra cotta Terrazzo Tiles Timber Water Wood-wool building slabs
SP : 21-1983
Fuels Manures
--
Metals and alloys Miscellaneous materials
Ores
refer to IS : 1911-1967 Schedule of unit weights of building materials (first
496

SP21

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SP21

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SUMltiARIES OF INDIAN STANDARDS FOR BUILDING MATERIALS

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

SUMMARIES OF INDIAN STANDARDS FOR BUILDING MATERIALS

NEW DELHI 110002

UDC 691: 006*3/4

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

*Printed. tUnder print.

CEMENT AND CONCRETE

Standard sand for testingof cement (first revision)

ASBESTOS IS:459-1970 IS : 1592-1980 IS: 1626

Size and Grading

3.1 Single-Sized Aggregates - shall

value shall not exceed 30

be supplied given in the following tdble:

Passing for Single-Sized h 20 mm

16 mm 100 85-100 O-30 o-5 -

12.5 mm IO0 85-100 o-45 O-IO -

10 mm I% 85-100 O-20 o-5

100 85-100 o- 30 o-5 o-5 -

100 85-100 O-20 o-5 -

S:?OO -O-20 o-5 -

Passing for Graded Aggregate Hk

of Nominal Size 16 mm 12.5 mm \

100 95-100 30-70

100 90-100 30-70 O-IO -

100 90-100 40-85 O-10 -

Percentage Passing 90-100 O-10 90- 100

Percentage Passing ,for All-inAggregate of Nominal Size 40 mm -?zL-

160 mm 80 mm 80 mm 40 mm 40 mm 20 mm 20 mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm

80 mm 40 mm 20 mm 4.75 mm 600 micron 150 micron

100 95-100 45-75 25-45 8-30 O-6

100 95-100 30-50 IO-35 O-6

O-10 90-100 O-10 90- 100 O-IO o-2

IO mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm 1.18 mm 600 micron

100 90-100 60-95 30-70 15-34 5-20 O-IO -

100 90-100 75-100 55-90 35-59 8-30 O-IO

1oq 90-100 85-100 75-100 60-79 12-40 O-10

100 95-100 95-100 90-100 80-100 15-50 O-15

for coarse and fine aggregates

IS : 650-1966 STANDARD SAND FOR TESTING OF CEMENT (First Revision)

2.1 Sand shall be of quartz, variety. 2.2

Sand shall be free from silt.

testing of cement (first

AND LOW HEAT PORTLAND

Not greater than

I .02 and not less than 0.66

methods of tests, refer to IS analysis of hydraulic cement.

For detailed infgrmation,

IS : 455-1976 PORTLAND SLAG CEMENT (Third Revision)

Packed in bags of 50 kg net. TOlemIlCe

not less than

methods of tests, refel to IS : 4031-1968 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic

For detailed inforkhion,

refer to IS : 4.55-1976 Specification for Portland slag cement (third revision).

IS : 1489- 1976 PORTLAND-POZZOLANA (Second Revision)

4.1 Firzowss 3 000 cm/g.

Specific surface shall not be less than

Not more than 0.15 percent.

5.0 6.0 2.0 (loo100

(SO,), percent by mass

Note-For methods of tests, refer to IS chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.

For detailed information,

Specification for Portland-pozzolana

_ _~_.____ _----_...-. refer to IS : 6909-1973 Specification for supersulphated cement.

- See Table 1. _.___